Toshiba 2050C 2550C 2551C Service Manual PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
e-STUDIO2051C/2551C
Model: FC-2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C
Publish Date: May 2012
File No. SME120010I0
R120121L1805-TTEC
Ver09 F_2015-05
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 8 is Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft
products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, Mac, Mac OS, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc. in
the US and other countries.
• Adobe, Acrobat, Reader, and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
• Mozilla, Firefox and the Firefox logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mozilla Foundation
in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM, AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• NOVELL, NetWare and NDS are trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the US.
• FLOIL is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei Ltd. CORPORATION.
• Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• Kapton is a registered trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
• TopAccess is a trademark of Toshiba Tec Corporation.
• Other company and product names given in this manual or displayed in this software may be the
trademarks oftheir respective companies.
© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR
THIS EQUIPMENT
The installation and service shall be done by a qualified service
technician.
1. Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to hold the
positions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 60 kg (132.27 lb.), therefore pay full
attention when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when
transporting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/15A, 120V/12A, 220-240V/8A for its power
source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 30
cm (11.8”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 20 cm (7.9”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
- If the unpacking place and where the equipment is to be installed differ, perform image quality
adjustment (automatic gamma adjustment) according to the temperature and humidity of the
place of installation and the paper to be used.
2. General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a antistatic
wrist strap since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the antistatic wrist strap, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the fuser unit, damp heater and areas
around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, high-voltage transformer, and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these
components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc.
on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, and fans).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
- Do not leave plastic bags where children can get at them. This may cause an accident such as
suffocation if a child puts his/her head into a bag. Plastic bags of options or service parts must be
brought back.
- There is a risk of an electric shock or fire resulting from the damage to the harness covering or
conduction blockage. To avoid this, be sure to wire the harness in the same way as that before
disassembling when the equipment is assembled/disassembled.
3. General operations
- Check the procedures and perform them as described in the Service Manual.
- Make sure you do not lose your balance.
- Avoid exposure to your skin and wear protective gloves as needed.
4. Important Service Parts for Safety

- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as explosion or burnout. Avoid short-circuiting and do not use parts not
recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
5. Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels to see if there is any dirt
on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[1] Identification label

[2] Warning for high temperature area (fuser unit)
[3] Warning for high temperature area
[4] Machine serial number label
6. Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used
batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
ALLEGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN IN BEZUG
AUF DIE WARTUNG FÜR e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/
2551C
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten Service-
Techniker durchzuführen.
1. Transport/Installation
- Zum Transportieren/Installieren des Gerätes werden 2 Personen benötigt. Nur an den in der
Abbildung gezeigten Stellen tragen.
Das Gerät ist sehr schwer und wiegt etwa 60 kg; deshalb muss bei der Handhabung des Geräts
besonders aufgepasst werden.
- Beim Transportieren des Geräts nicht an den beweglichen Teilen oder Einheiten (z.B. das
Bedienungsfeld, die Duplexeinheit oder die automatische Dokumentenzuführung) halten.
- Eine spezielle Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 110V/15A, 120V/12A, 220-240V/8A als
Stromquelle verwenden.
- Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden.
- Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher
Luftfeuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
- Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen, da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt.
- Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 20 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
- Das Gerät ist in der Nähe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
- Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit
niemand darüber stolpern kann.
- Falls der Auspackungsstandort und der Installationsstandort des Geräts verschieden sind, die
Bildqualitätsjustierung (automatische Gammajustierung) je nach der Temperatur und
Luftfeuchtigkeit des Installationsstandorts und der Papiersorte, die verwendet wird, durchführen.
2. Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen in bezug auf die Wartung
- Während der Wartung das Gerät ausschalten und das Netzkabel herausziehen (ausser Wartung,
die bei einem eingeschalteten Gerät, durchgeführt werden muss).
- Das Netzkabel herausziehen und den Bereich um die Steckerpole und die Steckdose die
Umgebung in der Nähe von den Steckerzacken und der Steckdose wenigstens einmal im Jahr
reinigen. Wenn Staub sich in dieser Gegend ansammelt, kann dies ein Feuer verursachen.
- Wenn die Teile auseinandergenommen werden, wenn nicht anders in diesem Handbuch usw
erklärt, ist das Zusammenbauen in umgekehrter Reihenfolge durchzuführen. Aufpassen, dass
kleine Teile wie Schrauben, Dichtungsringe, Bolzen, E-Ringe, Stern-Dichtungsringe,
Kabelbäume nicht an den verkehrten Stellen eingebaut werden.
- Grundsätzlich darf das Gerät mit enfernten oder auseinandergenommenen Teilen nicht in
Betrieb genommen werden.
- Das PC-Board muss in einer Anti-elektrostatischen Hülle gelagert werden. Nur Mit einer
Manschette bei Betätigung eines Armbandes anfassen, sonst könnte es sein, dass die
integrierten Schaltkreise durch statische Elektrizität beschädigt werden.
Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Betätigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel des
Gerätes herausziehen und prüfen, dass es in der Nähe keine geladenen
Gegenstände, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Fixiereinheit, die Heizquelle und die
umliegenden Bereiche, berühren.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, das Transferband, die zweite
Transferwalze, die Entwicklereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator und das Netzgerät,
berühren. Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden, da die
Kondensatoren usw. auch nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein
können.
- Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante
Bereiche, wie Zahnräder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben und Lüfter) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät
sich nicht bedienen lässt.
- Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige
Komponenten befinden können.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden.
- Ausschließlich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
- Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgeräte verwenden.
- Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gerät in den ursprünglichen Zustand zurück
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb überprüfen.
- Das berührungsempfindliche Bedienungsfeld stets vorsichtig handhaben und keinen Stößen
aussetzen. Wenn die Oberfläche beschädigt wird, kann dies zu Funktionsstörungen führen.
- Bewahren Sie Kunststofftüten kindersicher auf. Es besteht Erstickungsgefahr, wenn sich Kinder
beim Spielen eine Kunststofftüte über den Kopf ziehen. Bitte nehmen Sie die Kunststofftüten von
Optionen oder Serviceparts wieder zurück.
- Wenn der Schutzmantel eines Kabels oder die Steckerisolierung beschädigt werden, besteht
Brandgefahr oder die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags. Um dies zu vermeiden, sollten Kabel in
der gleichen Weise verlegt werden, wie sie vor der Demontage/dem Transport verlegt waren.
3. Allgemeine Sicherheïtsmassnahmen
- Die Verfahren sind zu überprüfen und wie im Wartungshandbuch beschrieben durchzüfuhren.
- Vorsichtig, dass Sie nicht umfallen.
- Um Aussetzung zur Haut zur vermeiden, tragen Sie wenn nötig Schutzhandschuhe.
4. Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
- Der Leistungsschutzschalter, der Türschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die
Thermosicherung, der Thermistor, der Akkus, die IC-RAMs einschließlich der Lithiumakkus usw.
sind besonders sicherheitsrelevant. Sie müssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert
werden. Wenn diese Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfähig werden, kann dies zu
schwerwiegenden Schäden, wie einer Explosion oder einem Abbrand, führen. Kurzschlüsse sind
zu vermeiden, und es sind ausschließlich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba TEC
Corporation empfohlen sind.
5. Warnetiketten
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der
Wartungsarbeiten abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH
VOLTAGE“ („VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG“), „CAUTION. LASER BEAM“ („VORSICHT,
LASER“) usw.], um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät
angebracht sind.
6. Entsorgung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs
- In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und
Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs, einschließlich Lithiumakkus, sind die
einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
CONTENTS
1. FEATURE...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Main Feature of this equipment......................................................................................... 1-1
2. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 2-1
2.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Copy .................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3 Print ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.4 Scan................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.5 Internet Fax........................................................................................................ 2-8
2.1.6 SSD/HDD Memory Map..................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.7 Network Fax (Option)....................................................................................... 2-10
2.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 System List...................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.3.1 20ppm/25ppm .................................................................................................. 2-12
2.3.2 LL20ppm/LL25ppm.......................................................................................... 2-14
2.4 Supplies .......................................................................................................................... 2-15
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Sectional View................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Front side........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Rear side ........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Electric Parts Layout ......................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components ............................................................ 3-15
3.3.1 Motors, fans ..................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.2 Sensors and switches...................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.3 Electromagnetic spring clutches ...................................................................... 3-18
3.3.4 Solenoids ......................................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 PC boards........................................................................................................ 3-18
3.3.6 Lamps and heaters .......................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.7 Thermistors, thermostats ................................................................................. 3-19
3.3.8 Others .............................................................................................................. 3-20
3.4 Copy Process.................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO2040C/2540C/3040C/3540C/4540 ..................................... 3-22
3.6 General Operation........................................................................................................... 3-24
3.6.1 Overview of Operation ..................................................................................... 3-24
3.6.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-25
3.6.3 Detection of Abnormality.................................................................................. 3-29
3.6.4 Hibernation function......................................................................................... 3-37
3.7 Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 3-38
3.7.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-38
3.8 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.8.2 Construction..................................................................................................... 3-41
3.8.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-42
3.8.5 Process of detection of original size ................................................................ 3-45
3.9 Writing Section ................................................................................................................ 3-47
3.9.2 General description of LED printer head ......................................................... 3-48
3.9.3 LED printer head lifting mechanism ................................................................. 3-49
3.9.4 Driving Section................................................................................................. 3-50
3.10 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 3-54
3.10.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-54
3.10.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-55
© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C
CONTENTS
1
3.10.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-56
3.11 Process Unit Related Section ......................................................................................... 3-63
3.11.1 General description.......................................................................................... 3-63
3.11.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-65
3.11.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-66
3.11.4 Drum driving sleep mode ................................................................................. 3-68
3.12 Developer Unit ................................................................................................................ 3-69
3.12.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-70
3.12.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-71
3.12.4 Functions of the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG) ......................................... 3-72
3.12.5 Waste toner box............................................................................................... 3-73
3.13 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.13.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-74
3.13.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-75
3.14 Image Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 3-76
3.15 Fuser unit / Paper exit section......................................................................................... 3-77
3.15.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-78
3.15.3 Electric Circuit Description............................................................................... 3-79
3.16 Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU)..................................................................................... 3-84
3.16.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-85
3.16.3 Drive of ADU.................................................................................................... 3-86
3.16.4 Description of Operations ................................................................................ 3-87
3.17 Power Supply Unit........................................................................................................... 3-89
3.17.2 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-89
3.17.3 Operation of DC Output Circuits ...................................................................... 3-90
3.17.4 Output Channel................................................................................................ 3-92
3.17.5 Fuse................................................................................................................. 3-93
4. DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT........................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Covers............................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Front cover......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Left cover ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Receiving tray .................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Tray rear cover .................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.5 Left top cover ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.6 Left rear cover.................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.7 Right top cover................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.8 Right front cover ................................................................................................ 4-3
4.1.9 Right rear cover ................................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.10 Front top cover................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.11 Front right cover................................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.12 Rear top cover ................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.13 Rear cover ......................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.14 Front cover switch (SW1) .................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.15 Front cover interlock switch (SW2) .................................................................... 4-6
4.2 Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.1 Control panel unit............................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.2 KEY board ......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.3 DSP board ......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.4 Touch panel ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3 Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Original glass ................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.2 Lens cover ....................................................................................................... 4-11
e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
2
4.3.3 Automatic original detection sensor-1, -2 (S24, S25) ...................................... 4-12
4.3.4 Lens unit/CCD driving PC board...................................................................... 4-12
4.3.5 Carriage home position sensor (S23) .............................................................. 4-14
4.3.6 Exposure lamp (EXP) ...................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.7 Scan motor (M1) .............................................................................................. 4-16
4.3.8 Platen sensor (S21, S22)................................................................................. 4-17
4.3.9 Carriage-1........................................................................................................ 4-17
4.3.10 Carriage wire, carriage-2 ................................................................................. 4-19
4.3.11 Scanner damp heater ...................................................................................... 4-23
4.4 LED Unit.......................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.4.1 LED Tray.......................................................................................................... 4-24
4.4.2 Discharge LED................................................................................................. 4-27
4.4.3 LED printer head.............................................................................................. 4-28
4.4.4 LED spacer ...................................................................................................... 4-34
4.5.1 Bypass unit ...................................................................................................... 4-35
4.5.2 Bypass feed roller ............................................................................................ 4-37
4.5.3 Bypass separation pad .................................................................................... 4-38
4.5.4 Paper width detection PC board (S17) ............................................................ 4-39
4.5.5 Bypass feed sensor (S16) ............................................................................... 4-40
4.5.6 Bypass paper feed clutch (CLT4) .................................................................... 4-41
4.5.7 Drawer feed roller ............................................................................................ 4-41
4.5.8 Drawer separation pad .................................................................................... 4-42
4.5.9 1st drawer empty sensor (S5).......................................................................... 4-42
4.5.10 1st drawer size detection switch-1, -2 (SW6, SW7)......................................... 4-43
4.5.11 1st drawer detection switch (SW8) .................................................................. 4-43
4.5.12 Side cover switch (SW5).................................................................................. 4-44
4.5.13 Registration sensor (S19), feed sensor (S20) ................................................. 4-44
4.5.14 Registration clutch (CLT1) ............................................................................... 4-46
4.5.15 Registration roller............................................................................................. 4-47
4.5.16 Paper feed drive gear ...................................................................................... 4-48
4.6 Developer Unit, Cleaner.................................................................................................. 4-50
4.6.1 Waste toner box............................................................................................... 4-50
4.6.2 Developer unit.................................................................................................. 4-50
4.6.3 Developer material........................................................................................... 4-51
4.6.4 Doctor blade .................................................................................................... 4-57
4.6.5 Auto-toner sensor (S1, S2, S3, S4) ................................................................. 4-57
4.6.6 Development sleeve ........................................................................................ 4-58
4.6.7 Mixer ................................................................................................................ 4-60
4.6.8 Cleaner unit ..................................................................................................... 4-61
4.6.9 Main charger.................................................................................................... 4-62
4.6.10 Drum ................................................................................................................ 4-63
4.6.11 Drum cleaning blade ........................................................................................ 4-64
4.6.12 Waste toner unit gear ...................................................................................... 4-65
4.6.13 Main charger grid............................................................................................. 4-65
4.6.14 Main charger cleaner ....................................................................................... 4-66
4.6.15 Needle electrode.............................................................................................. 4-66
4.6.16 New/old drum detection switches (SW9, SW10, SW11, SW12) and new/old
developer unit detection switches (SW13, SW14, SW15, SW16) ................... 4-67
4.6.17 Drum thermistor (THM4) .................................................................................. 4-70
4.6.18 Temperature/humidity sensor (S10) ................................................................ 4-70
4.6.19 Waste toner paddle rotation detection sensor (S9) ......................................... 4-71
4.6.20 Waste toner paddle motor (M7) ....................................................................... 4-71
4.6.21 Drum switching detection sensor (S11) ........................................................... 4-73
4.6.22 Drum switching motor (M3).............................................................................. 4-74
4.6.23 Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2) ............................................... 4-75
4.6.24 Paper feeding/developer drive unit .................................................................. 4-75
4.6.25 Developer unit (K) drive gear ........................................................................... 4-76

CONTENTS
3
4.6.26 Toner motor assembly ..................................................................................... 4-77
4.6.27 Toner motor (M8, M9, M10, M11) .................................................................... 4-78
4.6.28 Toner cartridge interface PC board ................................................................. 4-79
4.6.29 Ozone filter ...................................................................................................... 4-80
4.6.30 Ozone exhaust fan (F2) ................................................................................... 4-80
4.6.31 SYS board cooling fan (F1) ............................................................................. 4-81
4.6.32 Switching regular cooling fan (F3) ................................................................... 4-81
4.6.33 Drum drive gear .............................................................................................. 4-82
4.6.34 Developer drive gear ...................................................................................... 4-83
4.6.35 Main power switch (SW4) ................................................................................ 4-84
4.6.36 Drum damp heater (Right) ............................................................................... 4-85
4.6.37 Drum damp heater (Left) ................................................................................. 4-86
4.7 Transfer Units (TBU, TRU).............................................................................................. 4-89
4.7.1 Transfer belt cleaning unit ............................................................................... 4-89
4.7.2 Transfer belt cleaning blade/blade seal ........................................................... 4-89
4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU) ................................................................................... 4-90
4.7.4 Transfer belt .................................................................................................... 4-91
4.7.5 Drive roller ....................................................................................................... 4-93
4.7.6 1st transfer roller.............................................................................................. 4-94
4.7.7 2nd transfer roller............................................................................................. 4-95
4.7.8 2nd transfer roller unit (TRU) ........................................................................... 4-95
4.7.9 Paper clinging detection sensor (S18) ............................................................. 4-96
4.7.10 1st transfer contact/release clutch (CLT3) ....................................................... 4-96
4.7.11 1st transfer roller status detection sensor (S12) .............................................. 4-97
4.7.12 Drum/TBU motor (M6) ..................................................................................... 4-98
4.7.13 Drum TBU drive unit ....................................................................................... 4-98
4.8 Image Quality Control ................................................................................................... 4-103
4.8.1 Image quality control unit............................................................................... 4-103
4.8.2 Image position aligning sensor (Front) (S7)................................................... 4-104
4.8.3 Image position aligning sensor (Rear)/Image quality sensor (S8) ................. 4-104
4.8.4 Registration sensor (S6) ................................................................................ 4-104
4.9 Fuser Unit...................................................................................................................... 4-105
4.9.1 Fuser unit....................................................................................................... 4-105
4.9.2 Front side cover ............................................................................................. 4-110
4.9.3 Rear side cover.............................................................................................. 4-110
4.9.4 Fuser roller cover........................................................................................... 4-110
4.9.5 Fuser roller separation finger ......................................................................... 4-111
4.9.6 Pressure roller separation finger.................................................................... 4-111
4.9.7 Fuser roller center thermostat (THMO1)/fuser roller rear thermostat (THMO2) .....
....................................................................................................................... 4-111
4.9.8 Fuser roller center thermistor (THM1)/fuser roller side thermistor (THM2)/fuser
roller edge thermistor (THM3)........................................................................ 4-112
4.9.9 Center heater lamp (LAMP1), Side heater lamp (LAMP2) ............................ 4-113
4.9.10 Paper entrance guide .................................................................................... 4-114
4.9.11 Pressure roller ............................................................................................... 4-115
4.9.12 Fuser roller..................................................................................................... 4-116
4.9.13 Paper exit sensor (S13) ................................................................................. 4-117
4.9.14 Paper exit unit ................................................................................................ 4-118
4.9.15 Exit roller ........................................................................................................ 4-119
4.9.16 Exit motor (M5) .............................................................................................. 4-120
4.9.17 Fuser motor (M4) ........................................................................................... 4-122
4.9.18 Fuser drive unit .............................................................................................. 4-123
4.10 Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) (OPTION: MD-0105)................................................. 4-125
4.10.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)..................................................................... 4-125
4.10.2 Feed clutch (CLT2) ........................................................................................ 4-126
4.10.3 Transport roller .............................................................................................. 4-127
4.10.4 Transport unit................................................................................................. 4-128
4.10.5 ADU middle cover.......................................................................................... 4-129

CONTENTS
4
4.10.6 ADU guide assembly ..................................................................................... 4-130
4.10.7 ADU control board (ADU) .............................................................................. 4-130
4.10.8 ADU drive unit/ADU entrance sensor (S14)/ADU exit sensor (S15)/ADU motor
(M12) ............................................................................................................. 4-131
4.10.9 Side cover interlock switch (SW3) ................................................................. 4-132
4.11 Removal and Installation of Options ............................................................................. 4-133
4.11.1 MR-3024 (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder)...................................... 4-133
4.11.2 KD-1032 (Paper Feed Pedestal) ................................................................... 4-135
4.11.3 KD-1031 (Large Capacity Feeder)................................................................. 4-138
4.11.4 MY-1040 (Paper Feed Unit)........................................................................... 4-142
4.11.5 KN-2550 (Bridge Kit)...................................................................................... 4-147
4.11.6 MJ-1036 (Inner Finisher) ............................................................................... 4-149
4.11.7 MJ-1037 (Saddle Stitch Finisher) .................................................................. 4-152
4.11.8 MJ-5004 (Job Separator) ............................................................................... 4-154
5. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Service UI.......................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2.2 Login procedure ................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.3 [SERVICE MODE] Screen................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.4 Setting/Changing password............................................................................... 5-7
5.3 Input check (Test mode 03) .............................................................................................. 5-8
5.4 Output check (test mode 03)............................................................................................. 5-9
5.5 Test print mode (test mode 04) ....................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05) .............................................................. 5-11
5.7 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)..................................................................... 5-14
5.8 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08) ..................................................................... 5-17
5.9 Assist Mode (3C)............................................................................................................. 5-19
5.9.2 Operating Procedure ....................................................................................... 5-19
5.9.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-19
5.10 HDD Assist Mode (4C).................................................................................................... 5-22
5.10.2 Operation procedure ........................................................................................ 5-22
5.10.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-24
5.11 File System Recovery Mode (5C) ................................................................................... 5-26
5.11.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 5-26
5.11.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-27
5.12 SRAM Clear Mode (6C) .................................................................................................. 5-31
5.12.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-32
5.13 List print mode (9S)......................................................................................................... 5-34
5.13.2 List Printing ...................................................................................................... 5-35
5.14 Pixel counter ................................................................................................................... 5-48
5.14.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 5-48
5.15 Batch setting for installing/disconnection HDD ............................................................... 5-60
5.16 Batch Setting for Self-Diagnostic Codes (When HDD is mounted)................................. 5-62
5.16.2 Applicable codes.............................................................................................. 5-62
5.16.3 Setting files ...................................................................................................... 5-62
5.16.4 Result files ....................................................................................................... 5-63
6. SETTING / ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Image Related Adjustment................................................................................................ 6-1

CONTENTS
5
6.1.1 Adjustment Order............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ............................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control ..................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control .......................................................... 6-5
6.1.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment ......................................................................... 6-6
6.1.6 Paper alignment at the registration roller........................................................... 6-8
6.1.7 Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section ..................................... 6-12
6.1.8 Image dimensional adjustment at the scanning section .................................. 6-18
6.1.9 Image dimensional adjustment in the copy/printer/fax function ....................... 6-26
6.2 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)................................................................ 6-27
6.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ......................................................................... 6-27
6.2.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.3 Color balance adjustment ................................................................................ 6-30
6.2.4 Gamma balance adjustment............................................................................ 6-33
6.2.5 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 6-34
6.2.6 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and scan) ............................. 6-34
6.2.7 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-35
6.2.8 Setting range correction................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.9 Adjustment of smudged/faint text .................................................................... 6-36
6.2.10 Color Adjustment of Marker ............................................................................. 6-37
6.2.11 LED emission level adjustment........................................................................ 6-38
6.2.12 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ........................................... 6-38
6.2.13 Maximum text density adjustment ................................................................... 6-39
6.2.14 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment ....................................................... 6-39
6.2.15 Black header density level adjustment ............................................................ 6-40
6.2.16 Black area adjustment in twin color copy mode............................................... 6-40
6.2.17 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals (common for copy and scan) .
......................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.2.18 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF (common for copy, scan and fax)6-41
6.2.19 Twin color copy / mono color copy adjustment ................................................ 6-42
6.2.20 Maximum density adjustment for each paper type .......................................... 6-43
6.2.21 Color reproduction selection ............................................................................ 6-44
6.2.22 Hue adjustment................................................................................................ 6-45
6.2.23 Saturation adjustment...................................................................................... 6-48
6.2.24 ADF noise reduction (Copying Function) ......................................................... 6-49
6.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)................................................................. 6-50
6.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ......................................................................... 6-50
6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)...................................................... 6-53
6.3.3 Color balance adjustment ................................................................................ 6-55
6.3.4 Adjustment of faint text .................................................................................... 6-57
6.3.5 Upper limit value in the Toner Saving Mode .................................................... 6-57
6.3.6 Maximum toner density adjustment (OHP) ...................................................... 6-58
6.3.7 Fine line enhancement switchover .................................................................. 6-58
6.3.8 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PCL) ......................................... 6-58
6.3.9 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (Twin color mode) ..................... 6-59
6.3.10 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PS) ........................................... 6-59
6.3.11 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (XPS)......................................... 6-59
6.3.12 Toner limit threshold adjustment...................................................................... 6-60
6.3.14 Thin line width lower limit adjustment .............................................................. 6-62
6.3.15 Offsetting adjustment for background processing ........................................... 6-63
6.3.16 Color/black judgment setting for twin color printing images............................. 6-63
6.3.18 Density adjustment of graphic lines (1200 dpi) ................................................ 6-65
6.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function).............................................................. 6-66
6.4.1 Gamma balance adjustment............................................................................ 6-66
6.4.3 Background adjustment (Color Mode) ............................................................. 6-68

CONTENTS
6
6.4.4 Background adjustment (Black/Grayscale)...................................................... 6-69
6.4.5 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and network scan) ............... 6-69
6.4.7 Fine adjustment of black density ..................................................................... 6-71
6.4.8 RGB conversion method selection .................................................................. 6-71
6.4.9 Adjustment of saturation .................................................................................. 6-72
6.4.11 Adjustment of the capacity and image quality of SlimPDF .............................. 6-73
6.4.12 Surrounding void amount adjustment .............................................................. 6-73
6.4.13 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals (common for copy and scan) .
......................................................................................................................... 6-74
6.4.14 JPEG compression level adjustment ............................................................... 6-74
6.4.15 ADF noise reduction (Scanning Function) ....................................................... 6-75
6.5 Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function)...................................................................... 6-76
6.6 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 6-78
6.6.1 Adjustment carriages-1 positions..................................................................... 6-78
6.6.2 Position adjustment of CCD lens unit .............................................................. 6-79
6.6.3 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor ...................................................... 6-79
6.7 Writing Section ................................................................................................................ 6-80
6.7.1 Image Adjustment in the Writing Section ......................................................... 6-80
6.8.1 Adjusting the clearance of the paper and side guides ..................................... 6-81
6.8.2 Separation roller pressure force adjustment (PFU/PFP) ................................. 6-82
6.9 Process Unit Related Section ......................................................................................... 6-83
6.9.1 High-Voltage Transformer Setting ................................................................... 6-83
6.10 Developer Unit ................................................................................................................ 6-84
6.10.1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ............................................................. 6-84
6.10.2 Adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap ........................................................... 6-84
6.11 Image Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 6-86
6.11.1 Performing Image Quality Control ................................................................... 6-86
6.12 Fuser Unit / Paper Exit Section ....................................................................................... 6-86
6.12.1 Adjustment of the non-contact thermistor Gap ................................................ 6-86
6.12.2 Correction of Performing non-contact thermistor ............................................. 6-89
6.12.3 Adjustment of the thermostat Gap ................................................................... 6-90
7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 7-1
7.1 General Description .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 PM Display ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.1 General Description ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.2 PM Display Conditions....................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.3 PM Display Contents ......................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.4 Counter Clearing................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3 General Descriptions for PM Procedure ........................................................................... 7-5
7.4 PM Support Mode ............................................................................................................. 7-6
7.4.1 General Description ........................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.2 Operational flow................................................................................................. 7-6
7.4.3 Operational screen ............................................................................................ 7-7
7.4.4 Access tree ...................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5 Work flow of parts replacement....................................................................................... 7-12
7.6 Preventive Maintenance Checklist .................................................................................. 7-13
7.6.1 Feed unit.......................................................................................................... 7-14
7.6.2 Bypass feed unit .............................................................................................. 7-15
7.6.3 Main charger.................................................................................................... 7-16
7.6.4 Drum unit, Cleaner related section .................................................................. 7-18
7.6.5 Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C) ....................................................................... 7-21
7.6.6 2nd transfer roller unit...................................................................................... 7-26
CONTENTS
7
7.6.7 RADF (MR-3024) ............................................................................................. 7-28
7.6.8 PFP (KD-1032) ................................................................................................ 7-29
7.6.9 LCF (KD-1031) ................................................................................................ 7-30
7.6.10 PFU (MY-1040)................................................................................................ 7-31
7.6.11 JSP (MJ-5004)................................................................................................. 7-31
7.7 Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts .................................................................. 7-33
7.8 PM KIT ............................................................................................................................ 7-34
7.9 Maintenance Part List .................................................................................................... 7-35
7.10 Grease List...................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.11 Machine Refreshing Checklist......................................................................................... 7-38
7.12 Machine Refreshing Kit ................................................................................................... 7-47
8. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 8-1
8.1 General Descriptions......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting. ..................... 8-1
8.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device ...................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Traceability label................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2 Error Code List .................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.1 Jam .................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 Service call ...................................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function ....................................................... 8-24
8.2.4 Printer function error ........................................................................................ 8-33
8.2.5 TopAccess related error/Communication error with external application ........ 8-35
8.2.6 MFP access error ............................................................................................ 8-36
8.2.7 Maintenance error............................................................................................ 8-38
8.2.8 Network error ................................................................................................... 8-39
8.2.9 Error history ..................................................................................................... 8-42
8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................ 8-44
8.3.1 Check item....................................................................................................... 8-44
8.3.2 Paper transport jam (paper exit section).......................................................... 8-44
8.3.3 Paper misfeeding............................................................................................. 8-47
8.3.4 Paper transport jam ......................................................................................... 8-51
8.3.5 Other paper jam ............................................................................................... 8-60
8.3.6 Cover open jam ............................................................................................... 8-68
8.3.7 RADF jam ........................................................................................................ 8-72
8.3.8 Paper jam in bridge unit................................................................................... 8-78
8.3.9 Paper jam in job separator............................................................................... 8-80
8.3.10 Paper jam in finisher section............................................................................ 8-81
8.3.11 Paper jam in saddle stitcher section ................................................................ 8-89
8.3.12 Paper jam in puncher unit................................................................................ 8-95
8.3.13 Other paper jam ............................................................................................... 8-96
8.3.14 Drive system related service call ..................................................................... 8-98
8.3.15 Paper feeding system related service call ..................................................... 8-100
8.3.16 Scanning system related service call............................................................. 8-106
8.3.17 Fuser unit related service call ........................................................................ 8-112
8.3.18 Communication related service call ............................................................... 8-117
8.3.19 RADF related service call .............................................................................. 8-121
8.3.20 Circuit related service call.............................................................................. 8-122
8.3.21 LED printer head related service call............................................................. 8-126
8.3.22 Finisher related service call ........................................................................... 8-130
8.3.23 Image control related service call .................................................................. 8-152
8.3.24 Copy process related service call .................................................................. 8-170
8.3.25 Other service call ........................................................................................... 8-183
8.3.26 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function ..................................................... 8-214
8.3.27 Printer function error ...................................................................................... 8-225
8.3.28 TopAccess related error/Communication error with external application ...... 8-227
8.3.29 MFP access error .......................................................................................... 8-233
8.3.30 Maintenance error.......................................................................................... 8-236
8.3.31 Network error ................................................................................................. 8-240
CONTENTS
8
8.4 Other errors................................................................................................................... 8-250
8.4.1 Equipment operation disabled after the installation of option(s) .................... 8-250
8.4.2 Wireless LAN connection disabled ................................................................ 8-250
8.4.3 "Invalid Department Code" is displayed......................................................... 8-250
8.4.4 Paper folded on the leading edge.................................................................. 8-250
8.4.5 Toner cartridge unrecognized ........................................................................ 8-250
8.4.6 Ethernet disabled in half-duplex communication ........................................... 8-250
8.4.7 The equipment does not start after the power has been turned ON.............. 8-251
8.4.8 “Authentication Failed” is displayed ............................................................... 8-252
8.4.9 Hard disk full error “H04” is displayed............................................................ 8-252
8.4.10 Error code “M00” is displayed while updating firmware ................................. 8-252
8.5 Troubleshooting for the Image ...................................................................................... 8-254
8.5.1 Color deviation............................................................................................... 8-254
8.5.2 Uneven pitch and jitter image ........................................................................ 8-256
8.5.3 Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance............................. 8-258
8.5.4 Background fogging 1.................................................................................... 8-260
8.5.5 Background fogging 2 (1200 dpi printing) ...................................................... 8-262
8.5.6 Moire /lack of sharpness ................................................................................ 8-263
8.5.7 Toner offset.................................................................................................... 8-265
8.5.8 Blurred image ................................................................................................ 8-267
8.5.9 Poor fusing..................................................................................................... 8-268
8.5.10 Blank print...................................................................................................... 8-270
8.5.11 Solid print....................................................................................................... 8-272
8.5.12 White banding (in feeding direction) .............................................................. 8-274
8.5.13 White banding (at right angles to feeding direction) ...................................... 8-276
8.5.14 Skew (slantwise copying) .............................................................................. 8-277
8.5.15 Color banding (in feeding direction) ............................................................... 8-279
8.5.16 Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction) ....................................... 8-281
8.5.17 White spots .................................................................................................... 8-282
8.5.18 Poor transfer .................................................................................................. 8-284
8.5.19 Uneven image density 1 (in feeding direction)............................................... 8-286
8.5.20 Uneven image density 1 (at right angles to feeding direction) ....................... 8-288
8.5.21 Uneven image density 2 ................................................................................ 8-289
8.5.22 Faded image (low density)............................................................................. 8-291
8.5.23 Image dislocation in feeding direction............................................................ 8-292
8.5.24 Image jittering ................................................................................................ 8-293
8.5.25 Poor cleaning................................................................................................. 8-294
8.5.26 Uneven light distribution ................................................................................ 8-296
8.5.27 Blotched image .............................................................................................. 8-297
8.5.28 Stain on the paper back side ......................................................................... 8-298
8.5.29 White void in the halftone .............................................................................. 8-300
8.5.30 Paper wrinkle ................................................................................................. 8-303
8.5.31 Staining at the leading/trailing edge............................................................... 8-305
8.5.32 Faint image .................................................................................................... 8-306
8.5.33 Toner scattering ............................................................................................. 8-307
8.5.34 Feathered image............................................................................................ 8-309
8.5.35 Image Skewing on Paper Trailing Edge ........................................................ 8-311
9. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD ...................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Removal and Installation of PC Boards/HDD.................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 SYS Board cover ............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 SYS board ......................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Solid State Drive (SSD) ..................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.4 Hard disk (HDD) ................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.5 PFC cover.......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.6 LGC board ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.7 Switching regulator ............................................................................................ 9-5
9.1.8 High-voltage transformer (HVT)......................................................................... 9-6
9.1.9 CFD board ......................................................................................................... 9-7
CONTENTS
9
9.1.10 SRAM board <for SYS board> .......................................................................... 9-8
9.1.11 EEPROM <for LGC board> ............................................................................... 9-9
9.1.12 CTIF board......................................................................................................... 9-9
9.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing PC Boards and HDD/SSD ........... 9-11
9.2.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards........................................................... 9-11
9.2.2 HDD/SSD fault diagnosis................................................................................. 9-12
9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD/SSD ........................... 9-15
9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board .......................... 9-21
9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS board)
......................................................................................................................... 9-25
9.2.6 Procedures and settings when replacing EEPROM (for LGC board) .............. 9-32
9.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing the Lens unit .................................. 9-38
9.2.8 Firmware confirmation after the PC board/HDD replacement ......................... 9-38
9.2.9 License re-registration using the one-time dongle ........................................... 9-39
9.3 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/SSD/Board..................... 9-41
9.3.1 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 ........................................................... 9-41
9.3.2 Precautions when disposing of HDD/SSD ....................................................... 9-41
9.3.3 Precautions when disposing of the SYS board................................................ 9-41
9.3.4 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM board (for SYS board) ................. 9-41
10. REMOTE SERVICE..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Auto Supply Order........................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Setting Item...................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.3 Setting procedure ............................................................................................ 10-4
10.1.4 Order Sheet Format....................................................................................... 10-18
10.2 Service Notification ....................................................................................................... 10-22
10.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................... 10-22
10.2.2 Setting............................................................................................................ 10-22
10.2.3 Items to be notified ........................................................................................ 10-29
11. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Firmware Updating with a USB Device ........................................................................... 11-4
11.2.1 Updating methods............................................................................................ 11-4
11.2.2 Firmware type and data file name for updating ............................................... 11-4
11.2.3 Folder configuration of a USB device .............................................................. 11-7
11.2.4 Update procedure .......................................................................................... 11-11
11.3 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F.............................................................. 11-24
11.3.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F).......................... 11-25
11.3.2 System firmware ............................................................................................ 11-27
11.4 Firmware Updating with K-PWA-DLM-320F ................................................................. 11-29
11.4.1 FAX unit firmware (GD-1320) ........................................................................ 11-30
11.5 Confirmation of the updated data.................................................................................. 11-32
11.6 When Firmware Updating Fails..................................................................................... 11-33
11.6.1 Procedure ...................................................................................................... 11-33
11.6.2 Flow chart for correcting USB update failure ................................................. 11-34
12. BACKUP FUNCTION.................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Data Cloning ................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Precautions...................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 Backup files ..................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.4 Cloning procedure ........................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 AES Data Encryption Function Setting ........................................................................... 12-7
12.2.2 Precautions...................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Setting procedure ............................................................................................ 12-8
12.2.4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function........................................... 12-12
12.2.5 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is enabled .... 12-12
CONTENTS
10
12.3 High Security Mode....................................................................................................... 12-13
12.3.1 General description........................................................................................ 12-13
12.3.2 Prior confirmation .......................................................................................... 12-13
12.3.3 Procedure for entering the High Security Mode ............................................ 12-13
12.3.4 Precautions.................................................................................................... 12-14
13. EXTERNAL COUNTERS ............................................................................................ 13-1
13.1 Outline............................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 Signal .............................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2.1 Pin Layout........................................................................................................ 13-1
13.2.2 Details of the signals........................................................................................ 13-3
13.3 Notices ............................................................................................................................ 13-5
13.3.1 Setting code..................................................................................................... 13-5
13.3.2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the Card Controller ........... 13-5
13.3.3 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin controller ............. 13-5
13.3.4 Installation of External Counter........................................................................ 13-5
13.3.5 Setting value .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.3.6 Restrictions when using the external counter .................................................. 13-6
14. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION................................................................................ 14-1
14.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 DC Wire Harness / Electric Parts Layout ........................................................................ 14-3
14.2.1 DC Wire Harness............................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.2 Electric Parts Layout........................................................................................ 14-4
15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE) .......................................................... 957
e-STUDIO2050C/2550C ............................................................................................................. 957
1Input check (Test mode 03) ........................................................................................... 957
1Output check (test mode 03).......................................................................................... 964
1Test print mode (test mode 04) ...................................................................................... 967
1Adjustment Mode (05) Codes ........................................................................................ 968
1Setting Mode (08) Codes ............................................................................................. 1059
e-STUDIO2051C/2551C ........................................................................................................... 1253
1Input check (Test mode 03) ......................................................................................... 1253
1Output check (test mode 03)........................................................................................ 1260
1Test print mode (test mode 04) .................................................................................... 1263
1Adjustment Mode (05) Codes ...................................................................................... 1264
1Setting Mode (08) Codes ............................................................................................. 1339
APPENDIX ........................................................................................................................ 1517
Maintenance check list ............................................................................................................. 1517

CONTENTS
11
CONTENTS
12
1. FEATURE
1.1 Main Feature of this equipment 1

• Downsizing of equipment (equivalent to black equipment)
Its external dimensions are almost same as those of black equipment, even though it is full-color
equipment.
• Pursuing usability
Maintenance work such as the replacement of supplies can be done more easily and efficiently.
A new automatic paper size detection mechanism for drawers is adopted.
• Improving serviceability
Developer material is pre-filled in each developer unit.
Efficiency of serviceability such as the replacement of supplies is improved.
• Adopting of LED for a new exposure lamp to scan originals

An LED provides a stable amount of light immediately after emission, and has a longer life
comparing to a cold-cathode tube.
No inverter board is required, resulting the reduction of parts.
• Adopting of new exposure LED printer head

It does not require rotating parts such as motors while the existing lasers do, realizing reduction in
size and weight, and also vibration.
• An IC chip is mounted to the toner cartridge

FEATURE
1-1
FEATURE
1-2
2. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
Notes: In this document, a model name is replaced with an alias as follows:
Model name Alias

e-STUDIO2050C 20ppm 2
e-STUDIO2550C 25ppm
e-STUDIO2051C LL20ppm
e-STUDIO2551C LL25ppm
2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 General
Type Desktop type

(Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or
optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.)
Original glass Fixed
Color Full color, Twin color, Mono color
Copy process Indirect electrophotographic method (dry)
Developing system 2-component magnetic brush developing
Fixing method Roller fusing system
Photosensor type OPC
Original scanning sensor Linear CCD sensor
Scanning light source LED
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color print / Photo / gray scale)
Gradation 256
Paper feeding 1 drawer + Bypass feeding
1 drawer + Bypass feeding + PFU (optional)
1 drawer + Bypass feeding + PFU+ PFP 1 drawer (optional)
1 drawer + Bypass feeding + PFU+ PFP 2 drawers (optional)
1 drawer + Bypass feeding + PFU+ LCF (optional)
Paper supply Drawer Stack height 28 mm,
Approx. 250 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.3 lb. Bond),
Approx. 200 sheets (105 g/m2, 28 lb. Bond)
Bypass feeding Stack height 11 mm,
PFU (optional) Stack height 60.5 mm,
PFP (optional) Stack height 60.5 mm,
LCF (optional) Stack height 110 mm,

SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-1
Paper size Drawer A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
Bypass feeding A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-
R, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5"
Non-standard:
Paper size within 100 - 297 mm (3.9 - 11.7") (Length), 148 -
432 mm (5.8 - 17") (Width)
PFU (optional) A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
Drawers / A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
PFP (optional) LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
LCF (optional) A4, LT
Paper type Drawer Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1
Bypass feeding Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, Sticker labels,
OHP film, Tab paper, Water proof paper
PFU (optional) Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1
PFP (optional) Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1
LCF (optional) Plain paper, Recycled paper
Paper weight Drawer / 60g/m2 to 163 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)
PFU (optional)/
PFP (optional)
Bypass feeding 60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index)
LCF (optional) 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Automatic Type Stackless, Switchback type
duplexing unit Acceptable paper A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
size LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5"
Acceptable paper 60 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)
weight
Toner supply Automatic toner density detection/supply
Density control Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable
in 11 steps
Total counter Electronic counter
Memory Main memory 2 GB (including page memory)
(RAM) Page Memory
SSD 8 GB
HDD Not installed (320 GB when the option GE-1220 is installed.
20ppm/25ppm only)
Account Codes 100 codes
Department Codes 50 codes

2-2
Machine version NAD: North America, Brazil (e-STUDIO2051C/2551C)
NAH: North America, Brazil (e-STUDIO2050C/2550C, FIPS
HDD)
MJD: Europe
AUD: Australia (e-STUDIO2051C/2551C)
AUH: Australia (e-STUDIO2050C/2550C) 2
ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America
TWD: Taiwan
SAD: Saudi Arabia
ASU: Saudi Arabia, Asia
CND: China
KRD: Korea
ARD: Argentina
JPD: Japan
Warm-up time Approx. 35 sec. (100 V/200 V series) <Stand-alone,
temperature: 20oC>
Start-up with hibernation: Approx. 35 sec. (100 V / 200 V
series) <Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC>
*Varies depending on the settings, use conditions, and quality
maintenance behavior such as toner refill.
Recovery from sleep Approx. 15 sec. <Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC>
Approx. 35 sec. if equipment is left unattended for 2 hours or
more <Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC>
*Varies depending on the settings, use conditions, and quality
maintenance behavior such as toner refill.
Power requirements AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A
220-240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz)
* The acceptable value of each voltage is ± 10%.
Power consumption 1.5 kW or less (100 V, 115 V)
2.0 kW or less (200 V series)
* The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFU,
PFP and LCF through the equipment.
Weight Approx. 60 kg (132.27 lb.)
Dimensions of the equipment W 575 x D 590 x H 662 (mm)
* When the tilt angle of the control panel is 90 degrees.

2-3
2.1.2 Copy
[1] Copy specifications
Storage capacity Memory is full

Original glass Original scanning Flat surface scanning system
system (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Original type Sheets, books
Original size Max. A3/LD
Reversing Original scanning Fixed scanning system by feeding the original
Automatic system (the center used as guide to place originals)
Document Original type Sheets (carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be
Feeder accepted)
(optional)
Original size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER
Original paper Single-sided copy: 35-157g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond - 58 lb. Cover)
weight
Double-sided copy: 50-157g/m2 (13.3 lb. Bond - 58 lb. Cover)
Original capacity Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) (Stack height 16 mm)
Eliminated Black copy Leading edges: 4.2 +2.8/-1.2 mm, Trailing edges: 3.0 ± 2.0
portion mm, Side edges: 2.0 ± 2.0 mm
Color copy Leading edges: 5.0 ± 2.0 mm, Trailing edges: 3.0 ± 2.0 mm,
Side edges: 2.0 ± 2.0 mm
Multiple copying Up to 999 copies: Key in set numbers
[ 2 ] First copy time
20ppm Black Approx. 8.2 sec.

25ppm Color Approx. 10.3 sec.
LL20ppm Black Approx. 8.2 sec.
LL25ppm Color Approx. 10.3 sec.
[3] Copy speed (Copies/min.)
[ 3-1 ] Plain paper

• Plain paper: 60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
20ppm/LL20ppm
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
Paper size Size specified (A4/LT only)
specified
A4, LT 20 (20) 20 (20) 9 (9) 20 (20) 20 (20)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 15 (15) 15 (15) 9(9) 15 (15) -
B4, LG, FOLIO, 12 (12) 12 (12) 9 (9) 12 (12) -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 10 (10) 10 (10) 9 (9) 10 (10) -

2-4
25ppm/LL25ppm
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 25 (25) 25 (25) 25 (25) 25 (25) 2
11 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 18(18) 18(18) 11 (11) 20 (20) -
B4, LG, FOLIO, 15 (15) 15 (15) 11 (11) 17 (17) -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 12 (12) 12 (12) 11 (11) 15 (15) -
* “-” means “Not acceptable”.

* When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
* Plain paper is selected for the paper type.
* When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, the copying speeds of the equipment is
only possible under the following conditions:
• Original: A4 or LT (single-sided)
• Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode
• Reproduction ratio: 100%
* The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.
[ 3-2 ] Thick 1/Thick 2

• Thick 1: 106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 (90 lb. Index)
• Thick 2: 164 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (110 lb. Index)
20ppm/25ppm/LL20ppm/LL25ppm
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 17.5 (17.5) 16.5 (16.5) 7 (7) 16.5 (16.5) -
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 13 (13) 12.5 (12.5) 7 (7) 12.5 (12.5) -
B4, LG, FOLIO, 10.5 (10.5) 10 (10) 7 (7) 10 (10) -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 8.5 (8.5) 8 (8) 7 (7) 8 (8) -


2-5
[ 3-3 ] OHP film
20ppm/25ppm/LL20ppm/LL25ppm
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT - 14.5 (14.5) - - -
A3, LD - 7.5 (7.5) - - -

[4] System copy speed
Sec.
Copy mode
20ppm/LL20ppm 25ppmLL25ppm
Single-sided originals 1 set 37.7 (39.6) 32.5 (34.5)
 3 sets 107.4 (109.3) 83.2 (85.1)
Single-sided copies 5 sets 177 (178.9) 131.6 (133.5)
Single-sided originals 1 set 43.6 (46.6) 42.2 (45.2)
 3 sets 90.8 (93.7) 89.8 (92.8)
Double-sided copies 5 sets 137.9 (140.9) 140.4 (143.4)
Double-sided originals 1 set 84.5 (88.6) 83.9 (87.9)
 3 sets 190.7 (194.7) 179.9 (183.9)
Double-sided copies 5 sets 296.8 (300.8) 277.3 (281.3)
Double-sided originals 1 set 74.5 (77.1) 73.8 (76.4)
 3 sets 193.8 (196.4) 171 (173.6)
Single-sided copies 5 sets 313 (315.6) 265.1 (267.7)
* The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.
* Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message “Ready” is
displayed. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above
is selected.)
* Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in
the sort mode with paper fed from the 1st drawer.
* The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed.

2-6
2.1.3 Print
Supported Page Description 20ppm/25ppm: PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS

Language (Printer Driver) LL20ppm/LL25ppm: PCL6
Supported Page Description 20ppm/25ppm: PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS, PCL5e,
Language (RIP) PCL5c, PDF (emulation) 2
LL20ppm/LL25ppm: PCL6
Supported Client OS Windows Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows Server
2003 / Windows Server 2008 / Windows Server 2012
Mac OS X 10.4 or later
Solaris v2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9/10
HP-UX ver.10.20/11.x , HP-UX64 ver.11.31
AIX 4.3.3
Red Hat 7.x/8.x/9.x, Red Hat Enterprise WS2, SuSE Linux
7.x/8.x/9.x, Mandrake Linux 7.x/8.x/9.x and Turbolinux 8/10
SCO UnixWare 7, SCO Open UNIX 8, CUPS
Resolution Black 600 x 600 dpi, 5bit
600 x 1200dpi, 1bit (20ppm/25ppm PS only)
Color 600 x 600 dpi, 5bit
600 x 1200dpi, 1bit (20ppm/25ppm PS only)
Eliminated portion Black / Color Leading edges: 4.2 +2.8/-1.2 mm,
Trailing edges: 4.2 +1.2/-2.8 mm, Side edges: 4.2 ±2.0 mm
Interface Standard Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0
(High speed)
Optional Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b/g/n)
2.1.4 Scan
Scanning speed Color / Black / 25 sheets/min. (600 x 600 dpi)

Gray scale 50 sheets/min. (300 x 300 dpi)
Resolution 100, 150, 200, 300, 400 and 600 dpi
Scan mode Black, Gray scale, Color and ACS (Auto color Selection)
File formats JPEG, Multi/Single page TIFF, Multi/Single page PDF, Slim
PDF, Multi/Single page XPS
* When scanning single-sided A4/LT landscape originals using RADF

2-7
2.1.5 Internet Fax
[1] Internet FAX transmission
Resolution TX Resolution Standard (8 x 3.85),

< dots/mm > Fine (8 x 7.7),
Scanning Original A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, LG, LD, ST,
Document ST-R, Computer, Folio
Size
Speed 0.7 sec. (per page/A4)
Max. 50 spm (ITU-T No.1, A4, 8 x 3.85,Text mode)
Gray scale 256 levels (Error Diffusion)
Address book Address Book 400 stations
Group Max. 40 stations
Transmission Broadcast Max. 80 destinations/job.
Features transmission (Fax number and E-mail address are available to registered
in same job.)
Message size Max. 100MB
limitation
Message Page by page
division
[2] Internet FAX receiving
Format of receive attachment TIFF-FX (Profile S, F, J)

2-8
2.1.6 SSD/HDD Memory Map
Category Item Unit SSD HDD *1

HDD SSD or HDD GB 8 320
Copy Memory copy GB 1.9 30(Shared with Printer
2
Data Spool and Private
job, Scheduled job,
Proof job, Invalid job)
Box e-Filing GB - 200 (Shared with
"Scan to File")
Public box Box - 1
User box Box - 200
Folders per box Folder - 100
Documents per Docu - 400
box ment
Pages per Page - 200
document
Number of Job - 899
maximum jobs
Scan Scan to File GB - 200 (Shared with "e-
Filing")
Pages per job Page Storage full 1000
Number of Job 399 (Except Print/FAX/ 899 (Except Print/FAX/
maximum jobs interrupt) interrupt)
FAX FAX Transmission GB 0.1 (Shared with Rx 1 (Shared with Rx and
and Tx) Tx)
FAX Reception GB 0.1 (Shared with Rx 1 (Shared with Rx and
and Tx) Tx)
Print Printer Data Spool GB 0.9 30(Shared with
Memory copy and
Private job, Scheduled
job, Proof job, Invalid
job)
Pages per job Job Storage full Storage full
Number of Job 500 1000
maximum jobs
Private job, GB - 30(Shared with
Scheduled job, Memory copy and
Proof job, Invalid Printer Data Spool)
job
Pages per job Job Storage full Storage full
Number of Job 500 1000
maximum jobs
*1: When the GE-1220 has been installed.

2-9
2.1.7 Network Fax (Option)
Compatibility Super G3, G3 (ITU-T.30)

Internet Fax (Simple mode) (ITU-T.37)
TX Resolution PSTN Standard: 200 x 100 dpi,
Fine: 200 x 200 dpi,
Super Fine: 200 x 400 dpi,
Ultra Fine: 400 x 400 dpi
Internet Fax 200 dpi x 200 dpi
Original Document Size A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, ST, COMPUTER
Mail Box User defined Max. 300 boxes
Routed document Send to e- MMR
format Filing
Send to File Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
(SMB)
Send to FTP Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
Send to E- Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
mail
Send to I-Fax TIFF-S
Send to MMR
PSTN-FAX

2 - 10
2.2 Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction 1 set
Operator’s manual 1 set 2

- Safety Information: 1 manual
- Quick Start Guide: 1 manual
DVD 1 pc.
Client Utilities / User
Documentation DVD
Power cable 1 pc.
Warranty sheet 1 pc. (for NAD/NAH)

Setup report 1 set (for NAD,NAH, MJD and
CND)
Rubber plug (small) 2 pcs.
Rubber plug (large) 2 pcs.
Developer material (Y, M, C, K) Developer material is pre-filled in

each developer unit.
Approval sheet 1 set (for CND)
Right lower cover 1 pc.
* Machine version
NAD: North America, Brazil (e-STUDIO2051C/2551C)
NAH: North America, Brazil (e-STUDIO2050C/2550C, FIPS HDD)
MJD: Europe
AUD: Australia (e-STUDIO2051C/2551C)
AUH: Australia (e-STUDIO2050C/2550C)
ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America
TWD: Taiwan
SAD: Saudi Arabia
ASU: Saudi Arabia, Asia
CND: China
KRD: Korea
ARD: Argentina
JPD: Japan
Notes:
Check that the above accessories are correctly co-packed at the time of unpacking.

2 - 11
Front USB kit
Accessible Reversing Automatic
2.3
Document Feeder (RADF) Original Cover GR-1140
Arm
KK-2550 MR-3024/C KA-1640PC/-C 2.3.1
Work Table
KK-4550
Antenna e-BRIDGE ID Gate

GN-3010/C KP-2004
Hole Punch Unit Harness kit for e-BRIDGE ID Gate
MJ-6008N/E/F/S/E-C coin controller KP-2005/C
System List
GQ-1260
e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C
Wireless LAN HDD
Saddle stitch module
Manual Pocket GE-1220/C/N
20ppm/25ppm
Finisher GN-1060/C
MJ-1037/C KK-1660/-C Paper Feed
Controller
Bridge Kit GH-1080/C
KN-2550/C
Staple Cartridge Meta Scan Enabler
STAPLE-2400 GS-1010
External Interface Enabler
Staple Cartridge GS-1020
2 - 12
Job Separator
Fig. 2-1
(Saddle stitch) MJ-5004/C Data overwrite Enabler
STAPLE-600 GP-1070
Damp Heater Kit IP Sec Enabler

MF-2050CU/CE GP-1080
Inner Finisher Unicode Font
MJ-1036/C Enabler
Paper Feed GS-1007
Unit (PFU) Hardcopy
Hole Punch Unit
MJ-6007N/E/F/S/E-C MY-1040/C Security kit
GP-1190A
FAX Unit
GD-1320
NA/EU/AU/AS/TW/C
2nd Line for FAX Unit Drawer Module Paper Feed Large Capacity Desk
GD-1260NA-F/EU-F/ MY-1039/C Pedestal (PFP) Feeder (LCF) MH-2050
AUS-F/AU-F/TW/C KD-1032/C KD-1031 A4/LT/A4-C

Notes:
• The paper feed controller (GH-1080/C) is necessary for installation of the paper feed unit (MY-
1040/C), paper feed pedestal (KD-1032/C) and large capacity feeder (KD-1031 A4/LT/A4-C).
• The bridge kit (KN-2550) and paper feed controller (GH-1080/C) are necessary for installation
of the finisher (MJ-1037/C).
• The finisher (MJ-1037/C) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6008N/E/F/S/
E-C).
2
• The finisher (MJ-1036/C) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6007N/E/F/S/
E-C).
• The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1060/C).
• The HDD (GE-1220/C/N) is necessary for installation of the Unicode font enabler (GS-1007),
data overwrite enabler (GP-1070), and hardcopy security kit (GP-1190A).
• GE-1220 is ADI-HDD (security HDD) and GE-1220C/GE-1220N is SATA-HDD (normal HDD).
• GE-1220N is applied to ASD only.

2 - 13
Accessible Reversing Automatic
2.3.2
Arm Document Feeder (RADF) Original Cover

KK-2550 MR-3024/C KA-1640PC/-C
Harness kit for

coin controller Manual Pocket
e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C
Work Table
GQ-1260 KK-1660/-C KK-4550
e-BRIDGE ID Gate
KP-2004
LL20ppm/LL25ppm
Job Separator
MJ-5004/C e-BRIDGE ID Gate
KP-2005/C
Paper Feed
FAX Unit Controller
2 - 14
GD-1320 GH-1080/C
Fig. 2-2
NA/EU/AU/AS/TW/C
Auto Duplex Unit
MD-0105/C
2nd Line for FAX Unit

GD-1260NA-F/EU-F/
AUS-F/AU-F/TW/C Paper Feed
Unitl (PFU)
Damp Heater Kit MY-1040/C
MF-2050CU/CE
Drawer Module Paper Feed Desk

MY-1039/C Pedestal (PFP)
MH-2050
KD-1032/C

2.4 Supplies
Drum OD-FC30
OD-FC30C (for China)
2
Developer material (K) D-FC30-K
Developer material (Y) D-FC30-Y
Developer material (M) D-FC30-M
Developer material (C) D-FC30-C
Toner cartridge (K) PS-ZTFC30UK (for North America, Central and South America)
PS-ZTFC30EK (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC30DK (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC30CK (for China)
PS-ZTFC30DKM/DKS (for Singapore)
PS-ZTFC30CKM/CKS (for China)
PS-ZTFC30AK (for Argentina)
Toner cartridge (Y) PS-ZTFC30UY (for North America, Central and South America)
PS-ZTFC30EY (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC30DY (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC30CY (for China)
PS-ZTFC30DYM/DYS (for Singapore)
PS-ZTFC30CYM/CYS (for China)
PS-ZTFC30AY (for Argentina)
Toner cartridge (M) PS-ZTFC30UM (for North America, Central and South America)
PS-ZTFC30EM (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC30DM (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC30CM (for China)
PS-ZTFC30DMM/DMS(for Singapore)
PS-ZTFC30CMM/CMS (for China)
PS-ZTFC30AM (for Argentina)
Toner cartridge (C) PS-ZTFC30UC (for North America, Central and South America)
PS-ZTFC30EC (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC30DC (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC30CC (for China)
PS-ZTFC30DCM/DCS (for Singapore)
PS-ZTFC30CCM/CCS (for China)
PS-ZTFC30AC (for Argentina)
Waste toner box PS-TBFC30 (expect for Europe and China)
PS-TBFC30E (for Europe)
PS-TBFC30C (for China)

2 - 15
2 - 16
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3.1 Sectional View
3.1.1 Front side
[1]
[2] [23] [24] [25] [26] [22] [21]

[20]
[3]
[4] [19]
[5]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[10] [11] [12] [13]
[14]
[15]
Fig. 3-1

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-1
1 Scanner unit 14 1st drawer
2 Inner tray 15 Bypass tray
3 Transfer belt 16 Main power switch
4 Transfer belt cleaning unit 17 Registration roller
5 Waste toner box 18 Image quality control unit
6 Drum (Y) 19 2nd transfer roller
7 Drum (M) 20 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU) *1
8 Drum (C) 21 Exit unit
9 Drum (K) 22 Fuser unit
10 Developer unit (Y) 23 Toner (Y)
11 Developer unit (M) 24 Toner (M)
12 Developer unit (C) 25 Toner (C)
13 Developer unit (K) 26 Toner (K)
*1: LL20ppm, L25ppm: Option

3-2
3.1.2 Rear side
M1
3
SYS
LGC
M5
M12 M4
F3 M11
F1 M10
M9
M8
M6
HVT
CLT3
CLT1 M3
M2
CLT2 PS
F2
Fig. 3-2

3-3
M1 Scan motor CLT1 Registration clutch
M2 Feed/Developer motor CLT2 Feed clutch
M3 Mono/color switching motor CLT3 1st transfer clutch
M4 Fuser motor F1 SYS board cooling fan
M5 Exit/Rev motor F2 Ozone exhaust fan
M6 Drum/TBU motor F3 Ozone suctioning fan
M8 Toner motor-Y SYS System control PC board (SYS board)
M9 Toner motor-M LGC Logic PC board (LGC board)
M10 Toner motor-C HVT High-voltage transformer
M11 Toner motor-K PS Switching regulator
M12 ADU motor

3-4
3.2 Electric Parts Layout
[A] Scanner unit, control panel
M1
S23 CCD
S21
S22 KEY
EXP
S25
S24 TCP
DSP
Fig. 3-3

3-5
[B] Toner cartridge, waste toner box
CTIF
CTRG
M11
CTRG
M10
CTRG
M8 M9
CTRG
S9
M7
Fig. 3-4

3-6
[C] Developer unit
M6
CLT3
M3 SW12
S12
SW10 SW11
S11 SW16
SW9
SW14 SW15
SW13 S1
S3 S2
S4
THM4
Fig. 3-5

3-7
[D] Data writing
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1 S10
ERS-K
ERS-C
ERS-M
ERS-Y
Fig. 3-6

3-8
[E] Fuser unit
M5
M4
THM2
S13
LAMP1,
THM1 LAMP2
THMO1
THMO2
THM3
Fig. 3-7

3-9
[F] Image quality control
S8
SOL1
S6
S7
Fig. 3-8

3 - 10
[G] Paper feeding unit
CLT2
CLT1
S18
M2
S19
SW8 S20
SW6
SW7 S5
Fig. 3-9

3 - 11
[H] Automatic duplexing unit, bypass feed unit
M12
ADU S14
S15
CLT4 S17
S16
Fig. 3-10

3 - 12
[I] PC board, power supply
LGC
SSD
PFC
SYS
EEPROM
PS
F3
HVT
SW4 INLET
SRAM F1
Main Memory
F2
CFD
Fig. 3-11

3 - 13
[J] Cover switch, Damp heater
SW5
DH1
SW3
SW2
SW1
THMO4
DH3
DH2
THMO3
Fig. 3-12

3 - 14
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components
The column “P-I” shows the page and item number in the parts list.
3.3.1 Motors, fans
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

M1 SCAN-MOT Driving the carriages Fig. 3-3 19-8
3
Scan motor
M2 FEED/DEV-MOT Driving the registration rollers, feed Fig. 3-3 17-35
Paper feeding/developer unit roller and developer unit
drive motor
M3 DRM-SW-MOT Transmitting/releasing the drive to Fig. 3-5 17-39
Mono/color switching motor the Y/M/C drums
M4 FUS-MOT Driving the fuser Fig. 3-7 18-7
Fuser motor
M5 EXIT-MOT Driving the exit roller Fig. 3-7 18-14
Exit motor
M6 DRM/TBU-MOT Driving the drum Fig. 3-5 15-43
Drum / TBU motor Driving the transfer belt
M7 USD-TNR-MOT Driving the paddle in the waste Fig. 3-4 24-9
Waste toner paddle motor toner box (agitating the
accumulated waste toner)
M8 TNR-MOT-Y Transporting toner from the Y Fig. 3-4 36-7
Toner motor-Y toner cartridge to the developer
unit
M9 TNR-MOT-M Transporting toner from the M Fig. 3-4 36-7
Toner motor-M toner cartridge to the developer
unit
M10 TNR-MOT-C Transporting toner from the C Fig. 3-4 36-7
Toner motor-C toner cartridge to the developer
unit
M11 TNR-MOT-K Transporting toner from the K Fig. 3-4 36-7
Toner motor-K toner cartridge to the developer
unit
M12 ADU-MOT Driving the automatic duplexing Fig. 3-10 41-16
ADU motor unit
F1 SYS-FAN-MOT Cooling down the SYS board Fig. 3-11 9-11
SYS cooling fan
F2 OZN-FAN-MOT Suctioning ozone generated at Fig. 3-11 7-6
Ozone exhaust fan charging
F3 PS-FAN-MOT Cooling down the switching Fig. 3-11 5-6
PS cooling/Ozone suctioning fan regulator
3.3.2 Sensors and switches

S1 ATTNR-SNR-K Detecting the toner density in the K Fig. 3-5 33-4
Auto-toner sensor-K developer unit
S2 ATTNR-SNR-C Detecting the toner density in the Fig. 3-5 33-4
Auto-toner sensor-C C developer unit

3 - 15
S3 ATTNR-SNR-M Detecting the toner density in the Fig. 3-5 33-4
Auto-toner sensor-M M developer unit
S4 ATTNR-SNR-Y Detecting the toner density in the Y Fig. 3-5 33-4
Auto-toner sensor-Y developer unit
S5 CST1-EMP-SNR Detecting the presence of paper in Fig. 3-9 4-6
1st drawer empty sensor the 1st drawer
S6 RGST-PASS-SNR Detecting paper transport at the Fig. 3-8 14-5
Registration pass sensor registration roller section
S7 IMG-POS-SNR-F Detecting the density of a toner Fig. 3-8 14-6
Image position aligning sensor image (test pattern) developed on
(Front) the transfer belt surface (front)
S8 IMG-POS-SNR-R Detecting the density of a toner Fig. 3-8 14-6
Image position aligning sensor image (test pattern) developed on
(Rear)/Image quality sensor the transfer belt surface (rear)
Detecting the rear side position a
toner image (test pattern)
developed on the transfer belt
S9 USD-TNR-PDL-SNR Detecting the rotation status of the Fig. 3-4 24-4
Waste toner paddle rotation waste toner paddle (Detecting the
detection sensor waste toner full)
S10 TEMP/HUMI-SNR Detecting the ambient Fig. 3-6 5-34
Temperature/humidity sensor temperature/humidity of the
equipment
S11 DRM-SW-SNR Detecting contact/release status of Fig. 3-5 17-36
Drum switching detection sensor the drive to the Y/M/C drums
S12 1ST-TRNS-SW-SNR Detecting contact/release status of Fig. 3-5 16-5
1st transfer roller status detection the 1st transfer roller for each color
sensor
S13 EXIT-SNR Detecting paper exit Fig. 3-7 39-25
Exit sensor
S14 ADU-U-SNR Detecting transported paper at the Fig. 3-10 41-19
ADU entrance sensor automatic duplexing unit entrance
section
S15 ADU-L-SNR Detecting transported paper inside Fig. 3-10 41-19
ADU exit sensor the automatic duplexing unit
S16 SFB-FEED-SNR Detecting transported paper fed Fig. 3-10 42-9
Bypass feed sensor from the bypass feed unit
S17 PWA-F-SFB Detecting the width of paper on the Fig. 3-10 20-6
Paper width detection PC board bypass tray
(SFB board)
S18 CLNG-SNR Detecting whether the paper is Fig. 3-9 14-19
Paper clinging detection sensor clinging to the transfer belt or not
S19 RGST-SNR Detecting paper transport at the Fig. 3-9 13-5
Registration sensor registration roller section
S20 TRANS-SNR Detecting paper transport at the Fig. 3-9 13-5
Feed sensor from the bypass feed unit, drawer,
and ADU.
S21 PLTN-SNR1 Detecting the opening/closing Fig. 3-3 19-13
Platen sensor-1 status of the platen cover or RADF
S22 PLTN-SNR2 Detecting the opening/closing Fig. 3-3 19-13
Platen sensor-2 status of the platen cover or RADF

3 - 16
S23 HOME-SNR Detecting the carriage home Fig. 3-3 10-5
Carriage home position sensor position
S24 APS1 Detecting original size Fig. 3-3 10-12
Automatic original detection
sensor-1
S25 APS2 Detecting original size Fig. 3-3 10-12
Automatic original detection (for LT size)
sensor-2
3
SW1 FRT-COV-SW Detecting the opening/closing Fig. 3-12 24-20
Front cover switch status of the front cover
SW2 F-COV-INTLCK-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 3-12 5-10
Front cover interlock switch to the switching regulator (voltage-
generating circuit interlocked with
these covers) according to the
opening/closing status of the front
cover or automatic duplexing unit
(Cover open: Shut off)
SW3 S-COV-INTLCK-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 3-12 5-10
Side cover interlock switch to the switching regulator (voltage-
generating circuit interlocked with
these covers) according to the
opening/closing status of the front
cover or automatic duplexing unit
(Cover open: Shut off)
SW4 MAIN-SW Turning the power of the Fig. 3-11 6-3
Main power switch equipment ON/OFF
SW5 SIDE-COV-SW Detecting the opening/closing Fig. 3-12 7-23
Side cover switch status of the side cover
SW6 CST-SIZE1-SW Detecting the size of paper Fig. 3-9 7-2
1st drawer size detection switch-1
SW7 CST-SIZE2-SW Detecting the size of paper Fig. 3-9 7-2
SW8 CST1-SW Detecting the presence of the 1st Fig. 3-9 6-39
1st drawer detection switch drawer
SW9 Y-DRUM-SW Detecting whether the Y drum is Fig. 3-5 31-2
Y drum old/new detection switch the old or the new one
SW10 M-DRUM-SW Detecting whether the M drum is Fig. 3-5 31-2
M drum old/new detection switch the old or the new one
SW11 C-DRUM-SW Detecting whether the C drum is Fig. 3-5 31-2
C drum old/new detection switch the old or the new one
SW12 K-DRUM-SW Detecting whether the K drum is Fig. 3-5 31-2
K drum old/new detection switch the old or the new one
SW13 Y-DEV-SW Detecting whether the Y developer Fig. 3-5 31-2
Y developer unit old/new detection unit is the old or the new one
switch
SW14 M-DEV-SW Detecting whether the M developer Fig. 3-5 31-2
M developer unit old/new detection unit is the old or the new one
switch
SW15 C-DEV-SW Detecting whether the C developer Fig. 3-5 31-2
C developer unit old/new detection unit is the old or the new one
switch

3 - 17
SW16 K-DEV-SW Detecting whether the K developer Fig. 3-5 31-2
K developer unit old/new detection unit is the old or the new one
switch
3.3.3 Electromagnetic spring clutches

CLT1 RGST-CLT Driving the registration roller Fig. 3-9 17-45
Registration clutch
CLT2 FEED-CLT Driving the feed roller of the 1st Fig. 3-9 17-15
Feed clutch drawer
CLT3 1ST-TRNS-CLT Driving the contacting/releasing of Fig. 3-5 15-40
1st transfer contact/release clutch the transfer belt and the drum
CLT4 SFB-FEED-CLT Driving the feed roller of the Fig. 3-10 21-13
Bypass feed clutch bypass feed unit
3.3.4 Solenoids

SOL1 SNR-SHUT-SOL Driving the sensor shutter of the Fig. 3-5 14-32
Sensor shutter solenoid image position aligning sensor
(front / rear) and image quality
sensor
3.3.5 PC boards

CCD PWA-F-CCD Scanning originals with CCD Fig. 3-3 10-9
CCD driving PC board (CCD
board)
DSP PWA-F-DSP Controlling the whole control panel Fig. 3-3 3-21
Display PC board (DSP board)
KEY PWA-F-KEY Controlling the key switches and Fig. 3-3 3-22
Key PC board (KEY board) LEDs
CTIF PWA-F-CTIF Interface for detecting the toner Fig. 3-4 36-2
Toner cartridge interface PC cartridge (Detecting the CTRG
board (CTIF board) board)
CTRG PWA-F-CTRG Storing the status of the toner Fig. 3-4 -
Toner cartridge PC board (CTRG cartridge
board))
ADU PWA-F-ADU Controlling the automatic Fig. 3-10 41-16
ADU control PC board (ADU duplexing unit
board)
CFD PWA-F-CFD Controlling the feed section Fig. 3-11 6-1
Feed control PC board (CFD
board)
SYS PWA-F-SYS Controlling the whole system and Fig. 3-11 9-19
System control PC board (SYS image processing
board) Controlling the scanning section
LGC PWA-F-LGC Controlling the print engine section Fig. 3-11 9-9
Logic PC board (LGC board)
3 - 18
SRAM PWA-F-SRAM Storing the setting or adjustment Fig. 3-11 9-13
SRAM board value, etc. used for the control by
the system control PC board
PFC Paper feeding control PC board Controlling paper feeding of PFU / Fig. 3-11 1-7
(PFC board) : Option PFP / LCF / Saddle stitch finisher.
3.3.6 Lamps and heaters 3

EXP LP-EXPO Exposing originals Fig. 3-3 11-3
Exposure lamp
LED1 LP-LED-Y Exposing the Y drum Fig. 3-6 31-21
LED printer head-Y
LED2 LP--LED-M Exposing the M drum Fig. 3-6 31-21
LED printer head-M
LED3 LP--LED-C Exposing the C drum Fig. 3-6 31-21
LED printer head-C
LED4 LP--LED-K Exposing the K drum Fig. 3-6 31-21
LED printer head-K
ERS-Y LP-ERS-Y Eliminating residual charge on the Fig. 3-6 31-15
Discharge LED-Y Y drum surface
ERS-M LP-ERS-M Eliminating residual charge on the Fig. 3-6 31-15
Discharge LED-M M drum surface
ERS-C LP-ERS-C Eliminating residual charge on the Fig. 3-6 31-15
Discharge LED-C C drum surface
ERS-K LP-ERS-K Eliminating residual charge on the Fig. 3-6 31-15
Discharge LED-K K drum surface
LAMP1 LP-HTR-C Heating the center section of the Fig. 3-7 37-8
Center heater lamp fuser roller
LAMP2 LP-HTR-S Heating the section of the both Fig. 3-7 37-8
Side heater lamp sides of the fuser roller
DH1 SCN-DH-L Preventing condensation of the Fig. 3-12 10-17
Scanner damp heater mirrors of the scanner
DH2 DRM-DH-L Preventing condensation of the Fig. 3-12 4-20
Drum damp heater (Left) drum
DH3 DRM-DH-R Preventing condensation of the Fig. 3-12 4-19
Drum damp heater (Right) drum
3.3.7 Thermistors, thermostats

THM1 THMS-FR-C Detecting the surface temperature Fig. 3-6 38-4
Fuser roller center thermistor of the center of the fuser roller
THM2 THMS-FR-S Detecting the surface temperature Fig. 3-6 38-4
Fuser roller side thermistor of the side of the fuser roller
THM3 THMS-FR-E Detecting the surface temperature Fig. 3-7 38-4
Fuser roller edge thermistor of the front end of the fuser roller
THM4 THMS-DRM Detecting the surface temperature Fig. 3-7 31-11
Drum thermistor of the drum

3 - 19
THMO1 THERMO-FR-C Preventing overheating of the Fig. 3-7 37-6
Fuser roller center thermostat center portion of the fuser roller
THMO2 THERMO-FR-S Preventing overheating of the rear Fig. 3-7 37-6
Fuser roller rear thermostat portion of the fuser roller
THMO3 THERMO-DRM-DH-L Controlling the temperature of the Fig. 3-12 4-22
Drum damp heater thermostat drum damp heater
(Left)
THMO4 THERMO-DRM-DH-R Controlling the temperature of the Fig. 3-12 4-21
Drum damp heater thermostat drum damp heater
(Right)
3.3.8 Others

TCP TCP Displaying and entering various Fig. 3-3 3-29
Touch panel kinds of information
EEPRO EEPROM Storing the setting or adjustment Fig. 3-11 9-14
M Electrically Erasable value, etc. used for the control by
Programmable Read Only the logic PC board
Memory
SSD SSD Saving program data and image Fig. 3-11 9-18
Solid State Drive data
Main Main memory Saving data and programs Fig. 3-11 9-20
memory temporarily (Also used as page
memory in this equipment.)
PS PS-ACC Generating DC voltage and Fig. 3-11 4-17
Switching regulator supplying it to each section of the
equipment
HVT PS-HVT Generating high-voltage and Fig. 3-11 8-17
High-voltage transformer supplying it to the following
sections
• Main charger needle electrode
• Main charger grid
• Developer bias
• Transfer bias

3 - 20
3.4 Copy Process
2
Original exposure 8 Fusing
Paper exit
LED lamp Hearter lamps
3
Data reading (scanning)
6 1st transfer
3
CCD
7
2nd transfer
Image processing
Toner
Carrier
5
Photocon-
9
Black development ductive drum Cleaning
Magnetic roller bias
(-) Discharging (LED array)

4 10
Data writing Bypass feeding
LED head 1
Drawer feeding
Charger (grid voltage)
PFP/LCF feeding
Fig. 3-13
(1) Charging: Places a negative charge on the (6) 1st transfer: Transfers the visible image
surface of the photoconductive drum. (toner) on photoconductive drum to the
transfer belt.
 
(2) Original exposure: Converts images on the (7) 2nd transfer: Transfers the visible image
original into optical signals. (toner) on the transfer belt to paper.
 
(3) Data reading: The optical image signals (8) Fusing: Fuses the toner image to the paper
are read into CCD and converted into by applying heat and pressure.
electrical signals.
 
(4) Data writing: The electrical image signals (9) Blade cleaning: While scraping off the
are changed to light signals (by LED residual toner from the drum by the blade.
emission) which expose the surface of the
photoconductive drum.
 
(5) Development: Negatively-charged toner is (10) (–) Discharging: Eliminates the residual (–)
made to adhere to the photoconductive charge from the surface of the
drum, producing a visible image. photoconductive drum.


3 - 21
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO2040C/2540C/3040C/3540C/4540
e-STUDIO2040C/2540C/3040C/
Process 20ppm/25ppm/LL20ppm/LL25ppm
3540C/4540C
1. Drum OD-FC25 (OPC drum) OD-FC30 (OPC drum)
Photoconducti Highly sensitized drum (ø30) 
Sensitivity
ve drum
2. Charging Scorotron type Scorotron type
-300 to -1200 V (grid voltage) -300 to -1100 V (grid voltage)
(adjusting by image quality (adjusting by image quality
control) control)
3. Data writing Light source Semiconductor laser LED printer head
Light 3.5 nJ/mm2 -
amount
4. Image control Image quality control by 
detecting toner adhesion amount
5. Magnetic One magnetic roller 
Development roller
Auto-toner Magnetic bridge-circuit method 
detection
Toner Toner cartridge replacing 
supply method
Toner- Density detection method 
empty
detection
Toner NAD T-FC25-K, T-FC28-Y NAD/NAH T-FC30-K, T-FC30-Y
T-FC25-M, T-FC28-C T-FC30-M, T-FC30-C
MJD T-FC25E-K, T-FC28E-Y MJD T-FC30E-K, T-FC30E-Y
T-FC25E-M, T-FC28E-C T-FC30E-M, T-FC30E-C
CND T-FCC-K, T-FC25C-Y CND T-FC30C-K, T-FC30C-Y
T-FC25FC25C-M, T- T-FC30C-M, T-FC30C-C
FC25C-C OthersT-FC30D-K, T-FC30D-Y
OthersT-FC25D-K, T-FC25D-Y T-FC30D-M, T-FC30D-C
T-FC25D-M, T-FC25D-C (K: Black, Y: Yellow, M: Magenta,
(K: Black, Y: Yellow, M: Magenta, C: Cyan)
C: Cyan)
Developer D-FC28-K (black) D-FC30-K (black)
material D-FC28-Y (yellow) D-FC30-Y (yellow)
D-FC28-M (magenta) D-FC30-M (magenta)
D-FC28-C (cyan) D-FC30-C (cyan)
Developer DC -200 to -900V (adjusting by DC -200 to -900V (adjusting by
bias image quality control) image quality control)
AC 1100 V / 7.5 to 10 kHz
6. Transfer 1st transfer Transfer belt method 
2nd Transfer roller method 
transfer:
7. Separation Self-separation by transfer belt 
and 2nd transfer roller
8. Method Blade cleaning 
Photoconducti Recovered Non-reusable 
ve drum toner
cleaning

3 - 22
e-STUDIO2040C/2540C/3040C/
Process 20ppm/25ppm/LL20ppm/LL25ppm
3540C/4540C
9. Transfer belt cleaning Blade cleaning 
10.Discharge LED array (red) 
11.Fusing Method Belt fusing system Roller fusing system
Heat roller: -
Aluminium roller (ø30)
(Heater lamp: 600 W x 2)
3
(Heater lamp: 280 W x 1 (e-
STUDIO4540C)
Fuser belt: -
PFA tube belt (ø60)
Fuser roller: Fuser roller:
Sponge roller (ø38) Aluminum rubber coated roller,
(Surface-PFA tube)(ø30)
(Heater lamp: 570 W x 2))
Pressure roller: Pressure roller:
Silicon rubber roller, Silicon rubber roller,
(Surface-PFA tube)(ø40) (Surface-PFA tube)(ø30)
(Heater lamp: 280 W x 1) (Heater lamp: -)
Cleaning None 
Heater ON/OFF control and power 
temperature control by thermistor
Heater Heater lamp 

3 - 23
3.6 General Operation
3.6.1 Overview of Operation

Operation of equipment Operation during initializing, pre-running and ready
Drawer feed copying by the [START] button
Copying operation Bypass feed copying
Interrupt copying

3 - 24
3.6.2 Description of Operation
[ 1 ] Warming-up
1. Initialization
 Power ON
 Heater lamps (LAMP1, LAMP2) ON
 Set number “1”, reproduction ratio “100%” and “Wait Warming Up” are displayed.
 Fan motors ON
 Initialization of feeding system 3
- Each drawer tray goes up.
 Pre-running operation is stopped after five seconds.
- Drum/TBU motor (M6) is turned ON.
- Mono/color switching motor (M3) is turned ON and OFF.
 Cleaning of transfer belt
- (Performs color registration control.)*1
- (Performs image quality control.)*1
- Drum/TBU motor (M6) is turned OFF.
Initialization of scanning system
- The carriage moves to the home position.
- The carriage moves to the peak detection position.
- The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON.
- Peak detection (white color is detected by the shading correction plate)
- The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF.
- Pre-scanning <forward/backward> moves by 420 mm <A3 (landscape)>.
“READY (WARMING UP)” is displayed.
2. Pre-running operation
Pre-running operation is started when the temperature of the fuser roller surface reaches a certain
level.
Fuser motor (M4) is turned ON.
- Fuser roller rotation.
Fuser motor (M4) is turned OFF.
- Fuser roller rotation stop.
3. When the temperature of the fuser roller surface becomes sufficient for fusing,
 “READY” is displayed.
*1: Image quality control and color registration control should be performed only at change of
environment or periodical performing timing.
[ 2 ] Ready (ready for copying)

 Buttons on the control panel enabled
 When no button is pressed for a certain period of time,
- Set number “1” and reproduction ratio “100%” are displayed. Equipment returns to the normal
ready state.

3 - 25
[ 3 ] Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper feeding)
1. Press the [START] button ON
“READY” changes to “COPYING”
Exposure lamp (EXP) turned ON
Scan motor (M1) turned ON Carriages-1 and -2 move forward
Drum/TBU motor (M6), Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2), and fuser motor (M4)
turned ON
- Drum, transfer belt, fuser unit, and developer unit are driven
2. Drawer paper feeding

Fans rotated at high speed and feed clutch (CLT2) turned ON
- Feed roller start to rotate
Paper reaches the feed sensor (S20)
- Feed sensor (S20) is turned ON
Paper reaches the registration roller
- Registration sensor (S19) is turned ON and aligning is performed
Feed clutch (CLT2) is turned OFF after a certain period of time
3. A certain period of time passed after the carriage operation

Registration clutch (CLT1) is turned ON  Paper is transported to the
transfer area
Copy counter operates
4. Completion of scanning
Exposure lamp (EXP) turned OFF
Scan motor (M1) turned OFF
Registration clutch (CLT1) is turned OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper passed the
registration roller)
“READY (PRINTING)” is displayed
5. Printing operation
1) Color printing operation
Mono/color switching motor (M3) turned ON
- The drum switching detection sensor (S19) checks whether the equipment is in the color or black
printing status, and if it is in the black printing status, the motor (M3) is turned ON to switch the
status to color printing.
Drum/TBU motor (M6), discharge LED-Y, -M, -C, -K (ERS) turned ON
Main charger bias turned ON
1st transfer contact/release clutch (CLT3) turned ON
- Contact the 1st transfer rollers (Y, M and C) to the transfer belt
YMCK developer bias (DC) and Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2) turned ON
2nd transfer bias turned ON
LED emission (yellow image)
1st transfer bias (Y) turned ON
- 1st transfer of yellow image (Yellow image is transferred to the transfer belt)
1st transfer bias (Y) turned OFF
LED emission (magenta image)
1st transfer bias (M) turned ON
- 1st transfer of magenta image (Magenta image is transferred to the transfer belt)
1st transfer bias (M) turned OFF
LED emission (cyan image)
1st transfer bias (C) turned ON
- 1st transfer of cyan image (Cyan image is transferred to the transfer belt)
1st transfer bias (C) turned OFF
LED emission (black image)
1st transfer bias (K) turned ON
- 1st transfer of black image (Black image is transferred to the transfer belt)
1st transfer bias (K) turned OFF
3 - 26
1st transfer contact/release clutch (CLT3) turned ON
- Release the 1st transfer rollers (Y, M and C) from the transfer belt
2nd transfer of YMCK image (YMCK image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper)
Main charger turned OFF
Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2) and developer bias (YMC and K) turned OFF
2nd transfer bias turned OFF
Drum/TBU motor (M6), discharge LED-Y, -M, -C, -K (ERS) turned OFF
2) Black printing operation 3

Mono/color switching motor (M3) turned ON
- The drum switching detection sensor (S19) checks whether the equipment is in the color or black
printing status, and if it is in the color printing status, the motor (M3) is turned ON to switch the status
to black printing.
Drum/TBU motor (M6), discharge LED-K (ERS) turned ON
Main charger bias turned ON
K developer bias (DC) and Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2) turned ON
2nd transfer bias turned ON
LED emission (black image)
1st transfer bias (K) turned ON
- 1st transfer of black image (Black image is transferred to the transfer belt)
1st transfer bias (K) turned OFF
2nd transfer of K image (K image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper)
Main charger turned OFF
Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2) turned OFF
2nd transfer bias turned OFF
Drum/TBU motor (M6), discharge LED-K (ERS) turned OFF
6. Paper exiting
The exit sensor (S13) detects the leading edge of the paper
Exit motor (M5) turned ON
The exit sensor (S13) detects the trailing edge of the paper
Discharge LED (ERS) turned OFF
Drum/TBU motor (M6), Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2),
fuser motor (M4) and exit motor (M5) turned OFF
The polygonal motor (M4) rotates at low speed.
Drum, fuser unit and developer unit are stopped
- Fans return to rotate at the normal rotation speed
“READY” is displayed and the equipment enters into ready mode

3 - 27
[ 4 ] Bypass feed copying
1. Insert a paper into the bypass tray.
Bypass paper sensor (S16) is turned ON.
- “Ready for bypass feeding” is displayed.
Carriages move to the home position.
2. Press the [START] button ON

“Ready for bypass feeding” changes to “COPYING”.
Exposure lamp (EXP) ON
Scan motor (M1) ONCarriages-1 and -2 move forward.
Drum/TBU motor (M6), Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2), and fuser motor (M4)
turned ON
- The drum, transfer belt, fuser unit and developer unit are driven.
3. Bypass feeding
Fans rotate at high speed.
Bypass feed clutch (CLT4) turned ON.
- The bypass feed roller is lowered.
Aligning operation
Paper reaches the registration roller.
After a certain period of time, the bypass feed clutch (CLT4) turned OFF.
4. Hereafter, operations (3) through (6) of “5.2.3Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper feeding)” are
repeated.
[ 5 ] Interruption copying
1. Press the [INTERRUPT] button
LED “INTERRUPT” is turned ON.
Copying operation in progress is temporarily stopped, and the carriages-1 and -2 return to
appropriate positions.
“Job interrupted job 1 saved” is displayed.
Automatic density and reproduction ratio 100% are set. Set number remains the same.
2. Select the desired copy condition
3. After interruption copying is finished:

“Press interrupt to resume job 1” is displayed.
LED “INTERRUPT” is turned OFF by pressing the [INTERRUPT] button, and the equipment
returns to the status before the interruption.
“Ready to resume job 1” is displayed.
4. Press the [START] button

The copying operation before the interruption is resumed.

3 - 28
3.6.3 Detection of Abnormality
When something abnormal has occurred in the equipment, symbols corresponding to the type of
abnormality are displayed.
[ 1 ] Types of abnormality
1. Abnormality cleared without turning OFF the door switch
(A) Add paper
(B) Paper misfeed in bypass
3
2. Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the door switch
(C) Misfeed in equipment
(D) No toner in the cartridge
(E) EPU not installed properly
(F) Waste toner box replacement
3. Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main power switch
(G) Call for service

3 - 29
[ 2 ] Description of abnormality
[A] Add paper
[In case of the equipment drawer or PFP drawer] (When drawer is not installed)
Drawer not detected
Drawer is not installed:

Drawer is installed but there is no paper in it:
No paper
A signal sent to the control circuit
Drawer area of the control panel blinks

(When the drawer is selected)
[START] button is disabled.
[In case of the PFU, PFP or LCF drawers] (When drawer is installed)
Based on the combination of the tray-up motor (M21) movement and the status of tray-up sensor and
empty sensor, CPU detects the presence of paper.
• When the power is turned ON or LCF drawer is inserted (When the power is turned ON or
equipment/PFP drawers are inserted).
LCF performs initialization.
Detects the presence of paper

Tray-up motor ON - The tray goes up
At this time, the tray-up sensor and LCF empty sensor are OFF.
 When the tray-up sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time it means that
the tray is in abnormal condition
“Add paper” is displayed regardless of presence/absence of paper.
 Cleared by turning the power ON/OFF

3 - 30
 Tray-up sensor is turned ON in a fixed period of time
- The tray-up motor stops.
At this time, if the empty sensor is ON: It is judged that there is paper.
OFF: It is judged that there is no paper.

3
Drawer area of the control panel

blinks.
• When the paper in the drawer gets short during copying,
 The tray-up sensor turned OFF
 The tray-up motor turned ON - Tray goes up
 Tray-up sensor turned ON
 Tray-up motor stopped
• Empty sensor turned OFF during the copying in spite of the tray-up sensor is ON
It is judged that there is no paper.
Drawer area of the control panel blinks.

The copying operation is stopped.
[B] Paper misfeed in bypass
During bypass feeding

Bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is turned ON
Registration sensor (S19) is turned ON

* Registration sensor (S19) is not turned ON in a fixed period of time (E120)

3 - 31
Bypass misfeeding
Bypass misfeed symbol is displayed
The copying operation is disabled.
Solution: The bypass sensor (S16) is turned OFF by removing the paper from the bypass tray.

3 - 32
[C] Misfeed in equipment
• Exit sensor (S13) detects jamming of the leading edge of paper
Registration clutch (CLT1) turned ON

ON 3
Registration clutch
Fixed time
ON
Exit sensor
Exit sensor (S13) turned ON
If the exit sensor (S13) is not turned ON after
a fixed time, Timer
0 Fixed time
Paper jam (E010)

Paper jam (E010)The copying operation is Fig. 3-14
stopped.
• Exit sensor (S13) detects jamming of the trailing edge of paper
Registration clutch (CLT1) turned OFF

Registration clutch
OFF
Fixed time.
Exit sensor
ON
Exit sensor (S13) turned OFF
If the exit sensor (S13) is not turned OFF a
fixed time
Timer
Fixed time
Paper jam (E020)The copying operation is Paper jam (E020)

stopped. Fig. 3-15
• Immediately after the power ON
Any of all sensors on paper transport path detects paper (ON)
Paper jam (E030)
• Front cover is opened during copying
Paper jam (E410)

3 - 33
• Registration sensor (S19) detects jamming of the leading edge of paper:
The registration sensor (S19) is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the leading edge of
paper passed the transport roller.
Paper jam (E120, E200, E210, E300, E330 and E3C0)
• During paper feeding from ADU:

The registration sensor (S19) is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the ADU clutch
(CLT7) is turned ON.
Paper jam (E110)
• During paper transporting from ADU:

ADU entrance/exit sensors (S14/S15) do not detect the paper at the fixed timing
Paper jam (E510 and E520)
• During paper feeding from the equipment or PFP:

The registration sensor (S19) is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the feed clutch is
turned ON.
Paper jam (E220, E310, E320, E340 to E360, E3D0 and E3E0: Error code defers depending on
the paper source.)
[D] No toner in the cartridge
Toner density becomes low
Auto-toner sensor (S1/S2/S3/S4) detects the absence of the toner
Control circuit “Install new ** toner cartridge” is displayed: the copying operation disabled
Solution Open the front cover and replace the toner cartridge with new one.
: Toner is supplied  copying operation enabled

3 - 34
[E] EPU not installed properly
Disconnection of the connectors of the EPU
“Latch the developer unit” is displayed. 3

Solution: Install the EPU and close the front cover.

3 - 35
[F] Waste toner box replacement
• Waste toner box is full of used toner
Rotation of the paddle has not been detected for a specified period
“Dispose of used toner” is displayed
• Waste toner box full is detected during printing
Printing is stopped after the paper being printed is exited

Solution: Replace the waste toner box with new one and close the front cover.
[G] Call for service

Check the error code displayed on the control panel when “Call for service” appears, and handle the
abnormality in reference to the error code table.
P. 8-6 "8.2 Error Code List"

3 - 36
3.6.4 Hibernation function
A hibernation function is embedded in this equipment. This function allows the equipment to store the
last status of the system in the HDD immediately before the power is turned OFF, and to restart from
this stored status at the next boot-up. The equipment starts up in the specified time described in the
warmup time after the execution of the 2nd hibernation when the power is turned OFF and then back
ON correctly. *
For warming-up time, refer to P. 2-1 "2.1.1 General"
It is recommended to shut down the equipment while pressing the [ACCESS] button and the [POWER] 3
button simultaneously before maintenance. However, warming-up takes longer when the equipment
boots up next time since no hibernation is executed. The equipment therefore boots up in the
initialization status. "Checking" is displayed on the LCD screen when the equipment boots up normally
(without hibernation), and "Checking" is not displayed when hibernation is executed.
If hibernation is not performed when the power is turned OFF or the equipment boots up immediately
after the settings, warming-up takes longer. It differs depending on the usage conditions; warming-up
will take approx. 30 to 150 sec, though it takes approx. 20 sec. if hibernation is performed (normal
situation).
The following are the conditions which necessitate a longer warming-up time.
• Rebooting from TopAccess
• First booting after power interruption
• First booting after a self-diagnosis code is changed in the Service UI
• First booting after the power is turned OFF with the main power switch during the super sleep mode
• Installing options or finishers
• First booting after an option or a finisher is removed
• During toner supply
• Operating while "READY (WARMING UP)" is still on the control panel
• First booting after the [ACCESS] and [POWER] buttons are pressed and held until the power is shut
down
• Shutting down during network initialization
• First booting after the power is turned OFF in a procedure other than the correct one described in
the Quick Start Guide
* How to turn the power OFF correctly

Press the [POWER] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. Be sure to check that the
ON/OFF lamp (green) has stopped blinking and the touch panel screen and the lamp (green) have
gone off. Then turn the power OFF with the main power switch.

3 - 37
3.7 Control Panel
3.7.1 General Description

The control panel consists of button switches and touch-panel switches to operate the equipment and
select various modes, and LEDs and an LCD to display the state of the equipment or the messages.
When the operator’s attention is required, graphic symbols light or blink with messages explaining the
condition of the equipment in the LCD panel. When paper jams and “Call for service” occur, error codes
are also displayed to notify users of the problem.
A color LCD is used in this equipment so that visibility and operability are improved.
The [ON/OFF] button is placed on the control panel of this equipment. Use this button instead of the
main power switch to turn ON/OFF the power.
Press the [ON/OFF] button for 1 second or more to turn ON/OFF the power of the equipment.
Also, the [ON/OFF] button can be used in the following manner for example: press the [ON/OFF] button
while holding down the [0] and [5] buttons simultaneously to activate the Adjustment Mode (05).
However, if the equipment is in the super sleep mode, use the main power switch.
20ppm/25ppm
Fig. 3-16
LL20ppm/LL25ppm
Fig. 3-17

3 - 38
[1] Dot matrix LCD circuit
[ 1-1 ] Structure
800 x R,G,B x 480 dots
Fig. 3-18

3 - 39
3.8 Scanner

In the scanning section of this equipment, the surface of an original is irradiated with a direct light and
the reflected light is led through mirrors, a lens and a slit to CCD where optical-to-electrical conversion
is performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal. This analog signal is
changed to a digital signal, which then undertakes various corrective processes necessary for image
formation. After that, arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal, which is then transmitted to
the data writing section.
In this equipment, a reduction-type CCD for color processing is used. What this CCD differs from black-
and-white CCDs is that its devices are arranged in 3 lines and covered with color filters (Red, Green,
and Blue). These lines are composed with 3-line color devices and black-and-white device with no filter.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8]
Fig. 3-19
[1] ADF original glass

[2] Carriage-2
[3] Reflector
[4] Exposure lamp
[5] Carriage-1
[6] Original glass
[7] Drive pulley
[8] CCD board
[9] Lens
[10] Automatic original detection sensor
[11] Carriage home position sensor
[12] Platen sensor

3 - 40
3.8.2 Construction
Scanner
Original glass Original glass
ADF original glass
Carriage-1 Exposure lamp (EXP)
Reflector
Mirror-1 3
Carriage-2 Mirror-2
Mirror-3
Lens unit Lens
CCD driving PC board (CCD)
Automatic original 20ppm/25ppm only
detection sensor
(S24, S25)
Driving section Scan motor (M1) • 2-phase stepping motor
• Driving the carriage-1 and carriage-
2
Other Carriage home position sensor (S23)
Platen sensor (S21)
Platen sensor (S22)

3 - 41
3.8.3 Functions
The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system:
1. Original glass
This is a glass for placing original. The light from the exposure lamp (EXP) is irradiated to the
original through this glass.
The ADF original glass is used when original is read with the Automatic Document Feeder. Original
is transported on the ADF original glass by the Automatic Document Feeder, and the transported
original is read under the ADF original glass by the carriage. Do not use such solvents as alcohol
when cleaning the surface of the ADF original glass, because it is coated so as not to be scratched
by originals.
2. Carriage-1
Carriage-1 consists of the exposure lamp (EXP), reflector, mirror-1, etc. It is driven by the scan
motor (M1) and scans an original on the glass.
[4] [5]
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
[3]
[3]
Fig. 3-20
[1] Exposure lamp

[2] Reflector
[3] Mirror-1
[4] Original glass
[5] Original
- Exposure lamp (EXP)

This lamp is the light source to irradiate the original on the glass. (LED lamp)
- Reflector
This is a plate to efficiently direct the light from the exposure lamp (EXP) to the surface of the
original on the glass.
- Mirror-1
This mirror directs the light reflected from the original to the mirror-2 described later.

3 - 42
3. Carriage-2
Carriage-2 mainly consists of the mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. and directs the reflected light from the
mirror-1 through the mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens.
This carriage is driven by the same scan motor (M1) as that for the carriage-1 at half the scanning
speed of the carriage-1 (The scanning distance is also half that of the carriage-1).
3
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-21
[1] Mirror-2
[2] Mirror-3
4. Lens unit
The light reflected from the mirror-3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is
fixed in a position.
5. CCD driving PC board (CCD)

Processes such as signal amplification, signal integration and A/D conversion are applied on the
electrical signal which was converted by CCD.
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-22
[1] Lens
[2] CCD board
6. Automatic original detection sensor (S1, S2)

The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the automatic original
detection sensors (S1, S2) fixed on the base frame without moving the carriage-1.

3 - 43
[ 1 ] Scanning operation
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5] [4]
Fig. 3-23
[1] Scan motor

[2] Motor speed-reduction pulley
[3] Wire pulley
[4] Wire
[5] Idler pulley
[6] Carriage-2
[7] Carriage-1
• Scanning of an original placed on the original glass

This motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 through the timing belt and carriage wire. First, the scan
motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 to their respective home positions. The home positions are
detected when the carriage-1 passes the home position sensor (S23). When the [START] button
is pressed, the both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass.
• Scanning of an original placed on the RADF

The carriage-1 stays at the shading position during shading correction, and at the scanning
position during scanning operation.
• Carriage speed
The Carriage speed of the original placed on the original glass in the color mode is the same as
that in the black mode.

3 - 44
3.8.5 Process of detection of original size
In this equipment, detection of original sizes is performed with the combination of a CCD and the
automatic original detection sensors-1 and -2 (S24 and S25).
A size in the primary scanning direction is detected by the CCD while that in the secondary scanning
direction is detected by the sensors.
[ 1 ] Original size detection procedure

3
S25
S24
A B C
S21
S22
Fig. 3-24
A: Platen cover (or RADF) fully opened

B: Platen cover (or RADF) opened by 20 degrees - Detected by the platen sensor-1 (S21)
C: Platen cover (or RADF) closed - Detected by the platen sensors-1 & -2 (S21 & S22)
The position of the platen cover (or the RADF) is detected by the platen sensors-1 and -2 (S21 and
S22).
When the platen cover is fully opened, an original size is not detected. (Figure A)
When the platen cover is gradually closed and its tilt angle reaches approx. 20 degrees, the platen
sensor-1 (S21) detects that the platen cover is closed. (Figure B)
When this status is detected, the exposure lamp of the scanner emits light.
Then the emitted light is reflected by the original and read to the CCD as original size data.
The light reflected from an area with no original placed is very little, a size in the primary scanning
direction can be detected with the intensity of the reflected light. (Fig. 3-25/3-26: Size1 to Size 8)
When the platen cover is fully closed, the platen sensor-2 (S22) also detects that the platen cover is
closed. (Figure C)
When this status is detected, the automatic original detection sensors-1 and -2 (S24 and S25) detect a
size in the secondary scanning direction (and the presence of an original with the positions of the
sensors).
According to the sizes in the primary and secondary scanning directions detected in the procedures
above, the original size is specified.
As for the LT series, two automatic original detection sensors detect a size in the secondary scanning
direction due to their original size.

3 - 45
[ 2 ] Detection points
Sensor detection points [A4, K Series]
Size 1
S24
Size 2 A5-R
Size 3 B5-R
Size 4 16K-R
Size 5 A5 A4-R
Size 6 B5 B4
Size 7 16K 8K
Size 8 A4 A3
Fig. 3-25
Sensor detection points [LT Series]
S25
S24
Size 1 ST-R
Size 2 ST LT-R LG
Size 3 LT LD
Fig. 3-26

3 - 46
3.9 Writing Section

The writing section of this equipment uses LED printer heads.
An LED printer head is mounted on each of Y, M, C and K drums. The emission of the LED printer head
generates (exposes) latent images on the corresponding drum.
The LED gap spacer keeps a specified distance between the LED printer head and the drum.
The writing section radiates the LED light onto the photoconductive drum responding to the digital 3
image signals transmitted from the scanner, USB, network, etc. to create the latent image.
[4] [12]
[3] [11]
[2] [10]
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-27
[1] LED printer head-Y

[2] LED printer head-M
[3] LED printer head-C
[4] LED printer head-K
[5] LED printer head contact/release lever (Y)
[6] LED printer head contact/release lever (M)
[7] LED printer head contact/release lever (C)
[8] LED printer head contact/release lever (K)
[9] Y drum
[10] M drum
[11] C drum
[12] K drum

3 - 47
3.9.2 General description of LED printer head
An LED printer head, which uses an LED (light-emitting diode) as a light source, is equipped for each
color, Y, M, C and K.
The LED light from the LED printer head is emitted to the drum through a lens.
A gap between the LED printer head and the drum in each color is kept constant with an LED gap
spacer.
If this gap is not at the specified value, a focus error may occur, resulting blurring on images.
Therefore an LED gap spacer is a PM part due to possible difference in the gap caused by friction.
Also a dirty lens may cause image troubles such as blurring.
[3]
[3]
[2] [5]
[1] [4]
[1]
Fig. 3-28
[1] LED printer head

[2] LED gap spacer (front/rear)
[3] Drum
[4] LED
[5] Lens
*An LED and a lens cannot be disassembled as they are the components of an LED printer head.
Two harnesses are connected to each LED printer head from the LGC board.
One is for power supply and the other is for control signals.
If any of them is disconnected (or has a loose connection), an image trouble may occur.
When a control signal is sent from the LGC board, the LED of the LED printer head is lit and emits light
to the drum for exposure.
5V Power
Contorol signal LED print head-Y
5V Power
Contorol signal LED print head-M

LGC Board
5V Power
LED print head-C
Contorol signal
5V Power
Contorol signal LED print head-K
Fig. 3-29

3 - 48
3.9.3 LED printer head lifting mechanism
The LED printer head is contacted or released by the LED printer head contact/release lever.
When this lever is held down to the front side of this equipment, the link arm is slid to the front side
together with the lever.
Since the LED printer head is positioned by the guide of the link arm, it is lowered (released) as the
guide is lowered.
A gap between the LED printer head and the drum in a contacting status is kept at a specified value by
the LED gap spacer.
3
[1] [4]
[5] [5]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 3-30
[1] Drum
[3] Link arm
[4] LED printer head contact/release lever
[5] LED gap spacer

3 - 49
3.9.4 Driving Section
The driving section of this equipment consists of 3 units.
• Drum TBU drive unit
• Monochrome/color switching unit
• Feeding/developing drive unit
[6] [1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
Fig. 3-31
[1] Drum TBU drive unit

[2] Paper feed development drive unit
[3] Monochrome/color switching unit
[4] Drum/TBU motor
[5] Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor
[6] Mono/color switching motor

3 - 50
[ 1 ] Drum TBU drive unit
The drum TBU drive unit is driven by the drum TBU motor to drive Y, M, C and K drums and the transfer
belt unit (TBU).
It also drives the contacting and releasing of the transfer belt.
[1] [2]
[12]
3
[4]
[3]
[8]
[12 ]
[7]
[11]
[6]
[10]
[5]
[9]
Fig. 3-32
[1] Drum TBU motor

[2] Drum TBU motor gear
[3] TBU drive roller
[4] Gear (row of gears)
[5] Y drum
[6] M drum
[7] C drum
[8] K drum
[9] Y developer unit
[10] M developer unit
[11] C developer unit
[12] K developer unit

3 - 51
[ 2 ] Feeding/developing drive unit
The feeding/developing drive unit is driven by the paper feeding/developer unit drive motor to drive the
developer unit and the paper feeding section.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 3-33

[2] Gear (row of gears)
[3] Coupling
[4] K developer unit

3 - 52
[ 3 ] Monochrome/color switching mechanism
The feeding/developing drive unit is driven by the paper feeding/developer unit drive motor to drive the
developer unit and the paper feeding section.
Switching of the monochrome and color modes is performed by the monochrome/color switching unit.
In the monochrome mode, the switching plate is positioned at "A" in the figure below and the
monochrome/color switching sensor (S11) is OFF.
At this time, the drive gears of the drum and the developer unit are not engaged. (Monochrome mode
operation) 3
When the mono/color switching motor (M3) starts rotating, the switching plate is moved and the
monochrome/color switching sensor (S11) is turned ON.
The coupling cam is rotated with a movement of the switching plate and then the idling gear and the
color drive gear are engaged.
Thus the rotation of the motor is transmitted to each gear in the color drive gear rows.
A: Monochrome mode B: Color mode
[3]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[4]
Fig. 3-34
[1] Monochrome/color switching unit

[2] Mono/color switching motor (M3)
[3] Switching plate
[4] Monochrome/color switching sensor (S11)
[5] Color coupling gear (driving the drum)
[6] Color drive gear (driving the drum)
[7] Color coupling gear (driving the developer unit)
[8] Color drive gear (driving the developer unit)

3 - 53
3.10 Paper Feeding System
3.10.1 General Descriptions

This chapter explains how the system works to pick up paper from the drawer or bypass tray and
transport it to the 2nd transfer position.
The paper feeding system mainly consists of the feed roller, registration roller, bypass paper sensor
(S16), drawer empty sensor (S5), bypass feed sensor (S16), registration sensor (S19) and drive
system for these components. The feed/DEV motor (M2) drives the above rollers.
[5]
[4] [6]
[3] [7]
[1] [2]
[8]
[9]
[14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
Fig. 3-35
[1] Drawer
[2] Feed sensor
[3] Registration sensor
[4] Registration roller
[5] Registration pass sensor
[6] Bypass feed roller
[7] Bypass feed sensor
[8] Bypass tray
[9] Separation pad
[10] Bypass separation pad
[11] Paper feed roller
[12] 1st drawer detection switch
[13] 1st drawer empty sensor
[14] 1st drawer size detection switch

3 - 54
3.10.2 Composition
Feeding system
Feed clutch CLT2
1st drawer empty sensor S5
1st drawer detection switch SW8
Bypass unit Bypass feed roller PM parts
Bypass separation pad PM parts 3
Bypass paper sensor S16
Bypass tray slide guide width detection SFB
PC board
Bypass feed clutch CLT4
Feed/DEV motor M2
Registration clutch CLT1
Registration roller
Registration sensor S19

3 - 55
3.10.3 Functions
1. Feed roller (Drawers and bypass feed)

This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transports the paper from the pickup roller to the
transport roller.
2. Separation pad (Drawer and bypass feed)

When two or more sheets of paper are transported from the feed roller, since the resistance force of
the separation pad is larger than the frictional force between the sheets, the lower sheets are not
transported any further.
3. Registration roller
Paper transported from the transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the
leading edge of the paper.
Then, the registration rollers rotate to transport the paper to the transfer unit.
4. Bypass paper sensor (S16)

This sensor detects if paper is set in the bypass tray. If it is, bypass feeding always comes before
drawer feeding.
5. Empty sensor (S5)

This is a transmissive-type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an
actuator. When there is no paper in the drawer, the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor, and
the sensor determines that there is no paper.
6. Registration sensor (S19)

This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller and the
trailing edge of the paper has passed the registration roller.
7. Drawer detection switch (SW8)

This switch detects if the drawer is fully inserted.
8. Drawer feed clutch (CLT2)

This is a clutch used to transmit the drive from the feed/dev motor to the feed roller.
When the clutch is turned ON, the feed roller rotates at high speed to transport paper.
9. Feed/dev motor (M2)

This motor drives the registration roller and transport rollers of the drawers and bypass tray.
10.Registration clutch (CLT1)

This is an electromagnetic clutch which drives the registration roller.
When the registration clutch (CLT1) is turned ON, the drive is transmitted from the paper feeding/
developer unit drive motor to rotate the registration roller.
11. Paper width detection board (SFB)

This sensor works directly with the sidewalls of the bypass tray to detect the paper width on the tray.

3 - 56
[ 1 ] Drive of rollers
The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows.
Paper feeding/developer unit 1st drawer feed clutch (CLT2) Paper feed roller
drive motor (M2)
Bypass feed clutch (CLT4) Bypass feed roller 3
Registration roller clutch (CLT1) Registration roller

3 - 57
[ 2 ] Operation of drawer pickup roller
When the drawer is inserted into the equipment, the lock located in the center of the drawer is released,
and the tray in the drawer is lifted up by the spring.
This makes the paper set in the tray contact the pickup roller when it is rotated.
The driving force of the Feed/DEV motor is transmitted through the pickup clutch to the pickup roller.
This feeding system has no mechanism specific for detecting the transported paper.
Therefore, whether the paper has been transported to the registration sensor within a specified period
of time or not is substituted for the paper jam detection.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-36
[1] Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2)

[2] Feed clutch (CLT2)
[3] Coupling
[4] Feed roller

3 - 58
[ 3 ] Separation of paper
This model is equipped with a separation pad which works to prevent multiple paper feeding. The
separation pad is pushed to the main paper feed roller by the spring force.
When two or more sheets of paper are fed, since the friction between two sheets of paper is smaller
than that between a sheet and the separation pad, the lower sheets are not transported any further
while the uppermost one is transported by the main paper feed roller.
[1] 3
[2]
B
Fig. 3-37
[1] Feed roller

[2] Separation pad
[3] Spring

3 - 59
[ 4 ] Operation of bypass pickup roller
The driving force transmitted through the bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is transmitted to the bypass feed
roller through the shaft. The roller is rotated by this driving force.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-38

[2] Gear
[3] Bypass feed clutch

3 - 60
[ 5 ] Separation of paper
This model is equipped with a separation pad which works to prevent multiple paper feeding. The
separation pad is pushed to the main paper feed roller by the spring force.
When two or more sheets of paper are fed, since the friction between two sheets of paper is smaller
than that between a sheet and the separation pad, the lower sheets are not transported any further
while the uppermost one is transported by the main paper feed roller.
3
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 3-39

[2] Bypass separation pad
[3] Spring

3 - 61
[ 6 ] General operation
[A] From power-ON to ready status

1. If either of the sensors on the transport path is ON (means there is paper on the transport path)
when the equipment is turned ON, it is determined that a paper jam has occurred and no operation
is enabled until the paper is removed.
[B] Ready status

1. When a drawer is inserted or removed at ready status, to check the availability of paper.
[C] Bypass feeding

• The bypass paper sensor (S16) detects availability of paper.
• The bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is turned ON and then the bypass pickup roller, bypass feed roller
and bypass transport roller are rotated and start feeding.
• The leading edge of paper turns ON the registration sensor (S19) and the paper is aligned by the
registration roller.
• The bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is turned OFF, and then the bypass pickup roller, bypass feed roller
and bypass transport roller are stopped.
• The registration clutch (CLT1) is turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd transfer position.
[D] Drawer feeding
[D-1] 1st drawer

• The feed clutch (CLT3) is turned ON, and the feed roller is rotated to start feeding paper.
• Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor (S19) and the paper is
aligned by the registration roller.
• The registration clutch (CLT1) is turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd transfer position.

3 - 62
3.11 Process Unit Related Section
3.11.1 General description

There are 4 cleaner units and 4 developer units, corresponding to the image forming process of the Y,
M, C and K colors. The main charger unit is installed with the cleaner units, while the discharge LEDs
are installed on the equipment side (EPU tray).
This chapter explains about the process unit and parts around this unit which are provided for image
formation. Except the developer unit, which is one of units composing the process unit, is described in 3
chapter 3.12 in detail.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [14]
[6] [10] [7] [11] [8] [12] [9] [13]
Fig. 3-40
[1] Toner (Y)

[2] Toner (M)
[3] Toner (C)
[4] Toner (K)
[5] Waste toner box
[6] Developer unit (Y)
[7] Developer unit (M)
[8] Developer unit (C)
[9] Developer unit (K)
[10] Process unit (Y)
[11] Process unit (M)
[12]Process unit (C)
[13] Process unit (K)
[14] Temperature/Humidity sensor

3 - 63
[1]
[14]
[2]
[13] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[12] [11] [10] [9]

Fig. 3-41
[1] Drum
[2] Drum cleaner unit
[3] Toner recovery auger
[4] Cleaning blade
[5] Needle electrode cleaner
[6] Discharge LED
[7] Needle electrode
[8] Main charger unit
[9] Main charger grid
[11] Mixer
[12] Auto-toner sensor
[13] Doctor blade
[14] Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller)

3 - 64
3.11.2 Composition
Process unit (Y, M, C, K) Drum cleaner unit Drum PM parts

Cleaning blade PM parts
Recovery blade
Toner recovery auger
Main charger unit Main charger grid PM parts 3
Needle electrode PM parts
Needle electrode PM parts
cleaner
Developer unit Ch. 3.12
Drum thermistor THM4
Discharge LED ERS-Y, -M, -C, -K
Temperature/Humidity S10
sensor
Ozone filter
Ozone exhaust fan F2
High-voltage transformer
Drum/TBU motor M6
Mono/color switching M3
motor

3 - 65
3.11.3 Functions
1. Drum
Drum is made of a cylindrical aluminum base coated with thin film of organic photoconductive
substance. Photoconductive object becomes insulative (high electrical resistance) when it is not
exposed to lights and becomes conductive (low electrical resistance) when it is exposed to lights.
This object is called photoconductor.
2. Drum cleaner unit

- Cleaning blade
This blade is pressed against the drum surface with a constant force and scrapes off the residual
toner on the drum surface.
- Recovery blade
This blade prevents the toner which was scraped off by the cleaning blade from being scattered
to the outside.
- Toner recovery auger
This auger carries the residual toner scraped off to the waste toner box.
3. Main charger
The main charger in this equipment consists of a metal rod with U-shaped section, insulated
terminals at both ends of the rod and a needle electrode attached between them. When a high
voltage is applied to the needle electrode, the air around it is charged (ionized). The ionized air then
flows into the drum causing it to be charged. This phenomenon is called “corona discharge”. At the
same time, a control bias is applied to the main charger grid to control the charging amount. In a
dark place, negative charge is evenly applied onto the drum surface by the corona discharge and
this grid. In addition, a cleaner is installed to clean up the dust attached on the needle electrode.
- Needle electrode
The needle electrode has aligned needles and their points perform the corona discharge.
These points (electrodes) discharge toward the drum in one direction to realize the more
efficient discharging comparing to the charger wire which discharges in a radial direction.
Therefore, the needle electrode enables to reduce the ozone amount.
4. Drum thermistor (THM4)

Since the photoconductive characteristic of the drum surface changes depending on the
temperature of the drum surface, the drum thermistor detects the temperature of the drum surface
and controls to gain the charging potential according to the environment.
5. Discharge LED (ERS-Y, ERS-M, ERS-C, ERS-K)

Discharge is a process to decrease or eliminate the charge on the drum surface.
The residual charge on the drum surface is neutralized and eliminated (cleaned). Electrical potential
of the drum surface is fixed to a certain amount before the drum is charged.
6. Temperature/humidity sensor (S10)

This sensor measures the environment inside the equipment. The values of the temperature and
humidity detected inside the equipment are output to the LGC board.
7. Ozone filter
Ozone produced by corona discharge of the main charger is exhausted through this filter.
The catalyzer of the ozone filter degrades the ozone.
8. Ozone exhaust fan (F2)

This fan exhausts air through the ozone filter-1.

3 - 66
9. High-voltage transformer (HVT)
A circuit generates the output control voltage Vc of the main charger bias, main charger grid bias,
1st transfer roller bias, 2nd transfer roller bias and developer bias.
10.Drum/TBU motor (M6)

This motor drives each drum and toner recovery auger. The drive of the motor is transmitted to each
drum by gears in the following 2 lines: Drum/TBU motor  K drum  C drum  Y drum
The gears and drum couplings are assembled with high precision in order to improve accuracy of
color overlay. 3
11. Mono/color switching motor (M3)
This motor switches ON/OFF the transmission of drive to the Y, M, C drums. When the motor rotates
normally or reversely, the gear of the motor moves the rack to shift the guides. And this movement of
the guides controls the transmission of the drive by engaging and disengaging gears which transmit
the drive to the Y, M, C drums. Additionally, the drum switching sensor detects the phase of the
guide to control the mono/color switching motor, and checks whether the drive is transmitted to the
Y, M, C drums or not.

3 - 67
3.11.4 Drum driving sleep mode
When the conditions of the accumulated number of outputs are met, the equipment is shifted to the
drum driving sleep mode, in which the photoconductive drum is rotated without exposure several times.
This mode prevents the photoconductive drum from being contaminated with ozone exhausted inside
of the equipment.
[ 1 ] Function
In the standby mode, the photoconductive drum is rotated without exposure according to the specified
number of times. The more rotations without exposure increase, the more drive count increases.
Consequently, this may reduce the life of the drum.
To prevent a reduction in the life, the drum is rotated without exposure normally once. It is rotated
without exposure several times only under certain conditions.
[ 2 ] Drum driving sleep mode related codes
08-2380 Control for drum rotation without Sets ON or OFF for the control of the
exposure at standby photoconductive drum rotation without exposure in
the standby mode after printing is finished.
08-2381 Starting time of drum rotation Sets the time to start the 1st rotation of the
without exposure at standby photoconductive drum without exposure in the
standby mode after printing is finished.
08-2382 Control of drum rotation without Sets the rotation interval of the photoconductive
exposure at standby: Rotation drum without exposure between the 1st and 2nd
interval rotations and subsequent intervals.
08-2383 Control of drum rotation without Sets the maximum number of rotations allowed
exposure at standby: Maximum without exposure.
number of rotations
08-2385 Accumulated number of outputs to Sets the number of outputs to shift to the drum
shift to drum driving sleep mode driving sleep mode.
[ 3 ] The drum driving sleep mode setting
[ 3-1 ] Case in which the equipment needs to be shifted to the drum driving sleep mode
frequently
When uneven density image problem in 94 mm pitch (the circumference of the drum) must be corrected
• Set a value smaller than "7" (default) for 08-2385.
Notes:
If MCV (monthly copy volume) is relatively small, the drive count tends to increase quickly when
you set the equipment to shift the drum driving sleep mode often, resulting in a shorter life
[ 3-2 ] Case in which the equipment needs to be shifted to the drum driving sleep mode
frequently
A: When uneven density image problem in 94 mm pitch (the circumference of the drum) must be
corrected
• The ozone exhaust fan keeps rotating for 1 minute after printing is finished. The rotation noise is not
so annoying during this period. Therefore set "0" or "1" for 08-2383 so that the rotation of all drums
without exposure will be finished within 1 minute.
B: When MCV is relatively small (e.g.; 1k)
• Set "20" for 08-2385 to reduce the number of times to shift the drum driving sleep mode, or set "0" or
"1" for 08-2383 to reduce the number of drum rotations without exposure.

3 - 68
3.12 Developer Unit

This chapter describes the development (developer unit) which is a process of making toner adhere to
the drum.
The developer material which is comprised of a mixture of toner and carrier, and is filled in the
developer unit of each color. The toner is charged to a negative polarity and the carrier to a positive
polarity, due to the friction with each other caused by mixing in the developer unit. The charged toner is 3
supplied to the photoconductive drum surface by means of a magnetic roller, allowing it to adhere to the
areas on the drum surface where the potential is lower than the developer bias which is applied to the
magnetic roller. Through this process, the latent images are formed on the photoconductive drum
surface.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6] [10] [7] [11] [8] [12] [9] [13]
Fig. 3-42
[1] Toner (Y)

[2] Toner (M)
[3] Toner (C)
[4] Toner (K)
[5] Waste toner box
[6] Developer unit (Y)
[7] Developer unit (M)
[8] Developer unit (C)
[9] Developer unit (K)
[10] Process unit (Y)
[11] Process unit (M)
[12]Process unit (C)
[13] Process unit (K)

3 - 69
3.12.2 Composition
Process unit (Y, M, C, Drum cleaner unit Ch. 3.11

K) Main charger unit Ch. 3.11
Developer unit Developer material PM parts
Mixer
Developer sleeve
(Magnetic roller)
Doctor blade
Auto-toner sensor S1, S2, S3, S4
Paper feeding/ M2
developer unit drive
motor
[1]
[14]
[2]
[13] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[12] [11] [10] [9]

Fig. 3-43

3 - 70
3.12.3 Functions
1. Developer material
The developer material consists of the carrier and toner. Since the developer material deteriorates
after a long time use, periodic replacements are needed.
2. Mixer
The carrier and toner are frictionized each other when the developer material is stirred. Then the
carrier is positively charged (+) and the toner is negatively charged (–), and the toner is adhered by
the electrostatic force. 3
3. Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller)

These aluminum rollers have magnets inside. The developer material is pulled by these magnets to
form a magnetic brush. The magnets are fixed at their position so only the sleeve rotates. By this
rotation, the developer material is transported to the developer sleeve.
Then the magnetic brush formed at the developer sleeve sweeps over the drum surface and thus
development is performed.
4. Doctor blade
The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material from the developer sleeve so that
the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly.
5. Auto-toner sensor (S1, S2, S3, S4)

To print out a precise image, the proportion (toner density ratio) of the carrier and the toner in the
developer material needs to be always constant. The magnetic bridge circuit in the black auto-toner
sensor detects the toner ratio in the developer material. This sensor supplies the toner from the
toner cartridge.
6. Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2)

This motor rotates the Y, M, C, K developer units. The drive of the motor is transmitted to each
developer unit by gears in the following 2 lines: Developer motor  K developer unit, developer
motor  C developer unit  M developer unit  Y developer unit
7. Toner motor (M8, M9, M10, M11)

These motors drive the paddles and auger in the toner cartridge and transport the toner filled in the
cartridge to the developer unit. Each toner cartridge of Y, M, C and K mounts one toner motor
correspondingly.
8. Waste toner paddle motor (M7)

This motor rotates the paddles mounted in the Waste toner box to level the Waste toner
accumulated in the waste toner box.
9. Waste toner box

This collects the residual toner scraped off on the drum surface by the cleaning blade and residual
toner scraped off on the transfer belt by the transfer belt cleaning blade.

3 - 71
3.12.4 Functions of the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG)
An IC chip is embedded in this board. Data such as identification information for the recommended
TOSHIBA toner cartridge, thresholds to determine if the cartridge is nearly empty, and controlling data
for the image quality to be optimal according to the toner characteristics are written in this chip.
To measure the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge, when the value of the counter for the period
of the toner cartridge rotation time is updated, this equipment writes the updated value into the toner
cartridge PC board (CTRG).
These data written in the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG) enable the functions below, and accordingly
this equipment operates as shown below.
Data reading is performed every time when the power is turned ON, the front cover is closed, a job is
finished and the equipment has recovered from the sleep mode.
[ 1 ] Data read by the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG)

• Data to identify recommended TOSHIBA toner cartridges
• Thresholds to determine if the toner cartridge is nearly empty
• Value of the counter for the period of the toner cartridge rotation time
• Data for optimizing image quality
• Threshold of toner remaining displays
[ 2 ] Functions
• Cartridge detecting function
This function checks whether the toner cartridge is inserted correctly or not, and whether the
recommended toner cartridge is used or not.
• Toner remaining check function
This function notifies the user of the near-empty status of toner. Normally, the message (Toner is
low) is displayed when the toner is running out, and (Toner empty) when the toner cartridge is
empty.
• Toner remaining check notification function
Upon detecting the near-empty status of toner, this function automatically notifies your service
representative.
• Image optimization function
This function controls the quality of images to be optimal according to the characteristics of the toner
used.
• Toner remaining display function
This function displays the remaining toner amount from 0% to 100%.
[ 3 ] Operations
A sign indicating that the toner cartridge is nearly empty appears in the following cases:
• The counter value for the toner cartridge rotation time has exceeded the threshold previously written
in the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG). (Related code: 08-5155)
• The remaining amount of toner is equal to or less than the set amount (percentage or number of
sheets). (Related code: 08-5155, 5810, 5811)
When a used cartridge refilled with new toner is used, a sign indicating that the toner cartridge is empty
appears because information for determining the empty status is already written in the toner cartridge
PC board (CTRG).
When a non-recommended toner cartridge is used, "Toner not recognized" appears on the control
panel, and then the equipment may stop normal operations. The toner remaining display function, the
toner remaining check function, the automatic remote supply order to TOSHIBA sales representatives
and the image optimization function may also be disabled.
The self-diagnosis codes to adjust the timing for displaying the toner near-empty status are as follows.

3 - 72
• Toner near-empty status threshold setting (08-5155)
<Setting value>
0: The period from the appearance of the toner near-empty sign to the actual complete consumption of
the toner is set to long.
1: Normal (Default)
2: The period from the appearance of the toner near-empty sign to the actual complete consumption of
the toner is set to short.
4: Toner near-empty status threshold value: (%)
5: Toner near-empty status threshold value: (Number of sheets) 3
• Toner near-empty status threshold value setting (%) (08-5810)

Use this code to specify the threshold value (unit: %) for displaying the toner near-empty status. This
code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set to "4".
Sub-code 0: K, sub-code 1: Y, sub-code 2: M, sub-code 3: C
• Toner near-empty status threshold value setting (number of sheets) (08-5811)

Use this code to specify the threshold value (unit: number of sheets) for displaying the toner near-
empty status. This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set to "5".
Sub-code 0: K, sub-code 1: Y, sub-code 2: M, sub-code 3: C
3.12.5 Waste toner box

The waste toner box is installed inside of the front cover, and collects waste toner discharged from a
cleaner for each color and the transfer belt cleaner.
The front cover is designed not to be closed without installing the waste toner box in this equipment.
The paddle embedded in the waste toner box is rotated by the waste toner paddle motor (M7).
The rotation status of the paddle is detected by the waste toner paddle rotation detection sensor (S9).
In this equipment, a sensor detecting the full status of waste toner is not equipped.
Instead, the waste toner box full is judged when the waste toner has been accumulated in the box and
the rotation of the paddle has not been detected for a specified period.
[1]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5] [6]
Fig. 3-44
[1] Waste toner box

[2] Paddle
[3] Gear (Paddle)
[4] Gear
[5] Waste toner paddle motor (M7)
[6] Waste toner paddle rotation detection sensor (S9)
3 - 73
3.13 Transfer Unit
3.13.1 General Descriptions

Transfer is a process of decaling a toner image from the photoconductive drum onto paper.
A toner image formed on the photoconductive drum is temporarily transferred onto the transfer belt,
and the toner image is then transferred from the transfer belt onto paper. The first transfer from the
drum to the transfer belt is called the 1st transfer, and the second transfer from the transfer belt to paper
is called the 2nd transfer. To form a color image, the images of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and
black (K) are transferred and overlaid on the transfer belt in order, and then the overlaid images are
transferred onto paper.
After the completion of the 2nd transfer, the residual toner on the transfer belt is scraped off by the
transfer belt cleaning blade and then transported to the waste toner box.
[11] [3] [1] [6] [2]
[14]
[13]
[12] [4] [7] [8] [9] [5] [10] [16] [15]
Fig. 3-45
[1] Transfer belt

[2] TBU drive roller
[3] Cleaner unit facing roller
[4] Lift roller
[5] Winding roller (K)
[6] Belt clinging roller before 2nd transfer
[7] 1st transfer roller (Y)
[8] 1st transfer roller (M)
[9] 1st transfer roller (C)
[10]1st transfer roller (K)
[11] Waste toner auger
[12] Transfer belt cleaning blade
[13] 2nd transfer roller
[14] Paper clinging detection sensor
[15] Registration reach sensor

3 - 74
3.13.2 Composition
Transfer belt unit Transfer belt

1st transfer roller Y, M, C, K
Drive roller
Tension roller
2nd transfer facing roller
Lift roller 3
Idling roller
1st transfer roller cam motor M8
1st transfer roller status detection sensor S15
Transfer belt cleaning Transfer belt cleaning blade
Waste toner auger
2nd transfer unit 2nd transfer roller PM parts
Paper clinging detection sensor S18
Image position aligning sensor S7 / S8
(Front)
Image position aligning sensor
(Rear)/Image quality sensor

3 - 75
3.14 Image Quality Control

Two image position aligning sensors are mounted inside of the 2nd transfer front guide beneath the
transfer belt.
The image position aligning sensor on the rear side combines its own functions with those of the image
quality sensors.
At this control, image forming conditions are automatically adjusted so as to minimize the change in the
image density or tone reproduction caused by the fluctuation of working environment or life of supply
items.
At first, the image quality sensor (S8) operates to output reflected light amount voltage when no toner
image is formed on the transfer belt. The output voltage is then converted analog-to-digital to be output
as the reflected light amount signal. The light source amount voltage of the sensor is adjusted to
correspond with the value set in advance and the output value of reflected light amount signal at this
adjustment is stored. This output value is considered as the reading of the belt surface. Next, the
sensor outputs the reflected light amount signal when a test pattern is developed on the transfer belt.
This output value is considered as the reading of the toner image.
The difference between the reading of the transfer belt and that of the toner image is defined as toner
adhesion amount. Image forming conditions are determined in approximating this toner adhesion
amount to the value set in advance.
[4]
[1], [2]
[3]
Fig. 3-46
[1] Image position aligning sensor (Front)

[2] Image position aligning sensor (Rear)/Image quality sensor
[3] 2nd transfer front guide
[4] Transfer belt

3 - 76
3.15 Fuser unit / Paper exit section

Toner is fused by applying heat and pressure on the transferred image on the paper which is trans-
ported to the fuser unit. The paper is then transported to the inner tray, paper exiting options or ADU.
The fuser unit consists of the heater lamps, heat roller, fuser roller, pressure roller, separation fingers,
thermistors, thermostats, etc.
The heat roller, fuser roller and pressure roller in the fuser unit are driven by the fuser motor, and the 3
exit roller is driven by the exit motor.
[13]
[11]
[12]
[1]
[10]
[2], [3]
[4] [9]
[5]
[6], [7] [8]
Fig. 3-47
[1] Fuser roller

[2] Side heater lamp
[3] Center heater lamp
[4] Fuser roller center thermostat, Fuser roller side thermostat
[5] Fuser roller edge thermistor
[6] Fuser roller center thermistor
[7] Fuser roller side thermistor
[8] Pressure roller
[9]Pressure roller separation finger
[10] Exit sensor
[11] Exit/reverse gate
[12]Fuser roller separation finger
[13] Exit roller

3 - 77
3.15.2 Composition
Center heater lamp LAMP1 (570 W)

Side heater lamp LAMP2 (570 W)
Fuser roller center thermistor THM1
Fuser roller side thermistor THM2
Fuser roller edge thermistor THM3
Fuser roller center thermostat THMO1
Fuser roller rear thermostat THMO2
Fuser roller
Pressure roller
Separation finger
Fuser motor M4
Exit sensor S13
Exit roller
Exit motor M5

3 - 78
3.15.3 Electric Circuit Description
[ 1 ] Fuser unit control circuit
[ 1-1 ] Configuration
In this equipment, 2 heater lamps (center, side) which have different heat-generating positions are
installed in the heat roller to heat up the fuser roller. The fusing temperature is controlled by turning ON/
OFF these heater lamps with the command from the ASIC on the LGC board.
3
The surface temperature of the fuser roller is detected by a thermistor. And then the information of
these temperatures is input to the ASIC through an A/D converter.
Based on the detected temperature, the ASIC transmits the control signal of the heater lamp to the
drive circuit (TRC: Triac) of each heater lamp on the switching regulator via the heater lamp control
circuit. The power supply to each heater lamp is thus controlled by driving TRC.
The forcible power-OFF circuit detects the overheating of the fuser roller by each thermistor. In case
that the surface temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the specified temperature, the forcible
power-OFF circuit transmits an overheat detection signal to the ASIC and the heater lamp control circuit
and transmits a reset signal to the relay in the power supply unit to turn the relay OFF forcibly.
In addition, if these control circuits do not function due to thermistor abnormality or for other reasons
and the fuser roller is abnormally overheated as the result, 2 thermostats shut off the power supply to
the heater lamps to protect the equipment.
Fuser unit Switching regulator

Fuser belt side Fuser belt center
Main switch
thermostat thermostat L
Relay
Heat roller N
AC-DC
power
Center heater lamp Center heater lamp supply
driving circuit
(TRC1) Cover interlock
switch
Side heater lamp Side heater lamp

driving circuit
(TRC2)
Heat roller Heat roller Heat roller

edge center side
thermistor thermistor thermistor
LGC board +5VSW
Side heater lamp control signal

A/D Heater lamp
ASIC
converter control circuit Center heater lamp control signal
Overheat detection signal

AC line
RLYON signal
DC line
Forcible power-off circuit
Fig. 3-48

3 - 79
[ 1-2 ] Temperature detection section
Fuser unit error status counter control

• To enhance the safety of the fusing section unit, engine CPU provides the following protection:
When the third [C411], [C445], [C450] error have occurred after two consecutive [C411] errors, the
heater lamp is not turned ON and error [C412] is displayed immediately even if an operator turns
OFF the power and back ON. However, if the equipment goes into a ready state normally with the
fuser unit error status counter “1” or below, the counter is cleared to “0”.
• If the error codes [C411] to [C452] are displayed and still not cleared even though the thermistor,
thermostat and heater lamp have been repaired (and the power ON/OFF does not clear the error),
check the Setting Mode (08-2002) to set the fuser unit error status counter to “0”.
Remarks:
The fuser unit error status counter (Setting Mode (08-2002)) never has values other than 0 to 62.
• If the heater lamps do not turn ON and the service call [C411] or [C412] is displayed immediately
after the power is ON, ensure the fuser unit error status counter is “62” or over. If it is “62” or over, be
sure to check the thermistor, thermostat and heater lamp. Reset the counter to “0” after repairing
them, then turn ON the power.
• If the fuser unit error status counter is ”62” or more, EEPROM or its data may have been ruined due
to leakage from the chargers.
Check the bias, high-voltage transformers and needle electrodes for defects, and also look through
all the data in EEPROM.
• When the thermistors detect overheating, the engine CPU decides the error code and counter value
of the fuser unit error status. After turning OFF each output (the heater lamp, exposure lamp, control
panel display, motors and so on), the engine CPU turns OFF the power to protect the fuser unit.
Error code: C449 ([C] and [8])

Counter value of the fuser unit error status: 8, 9, 18 to 23, 25 to 29 (08-2002)
Thermistors continue detecting the abnormal temperature even after the error codes and counter
values are decided. Even if the power is turned ON immediately, it is automatically turned OFF again
when the surface temperature of the fuser belt is still higher than the abnormal temperature
detected.
Wait until the surface temperature of the fuser belt is lowered enough, and turn ON the power to
check the counter value while it is turned OFF again. After confirming that it is the fuser unit
abnormality, correct the abnormality and reset the counter value (08-2002) to “0” to start up the
equipment normally.

3 - 80
Temperature detection circuit
The thermistor is a device whose resistance varies according to the detected temperature. The ASIC
detects voltages output from this devices, and judges whether the operation of the fuser unit is normal
or abnormal from the changes in voltages.
If one of the thermistors is broken, the control circuit judges that the temperature of the fuser belt or
pressure roller is extremely low and keeps turning the heater lamps ON. As a result, the temperature of
the fuser belt or pressure roller rises, and possibly activates the thermostat which is a safety protection
device. To prevent this in advance, the ASIC works to detect whether each thermistor is broken or not.
Also, the control circuit constantly checks the temperature of the heat roller and the pressure roller to 3
prevent them from excessive heating by circuit abnormality or thermistor abnormality, and automatically
shuts OFF the power when one of these temperatures exceeds the specified temperature.

3 - 81
Abnormality detection by the thermistors
The following table shows the conditions for judging the temperature abnormality of the fuser roller, and
the detecting timing.
Temperature judged
Con Counter Error
Check Fuser roller Error
ditio (08- judging
timing thermistor code
n 2002) timing
Center Side Edge
Power ON 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 9 Power ON
or above or above or above
40°C 150°C --- C412 4
or below or above
150°C 40°C ---
or above or below
150°C --- 40°C
or above or below
--- 150°C 40°C
or above or below
Detecting 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 19 On usual
40°C or above or above or above
40°C 40°C 40°C C411 (1)
or below or below or below C412 2
The temperature of the fuser unit edge section is C450 (38)
50°C higher or more than that of the fuser unit C451 41
center section for more than 2 seconds.
The temperature of the fuser --- C450 (48)
unit side section is 50°C higher C452 50
or more than that of the fuser
unit center section for more
than 2 seconds.
Ready 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 22 On usual
temperatu or above or above or above
re is Ready Ready Ready C445 (5)
detected temperature or temperature or temperature or C446 6
(Center or below below below
Side)
The temperature of the fuser unit edge section is C450 (38)
50°C higher or more than that of the fuser unit C451 41
center section for more than 2 seconds.
The temperature of the fuser --- C450 (48)
unit side section is 50°C higher C452 50
or more than that of the fuser
unit center section for more
than 2 seconds.
During 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 23 On usual
ready or above or above or above
40°C 40°C 40°C C447 7
or below or below or below
During 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 25 On usual
printing or above or above or above
40°C 40°C 40°C C447 24
or below or below or below
At energy 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 27 On usual
saving or above or above or above
mode
3 - 82
Temperature judged
Con Counter Error
Check Fuser roller Error
ditio (08- judging
timing thermistor code
n 2002) timing
Center Side Edge
At paper 200°C 200°C 230°C C449 29 On usual
jam or above or above or above
* The figures in the “Condition” field denote the priority of error checking.
* The figures in the “Error code” and “Counter” fields with parentheses denote that an error status has
not yet been determined (= error status is detected only once).
3

3 - 83
3.16 Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU)

The Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) is a unit to automatically print on both sides of paper. A
switchback method using the exit roller is adopted for the ADU of this equipment.
A sheet of paper is switchbacked by the exit roller right after the printing operation (fusing operation) on
one side is completed, and the reversed sheet is transported to the registration section for the other
side of the sheet to be printed.
The ADU mainly consists of the transport rollers and their drive system, paper guide and ADU entrance
/ exit sensor.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-49
[1] ADU motor

[2] ADU entrance sensor
[3] Upper transport roller
[4] ADU exit sensor
[5] Lower transport roller
[6] Paper guide

3 - 84
3.16.2 Composition
Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU)

ADU motor M12: Stepping motor
ADU entrance sensor S14
ADU exit sensor S15
Side cover opening/closing switch SW5
ADU driving PC board ADU 3
Upper transport roller
Lower transport roller

3 - 85
3.16.3 Drive of ADU
When the ADU motor (M12) rotates, the upper transport roller and lower transport roller are rotated
driven by the gears and belt.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Fig. 3-50
[1] ADU motor

[2] Gear
[3] Timing belt
[4] Upper transport roller
[5] Timing belt

3 - 86
3.16.4 Description of Operations
The back side printing (recording data of the back side of paper) is performed first by selecting duplex
printing mode and pressing the [START] button. When the trailing edge of the paper passes the exit
gate, the paper is switchbacked by the exit roller and transported into the ADU (the exit gate is closed
with its own weight), and then the switchbacked paper is transported with acceleration. The
transportation decelerates when the ADU exit sensor (S15) detects the paper. The front side printing
(recording data of the front side of paper) is performed at the registration section. The paper passes
through the exit gate again and is transported to the inner tray to complete duplex printing.
3
There are three methods of judging a paper jam: (1) whether the ADU entrance sensor (S14) is turned
ON or not in a specified period of time after the switchback to the ADU started (E510). (2) whether the
ADU exit sensor (S15) is turned ON or not in a specified period of time after the ADU entrance sensor
(S14) is turned ON (E520). (3) whether the registration sensor (S19) is turned ON or not in a specified
period of time after the paper feeding from the ADU to the equipment (E110).
If the ADU is opened during duplex printing, the ADU motor (M12) is stopped, namely, ADU open jam
occurs (E430).
The equipment is never to be stopped during printing by interruption in any case except paper jam or
service call, if paper remains in the ADU.
The operation of the duplex printing differs depending on the size of the paper; single-paper circulation
and alternateness circulation. The figures in the following pages show the circulating operations during
duplex copying. The numbers in the figures indicate the page numbers.

3 - 87
1. Single-paper circulation
With the paper larger than A4/LT size, duplex printing (back-side printingfront-side printing) is
performed for one sheet at a time as shown below.
Fig. 3-51

3 - 88
3.17 Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit consists of AC filters, insulation-type DC output circuits and heater lamp control
circuits in order to supply stable DC and AC voltage to each electric part of this equipment.
3.17.2 Functions 3
The power supply unit consists of the AC filter, insulation type DC output circuits and heater lamp
control circuit.
1. AC filter
Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking
to the outside.
2. DC output circuits
Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC
voltage is divided into the following two lines.
a. Main power switch line:

Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process. Two kinds of voltage
(+5VS and +12 VA) are output when the main power switch of the equipment is turned ON.
b. Cover switch line:

Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process, being supplied via the
cover switch. The voltage (+24 VD) is output only when the main power switch of the equipment is
turned ON and two covers (front cover and automatic duplexing unit) are closed.
3. Heater lamp control circuit

TRC (Triac) is driven by the heater control signal (SLAMP-ON, CLAMP-ON) from the LGC board
and then AC power is supplied to each heater lamp (center heater lamp, side heater lamp) in the
fuser unit.

3 - 89
3.17.3 Operation of DC Output Circuits
1. Starting operation of the equipment
When the main switch of the equipment is turned ON, power starts supplying to all the lines only
when two doors (front cover and ADU) are closed
2. Stopping line output

When the main switch of the equipment is turned OFF, PWR-DN signal is output after the
instantaneous outage insurance time elapses and then the supply of each voltage stops. If the
supply of voltage of the main line (+5VS, +12VA) stops earlier than the 24V line does, it may cause
the damage of the electron device on each control circuit. To prevent this, the supply of these
voltages stops after the PWR-DN signal is output and the minimum retaining time elapses.
3. Output protection
Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal
protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary
circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a
short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse
is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again to clear the
overcurrent protection.
4. Recovering from super sleep mode (normal starting))

When the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel is pressed during the super sleep mode, a super
sleep mode shifting/recovering signal (SYS-EN) is output from the SYS board and then voltage
starts being supplied to all the lines, if no error was detected.
5. Recovering from super sleep mode (when receiving a packet)

When a packet from a network is received during the super sleep mode, the mode is shifted to the
sleep mode.
When packets are received frequently, a control is performed to keep the sleep mode for a specified
period.
- If packets are received 42 times or more within 6 hours, the time setting for shifting to the super
sleep mode will be automatically changed to approx. 10 minutes when the 42 times are counted.
- Receiving of the packets to perform printing or fax jobs is not counted.
- If the time setting for shifting to the super sleep mode is set to 10 minutes or more, it will be
reflected.
- If the time setting for shifting to the super sleep mode has been changed to 10 minutes due to the
above auto-change, it will be cleared when the power is turned OFF and then back ON.
6. Shifting to super sleep mode (normal stopping)

When the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel is pressed for 1 second or more while the main
switch of the equipment is toggled ON, a super sleep mode shifting/recovering signal (SYS-EN) is
output from the SYS board after the initialization is finished and then all lines for output voltage
except +5VS are closed.
The Super sleep mode is disabled under the following conditions.
- When the Super sleep mode is set to be disabled on the control panel, TopAccess and with the
code 08-8543
- When the Wireless LAN Module, Bluetooth Module, e-BRIDGE ID Gate or Data Overwrite
Enabler is installed, or when the IPsec Enabler is installed and its function is set to be enabled
- When operation is being performed in the self-diagnosis mode (Disabled until the main switch is
turned OFF)
7. State of the power supply

- Power OFF

3 - 90
The main switch of the equipment is turned OFF. Since DC voltage is not supplied to each board,
the equipment is not operable.
- Normal state (including Energy saving mode)

The main switch of the equipment is turned ON and DC voltage is supplied to each board. When
the cover of the equipment is closed, 24V DC voltage is supplied and the equipment enters into
the ready/printing state.
- Sleep mode 3
Since +24VD DC voltages are not supplied but +12VA and +5VS DC voltages only, the
equipment does not enter into the ready state.
- Super Sleep mode

Only +5VS DC voltages are output from the power supply unit. The [ON/OFF] button is
monitored and the LED of the main switch is lit.

3 - 91
3.17.4 Output Channel
The following are output channels for the main power switch line.
main power switch line
Connector Pin No. Voltage Destination

CN511 5 +5VS SYS board
6 RADF (via SYS board)
9 +12VA
10
11
CN512 5 +12VA LGC board
6
7
CN514 2 +12VA PFC board
The following are output channels for the cover switch line.
Cover switch line
Connector Pin No. Voltage Destination

CN512 17 +24VD1 LGC board
18 HVT (via LGC board)
CFD board (via LGC board)
19 +24VD2
ADU board (via LGC board)
20 +24VD3
CN513 1 +24VD4 SYS board
CN514 5 +24VD5 PFC board
6 Finisher

3 - 92
3.17.5 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormality with each part
using the following table.
Voltage Board/Unit Part Fuse type

+24VD1 LGC board Auto-toner sensor-K S1 F201:
Auto-toner sensor-C S2 4 A (Semi time-lag)
Auto-toner sensor-M S3 3
Auto-toner sensor-Y S4
SYS board cooling fan F1
Ozone exhaust fan F2
Ozone suctioning fan F3
Registration clutch CLT1
Feed clutch CLT2
Mono/color switching motor M3
Toner motor-Y M8
Toner motor-M M9
Toner motor-C M10
Toner motor-K M11
Sensor shutter solenoid SOL1
High-voltage transformer HVT
+24VD2 LGC board Paper feeding/developer unit M2 F202:
drive motor 4 A (Semi time-lag)
Fuser motor M4
Exit motor M5
Discharge LED-K ERS-K
Discharge LED-C ERS-C
Discharge LED-M ERS-M
Discharge LED-Y ERS-Y
Bridge unit, JSP -
Key copy counter, copy key -
card, coin controller
+24VD3 LGC board Drum/TBU motor M6 F203:
ADU motor M12 4 A (Semi time-lag)
1st drawer feed clutch CLT3
Bypass feed clutch CLT4
CFD board CFD
+24VD4 SYS board Scan motor M1 F204:
4 A (Semi time-lag)
+24VD5 PFC board Finisher, PFU, PFP, LCF - F205:
4 A (Semi time-lag)

3 - 93
3 - 94
4. DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4.1 Covers
4.1.1 Front cover
(1) Open the front cover.

(2) Remove 2 screws and pull out the front cover
[1] at an angle toward the lower-front side.
4
Fig. 4-1
4.1.2 Left cover
(1) Open the front cover and pull out the drawer.
(2) Remove 5 screws and take off the small left
cover [1]. Remove the left cover [2] while [1]
pushing down on its handle.
[2]
Fig. 4-2

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-1
4.1.3 Receiving tray
(1) Remove the left cover.

P. 4-1 "4.1.2 Left cover"
(2) Remove the receiving tray [1].
Fig. 4-3
4.1.4 Tray rear cover
(1) Remove the receiving tray.

P. 4-2 "4.1.3 Receiving tray"
(2) Remove the left-rear cover.
P. 4-3 "4.1.6 Left rear cover"
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the tray rear
cover [1] by sliding it to the left.
Fig. 4-4
4.1.5 Left top cover
(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the left top

cover [1] by sliding it toward the front side to
release the latches.
Fig. 4-5

4-2
4.1.6 Left rear cover

(2) Remove the left top cover.
P. 4-2 "4.1.5 Left top cover"
(3) Remove 3 screws and take off the left rear
cover [1] by lifting it up. [1]
Fig. 4-6
4.1.7 Right top cover
(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the top right

cover [1] by lifting it up.
Fig. 4-7
4.1.8 Right front cover
(1) Open the side cover.

(2) Remove the right top cover.
P. 4-3 "4.1.7 Right top cover"
(3) Pull out the drawer.
(4) Remove 1 screw on the front cover and right
front cover. Then, remove the right front
cover [1] by lifting it up.
Fig. 4-8

4-3
4.1.9 Right rear cover

(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the right rear
cover [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-9
4.1.10 Front top cover

(3) Remove 2 caps [1] and 2 screws [2], and
then make the control panel [3] level.
(4) Pull out the front top cover [4] toward the
front side and remove it by sliding it toward
the left side.
Fig. 4-10
4.1.11 Front right cover
(1) Remove the right the front cover.

P. 4-3 "4.1.8 Right front cover"
(2) Remove the front top cover.
P. 4-4 "4.1.10 Front top cover"
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the front right
cover [1] while lowering it.
Fig. 4-11

4-4
4.1.12 Rear top cover
(1) Remove the RADF or the platen cover.

(4) Remove the 2 screws [1] and take off the
rear top cover [2].
Fig. 4-12
4.1.13 Rear cover
(1) Remove 5 screws and take off the rear cover

[1].
Fig. 4-13
4.1.14 Front cover switch (SW1)
(1) Remove the power cooling and ozone

suction fan cover.
P. 4-81 "4.6.32 Switching regular cooling
fan (F3)"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the front cover
switch bracket [1].
Fig. 4-14

4-5
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the front
cover opening/closing switch [1].
Fig. 4-15
4.1.15 Front cover interlock switch (SW2)
(1) Remove the front cover opening/closing

switch bracket.
P. 4-5 "4.1.14 Front cover switch (SW1)"
(2) Remove 2 screws and disconnect 2
connectors, and then take off the front cover
interlock switch [1].
Fig. 4-16

4-6
4.2 Control Panel
4.2.1 Control panel unit
(1) Remove the right rear cover.

P. 4-4 "4.1.9 Right rear cover"
(2) Remove the rear cover.
P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(3) Remove the SYS board cover.
P. 4-81 "4.6.31 SYS board cooling fan
(F1)" 4
(4) Disconnect 1 connector from the system
control board (CN119) and release the
harness [1] from the clamp.
Fig. 4-17

(6) Lower the control panel unit [1] and remove 2
screws.
(7) Remove the control panel unit [1] while
sliding it.
Fig. 4-18
Notes:
When installing, pass the harness through
the harness clamp of the frame.
Fig. 4-19

4-7
4.2.2 KEY board
(1) Remove the control panel unit.

P. 4-7 "4.2.1 Control panel unit"
(2) Remove 8 screws and take off the cover [1].
Fig. 4-20
(3) Remove 7 screws and disconnect 1

connector, and then take off the KEY board
[1].
Fig. 4-21
4.2.3 DSP board
(1) Remove the control panel unit.

P. 4-7 "4.2.1 Control panel unit"
(2) Remove 8 screws and take off the cover [1].
Fig. 4-22

4-8
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 4
screws, and then take off the bracket [1].
Fig. 4-23
(4) Remove 3 conductive sheets [1] and

disconnect 3 connectors.
(5) Remove the DSP board [2].
Fig. 4-24
4.2.4 Touch panel
(1) Remove the DSP board.

P. 4-8 "4.2.3 DSP board"
(2) Remove the touch panel [1].
Fig. 4-25

4-9
(3) Remove the touch panel [2] from the case
[1].
Fig. 4-26
(4) Disconnect the harness [2] from the touch

panel [1].
Fig. 4-27

4 - 10
4.3 Scanner Unit
Notes:
Since the scanner section is assembled with high precision, be sure not to perform any
disassembling other than that instructed in the Service Manual.
4.3.1 Original glass

(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the original
glasses [1] and [2].
4
Notes:
• Make sure that the original glass [2] is
securely inserted into the groove of the
fixing part of the original glass [1].
• Securely insert 2 pins of the original glass
[1] into the holes in the frame.
Fig. 4-28
4.3.2 Lens cover
(1) Remove the original glass.

P. 4-11 "4.3.1 Original glass"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the lens cover
[1] by sliding it toward the left side.
Fig. 4-29

4 - 11
4.3.3 Automatic original detection sensor-1, -2 (S24, S25)
(1) Remove the lens cover.

P. 4-11 "4.3.2 Lens cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the automatic
original detection sensor-1 and -2 [1].
Notes:
• Only the 20ppm/25ppm are equipped with
automatic original detection sensors-1
and -2.
• A4 models are equipped only with
automatic original detection sensor-1 and
LT models are equipped with automatic
original detection sensors-1 and -2.
Fig. 4-30
4.3.4 Lens unit/CCD driving PC board
(1) Remove the automatic original detection

sensor.
P. 4-12 "4.3.3 Automatic original detection
sensor-1, -2 (S24, S25)"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].
Fig. 4-31

4 - 12
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the CCD lens
unit [2].
[2]
Notes:
1. The CCD lens unit is adjusted finely, so
the re-adjustment or replacement of some
parts are impossible in the field. The lens
unit must be replaced on a unit basis.
2. Handle the lens unit with care. Do not
hold the adjustment unit or lens.
3. Count the number of lines [3] and write it
down for later reference before removing
the CCD lens unit. When installing the 4
CCD lens unit, the same number of lines
needs to be visible.
4. When replacing the lens unit, do not Fig. 4-32
touch the screws (7 places).
Fig. 4-33
Fig. 4-34

4 - 13
4.3.5 Carriage home position sensor (S23)

(2) Remove the rear top cover.
P. 4-5 "4.1.12 Rear top cover"
(3) Disconnect the 1 connector [1], and release
3 latches and remove carriage home
position sensor [2].
Fig. 4-35
4.3.6 Exposure lamp (EXP)
(1) Remove the original glass and front top

cover.
(2) Move carriage-1 [1] to a place where you can
see the exposure lamp mounting screw
through the frame hole.
Fig. 4-36
Notes:
To move the carriage, manually rotate the
drive pulley.
Fig. 4-37

4 - 14
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the harness
holder.
Fig. 4-38
(4) Rotate the front side of the exposure lamp [1]

and remove the exposure lamp by sliding it
toward the front side.
Fig. 4-39
(5) Disconnect the connector of the exposure

lamp.
Notes:
When installing the exposure lamp, insert the
rear side of the exposure lamp in the
carriage, and then fix the front side screw.
After installation, confirm that the exposure
lamp comes in contact with the carriage.
Fig. 4-40

4 - 15
4.3.7 Scan motor (M1)

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-41
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the scan

motor assembly.
Notes:
When installing the scan motor, use the belt
tension jig.
P. 6-79 "6.6.3 Belt tension adjustment of
the Scan motor"
Fig. 4-42
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the scan

motor [1].
Fig. 4-43

4 - 16
4.3.8 Platen sensor (S21, S22)

(2) Remove 5 screws and disconnect the ground
cable, and take off the platen sensor
assembly.
Fig. 4-44
(3) Disconnect 2 connectors and remove the

platen sensor-1 [1] and -2 [2].
Fig. 4-45
4.3.9 Carriage-1

(4) Move carriage-1 [1] to the leftmost side.
Fig. 4-46

4 - 17
Notes:
To move the carriage, manually rotate the
drive pulley.
Fig. 4-47
(5) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 4-48
(6) Rotate carriage-1 [1] in the direction shown

in the figure, while trying not to touch the
mirror. Then remove carriage-1 [1].
Fig. 4-49

4 - 18
Notes:
Follow the procedure below to connect the
exposure lamp harness.
1. Push carriage-1 and -2 to the leftmost
side and fix carriage-1.
2. Securely install the exposure lamp
harness on the cable guide and SYS
board.
3. After connecting the exposure lamp
harness, move carriage-1 to the leftmost
side and check the lamp harness for any 4
twists.
Fig. 4-50
4.3.10 Carriage wire, carriage-2
[A] Carriage wire, carriage-2
(1) Remove carriage-1.

P. 4-17 "4.3.9 Carriage-1"
(2) Move carriage-2 to the center.
(3) Attach the wire holder jig to the pulley to
prevent the wire from coming loose.
Fig. 4-51
Notes:
1. When attaching the wire holder jig [1],
make sure that the wire has not shifted or [2]
become loose.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of
the wire holder jig [1] and be passed
under the jig arm [2].
3. When installing the wire holder jig, be
[1]
careful of the orientation.
[1]
Fig. 4-52

4 - 19
(4) Remove the tension springs [1] in the front
and rear sides.
(5) Remove the carriage wire.
Fig. 4-53
(6) Rotate carriage-2 [1] in the direction shown

in the figure, while trying not to touch the
mirror. Then remove carriage-2 [1].
Notes:
Replace mirror-2 and -3 together with
carriage-2 [1]. Do not remove mirror-2 and -
3.
Fig. 4-54

4 - 20
[B] Installing the carriage wire
(1) As shown on the right, replace the carriage

wire and install a new wire. [7]
[3]
[1] Wire pulley
[2] Carriage wire [2]
[3] Carriage-2
[4] Idler pulley
[5] Hook
[6] Tension spring [4]
[7] Front side [1] [5]
[8] Rear side 4
Notes: [6]
It is not necessary to adjust the carriage wire
tension since a certain tension is applied to
the carriage wires through the tension
springs. Make sure the tension applied to the Fig. 4-55
wire is normal.
[8]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5] [1]
[6]
Fig. 4-56

4 - 21
[C] Winding on the wire pulley
(1) Pull the ø3 ball terminal [1] located at the

center of the wire into a hole on the wire [3] [6] [5]
pulley. One end of the wire with the hook [2]
attached comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the
front side [3] and rear side [4]. The number of
turns to be wound are as follows: 3 [5]
toward the opposite side (outside) of the
pulley boss, and 3 [6] toward the pulley boss [1]
side (inside).
[7] Black [2]
[8] Silver
Notes: [7]
When winding the wire onto the pulley, be
sure to note the following. Fig. 4-57
• Do not twist the wire.
• Wind the wires tightly so that they are in
complete contact with the surface of the [4] [5] [6]
pulleys.
• Each turn should be pushed against the
previously wound turn so that there is no
space between them.
[1]
[2]
[8]
Fig. 4-58
(3) After winding the wires around the pulleys,

attach the wire holder jigs to prevent the wire
from coming loose. [2]
Notes:
1. When attaching the wire holder jig [1],
make sure that the wire has not shifted or
become loose.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of [1]
the wire holder jig [1] and be passed
under the jig arm [2].
3. When installing the wire holder jig, be
careful of the orientation. [1]
Fig. 4-59

4 - 22
4.3.11 Scanner damp heater

(2) Remove the connector [1].
Fig. 4-60
(3) Remove the scanner damp heater [1] by

sliding it toward the rear side.
Fig. 4-61

4 - 23
4.4 LED Unit
4.4.1 LED Tray
(1) Remove the cleaner unit.

P. 4-61 "4.6.8 Cleaner unit"
(2) Remove the high-voltage transformer.
P. 9-6 "9.1.8 High-voltage transformer
(HVT)"
Fig. 4-62
(4) Disconnect 4 LED connectors and 4 flat

cables.
Fig. 4-63
Notes:
• When removing the flat cable, change the Lever position: Locked
lever position so that the connector is Tab Guide
released, and remove the flat cable by
lifting it up slightly (approx. 7 degrees) as
shown in the right figure.
• When connecting the flat cable to the
connector, insert the flat cable straightly FFC
Lever position: Released
and lock it securely. Confirm that the tabs
are in the positions shown in the right
figure.
Connector
Fig. 4-64

4 - 24
Notes:
• When installing the flat cable, be careful
not to insert it at an angle.
• Do not apply pressure to or damage the
edge of the flat cable.
• When installing the flat cable, do not push
it in strongly.
Fig. 4-65
(5) Slide the harness guide [1] upward and tilt it

to the near side.
Fig. 4-66
(6) Install the harness holding jig [1].
Fig. 4-67

4 - 25
Notes:
Store the connector inside the jig.
Fig. 4-68

(8) Remove 4 screws and pull out the LED tray
[1] while lifting it up by holding the levers on
both sides.
Fig. 4-69
Notes:
• Always hold both sides of the LED tray,
and be careful not to touch the LED.
• Be careful not to leave any fingerprints on
the lens of the LED printer head.
• The LED tray is a precision unit, so be
careful when handling it so that it is not
subjected to impact or vibration.
• The LED printer head is an electrical part,
so be careful of static electricity when
handling it. In particular, exercise great
care when handling the LED printer head
connector part.
• When installing the LED tray, attach the
harness holding the jig and pass the Fig. 4-70
harness through the hole in the frame.
• When installing the LED tray, mount the
attachment screw from the left side.

4 - 26
4.4.2 Discharge LED
(1) Remove the LED unit.

P. 4-24 "4.4.1 LED Tray"
(2) Slide the discharge LED [1] to the front side
and remove it by releasing the hook.
Fig. 4-71
(3) Disconnect the connector [1].
Fig. 4-72
(4) Remove the discharge LED [1].
Fig. 4-73

4 - 27
4.4.3 LED printer head
Notes:
• The LED printer head is an electrical part, so be careful of static electricity when handling it. In
particular, exercise great care when handling the LED printer head connector part.
• If you accidentally touch the LED printer head, clean it using a dry cloth to remove stains. If
grease adhered to the LED printer head, clean it with alcohol.
(1) Remove the LED tray.

P. 4-24 "4.4.1 LED Tray"
(2) Release 2 latches and remove the harness
cover [1].
Fig. 4-74
(3) Remove the LED printer head contact/

release lever link [1] and lever [2].
Fig. 4-75
(4) Press the contact/release arm [1] to place

the LED printer head [2] into the contact
state.
Fig. 4-76

4 - 28
(5) Tilt the LED printer head [1] toward the left
side to release the latch in order to remove it.
Fig. 4-77

4 - 29
Notes:
• Make sure that the plate spring [1] on the
front of the LED printer head is placed in
the groove [2].
Fig. 4-78
• Before installing the LED printer head,

mount the link alone.
[1] LED printer head contact/release lever
link
[2] Lever
Fig. 4-79
• Make sure that the duct in the rear side is

securely positioned without any
clearance.
Fig. 4-80

4 - 30
Notes:
• When installing the LED printer head,
push both sides [3] and then the center
part [4] of the head inside. Then, make
sure that the head is securely installed.
• After the link has been installed, check
the contact/release operations.
Fig. 4-81
(6) Remove the LED printer head side cover [1].
Fig. 4-82
(7) Disconnect the flat cable [1].
Fig. 4-83

4 - 31
Notes:
figure.
Connector
Fig. 4-84
Notes:
it in strongly.
Fig. 4-85
(8) Remove the LED printer head [1].
Fig. 4-86

4 - 32
Notes:
When installing the LED printer head, make
sure that the flanges [1] in the front and rear
sides of the LED printer head are inside the
flat spring [2].
Fig. 4-87
Fig. 4-88
(9) Remove the harness holder [1], connector

[2], and LED printer head [3].
Fig. 4-89

4 - 33
4.4.4 LED spacer
(1) Remove the drum.

P. 4-63 "4.6.10 Drum"
(2) Remove the LED spacer [1] in the front side
and the LED spacer [2] in the rear side.
Notes:
When attaching the LED spacer, make sure
that it is placed in the correct orientation.
Fig. 4-90
Fig. 4-91

4 - 34
4.5.1 Bypass unit
(1) Slide the slide tray of the bypass unit.

(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the paper width
detection PC board cover [1].
Fig. 4-92
(3) Pull out the paper width detection PC board

connector [1].
Notes:
When removing the paper width detection
PC board cover, be careful not to drop the
gear web washers or washers.
Fig. 4-93
(4) Remove 2 hinge stoppers [1].

Notes:
When removing the hinge stoppers, move
the projection portion to the wider part of the
groove.
Fig. 4-94

4 - 35
(5) Remove the paper holder release levers [1]
and [2].
Fig. 4-95
(6) Remove the paper holder [1] and spring [2].
Fig. 4-96
(7) Pull the rear shaft of bypass tray [1] toward

you and remove it from the bearing. Then,
remove the front shaft and take off the
bypass tray [1].
Fig. 4-97

4 - 36
4.5.2 Bypass feed roller
(1) Open the bypass tray.

(2) Tip the paper holder release lever outward to
release the pressure.
(3) Remove the stopper [1] while pulling out it.
Fig. 4-98
(4) Press the collar [1] toward the rear side and
release the lock.
Fig. 4-99
(5) Remove the bypass feed roller [1] while

pulling out it.
Fig. 4-100

4 - 37
Notes:
• Make sure that the coupling is engaged
when the bypass feed roller is replaced.
Fig. 4-101
4.5.3 Bypass separation pad
(1) Remove the bypass feed roller.

P. 4-37 "4.5.2 Bypass feed roller"
(2) Push the bottom of the bypass separation
pad [1] to the rear so that the double-faced
tape peels off.
Fig. 4-102
(3) Remove the bypass separation pad.

Notes:
• Cleanly peel off any double-faced tape
left on the base of the equipment after the
bypass separation pad has been
removed.
Fig. 4-103

4 - 38
Notes:
• Pay attention to the following items when
attaching the bypass separation pad.
• Peel off the release paper from the
double-faced tape.
• Push the upper part of the bypass
separation pad [1] strongly so that it sticks
securely. If not, an abnormal noise may
occur when the pad and paper are in
friction during paper feeding.
• When the upper part of the bypass 4
separation pad is strongly pushed, be
sure to use a clean cloth or some paper to
avoid direct touching of the pad so that no
oils or stains adhere. Fig. 4-104
4.5.4 Paper width detection PC board (S17)
(1) Slide the slide tray of the bypass unit.

(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the paper width
detection PC board cover [1].
Fig. 4-105
(3) Disconnect 1 paper width sensor connector

[1] and remove the paper width detection PC
board.
Notes:
When removing the paper width detection
PC board cover, be careful not to drop the
gear web washers or washers.
Fig. 4-106

4 - 39
4.5.5 Bypass feed sensor (S16)
(1) Remove the transport unit.

P. 4-128 "4.10.4 Transport unit"
(2) Press the flange inside and remove the
bypass feed roller [1].
Fig. 4-107
(3) Remove the clip [1], shaft [2], and collar [3].
Fig. 4-108
(4) Remove the sensor arm [1] and bypass feed

sensor [2].
Fig. 4-109

4 - 40
4.5.6 Bypass paper feed clutch (CLT4)
(1) Remove the paper feeding/developer drive

unit.
P. 4-75 "4.6.24 Paper feeding/developer
drive unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
bypass paper feed clutch cover [1].
Fig. 4-110
(3) Remove 2 gears and bushings, and then

take off the bypass feed clutch.
Fig. 4-111
4.5.7 Drawer feed roller
(1) Remove the drawer.

(2) Release the hook and remove the paper
feed roller [1] by sliding the 2 collars [1]
toward each other.
Fig. 4-112

4 - 41
4.5.8 Drawer separation pad
(1) Remove the drawer feed roller.

P. 4-41 "4.5.7 Drawer feed roller"
(2) Place the drawer face down and remove the
latch [1] at the bottom.
Fig. 4-113
(3) Remove the drawer separation pad [1].
Fig. 4-114
4.5.9 1st drawer empty sensor (S5)
(1) Remove the paper guide.

P. 4-44 "4.5.13 Registration sensor (S19),
feed sensor (S20)"
(2) Remove 1 screw and disconnect the
connector, and then take off the 1st drawer
empty sensor holder.
Fig. 4-115

4 - 42
(3) Disconnect the connector and remove the
empty sensor [1].
Fig. 4-116
4.5.10 1st drawer size detection switch-1, -2 (SW6, SW7)
(1) Remove the HVT board.

P. 9-6 "9.1.8 High-voltage transformer
(HVT)"
(2) Disconnect 2 connectors and release 2
latches, and then remove the 1st drawer size
detection switch-1 [1] and -2 [2].
Fig. 4-117
4.5.11 1st drawer detection switch (SW8)
(1) Remove the ozone exhaust fan.

P. 4-80 "4.6.30 Ozone exhaust fan (F2)"
1st drawer detection switch.
Fig. 4-118

4 - 43
4.5.12 Side cover switch (SW5)

(2) Release 2 hooks and disconnect the
connector by pulling out the side cover
switch.
Fig. 4-119
4.5.13 Registration sensor (S19), feed sensor (S20)
(1) Remove the registration roller.

P. 4-47 "4.5.15 Registration roller"
(2) Disconnect the connector from the CFD
board.
Fig. 4-120
(3) Remove the harness from the guide.
Fig. 4-121

4 - 44
(4) Slide the paper guide toward the front side
and pull out the rear shaft.
Fig. 4-122
(5) Slide the rear side of the paper guide [1]

toward the rear side while lifting it up, and
then remove the paper guide [1] by pulling
out the front shaft.
Fig. 4-123
(6) Release 2 latches and remove the sensor

bracket.
Fig. 4-124

4 - 45
(7) Remove the feed sensor [1] and registration
sensor [2].
Fig. 4-125
4.5.14 Registration clutch (CLT1)

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect the connector and release 2
latches of the hook. Then, remove the
registration clutch [1].
Fig. 4-126
Notes:
When installing the registration clutch, align
the clutch stopper with the frame projection.
Fig. 4-127

4 - 46
4.5.15 Registration roller

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Remove the registration clutch.
P. 4-46 "4.5.14 Registration clutch
(CLT1)"
(4) Remove the clip, slide the roller shaft toward
the rear side, remove the front shaft, and
then take off the registration roller shaft [1].
4
Fig. 4-128
Fig. 4-129
(5) Remove the 2 bushings, E-ring, gear and

pin.
Fig. 4-130

4 - 47
4.5.16 Paper feed drive gear

unit.
drive unit"
(2) Remove the paper feed development motor
[1] and registration clutch [2].
unit drive motor (M2)"
(CLT1)"
Fig. 4-131
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the spring.
Fig. 4-132
(4) Remove 9 screws and take off the paper

feed drive gear cover [1].
Fig. 4-133

4 - 48
(5) Remove the paper feed drive gear.
Fig. 4-134

4 - 49
4.6 Developer Unit, Cleaner
4.6.1 Waste toner box
(1) Open the front cover.

(2) Press down the hook and remove the waste
toner box [1].
Fig. 4-135
4.6.2 Developer unit
(1) Remove the waste toner box.

P. 4-50 "4.6.1 Waste toner box"
(2) Press the lever [1] down and also press the
lever of the developer unit cover down. Then,
remove the developer unit [2].
Fig. 4-136
Notes:
• When inserting the developer unit, align
the corner [1] of the developer unit guide
with the R part [2], and the corner [3] of
the developer unit with the R part [4].
• If the lid of the developer unit is not closed
while you take out the unit, close it by
hand. Toner may spill from the developer
unit if it is tilted with the lid open.
Fig. 4-137

4 - 50
Notes:
Do not peel off the film [1] on the upper part
of the developer unit.
Fig. 4-138
Notes:
• When installing the developer unit, insert [1]
it carefully keeping it horizontal. [2]
• If it is tilted (especially if its leading edge
is upward), the upper part of the unit will
catch the edge of the transfer belt.
[3]
Pushing it will damage the belt.
Fig. 4-139
4.6.3 Developer material
[A] Removing developer material
(1) Remove the developer unit.

P. 4-50 "4.6.2 Developer unit"
(2) Push the hook (white arrow section) and take
off the knob [1] by sliding it to the right.
Fig. 4-140

4 - 51
(3) Remove 1 screw.
(4) Release the hook and remove the developer
cover [1].
Fig. 4-141
(5) Lift the latch on the front side of the upper

cover and release the latch from the
developer case and developer sleeve shaft.
Fig. 4-142
(6) Release 6 latches at the side of the upper

cover.
Fig. 4-143

4 - 52
(7) Release the latches in the rear side of the
upper cover.
Fig. 4-144
(8) Remove the upper cover [1].

Notes:
Do not remove the developer material
adhering to the magnetic rubber in the upper
cover.
Fig. 4-145
Notes:
Do not remove the developer material
adhering to the magnetic rubber in the upper
cover.
Fig. 4-146

4 - 53
(9) Discharge the developer material.
Notes:
• Make sure not to have developer material
adhering to the drive gears or bushings.
• If the developer material on the developer
sleeve is hard to come off, use a brush
(jig) to clean it off.
4407915710 BRUSH-33
Fig. 4-147
[B] Filling developer unit with developer material
(1) Shake the developer material bottle and

attach the nozzle to it.
(2) Pour in the developer until the mixer under
the developer sleeve is full.
Fig. 4-148
(3) Turn the knob [1] in the direction of the arrow

shown on the cover until the developer
material is evenly adhered to the surface of
the developer sleeve.
Fig. 4-149

4 - 54
(4) Lift the rear side of the developer unit up and
move the developer material to the front side
of the mixer under the developer sleeve.
Fig. 4-150
(5) Pour in more developer until the mixer under

the developer sleeve is full.
Fig. 4-151
(6) Pour all the remaining developer material

into another mixer.
Notes:
• Fill the developer material in the mixer
section under the developer sleeve as
much as possible.
• Check if the developer does not adhered
to the joint of the upper cover.
Fig. 4-152

4 - 55
(7) Install the upper cover.
Notes:
After the installation, check that all the
protrusions and latches are fitted and locked
securely.
Fig. 4-153
Notes:
Do not install the upper cover from the rear
side by tilting it as shown in the figure. 1
Fig. 4-154
Notes:
Hook the latches, and then install the cover
while holding it from above.
Fig. 4-155

4 - 56
Notes:
Check that the seal material is not folded
down. The folding allowance shall be 0.7 mm
or less.
MAX 0.7
Fig. 4-156
4.6.4 Doctor blade

P. 4-51 "4.6.3 Developer material"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor
blade [1].
Fig. 4-157
4.6.5 Auto-toner sensor (S1, S2, S3, S4)

The auto-toner sensor is installed in the developer unit (Y, M, C, K).
Developer unit (K): Auto-toner sensor (S1)
Developer unit (C): Auto-toner sensor (S2)
Developer unit (M): Auto-toner sensor (S3)
Developer unit (Y): Auto-toner sensor (S4)
(1) Remove the corresponding the developer

unit, and then discharge the developer
material out of the unit.
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the auto-toner
sensor cover [1].
Fig. 4-158

4 - 57
(4) Lift the rib up and remove the auto-toner
sensor by turning it clockwise.
Fig. 4-159
4.6.6 Development sleeve

(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the pole
position adjustment plate.
Fig. 4-160
(4) Release 2 latches and remove the gear

cover.
Notes:
When installing, align the idler gear shaft to
the hole of the gear holder.
(5) Disconnect the connector from the gear
cover.
Fig. 4-161

4 - 58
(6) Remove the C-ring, drive gear, idler shaft,
and idler gear.
Fig. 4-162
(7) Remove 1 screw.

(8) Release the hook and remove the developer
cover [1].
Fig. 4-163
(9) Remove the bearing holder [1], bearing [2],

bushing [3], and developer sleeve [4].
Fig. 4-164

4 - 59
4.6.7 Mixer
(1) Remove the developer sleeve.

P. 4-58 "4.6.6 Development sleeve"
(2) Remove 2 clips [1], and take off 2 bushings
[2] and the front bushing holder [3].
Fig. 4-165
(3) Remove the separator [1], mixer [2], and

bushing [3] from the front side.
Fig. 4-166
Notes:
When installing a separator, turn the short
collar [1] side to the left.
Fig. 4-167

4 - 60
4.6.8 Cleaner unit

(2) Press down the lever and take off the cleaner
unit [1].
Notes:
• Before removing the cleaner unit, be sure
to take off the developer unit for the
corresponding color.
• When installing the cleaner, make sure to 4
correspond to the color.
Fig. 4-168
Notes:
To remove the cleaner unit for black (K), pull
the TBU release lever, turn it clockwise to
release the lock, and then pull out the
cleaner unit.
Fig. 4-169
Notes:
• When installing the cleaner unit, insert it [1]
carefully keeping it horizontal. [2]
• If it is tilted (especially if its leading edge
is upward), the upper part of the unit will
catch the edge of the transfer belt.
[3]
Pushing it will damage the belt.
Fig. 4-170

4 - 61
4.6.9 Main charger

(2) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 4-171
(3) Release 2 latches [1] and remove the

cleaner cover [2].
Fig. 4-172
Fig. 4-173

4 - 62
(4) Pull down the main charger and release the
latches [1].
Fig. 4-174
(5) Remove the main charger [1].
Fig. 4-175
4.6.10 Drum

(2) Remove the main charger.
P. 4-65 "4.6.13 Main charger grid"
(3) Turn the bushing [1] clockwise and release
the lock.
Fig. 4-176

4 - 63
(4) Remove the bushing [1].
Fig. 4-177
(5) Remove the drum [1] and bushing [2] from

the cleaner.
Notes:
• Be sure not to touch, spit or scratch on
the drum surface.
• Avoid a direct sunlight onto the drum.
Move it to a dark place as soon as it is
taken off.
• Be sure not to touch or scratch the edge
of the drum cleaning blade.
Fig. 4-178
4.6.11 Drum cleaning blade
(1) Remove the drum.

P. 4-63 "4.6.10 Drum"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the drum
cleaning blade [1].
Notes:
Be sure not to touch or scratch the edge of
the cleaning blade.
Fig. 4-179

4 - 64
4.6.12 Waste toner unit gear

(2) Remove the C-ring, waster, spring, bushing
[1], and gear [2].
Notes:
To remove the gear, and release the lock by
raising the latch.
Fig. 4-180
4.6.13 Main charger grid
(1) Remove the main charger.

P. 4-62 "4.6.9 Main charger"
(2) Pull the lever [1].
Fig. 4-181
(3) Remove the main charger grid [1].

Notes:
• Do not touch the mesh area of the grid.
• When installing the grid, be careful not to
let the urethane sheet adhered to the
charge case get caught in it.
Fig. 4-182

4 - 65
Notes:
There are 2 holes on the rear side of the
main charger grid for determining which is
the front or back surface. Be sure to place
the grid so that the 2 holes come as shown in
the figure.
Fig. 4-183
4.6.14 Main charger cleaner
(1) Remove the main charger grid.

P. 4-65 "4.6.13 Main charger grid"
(2) Release the latch [1] and remove the main
charger cleaner [2].
Fig. 4-184
4.6.15 Needle electrode
(1) Remove the main charger cleaner.

P. 4-66 "4.6.14 Main charger cleaner"
(2) Pull out the lever [1] and remove the needle
electrode [2] together with the lever [1].
Notes:
When installing the needle electrode, be sure
of the following:
• Be sure that its needle comes at its top
side.
• Hook the needle electrode and the spring
on both front and rear terminals securely.
• Do not twist the needle electrode.
• Do not touch the needle electrode directly
with bare hands.
Fig. 4-185

4 - 66
4.6.16 New/old drum detection switches (SW9, SW10, SW11, SW12) and
new/old developer unit detection switches (SW13, SW14, SW15,
SW16)
(1) Remove the transfer belt unit.

P. 4-90 "4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU)"
(2) Remove The Cleaner Unit.
(3) Remove The Toner Motor Assembly.
P. 4-77 "4.6.26 Toner motor assembly"
(4) Remove 2 screws, release 5 upper latches, 4
and then take off the toner cartridge holder
[1].
Fig. 4-186
(5) Release the harness from the harness clamp

[2].
(6) Remove 3 screws [3] and take off the top
frame of toner cartridge [1] by sliding it
leftward [4] to unlock it.
Fig. 4-187
(7) Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer

belt cleaner guide (upper) [1].
Fig. 4-188

4 - 67
(8) Remove 1 screw and take off the transfer
belt cleaner guide (lower) [1].
Fig. 4-189

belt rail (rear) [1].
Fig. 4-190
(10) Remove 4 screws and take off 4 cleaner unit

rails [1].
Fig. 4-191

4 - 68
(11) Remove 2 screws and take off the switch
base [1].
Fig. 4-192
(12) Release the latches, and remove the new/old

drum detection switch [1] and new/old
developer unit detection switch [2] from the
switch base.
Fig. 4-193
(13) Disconnect the connector, and remove the

new/old drum detection switch [1] and new/
old developer unit detection switch [2].
Fig. 4-194

4 - 69
New/old drum detection switches
• Y (SW9)
• M (SW10)
• C (SW11)
• K (SW12)
New/old developer unit detection switches
• Y (SW13)
• M (SW14)
• C (SW15)
• K (SW16)
Fig. 4-195
4.6.17 Drum thermistor (THM4)
(1) Remove the discharge LED (C).

P. 4-27 "4.4.2 Discharge LED"
connector, and then take off the drum
thermistor.
Fig. 4-196
4.6.18 Temperature/humidity sensor (S10)
(1) Remove the front cover.

P. 4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(3) Remove the right front cover.
(6) Remove 4 screws and take off the inner
cover [1].
Fig. 4-197

4 - 70
(7) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the
temperature/humidity sensor.
Fig. 4-198
4.6.19 Waste toner paddle rotation detection sensor (S9)
(1) Remove the waste toner paddle motor unit.

P. 4-71 "4.6.20 Waste toner paddle motor
(M7)"
waste toner paddle rotation detection sensor
[1].
Fig. 4-199
4.6.20 Waste toner paddle motor (M7)

(6) Remove 4 screws, and then take off the
inner cover [1].
Fig. 4-200

4 - 71
(7) Remove 2 screws and disconnect the
connector, and then remove the waste toner
paddle motor unit [1].
Fig. 4-201
(8) Remove the grip [1], bushing [2], and gear

[3].
Fig. 4-202

connector, and then take off the waste toner
paddle motor [1].
Fig. 4-203

4 - 72
Notes:
Wire the motor harness through hooks
during assembly.
Make sure that the harness does not come
up on the area in the red frame.
Fig. 4-204
4.6.21 Drum switching detection sensor (S11)

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect the motor and sensor
connectors, and release the harness from
the guide.
switching unit [1].
Fig. 4-205
(4) Remove the drum switching detection

sensor.
Fig. 4-206

4 - 73
4.6.22 Drum switching motor (M3)

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect the connector and release the
harness from the guide.
switching motor bracket [1].
Fig. 4-207
(4) Remove the arm.

Notes:
When installing the drum switching motor
bracket, put the gear projection into the arm
hole.
Fig. 4-208
(5) Remove the E-ring and gear.

Notes:
Before removing the gear, place a marking
so that it can be re-assembled at the same
position.
Fig. 4-209

4 - 74
(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the drum
switching motor [1].
Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the
screws. If incorrect ones are used, the motor
could be damaged.
Fig. 4-210
4.6.23 Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor (M2)

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
connector, and then take off the paper
feeding/developer unit drive motor [1].
Fig. 4-211
4.6.24 Paper feeding/developer drive unit
(1) Remove the drum TBU drive unit.

P. 4-98 "4.7.13 Drum TBU drive unit"
(2) Remove the ozone exhaust fan duct.
P. 4-80 "4.6.30 Ozone exhaust fan (F2)"
(3) Remove the registration clutch.
(CLT1)"
(4) Release the harness from the harness guide.
feeding/developer drive unit [1].
Fig. 4-212

4 - 75
Notes:
If an optional PFU is installed, press the drive
gear [2] down and install the drive unit.
Fig. 4-213
4.6.25 Developer unit (K) drive gear

unit.
drive unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer
unit (K) drive gear cover [1].
Fig. 4-214
(3) Remove the developer unit (K) drive gear.
Fig. 4-215

4 - 76
4.6.26 Toner motor assembly
The toner motor is installed depending on toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K).
Toner cartridge (Y): Toner motor (M8)
Toner cartridge (M): Toner motor (M9)
Toner cartridge (C): Toner motor (M10)
Toner cartridge (K): Toner motor (M11)
(1) Remove the receiving tray.

P. 4-2 "4.1.3 Receiving tray"
(2) Pull out the toner cartridge.
(3) Release the latch and remove 5 toner
cartridge rails [1]. 4
Fig. 4-216
Notes:
When installing the toner cartridge rail,
securely align at the position at which the
frame matches the rail groove.
Fig. 4-217

4 - 77
(4) Remove 2 screws and release 2 hooks.
Then, remove the toner motor assembly [1]
and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-218
Fig. 4-219
4.6.27 Toner motor (M8, M9, M10, M11)
(1) Remove the toner motor assembly.

(2) Release 2 latches and remove the gear [1].
Fig. 4-220

4 - 78
connector, and then take off the motor
bracket [1].
Fig. 4-221
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the toner

motor [1].
Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the
screws. If incorrect ones are used, the motor
could be damaged.
Fig. 4-222
4.6.28 Toner cartridge interface PC board
(1) Remove the toner motor assembly.

(2) Disconnect 4 connectors, release 4 latches,
and then remove the toner cartridge interface
PC board.
Fig. 4-223

4 - 79
4.6.29 Ozone filter

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Remove the ozone filter.
Fig. 4-224
4.6.30 Ozone exhaust fan (F2)

P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect the connector, release the hook,
and then remove the ozone exhaust fan duct
[1].
Fig. 4-225
(3) Remove 2 screws, release the harness from

the guide, and then take off the ozone
exhaust fan and bracket.
Fig. 4-226

4 - 80
4.6.31 SYS board cooling fan (F1)

P. 4-4 "4.1.9 Right rear cover"
P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(3) Remove 2 screws [1] and loosen 4 screws
[2], and then take off the SYS board cover [3]
by sliding it toward the right side.
Fig. 4-227
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and lift up 2 latches.

Then, remove the SYS board cooling fan [1]
by sliding it out toward the rear side.
Fig. 4-228
4.6.32 Switching regular cooling fan (F3)

inner cover [1].
Fig. 4-229

4 - 81
connector. Then release the harness from
the guide and remove the switching regular
cooling fan [1].
Fig. 4-230
4.6.33 Drum drive gear

(2) Remove the drum TBU motor [1] and the 1st
transfer contact/release clutch [2].
P. 4-98 "4.7.12 Drum/TBU motor (M6)"
P. 4-96 "4.7.10 1st transfer contact/
release clutch (CLT3)"
Fig. 4-231

drive gear cover [1].
Fig. 4-232

4 - 82
Notes:
When installing the drum drive gear cover,
make sure that the spring is engaged with
the concave portion of the gear.
Fig. 4-233
(4) Remove the drum drive gear.
Fig. 4-234
4.6.34 Developer drive gear

(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the developer
drive gear cover [1].
Fig. 4-235

4 - 83
(3) Remove the developer drive gear.
Fig. 4-236
4.6.35 Main power switch (SW4)

(6) Remove 4 screws and take off the inner
cover [1].
Fig. 4-237
(7) Disconnect the connectors and remove the

main power switch.
Fig. 4-238

4 - 84
4.6.36 Drum damp heater (Right)

(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-239
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Fig. 4-240

4 - 85
(4) As shown in the figure, slide the drum damp
heater (right) [2] and take it off.
[2]
Fig. 4-241
4.6.37 Drum damp heater (Left)

(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the cover [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-242
(3) Disconnect 1 connector
Fig. 4-243

4 - 86
(4) Remove 1 screw.
(5) As shown in the figure, slide the drum damp [2]
heater (right) [2] and take it off.
Fig. 4-244

4 - 87
Notes:
When installing, be sure that the wire harness is correctly set, and also be careful not to catch it
between other parts.
a. Make sure that the harness for the damp heater is not above the metal plate edge.
b. Be sure to pass the harness for the damp heater through the clamps.
a b
Fig. 4-245

4 - 88
4.7 Transfer Units (TBU, TRU)
4.7.1 Transfer belt cleaning unit

(2) Hold the lever and pull the transfer belt
cleaning unit [1] toward the front side to
remove it.
Fig. 4-246
4.7.2 Transfer belt cleaning blade/blade seal
(1) Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit.

P. 4-89 "4.7.1 Transfer belt cleaning unit"
belt cleaning blade [1].
(3) Remove the front and rear blade seals.
Notes:
After the blade seals have been attached, be
sure that no gap is left between the blade
seals and the edge of the transfer belt
cleaning blade.
Fig. 4-247

4 - 89
4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU)
Notes:
You are recommended to wear gloves so that you do not touch the surface of the transfer belt
with bare hands.
(1) Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit.

P. 4-89 "4.7.1 Transfer belt cleaning unit"
(2) Pull the TBU release lever and turn it
clockwise to release the 1st transfer roller.
Fig. 4-248
(3) Open the side cover and lower the 2nd

transfer roller unit (TRU) [1].
Fig. 4-249
(4) Pull the lever, loosen 2 screws to lower it,

and then pull out the transfer belt unit.
Fig. 4-250

4 - 90
Notes:
• Be careful not to generate any friction
between the transfer belt and the 2nd
transfer roller unit when pulling out the
transfer belt unit.
• When installing the transfer belt unit,
make sure that the lever [1] is pulled out.
• When installing the transfer belt unit,
push the handle unit [3] inside while the
screw [2] is lowered.
4
Fig. 4-251
4.7.4 Transfer belt

Notes:
You are recommended to wear gloves so that you do not touch the surface of the transfer belt
with bare hands.

P. 4-90 "4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU)"
(2) Remove the spring [2] and the front
tensioner [1].
Fig. 4-252
(3) Remove the the spring [2] of the rear

tensioner [1].
Fig. 4-253

4 - 91
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the front drive
roller bracket [1] on the front side.
Fig. 4-254
(5) Using the material that is packed with the

transfer belt (service part), stand the transfer
belt unit [1] on the waste toner box [2].
Notes:
Use 1 piece of white urethane foam (138 x
138 x 25 mm) with a 30 mm diameter hole.
Fig. 4-255
Notes:
When installing, make sure that the mark
[1] of the transfer belt unit is aligned with the
mark [2] of the waste toner box.
Fig. 4-256

4 - 92
(6) Remove the transfer belt [1] upward.
Fig. 4-257
Notes:
• When installing the transfer belt, place
the side with the serial number facing
upward (front side).
• Install the transfer belt in the middle so
that it does not move to one side.
• Do not touch the belt surface directly with
bare hands.
• Be sure not to scratch the belt surface.
• Check if the rib on both ends of the
transfer belt does not run on the rollers.
Fig. 4-258
4.7.5 Drive roller
(1) Remove the transfer belt.

 P. 4-91 "4.7.4 Transfer belt"
(2) Remove the drive roller [1].
Fig. 4-259

4 - 93
Notes:
When installing the driver roller, correctly
attach the spring [1] on the rear drive roller
shaft.
Fig. 4-260
4.7.6 1st transfer roller
(1) Remove the transfer belt.

 P. 4-91 "4.7.4 Transfer belt"
(2) Place the transfer belt frame upside down.
(3) Remove the rear shaft on the 1st transfer
roller.
Fig. 4-261
(4) Pull the 1st transfer roller [1] toward the rear
side, and pull it out from the front shaft.
Fig. 4-262

4 - 94
4.7.7 2nd transfer roller

(2) Raise the stopper and remove the 2nd
transfer roller assembly [1].
Fig. 4-263
(3) Remove 2 E-rings, collars, and stoppers, and

then take off the 2nd transfer roller.
Fig. 4-264
4.7.8 2nd transfer roller unit (TRU)

(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the harness
cover [1].
Fig. 4-265

4 - 95
(3) Remove 2 screws and 2 clips, disconnect 1
connector, and then remove the 2nd transfer
roller unit [1].
Fig. 4-266
4.7.9 Paper clinging detection sensor (S18)
(1) Remove the 2nd transfer roller unit.

 P. 4-95 "4.7.8 2nd transfer roller unit
(TRU)"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the paper
clinging detection sensor (S18) [1].
Fig. 4-267
4.7.10 1st transfer contact/release clutch (CLT3)

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove 1
screw. Then pull up the latch toward the front
side, rotate it clockwise, and remove the 1st
transfer contact/release clutch cover [1].
Fig. 4-268

4 - 96
(3) Remove the 1st transfer contact/release
clutch.
Fig. 4-269
4.7.11 1st transfer roller status detection sensor (S12)

 P. 4-98 "4.7.13 Drum TBU drive unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the 1st
transfer contact/release gear unit [1].
Fig. 4-270
Notes:
When installing the 1st transfer roller status
detection sensor, pass the harness through
the harness guide.
Fig. 4-271

4 - 97
(3) Remove the 1st transfer roller status
detection sensor [1] and disconnect the
connector.
Fig. 4-272
4.7.12 Drum/TBU motor (M6)

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
connector, and then take off the drum/TBU
motor [1].
Fig. 4-273
4.7.13 Drum TBU drive unit
(1) Remove the high-voltage transformer.

 P. 9-6 "9.1.8 High-voltage transformer
(HVT)"
Fig. 4-274

4 - 98
(3) Disconnect 4 LED connectors and 4 flat
cables.
Fig. 4-275
Notes:
figure.
Connector
Fig. 4-276
Notes:
it in strongly.
Fig. 4-277

4 - 99
(4) Slide the harness guide [1] upward and tilt it
to the near side.
Fig. 4-278
(5) Remove the drum switching unit.

 P. 4-73 "4.6.21 Drum switching detection
sensor (S11)"
(6) Disconnect 4 connectors and release the
harness from the harness guide.
Fig. 4-279
(7) Remove 2 power supply terminals [1].

Notes:
The number of the springs for the left side
power supply terminal differs from the one for
the right side power supply terminal.
Left side (see from rear side): 3 springs

Right side (see from rear side): 2 springs
Fig. 4-280

4 - 100
(8) Remove 7 screws, release the upper hook,
and then take off the drum TBU drive unit [1].
Fig. 4-281
Fig. 4-282
Notes:
When installing the drum TBU drive unit,
insert the protrusion of the transfer belt drive
shaft release arm into the hole in the lever.
Fig. 4-283

4 - 101
(9) Remove the transfer belt drive shaft release
arm [1].
Fig. 4-284

4 - 102
4.8.1 Image quality control unit

 P. 4-90 "4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU)"
connector, and then take off the image
quality control unit [1].
Notes:
4
The attachment screw on the rear side is a
shoulder screw, so exercise care when
handling it during installation.
Fig. 4-285
Fig. 4-286
Notes:
Be sure to pass the harness of the image
quality control unit through the harness
clamp.
Fig. 4-287

4 - 103
4.8.2 Image position aligning sensor (Front) (S7)
(1) Remove the image quality control unit.

 P. 4-103 "4.8.1 Image quality control unit"
connector, and then take off the Image
position aligning sensor (Front) [1].
Fig. 4-288
4.8.3 Image position aligning sensor (Rear)/Image quality sensor (S8)

connector, and then take off the image
position aligning sensor (Rear)/image quality
sensor [1].
Fig. 4-289
4.8.4 Registration sensor (S6)

registration sensor [1].
Fig. 4-290

4 - 104
4.9 Fuser Unit
4.9.1 Fuser unit

Notes:
• Be sure that the temperature of the fuser unit has lowered enough before removing it. If the
unit still heated should be removed, wear a pair of gloves before working.
• When a new fuser unit is installed, be sure to check whether the fuser-related life counter
values have been cleared in the list printing mode or the setting mode (08).
• When disassembling the fuser unit or replacing any parts in it, be sure that the wire harness is
correctly set, and also be careful not to catch it between other parts.
4
a. Check the harness wiring to prevent the cover from catching the harnesses.
b. Be sure to wire the harness for the paper exit sensor as shown below and not to let it catch in the
harness holder [1].

4 - 105
a
a b
[1]
Fig. 4-291

4 - 106
c. Be sure to wire the harness for the fuser roller thermostat along the hooks of the harness holder [2]
as shown below.
d. Be careful not to catch the harnesses for the fuser roller thermistor in the drawer connector bracket
[3]. The harnesses will likely be caught if they are come off from the hook [4].
e. Be sure to wire the harnesses for the fuser roller thermistor along all the hooks of the harness holder
[1] as shown below.

4 - 107
c
[2]
d e
[3]
[4]
Fig. 4-292

4 - 108
Notes:
If the equipment and the fuser unit are left
unused for a long time, install the pressure
release parts (SPACER-PRS-INI) to release
the pressure of the fuser unit.
Fig. 4-293

(2) Press down the lever and remove the fuser
unit.
Notes:
• The fuser unit is extremely hot. When
removing the fuser unit, hold the handles
of the unit to avoid a direct touch on the
unit.
• When installing the fuser unit, be sure to
press it in until the lever goes up.
Fig. 4-294

4 - 109
4.9.2 Front side cover
(1) Remove the fuser unit.

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the front side
cover [1].
Fig. 4-295
4.9.3 Rear side cover

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the rear side
cover [1].
Notes:
When installing the cover, put the harness
into the harness guide so that it will not be
pinched by the cover.
Fig. 4-296
4.9.4 Fuser roller cover

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser
roller cover [1].
Fig. 4-297

4 - 110
4.9.5 Fuser roller separation finger
(1) Remove the fuser roller cover.

 P. 4-110 "4.9.4 Fuser roller cover"
(2) Raise the fuser roller separation finger, and
remove the fuser roller separation finger [1]
and the spring.
Fig. 4-298
4.9.6 Pressure roller separation finger
(1) Remove the pressure roller cover.

 P. 4-117 "4.9.13 Paper exit sensor (S13)"
(2) Raise the pressure roller separation finger,
and remove the pressure roller separation
finger [1] and the spring.
Fig. 4-299
4.9.7 Fuser roller center thermostat (THMO1)/fuser roller rear

thermostat (THMO2)

sensor thermostat [1] and side thermostat
[2].
Notes:
• When installing, be sure that the gap
between the thermostat and fuser roller is
1.2 to 1.8 mm.
• After replacing the center and side
thermostats, adjust the gap between the
thermostats and the fuser roller.
• See the external document.: P. 6-**
"6.12.2 Adjusting the gap of the
thermostat" Fig. 4-300

4 - 111
4.9.8 Fuser roller center thermistor (THM1)/fuser roller side thermistor
(THM2)/fuser roller edge thermistor (THM3)
(1) Remove the rear side cover.

 P. 4-110 "4.9.3 Rear side cover"
(3) Disconnect the connector of the paper exit
sensor.
 P. 4-117 "4.9.13 Paper exit sensor (S13)"
(4) Remove 1 screw, take off the connector
bracket, and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-301
(5) Remove 1 screw, release the harness from

the guides, and then take off the harness
guide [1].
Fig. 4-302
(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the edge

thermistor [1].
Notes:
• Before installing the fuser roller edge
thermistor, assemble the fuser roller.
• When installing, be careful not to deform
the thermistor. Also, make sure that the
thermistor is in touch with the fuser roller.
• After replacing the edge thermistor, be
sure to calibrate the fuser thermistor.
Fig. 4-303

4 - 112
center thermistor [1] and side thermistor [2].
Notes:
• When installing, be careful not to cause
any deformation to occur to the
thermistor.
• After replacing the center and side
thermistors, adjust the gap between the
thermistor and the fuser roller. And, be
sure that the gap between the thermister
and fuser roller is 0.5 to 1.0 mm. 4
• See the external document.: 6.12.1
Adjustment of the non-contact thermistor
Gap
• After adjusting the gap, be sure to Fig. 4-304
calibrate the fuser thermistor.
4.9.9 Center heater lamp (LAMP1), Side heater lamp (LAMP2)
(1) Remove the front side cover.

 P. 4-110 "4.9.2 Front side cover"
(4) Remove 3 screws and take off the harness of
the thermostat.
Fig. 4-305
(5) Remove 1 screw and release the harness of

the lamp from the guide. Then remove the
front lamp holder.
Fig. 4-306

4 - 113
(6) Remove 1 screw and release the harness of
the lamp from the guide. Then remove the
rear lamp holder.
(7) Remove the connector bracket and
disconnect the connector.
 P. 4-112 "4.9.8 Fuser roller center
thermistor (THM1)/fuser roller side thermistor
(THM2)/fuser roller edge thermistor (THM3)"
Fig. 4-307
(8) Remove the heater lamp [1].

Notes:
• Do not touch the heater lamp directly with
your hands.
Fig. 4-308
4.9.10 Paper entrance guide
(1) Remove the front side cover.

entrance guide [1].
Fig. 4-309

4 - 114
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the brush.
Fig. 4-310
4.9.11 Pressure roller
(1) Remove the paper entrance guide.

 P. 4-114 "4.9.10 Paper entrance guide"
(2) Remove the harness holder [1].
Fig. 4-311
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the pressure

roller cover [1].
Fig. 4-312

4 - 115
(5) Remove 2 springs.
Notes:
• After replacing the springs, adjust the gap
between the thermistor and the fuse
roller. And, be sure that the gap between
the thermister and fuser roller is 0.5 to 1.0
mm.
See the external document.: 6.12.1
Gap
• After adjusting the gap, be sure to
Fig. 4-313
(6) Remove 2 levers [1] and the pressure roller

[2].
Notes:
• After replacing the pressure roller, adjust
the gap between thermistor and the fuser
roller. And, be sure that the gap between
the thermistor and fuser roller is 0.5 to 1.0
mm.
See the external document.: 6.12.1
Gap
Fig. 4-314
4.9.12 Fuser roller
(1) Remove the pressure roller.

 P. 4-115 "4.9.11 Pressure roller"
(2) Remove the heater lamp.
 P. 4-113 "4.9.9 Center heater lamp
(LAMP1), Side heater lamp (LAMP2)"
(3) Remove the E-ring and the pressure roller
release lever.
(4) Raise the fuser roller separation finger.
Fig. 4-315

4 - 116
(5) Remove the C-ring [1], drive gear [2], collar
[3], bearing [4], and fuser roller [5].
Fig. 4-316
Notes:
• Be careful not to damage the fuser roller.
• When removing or installing the C-ring,
be careful not change its shape by
forcefully opening it excessively.
• Be sure to fit the C-ring to the groove on
the fuser roller. (Make sure that the 2
opening ends and the center part of the
C-ring are firmly positioned in the
groove.)
• After replacing the fuser roller, adjust the
gap between the thermistors and fuser
roller.
And, be sure that the gap between the
thermister and fuser roller is 0.5 to 1.0 Fig. 4-317
mm.
•  P. 6-86 "6.12.1 Adjustment of the non-
contact thermistor Gap"
4.9.13 Paper exit sensor (S13)

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Remove the harness holder [1].
Fig. 4-318

4 - 117
(4) Remove 2 screws [1] and take off the
reverse guide [2].
Fig. 4-319
(5) Remove the sensor cover [1]. Disconnect the

connector and take off the paper exit sensor
[2].
Fig. 4-320
4.9.14 Paper exit unit

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the paper exit
unit [1].
Fig. 4-321

4 - 118
Notes:
When installing the paper exit unit, align the
protrusion on the rear of the bottom of the
screw hole with the frame hole, and fit the
drive gear shaft into the bearing.
Fig. 4-322
4.9.15 Exit roller
(1) Remove the paper exit unit.

 P. 4-118 "4.9.14 Paper exit unit"
(2) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and bushing
[3], then take off the exit roller [4].
Fig. 4-323
(3) Remove the idling roller [1] and spring [2].
Fig. 4-324

4 - 119
Notes:
When replacing the idling roller or idling roller
shaft, apply 0.5 x 2 rice-sized grain of white
grease (Molykote EM-30L) to each oil groove
[1] and [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 4-325
4.9.16 Exit motor (M5)

 P. 4-4 "4.1.9 Right rear cover"
(2) Remove the paper exit unit.
 P. 4-118 "4.9.14 Paper exit unit"
(3) Loosen 1 screw and remove the exit motor
cover [1].
Fig. 4-326

4 - 120
(4) Remove 1 screw, take off the exit motor
assembly [1], and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-327
Fig. 4-328
(5) Remove the belt [1].
Fig. 4-329

4 - 121
(6) Remove 2 screws, and take off the exit motor
by letting the gear out of the large hole in the
bracket.
Fig. 4-330
4.9.17 Fuser motor (M4)
(1) Remove the SYS board cooling fan.

 P. 4-81 "4.6.31 SYS board cooling fan
(F1)"
connector, and then take off the HDD [1].
(3) Disconnect all connectors connected to the
SYS board.
(4) Remove 9 screws and take off the SYS
board [1].
Fig. 4-331
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser

motor cover [1].
Fig. 4-332

4 - 122
connector, and then take off the fuser motor
[1].
Fig. 4-333
4.9.18 Fuser drive unit

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Remove the fuser motor cover.
 P. 4-122 "4.9.17 Fuser motor (M4)"
(3) Remove the 3 screws and unplug the
connector, and then remove the fuser drive
unit [1].
Fig. 4-334
Notes:
Exercise care to ensure the inside gear [1]
does not drop.
Fig. 4-335

4 - 123
(4) Remove the 2 screws, and then take off the
bracket and fuser drive gear.
Fig. 4-336

4 - 124
4.10 Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) (OPTION: MD-0105)
4.10.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)

 P. 4-3 "4.1.7 Right top cover"
 P. 4-3 "4.1.8 Right front cover"
(4) Remove 3 connectors and take off the screw 4
fixing the ground cable.
Fig. 4-337
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the wire end

bracket [1] by sliding it toward the rear side.
Fig. 4-338
(6) Slide the rear hinge outward and remove the

rear shaft.
Notes:
During installation, turn the rear hinge
downward, and then install the right rear
cover.
Fig. 4-339

4 - 125
(7) Slightly lift up the automatic duplexing unit
and slide it toward the rear side to remove it.
(8) Release the harness from the harness
clamps.
Fig. 4-340
Notes:
When installing the automatic duplexing unit,
fit the boss to the hole in the front hinge.
Fig. 4-341
4.10.2 Feed clutch (CLT2)
(1) Remove the automatic duplexing unit.

 P. 4-125 "4.10.1 Automatic duplexing unit
(ADU)"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the clutch
cover [1].
Fig. 4-342

4 - 126
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the feed
clutch.
Notes:
When installing the feed clutch, attach a
rotation stopper.
Fig. 4-343
4.10.3 Transport roller
(1) Remove the 2nd transfer roller unit (TRU).

 P. 4-95 "4.7.8 2nd transfer roller unit
(TRU)"
transport roller together with the holder by
positioning the notch while compressing the
holder.
Fig. 4-344
(3) Remove the holder, spring, bushing, and

gear.
Fig. 4-345

4 - 127
Notes:
Install the gear, bushing, and spring in the
orientation shown in the figure.
Fig. 4-346
4.10.4 Transport unit
(1) Remove the feed clutch.

 P. 4-126 "4.10.2 Feed clutch (CLT2)"
(2) Remove the transport roller.
 P. 4-127 "4.10.3 Transport roller"
(3) Remove 6 screws and disconnect the ground
cable, and then take off the rear bracket [1]
of the transport unit.
Fig. 4-347
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the stopper [1].

(5) Remove 6 screws and take off the front
bracket [2] of the transport unit.
Fig. 4-348

4 - 128
(6) Remove the bypass separation pad [1],
separation pad holder [2], spring [3], paper
guide (lower) [4], and paper guide (upper)
[5].
Fig. 4-349

guide (middle) [1].
Fig. 4-350
4.10.5 ADU middle cover
(1) Remove the automatic duplexing unit.

 P. 4-125 "4.10.1 Automatic duplexing unit
(ADU)"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU
middle cover.
Fig. 4-351

4 - 129
4.10.6 ADU guide assembly
(1) Remove the transport unit.

 P. 4-128 "4.10.4 Transport unit"
(2) Remove the ADU middle cover.
 P. 4-129 "4.10.5 ADU middle cover"
guide assembly [1].
Fig. 4-352

upper cover [1].
Fig. 4-353
4.10.7 ADU control board (ADU)
(1) Remove the ADU guide assembly.

 P. 4-130 "4.10.6 ADU guide assembly"
(2) Disconnect 3 connectors and remove the
ADU control board (ADU).
Fig. 4-354

4 - 130
4.10.8 ADU drive unit/ADU entrance sensor (S14)/ADU exit sensor (S15)/
ADU motor (M12)
(1) Remove the ADU guide assembly.

 P. 4-130 "4.10.6 ADU guide assembly"
(2) Disconnect the connectors of the ADU
control board (ADU) [1] and ADU motor
(M12).
(3) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the ADU
motor assembly [2] and ADU exit sensor
(S15) [3]. 4
Fig. 4-355
(4) Remove the E-ring [1] and gear [2].

motor (M12) [3].
Fig. 4-356
(6) Remove the ADU entrance sensor (S14),

and the drive belt [3] of ADU transport roller
[2].
Fig. 4-357

4 - 131
Notes:
• When taking off the transport roller, bend
the rib [1] to remove the collar [2], slide
the shaft [3] onto the rib, and then take off
the collar [4] on the opposite side to pull
out the shaft.
• Be sure to attach the belt when carrying
out installation.
Fig. 4-358
4.10.9 Side cover interlock switch (SW3)

(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the side cover
interlock switch cover [1].
Fig. 4-359
(3) Release the latches and take off the side

cover interlock switch. Disconnect 2
connectors.
Fig. 4-360

4 - 132
4.11 Removal and Installation of Options
Important:
• Before installing or removing options, turn the main power switch off and disconnect the
power cable from the outlet.
4.11.1 MR-3024 (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder)
(1) Press the [Power] button on the control panel

to shut it down.
(2) Turn the main power switch of the equipment 4
off.
(3) Disconnect the power cable.
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the connector
cover.
Fig. 4-361
Fig. 4-362
(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.
Fig. 4-363

4 - 133
(7) Remove 1 screw and 1 washer.
Fig. 4-364
(8) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 4-365
Fig. 4-366

4 - 134
(10) Remove the reversing automatic document
feeder by sliding it toward the rear side.
Fig. 4-367
4.11.2 KD-1032 (Paper Feed Pedestal)

to shut it down.
(2) Turn the main power switch of the equipment
off.
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the cover.
Fig. 4-368
(5) Disconnect the connector and ground cable.

[1] Damp heater harness
[2] Signal harness
[1] [2]
Fig. 4-369

4 - 135
(6) Install the cover.
Fig. 4-370
(7) Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing

brackets on the rear side.
Fig. 4-371

4 - 136
Fig. 4-372

brackets on the front side.
Fig. 4-373

4 - 137
(10) Lift the equipment up and remove the paper
feed pedestal.
Fig. 4-374
4.11.3 KD-1031 (Large Capacity Feeder)

to shut it down.
off.
Fig. 4-375

4 - 138
(5) Disconnect the connector and ground cable.
[1] Damp heater harness
[2] Signal harness
4
[1] [2]
Fig. 4-376
(6) Install the cover.
Fig. 4-377

4 - 139
brackets on the rear side.
Fig. 4-378
Fig. 4-379

4 - 140
(9) Pull out the large capacity feeder drawer.
Fig. 4-380

brackets on the front side.
Fig. 4-381

4 - 141
(11) Lift the equipment up and remove the large
capacity feeder.
Fig. 4-382
4.11.4 MY-1040 (Paper Feed Unit)

to shut it down.
off.
Fig. 4-383

4 - 142
(5) Remove 1 screw and take off the damp
heater connector cover.
Fig. 4-384
(6) Disconnect the damp heater connector.
Fig. 4-385

4 - 143
(7) Install the damp heater connector cover.
Fig. 4-386
(8) Remove 1 screw and take off the PFC cover.
Fig. 4-387
(9) Remove 1 screw and disconnect the ground

cable.
Fig. 4-388

4 - 144
(10) Disconnect 2 connectors.
Fig. 4-389
(11) Install the PFC cover.
Fig. 4-390
(12) Remove 2 screws and take off the fixing

bracket on the rear side.
Fig. 4-391

4 - 145
(13) Remove 1 screw and take off the fixing
bracket on the rear side.
Fig. 4-392

bracket on the front side.
Fig. 4-393
(15) Remove 1 screw and take off the fixing

bracket on the front side.
Fig. 4-394

4 - 146
(16) Lift the equipment up and remove the paper
feed unit.
Fig. 4-395
4.11.5 KN-2550 (Bridge Kit)

to shut it down.
off.
(4) Open the side cover. Remove 1 screw and
take off the connector cover.
Fig. 4-396
Fig. 4-397

4 - 147
(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the front cover
of the bridge kit.
Fig. 4-398
(7) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 4-399

bracket.
Fig. 4-400

4 - 148
(9) Lift the bridge kit up to pull out the hook, and
pull the bridge kit toward the front side to
remove it.
Fig. 4-401
4.11.6 MJ-1036 (Inner Finisher)

to shut it down.
off.
(4) Remove the connector cover.
Fig. 4-402
(5) Disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-403

4 - 149
(6) Open the finisher cover.
Fig. 4-404
(7) Press the button to release the lock. Pull out

the finisher.
Fig. 4-405
(8) Remove 1 screw and take off 1 bracket.
Fig. 4-406

4 - 150
(9) Install the finisher inside the equipment.
Fig. 4-407
Fig. 4-408
(11) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 4-409

4 - 151
(12) Remove the finisher.
Fig. 4-410
4.11.7 MJ-1037 (Saddle Stitch Finisher)

to shut it down.
off.
Fig. 4-411
(5) Disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-412

4 - 152
(6) Open the finisher cover and remove 1 fixing
screw on the front side.
Fig. 4-413
(7) Remove 1 fixing screw on the rear side.
Fig. 4-414
(8) Remove the finisher.
Fig. 4-415

4 - 153
4.11.8 MJ-5004 (Job Separator)

to shut it down.
off.
(4) Remove the tray.
Fig. 4-416
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the right rear

cover.
Fig. 4-417
Fig. 4-418

4 - 154
Fig. 4-419
(8) Loosen 2 screws and take off the front cover

of MJ-5004.
Fig. 4-420
(9) Remove 1 screw. Lift up the job separator

and release the hook. Take off the job
separator toward the front.
Fig. 4-421

4 - 155
4 - 156
5. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5.1 Overview
[A] Starting each mode
To enter the desired mode, turn the power ON while pressing two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) simultaneously. Hold the two keys until the [PRINT DATA] lamp is lit.
On the authentication screen displayed after starting up each mode, enter the service password, and
then press [OK]. The password is not set by default.
Refer to "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" for the codes in Test mode (03), Test
print mode (04), Adjustment mode (05), and Setting mode (08).
5
[B] Exiting from each mode
Shut down the equipment. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment
by pressing the [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds.
[C] List of modes
Mode For start Contents For exit Display

Control panel [0] + [1] + All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all [POWER] -
check mode [POWER] the LCD pixels blink. OFF/ON
Test mode [0] + [3] + Checks the status of input/output signals. [POWER] 100% C
[POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Test print mode [0] + [4] + Outputs the test patterns. [POWER] 100% P A4
[POWER] OFF/ON TEST PRINT
Adjustment [0] + [5] + Adjusts various items. [POWER] 100% A A4
mode [POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Setting mode [0] + [8] + Sets various items. [POWER] 100% D
[POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Assist mode [3]+[C]+ Clears error flags or SRAM, or safely deletes [POWER] -
[POWER] data in the HDD or SRAM to support the OFF/ON
replacement of the SYS board, SRAM or
HDD.
HDD assist [4]+[CLEAR]+ Assists the ADI-HDD by checking the type of [POWER] -
mode [POWER] the mounted HDD, reverting the HDD to a OFF/ON
factory default or removing keys.
File system [5] + [C] + Checks, recovers or initializes the file system [POWER] -
recovery mode [POWER] (HDD). OFF/ON
SRAM clear [6]+[CLEAR]+ Recovers the equipment from particular [POWER] -
mode [POWER] errors such as F800 or F900. OFF/ON
List print mode [9] + [START] + Prints various lists or outputs them in a CSV [POWER] 100% L A4
[POWER] format. OFF/ON LIST PRINT
PM support [6] + [START] + Clears each counter. [POWER] 100% 2
mode [POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Firmware [4] + [9] + Performs firmware update with USB device. [POWER] -
update mode [POWER] OFF/ON
[8] + [9] + Performs firmware update with download jig. [POWER] -
[POWER] OFF/ON
Password reset [4] + [8] + [9] Resets the administrator password and [POWER] -
mode + [POWER] service password. OFF/ON
SRAM data [5] + [9] Backs up the SRAM data to USB device. [POWER] -
cloning mode + [POWER] OFF/ON

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5-1
Notes:
The following modes cannot be carried out since they are provided only for production.
[2]+[CLEAR]+[POWER]
[7]+[CLEAR]+[POWER]
[8]+[CLEAR]+[POWER]
The menu below can be carried out in the following mode; however, there is no effect on the
equipment even if it is done.
[9]+[CLEAR]+[POWER]
0. Turn Line Mode ON
1. Turn Line Mode OFF
3. Restore Machine Information
[D] State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
[POWER]
Normal Self-diagnosis
ON
mode
Authentication
Warming up
screen
Ready Each mode
*2
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
Fig.5-1
*1 If you have used a self-diagnostic mode, turn the power OFF before the customer starts using the
equipment
*2 Mode shown in the table "[C] List of modes"
[E] About each mode

• Control panel check mode (01)
Operation procedure
[POWER] OFF/ON
[0][1] LED lit/ (Exit)
[START] (Button check)
[POWER] LCD blinking
[START]
Notes:
• A mode can be cancelled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
• Button Check
Buttons with LED: Press to turn OFF the LED.
Buttons without LED: Press to display the message on the control panel.

5-2
Button on touch panel: Press to display the initial screen displayed at power-ON. Press
[execution] on the touch panel and then the [CLEAR] button on the control panel. The screen
then returns to the Button Check menu.
• Test mode (03)

Refer to  P. 5-8 "5.3 Input check (Test mode 03)" and  P. 5-9 "5.4 Output check (test mode 03)".
• Test print mode (04)

Refer to  P. 5-10 "5.5 Test print mode (test mode 04)".
• Adjustment mode (05)

Refer to  P. 5-11 "5.6 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05)",  P. 5-14 "5.7 Test print
pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)", and "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" -
"Adjustment Code (05)."
5
Notes:
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ON/OFF] button for a few seconds.
Remarks:
• In “RAM”, the SRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
• Setting mode (08)

Refer to  P. 5-17 "5.8 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08)" and "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" - "Setting Code (08)."
Notes:
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ON/OFF] button for a few seconds.
Remarks:
• In “RAM”, the SRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board, “SYS”, “NIC” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board.
• Assist mode (3C)

Refer to  P. 5-19 "5.9 Assist Mode (3C)".
• HDD assist mode (4C)

Refer to  P. 5-22 "5.10 HDD Assist Mode (4C)".
• File system recovery mode (5C)

Refer to  P. 5-26 "5.11 File System Recovery Mode (5C)".
• SRAM clear mode (6C)

Refer to  P. 5-31 "5.12 SRAM Clear Mode (6C)".
• List print mode (9S)

Refer to  P. 5-34 "5.13 List print mode (9S)".
• PM support mode (6S)
Operation procedure
[6][START]
(Operation started) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
• Firmware update mode (49/89)

5-3
Refer to  P. 11-1 "11. FIRMWARE UPDATING".
• Password reset mode (489)
This mode resets the administrator password and service password. The user data is erased when
resetting the passwords.
Operation procedure
[4][8][9]
(Operation started) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
• SRAM data cloning mode (59)

Refer to  P. 12-1 "12.1 Data Cloning".

5-4
5.2 Service UI
5.2.1 Overview
The following self-diagnostic modes can be used with Service UI on the touch panel of the control
panel.
• 04 TEST PRINT MODE

• 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE
• 08 SETTING MODE
• 6S PM SUPPORT MODE
• 9S LIST PRINT MODE
• FAX LIST PRINT MODE
• CHART PRINT MODE
5
Notes:
Not all codes of the self-diagnostic mode can be used with Service UI. Refer to "15. SELF-
DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" for the codes available with Service UI.
5.2.2 Login procedure
[ 1 ] In the normal mode

(1) Turn the power ON.
(2) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
(3) With the [USER FUNCTIONS] menu displayed, enter the Service Mode password provided
during product training.
Fig.5-2

5-5
(4) Enter the user name and password on the SERVICE TECHNICIAN PASSWORD screen, then
press [OK]. They are set by default as follows:
User Name Service

Password None
Fig.5-3
The SERVICE MODE screen is displayed.
[ 2 ] In the security mode

If the security mode (the value of 08-8911 is "3") is set, log into Service UI following the steps below.
(1) Turn the power ON.
(2) Enter the user name and password on the USER AUTHENTICATION screen. The password
needs to be changed to log in for the first time.
Notes:
In case the password is forgotten, ask the administrator to reset the service password. In case
both the service password and administrator password are forgotten, the passwords can be reset
in the password reset mode. Note that the user data are deleted at that time.
(4) Enter the password for Service UI on the USER FUNCTIONS screen. The SERVICE MODE
screen is displayed.

5-6
5.2.3 [SERVICE MODE] Screen
After selecting the mode and pressing the [NEXT] button, the screen is switched to the selected mode.
• When the 05/08 mode is selected

The codes are displayed in one of the levels from the first to fifth.
You can proceed to the next level by selecting the item and pressing the [NEXT] button until the
code appears up to the fifth level. Then if you select the code and press the [NEXT] button, the
screen is switched to the adjustment mode or setting mode.
If you press the [CLASSIC] button on the screen in the first level, the screen is switched to the
adjustment mode or setting mode, so that you can enter the code number.
• When the modes other than 05/08 mode are selected

The screen is switched to the selected mode.
5
5.2.4 Setting/Changing password

(1) Press the [SETTINGS] button on the SERVICE MODE screen to display the SETTINGS screen.
Fig.5-4
(2) Press the [SERVICE PASSWORD] button to change the service password, or [RESET ADMIN
PASSWORD] to reset the administrator password.

5-7
5.3 Input check (Test mode 03)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button,
[SCAN] button and the digital keys in the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[FAX]
[0][3] [COPY]
[START] or [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
[SCAN] (Exit)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
Notes:
• Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
• The PRINT DATA lamp blinks when the input check is running.
Fig.5-5 Example of display during input check
Refer to "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" in this manual for the items to be
checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted.

5-8
5.4 Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
[0][3] Operation Stop Operation [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START] [START]
[POWER] ON code OFF (Exit)
Procedure 2
5
[0][3] Operation Test mode [POWER] OFF/ON
(Code) [START] One direction [CLEAR]
[POWER] standby (Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER]
Operation Operation Test mode OFF/ON
(Code) [START] [START] [CLEAR] standby
[POWER] ON OFF (Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF
[POWER]
Procedure 5
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
[START]
* Return to the standby screen for code input by pressing the [CLEAR] button.
Refer to "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" in this manual for the codes available in
the test mode 03.

5-9
5.5 Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out in the test print mode (04).
<Procedure 1>
[0][4] [POWER]
(Code) (Media selection) [START] Operation [CLEAR] OFF/ON
[POWER] Continuous (Exit)
Test Printing
<Procedure 2>
[0][4] Media Color [POWER]

(Code) [START] [START] Operation [CLEAR]
[POWER] selection selection OFF/ON
Continuous (Exit)
[CLEAR] Test Printing
<Procedure 5>
[CLEAR]
[0][4] [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Media [START] (Color [Digital key] [START] Operation [CLEAR] OFF/ON
selection) selection) [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Continuous (Exit)
[CLEAR] （Input density） Test Print)
Notes:
• When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed.
Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
• During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Remarks:
In the (Color selection) of <Procedure 2> or <Procedure 5>, the printing method is different
between [K(1)] and [K(4)] as follows.
• [K(1)]: Printing by bringing one K color developer unit into contact with the transfer belt
• [K(4)]: The developer units of four (YMCK) colors are brought into contact with the transfer
belt, but the test pattern is printed in K color only.
* The number in parentheses indicates the contact of the developer unit and the transfer belt.
Refer to "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" in this manual for the codes available in
the test print mode.

5 - 10
5.6 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05)
Procedure 1
[Digital key] [OK] [FAX] [POWER]

[0][5] [Digital key] [START] *[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Code) or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Key in a value) [INTERRUPT] [START] (Exit)
[CANCEL] (Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)
[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[OK]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START] ( Value
displayed ) or
[INTERRUPT]
([FAX] [START])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON 5
(Value unchangeable) (Exit)
Procedure 3
[UP] [OK] [POWER]

[0][5] [Digital key] [START] or ([FAX] [START])
or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) [DOWN] (Test copy)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Adjust a value) (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START] [OK] ([FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] or [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
*[FUNCTION CLEAR] [START])
(Key in a value) Stores value (Exit)
[CLEAR] in RAM (Test copy)
(Corrects value) [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][5] [OK] [FAX] [POWER]
[Digital key] [START] Automatic or
[POWER] adjustment OFF/ON
(Code) [INTERRUPT] [START] (Exit)
Stores value (Test copy)
in RAM
Procedure 6
[0][5] [Digital key] Automatic [FAX] [COPY]) [POWER]OFF/ON

[START]
[POWER] (Code) adjustment (Test copy) (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed.
* Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.

5 - 11
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[OK] [FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Automatic [POWER]
[START] [START] Stores value
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) adjustment [START] OFF/ON
in RAM
(Test copy) (Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed.
* Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
Procedure 10
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Value [POWER]

[START] [START] [START] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) displayed
(Exit)
[OK] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 12
[OK] [FAX] [POWER]

[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] Manual
(Code) adjustment or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Key in a value) [INTERRUPT] [START] (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)
(Corrects value)
[CANCEL]

5 - 12
Procedure 14
[OK] [FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] (Input value) or [POWER]
[START] [Digital key] [START]
[POWER] (Code) [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
(Sub code) [START] (Exit)
Stores value (Test copy)
in RAM
[CLEAR] [FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
Notes:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the
adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3
minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
5

5 - 13
5.7 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)
Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code Types of test pattern Remarks

1 Grid pattern (Black) For printer related adjustment
3 Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing) Refer to 6.1.7Image dimensional adjustment at
the printing section
4 Copier gamma adjustment pattern Refer to 6.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment
(Color & black integrated / All media types)
(Black / All media types)
7 Copier gamma confirmation pattern Refer to 6.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment
(Color / All media types)
8 Grid pattern (Color)
12 Secondary scanning direction 32 gradation For checking the image of printer section
steps (Y)
steps (M)
steps (C)
steps (K)
55 Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2) Refer to 6.1.6Paper alignment at the
registration roller
57 Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP) Refer to 6.1.6Paper alignment at the
registration roller
58 Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2) Refer to 6.1.6Paper alignment at the
registration roller
60 Grid pattern (Black / OHP) Refer to 6.1.6Paper alignment at the
registration roller
70 Printer gamma correction table creation Refer to 6.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment
pattern
(Plain paper)
71 Printer gamma correction table Refer to 6.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment
confirmation pattern
(Plain paper)
pattern

5 - 14
(Recycled paper)
pattern
(Thick paper 1)
(Thick paper 1)
pattern
(Thick paper 2)
79 Printer gamma correction table Refer to 6.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment 5
(Thick paper 2)
pattern
(Special paper 1)
(Special paper 1)
pattern
(Special paper 2)
(Special paper 2)
98 Grid pattern -2 (For printing K(4) / Plain Refer to 6.1.7Image dimensional adjustment at
paper) the printing section
99 Grid pattern -2 (For printing K(4) / Thick
paper 1)
100 Grid pattern - 1 (Full color / Thick paper 1)
101 Grid pattern - 1 (Black / Thick paper 1)
104 Color deviation confirmation pattern (A3/
LD)
(Color & black integrated / Plain paper)
(Color / Plain paper)
(Color & black integrated / Recycled paper)
(Color / Recycled paper)
(Color & black integrated / Thick paper 1)
(Color / Thick paper 1)
(Color & black integrated / Thick paper 2)
(Color / Thick paper 2)

5 - 15
(Color & black integrated / Special paper 1)
(Color / Special paper 1)
(Color & black integrated / Special paper 2)
(Color / Special paper 2)
(Plain paper / PS / 1200dpi)
* Not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
(Plain paper / PS / 1200dpi)
(Recycled paper / PS / 1200dpi)
(Recycled paper / PS / 1200dpi)
(Thick paper 1 / PS / 1200dpi)
(Special paper 1 / PS / 1200dpi)

5 - 16
5.8 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08)
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[OK]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
changes value (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
* Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
5
[OK]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER]OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[INITIALIZE]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or (Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[OK] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] [Digital key] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code)
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
Sets or (Stores value
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
* Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[OK]
[START] [Digital key] or
Sets or [INTERRUPT]
changes value (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

5 - 17
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[OK]
[START] [Select button] or
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [Digital key] [OK] [POWER]
[START] [START] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (1st setting) (2nd setting) [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[0][8] [Digital key] or [OK] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START]
[POWER] (Code) [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
* Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter “-”, when entering telephone number.

* The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[OK]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER]
[START] [START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code) OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
[CLEAR] Adjustment value
(Corrects value) cannot be changed

5 - 18
5.9 Assist Mode (3C)

This is a mode to operate the partitions of HDD, initialize the SRAM data, erase the HDD/SRAM data,
back up/restore the encryption key and licences.
Functions:
• Clearing update error flag (Clear Error Flag in Software Installation)
• Formatting data storage partition (Format Root Partition)
• Creating HDD partition (Format HDD)
• Formatting SRAM data (Clear SRAM)
• Backing up/restoring encryption key and license (Key Backup Restore)
• Erasing HDD securely (Erase HDD Securely)
• Erasing SRAM securely (Erase SRAM Securely) 5
• Clearing service tech password (Clear Service Tech)
5.9.2 Operating Procedure

(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
The following screen is displayed.
Firmware Assist Mode
Select number(1-8) and press START key
1. Clear Error Flag in Software Installation

2. Format Root Partition
3. Format HDD
4. Clear SRAM
5. Key Backup Restore
6. Erase HDD Securely
7. Erase SRAM Securely
8. Clear Service Tech Password
Fig.5-6
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
5.9.3 Functions
[A] Clearing update error flag (Clear Error Flag in Software Installation)
Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally
start up and an F600 error occurs when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the Update
Error flags used in the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically
cleared in the download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of SRAM on the SYS
board, the flags are cleared with this function.
[B] Formatting data storage partition (Format Root Partition)

When a defect occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the stored UI
data, etc. is formatted with this function.
Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary. HDD data must be installed after performing
this function.

5 - 19
[C] Creating HDD/SSD partition (Format HDD)
When the HDD/SSD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is necessary
to format a partition in the HDD/SSD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in the
HDD/SSD with this function.
Notes:
• When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
• Perform the HDD/SSD partition formatting only when a new HDD/SSD is installed since all data
in the current HDD/SSD are erased by this operation.
• When this operation has been done, do not perform SRAM data formatting (Clear SRAM) before
the normal start-up.
[D] Formatting SRAM data (Clear SRAM)

When SRAM is replaced with a new one, abnormal values may be written in the new SRAM. SRAM
data must be formatted with this function for such case.
Notes:
• This function is required only when a new SRAM is installed.
• Do not perform this function in cases other than the installation of a new SRAM because all data
in the SRAM will be deleted with this function.
• When this operation has been done, do not perform HDD partition creation (Format HDD) before
[E] Backing up/restoring encryption key and license (Key Backup Restore)
When the SRAM board (for the SYS board) or the SYS board is replaced or initialized, the encryption
key and license are erased. Therefore, they need to be backed up or restored with this function.
Configurations and functions of the "5.Key Backup Restore" menu.

1. Key SRAM to FROM
Restore the encryption key from SRAM to FROM.
2. Key FROM to SRAM

Back up the encryption key from FROM to SRAM.
3. License SRAM to FROM

Restore the license from SRAM to FROM.
4. License FROM to SRAM

Back up the license from FROM to SRAM.
5. ADIKey SRAM to FROM

Restore the ADIKey from SRAM to FROM.
6. ADIKey FROM to SRAM

Back up the ADIKey from FROM to SRAM.
[F] Erasing HDD/SSD securely (Erase HDD Securely)

This function is used when installing Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) or before discarding the HDD/
SSD.
It overwrites all the used areas on the HDD/SSD with the selected data, and makes it unusable.
After selecting this function, specify the level below to be overwritten.This setting is the overwriting
method complying with DoD 5220.22-M.
1. LOW (Normally use this setting.)

This is the standard overwriting method.
"00-FF-Random-Verify" Once

5 - 20
2. MEDIUM
This overwriting method is more secure than LOW. The erasing time is between LOW and HIGH.
"00-FF-Random" three times repeatedly -Verify
3. HIGH
This is the most secure overwriting method. It takes the longest time to erase data.
"00-FF-Random" five times repeatedly -Verify
4. SIMPLE
This is the simple overwriting method. It takes the shortest time to erase data.
Overwrite the Random data once
Key in the level number to display "<" next to it.

(At this time, if "0" is entered, the screen returns to the initial one of the Assist Mode.)
Press the [START] button to display the reconfirmation screen, and then press the [START] button 5
again to start overwriting.
Notes:
When this operation has been done, do not perform SRAM data formatting (Clear SRAM)
before the normal start-up.
[G] Erasing SRAM securely (Erase SRAM Securely)

This function is used before discarding the SRAM board (for the SYS board).
It overwrites all the used areas on the SRAM board with the selected data, and makes it unusable.
Immediately after selecting this function, the processing starts and is completed.
[H] Clearing service tech password (Clear Service Tech)

This function is needed after the HDD/SSD is replaced.
When the HDD/SSD is replaced, the service tech password stored in the new one is set as a blank.
Therefore, its password is copied to the SRAM board so that both passwords become the same with
this function. The setting is enabled when the equipment is started up in the normal mode after
performing this function.

5 - 21
5.10 HDD Assist Mode (4C)

This mode is available only when the security HDD (ADI-HDD) is mounted in the equipment. It enables
you to check the type of the mounted HDD/SSD, revert the ADI-HDD to the factory default or remove
keys.
Functions
• Checks the type (ADI, SATA, or SSD) of the mounted HDD/SSD.
• Disposes of ADI-HDD data safely without any of leakage.
• Deletes image data when reusing a used ADI-HDD.
5.10.2 Operation procedure
[4][C] HDD data

[Digital Key] [START] （ [Power] OFF
[Power] clear ）
(Select)
Operation
for SATA-HDD Failed
[STOP]
Cancel
Turn the power ON while pressing the [4] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously. Then the type of the
mounted HDD is checked and either of the following screens is displayed.
• When the security HDD is mounted
HDD Assist Mode System Firmware Version : xxxx(x.x.x.x)

Current HDD type: ADI HDD Update Mode : 4c Mode
Select number (1-2) and press START key
1. Revert factory initial status HDD

2. Remove key
Fig.5-7

5 - 22
• When a normal HDD/SSD is mounted

Current HDD type: SATA HDD or SSD Update Mode : 4c Mode

2. Remove key
Fig.5-8
Remarks:
If the HDD/SSD type cannot be identified, "Unknown HDD" may appear on the screen.
Refer to  P. 8-194 " [F106_1] ADI-HDD error: HDD type detection error"
Note:
When "SATA HDD" (normal HDD) is displayed, items 1 and 2 are not selectable.
If you select any of 1 and 2 and press the [START] button, the error message below appears.

Current HDD type: SATA HDD Update Mode : 4c Mode
=> 1. Revert factory initial status HDD

2. Remove key
Operation Failed.
Press SoftPower Key to Switch Off
Fig.5-9

5 - 23
5.10.3 Functions
[A] 1. Revert factory initial status HDD
Select this to dispose of the ADI-HDD as well as the equipment.
When this item is selected, all data in the HDD are deleted and the HDD is reverted to its initial status at
the factory shipment.
This operation requires only a few seconds; however, you must create the partition in the HDD in the
3C mode (Format HDD) and reinstall the HDD data in the 49 mode to make the HDD reusable.
When "1" is selected and then [START] button is pressed, the menu below appears.
To start, press the [START] button.


2. Remove key
Confirmation Screen
Are you sure ???
Press START to continue

Press STOP to cancel
Fig.5-10
When the operation is finished, the result appears on the menu.


2. Remove key
Data in the HDD has been complately erased.

Fig.5-11
Note:
If the equipment is started in the normal mode with this condition, an HDD mounting error occurs.
5 - 24
[B] 2. Remove Key
Select this to reuse the ADI-HDD as well as the equipment.
When this item is selected, image data in the HDD are deleted.
This operation requires approx. 20 minutes since the partition must be rebuilt.
When "2" is selected and then [START] button is pressed, the menu below appears.
To start, press the [START] button.

1. Revert factory initial status HDD 5

=> 2. Remove key
Confirmation Screen
Are you sure ???
Press START to continue

Press STOP to cancel
Fig.5-12
When the operation is finished, the result appears on the menu.


=> 2. Remove key
Data in the HDD has been erased.

Fig.5-13
Note:
After this operation, the equipment becomes reusable without reinstalling the firmware.

5 - 25
5.11 File System Recovery Mode (5C)
5.11.1 Overview
This is a mode to check if there is any damage to the file system (HDD) and recover it if necessary. Use
this mode only in the following cases:.
• There is a possibility of damage to the file system (HDD).

• There is an apparent damage to the file system (HDD), requiring recovery or initialization.
This mode enables you to have the following functions:

• Check F/S: Checks the file system.
• Recovery F/S: Recovers the file system.
• Initialize HDD: Initializes partitions in the HDD/SSD.
• Initialize DB: Initializes database (LDAP DB/log DB/language DB).
• SMART Info: Displays the various information in the HDD/SSD.
• DISK Info: Displays the usage rate of HDD/SSD.
• HDD Utility: Initializes log files.

[5][C] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] (HDD formatting) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Selection) (Selection)
(DB formatting (Exit)
such as log data)
Notes:
• Do not turn the main power switch OFF after you select a menu and processing has
started (during processing).
• After the processing is completed, a beep sounds 4 times and either "Completed" or
"Failed" appears on the screen.
Turn ON the power while pressing the [5] and [CLEAR] button simultaneously. The following screen is
displayed.
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> Check F/S
Please Select Mode
>1. Check F/S

2. Recovery F/S
3. Initialize HDD
4. Initialize DB
5. SMART Info
6. DISK Info
7. HDD Utility
Fig.5-14
Remark:
When the mode is started, "1. Check F/S" is selected by default.
(">" is displayed on the left of the selected number.)

5 - 26
5.11.3 Functions
[A] Check of the File System (Check F/S)
In case that particular service calls occur or there is a possibility of damage to the file system, the status
of each partition in the HDD can be checked.
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> Check F/S
Please Select Partition 0: Main menu
1. ALL
2. /
3. /work 5
4. /registration
5. /backup
6. /imagedata
7. /storage
8. /encryption
Fig.5-15
Explanation for each item

• 1: Checks all partitions.
• 2: Checks root partition only.
• 3-8: Checks each partition shown above.
Note:
More than one partition can be selected. (">" is displayed on the left of the selected number.)
• If damage is discovered, recover or initialize the file system (HDD).
[B] Recovery of the File System (Recovery F/S)

In case that an error occurs during the file system check, each partition can be recovered.
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> Recovery F/S
1. ALL
2. /
3. /work
4. /registration
5. /backup
6. /imagedata
7. /storage
8. /encryption
Fig.5-16

• 1: Recovers all partitions.
• 2: Recovers root partition only.
• 3-8: Recovers each partition shown above.
Note:
5 - 27
• If an error occurs during recovery, initialize the file system (HDD).
[C] Initialize the File System (Initialize HDD)

In case that an error occurs during the file system check and the partition cannot be recovered with the
recovery, each partition can be initialized.
It is recommended to export the user information such as address book before performing this function.
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> Initialize HDD
Please Select Partition
1. Except /
2. /work
3. /registration
4. /backup
5. /imagedata
6. /storage
7. /encryption
8. /TAT
Fig.5-17

• 1: Initializes partitions other than root one and creates initial files.
• 2: Initializes a partition (/work) and creates an initial file.
• 3: Initializes a partition (/registration) and creates an initial file.
• 4: Initializes a partition (/backup) and creates an initial file.
• 5: Initializes a partition (/imagedata) and creates an initial file.
• 6: Initializes a partition (/storage) and creates an initial file.
• 7: Initializes a partition (/encryption) and creates an initial file.
• 8: Initializes a partition (/TAT) and creates an initial file.
Remark:
Notes:
• If [1. Except /] or [7. /encryption] is selected, applications and OS data in the equipment are also
initialized. In this case, the applications and the file system must be reinstalled. Install the system
software (HD Data) by performing [49] -> [4] after initialization.
• If [1. Except /] is selected, minimal data necessary for normal startup are automatically
recovered.
• If [1. Except /] is selected, log database is also initialized. Back up the data before initializing if
necessary.
• If [1.Except/] is selected, do not perform SRAM data formatting (Clear SRAM) before the normal
start-up.
[D] Initialize the DB (Initialize DB)

In case that particular service calls occur or there is a possibility of damage to the databases, each
one can be initialized.

5 - 28
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> Initialize DB
1. LDAP DB
2. Log DB(Job,Msg)
3. Language DB
5
Fig.5-18

• 1: Initializes address book data and the user information database.
• 2: Initializes job log data and the message database.
• 3: Initializes the language database.
Notes:
The selected databases are initialized and recreated in the next normal startup.
[E] Displaying various data in the HDD/SSD (SMART Info)

Various data in the HDD/SSD can be displayed. (Data equivalent to the setting contents of 08-
9065 are displayed.)
When this item is selected, data in the HDD/SSD embedded in the equipment are displayed. "---" is
displayed for the items not supported.
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> SMART Info
Please Select 1: PrevPage 2:NextPage 0: Main menu
Model : Hitachi xxxxxxxxxxx Serial : xxxxxxxxx

ID NAME VALUE NAV Worst
01 Read Error Rate 0 100 100
02 Throughput Performance 0 100 100
03 Spin Up Time 15 253 253
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Fig.5-19
Remark:
• NAV: Normalized Attribute Value
Indicates the value of the specified HDD condition as compared to the manufacturer's
optimum value.
• Worst: Worst Ever Normalized Attribute Value
Indicates the worst value of NAV permitted by the manufacturer.
Notes:
The values of NAV and Worst should be treated as a rough reference since their basis may differ
depending on the specification of HDD manufacturers.

5 - 29
[F] Displaying usage rate of each partition (DISK Info)
The usage rate of each partition can be checked.
When this item is selected, the usage rate of each partition is displayed.
File System(F/S) Recovery Mode -> DISK Info
0: Main menu
Partition name ALL(Mbyte) FREE(Mbyte) USE(%)

/ 8737 5401 33.1%
/work 10326 9563 2.3%
/registration 3099 2861 2.6%
/backup 1036 949 3.3%
/imagedata 24778 23343 0.7%
/storage 26873 25332 0.7%
/encryption --- encrypted partition ---
Fig.5-20
Remark:
The disk information of a partition indicated as "Encrypted Partition" is not displayed as it is
encrypted.
[G] Initialization of log file (HDD Utility)

Log files for researching can be deleted. Since only a certain amount of log files for researching is
usually stored in the work area of an HDD, the use of this mode is not necessary. In case the
performance level of the equipment is lowered (e.g.: the response of the control panel becomes
extremely slow), make use of this mode. This phenomenon may be resolved.

5 - 30
5.12 SRAM Clear Mode (6C)

This is a mode in which you can clear particular errors such as F800 or F900 without entering a Service
Technician password.
For example, when SYS-SRAM is in an abnormal status or needs replacement but service technicians
cannot log into the 3C mode, SRAM can be initialized by entering the SRAM clear mode (6C) and
selecting item 1 below.
The content of item 1 in this mode is the same as that of item 4 in the 3C mode (Clear SRAM).
Use this mode to clear the SRAM data when a particular error occurs or service technicians cannot log
in with their password and therefore cannot use the 3C mode.
Functions
• Sets the serial number of this equipment. 5
• Clears SRAM data when the 3C mode cannot be used.
• Clears F800 error.
• Clears F900 error.
[6][C] SRAM data

[Digital Key] [START] [START] （ clear ） [Power] OFF
[Power]
(Select)
or
S/N Input
Cancel
[STOP]
Turn the power ON while pressing the [6] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously. Then the following
screen is displayed.
Key in the desired item number and then press the [START] button.
SRAM Clear Mode System Firmware Version : xxxx(x.x.x.x)

Update Mode : 6c Mode
0. Set Serial Number

1. Clear SRAM
2. Reset Date and Time
3. SRAM Re-Initialize Support
4. L-LL
Fig.5-21
Notes:
• When "0" is keyed in and the [START] button is pressed, the menu to key in the serial number
appears. Key in the serial number of this equipment and then press [OK] to determine the
setting.
• Items 1 and 2 can be canceled while 0 and 3 cannot.
5 - 31
• When "3" is keyed in and the [START] button is pressed, the operation starts.
5.12.3 Functions
[A] 0. Set Serial Number
When replacing SYS-SRAM, select this to set the serial number of the equipment since it must be done
in advance of recovery from SRAM backup data.
• Clear SRAM first and then set the serial number in this mode.
• Recover from SRAM backup data after setting the serial number.
Refer to  P. 12-2 "12.1.4 Cloning procedure"
Select "0" and then press the [START] button. Then key in the serial number of this equipment.
The keyed in serial number appears on the menu.
SRAM Clear Mode System Firmware Version : xxxx(x.x.x.x)

Update Mode : 6c Mode
> 0. Set Serial Number Serial Number Setting Complated.. xxxxxxxxxx

1. Clear SRAM
2. Reset Date and Time
3. SRAM Re-Initialize Support
4. L-LL
Fig.5-22
[B] 1. Clear SRAM

Select this to clear all SRAM data when replacing SYS-SRAM.
• Replace the SRAM board and then clear the SRAM data.
• After clearing the SRAM data, initialize SRAM following its replacement procedure.
Refer to  P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS
board)".
Notes:
When this operation has been done, do not perform HDD partition creation (Format HDD) before
[C] 2. Reset Date and Time

Select this to clear an F800 error which occurred when the date and time were set as after the end of
the year 2037 or when the actual end of the year 2037 has come.
• After selecting this, start the equipment in the normal mode to reset the date and time.
[D] 3. SRAM Re-Initialize Support

Since an F900 error cannot be cleared in the 3C mode, use this function to clear the error in the
following cases:
• When the SRAM board (for the SYS board) and the SYS board are replaced at the same time
• When the SRAM is initialized with wrong destination at the replacement of the SRAM board

5 - 32
• After updating with a download jig and performing Clear SRAM, select this item.
• After selecting this, initialize SRAM following its replacement procedure.
board)".
[E] 4. L-LL
This function is used when the SYS board provided as service part for 20ppm/25ppm model is attached
to the LL20ppm/LL25ppm model.
<Replacement procedure of SYS board using this function>

1. Attach the SYS board provided as service part for 20ppm/25ppm model to the LL20ppm/
LL25ppm model.
2. Perform [6]+[C]+[POWER]->[4. L-LL].
3. Install the system firmware for LL20ppm/LL25ppm model in the [4]+[9] mode.
4. Perform "[D] Restore ADI key" and the subsequent procedure.
5
Perform P. 9-22 "[D] Restore ADI key".

5 - 33
5.13 List print mode (9S)
[ 1 ] Print out
[9][START]
[POWER] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER]
101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to OFF/ON
102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
108: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
110: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
111: Version list
114: Total counter list
121: (05) adjustment value difference
122: (08) setting value difference
[ 2 ] CSV output (USB)
[9][START]
[POWER] Connect (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] Disconnect [POWER]
USB 201: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to USB OFF/ON
202: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
(Code)
203: PM support mode
204: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
205: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
206: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
208: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
210: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
211: Version list
212: Engine firmware log * Manufacture Purpose Only
214: Total counter list
221: (05) adjustment value difference
222: (08) setting value difference
223: Job log / Message log
300: ALL CSV files
Notes:
Precautions when storing information into USB device
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB device, be sure to obtain
permission from a user in advance.
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB device, the information is
printed out in a CSV format. Handle and manage the information with extra care.
• Do not lose or leak the setting information of the equipment.
• Do not use the setting information of the equipment for purposes other than maintenance or
product services.
• Provide the information promptly if a user requires so.
• The buttons on the control panel keep blinking while data are being stored in the USB device.
Do not disconnect the USB device while data are being stored.

5 - 34
Remarks:
In the USB storage procedure above, lists are stored in a CSV format. The names of the CSV
files are shown below.
201: ADJUSTMENT_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
202: SETTING_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
203: PM_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
204: PIXEL_TONER_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
205: PIXEL_SERVICE_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
206: ERROR_LOG_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
208: FW_UPGRADE_LOG_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
210: POWER_ONOFF_LOG_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
211: VERSION_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
212: ENG_FW_LOG_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
214: TOTAL_COUNTER_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
221: 05DIFFERENCE_CODE_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv 5
222: 08DIFFERENCE_CODE_LIST_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
223: JOB_LOG_serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS) (encrypted file)/
MESSAGE_LOG_ serial_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS) (encrypted file)
5.13.2 List Printing

Lists below are output in the list print mode.
List data are printed out or output in a CSV format by storing them in a USB device. Paper sizes
available for this printing are A4 or LT or larger. This section introduces a sample of each list.
To start the list print mode, turn the power on while pressing [9] + [START] button.
List code
Lists
Printout CSV file output
Adjustment mode (05) data list 101 201
Setting mode (08) data list 102 202
PM support mode data list 103 203
Pixel counter list
104 204
(toner cartridge reference)
Pixel counter list
105 205
(service call reference)
Error history list 106 206
(Maximum 1000 items) (Maximum 1000 items)
Error history list 107
-
(Latest 80 items)
Firmware upgrade log 108 208
Power ON/OFF log 110 210
Version list 111 211
Engine firmware log - 212
Total counter list 114 214
(05) adjustment value difference 121 221
(08) setting value difference 122 222
Job log/Message log - 223
Output all CSV files - 300 *
*: (05) adjustment value difference and (08) setting value difference are not output.

5 - 35
• Adjustment mode (05)
05 ADJUSTMENT MODE DATA LIST

S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA
2000 128 3860 88 4830 128 5920 128
Fig.5-23
The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list.
See the following page for the adjustment code (05):
Refer to "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" - "Adjustment Code (05)."

5 - 36
• Setting mode (08)
08 SETTING MODE DATA LIST

CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA
2010 2 2880 12 3040 0 3070 0
Fig.5-24
The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list. See the
following page for the setting code (08):
Refer to "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" - "Setting Code (08)"

5 - 37
• PM support mode
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST

TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
UNIT OUTPUT PAGES/ PM OUTPUT PAGE/ DRIVE COUNTS PM DRIVE COUNTS

DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS
DRUM (K) 2516 70000 11735 170000
DRUM BLADE (K) 2516 70000 11735 170000
GRID (K) 2516 70000 11735 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (K) 2516 70000 11735 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (K) 2516 70000 11735 170000
DRUM (Y) 411 70000 8625 170000
DRUM BLADE (Y) 411 70000 8625 170000
GRID (Y) 411 70000 8625 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (Y) 411 70000 8625 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (Y) 411 70000 8625 170000
DRUM (M) 411 70000 8625 170000
DRUM BLADE (M) 411 70000 8625 170000
GRID (M) 411 70000 8625 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (M) 411 70000 8625 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (M) 411 70000 8625 170000
Fig.5-25
The number of pages currently output (OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the recommended
number of output pages for PM (PM OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the current drive count
(DRIVE COUNTS) and the recommended drive count for PM (PM DRIVE COUNTS) are output
together with PM units. Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM. See the
following page for PM:
 P. 7-1 "7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)"

5 - 38
• Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE COLOR PPC PRN FAX TOTAL
0 20xx-xx-xx Y Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226

1 20xx-xx-xx Y Average Pixel Count[%] 2.70 1.74 --- 2.51
2 20xx-xx-xx Y Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.15 0.39 --- 0.39
3 20xx-xx-xx M Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
4 20xx-xx-xx M Average Pixel Count[%] 6.11 2 --- 5.29 5
5 20xx-xx-xx M Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.82 2.15 --- 2.15
6 20xx-xx-xx C Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
7 20xx-xx-xx C Average Pixel Count[%] 5.46 2 --- 4.81
8 20xx-xx-xx C Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.42 2.73 --- 2.73
9 20xx-xx-xx K Print Count[LT/A4] 278 145 9 432
10 20xx-xx-xx K Average Pixel Count[%] 6.15 3.86 23.25 5.74
11 20xx-xx-xx K Latest Pixel Count[%] 7.32 2.19 6.25 2.19
Fig.5-26
Pixel counter data (toner cartridge reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
 P. 5-48 "5.14 Pixel counter"

5 - 39
• Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
SERVICEMAN
No DATE COLOR PPC PRN FAX TOTAL
0 20xx-xx-xx F Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226

1 20xx-xx-xx F Average Pixel Count[%] 4.95 2.34 --- 4.43
2 20xx-xx-xx F Latest Pixel Count[%] 8.36 2.34 --- 2.34
3 20xx-xx-xx Y Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
4 20xx-xx-xx Y Average Pixel Count[%] 2.7 1.74 --- 2.51
5 20xx-xx-xx Y Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.15 0.39 --- 0.39
6 20xx-xx-xx M Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
7 20xx-xx-xx M Average Pixel Count[%] 6.11 2 --- 5.29
8 20xx-xx-xx M Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.82 2.15 --- 2.15
9 20xx-xx-xx C Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
10 20xx-xx-xx C Average Pixel Count[%] 5.46 2.18 --- 4.81
11 20xx-xx-xx C Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.42 2.73 --- 2.73
12 20xx-xx-xx K Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
13 20xx-xx-xx K Average Pixel Count[%] 5.51 3.43 --- 5.10
14 20xx-xx-xx K Latest Pixel Count[%] 14.05 4.10 --- 4.10
15 20xx-xx-xx K Print Count[LT/A4] 97 100 9 206
16 20xx-xx-xx K Average Pixel Count[%] 7.36 4.06 23.25 6.45
17 20xx-xx-xx K Latest Pixel Count[%] 7.32 2.19 6.25 2.19
Fig.5-27
Pixel counter data (service call reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
 P. 5-48 "5.14 Pixel counter"

5 - 40
• Error history
ERROR HISTORY LIST

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ZOOM_XY ABCD EFHI JLOP Q R

F110 00000000 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000
EAD0 00000000 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000
E860 00000000 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000
5
Fig.5-28
The error history is output. See the following page for the parameters for each error:
 P. 8-33 "8.2.4 Printer function error"

5 - 41
• Firmware update log
FW UPGRADE LOG
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
MANUFACTURE DATE 20xx-xx-xx

UNPACKING DATE 20xx-xx-xx
USER ROM/VERSION DATE TOTAL COPY(B) COPY(2) COPY(C) PRINT(B) PRINT(2) PRINT(C) LIST FAX STATUS
Service Txxxxxxx-xxxx 20xx-xx-xx 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK
Fig.5-29
Firmware update logs are output.

- MANUFACTURE DATE: the date of manufacture / UNPACKING DATE: the date that the
equipment was unpacked.
- Only the versions of ROMs updated with USB device are output.
Item Content
USER User who updated firmware
ROM/VERSION Version of firmware
DATE Date that firmware was updated
TOTAL Total counter data when firmware was updated
COPY (B) Copier counter data (black) when firmware was updated
COPY (2) Copier counter data (twin color) when firmware was updated
COPY (C) Copier counter data (full color) when firmware was updated
PRINT (B) Printer counter data (black) when firmware was updated
PRINT (2) Printer counter data (twin color) when firmware was updated
PRINT (C) Printer counter data (full color) when firmware was updated
LIST List print counter data when firmware was updated
FAX Fax print counter data when firmware was updated
STATUS Result of update

5 - 42
• Power-ON/OFF log
POWER ON_OFF LOG

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
DATE TIME FUNCTION TOTAL DATE TIME FUNCTION TOTAL

xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx ON 99999999 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx ON 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx OFF 99999999 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx OFF 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx ON 99999999 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx ON 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx OFF 99999999 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx OFF 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx ON 99999999 xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx RMT_OFF 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx OFF 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx ON 99999999
xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx RMT_OFF 99999999
5
Fig.5-30
Power ON/OFF logs are output.

- Note that cases that the power was turned OFF with the main switch (not with the [ON/OFF]
button on the control panel) will not be displayed.
Item Content
DATE Date that the power was turned ON or OFF
TIME Time that the power was turned ON or OFF
FUNCTION Whether the power was turned ON or OFF, or if it was turned
ON or OFF with a remote reset function
TOTAL Total counter data when the power was turned OFF and then
back ON

5 - 43
• Version list
VERSION LIST
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
SYSTEM FIRMWARE ROM VERSION : Txxxxxxxxxxx

SYSTEM FIRMWARE INTERNAL ROM VERSION: Vx.x.x.xx.xx
PRINTER ROM VERSION : xxxM-xxx
SCANNER ROM VERSION : xxxS-xxx
PFC ROM VERSION : xxxF-xxx
RADF ROM VERSION : DF-xxx
FINISHER STACKER ROM VERSION : FIN-
FINISHER SADDLE ROM VERSION : SDL-
FINISHER PUNCH ROM VERSION : PUN-
FAX BOARD FIRMWARE ROM VERSION : Fxx-xxx
SYSTEM FIRMWARE INTERNAL OS VERSION : Vx.xxx.x.x
HDD DATA VERSION : Txxxxxxxxxxx
SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS VERSION : Txxxxxxxxxxx
LANGUAGE VERSION
English(US) : xxx.xxx xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx xxxx
CAPACITY OF HDD : xx.x GB

DEVICE INFORMATION OF HDD : xxx xxxxxxx-xxxxxx
SERIAL NUMBER OF HDD : xx-xxxxxxxxxxxx
MEMORY SIZE : xxxx MB / xxxx MB
INSTALLED ELK NAME : Data overwrite enabler
IPSec enabler
Meta scan enabler
External interface enabler
Fig.5-31
The list of versions is output.

Notes:
Some of the characters in the fonts that are used to print the version list are not supported. As a
result, the language names under LANGUAGE VERSION may not be printed correctly when
printing the version list.

5 - 44
• Engine firmware log
ENGINE FW LOG
20xx/xx/xx xx:xx
TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
Cxxxxxxxx
FIN S/N-xxxxxxxx
TOTAL, 9999999, DF TOTAL, 9999999
CODE SUB DATA
4624 0 0
4624 1 0
4624 2 58
4624 3 3
4624 4 58
4624 5 3 5
4624 6 0
4624 7 56
4624 8 3
4624 9 0
4624 10 41
4624 11 1
4624 12 29
4624 13 7
4624 14 0
4624 15 0
4624 16 0
4624 17 0
4624 18 0
4624 19 0
4624 20 0
Fig.5-32
The log of engine firmware is output.

5 - 45
• Total counter list
TOTAL COUNTER LIST S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999

PRINT COUNTER
TOTAL
FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL
COPY 37 0 1 38
FAX 0 0 0 0
PRINTER 122 0 60 182
LIST 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 159 0 61 220
COPY
SMALL 37 0 1 38
LARGE 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 37 0 1 38
FAX
SMALL 0 0 0 0
LARGE 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 0 0 0 0
PRINTER
SMALL 118 0 60 178
LARGE 4 0 0 4
TOTAL 122 0 60 182
LIST
SMALL 0 0 0 0
LARGE 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 0 0 0 0
CALIBRATION COUNTER : 0
SCAN COUNTER
TOTAL
COPY 7 0 1 8
FAX 0 0 0 0
NETWOR 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 7 0 1 8
COPY
SMALL 7 0 1 8
LARGE 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 7 0 1 8
FAX
SMALL 0 0 0 0
LARGE 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 0 0 0 0
NETWORK
SMALL 0 0 0 0
LARGE 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 0 0 0 0
Fig.5-33
The list of total counter is output.

5 - 46
• (05) adjustment value/(08) setting value difference
05 DIFFERENCE LIST
xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
CODE BACKUP CURRENT CODE BACKUP CURRENT
* 2400 128 160
Fig.5-34
The function in which the 05/08 setting value differences between the factory default and the current
value can be printed or output with a CSV file.
The difference list between the current values and backed up values of (05) adjustment value and
(08) setting values is output. "*" is output on the left side of code if there is a difference, and "+" is
output on the left side of code if there is no backed up value.
Notes:
• Back-up data of the factory default are automatically created when the automatic gamma
adjustment of the easy set-up mode has been completed during the unpacking and setting up
of the equipment. The back-up file is retained even if the firmware is upgraded. However, the
file is deleted when 3C-3 (Format HDD) is performed or HDD/SSD is replaced.
• A back-up file does not exist for equipment to which the easy set-up mode has been
performed before this function is applied.
• When the easy set-up mode is restarted while a specified value such as 4 through 8 is set for
08-9022 (Production process management status for easy setup), the back-up file stored
during unpacking and setting up after the completion of the automatic gamma adjustment is
deleted, and another file as of then is newly created.
• When no back-up file exists

When 9S-121 (122) is performed, the equipment returns to the ready state of the 9S mode
without performing printing.
When 9S-221 (222) is performed, the equipment returns to the ready state of the 9S mode and
the error message "The file cannot be saved." appears on the panel.
• When you want to create a back-up file if one does not exist
A back-up file can be automatically created after the completion of the automatic gamma
adjustment when the easy set-up mode is restarted while a specified value such as 4 through 8 is
set for 08-9022 (Production process management status for easy setup).
In this case, the current values are stored in the file, but not the ones for unpacking and setting
up.

5 - 47
5.14 Pixel counter
5.14.1 Outline
[ 1 ] Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the LED printer heads and
converts it into the print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size”
is called Pixel count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
However, its accuracy is not sufficient for it to be used to determine the actual toner consumption. This
is because, some of the factors in "2" below are not taken into account by the pixel counter.
[ 2 ] Factors affecting toner consumption

Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the
condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output pages
per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:

• Original/Data coverage
• Original/Data density
• Original/Print mode
• Density setting
• Print Pattern
Character images (e.g. Text) consume more toner than solid images even though they may have the
same density. This is due to the "edge effect".
• Number of pages per job
Toner consumption testing is made in the "continuous running mode". More toner is required when
printing in the non-continuous running mode.
• Number of image quality control
Image quality control is performed automatically when the device is switched on, when it returns
from sleep mode, and also during continuous running. Toner consumption may vary depending on
the number of image quality adjustments performed during operation.
• Paper
The size, feeding direction and type of paper influence toner consumption.
• Environmental conditions
Temperature and Humidity affect toner consumption.
• Others
In addition to the above, there are other factors that may influence toner consumption. These
include variations between individual products, life of consumable, bias voltages, Drum surface
potential, etc.

5 - 48
The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the copy
function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
5
Original coverage Original density
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
TEXT PRINTED Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual

/PHOTO TEXT PHOTO IMAGE MAP density density density density density density
-5 -1 Center +1 +5
Original mode Density setting
Fig.5-1 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
[ 3 ] Details of pixel counter

• Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service
technician reference.
Toner cartridge reference

This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.
The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output
pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold.
The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-6506) between the pixel count and
output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting
mode (08-6508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-6507). When the new toner
cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced
with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge
reference is performed in the setting mode (08-6503).
Service technician reference

This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.

5 - 49
Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08-
6502).
• Print count (number of output pages)
The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper sizes to
the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by paper area
ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-6500).
The examples of conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
“1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
“2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
“1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
“1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
• Pixel count (%)
Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of the emitting pixels of the LED printer heads to all pixels on
standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Notes:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (LED printer heads emit to all pixels.)
 Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (LED printer heads never emit.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (LED printer heads emit to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (LED printer heads never emit.)
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of LED printer heads emission

Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of LED printer heads emission
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (LED printer heads emit to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of LED printer heads emission

• Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)

There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest pixel
count (%).
Average pixel count (%)

The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
Latest pixel count (%)

The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
• Type of calculated data

Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each
function and color.

5 - 50
The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more
information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).
See after-mentioned “5)-Display in the setting mode (08)” for details.
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data

Toner cartridge reference Service technician reference
Full color/Twin color
Magen
Yellow Cyan Black Magen Black
ta Total Yellow Cyan Black
ta
Copier Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
function
Printer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
function
FAX function No No No Yes No No No No No Yes 5
Total Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes: With data
No: Without data
• Setting related with the pixel counter function

Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-6500).
Pixel counter display setting

Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-6504).
Display reference setting

The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or
service technician reference) is selected (08-6505).
Determination counter of toner empty

This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is
detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is not
detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.
Pixel counter clearing

There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-6501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-6502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-6503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.
[ 4 ] Relation between pixel count and toner consumption

The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of pixel
count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density setting may
cause it as well.
In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output
pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.
The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:

5 - 51
Standard number of output pages (K)
Y
Number of output pages per cartridge (Page)
Y/2 Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)
X/2
Y/10
X/10
6% 12% 60%
Pixel count (%)
Fig.5-2 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
[ 5 ] Pixel counter confirmation

• Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-6504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician
reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner cartridge
reference) in the setting mode (08-6505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are
pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual,
turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of 08-6505.)

5 - 52
5
Fig.5-3
Fig.5-4 Reference selection screen
When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is displayed.
[TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed.
[SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is
displayed.
[SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is displayed.
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.

5 - 53
Fig.5-5 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.
Fig.5-6 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.

5 - 54
5
Fig.5-7 Information screen of service technician reference (black)

5 - 55
• Data list printing
The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.

TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF COUNTER: 9999999
'08-02-08 20:13
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE COL. PPC PRN FAX TOTAL

---------------------------
0 20080208 Y Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
1 20080208 Y Average Pixel Count[%] 2.70 1.74 --- 2.51
2 20080208 Y Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.15 0.39 --- 0.39
3 20080208 M Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
4 20080208 M Average Pixel Count[%] 6.11 2 --- 5.29
5 20080208 M Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.82 2.15 --- 2.15
6 20080208 C Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
7 20080208 C Average Pixel Count[%] 5.46 2 --- 4.81
8 20080208 C Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.42 2.73 --- 2.73
9 20080208 K Print Count[LT/A4] 278 145 9 432
10 20080208 K Average Pixel Count[%] 6.15 3.86 23.25 5.74
11 20080208 K Latest Pixel Count[%] 7.32 2.19 6.25 2.19
Fig.5-8 Data list of toner cartridge reference

5 - 56
TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF COUNTER: 9999999
'08-02-08 20:13
SERVICEMAN
No DATE COL. PPC PRN FAX TOTAL

---------------------------
0 20080208 F Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
1 20080208 F Average Pixel Count[%] 4.95 2.34 --- 4.43
2 20080208 F Latest Pixel Count[%] 8.36 2.34 --- 2.34
3 20080208 Y Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
4 20080208 Y Average Pixel Count[%] 2.7 1.74 --- 2.51 5
5 20080208 Y Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.15 0.39 --- 0.39
6 20080208 M Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
7 20080208 M Average Pixel Count[% 6.11 2 --- 5.29
8 20080208 M Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.82 2.15 --- 2.15
9 20080208 C Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
10 20080208 C Average Pixel Count[%] 5.46 2.18 --- 4.81
11 20080208 C Latest Pixel Count[%] 6.42 2.73 --- 2.73
12 20080208 K Print Count[LT/A4] 181 45 --- 226
13 20080208 K Average Pixel Count[%] 5.51 3.43 --- 5.10
14 20080208 K Latest Pixel Count[%] 14.05 4.10 --- 4.10
15 20080208 K Print Count[LT/A4] 97 100 9 206
16 20080208 K Average Pixel Count[%] 7.36 4.06 23.25 6.45
17 20080208 K Latest Pixel Count[%] 7.32 2.19 6.25 2.19
Fig.5-9 Data list of service technician reference

5 - 57
• Display in the setting mode (08)
Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see "15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)" - "SETTING CODE (08)".
Print count, pixel count
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)

Full color/Twin color Black
(at color)
Black
Yellow Magenta Cyan Black +
Black
Copier Print count 6567 6569 6571 6562 6563 -
function (page)
Average pixel count 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624
(%)
Latest pixel count 6636 6637 6638 6639 6724 -
(%)
Printer Print count 6568 6570 6572 6564 6565 -
function (page)
(%)
Latest pixel count 6640 6641 6642 6643 6725 -
(%)
FAX Print count - - - - 6566 -
function (page)
Average pixel count - - - - 6635 -
(%)
Latest pixel count - - - - 6644 -
(%)
Total Average pixel count 6631 6632 6633 - - 6634
(%)
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)

Black
Total Yellow Magenta Cyan Black
Copier Print count 6557 - - - - 6558
function (page)
(%)
Latest pixel count 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6616
(%)
Printer Print count 6559 - - - - 6560
function (page)
(%)
Latest pixel count 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6617
(%)
FAX Print count - - - - - 6561
function (page)
Average pixel count - - - - - 6604
(%)
Latest pixel count - - - - - 6618
(%)

5 - 58
Black
Total Yellow Magenta Cyan Black
Total Average pixel count 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6605
(%)
Pixel count distribution

Table 2-204 Pixel count code table
Black
Yellow Magenta Cyan Black
Copier Print count distribution 6713 6714 6715 6716 6721
function (page)
Printer Print count distribution 6717 6718 6719 6720 6722
function (page)
FAX function Print count distribution - - - - 6723
5
(page)
Notes:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing
into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed.
08-6573: Toner cartridge Y
08-6574: Toner cartridge M
08-6575: Toner cartridge C
08-6576: Toner cartridge K
Toner cartridge reference count started date

The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed.
Service technician reference cleared date

The service technician reference cleared date (08-6510) is displayed.
The date (08-6502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date

The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-6503 was performed) is stored.

5 - 59
5.15 Batch setting for installing/disconnection HDD
The setting values of the following codes are changed when "Batch setting for HDD installation (08-
8759)" and "Batch setting for disconnecting HDD (08-8760)" are performed.
Notes:
Do not change the setting values of the following codes after performing "Batch setting for
disconnecting HDD (08-8760)". If the values are changed, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
Default value Default value

Sub-
Code Item Description when 08-8759 when 08-8760
code
is performed is performed
08-8667 Saving image log 0: Disabled 0 -
1: Enabled
08-8668 Number of pages saved 0: First page 1 -
as image log 1: All pages
08-8673 Disclosure of image log 0: Not opened to 0 -
function public
1: Opened to public
08-8735 Sending setting of 0: Disabled 0 -
ScanToURL 1: Enabled
08-8914 1 MFP function setting: e- 0: Disable the 1 0
Filing function
1: Enable the function
5 MFP function setting: 0: Disable the 1 0
Save as Local HDD function
1: Enable the function
6 MFP function setting: 0: Disable the 1 0
Save as Local HDD from function
Print 1: Enable the function
08-9599 Samba Server ON/OFF 1: Enable Samba 1 4
2: Disable Samba
3: Disable Print Share
4: Disable File Share
08-8900 0 Registration number for 2000 1000
workflow: Total
2 Registration number for 100 50
workflow: Number of
transmission and calling of
Fax/InternetFax
3 Registration number for 1000 500
workflow: Number of
printing
08-9121 Print setting without 0: Printed forcibly 1 2
department code 1: Not printed
2: Deleted forcibly
08-9397 Execution of user 0: Forcible execution 2 2
authentication when the 1: Execution
user ID is not entered impossible (pooled in
the invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
08-9946 Number of Email 0-14 3 0
transmission retries
08-8526 Scan preview default 0: OFF No change 0
setting 1: ON

5 - 60
Default value Default value
Sub-
Code Item Description when 08-8759 when 08-8760
code
is performed is performed
08-8901 Fax preview default setting 0: OFF No change 0
1: ON
08-8904 Job skip setting 0: Disabled No change 0
1: Enabled
08-9344 Network print restriction 0: Normal mode No change 0
mode 1: Private Print limited
mode
2: Hold Print limited
mode
3: Private/Hold Print
limited mode
5
08-9379 AES data encryption 0: Encryption invalid No change NAD: 2
function setting 1: Encryption valid Others: 0
(Security priority)
2: Encryption valid
(Performance priority)
08-8911 Security mode (level) Security function level No change 1
setting setting
1: Low security
2: -
3: High security
4: -

5 - 61
5.16 Batch Setting for Self-Diagnostic Codes (When HDD is
mounted)

The setting files encrypted in which each setting value has been written can be stored in a USB storage
device. Installing this USB storage device in the equipment and reading a setting file enables the batch
setting for the self-diagnostic codes.
• After the batch setting is performed, a result file is stored in the USB storage device.
• A maximum of 100 codes can be set in one file. If a code has sub codes, each of them is counted as
one code.
Notes:
This function is not available if an automatic execution script such as a log collection is stored in
a USB storage device.
This function is valid only when HDD is installed.
5.16.2 Applicable codes

This function is available for the codes, whose values can be set by the service technicians, in the 05,
08 and 13 modes.
Notes:
• The codes only displaying the values and the ones acquiring or clearing the values by
automatic execution are not included.
• When a value of the code which exchanges another one sequentially is changed, another one
is altered in conjunction with it.
• Setting of the codes 08-8911 and 08-9000 is not possible.
5.16.3 Setting files
[ 1 ] Setting files
An encrypted file in which the setting values for each code to be changed is written in an XML format.
A maximum of 100 codes can be set in one file. If a code has sub codes, each of them is counted as
one code.
File name: DIG_SET.diag
File format: xml format
Notes:
• A setting file has to be encrypted by a dedicated encryption tool to be stored in a USB storage
device.
• A setting file has to be located in the root folder of a USB storage device.
• No other automatic execution script has to be located in the root folder of a USB storage
device.
[ 2 ] Example
<Policy>
<Data>
<Category-05/>
<Category-08>
<Code>
<MainCode>3807</MainCode>
<Value>1</Value>
</Code>
<Code>
<Value>2</Value>
</Code>

5 - 62
<Code>
<SubCode>1</SubCode>
<Value>1</Value>
</Code>
</Category-08>
<Category-13/>
</Data>
</Policy>
Notes:
• The setting value of the code in step 10 is written by inserting a comma to divide the values.
E.g.: 08-4106 <Value>128,128</Value>
• Setting is carried out in order of written.
• The read-only codes and the execution codes are skipped to continue the processing if they
are included. 5
• If writing of the setting value has failed, the processing will stop at that moment and then an
error message will appear in the screen.
5.16.4 Result files
[ 1 ] Result files
A file in which success or failure of the replacement of the setting values for each code included in the
setting files is written. A result file is stored in a USB storage device after this code is performed.
File name: DIG_ RESULT_XXXX_yymmddhhmmss.xml (XXXX: Serial No.)
File format: xml format
[ 2 ] Example
<Policy>
<Data>
<Category-05/>
<Category-08>
<Code>
<RESULT>SUCCESS</RESULT>
</Code>
<Code>
<RESULT>FAILED</RESULT>
</Code>
<Code>
<SubCode>1</SubCode>
<RESULT>UNSPECIFIED</RESULT>
</Code>
</Category-08>
<Category-13/>
</Data>
</Policy>
* SUCCESS Values are updated successfully.
* FAILED Update of values fails.
* UNSPECIFIED No codes written exist.
A value to be set is outside the assignable range.
Notes:
• A result file is stored in the root folder of a USB storage device.

5 - 63
• As for the codes whose values have been altered caused by batch setting of another one,
their items, such as the code number, value changed and success/failure of the change, are
not described in a result file.
• If writing of the setting value has failed, the processing will stop at that moment. Only the
codes whose writing has succeeded will be described in a result file.

1. Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
2. Install a USB storage device, in which setting files are stored in the root, in the MFP.
3. Key in [3673] and then press the [START] button.
4. Press [EXECUTION].
5. Setting for all codes included in the setting file are completed, the BASIC screen of the 08 mode
appears.
6. Remove the USB storage device.

5 - 64
6. SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6.1 Image Related Adjustment
6.1.1 Adjustment Order

This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing
components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to
be obeyed in priority.
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines
lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.
Parts to be replaced
Developer material Photoconductive drum Drum cleaning blade Transfer belt(*1) LED head(*1)
1st transfer roller(*1) Image position aligning Needle electrode LED gap spacer
Main charger grid sensor(*1) Image quality sensor(*1)
Item to be adjusted Code in mode 05

6
6.1.2 Adjustment of the auto- 2400 (Y,M,C,K), 2401 (Yellow) Life counter clear
toner sensor(*2) 2402 (Magenta), 2403 (Cyan) ([6] + [START] :
2404 (Black), 2406 (Y,M,C) PM support mode)

6.1.3 Adjustment of image quality control /
2742(*3)
Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control

6.1.4 Adjustment of color registration control 4719
6.1.6 Image dimensional adjustment

Order Items Code in mode 05
6.1.6 Paper alignment at the registration roller 4100, 4101, 4103, 4104, 4105,
4106, 4107, 4108, 4109, 4110,
1 4111, 4115, 4116, 4117, 4118,
4120, 4128, 4129
2 6.1.7 (a) Primary scanning data writing start position 4006

3 Image (b) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 4526
dimensional 4402, 4058, 4059, 4060,
4 (c) Secondary scanning data writing start position
adjustment 4061, 4062, 4560
at the
(d) Primary scanning data writing start position at
5 printing 4019
duplexing
section
6 (a) Image distortion –

6.1.8
7 Image
(b) Image location of primary scanning direction 3030
8 dimensional (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 3032
9 adjustment (d) Image location of secondary scanning direction 3031
10 at the (e) Top margin 4050
11 scanning (f ) Right margin 4052
section
12 (g) Bottom margin 4053
6.1.9 Image
13 (h) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary 7000
dimensional
scanning direction (PPC)
adjustment
in the copy/ (i) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary
14 printer/fax 7001 (*7)
scanning direction (PRT/FAX)
function

6.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PPC) 7869 (*4), 7871-0, 2 to 4, 7, 8
6.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PRT) 8008 (*5), 8004-0, 2 to 4, 7, 8, 8009 (*6), 8005-0, 2 to 4, 7, 8 (*6)
Adjust the image quality if necessary. (Chapter 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5 )
*1: There is no need to perform counter clear.

END *2: Adjust only the color changed.
*3: When upgrading firmware, perform the adjustment from 05-2742.
*4: Use [4] + [FAX] test pattern.
*5: For 600 dpi. Use [70] + [FAX] test pattern.
*6: For 1200 dpi. Use [230] + [FAX] test pattern. Not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
*7: Adjustment can be done only for enlarging image.
Fig.6-1

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-1
6.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
If the value of 08-2707 (toner density ratio manual offset control) of the replacing developer material
has been changed from "0" (default), return the sub code value of the corresponding color to "0".
(1) Install the cleaner unit and developer unit.
Notes:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be
displayed.
[0] [5] 100% A A3

[POWER] TEST MODE
Fig.6-2
(3) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Code 2400: All developer materials 2401: Developer material Y 2402: Developer material M
2403: Developer material C 2404: Developer material K 2406: Developer material YMC
(Code)
100% 2400 A3 [START]

TEST MODE
Fig.6-3
(4) The message below will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later and the adjustment starts:
• During the adjustment, “Current sensor voltage (V)” shown in (B) automatically changes and
gradually approaches to “Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage” shown in (A).
(B) Y: x.xxV M: x.xxV C: x.xxV K: x.xxV

(C) Y: M: C: K: ww%
(A) Y: z.zzV M: z.zzV C: z.zzV K: z.zzV
(B): Current sensor voltage (V)
(C): Adjustment value, Humidity (%)
(A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage
Fig.6-4

6-2
(5) When the “Current sensor voltage (V)” in (B) is converged and the “Sensor output control value
(bit value)” corresponding to the value for initial developer material is displayed in (C), the
adjustment is completed.
• When the adjustment is completed, the [OK] button is displayed on the screen.
(B) Y: x.xxV M: x.xxV C: x.xxV K: x.xxV

(C) Y: yyy M: yyy C: yyy K: yyy
(A) Y: z.zzV M: z.zzV C: z.zzV K: z.zzV
(B): Current sensor voltage (V)
(C): Sensor output control value (bit value)
(A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage
Fig.6-5
Notes: 6
The values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity.
(6) Press the [OK] button to store the adjustment result in the memory.
(7) Turn the power OFF and install the toner cartridges.
Notes:
When "Waste toner box replacement" is displayed at adjustment, follow the steps below.
<When “Waste toner box replacement” is displayed>

 Basic Manual "[E] Waste toner box replacement"
1.Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the front cover.
2.Key in [4833] (Recovery from toner empty/waste toner full).
3.Check that “WAIT” is displayed.

6-3
6.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control
(1) When unpacking
Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the “Forced performing of image quality closed-
loop control (05-2742)” procedure.
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Forced performing of image
quality closed-loop control (05-2742)” procedure.
• Photoconductive drum
• Developer material
• LED printer head
• LED gap spacer
• Transfer belt
• 1st transfer roller
• Drum cleaning blade
• Needle electrode
• Image position aligning sensor (Front)
• Image position aligning sensor (Rear)/Image quality sensor
Notes:
When performing “Automatic gamma adjustment” in addition, “Forced performing of image
quality closed-loop control (05-2742)” should be done first.
(3) When performing “Automatic gamma adjustment” in cases no parts written above are replaced,
do the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-2742)” procedure before
“Automatic gamma adjustment”.
Code Item to be adjusted Contents

2742 Forced performing of <Procedure>
image quality closed- 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
loop control  Adjustment Mode
2. Key in [2742] and press the [START] button.
3. “WAIT” is displayed.
4. When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns
to the initial state of Adjustment Mode.
When an error occurs

1. Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the
front cover.
2. Key in [4833] (Recovery from toner empty/waste toner full).
3. Check that “WAIT” is displayed.
<When toner empty is displayed>

 Basic Manual "[C] No toner in the cartridge"
1. Replace the empty toner cartridge with a new one and close
the front cover.
<Other abnormalities>
Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.
 P. 8-1 "8. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING"

6-4
6.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control
After having finished the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-2742)” procedure,
perform the “Forced performing of color registration control adjustment (05-4719)” procedure.

4719 Forced performing of <Procedure>
color registration 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power
control ON.
 Adjustment mode
2. Key in [4719] and press the [START] button.
3. When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment
returns to the initial state of Adjustment Mode.
If the following errors are displayed after performing 05-4719,

clear the error by following the steps below, and then perform
05-4719 again.
6
1. Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the
front cover.
<When toner empty is displayed>

 Basic Manual "[C] No toner in the cartridge"
1. Replace the empty toner cartridge with a new one and close
the front cover.
<Other abnormalities>
Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.
 P. 8-1 "8. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING"

6-5
6.1.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this
image dimensional adjustment, perform "Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-
2742)" and "Forced performing of color registration control (05-4719)".
When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.

1. Paper alignment at the registration roller 4100, 4101, 4103, 4104,
4105, 4106, 4107, 4108,
4109, 4110, 4111, 4115,
4116, 4117, 4118, 4120,
4128, 4129
2. Printer- Primary scanning data writing start position 4006
related Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 4526
image (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)
dimensional
Secondary scanning data writing start position 4402, 4058, 4059, 4060,
adjustment
4560, 4061, 4062
Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing 4019
3. Scanner- Image distortion -
related Image location of primary scanning direction 3030
image
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 3032
dimensional
adjustment Image location of secondary scanning direction 3031
Top margin 4050
Right margin 4052
Bottom margin 4053
4. Image Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning 7000
dimensional direction (PPC)
adjustment Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning 7001*1
in the copy/ direction (PRT/FAX)
printer/fax
function
*1: Adjustment can be done only for enlarging image.

6-6
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed
(normal copy mode).
<Operation keys> <Display>
100% A A3
0 5 TEST MODE
POWER
1
Digital keys : Key in codes. Code No.
START 100% XXX A3

TEST MODE
YYY ZZZ Adjustment value newly keyed in.
Digital keys : Key in adjustment (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
values. Current adjustment value 6
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
OK Value ZZZ is stored 100% A A3

or replacing values YYY. TEST MODE
INTERRUPT
FAX
Test copy 100% A A3
START Wait Warming Up
If the test copy does not

satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and 100% A A3
repeat the adjustment
procedure.
COPYING
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.
Fig.6-6

6-7
6.1.6 Paper alignment at the registration roller
[A] Adjustment with touch panel

Paper alignment at the registration roller can be adjusted in the following procedure by performing the
code 05-4579.
1. Select the drawer.
Fig.6-7
2. Select the paper size.
Fig.6-8

6-8
3. Select the media type.
Fig.6-9
4. Key in the adjustment value.
Fig.6-10
5. Press the [OK] button to finish the adjustment.

* Press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] or [CANCEL] button to return to the previous menu.

6-9
[B] Adjustment by direct code entry
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Paper size
Drawer Code Sub code (Select the paper size with the Paper type*
sub code.)
1st drawer 4100 0,1,2,3,4 0: 330 mm or longer Plain paper
(CST1) 4115 0,1,2,3,4 (13.0 inches or longer) Thick paper 1
1: 220–329 mm
2nd drawer 4101 0,1,2,3,4 Plain paper
(8.7–12.9 inches)
(CST2) 4116 0,1,2,3,4 Thick paper 1
2: 205–219 mm
3rd drawer 4108 0,1,2,3,4 (8.1–8.6 inches) Plain paper
(CST3) 4117 0,1,2,3,4 3: 160-204 mm Thick paper 1
4th drawer 4109 0,1,2,3,4 (6.3–8.0 inches) Plain paper
(CST4) 4: 159 mm or shorter
4118 0,1,2,3,4 Thick paper 1
(6.26 inches or shorter)
Bypass feed 4103 0,1,2,3,4 Plain paper
4104 0,1,2,3,4 Thick paper 1
4105 0,1,2,3,4 Thick paper 2
4107 0,1,2,3,4 OHP
4128 0,1,2,3,4 Special paper 1
4129 0,1,2,3,4 Special paper 2
LCF 4111 - Plain paper
ADU 4110 0,1,2,3,4 0: 330 mm or longer Plain paper
4120 0,1,2,3,4 (13.0 inches or longer) Thick paper 1/Special
1: 220–329 mm paper 1/Special paper 2
(8.7–12.9 inches)
2: 205–219 mm
(8.1–8.6 inches)
3: 160-204 mm
(6.3–8.0 inches)
4: 159 mm or shorter
(6.26 inches or shorter)
*Weight:
Plain paper: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Thick paper 1: 106 to 163 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover (90 lb. Index))
Thick paper 2: 164 to 209 g/m2 (61 lb. Cover to 77.3 lb. Cover (115.7 lb. Index))

6 - 10
<Procedure>
(Not necessary for LCF)

[0][5] (Code) [START] (Sub-code) [START] Current value Enter new
[Power] displayed value
[OK] or [POWER]
[INTERRUPT]
[Drawer [ ]*1 +[FAX]
selection] OFF/ON
Stores in memory (Test print) (Exit)
Fig.6-11
(*1) 1: Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode

3: Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode
55: Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode
57: Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode
58: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode
60: Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode
98: 6
Single-sided grid pattern in K(4)* Mode
K(4)*: System in which the test pattern is printed only in the black mode, though the four color
developers (Y, M, C, K) are contacted to the transfer belt.
Notes:
If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding
may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew,
an image dislocation in feeding direction, E010 (Jam not reaching the exit sensor), E011
(Transfer belt paper-clinging jam), or E013 (The paper jam occurred between the registration
pass sensor and the paper clinging detection sensor) may occur. Pay attention to the above and
select the appropriate value.

6 - 11
6.1.7 Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.
6
A, D
2
C
Feeding direction
6
B
22
Fig.6-12
Adjustment
Detail of adjustment
Tolerance
A 52 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-13 "[A] Primary scanning data writing start position (Printer)"
B 200 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-14 "[B] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine
adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)"
C 52 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-15 "[C] Secondary scanning data writing start position"
D 52 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-16 "[D] Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing"

6 - 12
[A] Primary scanning data writing start position (Printer)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [98]  [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm pitch is printed out. Use A3/LD from the 1st
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance A from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance A is within 52±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode)  (Key in the code [4006])  [START]
 (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
 [OK] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
 “100% A” is displayed
 Press [98]  [FAX]  (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Notes: 6
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

6 - 13
[B] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor
rotation speed)
Code Sub code Function Remarks

4526 0 PRT/PPC (Normal speed) When the value increases, the
4 PRT/PPC (Reduced speed) reproduction ratio in the secondary
scanning direction becomes larger.
(Approx. 0.15 mm/1steps)
If the sub code “0” of 05-4526 is adjusted, the adjustment values of sub code 4 is also changed
automatically, being operated with the adjusted value, according to the proper parameter. Basically,
adjusting only the sub code “0” completes all the adjustment of PRT, PPC and FAX.
[B-1] Confirmation of 05-4526-0

1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  (Adjustment Mode)
2. Press [98]  [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm pitch is printed out. Use A3/LD from the 1st
drawer.)
3. Measure the distance B from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of
the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
4. Check if the distance B is within 200±0.5 mm.
5. If not, perform the procedure in “[B-2] Adjustment of 05-4526-0” to change the values and
measure the distance B again.
6. Perform the color registration (4719) after the adjustment.
[B-2] Adjustment of 05-4526-0

(Adjustment Mode)  (Key in the code [4526])  [START]  (Key in the sub-code [0])
 [START]  (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
* When the value is not within the recommended values, the trailing edge area of the image
may be out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image
may become lower. Perform the adjustment confirming the image.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.15 mm/
step).
 (Key in the code [4719])  [START]  (Enforced color registration)
Notes:
• The grid pattern output by pressing [0][5]  [98]  [FAX] is the one of PRT (05-4526-0). Even
though the sub code 4 is are adjusted, the result cannot be confirmed in the grid pattern output
by pressing [0][5]  [98]  [FAX].
• When “05-4526-0” is performed, a proper value is automatically calculated for the size of an
image in each function mode (copy/printer/Fax) or at each speed (normal speed/reduced speed/
high speed). The speed of the transfer belt motor is also adjusted. Therefore, use the above
default value other than the sub code “0,” unless otherwise required.
Remarks:
For A3/LD, it is recommended to adjust the distance B above within the range of 199.5 mm and
200 mm otherwise the margin of the trailing edge may be deleted.

6 - 14
[C] Secondary scanning data writing start position
Performing the code 05-4402 covers this adjustment for all paper sources.
The adjustment for each paper source is also available.
For all paper sources
Code Paper size Acceptable value Remarks

4402 A3/LD 0 to 200 Performs the adjustment for all paper sources.
For each paper source
Order for
Acceptabl
adjustmen Paper source Code Paper size Remarks
e value
t
1 1st drawer 4058 A4/LT 0 to 100
2 2nd drawer 4059 A3/LD 0 to 100
3 3rd drawer 4060 A4/LT 0 to 100
6
4 4th drawer 4560 A4/LT 0 to 100
5 Bypass feed 4061 A4/LT 0 to 100
6 Paper fed from the 1st
Duplexing 4062 A3/LD 0 to 100
drawer
(2) Press [98] ([3] for duplexing)  [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm pitch is printed out.)
(3) Measure the distance C from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance C is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode)  (Key in the code shown above)  [START]
 (Key in an acceptable value shown above)
 Press [98] ([3] for duplexing)
 [FAX]  (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.10 mm/
step).

6 - 15
[D] Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing
Notes:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[D-1] Adjustment for long-sized paper

(2) Press [3]  [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm pitch is printed out. Use A3/LD from the 1st
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance D from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode)  (Key in the code [4019])  [START]  [0]  [START]
 “100% A” is displayed.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
[D-2] Adjustment for short-sized paper

(2) Press [3]  [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm pitch is printed out. Use A4/LT from the 1st
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance D from the left edge of the
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
step).
[D-3] Adjustment for medium-sized paper (Length: 220 mm to 329 mm)

1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  (Adjustment Mode)
2. Press [3]  [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm pitch is printed out. Use A4-R/LT-R from the 1st
drawer.)
3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance D from the left edge of the
4. Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
step).

6 - 16
Notes:
When the writing start position (05-4019-0) for long-sized paper is changed, the one for medium-
sized paper is also altered. (However, the value of 05-4019-2 is not changed.)
If 05-4019-0 is changed, check it with A4-R/LT-R paper and adjust the value of 05-4019-2 again
as required.
<Adjustment procedure summarization for A to D>
[0] [5] [Power ON]  [98] ([3](05-4062, 4019) for duplexing)  [FAX]
A: 05-4006 (1st drawer, A3/LD)  52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
B: 05-4526-0 (1st drawer, A3/LD)  200±0.5 mm (0.15 mm/step)
C: 05-4402 (1st drawer, A3/LD)  52±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
05-4058 (1st drawer, A4/LT)
05-4059 (2nd drawer, A3/LD)
05-4060 (3rd drawer, A4/LT)
05-4560 (4th drawer, A4/LT) 6
05-4061 (Bypass feed, A4/LT)
05-4062 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
D: 05-4019-0 (1st drawer, A3/LD),  52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
05-4019-1 (1st drawer, A4/LT)
05-4019-2 (A4-R/LT-R)

6 - 17
6.1.8 Image dimensional adjustment at the scanning section
[A] Image distortion
A Feeding direction B
Step 1
Feeding direction
C D
Step 2
Fig.6-13
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.
(3) Key in [3033] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.
(4) Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2.
Step 1
In case of A:
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (Rear) [1]
(CW).
In case of B:
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (Rear) [1]
(CCW).
Fig.6-14

6 - 18
Step 2
In case of C:
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (Rear) [1]
(CW).
In case of D:
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (Rear) [1]
(CCW).
Fig.6-15
(5) Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)
• Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond 6
Product name: 1401E
The following adjustments (B) to (E) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1/TCC-2.
 P. 6-24 " Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1/TCC-2"
[B] Image location of primary scanning direction

(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1/TCC-2 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear
side).
(3) Press [FAX]  [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Full color and Text/Photo.
(4) Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 5 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance B is within 5±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode)  (Key in code [3030])  [START]
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction

side).
(4) Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance C is within 150±0.5 mm.
<Procedure>
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.03 mm/
step).

6 - 19
[D] Image location of secondary scanning direction
side).
(4) Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
<Procedure>
step).

6 - 20
[E] Top margin
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX]  [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Full color, Text/Photo and
2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range.
Function Black Color

Copy 4.2 mm + 2.8 mm / -1.2 mm 5 - 1.0 mm, 5 + 2.0 mm
(4.0 to 7.0 mm)
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
 (“100% A” is displayed.) 6
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Feeding direction
Fig.6-16
Notes:
Paper jams tend to occur in equipment in which thin paper such as 64g/m2 (17lb. Bond) paper is
used or a large amount of high density images such as pictures are output. For this equipment,
we recommend that you adjust the top margin “in the plus direction” in order to prevent paper
jamming.
Range of top margin adjustment (e.g.)

Copy 4.2 - 7.0 mm 5.0 - 7.0 mm

6 - 21
[F] Right margin
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX]  [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Full color, Text/Photo and
2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range.

Copy 2±2.0 mm 2±2.0 mm
<Procedure>
 [OK] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
 (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig.6-17

6 - 22
[G] Bottom margin
(2) Open platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press the [FAX]  [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Full color, Text/Photo
and 2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range.

Copy 3±2.0 mm 3±2.0 mm
<Procedure>
 (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
 [OK] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory)
 (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes 6
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig.6-18

6 - 23
Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1/TCC-2
Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No. TCC-1/TCC-2.
1. Points to be measured in the chart
D
Feeding direction
C
B
Fig.6-19
<Adjustment order>
[0] [5] [Power ON]  (Chart TCC-1/TCC-2)  [FAX]  [START] (A3/LD, 100%, Full color and
Text/Photo)
B: 05-3030  5±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
C: 05-3032  150±0.5 mm (0.03 mm/step)
D: 05-3031  10±0.5 mm (0.08 mm/step)

6 - 24
2. Checking areas of the chart and their descriptions
[9] [1] [8] [10]
[2] [5] [2]

[3] [3]
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART [7]

No.TCC-1/TCC-2
[2]
[1]
[1]
[6]
[4] [6]
[3] 6
[14] [11]
[7] [12] [7]

[7]
[2] [13]
[1] [8]
Fig.6-20
[1] Grid patterns : For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section
[2] YMCK patches : For checking uniformity
[3] Resolution patterns : For checking resolution
[4] Gradation pattern : Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)
Coverage: 10-100%
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance
[5] Color registration pattern : For checking color registration
[6] Pictures : For checking color reproduction and moire
[7] Magnification lines : For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary
scanning directions
[8] Center lines : Center lines for A4/LT sizes
[9] Arrow : A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass
(place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.)
[10] Halftone band : For checking uniformity
[11] White text on the black : For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid
solid
[12] Text : For checking reproduction of text
[13] Thin lines : For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm)
[14] Note area : For recording the date, conditions, etc.

6 - 25
6.1.9 Image dimensional adjustment in the copy/printer/fax function
[ 1 ] Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction

The reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction of the printed image can be adjusted as
follows:
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code Function Remarks

7000 PPC The larger the value is, the larger the reproduction ratio in the primary
scanning direction becomes.
(0.1%/step)
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
7001 PRT(*1)/FAX The larger the value is, the larger the reproduction ratio in the primary
scanning direction becomes.
(0.1%/step)
*1: This adjustment is not available for the printer function when the resolution of the image is 600 x
1200 dpi.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure:
Notes:
• Since the reproduction ratio may vary due to expansion and contraction of the paper immediately
after the image is printed out, it is recommended to measure its dimension after at least 3
minutes have passed.
• This adjustment may cause image troubles such as moire, disappearance or breaking of thin
lines on the printed image. Therefore check if there is no such image trouble while you are
performing the adjustment.
<Procedure>
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct a value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [OK] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. -> The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Make a test copy and check the image copied. To check the printed image, turn off the power
and then back on, and then print the image. If the image is not in the desired reproduction ratio,
repeat steps (2) to (4).

6 - 26
6.2 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
6.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation
reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
• Photoconductive drum
• LED printer head
• LED gap spacer
• Transfer belt
• 1st transfer roller 6
• Drum cleaning blade
• Needle electrode
• Image position aligning sensor (Front)
• Image position aligning sensor (Rear)/Image quality sensor
• SRAM board (SYS board)
• EEPROM (LGC board)
• HDD
(2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
• 2nd transfer roller
Notes:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in  P. 6-4 "6.1.3
Performing Image Quality Control" and  P. 6-6 "6.1.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  Adjustment Mode
(2) Select the A4/LT/A3/LD drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a
“Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.
Pattern No. Pattern No. Remark Paper type

4 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7869 All paper types
200 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7871-0 Plain paper
204 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7871-2 Recycled paper
206 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7871-3 Thick paper1
208 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7871-4 Thick paper2
214 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7871-7 Special paper 1
216 Color/black integrated When performing code 05-7871-8 Special paper 2
(3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass.
Place the chart aligning its side with 2 black squares against the original scale.

6 - 27
 The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment
calculation (approx.30 sec.).

7869 Automatic gamma When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation
(7871) adjustment reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by
performing this automatic gamma adjustment. The result of 7869 is
applied to all paper types. The result of 7871 is applied to the
specified paper type.
(5) When the adjustment has finished normally, press the [OK] button to have the adjustment results
reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown.
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display
will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the
wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and
afterward.
Remarks:
To select the paper type for the automatic gamma adjustment in user calibration, change the
code below to "1". (copy/print)
Code Remarks
08-9059 0: No paper selecting buttons displayed
1: Paper selecting buttons displayed. (For both Copy and Printer)

6 - 28
6.2.2 Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
Original mode
Color Printe Red Item to be
Text/ Custo Remarks
mode d Seal adjusted
Photo Text Photo Map m
Image Color
(*1) Mode
(*2) Mode
Full color 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 Manual density The larger the
mode center value is, the darker
value the image
7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 Automatic becomes.
density Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default:
Twin 7733 7734 7735 - - - - Manual density 128)
color mode center 6
value
7736 7737 7738 - - - - Automatic
density
Mono 7727 7728 7729 - - - - Manual density
color mode center
value
7730 7731 7732 - - - - Automatic
density
Original mode
Color Item to be
Text/ Gray Custom Remarks
mode Text Photo adjusted
Photo scale Mode
Black 7114 7115 7116 7138 7134 Manual The larger the value is, the
density mode darker the image becomes.
center value Acceptable values:
7123 7124 7125 7141 7137 Automatic 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
density mode
adjustments according to the following procedure.
Notes:
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing  P. 6-27 "6.2.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
<Procedure>
(3) Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [OK] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value.  The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
(6) If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

6 - 29
6.2.3 Color balance adjustment
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The
adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density
and high density.
Original mode
Item to
Color Red be Remarks
Text/ Printed Custom
Text Photo Map Seal adjusted
Photo Image mode
Color
Yellow 7960-0 7961-0 7962-0 7963-0 7964-0 7980-0 7984-0 Low The larger
density the value
7960-1 7961-1 7962-1 7963-1 7964-1 7980-1 7984-1 Medium is, the
density darker the
color to
7960-2 7961-2 7962-2 7963-2 7964-2 7980-2 7984-2 High
be
density
adjusted
Mage 7965-0 7966-0 7967-0 7968-0 7969-0 7981-0 7985-0 Low becomes.
nta density Acceptabl
7965-1 7966-1 7967-1 7968-1 7969-1 7981-1 7985-1 Medium e values:
density 0 to 255
7965-2 7966-2 7967-2 7968-2 7969-2 7981-2 7985-2 High (Default:
density 128)
Cyan 7970-0 7971-0 7972-0 7973-0 7974-0 7982-0 7986-0 Low
density
7970-1 7971-1 7972-1 7973-1 7974-1 7982-1 7986-1 Medium
density
7970-2 7971-2 7972-2 7973-2 7974-2 7982-2 7986-2 High
density
Black 7975-0 7976-0 7977-0 7978-0 7979-0 7983-0 7987-0 Low
density
7975-1 7976-1 7977-1 7978-1 7979-1 7983-1 7987-1 Medium
density
7975-2 7976-2 7977-2 7978-2 7979-2 7983-2 7987-2 High
density
Notes:
adjustment".
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density
and high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START]
button.
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
0: Low density
1: Medium density
2: High density
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [OK] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.

6 - 30
 The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

6 - 31
<Range of the density area (low density, medium density, high density)>
The color from 10 to 30 (low density), from 40 to 70 (medium density) and from 80 to 100 (high density)
in No. TCC-1/TCC-2 chart can be used as a guide for the range of the density area influenced by the
change of the adjustment value (low density, medium density, high density).
Low density
Medium density
High density
Fig.6-21

6 - 32
6.2.4 Gamma balance adjustment
The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following:
low density, medium density and high density.
Original mode
Color Item to be
Text/ Gray Custom Remarks
mode Text Photo adjusted
Photo scale mode
Black 7190-0 7191-0 7192-0 7956-0 7276-0 Low density The larger the value is, the
7190-1 7191-1 7192-1 7956-1 7276-1 Medium density density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
7190-2 7191-2 7192-2 7956-2 7276-2 High density
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
adjustments according to the following procedure. 6
Notes:
adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-30 "6.2.3 Color balance adjustment".

6 - 33
6.2.5 Background adjustment
The density of the background can be adjusted as follows.
Original mode
Color Red
Text/ Printed Custom Gray Seal Remarks
mode Text Photo Map
Photo Image mode scale Color
Mode
Full 7656 7657 7658 7659 7660 7661 --- 7662 The larger the value is,
color the darker the
Mono 7707 7708 7709 --- --- --- --- --- background becomes.
color Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
Twin 7710 7711 7712 --- --- --- --- ---
color
Black 7100 7101 --- 7102 --- 7106 7105 ---
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-29 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
6.2.6 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and scan)
Judgment levels for automatically identifying whether an original is color or black are adjusted. This
adjustment is for judgment levels when “Auto Color” is selected as a color mode. The same adjustment
value is simultaneously applied to all cases of originals on the original glass for copier functions and
network scanning functions, and those placed on the RADF.
Item to be
Code Contents
adjusted
7630 Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at
for ACS the Auto Color Mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as
color.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make
adjustment.
<Procedure>

6 - 34
6.2.7 Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
The adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
Code Color mode Original mode Contents

7796 Full Color Text/Photo The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes;
7797 Text while the smaller the value is, the softer the image
becomes.
7798 Printed Image The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear.
7799 Photo Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
7800 Map
7795 Custom mode
7794 Red Seal Color
Mode
7801 Mono color Text/Photo
6
7802 Text
7803 Printed Image
7804 Twin color Text/Photo
7805 Text
7806 Printed Image
7056 Black Text/Photo
7057 Text
7058 Photo
7249 Custom mode
7061 Gray scale
adjustment.
Notes:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>

6 - 35
6.2.8 Setting range correction
The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be
switched to “varied” or “fixed” in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.
Original mode Item to be

Original mode Remarks
Text/Photo Text User Custom adjusted
Black 7286 7287 7237 Manual 0: Background peak / fixed
density mode 1: Background peak / varied
adjustment.
<Procedure>
6.2.9 Adjustment of smudged/faint text

The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.
Original mode
Item to be
Color mode Text/ Custom Remarks
Text adjusted
Photo mode
Black 7097 7098 7252 Adjustment of When the value decreases, the
smudged/ faint faint text is improved. When the
text value increases, the smudged text
is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4
(Default: 2)
adjustment.
Notes:
Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed from the default value.
<Procedure>

6 - 36
6.2.10 Color Adjustment of Marker
The color of the one touch adjustment “MARKER” can be adjusted so that any marker colors already on
the original can be distinguished.
Relation between the adjustment value and the color

Item to be (Acceptable values: 0 to 6)
Code
adjusted
0 to 2 3 (Default) 4 to 6
7850-0 Yellow The smaller the value Yellow The larger the value
is, the more reddish is, the more greenish
the color becomes. the color becomes.
7850-1 Magenta The smaller the value Magenta The larger the value
is, the more bluish the is, the more reddish
color becomes. the color becomes.
7850-2 Cyan The smaller the value Cyan The larger the value
is, the more greenish is, the more bluish the 6
the color becomes. color becomes.
7850-3 Red The smaller the value Red The larger the value
is, the closer to is, the more yellowish
Magenta the color the color becomes.
becomes.
7850-4 Green The smaller the value Green The larger the value
is, the more yellowish is, the closer to Cyan
the color becomes. the color becomes.
7850-5 Blue The smaller the value Blue The larger the value
is, the closer to Cyan is, the closer to
the color becomes. Magenta the color
becomes.
Notes:
The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of the fluorescent
ink.
<Procedure>
(3) Key in a sub-code and press the [START] button.
(To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
ready state.
(6) Turn the power OFF and back ON in the normal mode. Then make a copy in the one touch
adjustment “MARKER” mode.

6 - 37
6.2.11 LED emission level adjustment
The LED emission level in the black mode can be adjusted as follows. This adjustment adjusts the dot
size.
Code Item to be adjusted Remarks

7212-0 LED emission level 0/4 The smaller the value is, the smaller the LED
7212-1 LED emission level 1/4 emission level becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is
reproduced accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7212-2 LED emission level 2/4 (Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127,
7212-3 LED emission level 3/4 Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 240)
7212-4 LED emission level 4/4
<Procedure>
(3) Key in a sub-code and press the [START] button.
ready state.
Notes:
• The setting value must increase as the LED emission level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do
not increase this order when setting the values.
• Usually, LED emission level 4 / 4 is most effective in the black mode.
6.2.12 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type

The maximum toner adhesion amount can be adjusted for each paper type.
It is used when offsetting occurs.
Code Paper type Remarks

7913-0 Plain paper The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered
7913-2 Recycled paper decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of
fusing offsetting, etc.).
7913-3 Thick paper 1 Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7913-4 Thick paper 2 (Default: 128)
7913-7 Special paper 1
7913-11 Envelop
7913-12 OHP film
Notes:
Even if a large value is set, the image does not drastically appear dark (the amount of toner
adhering is not increased).
<Procedure>

6 - 38
6.2.13 Maximum text density adjustment

The maximum text density in each color in the full color mode (Text/Photo, Text, Map mode) can be
adjusted.
Color Code Item to be adjusted Remarks

Yellow 7889 Maximum text density The larger the value is, the darker the maximum
Magenta 7890 text density of each color to be adjusted
becomes.
Cyan 7891
Black 7892
adjustments according to the following procedure. 6
Notes:
adjustment".
<Procedure>
6.2.14 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment

Text/Photo reproduction level at the Full color mode and Auto color mode can be adjusted.
Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to “Photo oriented 1”, “Photo oriented 2”,
“Text oriented 1” or “Text oriented 2” in the following codes.
Mode
Custom Item to be
Red Seal Contents
Text/ mode adjusted
Color
Photo (Text/Photo Mode
base)
7840 7841 7842 Text/Photo 0, 5: Default
reproduction level The smaller the value, the higher the
adjustment printed image reproduction level becomes
(Photo oriented). The larger the value, the
higher the text reproduction level becomes
(Text oriented).
Notes:
• The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the
Photo oriented.
• When you change the setting from the default value to Text oriented, noise occurs in a printed
photo with a few lines.
• The codes for the user custom setting are enabled only when the base original mode of the
user custom mode is Text/Photo.
<Procedure>

6 - 39
6.2.15 Black header density level adjustment
The density level of headers in the black mode is adjusted.
Mode Code Original mode Remarks

Full Color 7811 Text/Photo The larger the value is, the darker the headers
7812 Text become. However, the density level differs depending
on the modes.
7816 Custom mode
7817 Red Seal Color If the value is set to "0", the table specified by default
Mode is used. The default tables are as follows:
• Text/Photo mode: 4
• Text mode: 4
• User custom setting
(in the Text/Photo, Map, or Text mode base): 4
• User custom setting
(in the Photo or Printed image mode base): 3
adjustment.
<Procedure>
6.2.16 Black area adjustment in twin color copy mode

Item to be
Mode Code Remarks
adjusted
Twin color mode 7641-0 High density The larger the value is, the larger the area
with selected 7641-1 Medium density recognized as black in the original becomes. The
colors smaller the value is, the larger the area recognized
7641-2 Low density
as the color other than black becomes.
Twin color mode 7642-0 High density The larger the value is, the larger the black area
(Black and red) 7642-1 Medium density becomes. The smaller the value is, the larger the
7642-2 Low density red area becomes.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-30 "6.2.3 Color balance adjustment".

6 - 40
6.2.17 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals (common for
copy and scan)
The judgment level is adjusted for automatic identification of whether the original set is blank or not.
This adjustment is made when “OMIT BLANK PAGE” is selected on the control panel.
The adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all modes at PPC and scanning.

7618 Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be
adjustment for blank judged as a bank sheet.
original Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
6
6.2.18 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF (common for copy,
scan and fax)
The background level for scanning originals with the RADF is adjusted when the background fogging at
the scanning of a manually-set original and an original used with the RADF is different. This is to adjust
the level of the background image removed when the scanning of the originals with the RADF is
performed.
Color mode Code Remarks

Color 7026 The larger the value is, the darker the background density
Black 7025 becomes.
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>

6 - 41
6.2.19 Twin color copy / mono color copy adjustment
The density of the color specified on the touch panel is adjusted in the monocolor copy or twin color
copy mode. This adjustment is reflected to both monocolor and twin color copying.
Subcode
Code Remarks
Y M C K
Magenta 7644-0 7644-1 7644-2 7644-3 The larger the value is, the darker the density
Yellow 7645-0 7645-1 7645-2 7645-3 becomes, and the smaller the value is, the
lighter the density becomes. When "255" is
YellowGreen 7646-0 7646-1 7646-2 7646-3
set, the specified solid color is used for
Cyan 7647-0 7647-1 7647-2 7647-3 printing. When "0" is set, nothing is printed.
Pink 7648-0 7648-1 7648-2 7648-3 For example, in case of "Red", the color when
Red 7649-0 7649-1 7649-2 7649-3 "Red" is specified becomes blue if you set as
Orange 7650-0 7650-1 7650-2 7650-3 follows:
(Y) 7649-0=0
Green 7651-0 7651-1 7651-2 7651-3
(M) 7649-1=128
Blue 7652-0 7652-1 7652-2 7652-3 (C) 7649-2=255
Purple 7653-0 7653-1 7653-2 7653-3 Acceptable value: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
Notes:
• If a large value is set for all of YMCK,
offsetting may occur. Make an
adjustment while checking the
image.
• If "0" is set for all four colors of
YMCK, when a color is specified for
the adjustment item, nothing is
printed.
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START]
button.
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1, 2 or 3), and press the [START]
button.
0: Y
1: M
2: C
3: K
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(7) Turn ON the power of the equipment and make a copy.

6 - 42
6.2.20 Maximum density adjustment for each paper type
The maximum density for each paper type can be adjusted collectively.

7902 Plain paper The smaller the value is, the lower the density of the
7904 Recycled paper whole image becomes.
7905 Thick paper 1 (Default: Plain paper: 255, Recycled paper: 255,
7906 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 1: 255, Thick paper 2: 255, Special paper
1: 255, Special paper 2: 255, Envelope: 255, OHP
7909 Special paper 1
film: 240)
7910 Special paper 2
7901 Envelope
7911 OHP film
Notes: 6
Be aware that if too small a value is set, a faint image occurs.
<Procedure>

6 - 43
6.2.21 Color reproduction selection
When the custom mode or red seal color mode is selected, the color reproduction can be adjusted as
follows.
Code Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks

7690 Custom mode Color reproduction 0: Text/Photo, printed image, text, map
adjustment 1: Photo
7691 Red seal color mode
2: Red seal color mode
3: Text/Photo, printed image, text, map
4: Text/Photo, printed image, text, map
<Default value>
Custom mode: 0
Red seal color mode: 2
Notes:
adjustment".
<Procedure>
ready state.

6 - 44
6.2.22 Hue adjustment
The hue in the full color mode can be adjusted as follows.
Item to be
Code Original mode Description Remarks
adjusted
7665-0 Text/Photo Red The larger the value, the darker the Acceptable value: 0 to
yellow becomes. The smaller the value, 255
the darker the magenta becomes. Default value: 128
7665-1 Text/Photo Yellow The larger the value, the darker the
green becomes. The smaller the value,
the darker the red becomes.
7665-2 Text/Photo Green The larger the value, the darker the
cyan becomes. The smaller the value,
the darker the yellow becomes.
7665-3 Text/Photo Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
becomes. The smaller the value, the 6
darker the green becomes.
7665-4 Text/Photo Blue The larger the value, the darker the
magenta becomes. The smaller the
value, the darker the cyan becomes.
7665-5 Text/Photo Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red
becomes. The smaller the value, the
darker the blue becomes.
7666-0 Text Red The larger the value, the darker the
yellow becomes. The smaller the value,
the darker the magenta becomes.
7666-1 Text Yellow The larger the value, the darker the
7666-2 Text Green The larger the value, the darker the
7666-3 Text Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
7666-4 Text Blue The larger the value, the darker the
7666-5 Text Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red
7667-0 Printed image Red The larger the value, the darker the
7667-1 Printed image Yellow The larger the value, the darker the
7667-2 Printed image Green The larger the value, the darker the
7667-3 Printed image Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
7667-4 Printed image Blue The larger the value, the darker the
7667-5 Printed image Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red

6 - 45
Item to be
adjusted
7668-0 Photo Red The larger the value, the darker the Acceptable value: 0 to
yellow becomes. The smaller the value, 255
the darker the magenta becomes. Default value: 128
7668-1 Photo Yellow The larger the value, the darker the
7668-2 Photo Green The larger the value, the darker the
7668-3 Photo Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
7668-4 Photo Blue The larger the value, the darker the
7668-5 Photo Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red
7669-0 Map Red The larger the value, the darker the
7669-1 Map Yellow The larger the value, the darker the
7669-2 Map Green The larger the value, the darker the
7669-3 Map Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
7669-4 Map Blue The larger the value, the darker the
7669-5 Map Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red
7670-0 Custom Red The larger the value, the darker the
7670-1 Custom Yellow The larger the value, the darker the
7670-2 Custom Green The larger the value, the darker the
7670-3 Custom Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
7670-4 Custom Blue The larger the value, the darker the
7670-5 Custom Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red
7671-0 Red seal color Red The larger the value, the darker the
7671-1 Red seal color Yellow The larger the value, the darker the

6 - 46
Item to be
adjusted
7671-2 Red seal color Green The larger the value, the darker the Acceptable value: 0 to
cyan becomes. The smaller the value, 255
the darker the yellow becomes. Default value: 128
7671-3 Red seal color Cyan The larger the value, the darker the blue
7671-4 Red seal color Blue The larger the value, the darker the
7671-5 Red seal color Magenta The larger the value, the darker the red
Notes:
adjustment". 6
<Procedure>
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button. (e.g. 7665)
(3) Key in a value to adjust the color.
0: Red
1: Yellow
2: Green
3: Cyan
4: Blue
5: Magenta
ready state.
(5) Repeat step (2) to (4) to make the setting again.

6 - 47
6.2.23 Saturation adjustment
The saturation of the copied image in the color copying function can be adjusted as follows.
Item to be
adjusted
7675-0 Text/Photo Red Input the larger value to increase the Acceptable value: 0 to
7675-1 Text/Photo Yellow saturation, and input the smaller value 255
to decrease the saturation. Default value: 128
7675-2 Text/Photo Green
7675-3 Text/Photo Cyan
7675-4 Text/Photo Blue
7675-5 Text/Photo Magenta
7676-0 Text Red
7676-1 Text Yellow
7676-2 Text Green
7676-3 Text Cyan
7676-4 Text Blue
7676-5 Text Magenta
7677-0 Printed image Red
7677-1 Printed image Yellow
7677-2 Printed image Green
7677-3 Printed image Cyan
7677-4 Printed image Blue
7677-5 Printed image Magenta
7678-0 Photo Red
7678-1 Photo Yellow
7678-2 Photo Green
7678-3 Photo Cyan
7678-4 Photo Blue
7678-5 Photo Magenta
7679-0 Map Red
7679-1 Map Yellow
7679-2 Map Green
7679-3 Map Cyan
7679-4 Map Blue
7679-5 Map Magenta
7680-0 Custom Red
7680-1 Custom Yellow
7680-2 Custom Green
7680-3 Custom Cyan
7680-4 Custom Blue
7680-5 Custom Magenta
7681-0 Red seal color Red
7681-1 Red seal color Yellow
7681-2 Red seal color Green
7681-3 Red seal color Cyan
7681-4 Red seal color Blue
7681-5 Red seal color Magenta

6 - 48
Notes:
adjustment".
<Procedure>
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button. (e.g. 7675)
(3) Key in a value to adjust the color.
0: Red
1: Yellow
2: Green
3: Cyan
4: Blue
5: Magenta
ready state.
(5) Repeat step (2) to (4) to make the setting again. 6
6.2.24 ADF noise reduction (Copying Function)

The noise reduction level for streaks can be adjusted with the following codes when a copy job whose
color mode is [BLACK] is performed using the ADF while its scan noise reduction function is set to
enable (*).
* When [LOW], [MIDDLE] or [HIGH] is selected in the [ADMIN] tab of the [USER FUNCTIONS] menu,
or when "0", "1" or "2" is selected in 08-7617.
Original mode
Item to be
Text adjusted
Photo mode
Black 7151 7152 7150 ADF noise When the value decreases, the effect of reducing
reduction streaks (set with 08-7617) becomes larger. When
the value increases, the effect of reducing streaks
(set with 08-7617) becomes smaller.
When "0" is set, this function is disabled.
(Default: 100)
When [FULL COLOR] or [AUTO COLOR] is selected for the color mode, the ADF noise reduction
function for streaks can be set to enable or disable with the following codes.
Original mode
Item to be
Text adjusted
Photo mode
Color 7694 - 7693 ADF noise Enable/Disable setting
reduction 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
(Default: 1)
05-7693 is available only when "1" (TEXT/PHOTO
base" is set for 08-7614.
Notes:
• Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the
• If too small a value is set, the text may not be printed clearly.
<Procedure>
6 - 49
6.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
6.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation
reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
1. When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this adjustment:
- Photoconductive drum
- Developer material
- LED printer head
- LED gap spacer
- Transfer belt
- 1st transfer roller
- Drum cleaning blade
- Needle electrode
- Main charger grid
- Image position aligning sensor (Front)
- Image position aligning sensor (Rear)/Image quality sensor
- SRAM board (SYS board)
- EEPROM (LGC board)
- HDD
2. When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
• 2nd transfer roller
• Screen switchover (for color: 08-8110, for black: 08-7310)
 P. 6-61 "6.3.13 Sharpness adjustment"
 P. 6-53 "6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)"
Notes:
Be sure to perform this adjustment after performing  P. 6-4 "6.1.3 Performing Image Quality
Control".

6 - 50
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  Adjustment Mode
(2) Select the A4/LT/A3/LD drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a
“Patch chart for adjustment”.
600dpi
Pattern No. Paper type Remarks
70 Plain paper Used when the code 8004-0 is performed
74 Recycled paper Used when the code 8004-2 is performed
76 Thick paper 1 Used when the code 8004-3 is performed
84 Special paper 1 Used when the code 8004-7 is performed
Notes:
However, this is applied to all paper types when 05-8008 is performed.
1200dpi 6
Pattern No. Paper type Remarks
230 Plain paper Used when the code 8005-0 is performed
234 Recycled paper Used when the code 8005-2 is performed
Notes:
However, this is applied to all paper types when 05-8009 is performed.
(3)
Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass, with its
side, on which two black squares are present, aligned against the original scale.
(4) Key in a code and press the [START] button.  The scanner reads the chart automatically and
performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.).
600dpi
8004-0 Plain paper When the reproduction of gradation is not
8004-2 Recycled paper appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors
Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this
8004-3 Thick paper 1
automatic gamma adjustment.
8008 All paper types
* If the code 8008 is performed, the adjustment will be applied to all paper types.
1200dpi
8005-0 Plain paper When the reproduction of gradation is not
8005-2 Recycled paper appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors
Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this
8009 All paper types
* If the code 8009 is performed, the adjustment will be applied to all paper types.
* 05-8005 and 8009 are not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
6 - 51
(5) When the adjustment has finished normally, press the [OK] button to have the adjustment results
reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown. Press the [CANCEL]
button to clear the error display.
When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch
chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original
glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.
To select the paper type for the automatic gamma adjustment in user calibration, change the code
below to "1". (copy/print)
Code Remarks
08-9059 0: No paper selecting buttons displayed
1: Paper selecting buttons displayed. (For both Copy and Printer)

6 - 52
6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is
performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density, and high
density.
When "Black" (600 dpi) is set for the color mode and "Auto" is selected for the halftone setting, the
gamma balance can be adjusted in each area of Text, Graphics and Image.
Notes:
PS, XPS, and 1200dpi are not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Color Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail

Remarks
mode (PS) (PS) (PCL) (PCL) (XPS) (XPS)
Black 7315-0 7316-0 7317-0 7318-0 7319-0 7320-0 The larger the value is, the
(600dpi) 7315-1 7316-1 7317-1 7318-1 7319-1 7320-1 density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
7315-2 7316-2 7317-2 7318-2 7319-2 7320-2
6
(Default: 128)
Black 7309-0 7310-0 --- --- --- --- The larger the value is, the
(1200dp 7309-1 7310-1 --- --- --- --- density of the item to be
i) 7309-2 7310-2 --- --- --- --- adjusted becomes darker.
(Default: 128)
Auto (PS) Auto (PCL)

Color Smoot Smoot Smoot
Detail Detail Detail Remarks
mode h h h
(PS) (PCL) (XPS)
(PS) (PCL) (XPS)
Black 7360-0 7361-0 7362-0 7363-0 7364-0 7365-0 The larger the value is, the
(600dpi) 7360-1 7361-1 7362-1 7363-1 7364-1 7365-1 density of the item to be adjusted
becomes darker.
7360-2 7361-2 7362-2 7363-2 7364-2 7365-2
(Default: 128)
Auto (XPS)
Color Smoot
Smooth Detail Remarks
mode h
(PS) (PS)
(PCL)
Black 7366-0 7367-0 7368-0 The larger the value is, the density of the item to be
(600dpi) 7366-1 7367-1 7368-1 adjusted becomes darker.
7366-2 7367-2 7368-2
(Default: 128)
Notes:
• Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing  P. 6-50 "6.3.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
• Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density 1: Medium density 2: High density/Highest density

6 - 53
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [OK] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.  The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform the printing job.
(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7)
The color from the 1st to the 7th stage (low density), from the 8th to the 11th stage (medium density)
and from the 12th to the 13th stage (high density) in "Patch chart for gamma adjustment ([71] [FAX])"
output as a confirmation in  P. 6-50 "6.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" can be used as a guide for
the range of the density area (low density, medium density, high density) influenced by the change of
the adjustment value.
1
2
3
Low 4
density
5
6
7
8
Medium 9
density 10
11
12
High density
13
Fig.6-22

6 - 54
6.3.3 Color balance adjustment
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by
selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density, and high density.
Notes:

For color printing
PS PCL XPS
Color Remarks
Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail
Yellow 8050-0 8054-0 8058-0 8062-0 8042-0 8046-0 The larger the value is, the darker
(600dpi) 8050-1 8054-1 8058-1 8062-1 8042-1 8046-1 the color to be adjusted becomes.
Acceptable
8050-2 8054-2 8058-2 8062-2 8042-2 8046-2
values: 0 to 255
Magenta 8051-0 8055-0 8059-0 8063-0 8043-0 8047-0 (Default: 128)
(600dpi) 8051-1 8055-1 8059-1 8063-1 8043-1 8047-1 6
8051-2 8055-2 8059-2 8063-2 8043-2 8047-2
Cyan 8052-0 8056-0 8060-0 8064-0 8044-0 8048-0
(600dpi) 8052-1 8056-1 8060-1 8064-1 8044-1 8048-1
8052-2 8056-2 8060-2 8064-2 8044-2 8048-2
Black 8053-0 8057-0 8061-0 8065-0 8045-0 8049-0
(600dpi) 8053-1 8057-1 8061-1 8065-1 8045-1 8049-1
8053-2 8057-2 8061-2 8065-2 8045-2 8049-2
Yellow 8268-0 8272-0 --- --- --- ---
(1200dpi) 8268-1 8272-1 --- --- --- ---
8268-2 8272-2 --- --- --- ---
Magenta 8269-0 8273-0 --- --- --- ---
(1200dpi) 8269-1 8273-1 --- --- --- ---
8269-2 8273-2 --- --- --- ---
Cyan 8270-0 8274-0 --- --- --- ---
(1200dpi) 8270-1 8274-1 --- --- --- ---
8270-2 8274-2 --- --- --- ---
Black 8271-0 8275-0 --- --- --- ---
(1200dpi) 8271-1 8275-1 --- --- --- ---
8271-2 8275-2 --- --- --- ---

6 - 55
Twin color print
Color specified Item to be adjusted

for twin color Remarks
print Black Yellow Magenta Cyan
Black 8023-0 - - - The larger the value is, the
8023-1 - - - darker the color to be adjusted
becomes.
8023-2 - - - Acceptable values: 0 to 255
Cyan - 8024-0 8025-0 8026-0 (Default: 128)
- 8024-1 8025-1 8026-1
- 8024-2 8025-2 8026-2
Magenta - 8027-0 8028-0 8029-0
- 8027-1 8028-1 8029-1
- 8027-2 8028-2 8029-2
Yellow - 8030-0 8031-0 8032-0
- 8030-1 8031-1 8032-1
- 8030-2 8031-2 8032-2
Red - 8033-0 8034-0 8035-0
- 8033-1 8034-1 8035-1
- 8033-2 8034-2 8035-2
Green - 8036-0 8037-0 8038-0
- 8036-1 8037-1 8038-1
- 8036-2 8037-2 8038-2
Blue - 8039-0 8040-0 8041-0
- 8039-1 8040-1 8041-1
- 8039-2 8040-2 8041-2
Notes:
• Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing  P. 6-50 "6.3.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
• Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-53 "6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".
The color from the 1st to the 7th stage (low density), from the 8th to the 11th stage (medium density),
from the 12th to the 13th stage (high density) in “Patch chart for gamma adjustment ([71] [FAX])” output
in  P. 6-50 "6.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" can be used as a guide for the range of the density
area influenced by the adjustment with the printer driver and the change of the adjustment value (low
density, medium density, and high density (Refer to  P. 6-54 "Fig.6-22 ").

6 - 56
6.3.4 Adjustment of faint text
The faint text can be improved in the following codes.
Notes:
PS and XPS are not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Black mode Color mode

Remarks
PS PCL XPS PS PCL XPS
7340 7341 7342 8130 8131 8132 When the small characters or fine lines in a
halftone image are faint, they can be improved
by increasing the value to raise the density level.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. 6
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
(6) Let the equipment restart and perform the printing job.
(7) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).
6.3.5 Upper limit value in the Toner Saving Mode

The upper limit value of the density when "Toner save" is selected in the Custom tab of the printer driver
can be adjusted.
Notes:
Color PS PCL XPS 1200dpi Remarks

Black mode 7307-0 7307-1 7307-2 7302 The smaller the value is, the lighter
Color mode 8160-0 8160-1 8160-2 8161 the density of image becomes.
(Default: 176)
<Procedure>

6 - 57
6.3.6 Maximum toner density adjustment (OHP)
The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
Notes:
1200dpi is not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Color Code Paper type Remarks

Color (600dpi) 8145 OHP film The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered
Color (1200dpi) 8149 decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of
fusing offsetting, etc.).
(Default: 200)
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-57 "6.3.4 Adjustment of faint text".
Notes:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
6.3.7 Fine line enhancement switchover

The setting of the thin line enhancement is changed.
Notes:
PS and XPS are not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Black mode Color mode

Remarks
PS PCL XPS PS PCL
7322-0 7322-1 7322-2 8102-0 8102-1 8102-2 Whether fine lines are enhanced or not
can be switched.
0: OFF
1: ON
<Procedure>
6.3.8 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PCL)

Original mode
Item to be
Photographi Remarks
General Presentation Line art adjusted
c
8210-0 8210-1 8210-2 8210-3 Text The larger the value is, the
8211-0 8211-1 8211-2 8211-3 Graphics wider the color range to be
printed only with the black
8212-0 8212-1 8212-2 8212-3 Image
toner becomes. The
smaller the value is, the
narrower this color range
becomes. Acceptable
values: 1 to 255
<Procedure>
6 - 58
6.3.9 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (Twin color mode)
Item to be
Code Remarks
adjusted
8213 Text The larger the value is, the wider the color range to be printed only
8214 Graphics with the black toner becomes. The smaller the value is, the narrower
this color range becomes.
8215 Image
<Procedure>
6.3.10 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PS)

Notes:
This adjustment is not supported by LL20/25ppm model. 6
Original mode
Item to be
Photogra Presentat Color Remarks
General Line art adjusted
phic ion profile
8252-0 8252-1 8252-2 8252-3 8252-4 Text The larger the value is, the
8253-0 8253-1 8253-2 8253-3 8253-4 Graphics wider the color range to be
8254-0 8254-1 8254-2 8254-3 8254-4 Image
toner becomes. The smaller
the value is, the narrower this
color range becomes.
<Procedure>
6.3.11 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (XPS)

Notes:
This adjustment is not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Original mode
Item to be
Photogra Presentat Color Remarks
General Line art adjusted
phic ion profile
8249-0 8249-1 8249-2 8249-3 8249-4 Text The larger the value is, the
8250-0 8250-1 8250-2 8250-3 8250-4 Graphics wider the color range to be
8251-0 8251-1 8251-2 8251-3 8251-4 Image
toner becomes. The smaller
the value is, the narrower this
color range becomes.
<Procedure>

6 - 59
6.3.12 Toner limit threshold adjustment
Notes:
1200dpi is not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Smooth/
Detail
Auto Smooth Detail
(PS/PCL/ Paper type Remarks
(PS/PCL/ (1200dpi) (1200dpi)
XPS)
XPS)
8071-0 8070-0 8090-0 8089-0 Plain paper When you set a larger value,
8071-2 8070-2 8090-2 8089-2 Recycled paper the density becomes high in
some parts of the high
8071-3 8070-3 8090-3 8089-3 Thick paper 1 density area since the
8071-4 8070-4 8090-4 8089-4 Thick paper 2 maximum amount of toner
adhering increases.
8071-7 8070-7 8090-7 8089-7 Special paper 1
When you set a smaller
8071-8 8070-8 8090-8 8089-8 Special paper 2 value, the reproduction of the
8071-11 8070-11 8090-11 8089-11 Envelope gradation tends to be
reduced since the maximum
8071-12 8070-12 8090-12 8089-12 OHP film
amount of toner adhering
decreases and the maximum
density becomes low.
Be aware that if too large a
value is set, offsetting
occurs.

(Default: 128)
<Procedure>

6 - 60
This adjustment is applied when images need to be softer or sharper.
The adjustment for each original mode is available.
The performance of this adjustment differs depending on the setting value of 05-7322 or 05-8102 with
“ P. 6-58 "6.3.7 Fine line enhancement switchover"” as shown below.
When the value of 8102 is "0"
Color
Item to be Red Twin
Present Black Remarks
adjusted General Photo Line art Seal color
ation
Color
Text 8110-0 8111-0 8112-0 8113-0 8109-0 8108-0 8118-0 The larger the
Graphics 8110-1 8111-1 8112-1 8113-1 8109-1 8108-1 8118-1 value is, the
Image 8110-2 8111-2 8112-2 8113-2 8109-2 8108-2 8118-2
sharper the 6
image
becomes. The
smaller the
value is, the
softer the
image
becomes.
Acceptable
values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

6 - 61
When the value of 8102 is "1"
Color
Item to be Red Twin
Present Black Remarks
adjusted General Photo Line art Seal color
ation
Color
Text/ 8110-0 8111-0 8112-0 8113-0 8109-0 8108-0 8118-0 The larger the
Others value is, the
Thin text 8110-1 8111-1 8112-1 8113-1 8109-1 8108-1 8118-1 sharper the
image
Image 8110-2 8111-2 8112-2 8113-2 8109-2 8108-2 8118-2
becomes. The
smaller the
value is, the
softer the
image
becomes.
Acceptable
values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
6.3.14 Thin line width lower limit adjustment

Notes:
Code 05-8241 is not supported by LL20/25ppm model.
Code Remarks
8240 Sets the lower limit value of the thin line width when “Distinguish Thin Lines” is
(600dpi) selected in the screen selecting menu of the printer driver.
8241 The larger the value is, the thicker (darker) the thin line becomes.
(1200dpi) Acceptable values: 1 to 9
(Default: 2)
<Procedure>

6 - 62
6.3.15 Offsetting adjustment for background processing
The density of background can be adjusted as follows.
Notes:
PS PCL XPS 1200dpi

Mode Remarks
Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail
Color 8010-0 8013-0 8010-1 8013-1 8010-2 8013-2 8016 8017 The larger
Twin 8011-0 8014-0 8011-1 8014-1 8011-2 8014-2 - - the value is,
Color the darker
Black 8012-0 8015-0 8012-1 8015-1 8012-2 8015-2 8018 8019 the
background
becomes.
The smaller
the value is, 6
the lighter
the
background
becomes.
Acceptable
values: 0 to
255
(default:
128)
<Procedure>
6.3.16 Color/black judgment setting for twin color printing images

The color reproduction of the image object is specified in the twin color mode.
Code Remarks
8218 0 : Reproduced with black and the specified color
1 : Reproduced with black only
<Procedure>

6 - 63
The LED emission level in the BOX printing (black/binary), network FAX and e-mail FAX can be set.
The size of the dots can be adjusted.

7330-1 LED emission level 1/4 emission level of the primary scanning direction
becomes. Therefore, the smaller dots are reproduced
7330-2 LED emission level 2/4 accordingly.
7330-3 LED emission level 3/4 Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7330-4 LED emission level 4/4 (Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127,
Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)
Restart the equipment, and perform the printing job.
<Procedure>
Notes:
• Usually, LED emission level 4 / 4 is the most effective in the black mode.
• It is not applied to the images printed in the Black mode by the printer driver.

6 - 64
6.3.18 Density adjustment of graphic lines (1200 dpi)
This adjustment is available regardless of whether "Distinguish Thin Lines" of the printer driver is
selected or not.
Notes:
Code 05-8242 and 05-8243 are not supported by LL20/25ppm model.

Color/Black 8242-0 The density of the line in Black in the line density range specified
by "05-8243-0" or "05-8243-1" can be adjusted.
The larger the value is, the darker the line density becomes.
Acceptable value: 0 to 5 (Default: 3)
8242-1 The density of the line in Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black in 6
the line density range specified by "05-8243-2" or "05-8243-3"
can be adjusted.
The larger the value is, the darker the line density becomes.

Color/Black 8243-0 The effective range (lower limit) of the The density range
density adjustment for the line in Black can selected in the
be set. upper and lower
limit is adjusted with
Acceptable value: 0 to 255 (Default: 1) 05-8242-0.
8243-1 The effective range (upper limit) of the
density adjustment for the line in Black can
be set.
8243-2 The effective range (lower limit) of the The density range
density adjustment for the line in Yellow, selected in the
Magenta, Cyan, and Black can be set. upper and lower
limit is adjusted with
Acceptable value: 0 to 255 (Default: 1) 05-8242-1.
8243-3 The effective range (upper limit) of the
density adjustment for the line in Yellow,
Magenta, Cyan, and Black can be set.

Notes:
Be sure to set the values of the upper and lower limit properly so that they are not set in reverse.
The line density adjustment codes with black (8242-0, 8243-0 and 8243-1) are in common for
both the color and black modes.
<Procedure>

6 - 65
6.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
6.4.1 Gamma balance adjustment

The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is
performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high
density.
Black
Original mode Gray Item to be
Remarks
Text/ Custom Scale adjusted
Text Photo
Photo mode
7485-0 7486-0 7487-0 7480-0 7488-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of the
7485-1 7486-1 7487-1 7480-1 7488-1 Medium density item to be adjusted becomes darker.
7485-2 7486-2 7487-2 7480-2 7488-2 High density (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L), 1: Medium density (M), 2: High density (H)
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job.

6 - 66
Adjusts the center density.
Original mode
Color Item to be
Text/ Custom Remarks
Mode Text Photo adjusted
Photo mode
Color 8339 8340 8341 8380 Manual The larger the value is, the
density center darker the image becomes.
value Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
Original mode 6
Gray Item to be
Mode Text/ Custom Remarks
Text Photo Scale adjusted
Photo mode
Black 7444 7445 7446 7475 7447 Manual The larger the value is, the
density center darker the image becomes.
value Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7456 7457 7458 7478 7459 Automatic (Default: 128)
density
<Procedure>
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning.

6 - 67
6.4.3 Background adjustment (Color Mode)
The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background
adjustment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value.
For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background
center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.
Before adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
After adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
Fig.6-23
Code Original mode Remarks

8309 Text/Photo The smaller the value is, the background becomes lighter.
8310 Text Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
8311 Photo
8370 Custom mode
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values: 0 to 50. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press the [CLEAR] button.)

6 - 68
6.4.4 Background adjustment (Black/Grayscale)
The density of background can be adjusted as follows.
Code Color mode Original mode Remarks

7436 Black Text/Photo The smaller the value is, the background
7437 Text becomes lighter.
7438 Photo
7441 Custom mode
7439 Grayscale -
<Procedure>
6
6.4.5 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and network
scan)
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at color
modes. The same adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all cases of originals on the original
glass for copier functions and network scanning functions, and those placed on the RADF.

7630 Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as
for ACS black even at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the
more it tends to be judged as color.
<Procedure>:

6 - 69
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The
adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
Code Color mode Original mode Contents

8354 Full Color Text/Photo The larger the value is, the sharper the image
8335 Text becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer
the image becomes.
8336 Photo
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to
8375 Custom mode appear.
7430 Black Text/Photo The acceptable values are 0 to 255.
7431 Text The center value is 128.
7432 Photo
7470 Custom mode
7433 Gray Scale -
Notes:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>

6 - 70
6.4.7 Fine adjustment of black density
The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.

8314 Text/Photo The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.
8315 Text The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.
8316 Photo Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 0)
8371 Custom mode
Notes:
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker
side.
<Procedure> 6
6.4.8 RGB conversion method selection

The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.

8319 Text/Photo 0: sRGB, 1: AppleRGB, 2: ROMMRGB, 3: AdobeRGB
8320 Text (Default: 0)
8321 Photo
8372 Custom mode
<Procedure>

6 - 71
6.4.9 Adjustment of saturation
The saturation of the scanned image is adjusted for color-scanning.

8324 Text/Photo The larger the value is, the brighter the image becomes.
8325 Text The smaller the value is, the duller the image becomes.
8326 Photo
8373 Custom mode
<Procedure>
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(4) Press the [OK] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in the memory.  The equipment goes

scan and fax)
performed.

Color 7026 The larger the value is, the darker the background density
Black 7025 becomes.
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>

6 - 72
6.4.11 Adjustment of the capacity and image quality of SlimPDF
The compression quality or the resolution is adjusted to reduce the file capacity of a SlimPDF or
improve its quality.
Item to be
Code Remarks
adjusted
9104 Compression The smaller the value, the less the file capacity and the lower the
quality of image quality becomes. The larger the value, the greater the file
SlimPDF capacity and the higher the image quality becomes.
background Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5)
processing
9107 Resolution of The smaller the value, the less the file capacity and the lower the
SlimPDF image quality becomes. The larger the value, the greater the file
background capacity and the higher the image quality becomes.
processing 0: 75dpi 6
1: 100dpi
2: 150dpi
3: 200dpi
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [OK] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. -> The equipment goes
(5) Let the equipment restart. Acquire the SlimPDF file and check it.
6.4.12 Surrounding void amount adjustment

The void amount around the network scanned image is adjusted.
In network scanning, since the void amount is very small in stored images, a shadow may appear
around the scanned image due to the subtle difference in the original sizes. This shadow can be
eliminated by adjusting the setting value.
The setting value is applied to all resolutions and color modes.

7489 Surrounding void When the value increases, the blank area around the scanned
amount adjustment image becomes wider, and the data on the image decrease.
The setting value "1" is equal to 1 dot with 600 dpi. (The value
"24" is equal to approx. 1 mm.)
<Procedure>

6 - 73
6.4.13 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals (common for
copy and scan)
The judgment level is adjusted for automatic identification of whether the original set is blank or not.
This adjustment is made when “OMIT BLANK PAGE” is selected on the control panel.
The adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all modes at PPC and scanning.

7618 Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be
adjustment for blank judged as a bank sheet.
original Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
6.4.14 JPEG compression level adjustment

The compression level for saving the scanned data in the JPEG format can be adjusted as follows.

8304-0 High quality The larger the value is, the better the quality becomes, and
8304-1 Standard the larger the size of file becomes.
8304-2 Low quality
<Procedure>

6 - 74
6.4.15 ADF noise reduction (Scanning Function)
The noise reduction level for streaks can be adjusted with the following codes when a scan job is
performed using the ADF while its scan noise reduction function is set to enable (*).
* When [LOW], [MIDDLE] or [HIGH] is selected in the [ADMIN] tab of the [USER FUNCTIONS] menu,
or when "0", "1" or "2" is selected in 08-8300.
Color
Original mode
Item to be adjusted Remarks
Text/ Custom
Text Photo
Photo mode
8413 8414 8415 8412 ADF noise reduction When the value decreases, the
effect of reducing streaks
becomes larger. When the value
increases, the effect of reducing
streaks becomes smaller.
When "0" is set, this function is 6
disabled.
(Default: 100)
Black
Original mode Gray
Item to be adjusted Remarks
Text/ Custom scale
Text Photo
Photo mode
7401 7402 7403 7400 7404 ADF noise reduction When the value decreases, the
effect of reducing streaks
becomes larger. When the value
increases, the effect of reducing
streaks becomes smaller.
When "0" is set, this function is
disabled.
(Default: 100)
Notes:
• Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the
• If too small a value is set, the text may not be printed clearly.
<Procedure>

6 - 75
6.5 Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function)

The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
Original mode
Color Item to be
Text/ Remarks
mode Text * Photo adjusted
Photo
Black 7533 7534 7535 Manual density [TEXT/PHOTO], [PHOTO]: The larger
center value the value is, the darker the image
becomes.
[Text]: The larger the value is, the lighter
the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default:
128)
7542 - 7543 Automatic The larger the value is, the darker the
density mode image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default:
128)
* Since the gradation in this mode is reproduced in a binary image (black and white), this adjustment
should be a simple binary threshold adjustment.
<Procedure>
ready state.
(5) Turn the power OFF.
<Confirmation>
If possible, perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient's
side.

6 - 76
The LED emission level in the fax function can be set. In this setting the size of dots is adjusted.

7594-1 LED emission level 1/4 emission level becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is
reproduced accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127,
7594-3 LED emission level 3/4 Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)
<Procedure>
(3) Key in a sub-code and press the [START] button. 6
ready state.
(6) Take the POWER OFF.
<Confirmation>
Check the LED emission level setting with the actual fax data received, if possible.
Notes:
• Usually, LED emission level 4 / 4 is the most effective in the black mode.

scan and fax)
performed.

Black 7025 The larger the value is, the darker the background density
becomes.
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>

6 - 77
6.6 Scanner
6.6.1 Adjustment carriages-1 positions
(1) Take off the RADF.

 P. 4-133 "4.11.1 MR-3024 (Reversing
Automatic Document Feeder)"
(2) Take off the right top cover.
 P. 4-3 "4.1.7 Right top cover"
(3) Take off the original glass.
 P. 4-11 "4.3.1 Original glass"
(4) Take off the left top cover.
 P. 4-2 "4.1.5 Left top cover"
(5) Move the carriage-1[1] toward the exit side.
Notes:
Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage.
(6) Loosen the 2 fixing screws of the wire. Fig.6-24

Tighten the screws by aligning the sections
[5] and [6] of the carriage-1 with the inside of
the exit side frame [2].
Notes:
Confirm that they are aligned properly
through the windows [3] and [4] of the exit
side frame [2].
Fig.6-25

6 - 78
6.6.2 Position adjustment of CCD lens unit
Count the number of lines and write it down for later reference before removing the CCD lens unit.
When installing the CCD lens unit, the same number of lines needs to be visible.
 P. 4-12 "4.3.4 Lens unit/CCD driving PC board"
6.6.3 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor
(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Hook the belt tension jig[1] to the motor
[1] [3]
bracket[2] and hook section of the flame[3].
[6] [4]
(3) Loosen the screws [4] and [5].
(4) The scan motor [6] is pulled by the belt
tension jig [1]. When it is stopped, tighten the
screws in order of [4] and [5].
6
(5) Remove the belt tension jig[1].
[2]
[5]
Fig.6-26
Fig.6-27

6 - 79
6.7 Writing Section
6.7.1 Image Adjustment in the Writing Section

Refer to the following pages for details.
 P. 6-13 "[A] Primary scanning data writing start position (Printer)"
 P. 6-15 "[C] Secondary scanning data writing start position"
 P. 6-16 "[D] Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing"

6 - 80
6.8.1 Adjusting the clearance of the paper and side guides

If the clearance between the paper and the side guides is too wide, it can be adjusted to between 0 and
1 mm using the following procedure (the clearance between the paper and the guides is 1 to 2 mm
including both front and rear sides).
<Procedure>
(1) Take out the drawer.

(2) Move the side guide[1]. Loosen 2 screws.
Fig.6-28
Fig.6-29
(3) Move the side guide adjustment piece[1] to
the front and tighten the screws (by 0.5 mm).
Fig.6-30

6 - 81
6.8.2 Separation roller pressure force adjustment (PFU/PFP)
Generally paper jams and multiple feeding often occur as the life end of the roller approaches.
However, if they often occur even though its life has not yet reached its replacement timing, or if the life
end comes much earlier than the scheduled replacement timing, the jams and multiple feeding can be
suppressed by adjusting the pressure force of the separation roller.
In this method, however, when the roller life becomes longer, jams and multiple feeding may occur
frequently, and when the jams and multiple feeding are suppressed, the roller life may become shorter.
Therefore, perform this adjustment while checking the status carefully, and if necessary, give a
sufficient explanation to users.
<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.

(2) Remove 1 screw, and then screw it
temporarily into the oblong hole which is
located next to it.
Notes:
Make a mark for the installation position of
the holder [1] in advance.
[1]
Fig.6-31
(3) Move the holder [1].
Remarks:
• Moving in the direction of A: The roller life
will become longer (but multiple feeding
may occur frequently).
• Moving in the direction of B: Multiple
feeding will be suppressed (but the roller
life may become shorter).
Notes:
The recommended moving distance of the
holder [1] is within 1 or 2 scale marks.
[1]
B A
Fig.6-32

6 - 82
6.9 Process Unit Related Section
6.9.1 High-Voltage Transformer Setting

The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charging,
development, transfer and Discharging blade.
The high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.
CH1 1 Main charger bias (Y)

2 Main charger bias (M)
3 Main charger bias (C)
4 Main charger bias (K)
CH2 1 Main charger grid bias (Y)
2 Main charger grid bias (M)
3 Main charger grid bias (C)
4 Main charger grid bias (K) 6
CH3 1 Developer bias (Y)
2 Developer bias (M)
3 Developer bias (C)
4 Developer bias (K)
CH4 1 1st transfer roller bias (Y)
2 1st transfer roller bias (M)
3 1st transfer roller bias (C)
4 1st transfer roller bias (K)
CH5 - 2nd transfer roller bias
Notes:
Never move the variable resistance on the board since the output adjustment has been
performed at the shipment for the high-voltage transformer supplied as a service part. Also do
not perform the setting change when the high-voltage power supply is replaced.

6 - 83
6.10 Developer Unit
6.10.1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor

When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor.
 P. 6-2 "6.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor"
6.10.2 Adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap

For the adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap, perform the same procedure for the Y, M, C and K
developer units.
Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve gap jig
(1) Take out the developer unit. Then discharge

the developer material.
 P. 4-51 "4.6.3 Developer material"
(2) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws[1].
Fig.6-33
(3) Insert the doctor-sleeve gap jig[1] to adjust
the gap.
Insert the gauge "0.60" of the doctor-sleeve
gap jig between the developer sleeve and
the doctor blade to adjust the gap, and
tighten the screws.
Fig.6-34

6 - 84
Notes:
Flip up protection sheet[1] for the doctor
blade from the sleeve before inserting the
gauge. Also, be sure not to damage the
protection sheet[1].
Fig.6-35
(4) Insert the gauge "0.55" of the doctor-sleeve
gap jig[1] between the developer sleeve and
6
the doctor blade to make sure that the gauge
can move smoothly in the front/rear direction
and the gauge "0.65" cannot be inserted into
the gap.
Fig.6-36

6 - 85
6.11.1 Performing Image Quality Control

When the image position aligning sensor (front) or image position aligning sensor (rear)/image quality
sensor is replaced, perform the automatic initialization of the image quality control and adjustment of
color registration control.
 P. 6-4 "6.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control"
 P. 6-5 "6.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control"
6.12 Fuser Unit / Paper Exit Section
6.12.1 Adjustment of the non-contact thermistor Gap

Perform this adjustment when the following parts are replaced or disassembled.
- Fuser roller
- Pressure roller
- Center thermistor(Non-contact thermistor)
- Side thermistor(Non-contact thermistor)
- Front thermistor
- Pressure spring
Adjustment tool to use: Non-contact thermistor/thermostat gap jig (Thin side)

Notes:
• Perform gap adjustment when the fuser unit is at a normal temperature.
• Make sure that the pressure roller is pressed.
• Be careful not to damage the fuser roller and jig.
• Perform non-contact thermistor correction after the adjustment.
(1) Take off the fuser unit.

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Take off the front side cover, rear side cover, and heat roller cover.

6 - 86
(3) Take off the heat roller separation finger
installed in the window in which the side
thermistor[1] can be seen.
 P. 4-111 "4.9.5 Fuser roller separation
finger"
(4) Remove 1 screws and take off the bracket
[2].
Fig.6-37
Fig.6-38
(5) Insert the jig [2] between the side thermistor
[3] and the fuser roller [4] through the window
[1] in which the side thermistor [3] can be
seen. Then confirm that the portion of the jig
coming out of the window falls within the
specified range of the scales.
Notes:
• The jig should be inserted under its own
weight.
Fig.6-39

6 - 87
(6) If the gap is out of the specified value, loosen
1 screw of the side thermistor [1], adjust the
gap and then tighten the screw.
Repeat the confirmation of step 5 until the
portion falls within the specified range.
Fig.6-40
(7) Check the gap between the center thermistor
[1] and the fuser roller in the same manner.
Adjust it if needed.
Fig.6-41
(8) Perform non-contact thermistor correction.
 P. 6-89 "6.12.2 Correction of Performing non-contact thermistor"

6 - 88
6.12.2 Correction of Performing non-contact thermistor
Since the center thermistor and the side thermistor are non-contact thermistors, the temperature
detected or controlled by these thermistors may differ depending on the gap between the fuser roller
and these thermistors. Therefore they must be corrected.
(1) When unpacking

Perform the “Forced performing of non-contact thermistor correction (05-5990)” procedure
before you start printing (or gamma adjustment).
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Forced performing of non-
contact thermistor correction (05-5990)” procedure.
• Fuser unit
• Heater lamp
• Fuser roller
• Pressure roller
• Center thermistor(Non-contact thermistor)
• Side thermistor(Non-contact thermistor) 6
• Front thermistor
• Pressure spring
• EEPROM
(3) Procedure

5990 Forced performing of 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
non-contact thermistor  Adjustment Mode
correction 2. Key in [5990] and press the [START] button.
3. “WAIT” is displayed.
4. When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns
to the initial state of Adjustment Mode.
When an error occurs

Refer to the C4F0 and C4F1.
 P. 8-115 " [C4F0] Center thermistor error correction"
 P. 8-115 " [C4F1] Side thermistor error correction"

6 - 89
6.12.3 Adjustment of the thermostat Gap
Perform this adjustment when the following parts are replaced or disassembled.
- Fuser roller
- Center thermostat
- Side thermostat
Adjustment tool to use: Non-contact thermistor/thermostat gap jig (Thick side)

Notes:
• Perform gap adjustment when the fuser unit is at a normal temperature.
• Make sure that the pressure roller is pressed.
• Be careful not to damage the fuser roller and jig.
(1) Take off the fuser unit.

 P. 4-105 "4.9.1 Fuser unit"
(2) Take off the front side cover, rear side cover, and heat roller cover.
(3) Take off the heat roller separation finger

installed in the window in which the side
thermostat[1] can be seen.
 P. 4-111 "4.9.5 Fuser roller separation
finger"
(4) Remove 1 screws and take off the bracket
[2].
Fig.6-42
Fig.6-43

6 - 90
(5) Insert the jig [2] between the side thermostat
[3] and the fuser roller [4] through the window
[1] in which the side thermostat [3] can be
seen. Then confirm that the portion of the jig
coming out of the window falls within the
specified range of the scales.
Notes:
• The jig should be inserted under its own
weight.
Fig.6-44
(6) If the gap is not at the specified value,
remove 1 screw of the side thermostat and
screw it in the adjustment hole [1]. Then
6
adjust the gap and tighten the screw.
Repeat the confirmation of step 5 until the
portion falls within the specified range.
Fig.6-45
(7) Check the gap between the center
thermostat [1] and the fuser roller as in the
same manner. Adjust it if needed.
Fig.6-46

6 - 91
6 - 92
7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7.1 General Description

The purpose of preventive maintenance (PM) is to maintain the quality level of this equipment by
periodically inspecting and cleaning this equipment and also replacing the parts whose replacement
timing has come according to the maintenance contract. There are PM kits packaged for each unit or a
group of parts with the same replacement number of output pages, allowing you to carry out efficient
parts replacement.
7.2 PM Display

The maintenance timing for the PM parts of the process unit, such as the drum and developer material,
and the PM parts of the units other than the process unit, such as the 2nd transfer roller varies
depending on the conditions of the use, such as the ratio of color/black printing. Therefore, this
equipment shows the appropriate maintenance timing of each part on the control panel LCD.
7
7.2.2 PM Display Conditions
The conditions of the PM display consist of the codes of the setting mode (08) for “the setting value
treated as a threshold of the PM display”, “the counter indicating the current number of prints and
driving time” and “the setting value which determines the display conditions”.
The PM timing is displayed when the counter exceeds the setting value according to the display
condition based on “the setting value which determines the display conditions”.
• Setting value treated as a threshold of the PM display

Notes:
When “0” is entered as the setting value, PM timing is not displayed.
08-6190 : Setting value of PM counter [process unit (K)]

08-6191 : Setting value of PM time counter [process unit (K)]
08-6192 : Setting value of PM counter [process unit (Y)]
08-6193 : Setting value of PM time counter [process unit (Y)]
08-5550 : Setting value of PM counter [process unit (M)]
08-5551 : Setting value of PM time counter [process unit (M)]
08-5552 : Setting value of PM counter [process unit (C)]
08-5553 : Setting value of PM time counter [process unit (C)]
08-5554 : Setting value of PM counter [developer material (K)]
08-5555 : Setting value of PM time counter [developer material (K)]
08-5556 : Setting value of PM counter [developer material (Y)]
08-5557 : Setting value of PM time counter [developer material (Y)]
08-5558 : Setting value of PM counter [developer material (M)]
08-5559 : Setting value of PM time counter [developer material (M)]
08-5560 : Setting value of PM counter [developer material (C)]
08-5561 : Setting value of PM time counter [developer material (C)]
08-5562 : Setting value of PM counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
08-5563 : Setting value of PM time counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
• Counter indicating the current number of prints and driving time

08-6194 : Current value of PM counter [process unit (K)]
08-6195 : Current value of PM time counter [process unit (K)]

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-1
08-6196 : Current value of PM counter [process unit (Y)]
08-6197 : Current value of PM time counter [process unit (Y)]
08-5564 : Current value of PM counter [process unit (M)]
08-5565 : Current value of PM time counter [process unit (M)]
08-5566 : Current value of PM counter [process unit (C)]
08-5567 : Current value of PM time counter [process unit (C)]
08-5568 : Current value of PM counter [developer material (K)]
08-5569 : Current value of PM time counter [developer material (K)]
08-5570 : Current value of PM counter [developer material (Y)]
08-5571 : Current value of PM time counter [developer material (Y)]
08-5572 : Current value of PM counter [developer material (M)]
08-5573 : Current value of PM time counter [developer material (M)]
08-5574 : Current value of PM counter [developer material (C)]
08-5575 : Current value of PM time counter [developer material (C)]
08-5576 : Current value of PM counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
08-5577 : Current value of PM time counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
• Setting value which determines the display conditions

08-6198 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (K)]
08-5578 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (Y)]
08-5579 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (M)]
08-5580 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (C)]
08-5581 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (K)]
08-5582 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (Y)]
08-5583 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (M)]
08-5584 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (C)]
08-5585 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [parts other than the PM parts of the
process unit]

7-2
7.2.3 PM Display Contents
When the counter value exceeds the setting value, the equipment notifies you of when the
maintenance time has come by displaying the message “Time for periodic maintenance ****” on the
control panel LCD. “****” in the message is a 4-digit hexadecimal number code. This number is
allocated in the following manner, therefore the parts needing maintenance can be identified.
PM parts of the process unit (K) : 0008

PM parts of the process unit (Y) : 0001
PM parts of the process unit (M) : 0002
PM parts of the process unit (C) : 0004
Developer material (K) : 0080
Developer material (Y) : 0010
Developer material (M) : 0020
Developer material (C) : 0040
Parts other than the PM parts of the process unit : 0100
If multiple parts have reached the maintenance time, the sum of the corresponding code values listed
above is displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
For example, if the PM parts of the process units (K) and (C) and the developer materials (K) and (C)
reach the maintenance time, the 4-digit hexadecimal number code will be “00CC” in hexadecimal 7
numbers: 0008+0004+0080+0040=00CC.
4th digit 3rd digit 2nd digit 1st digit

None Part (2nd transfer roller) Developer material Photoconductive drum
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal
Hexadecimal
number Explanation number Explanation Explanation
number code
code code
Always “0” 0 No 0 No 0 No
maintenanc maintenanc maintenanc
e required e required e required
1 Maintenanc 1 Y 1 Y
e required
2 M 2 M
3 M+Y 3 M+Y
4 C 4 C
5 Y+C 5 Y+C
6 C+M 6 C+M
7 Y+M+C 7 Y+M+C
8 K 8 K
9 K+Y 9 K+Y
A K+M A K+M
B K+M+Y B K+M+Y
C K+C C K+C
D K+Y+C D K+Y+C
E K+C+M E K+C+M
F K+Y+M+C F K+Y+M+C

7-3
7.2.4 Counter Clearing
The counter indicating “current number of prints and driving time” used for the PM display function is
reset by entering “0” in it or clearing it in the PM support mode.
Notes:
Even if “0” is entered in the PM management setting value of the setting mode (08), the
corresponding counter for the PM display is not reset. Be sure to clear the counter in the PM
support mode when the maintenance is finished.
The reset condition of each counter is as follows:
• 08-6194: Current value of PM counter [process unit (K)]

• 08-6195: Current value of PM time counter [process unit (K)]
When the current value of “CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (K)” on the main screen or “DRUM (K)” on
the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
In addition, when the cleaner unit is recognized as a new one by the old/new detection switch of
"CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (K)", the counter is also reset.
• 08-6196: Current value of PM counter [process unit (Y)]

• 08-6197: Current value of PM time counter [process unit (Y)]
When the current value of “CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (Y)” on the main screen or “DRUM (Y)” on
"CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (Y)", the counter is also reset.
• 08-5564: Current value of PM counter [process unit (M)]

• 08-5565: Current value of PM time counter [process unit (M)]
When the current value of “CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (M)” on the main screen or “DRUM (M)”
on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
"CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (M)", the counter is also reset.
• 08-5566: Current value of PM counter [process unit (C)]

• 08-5567: Current value of PM time counter [process unit (C)]
When the current value of “CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (C)” on the main screen or “DRUM (C)” on
"CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (C)", the counter is also reset.
• 08-5568: Current value of PM counter [developer material (K)]

• 08-5569: Current value of PM time counter [developer material (K)]
When the current value of “DEVELOPMENT UNIT” on the main screen or “BLACK DEVELOPER
(K)” on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
In addition, when the developer unit is recognized as a new one by the K developer unit old/new
detection switch, or the auto-toner sensor adjustment is performed, the counter is also reset.
• 08-5570: Current value of PM counter [developer material (Y)]

• 08-5571: Current value of PM time counter [developer material (Y)]
When the current value of “DEVELOPMENT UNIT” on the main screen or “YELLOW DEVELOPER
(Y)” on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
In addition, when the developer unit is recognized as a new one by the Y developer unit old/new
• 08-5572: Current value of PM counter [developer material (M)]

• 08-5573: Current value of PM time counter [developer material (M)]
When the current value of “DEVELOPMENT UNIT (M)” on the main screen or “MAGENTA
DEVELOPER (M)” on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

7-4
In addition, when the developer unit is recognized as a new one by the M developer unit old/new
• 08-5574: Current value of PM counter [developer material (C)]

• 08-5575: Current value of PM time counter [developer material (C)]
When the current value of “DEVELOPMENT UNIT” on the main screen or “CYAN DEVELOPER (C)”
on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
In addition, when the developer unit is recognized as a new one by the C developer unit old/new
• 08-5576: Current value of PM counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
• 08-5577: Current value of PM time counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
When the current value of “2nd TRANSFER” on the main screen or “2nd TRANSFER ROLLER” on
the sub screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
7.3 General Descriptions for PM Procedure

(1) Preparation
• Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
• Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
• See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S) 7
or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S : [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON  [103]  [START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST S/N : CYL000001 FIN S/N : FIN S/N-xxxxxxxx TOTAL : 2146
2012-04-09 13:16 TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx DF TOTAL : 1213
UNIT OUTPUT PAGES PM OUTPUT PAGES DRIVE COUNTS PM DRIVE COUNTS

DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS
DRUM(K) 1957 1957 3940 170000

DRUM BLADE(K) 1957 1957 10870 170000
GRID(K) 1957 1957 10870 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE(K) 1957 1957 10870 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD(K) 1957 1957 10870 170000
DRUM(Y) 1077 1077 3766 170000
DRUM BLADE(Y) 1077 1077 3766 170000
GRID(Y) 1077 1077 3766 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE(Y) 1077 1077 3766 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD(Y) 1077 1077 3766 170000
DRUM(M) 1077 1077 9547 170000
DRUM BLADE(M) 1077 1077 9547 170000
GRID(M) 1077 1077 9547 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE(M) 1077 1077 9547 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD(M) 1077 1077 9547 170000
DRUM(C) 1077 1077 9547 170000
DRUM BLADE(C) 1077 1077 9547 170000
GRID(C) 1077 1077 9547 170000
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE(C) 1077 1077 9547 170000
CHARGER CLEANING PAD(C) 1077 1077 9547 170000
Fig. 7-1
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.

7-5
7.4 PM Support Mode

This equipment has a PM support mode which enables you to confirm the use status of each part (the
number of output pages or developed pages, and drive counts) requiring periodic replacement and also
the replacement record, as well as resetting counter values efficiently. This record can be printed out in
the list print mode.
7.4.2 Operational flow
PM support mode activated

[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
Authentication screen
Main unit chosen

[SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen
Main unit list displayed [RETURN]

pressed
Main unit chosen

[CANCEL] pressed [RESET] Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed
Clear screen
Clear finished
[CANCEL]
Counter clear pressed
confirmation displayed
Sub unit chosen
[RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE]
pressed
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 7-2
* When the authentication screen appears, press [OK]. (Enter the password, if one has been set.)
* To finish the PM support mode, shut down the equipment by pressing and holding [ON/OFF] on the
main screen for a few seconds.
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.

7-6
7.4.3 Operational screen
The description of the display (including the function of each button) on the LCD screen is shown
below.
1. Main screen
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Fig. 7-3
1 Displaying of the number of print / develop pages (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.) and
previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to
move to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed
2 Moving to the next/previous page
3 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the unit parts
4 Displaying of the present drive counts
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded
its PM standard number.
5 Displaying of the present number of print / develop pages
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), “_” is displayed and “CHECK
SUBUNIT” is displayed at the top
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of print / develop pages has
exceeded its PM standard number.
6 Displaying of the standard number of print / develop pages to replace the unit parts
7 Moving to the sub screen of the selected unit
8 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit counters 4 and 6 , including all sub
unit (parts) counters belonging to that unit When the unit is not selected, all counters are
cleared.
9 Displaying of the main unit name

7-7
Notes:
• “—” is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document feeder
(RADF) and feed unit.
• “—” is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the paper
source is different depending on the structure of options.
2. Sub screen
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Fig. 7-4
1 Displaying of the number of print / develop pages and drive counts and previous
replacement date for a chosen sub unit
2 Moving to the next/previous page
3 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the sub unit (parts)
4 Displaying of the present drive counts
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded
its PM standard number.
5 Displaying of the standard number of print / develop pages to replace the sub unit (parts)
6 Displaying of the present number of print / develop pages
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of print / develop pages has
exceeded its PM standard number.
7 Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name
8 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters
9 Back to the main screen

7-8
3. Clear screen
2 1
Fig. 7-5
1 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of print / develop pages” and
Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
2 When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to
the main or sub screen.

7-9
7.4.4 Access tree
The relation between the main unit and the sub unit is shown below.
Notes:
Some parts in this manual are described with different names on the LCD screen. In this case,
the name in this manual is indicated in square brackets [ ].
Main screen Sub-screen

CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (K) DRUM (K)
[Process unit (K)] DRUM BLADE (K) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (K) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (K) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (K) [Main charger cleaner]
LED GAP SPACER (K)
CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (Y) DRUM (Y)
[Process unit (Y)] DRUM BLADE (Y) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (Y) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (Y) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (Y) [Main charger cleaner]
LED GAP SPACER (Y)
CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (M) DRUM (M)
[Process unit (M)] DRUM BLADE (M) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (M) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (M) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (M) [Main charger cleaner]
LED GAP SPACER (M)
CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (C) DRUM (C)
[Process unit (C)] DRUM BLADE (C) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (C) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (C) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (C) [Main charger cleaner]
LED GAP SPACER (C)
OZONE FILTER OZONE FILTER
[Ozone filter-1] [Ozone filter-1]
DEVELOPMENT UNIT BLACK DEVELOPER [Developer material K]
YELLOW DEVELOPER [Developer material Y]
MAGENTA DEVELOPER [Developer material M]
CYAN DEVELOPER [Developer material C]
2nd TRANSFER 2nd TRANSFER ROLLER
1st CST. FEED ROLLER
[1st drawer] SEP PAD (1st CST.) [Separation pad]
2nd CST. PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)
[2nd drawer] FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)
SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.) [Separation roller]
SFB FEED ROLLER (SFB)
[Bypass unit] SEP PAD (SFB) [Separation pad]
RADF PICK UP ROLLER (RADF)
FEED ROLLER (RADF)
SEP ROLLER (RADF) [Separation roller]
LCF PICK UP ROLLER (LCF)
FEED ROLLER (LCF)
SEP ROLLER (LCF) [Separation roller]
3rd CST. PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)
[PFP upper drawer] FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)
SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.) [Separation roller]

7 - 10
Main screen Sub-screen
4th CST. PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)
[PFP lower drawer] FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)
SEP ROLLER (4th CST.) [Separation roller]
Notes:
When the counter value of any of the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller in each unit is
reset, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. When the [RESET]
button is pressed after selecting the feed unit in the Main Screen, the value of the feeding retry
counter is also reset simultaneously.
The feeding retry counter:

• 1st drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-6230)
• 2nd drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-6231)
• PFP upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-6232)
• PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-6233)
• Bypass unit Reset the feeding retry counter (08-6234)
• LCF Reset the feeding retry counter (08-6235)

7 - 11
7.5 Work flow of parts replacement
The life span of the parts changes depending on their general use, such as the ratio of the color/black
printing or the adjustment for keeping the printing quality. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not only
the number of printed/developed pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for parts
replacement. Even if the number of print / develop pages has reached the level of replacement, for
instance, the part may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On
the other hand, the part may need replacement even if the number of print / develop pages has not
reached the level of replacement with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life
span of some parts such as feed roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than
the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of print
/ develop pages.
Example 1:
When the number of print / develop pages has reached the specified level
• The parts in RADF • The parts in the drum/cleaner unit

• The parts in feeding system • The parts in the 2nd transfer unit
Replace the part. Check the drive counts at PM

support mode. Yes
Replace the part.
Does it exceed the specified
drive counts?
No
The part is still usable.
Replace the part after the drive

counts has reached the specified
count.
Fig. 7-6
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of print / develop pages has reached the
specified level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.
Yes
Does it exceed the specified drive count? Replace the part.
No
Check the part and equipment according to the “TROUBLESHOOTING”.
Fig. 7-7

7 - 12
7.6 Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Symbols/value used in the checklist
Item Description
Cleaning A: Clean with alcohol
B: Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner
Lubrication/ L: Launa 40
Coating SI: Silicon oil
W1: White grease (Molykote EM-30L)
W2: White grease (Molykote HP-300)
AV: Alvania No.2
FL: Floil (GE-334C)
Replacement Value: Replacement cycle
R1: Replacement
R3: Replace if deformed or damaged
Operation check O: After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem.
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]

Notes:
7
• Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Lubricate the replacement parts
according to the replacement cycle.
Model Black Full color

20ppm, LL20ppm every 56,000 sheets every 56,000 sheets
• The value in the “Replacement” field of the table below indicates the replacement number of
output pages in either the black or the full color mode. If they differ according to the model, they
are indicated in the order of the 20ppm, LL20ppm, 25ppm, LL25ppm.
• The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed from
each paper source.
• Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
• Parts list <P-I> represents the page item in “e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C Service
Parts List”.

7 - 13
7.6.1 Feed unit
C3
C4
C1
C2
C5
Fig. 7-8
20ppm/LL20ppm
Preventive maintenance
56
Replacement Operation
Items to check P-I
Lubricatio check
Cleaning (x 1,000
n/Coating (x 1,000 drive
sheets)
counts)
C1 Drawer feed roller 80 - 43-12
C2 Drawer separation pad 80 - 43-7
C3 Registration roller 22-11
(rubber)
C4 Paper guide 13-9
C5 Drawer separation pad 43-7
holder
25ppm/LL25ppm
70
Items to check P-I
Lubricatio check
Cleaning (x 1,000
sheets)
counts)
C1 Drawer feed roller 80 - 43-12
C2 Drawer separation pad 80 - 43-7
C3 Registration roller 22-11
(rubber)
C4 Paper guide 13-9
C5 Drawer separation pad 43-7
holder

7 - 14
7.6.2 Bypass feed unit
E1
E3
E2
E4
Fig. 7-9
20ppm/LL20ppm
7
56
Items to check P-I
Lubricatio check
Cleaning (x 1,000
sheets)
counts)
E1 Bypass feed roller 80 - 21-19
E2 Bypass separation pad 80 - 21-7
E3 Bypass tray 20-13
E4 Bypass separation pad 21-9
holder
25ppm/LL25ppm
70
Items to check P-I
Lubricatio check
Cleaning (x 1,000
sheets)
counts)
E1 Bypass feed roller 80 - 21-19
E2 Bypass separation pad 80 - 21-7
E3 Bypass tray 20-13
E4 Bypass separation pad 21-9
holder

7 - 15
7.6.3 Main charger
F4
F3
F5
F6
F1
F2
Fig. 7-10
20ppm/LL20ppm
56 (225*)
Items to check P-I
Lubricatio (x 1,000 check
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
F1 Main charger case B 35-12
F2 Needle electrode R1 R1 O 35-8
F3 Contact point of B 35-2,
terminals 35-4
F4 Main charger grid R1 R1 35-6
F5 Main charger cleaner R1 R1 35-7
F6 Main charger duct seal B O 35-15
*: Drive counts
25ppm/LL25ppm
70 (225*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
F1 Main charger case B 35-12
F2 Needle electrode R1 R1 O 35-8
F3 Contact point of B 35-2,
terminals 35-4
F4 Main charger grid R1 R1 35-6

7 - 16
70 (225*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
F5 Main charger cleaner R1 R1 35-7
F6 Main charger duct seal B O 35-15
*: Drive counts
* F1: Main charger case
Clean the main charger case with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe
them with a dry cloth.

7 - 17
7.6.4 Drum unit, Cleaner related section
G1 G5
G4
G2
G3
G6
Fig. 7-11
20ppm/LL20ppm
56 (225*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
G1 Whole cleaner unit B -
G2 Drum R1 R1 34-28
G3 Drum cleaning blade R1 R1 34-35
G4 Side seal B R3 R3 34-6 /
34-7
G5 Recovery blade B 34-9
G6 LED gap spacer B R1 R1 34-10
G7 Drum TBU drive unit -
G8 Ozone filter 7-10
*: Drive counts
25ppm/LL25ppm
70 (225*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
G1 Whole cleaner unit B -
G2 Drum R1 R1 34-28
G3 Drum cleaning blade R1 R1 34-35
G4 Side seal B R3 R3 34-6 /
34-7
G5 Recovery blade B 34-9
G6 LED gap spacer B R1 R1 34-10
G7 Drum TBU drive unit -

7 - 18
70 (225*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
G8 Ozone filter 7-10
*: Drive counts
* G2: Drum
• Handling precautions
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the surface of the drum, its properties may degrade, affecting
the quality of the copy image. So, wear gloves to avoid touching the drum surface with your
bare hands. Be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and removing it so as not to
damage its surface.
• Do not use “patting powder” (lubricant)

Since “patting powder” may affect the initial image if it adheres to the OPC surface, do not
apply it. The friction between the drum and cleaning blade is sufficiently small without it and
no problem would occur even if it is not applied.
7
• Clearing the drum counter
When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum counter for the new drum (K, Y,
M, C) must be cleared to 0 (zero). This clearing can be performed in PM support mode.
- Drum counter
Drum (K): 08-6250-0, 3, 6, 7
Drum (Y): 08-6252-0, 3, 6, 7
Drum (M): 08-6254-0, 3, 6, 7
Drum (C): 08-6256-0, 3, 6, 7
• Storage location of photoconductive drums

The drum should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C
to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high
humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light
such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image
density immediately after being installed in the equipment.
• Cleaning the drum

At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated
cleaning cotton. Note that there is no need to clean the surface of the new drum unless there
is a problem. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum
surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch
before starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will
have an adverse effect on the drum.
• Scratches on drum surface

If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy
image will be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so
replacement with a new drum will be necessary.
• Collecting used drums

Regarding the recovery and disposal of used drums, we recommend following the relevant
local regulations or rules.

7 - 19
* G3: Drum cleaning blade
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition
of its edge. Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors
such as the adherence of paper dust.
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
• Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are copied due to the damaged
blade regardless of the number of output pages which have been made
* G4: Side seal

When replacing the drum cleaning unit, check that there is no gap between the blade and side
seal on both ends. If there is, or when the side seals put pressure to the cleaning blade, reattach
the felts on the position shown in the figure (by slightly pushing them to the direction of the
arrows).
Fig. 7-12
* G5: Recovery blade

Clean the surface of the recovery blade with a soft pad or cloth, if dirt cannot be removed with a
vacuum cleaner. If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the
number of output pages.
Notes:
Never use water or alcohol for cleaning the transfer belt recovery blade.

7 - 20
7.6.5 Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C)
H9 H2
H5
H6
H3
H8
H1 7
H7 H4
H5
Fig. 7-13
20ppm/LL20ppm
56 (145*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
H1 Whole developer unit B -
H2 Paper feeding/ W1 -
developer drive unit
H3 Developer material R1 R1 -
H4 Front seal (unified with B R3 R3 33-34
the doctor blade)
H5 Side seal (front, rear) B R3 R3 33-6,
33-7
H6 Oil seal (Rear side) R3 R3 33-25
H7 Oil seal (Front side) R3 R3 33-25
H8 Auto-toner sensor B 33-4
H9 Developer unit upper B 32-9
cover
*: Drive counts

7 - 21
25ppm/LL25ppm
70 (145*)
Items to check P-I
Cleaning
sheets)
counts)
H1 Whole developer unit B -
H2 Paper feeding/ W1 -
H3 Developer material R1 R1 -
H4 Front seal (unified with B R3 R3 33-34
the doctor blade)
H5 Side seal (front, rear) B R3 R3 33-6,
33-7
H6 Oil seal (Rear side) R3 R3 33-25
H7 Oil seal (Front side) R3 R3 33-25
H8 Auto-toner sensor B 33-4
H9 Developer unit upper B 32-9
cover
*: Drive counts

7 - 22
* H1: Developer unit, H4: Front seal (unified with the doctor blade)
1. Cleaning
Clean the doctor blade so as to prevent developer material from adhering to it when the
drum is being replaced.
Space the front seal from the developer sleeve and then insert a doctor blade cleaning
jig into the doctor sleeve gap. Then clean the doctor blade by running the jig for 3 times
to and fro along with the edge of the blade.
Fig. 7-14
2. Removal of foreign matter in the developer unit

(1) Take off the developer unit.
(2) Space the front seal.
(3) Insert the cleaning jig all the way in the developer unit at a position approx. 30 mm
away from the white streak.
30mm
Fig. 7-15

7 - 23
(4) Slide the cleaning jig to where the white streak appears.
(5) Pull out the cleaning jig while manually turning the gear to rotate the developer
sleeve.
Knob
Fig. 7-16
Tip:
If foreign matter is not removed by the above procedure, take off the developer unit,
discharge the developer material on to a sheet of clean paper and then remove any
foreign matter found. If you cannot find any foreign matter, exchange the developer
material.
3. Removal of foreign matter on the developer sleeve

(1) Apply a sheet of paper to the developer sleeve.
(2) Scrape off foreign matter and developer material on the developer sleeve using the
jig.
Foreign matter
Fig. 7-17
* H3: Developer material

After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and then
image quality control initialization.
 P. 6-2 "6.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor"

7 - 24
* H8: Auto-toner sensor
Clean the surface of the auto-toner sensor with a cotton swab or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol
filled in.

7 - 25
7.6.6 2nd transfer roller unit
L3
L2
L1
Fig. 7-18
20ppm/LL20ppm
56 112
Replacement Replacement Operat
Items to check Lubric (x Lubric (x ion P-I
Clean ation/ (x 1,000 Clean ation/ (x 1,000 check
ing Coatin 1,000 drive ing Coatin 1,000 drive
g sheets g sheets
counts counts
) )
) )
L1 2nd transfer R1 R1 14-
roller 28
L2 Paper clinging 14-
detection 19
sensor
L3 2nd transfer 14-
roller paper 22
guide
25ppm/LL25ppm
70 140
Replacement Replacement Operat
Lubri
Items to check (x Lubric (x ion P-I
cation (x
Clean 1,000 Clean ation/ (x 1,000 check
/ 1,000
ing ing Coatin 1,000
Coati sheets drive sheets
drive
counts g counts
ng ) )
) )
L1 2nd transfer R1 R1 14-
roller 28
L2 Paper clinging 14-
detection 19
sensor
L3 2nd transfer 14-
roller paper 22
guide
* L2: Paper clinging detection sensor

7 - 26
Open the 2nd transfer unit and clean the paper clinging detection sensor with a cotton swab.
Notes:
Be sure to clean the entire surface of the sensor.
* L3: 2nd transfer roller paper guide

If toner adheres to the ribs of the 2nd transfer roller paper guide, clean it with a soft pad, cloth or
electric vacuum cleaner.

7 - 27
7.6.7 RADF (MR-3024)
5 8 4 3 2 1
6 7 9 10
Fig. 7-19
Replacement
Parts
Lubrication/ (x 1,000 Operation
Items to check Cleaning (x 1,000 list
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I>
counts)
1 Pickup roller A 120 - 5-27
2 Separation roller A 120 - 4-10
3 Feed roller A 120 - 5-27
4 Registration roller A 4-30
5 Intermediate transfer A 3-13
roller
6 Front read roller A 3-14
7 Rear read roller A 3-1
8 Reverse registration A 3-10
roller
9 Exit/reverse roller A 4-25
10 Platen sheet B or A 1-25

7 - 28
7.6.8 PFP (KD-1032)
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[4]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 7-20
Replacement
Parts
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I>
counts)
1 Pickup roller A 80 5-26
(upper/lower) or every
2.5 years,
whichever
comes first
2 Feed roller A 80 5-26
2.5 years,
whichever
comes first
3 Separation roller A 80 5-30
2.5 years,
whichever
comes first
4 Transport roller A R3 2-35
(tooth face) 2-40
5 Paper guide O 4-1
4-11

7 - 29
7.6.9 LCF (KD-1031)
4 1 2
Fig. 7-21
Replacement
Parts
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I>
counts)
4 Drive gear -
(tooth face)

7 - 30
7.6.10 PFU (MY-1040)
1 2 3 4 5 5
4
4
Fig. 7-22
Replacement
Parts
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I> 7
counts)
4 Guide A 4-3
5 Transport roller A 4-23
6 Paper feed roller A 4-1
4-11
7.6.11 JSP (MJ-5004)
2 5
1
2
Fig. 7-23

7 - 31
Replacement
Parts
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I>
counts)
1 Idling roller O or A 1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-30
2 Other rollers O orA 1-40
1-42
1-14
3 Paper guide O orA 1-5
1-7
4 JSP upper stuck sensor O O 1-11
5 SP lower stuck sensor O O 1-11
6 JSP feed sensor O O 1-16
* 1: Idling roller
Apply each one-rice-grain amount of the white grease (Molykote EM-30L) at the point A (2
points) in Figure 7-36
Fig. 7-24

7 - 32
7.7 Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts
Precautions for storing supplies and replacement parts are shown below.
1. Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2. Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3. Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade

This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4. Transfer belt / Transfer roller / Fuser roller / Pressure roller

Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5. Paper 7
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.

7 - 33
7.8 PM KIT
A PM kit is a package for each unit of replacement parts requiring PM.
KIT name Component P-I Qty.

DEV-KIT-FC30K Drum cleaning blade 5-27 1
Main charger grid 35-6 1
Needle electrode 35-8 1
Main charger cleaner 35-13 2
Developer material 103-2 1
LED spacer (rear side) 34-11 1
DEV-KIT-FC30CLR Drum cleaning blade 34-35 3
Main charger grid 35-6 3
Needle electrode 35-8 3
Main charger cleaner 35-13 6
Developer material (Y) 103-2 1
Developer material (M) 103-2 1
Developer material (C) 103-2 1
LED spacer (front side) 34-11 3
ROL-KIT-FC30 (PFU/PFP) Pick up roller 5-26 (PFU) 1
5-26 (PFP)
Feed roller 5-26 (PFU) 1
5-26 (PFP)
Separation roller 5-30 (PFU) 1
5-30 (PFP)
ROL-KIT-1026 (LCF) Pick up roller 4-4 1
Feed roller 4-3 1
Separation roller 5-8 1
DF-KIT-3018 (RADF) Pick up roller 5-27 1
Feed roller 5-27 1
Separation roller 4-10 1

7 - 34
7.9 Maintenance Part List
The parts used for the maintenance of this equipment are as follows.
No. Item Purpose P-I

1 Cleaning brush Cleaning inside of the equipment 101-2
2 Doctor blade cleaning jig Cleaning the doctor blade 101-3
3 Wire pulley holder jig Fixing the wire at the assembly of the carriage 101-4
wire
4 Developer material nozzle Pouring the developer material (attached to the 101-5
developer bottle)
5 Doctor-sleeve gap jig Measuring the gap between the developer sleeve 101-6
and the doctor blade (gauge 0.50, 0.55, 0.60)
6 Belt tension jig Adjusting the belt tension at the installation of the 101-7
scan motor
7 Drum bag Storing the drum 101-9
8 Download jig Updating the FAX firmware 102-1
(K-PWA-DLM-320F)
9 Download jig *1 Updating the FAX firmware - 7
(K-PWA-DLM-320)
10 ROM Installing the DLM board 102-10
11 Download jig Updating the system firmware 102-2
(PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F)
12 Download jig Updating the system firmware -
(PWA-DWNLD-JIG1F)
13 Download jig *2 Updating the system firmware -
(PWA-DWNLD-JIG1)
14 Download jig *2 Updating the system firmware -
(PWA-DWNLD-JIG2)
15 ROM writer adapter (For 1881) Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F 102-4
16 ROM writer adapter (For 1931) Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F 102-5
17 Patting pawder For transfer belt 101-25
18 Door-switch jig Lock of door switch 101-1
19 Color test chart For test print (A4/LT) 101-10
20 Color test chart For test print (A3/LD) 101-11
21 Thermistor gap jig Measuring the gap between the thermistor and 101-8
the pressure roller
22 Thermostat gap jig Measuring the gap between the thermostat and 101-8
the fuser roller and measuring the gap between
the thermostat and the pressure roller
23 Relay PC board for download Updating the FAX firmware (Relay PC board for 102-7
jig K-PWA-DLM-320)
(PWB-DWNLD-RELAY-34F)
24 Relay PC board for download Updating the system firmware (Relay PC board 102-8
jig for PWA-DWNLD-JIG1 and PWA-DWNLD-JIG2)
(PWB-DWNLD-RELAY-50F)
25 Harness holding jig For installing/removing the LED unit. 101-12
26 Doctor-sleeve gap jig Measuring the gap between the developer sleeve 101-27
and the doctor blade (gauge 0.60, 0.65, 0.70)
*1: Relay PC board for download jig (PWB-DWNLD-RELAY-34F) is necessary for update.
*2: Relay PC board for download jig (PWB-DWNLD-RELAY-50F) is necessary for update.

7 - 35
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8,9 10 11,12,13,14 15,16
17 18 19 20
21,22 23 24 25
26
Fig. 7-25

7 - 36
7.10 Grease List
The parts used for the maintenance of this equipment are as follows.
Parts list
Symbol Grease name Volume Container
<P-I>*
L Launa 40 100 cc Oiler 101-21
W1 White grease (Molykote EM-30L) 100 g Bottle 101-24
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) 10 g Bottle 101-22
AV Alvania No.2 100 g Tube 101-23
FL FLOIL (GE-334C) 20 g Bottle 101-26
SI Silicon oil 100 cc Bottle -
* : Part list <P-I> represents the page item in “e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C Service Parts
List”.

7 - 37
7.11 Machine Refreshing Checklist
Symbols/value used in the checklist
Item Description
Cleaning A: Clean with alcohol
B: Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner
Lubrication/ W1: White grease (Molykote EM-30L)
Coating W2: White grease (Molykote HP-300)
Replacement Value: Replacement cycle
R1: Replacement
R2: For preventive maintenance, check if the parts are damaged and replace
them as required. If the parts are not replaced at the machine refreshing
interval, inspect them at the subsequent PM.
R3: Replace if deformed or damaged. If the parts are not replaced at the
machine refreshing interval, inspect them at the subsequent PM.
R4: Lubrication recommended: If the parts are not lubricated at the machine
refreshing interval, inspect their lubrication status at the subsequent PM.
Operation check O: After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem.
[Machine Refreshing Checklist]

Notes:
• When performing machine refreshment, check the items in the preventive maintenance checklist
in addition to the items in the machine refreshing checklist.
• Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Lubricate the replacement parts
according to the replacement cycle.
Model Black Full color

• The value in the “Replacement” field of the table below indicates the replacement number of
output pages in either the black or the full color mode. If they differ according to the model, they
are indicated in the order of the 20ppm, LL20ppm, 25ppm, LL25ppm.
• The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed from
each paper source.
• Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
• Parts list <P-I> represents the page item in “e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C Service
Parts List”.
Replacement
20ppm/
20ppm/
LL20ppm:
LL20ppm:
675,000
168,000
Lubricatio drive
Cleaning sheets Operation
Items to check n/Coating counts P-I
check
25ppm/
25ppm/
LL25ppm:
LL25ppm:
675,000
210,000
drive
sheets
counts
A1 Original glass B or A 25-2
A2 ADF original glass B 25-3
A3 Mirror-1 B -
A4 Mirror-2 B -
A5 Mirror-3 B -

7 - 38
Replacement
20ppm/
20ppm/
LL20ppm:
LL20ppm:
675,000
168,000
Lubricatio drive
check
25ppm/
25ppm/
LL25ppm:
LL25ppm:
675,000
210,000
drive
sheets
counts
A6 Reflector B -
A7 Lens B 10-9
A9 Automatic original B O 10-12
detection sensor
A10 Slide sheet (front and B R3 R3 -
rear)
B1 LED printer head B or A 31-21
B2 Discharge LED B or A 31-15
C3 Registration roller A R3 R3 22-11
7
(rubber)
C4 Paper guide B 13-9
C5 Drawer separation pad W2 R4 R4 43-7
holder
D1 Transport roller A R3 R3 41-10
D2 Paper guide B 41-20
E3 Bypass tray B 20-13
E4 Bypass separation pad W1 R4 21-9
holder
G7 Drum TBU drive unit W1 R4 R4 -
G8 Ozone filter R1 R1 7-10
H2 Paper feeding/ W1 R4 R4 -
J1 Transfer belt A R2 R2 26-14
J2 1st transfer roller R2 R2 27-9
J3 Cleaning unit facing A R1 R1 26-10
roller
J4 TBU drive roller B R2 R2 26-27
J5 Belt clinging roller A R3 R3 27-2
before 2nd transfer
J6 Lift roller A R3 R3 26-8
J7 Winding roller (K) A R3 R3 27-4
J8 Transfer belt cleaning R1 R1 30-19
blade
J9 Recovery blade B R1 R1 30-22
J10 Blade seal R1 R1 30-20,
30-21
J11 Cleaning unit facing R1 R1 26-11
roller bushing
J12 Belt clinging roller R2 R2 27-1
bushing before 2nd
transfer

7 - 39
Replacement
20ppm/
20ppm/
LL20ppm:
LL20ppm:
675,000
168,000
Lubricatio drive
check
25ppm/
25ppm/
LL25ppm:
LL25ppm:
675,000
210,000
drive
sheets
counts
K1 Image position aligning A 14-6
sensor (Rear)/Image
quality sensor
K2 Actuator B 14-9
K3 Image position aligning A 14-6
sensor (Front)
L2 Paper clinging B 14-19
detection sensor
L3 2nd transfer roller B 14-22
paper guide
M1 Heat roller R1 R1 38-15
M2 Pressure roller R1 R1 38-20
M3 Fuser roller separation R1 R1 38-26
finger
M4 Pressure roller R1 R1 39-15
separation finger
M5 Fuser unit entrance A R3 R3 37-11
guide
M6 Thermistor A R3 R3 38-4
M7 Drive gear (tooth face W1 R4 R4 38-17
and shaft)
M8 Heat roller gear A R3 R3 40-10
M9 Exit sensor actuator A R3 R3 39-24
N1 Exit roller (rubber) R3 R3 40-17
N2 Idling roller (plastic: W1 R4 R4 40-5
lower side of the exit
roller)
N3 Paper exit unit lib B -
(guide rib)
N4 Exit unit drive section W1 R4 R4 -

7 - 40
Scanner
A2 A1 A6 A8 A10 A9 A7
A5 A4 A3
Fig. 7-26
* A1: Original glass, A2: ADF original glass

Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original. Make sure that there is no dust on the
mirrors-1, -2, -3 and lens after cleaning. Then install the original glass and ADF original glass.
Notes: 7
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
When cleaning the glass with alcohol, do so only for the stained areas because fog may appear.
LED unit
B2
B1
Fig. 7-27

7 - 41
Automatic duplexing unit
D2
D1
D1
Fig. 7-28
Drum unit, Cleaner related section

* G7: Drum TBU drive unit
Refer to chapter  P. 4-98 "4.7.13 Drum TBU drive unit"
* G8: Ozone filter
Refer to chapter  P. 4-80 "4.6.29 Ozone filter"

7 - 42
Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit
J9 J3 J11 J2(Y) J2(M) J2(C) J2(K) J4
J10 J8 J6 J1 J7 J12 J5
Fig. 7-29
* J1: Transfer belt

- Do not touch the front and rear surfaces of the transfer belt surface with bare
hands. 7
- Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to both surfaces of the transfer
belt.
- Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.
- When replacing the belt and transfer belt cleaning unit, apply patting powder
sufficiently and evenly. Otherwise, it may reduce the cleaning efficiency.
- When replacing the transfer belt, clean J3, J5, J6, and J7 with a solvent such as
alcohol, and then clean J4 with a dry cloth, and then attach the transfer belt.
Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol, and then wipe it with a
dry cloth until no trace remains. Take care not to have the transfer belt surface being
damaged or dented. Replace the transfer belt with a new one regardless of the number of
output pages, if any crack or major scar is found.
* J3:Cleaning unit facing roller, J5: Belt clinging roller before 2nd transfer, J6: Lift roller
Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol when the transfer belt
cleaning blade is replaced, since an image failure may occur if there is any dirt remaining on the
roller. Also, remove dust and toner scattering adhering to the inside of the transfer belt unit in
order to keep rollers clean.
* J8: Transfer belt cleaning blade
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition
of its edge.
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.

7 - 43
Image quality control unit
K1
K2
K3
Fig. 7-30
* K2: Actuator
If toner adheres to the actuator (paper contact section), clean it with a soft pad, cloth or electric
vacuum cleaner.
2nd transfer roller unit
L3
L2
L1
Fig. 7-31
* L2: Paper clinging detection sensor

Open the 2nd transfer unit and clean the paper clinging detection sensor with a cotton swab.
Notes:
Be sure to clean the entire surface of the sensor.
* L3: 2nd transfer roller paper guide

If toner adheres to the ribs of the 2nd transfer roller paper guide, clean it with a soft pad, cloth or
electric vacuum cleaner.

7 - 44
Fuser unit
M3
M7 M9
M1
M4
M8
M2
M6
M5 7
Fig. 7-32
* M1: Heat roller

When replacing the Heat roller, apply small amount of grease on the inside of Heat roller
bearings.
* M3, M4: Separation finger

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed, or a dirt image
caused by the finger occurs. If there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one
regardless of the number of output pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the
finger during the cleaning. The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is
scraped off forcibly. Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.
* M6: Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the Heat roller is
replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new
one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
Be sure to perform the fuser thermistor correction when it is removed or replaced.
* M9: Exit sensor actuator

If toner has adhered, wipe it off with alcohol.

7 - 45
Exit unit
N1
N3
N2
Fig. 7-33
* N2: Idling roller

Wipe off any old grease, and then apply 0.5 to 1 rice-sized grains of white grease (Molykote HP-
300) onto the inside of the roller and both end faces of the shaft hole.

7 - 46
7.12 Machine Refreshing Kit
A Machine Refreshing Kit is a package of replacement parts for each unit required at machine
refreshment.
KIT name Component P-I Qty.

FR_R-KIT-FC30 Fuser roller 38-15 1
Pressure roller 38-20 1
Fuser roller separation finger 38-26 5
Pressure roller separation finger 39-15 2
TBU_R-KIT-FC30 Ozone filter 7-10 1
Cleaning unit facing roller 26-10 1
Cleaning unit facing roller bushing 26-11 2
Blade seal (front) 30-20 1
Blade seal (rear) 30-21 1
Blade seal (back) 30-17 2
Transfer belt cleaning blade 30-19 1

7 - 47
7 - 48
8. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 General Descriptions

This chapter explains the procedures for solving troubles occurring in the equipment.
When a trouble occurs, check if an error code is displayed on the LCD screen of the control panel first.
If displayed, refer to“ P. 8-6 "8.2 Error Code List"” to figure out the classification and contents of the
error, and then refer to “ P. 8-44 "8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code"” to remove its
cause.
If not displayed and the equipment does not operate properly or images are not printed properly, refer
to “ P. 8-250 "8.4 Other errors"” or “ P. 8-254 "8.5 Troubleshooting for the Image"” to remove its
cause.
Note:
If unusual odor is detected or if smoke or fire comes out of the equipment, immediately turn the power
OFF.
Even in the cases other than the above, fully observe safety precautions.
If any PC board or HDD shall be replaced, refer to“9.3Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and
Disposal of HDD/SSD/Board”.
8.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting.

8
If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting and technical tips, report the problem
to the appropriate Toshiba service center along with the following information. This information will help
the service center understand your problem and take quick action to find the solution.
1. Serial Number
2. List Print
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual / Service Handbook for the detailed procedure to obtain
a List Print.
A. Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by CSV file.
9S-300: All CSV files
B. Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by printing it out.
9S-101: 05 code
9S-102: 08 code
9S-104: Pixel counter data (Toner cartridge standard)
9S-106: Error history (1000 cases max)
9S-108: Firmware update log (200 cases max)
9S-110: Power on/off log (100 cases max)
3. For image-related problems, collect image samples with the problem areas and the feeding direction
marked first. Then provide information about the media type and weight, and the print data / spool
files for duplicating the problem.
4. For abnormal acoustic noise, describe the situation in as much detail as possible.
5. For hardware-related problems, provide photos of any broken parts, paper jams, etc.
In case of paper jams, include the type of paper and its manufacturer.
6. For software-related problems, provide list prints, TopAccess Logs and the detailed procedure
needed to duplicate the problem.
* This is the minimum information required to report a complaint. It would be appreciated if you could
obtain additional information.
* Follow the directions of the service center if they request additional information as each issue is
unique to some degree.

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-1
8.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device
[ 1 ] General description
The purpose of collecting the debug logs is to acquire the information for analyzing problems which
occurred during the MFP's operation. In such a case, you can collect the debug logs by inserting a USB
device into the MFP. Even if the power has to be turned OFF with the main power switch after a
problem occurs, the debug logs will be saved in the MFP (up to 3 logs). If the debug logs have already
been saved in the MFP, they also can be collected.
The following information is included in the USB debug logs.

Internal operation, Job history, HDD/memory usage status, etc. (Personal/Corporate information
(address book) not included)
When the debug logs are collected, also do so for the following information since it may be difficult to
investigate only using the debug log.
• List print mode ([9] + [START]) [300: All CSV files]
• Job logs below in TopAccess -> [Logs] -> [Export Logs]
- Print Job Log Export
- Fax Transmission Journal Export
- Fax Reception Journal Export
- Scan Log Export
- Messages Log Export
• Problem occurrence time
Or the time when the customer called if it is difficult to work out when it occurred.
• Status of when you collected the debug log
As in the example below, check the status to know if the problem occurred at the debug log
collection or how the customer recovered it.
E.g.
- You checked the problem and connected a USB device to the equipment.
- No problem occurred when an attempt to collect the debug log was made; however the customer
did turn the main power switch OFF when the problem occurred, so the log can be collected.
[ 2 ] Collection procedure
1. Note
When collecting a log, be sure to obtain consent from the user in advance and get the dedicated
script file from the service center.
2. About USB devices
Be sure to format the USB device with FAT16/32 beforehand. (Recommend size: 2GB or more)
3. Advance preparation of collection
Store the dedicated script file to the root directory of the USB device.
4. Procedure for collecting debug logs
1. Insert USB device, in which the dedicated script file is stored, into the MFP while the
power is ON.
2. The LED in the MFP starts blinking after the USB device has been inserted.
3. When the collection of the debug logs is finished, beeping is heard.
4. After the beeping has stopped, remove the USB device.
Notes:
• Do not remove the USB device while the LED in the MFP is blinking.
• If the LED does not start blinking after the USB device is inserted and a few minutes have
passed, try the procedure from step 1 again.
• If there is no beeping after the LED starts blinking (about 20 minutes), try procedure from step
1 again.
• If the USB device is inserted when the MFP is not ready, the debug logs cannot be collected.
5. Collected debug logs
- When the collection of the debug logs is completed, the compressed file of the collected logs is
stored in the root directory of the USB device.
File name: XXXX.YYYYMMDDHHmmSS
8-2
(XXXX= Serial number of the equipment, YYYY= year, MM= month, DD= day, HH= hour, mm=
minute, SS= second)
- After the debug logs have been collected, be sure to send them to the service center together
with a report.
8.1.3 Traceability label

A traceability label on which a management No. at the manufacturing has been printed is attached to
some units. If a problem occurs in a unit, report it to the appropriate Toshiba service center along with
the traceability label information to help them to understand it.
[ 1 ] Management No.
A management No. consists of 13 digits with letters of the alphabet and numbers. The following shows
the meaning of each block.
From the 1st to 4th digits: Classification

From the 5th to 10th digits: Production date
From the 11th to 13th digits: Sequential numbers
Classification Production date Sequential

numbers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 (digits) 8
1 2 2 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
[ 2 ] Applicable units
A traceability label is attached to the following units.
No. Unit Remarks

1 Board case (SYS board / LGC board)
2 Drum and TBU drive unit
3 Developer drive unit
4 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)
5 Fuser unit
6 Transfer belt unit (TBU)
7 Cleaner unit
8 Developer unit
9 LED tray

8-3
[ 3 ] Label attachment position
Fig.8-1

8-4
5
Fig.8-2

8-5
8.2Error Code List
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or
“CALL SERVICE” symbol is blinking.
8.2.1 Jam
Error code Classification Contents Troubleshooting

E010 Paper exit jam Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper P. 8-44
which has passed through the fuser unit does
not reach the exit sensor.
E011 Other paper jam Transfer belt paper-clinging jam: The paper P. 8-60
after the 2nd transfer is clinging to the transfer
belt.
E013 Other paper jam The paper jam occurred between the P. 8-62
registration pass sensor and the paper clinging
detection sensor.
E020 Paper exit jam Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of P. 8-46
the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its
leading edge has reached this sensor.
E030 Other paper jam Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the P. 8-63
paper transport path when power is turned ON.
E061 Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer: The P. 8-64
size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
E062 Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer: The P. 8-64
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
E063 Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper P. 8-64
drawer: The size of paper in the 3rd drawer
differs from size setting of the equipment.
E064 Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower P. 8-64
drawer: The size of paper in the 4th drawer
differs from size setting of the equipment.
E065 Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: P. 8-64
The size of paper in the bypass tray differs
from size setting of the equipment.
E090 Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed P. 8-64
cannot be prepared.
E091 Motor-ON time-out jam: The equipment does P. 8-64
not operate normally because abnormality
occurred on an interface between the SYS
board and engine firmware.
E0A0 Image transport ready time-out jam: Image P. 8-65
data to be printed cannot be sent.

8-6
E110 Paper misfeeding ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 8-47
registration sensor): The paper which has
passed through ADU does not reach the
registration sensor during duplex printing.
E120 Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 8-47
bypass feed sensor): Paper fed from the
bypass tray does not reach the bypass feed
sensor.
E130 1st drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 8-48
1st drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from
the 1st drawer does not reach the 1st drawer
feed sensor.
E140 2nd drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 8-48
2nd drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from
the 2nd drawer does not reach the 2nd drawer
feed sensor.
E150 PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not P. 8-49
reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor):
The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does
not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
E160 PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not P. 8-49 8
reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor):
The paper fed from the PFP lower drawer does
not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
E190 LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF P. 8-50
feed sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does
not reach the LCF feed sensor.

8-7
E200 Paper transport jam 1st drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching P. 8-51
the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has
passed the 1st drawer feed sensor.
E210 2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching P. 8-51
the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has
passed the 1st drawer feed sensor.
E220 2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching P. 8-52
the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor after it
has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
E270 Bypass transport jam (Paper not reaching the P. 8-51
registration sensor): Paper fed from the bypass
tray and passed through the bypass feed
sensor does not reach the registration sensor.
E300 PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-51
reaching the registration sensor): The paper
does not reach the registration sensor after it
has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor.
reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The
paper does not reach the 1st drawer feed
sensor after it has passed the 2nd drawer feed
sensor.
reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The
paper does not reach the 2nd drawer feed
sensor after it has passed the PFP upper
drawer feed sensor.

8-8
E330 Paper transport jam PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-51
reaching the registration sensor): The paper
does not reach the registration sensor after it
has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor.
E340 PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-52
reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The
paper does not reach the 1st drawer feed
sensor after it has passed the 2nd drawer feed
sensor.
reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The
paper does not reach the 2nd drawer feed
sensor after it has passed the PFP upper
drawer feed sensor.
reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor):
The paper does not reach the PFP upper
drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
E3C0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the P. 8-51
registration sensor): Paper fed from the LCF 8
and passed through the 1st drawer feed sensor
does not reach the registration sensor.
E3D0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st P. 8-52
drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF
and passed through the 2nd drawer feed
sensor does not reach the 1st drawer feed
sensor.
E3E0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd P. 8-53
drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF
and passed through the LCF feed sensor does
not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
E400 Cover open jam Jam access cover open jam: The jam access P. 8-68
cover has opened during printing.
E410 Front cover open jam: The front cover has P. 8-68
opened during printing.
E420 PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover P. 8-69
has opened during printing.
E430 ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during P. 8-69
printing.
E440 Side cover open jam: The side cover has P. 8-70
E450 LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover P. 8-70
has opened during printing.
E480 Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has P. 8-71
E490 Job separator cover open jam: The Job P. 8-71
separator cover has opened during printing.

8-9
E510 Paper transport jam Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: P. 8-55
(ADU section) The paper does not reach the ADU entrance
sensor after it is switchbacked in the exit
section.
E520 Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach P. 8-57
the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the
ADU entrance sensor.
E550 Other paper jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The P. 8-65
paper is remaining on the transport path when
printing is finished.
E551 Paper remaining jam on the transport path P. 8-66
(when a service call occurs)
E552 Paper remaining jam on the transport path P. 8-66
(when the cover is closed)
E712 RADF jam Jam not reaching the original registration P. 8-72
sensor: The original fed from the original
feeding tray does not reach the original
registration sensor.
E714 Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is P. 8-72
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
E721 Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original P. 8-73
does not reach the read sensor after it has
passed the registration sensor (when scanning
obverse side) or the reverse sensor (when
scanning reverse side).
E722 Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse P. 8-73
sensor (during scanning): The original which
passed the read sensor does not reach the
original exit/reverse sensor when it is
transported from the scanning section to exit
section.
E724 Stop jam at the original registration sensor: The P. 8-74
trailing edge of the original does not pass the
original registration sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
E725 Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge P. 8-74
of the original does not pass the read sensor
after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
E726 Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF P. 8-75
receives the transport/exit reception signal
from the equipment when no original is at the
exposure waiting position.
E731 Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor: P. 8-75
The trailing edge of the original does not pass
the original exit/reverse sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
E860 RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam P. 8-76
access cover has opened during RADF
operation.
E870 RADF open jam: RADF has opened during P. 8-76
RADF operation.
E871 Cover open jam in the read ready status P. 8-76

8 - 10
E910 Finisher jam Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The P. 8-78
(Bridge unit) paper does not reach the bridge unit transport
sensor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
E920 Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: P. 8-78
The trailing edge of the paper does not pass
the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after its
leading edge has reached the sensor.
E930 Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The P. 8-79
trailing edge of the paper does not reach the
bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading
edge has reached the bridge unit transport
sensor 1.
E940 Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: P. 8-79
the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its
leading edge has reached the bridge unit
transport sensor 2.
E950 Job separator jam Jam not reaching the job separator transport P. 8-80
sensor: The paper has passed through the exit
sensor does not reach the job separator
transport sensor. 8
E951 Stop jam at the job separator transport sensor: P. 8-80
the job separator transport sensor.
E9F0 Finisher jam Punching jam: An error occurs during the P. 8-95
(Puncher unit) detecting of the home position of the punch
motor. This occurs when an attempt is made to
punch paper which has been multiply fed from
the equipment and exceeds the punching
capability.[MJ-1037 (when MJ-6008 is
installed)]

8 - 11
EA10 Finisher jam 1st transport motor (M8) fault/ 2nd transport P. 8-81
EA20 (Finisher section) motor (M4) fault [MJ-1036]
EA10 Transport motor-1 (M1) fault/ Transport motor- P. 8-81
EA20 2 (M2) fault [MJ-1037]
EA25 Paper transport jam in the Finisher (after P. 8-82
paper stack exit): Paper is detected in the
finishing tray sensor after the paper stack has
exited from the finishing tray. [MJ-1036]
EA2A Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Entrance P. 8-82
path - middle path sensor) [MJ-1036]
EA2B Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Middle P. 8-83
path sensor) [MJ-1036]
EA2C Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Entrance P. 8-83
path - sub-path sensor) [MJ-1036]
EA2D Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Sub-path P. 8-84
sensor) [MJ-1036]
EA2E Paper transport remaining jam in the Finisher P. 8-85
(sub-path sensor): Paper is detected in the
sub-path sensor when the power is turned ON
or the cover is closed. [MJ-1036]
EA31 Paper transport remaining jam in the Finisher: P. 8-85
Paper is detected in the entrance path sensor
or middle path sensor when the power is
turned ON or the cover is closed. [MJ-1036]
Paper transport remaining jam in the Finisher: P. 8-85

Paper is detected in any of the path sensors
when the power is turned ON or the cover is
closed.
[MJ-1037]
EA32 Exit paper remaining jam in the Finisher: Paper P. 8-86
is detected in the finishing tray sensor when
the power is turned ON. [MJ-1036/MJ-1037]
EA40 Finisher jam Finisher cover open jam: P. 8-86
(Finisher section) (1) A paper jam occurs when any of the covers
is opened during the transporting of paper in
the Finisher (until the paper exit is completed
after the B command has been received).
(2) A paper jam occurs when the supplying of
the voltage of 24V is stopped during the
transporting of paper. [MJ-1036/MJ-1037]
EA50 Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed P. 8-87
properly. [MJ-1036/MJ-1037]
EA60 (Finisher section) Early arrival jam: The entrance path sensor P. 8-87
Finisher jam detects the paper earlier than a specified
timing. [MJ-1036]

8 - 12
EA80 Finisher jam Stapling in the saddle stitch staple unit is not P. 8-89
(Saddle Stitcher performed properly. [MJ-1037]
EA81 section) The detection of the home position of the P. 8-89
saddle stitch 3rd transport roller drive motor
(M10) ends abnormally. [MJ-1037]
EAB0 Paper transport jam in Saddle Stitch Finisher: P. 8-90
Paper transport jam in Saddle Stitch Finisher
[MJ-1037]
EAC1 The detection of the home position of the paper P. 8-90
folding blade motor (M12) ends abnormally.
[MJ-1037]
EAF1 The detection of the home position of the exit P. 8-91
roller nip adjustment motor (M4) ends
abnormally. [MJ-1037]
EAF2 The detection of the home position of the P. 8-91
staple unit sliding motor (M11) ends
abnormally. [MJ-1037]
EAF3 Gripper arm motor home position detection P. 8-92
error: The detection of the home position of the
gripper arm ends abnormally. This error may
occur if paper is jammed while being 8
transported, so it is treated as a paper jam.
[MJ-1037]
ED15 Paddle home position detection error: P. 8-93
The paddle is not at the home position. [MJ-
1101/MJ-1106]
EF14 Saddle paper exit jam: Outputting paper is not P. 8-93
completed within a fixed time. [MJ-1106]
EF1A The trailing edge of paper does not reach the P. 8-94
saddle stitch entrance path sensor (S4) after it
has passed the entrance sensor on the paper
transport path of the Finisher and was
transported through the paper transport path of
the Saddle Stitch Unit. [MJ-1037]
EF1B Paper remains at the saddle stitch positioning P. 8-94
paper exit sensor for a longer period than
specified while being transported in the
pushing/folding operation. [MJ-1037]
EF1C Paper is transported in the pushing/folding P. 8-93
operation, but does not reach the saddle stitch
exit path sensor.

8 - 13
EAD0 Other paper jam Print end command time-out jam: The printing P. 8-96
has not finished normally because of an error
occurring on the interface between the SYS
board and the engine firmware at the end of
printing.
EAE0 Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has P. 8-96
been interrupted because of the
communication error between the equipment
and finisher when the paper is transported from
the equipment to the finisher.
EB30 Ready time time-out jam: The equipment P. 8-97
judges that the paper transport to the finisher is
disabled because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher at the start
of printing.
EB50 Paper transport jam Paper remaining on the transport path: The P. 8-57
multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the
misfeeding of upcoming paper.
EB60 Paper remaining on the transport path: The P. 8-59
multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the
misfeeding of upcoming paper (redetection
after no jam is detected at [EB50]).

8 - 14
8.2.2 Service call

C020 Drive system related Developer drive motor abnormality: The P. 8-100
service call developer drive motor is not rotating normally.
C040 Paper feeding PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not P. 8-100
system related rotating normally. (the case that paper can be
service call fed from any drawer except the PFP)
C140 2nd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up P. 8-101
motor is not rotating or the 2nd drawer tray is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can
be fed from any drawer except the 2nd
drawer)
C150 PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP P. 8-102
upper drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or
the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from
any drawer except the PFP upper drawer)
C160 PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP P. 8-102
lower drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or
the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from 8
any drawer except the PFP lower drawer)
C180 LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray- P. 8-103
up motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not
moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the LCF)
C1A0 LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF P. 8-104
end fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end
fence is not moving normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the
LCF)
C1B0 LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF P. 8-105
transport motor is not rotating normally (when
paper can be fed from any drawer except the
LCF).
C260 Scanning system Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure P. 8-106
related service call lamp (white reference) is not detected when
power is turned ON.
C261 Peak detection error (high-light intensity) P. 8-107
C262 Peak detection error (communication error) P. 8-108
C270 Carriage home position sensor not going OFF P. 8-108
within a specified time / Downloading firmware
with an incorrect model.
C280 Carriage home position sensor not going ON P. 8-110
within a specified time
C290 Scanner fuse blowout: 24V power for the P. 8-111
scanning system is not supplied at the
scanner warming-up after power-ON.

8 - 15
C370 Copy process Transfer belt unit abnormality P. 8-170
C380 related service call Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (upper limit) P. 8-171
C381 Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (lower limit) P. 8-172
C390 Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (upper limit) P. 8-173
C391 Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (lower limit) P. 8-174
C3A0 Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (upper limit) P. 8-175
C3A1 Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (lower limit) P. 8-176
C3B0 Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (upper limit) P. 8-177
C3B1 Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (lower limit) P. 8-178
C3E0 Developer unit replacement (old-new) P. 8-179
detection abnormality
C3E1 Drum/cleaner/charger unit replacement (old- P. 8-181
new) detection abnormality
C411 Fuser unit related Thermistor or heater lamp abnormality at P. 8-112
service call power-ON: Abnormality of the thermistor is
detected when power is turned ON or the
temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in
a specified period of time after power is turned
ON.
C412 Thermistor/heater lamp abnormality at power- P. 8-112
ON: Thermistor abnormality is detected at
power-ON or the fuser roller temperature does
not rise within a specified period of time after
power-ON.
C445 Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality P. 8-113
judgment (pre-running end temperature
abnormality)
judgment (pre-running end temperature
abnormality)
judgment (temperature abnormality at ready
status)
judgment (temperature abnormality at high
temperature)
judgment
judgment
judgment
C4B0 Fuser unit counter abnormality P. 8-113
C4C0 Fuser unit new/old detection fuse abnormality P. 8-114
C4D0 Fuser unit related Fuser roller thermistor abnormality P. 8-114
service call
C4F0 Center thermistor error correction P. 8-115
C4F1 Side thermistor error correction P. 8-115

8 - 16
C550 Optional RADF I/F error: Communication error has P. 8-117
communication occurred between the RADF and the scanner.
related service call
C560 Communication error between Engine-CPU P. 8-117

and PFC board
C551 RADF model detection error P. 8-121
C580 Communication error between IPC board and P. 8-117
finisher
CE00 Communication error (signal transmission to P. 8-118
the Hole Punch Unit) [MJ-1037]
C5A0 Circuit related EEPROM not connected (LGC board) P. 8-122
C5A1 service call EEPROM data abnormality (LGC board) P. 8-122
C8E0 Optional RADF communication protocol abnormality: P. 8-121
communication The system has to be stopped because the
related service call control
C900 Circuit related Connection error between SYS board and P. 8-122
service call LGC board
8
C911 Toner cartridge IC chip access board P. 8-123
abnormality
C940 Engine-CPU abnormality P. 8-124
C962 LGC board ID abnormality P. 8-124
C970 Process related High-voltage transformer abnormality: P. 8-182
service call Leakage of the main charger is detected.
C9E0 Circuit related Connection error between scanner CPU and P. 8-124
service call system CPU

8 - 17
CB00 Finisher related Finisher not connected: Communication error P. 8-130
service call has occurred between the equipment and
finisher.
CB01 Finisher communication error [MJ-1037] P. 8-130
CB30 Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The P. 8-131
movable tray shift motor or the movable tray
does not work properly. [MJ-1036]
Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The P. 8-132

movable tray shift motor or the movable tray
does not work properly. [MJ-1037]
CB31 Movable tray paper-full detection error: P. 8-133
The actuator of the movable tray paper-full
detection sensor does not move smoothly.
[MJ-1037]
CB40 Front alignment plate home position detection P. 8-134
error: The detection of the home position ends
abnormally because the front alignment plate
has not worked properly.
[MJ-1036/MJ-1037]
CB50 Stapler unit home position detection error: The P. 8-135
detection of the home position of the stapler
unit ends abnormally. [MJ-1036/MJ-1037]
CB51 Stapler unit sliding home position detection P. 8-137
error: The detection of the home position of
the stapler unit sliding ends abnormally. [MJ-
1036/MJ-1037]

8 - 18
CB80 Finisher related Finisher control PC board (FIN) backup RAM P. 8-138
service call error: An error occurs during the writing of
data into the EEPROM of the Finisher. [MJ-
1036/MJ-1037]
Hole punch control PC board (HP) backup P. 8-139
RAM error: An error occurs during the writing
of data into the EEPROM of the hole punch.
[MJ-6008]
CB84 Hole Punch Unit - Main CPU program error P. 8-140
CB90 Paper folding blade motor (M12) P. 8-140
abnormality[MJ-1037]
CBC0 Saddle stitch alignment motor (M8) P. 8-141
CBF0 Stacker motor (M9) abnormality[MJ-1037] P. 8-141
CC02 Stack exit roller nip home position detection P. 8-142
error[MJ-1036]
P. 8-142
Exit roller nip adjustment motor (M4)
CC21 Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller drive motor P. 8-143
(M10) abnormality[MJ-1037]
CC22 Saddle stich stapler home position detection P. 8-143 8
error[MJ-1037]
CC23 An abnormal interruption of the encoder pulse -
of the folding blade occurrs.
CC51 Punch unit sliding motor (M12) P. 8-144
P. 8-145
Punch unit sliding motor (M16)
CC53 Punch waste full sensors (S41 and S42) P. 8-145
CC54 Abnormality of paper detection sensors (S24 P. 8-146
and S25)[MJ-1036]
Abnormality of trailing edge detection sensors
P. 8-146
(S39 and S40) and horizontal registration
detection sensors (S39 and S40)[MJ-1037]
CC60 Punch motor abnormality [MJ-1036] P. 8-147
Punch motor (M15) abnormality [MJ-1037] P. 8-148
CC61 Punch motor abnormality [MJ-1036] P. 8-147
CC71 Punch firmware checksum error [MJ-1037] P. 8-147
CC80 Front alignment motor (M2) abnormality [MJ- P. 8-149
1036]
P. 8-149
Front alignment motor (M6) abnormality [MJ-
1037]
CC91 The detection of the home position of the P. 8-92
gripper arm ends abnormality.
CC92 Movable tray upper limit detection error [MJ- P. 8-150
1037]
CC93 Knurled roller shift solenoid abnormality [MJ- P. 8-150
1036]
CC94 Finisher related Fan motor abnormality[MJ-1036] P. 8-147
service call

8 - 19
CA00 Image control color registration abnormality P. 8-153
CE10 related service call Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): P. 8-160
The output value of this sensor is out of a
specified range when sensor light source is
OFF.
Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern P. 8-160
level): The output value of this sensor is out of
a specified range when the image quality
control test pattern is not formed.
CE40 Image quality control test pattern abnormality: P. 8-163
The test pattern is not formed normally.
CE41 Image quality TRC control test pattern P. 8-165
abnormality: The image quality TRC control
test pattern is not printed normally.
CE50 Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: P. 8-166
The output value of this sensor is out of a
specified range.
CE70 Drum drive switching abnormality: The drum P. 8-167
switching detection sensor (S11) is not turned
ON after the drum motor was rotated for a
specified period of time.
CE80 LED printer head LED printer head communication error P. 8-126
CE81 related service call Interface initialization error between LED P. 8-128
printer head and LGC board
CE90 Image control Drum thermistor abnormality: The output P. 8-169
related service call value of the drum thermistor is out of a
specified range.
CF10 Finisher related Communication module writing failure. P. 8-130
service call
F070 Communication Communication error between System-CPU P. 8-118
related service call and Engine-CPU
F071 Communication initialization error between P. 8-119
System-CPU and Engine-CPU
F090 Circuit related SRAM abnormality on the SYS board P. 8-125
service call

8 - 20
F100_0 Other service call HDD format error: Operation of HDD key data P. 8-183
fails.
F100_1 HDD format error: Encryption key data of P. 8-183
either the SYS board or the SRAM board for
the SYS board are damaged.
F100_2 HDD format error: Encryption key data of both P. 8-185
the SYS board and the SRAM board for the
SYS board are damaged.
F101_0 HDD connection error (HDD connection P. 8-186
cannot be detected.)
F101_1 Root partition mount error (HDD formatting P. 8-186
fails.): The HDD cannot be connected
(mounted) caused by damage to the areas in
which the program is mainly stored.
F101_2 Partition mount error: The HDD cannot be P. 8-186
connected (mounted) caused by damage to
areas other than those described in the
F101_1 and F101_4 to F101_9 errors.
areas other than those described in the 8
F101_1 and F101_4 to F101_9 errors.
the "/work" partition.
the "/registration" partition.
the "/backup" partition.
the "/imagedata" partition.
the "/storage" partition.
the "/encryption" partition.
F102 HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ P. 8-193
state.
F103 HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot P. 8-193
be performed in the specified period of time.
F104 HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the P. 8-193
data of HDD.
F105 HDD other error P. 8-193
F106_0 ADI-HDD error: Illegal disk replacement P. 8-193
detected (ADI-HDD Exchange to SATA-HDD)
F106_1 ADI-HDD error: HDD type detection error P. 8-194
F106_2 ADI-HDD error: ADI encryption key download P. 8-194
operation error

8 - 21
F106_3 Other service call ADI-HDD error: ADI authentication Admin P. 8-195
Password generation error
F106_4 ADI-HDD error: Authentication random P. 8-195
number generation error
F106_5 ADI-HDD error: Authentication data P. 8-196
transmission error
F106_6 ADI-HDD error: Error caused by reason other P. 8-197
than F106_0 to 5 errors.
F106_UND ADI-HDD error: Error caused by reason other P. 8-197
EF than F106_0 to 5 errors.
F109_0 Key consistency error: Consistency check P. 8-198
operation error.
F109_1 Key consistency error: SRAM encryption AES P. 8-198
key data damage.
F109_2 Key consistency error: Signature Check public P. 8-199
key damage.
F109_3 Key consistency error: HDD encryption P. 8-199
parameter damage.
F109_4 Key consistency error: license data damage. P. 8-200
F109_5 Key consistency error: Encryption key for ADI- P. 8-201
HDD is damaged.
F109_6 Key consistency error: Administrator P. 8-203
password error for ADI-HDD authentication.
F110 Communication Communication error between System-CPU P. 8-204
related service call and Scanner-CPU
F111 Scanner response abnormality P. 8-204
F120 Other service call Database abnormality: Database is not P. 8-205
operating normally.
F121 Database abnormality (user information P. 8-205
management database)
F122 Database abnormality (Message/Job log P. 8-205
management database)
F124 Database abnormality: Database is not P. 8-205
operating normally. (Language management
database)
F130 Invalid MAC address P. 8-207
F131 Error due to damage to filtering setting file P. 8-207
F140 ASIC format error: ASIC formatting fails or P. 8-207
memory acquiring fails when software is
formatted
F200 Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) disabled P. 8-208
F350 Circuit related CCD board abnormality P. 8-125
F400 service call SYS board cooling fan abnormality P. 8-208

8 - 22
F500 Other service call HD partition damage P. 8-208
F510 Application start error P. 8-209
F520 Operating system start error P. 8-209
F521 Integrity check error P. 8-209
F550 Encryption partition error P. 8-209
F600 Software update error P. 8-210
F700 Overwrite error P. 8-210
F800 Date error P. 8-210
F900 Machine information alignment error P. 8-211
F902_0 Mistaken HDD installation error P. 8-211
F902_1 System firmware / System software model P. 8-212
information error - Invalid system firmware/
software is installed on 20/25 ppm model.
F902_2 A model-unmatched SYS board is installed. P. 8-212
F902_3 A model-unmatched SYS board is installed. P. 8-213

8 - 23
8.2.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1. Internet FAX related error
Error code Classification Troubleshooting

1C10 System access abnormality P. 8-214
1C11 Insufficient memory P. 8-214
1C12 Message reception error P. 8-214
1C13 Message transmission error P. 8-214
1C14 Invalid parameter P. 8-214
1C15 Exceeding file capacity P. 8-214
1C30 Directory creation failure P. 8-214
1C31 File creation failure P. 8-214
1C32 File deletion failure P. 8-214
1C33 File access failure P. 8-214
1C40 Image conversion abnormality P. 8-214
1C60 HDD full failure during processing P. 8-214
1C61 Address Book reading failure P. 8-214
1C63 Terminal IP address unset P. 8-214
1C64 Terminal mail address unset P. 8-214
1C65 SMTP address unset P. 8-215
1C66 Server time time-out error P. 8-215
1C69 SMTP server connection error P. 8-215
1C6B Terminal mail address error P. 8-215
1C6C Destination mail address error P. 8-215
1C6D System error P. 8-215
1C70 SMTP client OFF P. 8-215
1C71 SMTP authentication error P. 8-215
1C72 POP before SMTP error P. 8-215
1CC0 Job canceling -
1CC1 Power failure P. 8-215

8 - 24
2. RFC related error
Message displayed in
Error code Contents Troubleshooting
the TopAccess screen
2500 Syntax error, command HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) P. 8-215
unrecognized Destination mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 500)
2501 Syntax error in parameters or HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) P. 8-215
arguments Destination mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 501)
2503 Bad sequence of commands Destination mail address error P. 8-215
(RFC: 503)
2504 Command parameter not HOST NAME error P. 8-215
implemented (RFC: 504)
2550 Mailbox unavailable Destination mail address error P. 8-216
(RFC: 550)
2551 User not local Destination mail address error P. 8-215
(RFC: 551) 8
2552 Insufficient system storage Terminal/Destination mail P. 8-216
address error
(RFC: 552)
2553 Mailbox name not allowed Destination mail address error P. 8-216
(RFC: 553)

8 - 25
3. Electronic Filing related error
2B11 Job status failed. JOB status abnormality P. 8-216
2B20 Failed to access file. File library function error P. 8-216
2B30 Insufficient disk space. Insufficient disk space in /BOX P. 8-216
partition
2B31 Failed to access Electronic Filing. Status of specified Electronic P. 8-216
Filing or folder is undefined or
being created/deleted
2B50 Failed to process image. Image library error P. 8-216
2B51 Failed to print images from the List library error P. 8-216
document box
2B71 Document(s) expire(s) in a few Documents expiring in a few days -
days exist
2B80 Hard Disk space for Electronic Hard disk space in /BOX partition -
Filing nearly full. is nearly full (90%).
2B90 Insufficient Memory. Insufficient memory capacity P. 8-216
2BA0 Invalid Box password specified. Invalid Box password P. 8-216
2BA1 Incorrect paper size / invalid color The specified paper size, color P. 8-216
mode / invalid resolution mode or resolution is not
available.
2BB0 Job canceled Job canceling -
2BB1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 8-216
2BC0 System fatal error. Fatal failure occurred P. 8-216
2BD0 Power failure occurred during e- Power failure occurred during P. 8-216
Filing restoring. restoring of Electronic Filing
2BE0 Failed to get machine parameter. Machine parameter reading P. 8-217
failure
2BF0 Maximum number of page range Exceeding maximum number of P. 8-217
is reached. pages
2BF1 Maximum number of document Exceeding maximum number of P. 8-217
range is reached. documents
2BF2 Maximum number of folder range Exceeding maximum number of P. 8-217
is reached. folders

8 - 26
4. Remote scanning related error
2A20 Failed to acquire resource System management module P. 8-217
resource acquiring failure
2A31 WS Scan function is not available Disabled WS Scan P. 8-217
2A40 System fatal error System error P. 8-217
2A50 Job canceling Job canceling -
2A51 Power failure Power failure P. 8-217
2A60 Authentication for WS Scan failed WS Scan user authentication P. 8-217
failure
2A70 Insufficient permission to execute Remote Scan privilege check P. 8-217
RemoteScan error
2A71 Insufficient permission to execute WS Scan privilege check error P. 8-217
WS Scan
2A72 Insufficient permission to access e-Filing data access privilege P. 8-217
e-Filing box using scan utility. check error (Scan Utility)

8 - 27
5. E-mail related error
2C10 Illegal Job status System access abnormality P. 8-218
2C11 Not enough memory Insufficient memory P. 8-218
2C12 Illegal Job status Message reception error P. 8-218
2C13 Illegal Job status Message transmission error P. 8-218
2C14 Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter P. 8-218
2C15 Email size exceeded limit or Exceeding file capacity P. 8-218
maximum size
2C20 Illegal Job status System management module P. 8-218
access abnormality
2C21 Illegal Job status Job control module access P. 8-218
abnormality
2C22 Illegal Job status Job control module access P. 8-218
abnormality
2C30 Failed to create directory Directory creation failure P. 8-218
2C31 Failed to create file File creation failure P. 8-218
2C32 Failed to delete file File deletion failure P. 8-218
2C33 Failed to create file File access failure P. 8-218
2C40 Failed to convert image file Image conversion abnormality P. 8-218
format
2C43 Encryption error. Failed to create Encryption error P. 8-218
file
2C44 Creating the image file was not Encryption PDF enforced mode P. 8-218
permitted. error
2C45 Failed in making meta data. Meta data creation error (Scan to P. 8-218
Email)
2C60 Failed to process your Job. HDD full failure during processing P. 8-218
Insufficient disk space.
2C61 Failed to read AddressBook Address Book reading failure P. 8-219
2C62 Not enough memory Memory acquiring failure P. 8-218
2C63 Invalid Domain Address Terminal IP address unset P. 8-219
2C64 Invalid Domain Address Terminal mail address unset P. 8-219
2C65 Failed to connect to SMTP server SMTP address unset P. 8-219
2C66 Failed to connect to SMTP server Server time time-out error P. 8-219
2C69 Failed to connect to SMTP server SMTP server connection error P. 8-219
2C6A Failed to send E-Mail message HOST NAME error (No RFC P. 8-219
error)
2C6B Invalid address specified in From: Terminal mail address error P. 8-219
field
2C6C Invalid address specified in To: Destination mail address error P. 8-219
field (No RFC error)
2C70 SMTP service is not available SMTP client OFF P. 8-219
2C71 Failed SMTP Authentication SMTP authentication error P. 8-219
2C72 POP Before SMTP POP before SMTP error P. 8-219
Authentication Failed
2CC0 Job canceled Job canceling -
2CC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 8-219

8 - 28
6. File sharing related error
2D10 Illegal Job status System access abnormality P. 8-219
2D11 Not enough memory Insufficient memory P. 8-220
2D12 Illegal Job status Message reception error P. 8-220
2D13 Illegal Job status Message transmission error P. 8-220
2D14 Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter P. 8-220
2D15 Document size exceeded limit or Exceeding the maximum size for P. 8-220
maximum size. file sharing
2D30 Failed to create directory Directory creation failure P. 8-220
2D31 Failed to create file File creation failure P. 8-220
2D32 Failed to delete file File deletion failure P. 8-219
2D33 Failed to create file File access failure P. 8-220
2D40 Failed to convert image file Image conversion abnormality P. 8-220
format
2D43 Encryption error. Failed to create Encryption error P. 8-220
file
2D44 Creating the image file was not Encryption PDF enforced mode P. 8-220
permitted. error 8
2D45 Failed in making meta data. Meta data creation error (Scan to P. 8-220
File)
2D62 Failed to connect to network File server connection error P. 8-220
destination. Check destination
path
2D63 Specified network path is invalid. Invalid network path P. 8-220
Check destination path
2D64 Logon to file server failed. Check Login failure P. 8-220
username and password
2D65 There are too many documents in Exceeding documents in folder: P. 8-220
the folder. Failed in creating new Creating new document is failed.
document.
2D66 Failed To Process your Job. Storage capacity full failure P. 8-221
Insufficient Storage space. during processing
2D67 FTP service is not available FTP service not available P. 8-221
2D68 File Sharing service is not File sharing service not available P. 8-221
available
2D69 NetWare service is not available NetWare service not available P. 8-221
2DA0 Expired scan documents deleted Periodical deletion of scanned -
from share folder. documents completed properly.
2DA1 Expired Sent Fax documents Periodical deletion of transmitted -
deleted from shared folder. FAX documents completed
properly.
2DA2 Expired Received Fax Periodical deletion of received -
documents deleted from shared FAX documents completed
folder. properly.
2DA3 Scanned documents in shared Manual deletion of scanned -
folder deleted upon user’s documents completed properly.
request.

8 - 29
2DA4 Sent Fax Documents in shared Manual deletion of transmitted -
folder deleted upon user’s FAX documents completed
request. properly.
2DA5 Received Fax Documents in Manual deletion of received FAX -
shared folder deleted upon user’s documents completed properly.
request.
2DA6 Failed to delete file. File deletion failure P. 8-219
2DA7 Failed to acquire resource. Resource acquiring failure P. 8-220
2DC0 Job canceled Job canceling -
2DC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 8-221
2E10 Failed to store document(s) in USB storage system access P. 8-221
USB folder. abnormality
2E11 Failed to store document(s) in Insufficient memory capacity for P. 8-221
USB folder. USB storage
2E12 Failed to store document(s) in Message reception error in USB P. 8-221
USB folder. storage
2E13 Failed to store document(s) in Message transmission error in P. 8-221
USB folder. USB storage
2E14 Failed to store document(s) in Invalid parameter for USB P. 8-221
USB folder. storage
2E15 Document size exceeded limit or Exceeding the maximum size for P. 8-221
maximum size file sharing
2E30 Failed to store document(s) in Creation of a directory failed. P. 8-221
USB folder.
2E31 Failed to store document(s) in File creation failure in USB P. 8-221
USB folder. storage
2E32 Failed to store document(s) in File deletion failure in USB P. 8-221
USB folder. storage
2E33 Failed to store document(s) in File access failure in USB P. 8-221
USB folder. storage
2E40 Failed to convert image file Image conversion abnormality in P. 8-222
format USB storage
2E43 Encryption error. Failed to create Encryption failure in USB storage P. 8-222
file.
2E44 Creating the image file was not Encryption PDF enforced mode P. 8-222
permitted. error in USB storage
2E45 Failed in making meta data. Meta data creation error in USB P. 8-222
storage (Scan to File)
2E65 There are too many documents in File creation error due to P. 8-222
folders. Failed in creating new insufficient USB folder capacity
document.
2E66 Failed To Process your Job. HDD full failure during USB P. 8-222
Insufficient Storage space. storage
2EC0 Job canceled Job canceling -
2EC1 Power Failure Job Aborted Power failure in USB storage P. 8-222

8 - 30
7. E-mail reception related error
3A10 MIME Error has been detected in E-mail MIME error P. 8-223
the received mail.
3A20 Analyze Error has been detected E-mail analysis error P. 8-223
in the received mail.
3A30 Whole partial mails were not Partial mail time-out error P. 8-223
reached by timeout.
3A40 Partial Mail Error has been Partial mail related error P. 8-223
detected in the received mail.
3A50 HDD Full Error has been Insufficient HDD capacity error P. 8-223
occurred in this mail.
3A70 Receiving partial mail was Warning of partial mail P. 8-223
aborted since the partial mail interruption
setting has been changed to
Disable.
3A80 Partial mail was received during Partial mail reception setting OFF P. 8-223
the partial mail setting is
disabled.
3B10 Format Error has been detected E-mail format error P. 8-223 8
3B20 Content-Type Error has been Content-Type error P. 8-223
3B40 Decode Error has been detected E-mail decode error P. 8-223
3C10 Tiff Analyze Error has been TIFF analysis error P. 8-223
3C13 Tiff Analyze Error has been P. 8-223
3C20 Tiff Compression Error has been TIFF compression error P. 8-223
3C30 Tiff Resolution Error has been TIFF resolution error P. 8-223
3C40 Tiff Paper Size Error has been TIFF paper size error P. 8-223
3C50 Offramp Destination Error has Offramp destination error P. 8-224
been detected in the received
mail.
3C60 Offramp Security Error has been Offramp security error P. 8-224
3C70 Power Failure has been occurred Power failure error P. 8-224
in Email receiving.
3C90 OffRamp Fax transmission OffRamp Fax transmission P. 8-224
disable error has been detected disable error
3D10 SMTP Destination Error has Destination address error P. 8-224
been detected in the received
mail. This mail was deleted.
3D20 Offramp Destination limitation Offramp destination limitation P. 8-224
Error has been detected in the error
received mail.

8 - 31
3D30 Fax Board Error has been FAX board error P. 8-224
occurred in the received mail.
3E10 POP3 Connection Error has been POP3 server connection error P. 8-224
3E20 POP3 Connection Timeout Error POP3 server connection time-out P. 8-224
has been occurred in the error
received mail.
3E30 POP3 Login Error has been POP3 login error P. 8-224
3E40 POP3 Login Error occurred in the POP3 login method error P. 8-224
received mail.
3F10 File I/O Error has been occurred File I/O error P. 8-224
3F20 in this mail. The mail could not be P. 8-224
received until File I/O is
recovered.

8 - 32
8.2.4 Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen.

4011 Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is P. 8-225
deleted from the print job screen.
4021 Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF P. 8-225
during print job (copy, list print, network print).
4031 HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or P. 8-225
invalid network print are saved in HDD.
4041 User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document P. 8-225
is not registered as a user.
4042 Department authentication error? A department whose code is P. 8-225
specified for a print job is not registered.
4045 Problem in LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization P. 8-225
settings
4111 Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by P. 8-225
department and user management has reached 0.): The numbers of
output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the
department code and the user code at the same time.
4112 Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by user P. 8-225
8
management has reached 0.): The number of output pages has
exceeded the one specified with the user code.
4113 Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by P. 8-225
department management has reached 0.): The number of output
pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
4121 Job canceling due to external counter error P. 8-225
4211 Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being P. 8-225
stored to the HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled
print, etc.) cannot be performed.
4212 e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to P. 8-225
the HDD (print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be
performed.
4213 File storing limitation error: The file storing function is set to P. 8-225
"disabled".
4214 Fax/Internet Fax transmission limitation error: Fax / Internet Fax P. 8-225
transmission function or Network Fax/Internet Fax function is
disabled.
4221 Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be P. 8-225
performed.
4231 Hardcopy security printing error: hardcopy security printing job is P. 8-225
performed when the function is restricted.
4311 Not being authorized to perform JOB P. 8-226
4312 Not authorized to store a file P. 8-226
4313 No privilege for e-Filing storage: No privilege to store e-Filing data is P. 8-226
given. (e-Filing storage permission)
4314 No privilege for Fax / Internet Fax transmission: No privilege to send P. 8-226
Fax or Internet Fax jobs is given. (Fax / Internet Fax transmission
permission)
4321 No privilege for print settings: No privilege to print with the specified P. 8-226
settings is given. (Print setting permission)

8 - 33
4411 Image data creation failure: Data that you tried to print may be P. 8-226
corrupted.
• Network print: Data are corrupted or invalid.
• Direct print: A file is corrupted or not in a supported format.
• Printing was attempted in which print data have not been
supported by PCL6 printer driver. [LL20ppm/LL25ppm]
4412 Double-sign encoding error: A double-sign encoding error occurred P. 8-226
because the PDF file is encrypted in a forbidden language or in a
language not supported.
4611 Font download failure (exceeding maximum number of registrations): P. 8-226
A new font cannot be registered because the number of fonts
registered in this equipment has reached the limit.
4612 Font download failure (HDD full): A new font cannot be registered P. 8-226
because there is not sufficient space in the font storage area of this
equipment.
4613 Font download failure (others): A new font cannot be registered due P. 8-226
to other abnormality.
4621 Font deletion failure: A font cannot be deleted because the specified P. 8-226
font does not exist, the specified font is undeletable or any other
abnormality occurred.
4F10 Printing was not performed successfully due to other abnormalities. P. 8-226

8 - 34
8.2.5 TopAccess related error/Communication error with external
application
5010 - Internal setting error: There is a P. 8-227
print job, a proof print job, a
private print job, a print job
without a set department code, a
scan job or a fax job remaining in
this equipment.
5012 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Authentication error: A temporary P. 8-227
system error password downloaded from e-
Bridge and entered in this
equipment is not valid, or the
permanent password set in the e-
Bridge is not valid.
5013 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring e-Bridge communication error: P. 8-227
system error Communication is attempted
while the e-Bridge is enabled for
some reason such as version
upgrade. 8
5014 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring No SSL certificate: There is no P. 8-227
system error SSL certificate or the certificate is
not in a correct file format.
5015 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Invalid SSL certificate: SSL P. 8-228
system error certificate is not valid.
5016 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Expired SSL certificate: SSL P. 8-228
system error certificate is expired.
5017 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Other SSL certificate related P. 8-228
system error error: SSL certificate is invalid.
5018 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Invalid DNS error: DNS address P. 8-228
system error is invalid.
5019 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Connection error: Settings for P. 8-228
system error initial URL and proxy are
incorrect.
501A TOSHIBA Remote monitoring Proxy error: IP address or port for P. 8-228
system error proxy setting is invalid.
501B TOSHIBA Remote monitoring No URL (host/port) or invalid P. 8-229
system error path: Initial URL is invalid.
5030 TOSHIBA Remote monitoring An error in the HTTP P. 8-229
system error communication
50FF TOSHIBA Remote monitoring A fatal error occurred in the MFP P. 8-229
system error
5110 Toner Not Recognized - Please Toner cartridge detection error. P. 8-229
Check Toner.
5212 Time for Slit Glass and Main Appears when the time for main P. 8-230
Charger Cleaning - Please Clean charger cleaning comes (at every
Slit Glass and Main Charger. output of approx. 10,000 sheets)
5410 TOSHIBA Global remote MFP registration error P. 8-230
monitoring system error
5411 TOSHIBA Global remote MFP registration lock error P. 8-230

8 - 35
5412 TOSHIBA Global remote Server busy error P. 8-230
5413 TOSHIBA Global remote Server error P. 8-230
5414 TOSHIBA Global remote Invalid device file error P. 8-231
5415 TOSHIBA Global remote Communication error P. 8-231
5416 TOSHIBA Global remote Setting files / system software P. 8-231
monitoring system error update error
5417 TOSHIBA Global remote System software error P. 8-231
5BD0 Power failure occurred during Power supply is cut off during the P. 8-232
restore restoration of database sent from
TopAccess
5C10 FAX Unit is not attached. Network FAX is disabled because P. 8-232
the FAX Unit is not attached
5C11 Security error on Address Book. The network FAX job failed P. 8-232
because the specified address is
not registered in the Address
Book
8.2.6 MFP access error
Message displayed in the

TopAccess screen
6007 Failed user login Unsuccessful User Login to MFP: P. 8-233
User authentication cannot be
done because connection to the
authentication server has failed.
6008 Failed to connect on External Failed to connect on External P. 8-233
LDAP server for Role Base Role Base Access Control
Access Control (LDAP) Server: User
authentication cannot be done
because connection to an
external RBAC server has failed.
6013 Failed to connect on the Connection failure to the P. 8-233
authentication server authentication server: Failed to
connect to the authentication
server
6014 Detected the authentication Detected the authentication P. 8-233
server that can not be connected server that can not be connected:
The authentication server that
cannot be accessed is detected
6032 Illegal period. Card related error: Expired card: P. 8-233
The card cannot be used
because it has expired.

8 - 36
TopAccess screen
6033 No entering record. Card related error: Invalid flag P. 8-234
data (no room-entry data): The
card cannot be used because no
room-entry data are recorded in
it.
6034 Illegal entering record. Card related error: Invalid flag P. 8-234
data (invalid card data): The card
cannot be used because the data
required for the use of the card
are not correctly set.
6041 Card Authentication Failed Card authentication: Card related P. 8-234
because of Card Reading Error error: Card data cannot be
obtained correctly.
6042 Card Authentication Failed Card authentication: Card setting P. 8-234
because of setting Error error: The self-diagnostic code
required for card authentication is
not set in this equipment
correctly.
6052 Failed to connect on External Failed to connect on External P. 8-234
LDAP server for Role Base Access Role Base Access Control
8
Control (LDAP) Server: User
authentication for print job cannot
be done because connection to
an external RBAC server has
failed.
6121 SecureErase fails Automatic Secure Erase failure P. 8-235
6131 SNTP server synchronization Synchronization with the SNTP P. 8-235
failure server failed.

8 - 37
8.2.7 Maintenance error

TopAccess screen
7101 Failed to update Copier Firmware System firmware installation P. 8-236
failure
7103 Failed to update Copier Main Engine firmware installation P. 8-236
ROM failure
7105 Failed to update Copier Scanner Scanner firmware installation P. 8-236
ROM failure
7109 Failed to update Printer Driver Printer driver upload failure P. 8-236
710B Failed to update Point And Print Point and Print data upload P. 8-236
failure
710F Failed to install Language Pack Failed to install Language Pack P. 8-237
Language Pack installation
failure
7111 Failed to install Patch Patch installation failure P. 8-236
7113 Failed to install Plugin Plug-in installation failure P. 8-236
7115 Failed to update HDD Data HDD data installation failure P. 8-236
7117 Failed to update Reversing DF firmware installation failure P. 8-236
Automatic Document Feeder
ROM
711D Failed to remove License Key License key returning failure P. 8-237
711F Failed to install License Key License key installation failure P. 8-237
71A4 Failed in consistency Cryptographic key consistency P. 8-237
confirmation of cryptographic key confirmation failure
71AA Invalid Error Occurd while getting Invalid Error Occurd while getting P. 8-238
Certificate from SCEP server Certificate from SCEP server
71AB Timeout Error Occurd while Timeout Error Occurd while P. 8-238
getting Certificate from SCEP getting Certificate from SCEP
server server
71AC File Save Error Occurd while File Save Error Occurd while P. 8-238
getting Certificate from SCEP getting Certificate from SCEP
server server
71B0 Failed to decrypt Software Software package file decryption P. 8-238
Package failure
71B5 Failed to update Finisher ROM Finisher firmware installation P. 8-239
failure
71B7 Failed to update Saddle ROM Saddle firmware installation P. 8-239
failure
71B9 Failed to update Punch ROM Punch firmware installation P. 8-239
failure

8 - 38
8.2.8 Network error

TopAccess screen
8000 Static IPv4 duplicated address IPv4 address overlaps. P. 8-240
detected
8011 Link Local address of IPv6 was Linklocal Address Conflict P. 8-240
duplicated.
8012 Manual address of IPv6 was Manual IPv6 Address Conflict P. 8-240
duplicated.
8013 Stateless address of IPv6 was Stateless Address Conflict P. 8-240
duplicated.
8014 Stateful address of IPv6 was Stateful Address Conflict P. 8-240
duplicated.
8022 Authentication Failure Failed in 802.1X authentication. P. 8-240
8023 Can not contact Authentication Failed in connection to P. 8-241
Server/Switch authentication server and switch.
8024 Certificate verification Failure Failed in verification of certificate. P. 8-241
8031 No IKE proposal chosen Ipsec error for ikev1 certification P. 8-241
failed
8032 IKE Certificate Authentication Ipsec error for wrong proposal P. 8-241 8
failed choosen
8033 IKE Pre-shared key Ipsec error if auth for shared key P. 8-241
Authentication failed failed
8034 Invalid Certificate Ipsec error if invalid certificate P. 8-242
uploaded
8035 Certificate Type unsupported Ipsec error if certificate not P. 8-242
supported
8036 Invalid certificate authority Ipsec error if invalid certificate P. 8-242
authentication
8037 Certificate unavailable Ipsec error if certificate are not P. 8-242
avialable
8038 No ISAKMP SA established Ipsec error for SA is not present P. 8-242
8039 Invalid Signature Ipsec error for invalid signaturer P. 8-243
for certificate
803A No IKEv2 proposal chosen Ipsec error is proposal choosen is P. 8-243
wrong
803B IKEv2 Certificate Authentication Ipsec error for ikev2 certification P. 8-243
failed failed
803C IKEv2 Secret key Authentication Ipsec error for ikev2 if secret key P. 8-243
failed auth failed
803D Falling Back to IKEv1 Ipsec error if peer dosent support P. 8-243
IKEv2 and falling back to IKEv1
803E ISAKMP SA unusable (deleted) Ipsec error if ISAKMP SA is not P. 8-244
created of destroyed due to some
uncertain condition
803F Crypto operation failed Ipsec error for ikev2 if crypto P. 8-244
operation failed
8040 Invalid key information Ipsec error for ikev2 if key info is P. 8-244
invalid
8041 CA not trusted Ipsec error for ikev2 if CA is not P. 8-244
trusted

8 - 39
TopAccess screen
8042 Authentication Method mismatch Ipsec error if auth method is not P. 8-244
matching
8043 IKE Version mismatch Ipsec error if ike version is not P. 8-245
matching
8044 Encapsulation mode mismatch Ipsec error for encaptulation is P. 8-245
not matching
8045 Peer IP Address mismatch Ipsec error for peer ip mismatch P. 8-245
8046 Local IP Address mismatch Ipsec error for local ip mismatch P. 8-245
8047 Local ID mismatch Ipsec error for local id mismatch P. 8-245
8048 Remote ID mismatch Ipsec error for remote id P. 8-245
mismatch
8049 IPsec Remote IP mismatch Ipsec error for remote ip P. 8-246
mismatch
804A IKEv1/IKEv2 Timed out Ipsec error for ike timeout P. 8-246
804B Invalid manual key data Ipsec error id manual key is not P. 8-246
valid
8061 Secure Update to Primary IPv4 Secure primary DDNS update P. 8-246
DDNS failed. error
8062 Secure Update to Secondary Secure secondary DDNS update P. 8-246
IPv4 DDNS failed error
8063 Secure Update to Primary IPv6 Secure primary DDNS update P. 8-246
DDNS failed. error
8064 Secure Update to Secondary Secure secondary DDNS update P. 8-246
IPv6 DDNS failed error
8065 IPv6 Update to Primary DDNS IPv6 primary DDNS update error P. 8-246
failed.
8066 IPv6 Update to Secondary DDNS IPv6 secondary DDNS update P. 8-246
failed. error
8067 IPv4 Update to Primary DDNS IPv4 primary DDNS update error P. 8-246
failed.
8068 IPv4 Update to Secondary DDNS IPv4 secondary DDNS update P. 8-246
failed. error
8069 Invalid TSIG/SIG(0) Key file This message is displayed when P. 8-247
uploaded the key file for SIG(0) or TSIG is
invalid
8101 Wireless association with Access Wireless association with Access P. 8-247
point failure point failure
8102 Unable to contact Access point MFP not able to contact the P. 8-247
Access point with the specified
SSID
8103 Certificate verification Failure Wireless Certificate verification P. 8-247
failure
8121 Domain - General Failure during Domain - General Failure during P. 8-247
Authentication Authentication
8122 Domain - Invalid Username or Domain - Invalid Username or P. 8-248
Password Password
8123 Domain - Server not present in Domain - Server not present in P. 8-248
Network Network
8124 Domain - User account is Domain - User account is P. 8-248
disabled on Server disabled on Server

8 - 40
TopAccess screen
8125 Domain - User account has Domain - User account has P. 8-248
expired and cannot be used for expired and cannot be used for
logon logon
8126 Domain - User account is locked Domain - User account is locked P. 8-248
and cannot be used for logon and cannot be used for logon
8127 Domain - Invalid logon hours for Domain - Invalid logon hours for P. 8-249
the User the User
8128 Active Directory Domain - Clock Active Directory Domain - Clock P. 8-249
Skew error due to difference in Skew error due to difference in
Time between Server and MFP Time between Server and MFP
8129 Active Directory Domain - Active Directory Domain - P. 8-249
Kerberos Ticket has expired and Kerberos Ticket has expired and
cannot be used for Authentication cannot be used for Authentication
812A Active Directory Domain - Active Directory Domain - P. 8-249
Verification of the Ticket has Verification of the Ticket has
failed failed
812B Active Directory Domain-The Active Directory Domain-The P. 8-249
Domain specified could not be Domain specified could not be
found found
8

8 - 41
8.2.9 Error history
In the setting mode (08-9703), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10 99999999 2013-07-11 17:05:32 064 064 2362_1000_0000_0_X

XXXXXXXXX
Error code Total counter YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS MMM NNN ABCD_EFHI_JLOP_Q
_R
4 digits 8 digits 14 digits 3 digits 3 digits 23 digits
A Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: 1st drawer 4: 2nd drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
B Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J:
8.5"SQ K: A3-wide L: LD wide M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 Q: DL R: Monarch S:
CHO-3 T: YOU-4 U: SRA3(320x450) V: SRA3(320x460) Z: Not selected
C Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple
8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch B: center fold
D ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
E APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
F Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
G Unused
H Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 3: Right 4: Top 5: Bottom 6: Book+Top 7: Book+Bottom 8:
Left+Top
9: Left+Bottom A: Right+Top B: Right+Bottom
I Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused 5: NEG/POS
J Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
K Unused
L Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail
reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
O Color mode
0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale
6: Unused 7: Image smoothing

8 - 42
P Media type
0: Plain paper 1: Thick 1 2: Thick 2 3: Thick 3 4: Thick 4 5: Special paper 1 6: Special
paper 2
7: Recycled paper 8: Plain paper 1 9: Plain paper 2 A: Thin paper B: OHP film C: Thick 1/
reverse D: Thick 2/ reverse E: Thick 3/ reverse F: Thick 4/ reverse G: Special paper 1/
reverse
H: Special paper 2/ reverse I: Envelope J: Tab paper K: Plain paper/ reverse L: Recycled
paper/ reverse M: Thin paper/ reverse N: Special paper 3/ reverse O: Special paper 3/
reverse P: Envelope/ reverse Z: Unused
Q RADF size mixed
0: Unused 1: Size mixed 2: Single-size document
R Workflow ID: 10-digit ID

8 - 43
8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code
8.3.1 Check item
Check item Contents

Sensor check • Check the sensor in the test mode.
• Check that there is no dust on the sensor.
• Check that the actuator is correctly operated.
Connector check • Check that the connector is not disconnected.
• Check that the pins are not deformed and do not come off.
• Disconnect and reconnect the connector.
Harness check • Check if the harnesses are open circuited.
Motor check • Check the motor in the test mode.
• Check that there is no abnormality in the driving section.
• Check that there is no abnormality in the roller.
Board check • Check if the board is short circuited or open circuited.
8.3.2 Paper transport jam (paper exit section)

[E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor
Classification Error content

Paper transport jam Jam not reaching the exit sensor
Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures

Paper jamming immediately Transfer belt Check if the transfer belt unit is installed properly.
after the removal and unit  P. 4-90 "4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU)"
installation of the transfer belt
unit.
Paper jamming at separation Fuser unit Clean the separation finger.
finger in the Fuser Unit. Check if the fingers or springs of the separation
finger are securely attached.
Replace the separation finger.
Paper separation failure at Fuser unit • Paper tranceport check
separation finger in the Fuser Drawer Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides
Unit of the drawer.
Leading edge Adjust the margin with 05-4402 (Leading edge
margin position adjustment) to "Color: 5.5 mm".
Widen the margin if needed.
(Specification Black: 4.2 mm / Color: 5 mm)
• Use A3/LD paper
• It is easy to check skew with a copy of a solid
image (about 10 mm on its leading edge).
Refer to  P. 6-15 "[C] Secondary scanning data
writing start position".

8 - 44
The leading edge of paper has Fuser unit Check that the pressure release screw of the
no scratches and the paper pressure roller is securely tightened and pressure
stops before being fused. is properly applied.
Transfer belt Replace the transfer belt.
Replace the transfer belt unit.
Paper folded in one side and Check if toner adheres to the fuser entry guide.
fused during duplex printing Clean it if needed.
All Exit sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
[ALL]OFF/[9]/[C])
• Connector check
• Harness check
LGC board • Board check
• Connector check (CN301)
• Harness check
Parts to be replaced Remark

Separation finger of the fuser
unit
Transfer belt
Transfer belt unit
8
Exit sensor
LGC board

8 - 45
[E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor

Paper transport jam Stop jam at the exit sensor

Paper separation failure at Fuser unit • Paper tranceport check
separation finger in the fuser Drawer Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides
unit of the drawer.
Leading edge Adjust the margin with 05-4402 (Leading edge
• Use A3/LD paper
Refer to  P. 6-15 "[C] Secondary scanning data
writing start position".
Scratches on the leading edge Check if toner adheres to the exit gate. Clean it if
of paper needed.
All Self-diagnosis Change the setting value of 08-4542 (Switching for
code incorrect size jam detection) from “1” (Disabled) to
“0”(Enabled).
Exit sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
[ALL]OFF/[9]/[C])
• Actuator check
• Connector check
• Harness check
• Harness check

Separation finger of the fuser
unit
Exit sensor
LGC board

8 - 46
8.3.3 Paper misfeeding
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Paper transport jam ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Paper stop jam at the Registration Check the registration guide.
registration roller position guide Replace it if needed.
All Registration • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
sensor [ALL]OFF/[9]/[A])
• Connector check (CN400, CN404)
• Harness check
CFD board • Board check
• Harness check
• Harness check
ADU Check if the connector between the ADU and
equipment is connected. 8

Registration sensor
CFD board
LGC board
Rollers in the ADU Clean or replace it.
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the bypass feed sensor)

Paper transport jam Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the feed sensor)
Check item Measures

Bypass feed clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-204)
• Connector check (J734, CN403)
• Harness check
Feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[B])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

Bypass feed clutch
Feed sensor
CFD board

8 - 47
LGC board
Bypass feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.
Bypass separation pad Replace it if it is worn out.
[E130] 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)

Paper transport jam 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the feed sensor)
Check item Measures

1st drawer (loaded paper When thick paper is used and if it is overloaded, reduce the amount
amount) as specified (Stack height 14 mm).
• Connector check (CN401, J771, J746)
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

Feed sensor
CFD board
LGC board
1st drawer feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.
1st drawer separation pad Replace it if it is worn out.
1st drawer pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out.
[E140] 2nd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)

Paper transport jam 2nd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed
sensor)
Check item Measures

2nd drawer feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[D])
• Connector check (J931, J940)
• Harness check
2nd drawer feed clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-202)
• Harness check
PFC board • Board check
• Harness check

2nd drawer feed sensor
PFC board

8 - 48
2nd drawer feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.
2nd drawer separation roller Replace it if it is worn out.
2nd drawer pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out.
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)

Paper transport jam PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper
drawer feed sensor)
Check item Measures

PFP upper drawer feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C])
• Harness check
PFP upper drawer feed clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-226)
• Harness check
• Harness check 8
PFP board • Board check
• Connector check (J959, CN241, CN246, CN247)
• Harness check

PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP upper drawer feed clutch
PFC board
PFP board
PFP upper drawer feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.
Separation roller Replace it if it is worn out.
Pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out.
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)

Paper transport jam PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower
drawer feed sensor)
Check item Measures

PFP upper drawer feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[D])
• Harness check
PFP upper drawer feed clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-228)
• Harness check
• Harness check

8 - 49
Check item Measures
• Connector check (J959, CN241, CN246, CN247)
• Harness check

PFP lower drawer feed sensor
PFP lower drawer feed clutch
PFC board
PFP board
PFP lower drawer feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)

Paper transport jam LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
Check item Measures

LCF feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[COPY]ON/[9]/[F])
• Connector check (CN1, CN6, CN349)
• Harness check
LCF feed clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-209)
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

LCF feed sensor
LCF feed clutch
PFC board
LGC board
PFP board
LCF feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.

8 - 50
8.3.4 Paper transport jam
[E200] 1st drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E210] 2nd drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E270] Bypass transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E300] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E330] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E3C0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)

Paper transport jam 1st drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
2nd drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
Bypass transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration
sensor)
PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration
sensor)
LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
Check item Measures

Registration sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[A])
• Harness check 8
Feed clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-201)
• Connector check (CN305, J748)
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

Registration sensor
Feed clutch
CFD board
LGC board
Feed roller Replace it if it is worn out.
Separation roller, Separation Replace it if it is worn out.
pad
Transport roller Replace it if it is worn out.

8 - 51
[E220] 2nd drawer transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
[E310] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
[E340] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
[E3D0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)

Paper transport jam 2nd drawer transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
LCF transport jam (not reaching the feed sensor)
Check item Measures

• Harness check
Transport clutches (high • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-230)
speed) • Connector check (J932, 942)
• Harness check
Transport clutches (low speed) • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-233)
• Connector check (J932, 941)
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

1st drawer feed sensor
Transport clutches (high
speed)
Transport clutches (low speed)
CFD board
LGC board
PFC board

8 - 52
[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
[E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
[E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)

Paper transport jam PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed
sensor)
PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed
sensor)
LCF transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
Check item Measures

2nd drawer feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[F])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check
8
2nd drawer feed sensor
LGC board
PFC board
[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)

Paper transport jam PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper
drawer feed sensor)
Check item Measures

PFP upper drawer feed sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C])
• Harness check
PFP transport clutch • Clutch check (Perform the output check: 03-225)
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check
8 - 53
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
PFP transport clutches
PFC board
LGC board
PFP board
PFP transport roller Replace it if it is worn out.

8 - 54
[E510] ADU transport stop jam

Paper transport jam ADU transport stop jam
[20ppm/25ppm]

Paper falling on the inner tray ADU Check if the connector between the ADU and
equipment is connected.
Paper jamming at the exit gate Drawer Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides
section of the drawer.
Check the setting size and paper size.
Example: Check if the paper size is A4 though A3
is set.
Fuser Unit Check that springs are securely attached to the
separation finger.
Exit unit Check if the toner is adhered to the exit gate, and
wipe it off if necessary.
Stop in the fuser unit / Fuser Unit Check if the bracket or jam releasing guide of the
scratches on the leading edge fuser unit is deformed. Replace it if needed.
of paper 8
All ADU entrance • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
sensor [ALL]OFF/[9]/[G])
• Harness check
Exit motor • Motor check (Perform the output check: 03-121/
171)
• Harness check
ADU motor • Motor check (Perform the output check: 03-110/
160)
• Harness check
• Harness check
ADU board • Board check
• Connector check (CN420, CN421, CN422,
J640)
• Harness check

ADU entrance sensor
Exit motor
ADU motor
LGC board
ADU board
Rollers in the ADU Replace it if it is worn out.
Exit roller Replace it if it is worn out.
Pressure spring

8 - 55
[LL20ppm/LL25ppm]

Paper falling on the inner tray ADU Check if the connector between the ADU and
equipment is connected.
Paper jamming at the exit gate Drawer Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides
section of the drawer.
Check the setting size and paper size.
Example: Check if the paper size is A4 though A3
is set.
Fuser Unit Check that springs are securely attached to the
separation finger.
Stop in the fuser unit / Fuser Unit Check if the bracket or jam releasing guide of the
scratches on the leading edge fuser unit is deformed. Replace it if needed.
of paper
All ADU entrance • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
sensor [ALL]OFF/[9]/[G])
• Harness check
Exit motor • Motor check (Perform the output check: 03-121/
171)
• Harness check
ADU motor • Motor check (Perform the output check: 03-110/
160)
• Harness check
EXT board • Board check
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Connector check (CN420, CN421, CN422,
J640)
• Harness check

ADU entrance sensor
Exit motor
ADU motor
EXT board
LGC board
ADU board
Pressure spring

8 - 56
[E520] Stop jam in the ADU

Paper transport jam Stop jam in the ADU
Check item Measures

ADU entrance sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[H])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Connector check (J640, CN420, CN421)
• Harness check
ADU motor • Motor check (Perform the output check: 03-110/160)
• Harness check
• Bracket check

8
ADU entrance sensor
ADU clutch
LGC board
ADU board
Pressure spring
[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding

Paper transport jam Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding
When the paper is fed from any of the 1st drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU:
(When the paper is fed from the 1st drawer:)
Check item Measures

• Connector check (J746, J771, CN401)
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

Feed sensor
CFD board
LGC board

8 - 57
pad
(When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:)
Check item Measures

Feed sensor • Sensor check(Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[B])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

1st drawer feed sensor
CFD board
LGC board
pad
(When the paper is fed from the ADU:)
Check item Measures

ADU entrance sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[H])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Connector check (J640, CN420, CN421)
• Harness check
Registration sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[A])
• Harness check
• Harness check

ADU entrance sensor
LGC board
ADU board
CFD board
Registration sensor
Roller Replace it if it is worn out.

8 - 58
When the paper is fed from any of the PFU, PFP or LCF:
Check item Measures

PFU, PFP or LCF • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1/[F])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

1st/2nd drawer feed sensor
LGC board
PFC board
Roller Replace it if it is worn out.
[EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding 8

Paper transport jam
Check item Measures

Registration sensor • Sensor check
(Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[A])
• Harness check
• Harness check
PFC board • Connector check (CN334)
• Board check
Drive unit, Rollers • Gear check
• Roller check

Registration sensor
CFD board
PFC board
Rollers Replace it if it is worn out.

8 - 59
8.3.5 Other paper jam
[E011] Paper jam caused by clinging to the transfer belt (Paper not reached the paper clinging
detection sensor)

Other paper jam Paper jam caused by clinging to the transfer belt (Paper not
reached the paper clinging detection sensor)

Paper jamming immediately Transfer belt Check if the transfer belt unit is installed properly.
after the removal and unit  P. 4-90 "4.7.3 Transfer belt unit (TBU)"
installation of the transfer belt
unit.
Paper stop jam at transfer belt Drawer Check if paper is folded at the leading edge.
No scratches on the paper Drawer Check if paper is folded at the leading edge.
leading edge Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides
of the drawer.
Process unit Clean the process unit or replace it.
Paper Clean the sensor
clinging
detection
sensor

8 - 60
All CFD board •Board check
•Connector check (CN406, CN408)
•Harness check
LGC board •Board check
•Connector check (CN334)
•Harness check
Paper •Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
clinging [ALL]OFF/[9]/[E])
detection • Connector check (J746, J645, CN405)
sensor • Harness check
Check of the Check that the 2nd transfer roller shaft is securely
2nd transfer grounded via the frame.
roller • Check if the leaf spring is deformed.
connection • Check if the shaft tip and the leaf spring contact
properly.
Change of the If the leading edge of paper clings to the 2nd
2nd transfer transfer roller and causes paper jamming, change
bias the 2nd transfer roller bias correction factor of the
leading/trailing edge of the paper. (The larger the
value, the smaller the transfer voltage of the
leading/trailing edge of the paper.) 8
Codes to be changed (Initial value of the
transfer bias of the leading edge of the paper: 0)
• Color mode print (top side): 05-2938-*
• Color mode print (back side): 05-2939-*
• Black mode print (top side): 05-2940-*
• Black mode print (back side): 05-2941-*
Sub codes:* -> Plain paper: 0, Recycled
paper: 7
Notes:
After these codes are changed, perform
solid duplex-printing and check that there is
no faint or void image on the leading/trailing
edge of the paper.

Process unit
Registration motor
CFD board
LGC board
Paper clinging detection
sensor
Registration roller Replace it if it is worn out.

8 - 61
[E013] Jam not reaching transport sensor after paper alignment at the registration roller

Other paper jam Jam not reaching transport sensor after paper alignment at the
registration roller

Paper stop jam at Registration Drawer Check if any damage is at the leading edge.
roller Check if paper is folded at the leading edge.
Drive unit, • Drive unit check
Rollers • Gear check
• Roller check
Developer Replace the Developer unit.
unit

Rollers
Developer unit

8 - 62
[E030] Power-ON jam

Other paper jam Power-ON jam
Check item Measures

Sensor in the jamming area • Sensor check (Refer to the table below)
• Connector check
• Harness check
• Connector check
• Harness check

Sensor in the jamming area Refer to the table below.
LGC board
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers.

(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, PFC, PFU, CFD, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test Mode/Input check 8

Registration area Jam access Registration sensor 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[A]
cover Paper clinging detection 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[E]
sensor
Registration pass sensor 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[F]
Feed sensor 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[B]
Exit area Fuser cover Exit sensor 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[C]
ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[G]
ADU exit sensor 03-[ALL]OFF/[9]/[H]
PFU Side cover 2nd drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[F]
LCF LCF side cover LCF feed sensor 03-[COPY]ON/[9]/[F]
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[D]
Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor-1 03-[ALL]OFF/[0]/[A]
(Entrance sensor)
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 03-[ALL]OFF/[0]/[B]
(Exit sensor)
Finisher Finisher door Sensors in the finisher -

8 - 63
[E061]Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer
[E062]Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer
[E063]Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer
[E064]Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer
[E065]Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the drawer
setting and the one in the drawer.
* Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened or closed, or
when the power of the equipment is turned ON.
[E090]Image data delay jam
Classification Error item

Other paper jam Image data to be printed cannot be prepared.
Check item Measures

Other • Remove the paper remained in front of the registration
sensor)
• Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and
then back ON.
SYS board • Connector check
• Board check
LGC board • Connector check
• Board check
HDD • Connector check
• HDD check
Page memory Check if the page memory is correctly connected to the
connector on the SYS board.
Replace parts Remarks

SYS board
LGC board
HDD
Page memory
[E091] Motor on time-out jam

Other paper jam The equipment does not operate normally because
abnormality occurred on an interface between the SYS board
and engine firmware.
Check item Measures

Other • Check if there is any paper in the equipment. Remove it if
there is.
• If the error still occurs, check the following.
Power Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and
then back ON.
• Board check
• Board check

8 - 64
Check item Measures
• HDD check

SYS board
LGC board
HDD
[E0A0]Image transport ready time-out jam

Other paper jam Image transport ready time-out jam
Check item Measures

LGC board Connector check

LGC board
8
[E550] Paper remaining jam on the transport path

Other paper jam Paper remaining on the transport path when printing is finished
(caused by a multiple paper feeding)
Next
Step Check Item Result Measure
Step
Jamming transport path Open the cover of the unit/area whose
picture is flashing on the control panel
1
and remove any paper on the transport
path.
Feed or transport roller possibly Check the feed roller.
2
causing multiple feeding
Sensor in the jamming area • Sensor check (Refer to the table
below)
3
• Harness check
• Connector check
LGC board • Harness check
• Connector check
• Board check
4
Notes:
If the jam is occurring in the ADU, PFC, PFU, CFD, LCF or PFP, check the
board in each unit.

Feed or transport roller
possibly causing multiple
feeding
LGC board

8 - 65
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test Mode/Input check

sensor
(Entrance sensor)
(Exit sensor)
[E551] Paper remaining jam on the transport path (when a service call occurs)
[E552] Paper remaining jam on the transport path (when the cover is closed)

Other paper jam Paper remaining on the transport path when printing is finished
(when a service call occurs) (E551)
Paper remaining on the transport path when printing is finished
(when the cover is closed) (E552)
Next
Step
Jamming transport path Open the cover of the unit/area whose
picture is flashing on the control panel
1
and remove any paper on the transport
path.
Sensor in the jamming area • Sensor check (Refer to the table
below)
2
• Harness check
• Connector check
LGC board • Harness check
• Connector check
• Board check
3
Notes:
If the jam is occurring in the ADU, PFC, PFU, CFD, LCF or PFP, check the
board in each unit.

Feed or transport roller
possibly causing multiple
feeding

8 - 66
LGC board
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test Mode/Input check

sensor
(Entrance sensor) 8
(Exit sensor)

8 - 67
8.3.6 Cover open jam
[E400] Jam access cover open

Cover open jam Jam access cover open
Check item Measures

Switching regulator • Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF[7]/[D])
• Fuse check (F201, F202, F203)
• Harness check
Transfer cover switch • Switch check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[7]/[A])
• Harness check

Switching regulator
LGC board
Transfer cover switch
[E410] Front cover open jam

Cover open jam Front cover open jam
Check item Measures

Switching regulator • Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF[7]/[D])
• Fuse check (F201, F202, F203)
• Harness check

Switching regulator
LGC board

8 - 68
[E420] PFP side cover open jam

Cover open jam PFP side cover open jam
Check item Measures

PFP side cover opening/ • Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?
closing switch (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A])
• Harness check
• Harness check
• Harness check

PFP side cover opening/
closing switch
PFP board 8
PFC board
[E430] ADU opened during printing

Cover open jam ADU open jam
Check item Measures

Side cover switch • Is the switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON[4]/[A])
• Harness check
• Harness check

Side cover switch
LGC board

8 - 69
[E440] Side cover open jam

Cover open jam Side cover open jam
Check item Measures

Side cover switch • Is the switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON[4]/[A])
• Harness check
• Harness check

Side cover switch
LGC board
[E450] LCF side cover open jam

Cover open jam LCF side cover open jam
Check item Measures

LCF side cover opening/ • Is the switch working?
closing switch (Perform the input check: 03-[COPY]ON/[9]/[A])
• Harness check
LCF board • Board check
• Harness check
• Harness check

LCF side cover opening/
closing switch
LCF board
PFC board

8 - 70
[E480] Bridge unit open jam

Cover open jam Bridge unit open jam
Check item Measures

Bridge unit cover opening/ • Is the sensor working?
closing detection sensor (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[7]/[B])
• Connector check (J805)
• Harness check
• Harness check

Bridge unit cover opening/
closing detection sensor
LGC board
[E490] Job separator cover has opened during printing

8
Cover open jam Job separator cover open jam
Check item Measures

Job separator cover switch • Is the Job separator cover switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF[7]/[B])
• Harness check
• Harness check

Job separator cover switch
LGC board

8 - 71
8.3.7 RADF jam
[E712] Jam not reaching the original registration sensor

RADF jam Jam not reaching the original registration sensor
Check item Measures

Pickup roller Clean them if ther are stained.
Feed roller
Separation roller
Original registration sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[H])
• Harness check
RADF board • Board check
• Harness check

Original registration sensor
RADF board
Pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out
[E714] Feed signal reception jam

RADF jam Feed signal reception jam
Check item Measures

Empty sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[B])
• Lever check
• Harness check

Empty sensor

8 - 72
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor

RADF jam Jam not reaching the read sensor

All Registration Clean the registration roller and the read roller if
sensor they are stained.
Read roller
Read sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
[FAX] ON[7]/[G])
• Harness check
• Harness check

Reading start guide of the
RADF
Paper guide of the RADF 8
Read sensor
RADF board
Read roller Replace it if it is worn out.
[E722] Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor (during scanning)

RADF jam Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor (during scanning)
Check item Measures

Read roller Clean the read roller if it is stained.
Original exit/reverse sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[E])
• Harness check
• Harness check

Original exit/reverse sensor
RADF board

8 - 73
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor

RADF jam Stop jam at the registration sensor
Check item Measures

Registration roller Clean the registration roller if it is stained.
Registration sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[H])
• Harness check
• Harness check
Original width detection • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[8]/[F])
sensor-1 • Connector check (J94)
• Harness check
Original width detection • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[8]/[G])
sensor-2 • Connector check (J94)
• Harness check

Registration sensor
RADF board
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor

RADF jam Stop jam at the read sensor
Check item Measures

Read roller Clean the read roller if it is stained.
Read sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[G])
• Harness check
Original intermediate transport • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[F])
sensor • Connector check (CN75, J94)
• Harness check
• Harness check

Read sensor
RADF board

8 - 74
[E726] Transport/exit signal reception jam

RADF jam Transport/exit signal reception jam
Check item Measures

• Connector check
• Harness check
SYS board • Board check
• Connector check
• Harness check
Switching power supply • Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply
are normal.
• Board check
• Connector check
• Harness check

RADF board
SYS board 8
Switching power supply
[E731] Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor

RADF jam Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor
Check item Measures

Exit roller Clean the exit roller if it is stained.
Stop jam at the original exit/ • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[E])
reverse sensor • Connector check (J93)
• Harness check
• Harness check

Exit sensor
RADF board

8 - 75
[E860] RADF jam access cover open

RADF jam RADF jam access cover open
Check item Measures

RADF jam access cover • Switch check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[C])
sensor • Connector check (CN72)
• Harness check
• Harness check

RADF jam access cover
sensor
RADF board
[E870] RADF open jam

RADF jam RADF open jam
Check item Measures

RADF opening/closing sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON[7]/[D])
• Harness check
• Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the
specified range?
• Harness check

RADF opening/closing sensor
RADF board
[E871] Cover open jam in the read ready status

RADF jam Jam caused by opening of the Original jam access cover or
front cover while the RADF is waiting for the scanning start
signal from the equipment.
Check item Measures

RADF • Close the RADF if it is opened.
• Remove if there is any original before closing it.
Original jam access cover opening/ • Sensor check
closing sensor (Perform the input check: 03: [FAX]/ON/[7]/[C])
• Connector check
• Harness check

8 - 76
Check item Measures
RADF board • Connector check (CN75)
• Board check

Original jam access cover opening/
closing sensor
RADF board

8 - 77
8.3.8 Paper jam in bridge unit
[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1

Jam in bridge unit Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1
Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1

Paper separation failure at Drawer Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides
separation guide in the fuser of the drawer.
unit Leading edge Adjust the margin with 05-4402 (Leading edge
Widen the margin if needed.
• Use A3/LD paper
Refer to " P. 6-1 "6.1.1 Adjustment Order".
There are scratches on the Replace it if needed.Check if the guide is not
leading paper edge deformed. Replace it if needed.
All Bridge unit Check that Mylar on the bridge unit exit is not
exit deformed. Replace it if needed. (E920)
Finisher Check if paper jamming occurs in the finisher.
Bridge unit • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-
transport [ALL]OFF[0]/[A])
sensor-1 • Connector check (CN302, J691, J801)
(entrance • Harness check
sensor)
Bridge unit • Solenoid check (Perform the output check: 03-
gate solenoid 232)
• Harness check
• Harness check
Bridge unit • Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work
when the fuser motor is rotated? (Perform the
output check: 03-113/163)
• Check the drive system of the equipment and
bridge unit.
• Check if the rollers in the exit roller, the pressure
spring and the bridge unit are worn out.

Bridge unit transport sensor-1
(entrance sensor)
LGC board
Bridge unit gate solenoid

8 - 78
[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2
[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2

Jam in bridge unit Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2
Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
Check item Measures

Bridge unit transport sensor-2 • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF[0]/[B])
(exit sensor) • Connector check (CN302, J691, J802)
• Harness check
• Connector check (CN302, J691)
• Harness check
Bridge unit • Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the fuser
motor is rotated? (Perform the output check: 03-113/163)
• Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
• Check if the rollers in the exit roller, the pressure spring and the
bridge unit are worn out.

Bridge unit transport sensor-2 8
(exit sensor)
LGC board

8 - 79
8.3.9 Paper jam in job separator
[E950] Jam not reaching the JSP feed sensor
[E951] Stop jam at the JSP feed sensor

Job separator jam Jam not reaching the job separator transport sensor
Stop jam at the job separator transport sensor
Proce Next
Check item Result Measure
dure Step
1 Open the JSP cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper on the No 2
transport path?
2 Is the JSP feed sensor Yes 3
working? (Perform the No • Check if the connector of the JSP feed
input check in the test sensor is disconnected.
mode: 03-[ALL]OFF/[0]/ • Check if either of the connectors CN260 or
[A]) CN262 on the JSP board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN397 on the LGC
board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are
disconnected and the harnesses are open
circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the JSP
board and LGC board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the JSP feed sensor.
• Replace the JSP board.
• Replace the LGC board.
3 Replacing board • Replace the JSP board.
• Replace the LGC board.

JSP feed sensor
JSP board
LGC board

8 - 80
8.3.10 Paper jam in finisher section
[EA10, EA20] 1st transport motor (M8) fault/ 2nd transport motor (M4) fault

Finisher jam Paper transport delay jam
(Finisher section)
MJ-1036
Probable cause Checking and measures

1st transport motor (M8) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is
abnormality not conducted, replace the motor.
Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is
normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the connector.
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN22)
2nd transport motor (M4) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is
Finisher control PC board If the error still occurs after replacing the motor and the connector, 8
(FIN) abnormality exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN).
[EA10, EA20] Transport motor-1 (M1) fault/ Transport motor-2 (M2) fault

Finisher jam Paper transport delay jam
(Finisher section)
MJ-1037

Transport motor-1 (M1) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
abnormality conducted, replace the motor.
Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal.
If electricity is not conducted, replace the connector. (Finisher control PC
board (FIN): CN13)
Transport motor-2 (M2) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Paddle home position sensor fault Measure the voltage of the TP30 on the finisher control PC board (FIN),
and check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and
within the range of 3.3V 5% when shielded. If the voltage does not fall
within the above range, replace the sensor.
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor and the connector,
abnormality exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN).

8 - 81
[EA25] Stack exit motor (M5) abnormality

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport jam in the Finisher
MJ-1036

Stack exit motor (M5) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
conducted, replace the motor.
If electricity is not conducted, replace the connectors. (Finisher control PC
board (FIN): CN14)
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensor and connectors,
[EA2A] Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Entrance path - middle path sensor)

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Entrance path - middle path
sensor)
MJ-1036

Entrance path sensor (S19) Measure the voltage on TP86 on the finisher control PC board
abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when
not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5% when shielded. If the
voltage does not fall within the range mentioned, replace the
sensor.
Middle path sensor (S7) Measure the voltage on TP84 on the finisher control PC board
not shielded and within the range of 3.3V±5% when shielded. If the
sensor.
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN6, CN14, CN22)
Finisher control PC board If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector,
(FIN) abnormality replace the finisher control PC board (FIN).

8 - 82
[EA2B] Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Middle path sensor)

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Middle path sensor)
MJ-1036

sensor.
sensor.
normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the connector. 8
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN6, CN14, CN22)
[EA2C] Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Entrance path - sub-path sensor)

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Entrance path - sub-path
sensor)
MJ-1036

sensor.
Sub-path sensor (S8) Measure the voltage on TP85 on the finisher control PC board
sensor.

8 - 83
Stationary tray full detection Measure the voltage on TP26 on the finisher control PC board
sensor (S11) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when
sensor.
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN6, CN10, CN14, CN22)
[EA2D] Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Sub-path sensor)

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport jam in the Finisher (Sub-path sensor)
MJ-1036

sensor.
sensor.
Stationary tray full detection Measure the voltage on TP26 on the finisher control PC board
sensor.
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN6, CN10, CN14, CN22)

8 - 84
[EA2E, EA31] Transport jam in Finisher

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport remaining jam in the Finisher
MJ-1036

sensor.
not shielded and within the range of 3.3V
±
5% when shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range
mentioned, replace the sensor.
not shielded and within the range of 3.3V 8
±
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN6, CN22)
[EA31] Transport jam in Finisher

Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport remaining jam in the Finisher:
MJ-1037

Entrance path sensor (S1) Measure the voltage on TP1 on the finisher control PC board (FIN). Then
abnormality check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and
within the range of 3.3V5% when shielded. If the voltage does not fall
within the range mentioned, replace the sensor.
board (FIN): CN1)
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector,

8 - 85
[EA32] Finishing tray paper detection error

Paper jam in finisher section Exit paper remaining jam
MJ-1036

Finishing tray sensor (S4) Measure the voltage on TP14 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
abnormality Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
shielded and within the range of 3.3V5% when shielded. If the voltage
does not fall within the range mentioned, replace the sensor.
normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the connector. (Finisher
control PC board (FIN): CN5)
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the
abnormality connector, exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN).
MJ-1037

Finishing tray sensor (S2) abnormality Measure the voltage on TP26 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector,
[EA40] Cover open detection error

Paper jam in finisher section Cover open error
MJ-1036

Sub-path opening/closing Measure the voltage on TP12 on the finisher control PC board
sensor.
Front cover switch (SW1) Measure the voltage on TP77 on the finisher control PC board
the switch is ON and within the range of 3.3V 5% when OFF. If the
voltage does not fall within the range mentioned, replace the switch.
board (FIN): CN10, CN13)
Finisher control PC board If the error still occurs after replacing the switches, sensor and connector,

8 - 86
[EA50] Stapling jam

Paper jam in finisher section Stapling jam
MJ-1036

Staple unit stapling start position Measure the voltage on TP23 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
sensor (S17) abnormality Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the sensor
is ON and within the range of 3.3V

5% when OFF. If the voltage does not fall within the range
mentioned, replace the staple unit.
Staple unit staple empty sensor Measure the voltage on TP24 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
(S18) abnormality Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the sensor
is ON and within the range of 3.3V

5% when OFF. If the voltage does not fall within the range
8
normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the connectors. (Finisher
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the staple unit and the
abnormality connectors, exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN).
[EA60] Early arrival jam

Paper jam in finisher section Early arrival jam
MJ-1036

sensor.

8 - 87
MJ-1037
Check item Measures

Entrance sensor • Sensor check
• Connector check
• Harness check
Finisher controller PC board • Board check
• Connector check
• Harness check

Entrance sensor
Finisher controller PC board

8 - 88
8.3.11 Paper jam in saddle stitcher section
[EA80] Stapling jam in the saddle stitch staple unit

Finisher jam Stapling jam in the saddle stitch staple unit
(Saddle stitcher section)
MJ-1037

Saddle stitch stapler motor (M14) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
abnormality electricity is not conducted, replace the saddle stitch staple
unit.
Saddle stitch staple unit clinching Measure the voltage on pin CN17.5 on the finisher control PC
home position sensor (S32) board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
abnormality lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 5V5%
when OFF. If the voltage does not fall within the range
mentioned, replace the saddle stitch staple unit.
Saddle stitch staple empty sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN17.7 on the finisher control PC
(S33) abnormality board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 5V5%
8
Faulty cables and connectors If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensor and
connectors, replace the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensor and
abnormality connectors, replace the finisher control PC board (FIN).

Saddle stitch stapler motor (M14) The motor is embedded in the saddle stitch staple unit.
Saddle stitch staple unit clinching The sensor is embedded in the saddle stitch staple unit.
home position sensor (S32)
Saddle stitch staple empty sensor The sensor is embedded in the saddle stitch staple unit.
(S33)
Finisher control PC board (FIN)
[EA81] Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller drive motor (M10) home position detection error

Finisher jam Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller drive motor (M10) home
(Saddle stitcher section) position detection error
MJ-1037

Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
drive motor (M10) abnormality electricity is not conducted, replace the motor.
Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller Measure the voltage on pin CN16.3 on the finisher control PC
abnormality lower when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5%
when shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range

8 - 89
Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector
terminals is normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the
connectors. (Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN6, CN16)

Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller
drive motor (M10)
Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller
home position sensor (S23)
[EAB0] Transport jam in Saddle Stitch Finisher

Finisher jam Transport jam in Saddle Stitch Finisher
MJ-1037

Transport motor-2 (M2) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
electricity is not conducted, replace the motor.
Saddle stitch entrance path sensor Measure the voltage on TP2 on the finisher control PC board
(S4) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5% when
shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range
[EAC1] Paper folding blade motor (M12) home position detection error

Finisher jam Paper folding blade motor (M12) home position detection
(Saddle stitcher section) error
MJ-1037

Paper folding blade motor (M12) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
abnormality electricity is not conducted, replace the motor.
Paper folding blade motor clock Measure the voltage on pin CN15.9 on the finisher control PC
sensor (S24) abnormality board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
lower when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5%

8 - 90
Paper folding blade home position Measure the voltage on pin CN15.3 on the finisher control PC
sensor (S19) abnormality board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or

Paper folding blade motor (M12)
Paper folding blade motor clock
sensor (S24)
Paper folding blade home position
sensor (S19)
[EAF1] Exit roller nip adjustment motor (M4) home position detection error 8
MJ-1037
Error Timing of detection

Finisher jam Exit roller nip adjustment motor (M4) home position detection
error

Exit roller nip adjustment motor (M4) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Exit roller nip home position sensor Measure the voltage on TP31 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
(S8) abnormality Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
control PC board (FIN): CN2, CN9)
[EAF2] Staple unit sliding motor (M11) home position detection error

Finisher jam Staple unit sliding motor (M11) home position detection errorr
MJ-1037

Staple unit sliding motor (M11) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
abnormality electricity is not conducted, replace the staple unit.

8 - 91
Edge staple unit sliding home Measure the voltage on pin CN7.6 on the finisher control PC
position sensor (S14) abnormality board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
Saddle stitch staple unit sliding home Measure the voltage on pin CN7.10 on the finisher control PC
Edge staple unit improper clinching Measure the voltage on pin CN10.11 on the finisher control
prevention sensor (S25) abnormality PC board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V
or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5%
connectors. (Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN7, CN10,
C17)

Staple unit sliding motor (M11)
Edge staple unit sliding home
position sensor (S14)
Saddle stitch staple unit sliding home
position sensor (S22)
Edge staple unit improper clinching
prevention sensor (S25)
[EAF3] Gripper motor (M3) abnormality

[CC91] Gripper arm home position detection error

Finisher jam Gripper arm motor home position detection error
MJ-1037

Gripper motor The turning OFF of the gripper arm home position sensor (S13) is not
Gripper arm home position sensor detected in the specified time when the gripper arm is exited.
The turning ON of the gripper arm home position sensor (S13) is not
detected in the specified time when the gripper arm is returned to its
home position.

Gripper motor (M3) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not

8 - 92
Gripper arm home position sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN10.8 on the finisher control PC board
(S13) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
Gripper arm exit sensor (S26) Measure the voltage on TP27 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Faulty cables and connectors If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensors and
connectors, exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensors and
[ED15] Paddle home position detection error

Finisher jam Paddle home position detection error
MJ-1037
8
Transport motor-2 The paddle home position sensor (S34) does not change from "ON"
Paddle home position sensor to "OFF" within the pre-specified time during paddle rotation.
The paddle home position sensor (S34) does not change from
"OFF" to "ON" within the pre-specified time during paddle rotation.
[EF14, EF1C] Jams in folding/exiting section

MJ-1037

Finisher jam (Saddle section) Outputting paper is not completed within a fixed time.

Saddle stitch finishing tray sensor Measure the voltage on TP65 on the finisher control PC
Saddle stitch exit path sensor (S5) Measure the voltage on TP68 on the finisher control PC
abnormality board (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensors and the

8 - 93
[EF1A] Paper transport jam in the saddle stitch staple unit

Finisher jam Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
(Saddle stitcher section) electricity is not conducted, replace the motor.
MJ-1037

Transport motor-2 (M2) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Saddle stitch entrance path sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN1.6 on the finisher control PC

Transport motor-2 (M2)
Saddle stitch entrance path sensor
(S4)
[EF1B] Saddle stitch finishing tray paper detection error

Finisher jam Paper remains at the saddle stitch positioning paper exit
(Finisher section) sensor for a longer period than specified while being
transported in the pushing/folding operation.
MJ-1037

Saddle stitch finishing tray sensor Measure the voltage on TP65 on the finisher control PC board
(S7) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned,
replace the sensor.
connector. (Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN15)
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the

8 - 94
8.3.12 Paper jam in puncher unit
[E9F0] Punching jam

Finisher jam Punching jam
(Puncher unit)
MJ-1037 (when MJ-6008 is installed)

Punch motor The turning OFF of the punch shaft home position sensor (S35)
Punch shaft home position sensor is not detected in the specified time when the punch motor
Punch shaft rotational direction (M15) is rotated.
sensor The turning ON of the punch shaft home position sensor (S35)
is not detected in the specified time when the punch motor
(M15) is rotated.
The punch shaft home position sensor (S35) and the punch
shaft rotational direction sensor (S34) do not specify the home
position or the rotational direction correspondingly during
initialization, or initialization is not finished at a turning-ON point
for the punch shaft home position sensor (S35). 8

Punch motor (M15) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Punch shaft home position sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN3.3 on the hole punch control
(S36) abnormality PC board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
lower when not shielded and within the range of 5V5% when
replace the sensor.
Punch shaft rotational direction Measure the voltage on pin CN3.9 on the hole punch control
sensor (S35) abnormality PC board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
replace the sensor.
Punch motor clock sensor (S37) Measure the voltage on pin CN3.6 on the hole punch control
abnormality PC board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
replace the sensor.
connector. (Hole punch control PC board (HP): CN3, CN6)
Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensors and
abnormality connectors, exchange the hole punch control PC board (HP).

8 - 95
8.3.13 Other paper jam
[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam

Other paper jam The printing has not finished normally because of an error occurring
on the interface between the SYS board and the engine firmware at
the end of printing.
Check item Measures

Power • Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and
• then back ON.
• Board check
• Board check

SYS board
LGC board
[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam

Other paper jam Receiving time-out jam
MJ-1031
Check item Measures

Finisher • Is the finisher working?
• Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
• Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher
side and PFC board is open circuited.
• Connector check
PFC board • Connector check(CN910, CN911, CN912)
• Check if the harness connecting the PFC board and switching
regulator is open circuited.
• Check if the harness connecting the PFC board and LGC board
is open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the PFC board is short
circuited or open circuited.
LGC board • Connector check(CN312)
• Check if the harness connecting the PFC board and LGC board
is open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short

LGC board
PFC board
Harness

8 - 96
[EB30] Ready time-out jam

Other paper jam Ready time-out jam
Check item Measures

Finisher Check if the connector on the equipment is disconnected from the
finisher or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.

PFC board
LGC board

8 - 97
8.3.14 Drive system related service call
[C020] Developer drive motor abnormality

Drive system related service Developer drive motor abnormality: The developer drive motor is
call not rotating normally.
Check item Measures

Developer unit • Check if the developer material is caked.
• Check if there is any abnormality in the row of gears on the rear
side of the developer unit.
• Check if the amount of developer material is proper.
Feeding/developing drive unit • Check if there is any foreign matter between the gears.
• Check if there is any damage on the gear tooth surface.
• Check if there is any scratch on the caliber or the shaft of each
gear.
• Check if the proper amount of grease is applied to the caliber or
the shaft of each gear.
• Check if there is any damage to the developer drive output
coupling.
Paper feeding/developer unit • Check that the motor is rotated normally. (03-112)
drive motor • Connector check
• Harness check
Drum TBU drive unit • Check if there is any foreign matter in the row of the color
developer drive gears.
• Check if there is any damage on the tooth surface of the color
developer drive gears.
color developer drive gear.
• Check if the proper amount of grease is applied to the caliber or
the shaft of each color developer drive gear.
• Check if there is any damage to the developer drive output
coupling.
• Harness check
Registration roller • Check if the registration rollers on both the equipment and the
ADU are rotated normally.
• Check if there is any damage to the roller bushing.
1st drawer feed roller • Check if the 1st drawer feed roller is overloaded.
• Check if there is any damage to the roller coupling.
Bypass unit • Check if the bypass feed roller is overloaded.
• Check if there is any damage to the row of the bypass unit
gears.
PFU drive section • Check if there is any foreign matter between the gears.
• Check if there is any damage on the gear tooth surface.
gear.
PFU transport roller • Check if the PFU transport roller is overloaded.
PFU feed roller • Check if the PFU feed roller is overloaded.

Developer unit

8 - 98
Feeding/developing drive unit
Paper feeding/developer unit drive
motor
Drum TBU drive unit
LGC board
Registration roller
1st drawer feed roller
Bypass unit
PFU drive section
PFU transport roller
PFU feed roller

8 - 99
8.3.15 Paper feeding system related service call
[C040] PFP motor abnormality

Paper feeding system related PFP motor abnormality
service call
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Is the PFP motor working? Yes 2
(Perform the output check: No • Check if the connector J952 of the PFP
03-109/159) motor is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN245 on the PFP
• Check if the connector CN241 on the PFP
board is
• Check if the connector CN913 on the PFC
disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
motor board, PFP board and PFC board are
short circuited or open circuited.
2 Is the LED on the PFP Yes 3
motor board lit without No • Check if the connector pins are
flashing? disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
motor board, PFP board and PFC board are
3 PFP board • Check if the PLL lock signal CN945-7 pin
output from the PFP board is always “L”
level.
• Check if the voltage supplied to the
microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is
always “L” level.

PFP motor
PFP board
PFC board

8 - 100
[C140] 2nd drawer tray abnormality

Paper feeding system related 2nd drawer tray abnormality
service call
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Does the tray go up? Yes 2
(Perform the output check: No • Check if the connector of the tray-up motor
03-243) is disconnected (CN914, J936).
• Check if the connector on the PFC board is
disconnected. (CN910, CN913)
• Check if the connector on the LGC board is
disconnected (CN312).
circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC
board is short circuited or open circuited.
2 Is the tray-up sensor Yes 3
working? (Perform the No • Check if the connector of the sensor is 8
input check: 03-[FAX]ON/ disconnected (CN914, J933, J944).
[4]/[E] • Check if the connector on the PFC board is
disconnected. (CN910, CN913)
• Check if the connector on the LGC board is
disconnected (CN312).
• Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC
3 PFC board • Check if the conductor pattern on the PFC
4 LGC board • Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC

Tray-up motor
PFC board
LGC board
Tray-up sensor

8 - 101
[C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality
[C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality

Paper feeding system related PFP upper drawer tray abnormality
service call PFP lower drawer tray abnormality
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Does the tray go up? Yes 2
(Perform the output check: No • Check if the connector of the tray-up motor
03-278, 280) is disconnected.
• Check if any of the connectors CN241,
CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is
disconnected.
circuited.
board and PFC board are short circuited or
open circuited.
2 Is the tray-up sensor Yes 3
working? (Perform the No • Check if the connector of the sensor is
input check: 03- disconnected.
[COPY]ON/[5]/[A], 03- • Check if any of the connectors CN241,
[COPY]ON/[5]/[E]) CN244 and CN246 on the PFP board is
disconnected.
• Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
circuited.
open circuited.

Tray-up motor
PFP board
PFC board
Tray-up sensor

8 - 102
[C180] LCF tray-up motor abnormality

Paper feeding system related LCF tray-up motor abnormality
service call
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Does the tray move? Yes 2
(Perform the output check: No • Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up
03-271) motor is disconnected.
CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is
disconnected.
circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF
open circuited.
8
2 Are the LCF tray-up Yes 3
sensor and LCF tray No • Check if the connectors of the sensors are
bottom sensor working? disconnected.
(Perform the input check: • Check if any of the connectors CN100,
03-[COPY]ON/[8]/[A], CN104 and CN105 on the LCF board is
03-[COPY]ON/[8]/[E]) disconnected.
• Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
circuited.
open circuited.

LCF tray-up motor
LCF board
PFC board
LCF tray-up sensor
LCF tray bottom sensor

8 - 103
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor abnormality

Paper feeding system related LCF end fence motor abnormality
service call
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Is the LCF end fence Yes 2
motor working? (Perform No • Check if the connector of the LCF end fence
the output check: 03-207) motor is disconnected.
CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is
disconnected.
circuited.
open circuited.
2 Are the LCF end fence Yes 3
home/stop position No • Check if the connectors of the sensors are
sensors working? disconnected.
(Perform the input check: • Check if either of the connectors CN100 or
03-[COPY]ON/[8]/[H], 03- CN107 on the LCF board is disconnected.
[COPY]ON/[8]/[G]) • Check if the connector CN913 on the PFC
• Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
circuited.
open circuited.

LCF end fence motor
LCF board
PFC board
LCF end fence home position
sensor
LCF end fence stop position
sensor

8 - 104
[C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality

Paper feeding system related The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally (when paper can
service call be fed from any drawer except the LCF).
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Is the LCF transport motor Yes 2
working? (Perform the No • Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF
output check: 03-122/172) transport motor is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF
• Check if the signal line connector CN100 on
the LCF board is disconnected.
• Check if the power line connector CN101 on
the LCF board is disconnected.
circuited.
8
circuited.
2 LCF transport motor • Check if the connector pins are
PFC board disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
transport motor board, LCF board and PFC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
• Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin
output from the LCF board is always “L”
level.
• Check if the voltage supplied to the
microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin
is always “L” level.

LCF transport motor
LCF board
PFC board

8 - 105
8.3.16 Scanning system related service call
[C260] Peak detection error

Scanning system related service Peak detection error
call
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Does the exposure lamp Yes It is lit. 2
lit? (Perform the output No It is not lit. 3
check: 03-267)
2 Shading correction plate Check if there is any scratch or stain on the
shading correction plate.
Mirror Check if the mirror is tilted.
1. Check that the lens is reflected in the mirror
looking at carriage-1 from the upper
position.
2. Check that the mirror is secured at the leaf
spring.
Carriage 1. Check if the carriage is tilted by moving it to
the left stopping point.
2. Check if the wire fixing screw is loosened.
3. Check if the movement of the carriage is
unstable due to disengagement of the
carriage roller.
LED 1. Check if the LED lamp is correctly lit.
2. Check if the harness is connected properly
to the LED lamp connector.
3. When the carriage is driven, check if the
harness interferes with it or parts are caught
in it.
CCD board / Lens unit 1. Check if the connector of the CCD board is
connected properly.
2. Check if the CCD board is installed properly.
(Check that the lens unit is not tilted or the
screw is securely tighten.)
SYS board 1. Check if the connector of the SYS board
(CN122, CN126) is connected properly.
2. Check if the mounted parts on the SYS
board are damaged or abnormal.
3. Check if 10 V is output from the power
supply for CCD. (CN122-1pin).

8 - 106
Proce Next
dure Step
3 SYS board 1. Check if the supply cable is connected
properly to the connector (CN127).
LED 1. Check if the harness of the lamp is
connected to the LED light source properly.
2. Check if the lamp is scratched or damaged.
3. Check if the LED harness comes off the
board.
Supply harness 1. Check if wiring of the supply harness
(CN127) is abnormal.
2. Check if the harness is scratched or open
circuited.

Lens unit
SYS board
LED
Supply harness
8
[C261] Peak detection error (high-light intensity)

Scanning system related service Peak detection error (the light source is extremely light)
call
Proce
Check item Measure
dure
1 LED 1. Replace the LED.
2 SYS board 1. Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of the
LED driver IC.
2. Replace the SYS board.
3 Reflector 1. Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of the
reflector, such as deformation.
2. Replace the carriage-1.

LED
SYS board

8 - 107
[C262] Peak detection error (communication error)

Scanning system related service Peak detection error (communication error)
call
Proce
Check item Measure
dure
1 Lens unit 1. Check if the connector is properly connected all the way in
the CCD board.
2. Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of parts
mounted on the CCD board.
3. Check if +5V is output to the CCD board.
4. Check if +3.3V is output from the CCD board.
5. Replace the Lens unit.
2 SYS board 1. Check if the connector is properly connected all the way in
the SYS board.
2. Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of parts
mounted on the SYS board.
3. Check if +5V is output to the SYS board.
4. Replace the SYS board.
3 Harnesses 1. Check if the harness has any scratch on it or is open
circuited or caught anywhere.
2. Check if there is any abnormality in the connector terminal
or the contacting surface of the flat harness.
3. Replace the harness between the SYS board and the CCD
board.

Lens unit
SYS board
Harnesses
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time / Downloading
firmware with an incorrect model

Scanning system related service Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified
call time / Downloading firmware with an incorrect model
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Carriage locking Check if the carriage locking screw for
packaging is attached.
2 Are the carriages slightly Yes Check if the circuits of the CCD board are
moved to the feeding abnormal.
direction?/Are the No 3
carriages staying at a
position other than home
position?

8 - 108
Proce Next
dure Step
3 CCD board • Check if the connector pin is disconnected
or the harness is short circuited or open
circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD
• If the model of the firmware downloaded is
incorrect, a C270 error (exposure lamp
blinks twice) occurs. If the exposure lamp
blinks twice, download the correct firmware.
4 Carriage home position 1. Check if the harness of the carriage home
sensor position sensor is connected properly.
2. Check if the harness is caught or open
circuited.
5 SYS board 1. Check if the connector of the SYS board
(CN121, CN125, CN127) is connected
properly.
3. Check if 24 V (CN127) on the SYS board is
short circuited.
4. Check if 24 V is supplied to the SYS board 8
(CN127).
6 Scan motor 1. Check if the belt tension is loosened.
2. Check if the motor fixing screw is loosened.
3. Check if the carriage wire and the timing
belt come off.
4. Check if the connector is connected to the
motor properly.
5. Check if the harness of the motor is caught
or open circuited.
7 Setting Clear the SRAM data by starting the equipment
in the 3C mode, and initialize them in the 08
mode.
Refer to  P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and
procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for
the SYS board)".

CCD board
Carriage home position sensor
harness
SYS board
Scan motor
Scan motor harness

8 - 109
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time

Scanning system related Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time
service call
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Carriage lock Check if the carriage locking screw for 2
packaging is attached.
2 Carriage home position 1. Check if the harness is properly connected 3
sensor to the sensor.
2. Check if the harness is caught or open
circuited.
3 SYS board 1. Check if the harness (J002/J121) of the 4
carriage home position sensor is connected
properly.
3. Check if 24 V on the SYS board is short
circuited.
4. Check if 24 V is supplied to the SYS board
(CN127).
4 Scan motor • Check if the belt tension is loosened (if the
motor screw is loosened).
• Check if the wire and the belt come off.
• Check if the connector (J007/J125) is
connected to the motor properly.
• Check if the harness of the motor is caught
or open circuited.

harness
SYS board
Scan motor
Scan motor harness

8 - 110
[C290] Scanner fuse blowout

Scanning system related The scanning system does not operate due to a blowout of the fuse
service call in the scanning system.
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Is 24V supplied to the SYS Yes Check the following because the signal for
board? checking 24V on the SYS board is abnormal.
1. Check if 3V is input in 35 Pin of the scanner
CPU (IC301).
3. Check if 24V on the SYS board is short
circuited.
4. Check if 24V is supplied to the SYS board
(CN127).
No 1. Check if the 24V supply harness is properly
connected to the connector (CN127).
2. Check if 24V and SG on the SYS board are
short circuited.
3. Check if the power supply is short circuited
8
by pulling out the supply harness on the
SYS board (CN127).
4. Check if the fuse on the LVPS (F204) is
open circuited.
5. Check if there is no abnormality on the
LVPS.

SYS board
Fuse (F204)
Supply harness
LVPS

8 - 111
8.3.17 Fuser unit related service call
Notes:
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the
power supply unit and fuser unit.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged
after a while the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough
before checking.
[C411/C412] Thermistor / heater lamp abnormality at power-ON

Fuser unit related service call Thermistor / heater lamp abnormality at power-ON
Procedure Check item Measures

1 Power voltage Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage
during the operation ±10% of the rated voltage?)
2 Thermistor • Check if the center, side and front thermistor are
installed properly.
• Check if the harnesses of the center, side and front
thermistor are open circuited.
• Check if the connectors of the center, side and front
thermistor are disconnected (J627).
3 Power supply unit and • Is the fuser unit installed correctly?
fuser unit • Check if the heater lamp is broken.
• Check if the terminal of the heater lamp is attached
securely.
• Check if the center and side thermostat are blown
• Check if the drawer connector is damaged or its
connection is detected.
• Check if the connectors of the power supply unit are
disconnected (CN504m, CN506).
• Check if the power supply unit is abnormal.
4 LGC board • Check if the connectors CN301 and CN323 are
disconnected.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is
5 Status counter After repairing the matter which caused the error [C411/
C412], perform the following:
• Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed
simultaneously
• Key in “2002”, then press [START].
• Change the current status counter value “1“, “2“ or “4“
to “0”, then press [OK] or [INTERRUPT] (to cancel
[C411/C412]).
• Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure
that the equipment enters the normal ready state.

Power supply unit.
Thermistor
LGC board

8 - 112
[C445/C446/C447/C449/C450/C451/C452] Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment

Fuser unit related service call Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment
1,2,3,4. Check the thermopiles, Heater and LGC board

Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2,3 and 4 for [C411/C412].

5 Clear the status counter Change the current status counter value (08-2002) “5”,
“6”, “7”, “9”, “19”, “21”, “22”, “23”, “24”, “25”, “27”, “29”,
“38”, “41”, “48” or “50” to “0” for [C44X], taking the same
procedure as that for [C41X].
* The status counter value is as follows in the following

cases.
- The error occurred during warming-up: “5” or “6”
The error occurred after the equipment has become
ready: “7”.
- The temperature detected by the center thermistor is
200°C or higher, the temperature detected by the side
thermistor is 200°C or higher or the temperature
detected by the front thermistor is 230°C or higher: 8
“9”, “19”, “22”, “23”, “25”, “27” or “29”
- The error occurred during printing: “24” or “25”.
- The error occurred during energy saving: “27”.
- A paper jam occurred: “29”.
[C4B0] IGBT overheating abnormality

Fuser unit related service call IGBT overheating abnormality
Check item Measure

LGC board • Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited
or open circuited.
• Check if SRAM is mounted.
Status counter 1. Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed
simultaneously.
2. Key in “2002”, then press the [START] button.
3. Reset the displayed current status counter value “3”, “8”,
“10”, “11”, “12”, “13”, “14”, “15”, “16”, “17”, “18”, “20”, “21”,
“26”, “28”, “30”, “31”, “32”, “33”, “34”, “35”, “36”, “37”, “39”,
“40”, “42”, “43”, “44”, “45”, “46”, “47”, “49”, “51”, “52”, “53”,
“54”, “55”, “56”, “57”, “58”, “59”, “60”, “61”, “62” or “63” to “0“,
then press [OK] or [INTERRUPT].
4. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the
equipment enters the normal status.

LGC board

8 - 113
[C4C0] Fuser unit new/old detection fuse abnormality

Fuser unit related service call Fuser unit new/old detection fuse abnormality
Check item Measure

1. Check the fuser unit. 1. Are the connectors disconnected?
2. Are the harnesses open circuited?
3. Replace the fuser unit.
2. Check the PC board 1. Are the connectors disconnected?
2. Are the harnesses short circuited or open circuited?
3. Replace the board.

Fuser unit.
PC board
[C4D0] Fuser thermistor abnormality

Fuser unit related service call Fuser thermistor abnormality
Check item Measure

Thermistor • Connector check (J627)
LGC board • Connector check (CN301)
• Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is open
circuited or short circuited.
Cancel the service call After repairing the matter which caused the error [C4D0], turn
the power OFF and then back ON to cancel the service call.
However, the counter value will be stored until it is written over
by the value of the other service call.

Thermistor
LGC board

8 - 114
[C4F0] Center thermistor error correction

Fuser unit related service call Center thermistor error correction
Check item Measure

Thermistor • Check the gap between the center thermistor and the fuser
roller.
 P. 6-86 "6.12.1 Adjustment of the non-contact thermistor
Gap"
• Check that the front thermistor is installed properly.
LGC board • Connector check (CN301, CN323)
Power supply unit and fuser unit • Is the fuser unit installed correctly?
• Check if the heater lamp is broken.
• Check if the terminal of the heater lamp is attached securely.
• Check if the drawer connector is damaged or its connection 8
is detected.

Center thermistor
front thermistor
LGC board
Heater lamp
Power supply unit
[C4F1] Side thermistor error correction

Fuser unit related service call Side thermistor error correction
Check item Measure

Thermistor • Check the gap between the side thermistor and the fuser
roller.
 P. 6-86 "6.12.1 Adjustment of the non-contact thermistor
Gap"
• Check that the front thermistor is installed properly.
• Connector check

8 - 115
Check item Measure
Power supply unit and fuser unit • Is the fuser unit installed correctly?
• Check if the heater lamp is broken.
• Check if the terminal of the heater lamp is attached securely.
• Check if the drawer connector is damaged or its connection
is detected.

Side thermistor
front thermistor
LGC board
Heater lamp
Power supply unit

8 - 116
8.3.18 Communication related service call
[C550] RADF I/F error

Communication related service call RADF I/F error
Check item Measure

RADF board • Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SYS
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short
SYS board Check if the conductor pattern on the SYS board is short

RADF board
SYS board
[C560] Communication error between Engine-CPU and PFC board

8
Optional communication related
service call
Check item Measures

Harness • Connector check
• Harness check
• Board check
PFC board • Connector check (CN910, CN911)
• Board check

LGC board
PFC board
[C580] Communication error between PFC board and finisher

Communication related service call Communication error between PFC board and finisher
Check item Measure

Finisher Check if the specified finisher is attached.

8 - 117
[CE00] Communication error (signal transmission to the Hole Punch Unit)
MJ-1037

Optional communication related No response is received in a control line from the Hole Punch
service call Unit in the specified time during communication determination
using control lines at power-ON.
Three consecutive transmission retries failed after a data
reception error was detected.
No response is received in a control line in the specified time
after data transmission from the Finisher.
No response is returned to a command from the Finisher after
the specified time has passed.

Abnormality of the finisher control If the connection of all the harnesses and connectors is normal,
PC board (FIN) or the hole punch replace the hole punch control PC board (HP). If the error still
control PC board (HP) occurs, replace the finisher control PC board (FIN).
[F070] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU

Communication related service call Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU
Check item Measure

Error code • Turn the power OFF and then back ON using the main
power switch, and then check if the error code changes to
another one.
• If it changes to another one, follow the procedure for the
changed error code.
Check firmware version • Check the version of the system firmware on the SYS board.
• Check the version of the engine firmware on the LGC board.
Board check • Check if the connector CN128 on the SYS board and the
connector CN336 on the LGC board are completely
inserted.
• Check if the connector pin between the SYS board
(connector CN128) and the LGC board (connector CN336)
is disconnected.
• Check if the connectors CN325, CN326, CN327, CN328,
CN329, CN330, CN331 and CN332 of the LED printer head
are completely inserted, and the harness is disconnected or
open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board and SYS
board are short circuited or open circuited
HRNS-LGC-DRM-210 • Connector check
HRNS-CFD-TRU-210 • Harness check
HRNS-LGC-ADUCFD-210
HRNS-LGC-DEV-210

8 - 118
LGC board
SYS board
LED printer head
HRNS-LGC-DRM-210
HRNS-CFD-TRU-210
HRNS-LGC-ADUCFD-210
HRNS-LGC-DEV-210
[F071] Communication initialization error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU

Communication related service Communication initialization error between System-CPU and
call Engine-CPU

1 LED printer head, 1-1. Disconnect all the harnesses (flat cable and power
harness supply) of the LED printer heads, and then turn the power
ON. Check if the error changes to another service call
(CE80 etc.). (CN325, CN326, CN327, CN328, CN329, 8
CN330, CN331, CN332)
1-2. If the error does not change to another service call

such as CE80 in step 1-1, go to step 2. If the error
changes to another service call, follow the steps below.
1-3. Connect the harnesses of the LED printer head to

the LGC board single color at a time, and then turn the
power ON to identify the LED printer head in error. Check
if F071 occurs. Place the parts causing the error.
Check the connectors and harnesses of the color in error.

<Harness (flat cable) - LGC board>
Y color: CN327
M color: CN325
C color: CN331
K color: CN329
<Harness (power supply) - LGC board>
Y color: CN328
M color: CN326
C color: CN332
K color: CN330
<Harness (flat calbe) - LED printer head>
Y color: CN592
M color: CN593
C color: CN594
K color: CN595
<Harness (power supply) - LED printer head>
Y color: CN596
M color: CN597
C color: CN598
K color: CN599

8 - 119
2 Check firmware version • Check the version of the system firmware on the SYS
board.
• Check the version of the engine firmware on the LGC
board.
3 Board check • Check if the connector CN128 on the SYS board and
the connector CN336 on the LGC board are
completely inserted.
• Check if the connector pin between the SYS board
(connector CN128) and the LGC board (connector
CN336) is disconnected.
• Check if the connectors CN325, CN326, CN327,
CN328, CN329, CN330, CN331 and CN332 of the
LED printer head are completely inserted, and the
harness is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board and
SYS board are short circuited or open circuited
4 HRNS-LGC-DRM-210 • Connector check
HRNS-CFD-TRU-210 • Harness check
HRNS-LGC-ADUCFD-
210
HRNS-LGC-DEV-210

LGC board
SYS board
LED printer head
Harness of LED printer head (flat
cable)
Harness of LED printer head
(power supply)
HRNS-LGC-DRM-210
HRNS-CFD-TRU-210
HRNS-LGC-ADUCFD-210
HRNS-LGC-DEV-210

8 - 120
8.3.19 RADF related service call
[C551] RADF model detection error

RADF related service call Incorrect RADF installed to the equipment
Check item Measure

RADF • Replace the RADF with the correct one.

RADF
[C8E0] RADF communication protocol abnormality

Optional communication related The system has to be stopped because the control abnormality
service call occurred.
Check item Measure 8

Power Turn the power OFF and then back ON to check if the
equipment operates normally.
RADF board • Connector check
• Board check

RADF board

8 - 121
8.3.20 Circuit related service call
[C5A0] EEPROM not connected (LGC board)
Classification Contents
Circuit related service call SRAM board data abnormality (LGC board)
Check item Measure

EEPROM EEPROM check
LGC board • IC socket check (IC45)
• Board check
Replacement part Remark

EEPROM
LGC board
[C5A1] EEPROM data abnormality (LGC board)
Circuit related service call SRAM board data abnormality (LGC board)
Check item Measure

EEPROM EEPROM check
LGC board • IC socket check (IC45)
• Board check

EEPROM
LGC board
[C900] Connection error between the SYS board and the LGC board
Circuit related service call Connection error between SYS board and LGC board
Check item Measure

• Board check
SYS board • Connector check (CN128)
• Board check

LGC board If the problem is not corrected with the replacement of the LGC
board, reinstall the removed LGC board and replace the SYS
board.
SYS board

8 - 122
[C911] Toner cartridge IC chip access board abnormality
Toner cartridge related service call Abnormal access between the CTRG board and LGC board
(High possibility of failure except the LGC board)
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Does non-genuine toner Yes Use the genuine toner cartridge.
cartridge display appear No 2
when the front cover is
opened and closed?
2 Toner cartridge • Check the phenomenon by removing the
toner cartridges (Y, M, C and K) and
reinserting them.
• Check that the CTRG board of each
cartridge (Y, M, C and K) is installed
properly.
• Avoid touching the contact point.
• Wipe the contact point with a soft cloth if it's
stained.
3 Contact point on the Check that the spring of the contact point for 8
equipment side each color (Y, M, C and K) is not deformed.
4 Is the spring of the contact Yes
point returned when it is No • Check that the CTIF board is installed 7
pushed lightly? properly.
• Board check
Notes:
The spring of the contact point may be released if you push the toner
cartridge all the way in when an abnormality occurs.
5 LGC board • Connector check (CN324)
• Board check
6 HRNS-LGC-TNRIC-210 • Connector check (CN324, CN440)
• Harness check
7 CTIF board for each color • Check that the board is installed properly.
(Y, M, C and K) • Board check
8 Perform the above troubleshooting and if the C911 error is cleared, set the following self-
diagnostic codes to "0" (normal).
• 08-4689-0: Board information of toner cartridge(Y)
• 08-4689-1: Board information of toner cartridge(M)
• 08-4689-2: Board information of toner cartridge(C)
• 08-4689-3: Board information of toner cartridge(K)

Toner cartridge
LGC board
HRNS-LGC-TNRIC-210
CTIF board

8 - 123
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality
Circuit related service call Engine-CPU abnormality
Check item Measure

Main power switch Turn OFF the main power switch, then back ON.
Engine-CPU, FROM, and SDRAM Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU,
FROM is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU,
SDRAM is short circuited or open circuited.
LGC board Board check

LGC board
[C962] LGC board ID abnormality
Circuit related service call LGC board ID abnormality
Check item Measure

Error code • Turn the power OFF and then back ON using the main
power switch, and then check if the error code changes to
another one.
• If it changes to another one, follow the procedure for the
changed error code
• Board check
• Check if the model of the equipment matches the color of
the label on the LGC board.
 P. 9-4 "9.1.6 LGC board"
• Board check
Harness • Connector check
• Harness check

LGC board If the problem is still not corrected with the replacement of the
LGC board, reinstall it and ask a specialist to repair it.
(Abnormal ID)
[C9E0] Connection error between the scanner CPU and system CPU
Circuit related service call Connection error between the scanner CPU and system CPU
Check item Measure

SYS board Board check

8 - 124
SYS board
[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
Circuit related service call SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
Check item Measure

SRAM Check the connection of SRAM
1. Turn the power OFF, and start up the Setting Mode (08).
2. When “SRAM REQUIRES INITIALIZATION” is displayed on
the LCD, check the destination and then press the [START]
button. If the destination is not correct, key in the correct one
and then press the [START] button. (SRAM is initialized.)
3. After the confirmation message is displayed, press the
[INTERRUPT] button.
4. Perform the panel calibration (08-9050).
5. Enter the serial number (08-9601). Match it with the serial
number on the label attached to the rear cover of the 8
equipment.
6. Initialize the NIC information (08-9083).
7. Turn the power OFF and then start up with the Adjustment
mode (05).
8. Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner”
(05-3203).
9. Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PPC> (05-7869).
(using [4][FAX] test pattern)
10.Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PRT> (05-8008).
(using [70][FAX] test pattern)
11. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
SYS board Board check

SRAM on the SYS board
SYS board
[F350] CCD board abnormality
Circuit related service call CCD board abnormality
Check item Measure

CCD board Board check
Combination of the firmware • Check the combination of the firmware version of the system
version firmware, engine firmware, and scanner firmware.
• Reinstall the scanner firmware.

CCD board

8 - 125
8.3.21 LED printer head related service call
[CE80] LED printer head communication error
LED printer head related service Communication error between the LGC board and the LED
call printer head
Next
Step
Check the value of the self- Self-diagnosis values 1, 5, 9 and 13: 2
diagnosis code (08-4706) in which LED printer head unconnected error
is displayed in the details of the Self-diagnosis values 2, 6, 10 and 14: 4
LED printer head communication LED printer head mix error
error.
Self-diagnosis values 4, 8 and 12: 2
• Check each color with its
Checksum mismatch / Gradation
corresponding self-diagnosis
module error
mode.
Y: 08-4706-0 Self-diagnosis values other than the 2
1
M: 08-4706-1 above
C: 08-4706-2
K: 08-4706-3
Remarks:
The self-diagnosis value
other than "0" (Normal)
indicates that an error has
occurred.
Is the LGC board normal? Yes 3
• Check the connectors used for No Repair or replace it. 5
the colors in which errors have
occurred.
Y: CN327 and CN328
2
M: CN325 and CN326
C: CN331 and CN332
K: CN329 and CN330
• Check the LGC board.

8 - 126
Next
Step
Check if the harnesses between Yes 4
the LGC board and the LED printer No Repair it. 5
head are disconnected or open
circuited.
• Check the connectors and the
harnesses used for the colors
in which errors have occurred.
<Harness (FFC) at the LGC board
side>
Y: CN327
M: CN325
C: CN331
K: CN329
<Harness (power supply) at the

LGC board side>
Y: CN328
3
M: CN326
C: CN332
K: CN330
8
<Harness (FFC) at the LED printer
head side>
Y: CN592
M: CN593
C: CN594
K: CN595
<Harness (power supply) at the

LED printer head side>
Y: CN596
M: CN597
C: CN598
K: CN599
The LED printer head used for the Repair it. 5
4 colors in which errors have
occurred.
Reset the self-diagnosis value. Change the setting value of the LED
printer head communication error
details to "0" (Normal) to reset the self-
diagnosis value.
5
Y: 08-4706-0
M: 08-4706-1
C: 08-4706-2
K: 08-4706-3

LGC board
Harness (FFC)
Harness (power supply)
LED printer head

8 - 127
[CE81] Interface initialization error between LED printer head and LGC board
LED printer head related service Interface initialization error between LED printer head and LGC
call board
Proce Next
dure Step
1 Perform 08-4723 to 2
identify the color of LED
printer head in error.
0 bit: Y
1st bit: M
2nd bit: C
3rd bit: K
Remarks:
The value of each
bit becomes "1" if
error occurs.
(e.g.) Y color: 1, M
color: 2, C color 4, K
color: 8, Y and K
color: 9
2 Is the LGC board normal? Yes 3
No Repair or replace it.
- Check the connectors of
the LED printer head
identified in step 1.
Y color: CN327, CN328
M color: CN325, CN326
C color: CN331, CN332
K color: CN329, CN330
- Check the LGC board.

8 - 128
Proce Next
dure Step
3 Check the harnesses Yes 4
between the LGC board No Replace it.
and the LED printer
heads.
Check the connectors and

harnesses of the color in
error.
<Harness (flat cable) -
LGC board>
Y color: CN327
M color: CN325
C color: CN331
K color: CN329
<Harness (power supply) -
LGC board>
Y color: CN328
M color: CN326
C color: CN332
K color: CN330
<Harness (flat cable) - 8
LED printer head>
Y color: CN592
M color: CN593
C color: CN594
K color: CN595
<Harness (power supply) -
LED printer head>
Y color: CN596
M color: CN597
C color: CN598
K color: CN599
4 LED printer head in error Replace it.

LGC board
Harness of LED printer head (flat
cable)
Harness of LED printer head
(power supply)
LED printer head

8 - 129
8.3.22 Finisher related service call
[CB00] Finisher not connected
[CB01] Finisher communication error
[CF10] Communication module writing failure

Finisher related service call Finisher not connected
Finisher communication error
Check item Measure

Setting of the equipment • Check if the MJ-1036 or MJ-1037 is set as the specified finisher
on the equipment (08-4548).
Finisher • Check if the harness connecting the equipment and the finisher
controller PC board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC
board is open circuited or short circuited.
• Update the finisher firmware.
PFC board • Check if the harness connecting the finisher and the PFC board
on the equipment is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness connecting the PFC board and the LGC
board on the equipment is disconnected or open circuited.
• Connector check (CN910, CN911, J754)
• Check if the conductor pattern on the PFC board is open
LGC board • Check if the harness connecting the PFC board and the LGC
board on the equipment is disconnected or open circuited.

Finisher control PC board
PFC board
LGC board
[CB01] Finisher communication error

MJ-1037

Data communication error The communication between the equipment and the Finisher is
interrupted. This error is detected by the equipment.

8 - 130
[CB30] Movable tray shift motor (M1) abnormality, Movable tray paper top detection error
MJ-1036
Finisher related service call Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable tray shift
motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally.

Movable tray shift motor (M1) A locking signal is detected after the specified time *while the movable
Stack top detection solenoid (SOL1) tray is moving.
Stack top detection sensor-1 (S1) * A locking signal is not monitored from the start driving the motor until
Stack top detection sensor-2 (S2 the specified time has passed.
Movable tray lower limit sensor (S14) The stack top position of paper is not detected after the movable tray
shift motor (M1) is driven in the specified time when the movable tray is
moved up.
The lower limit position of the stack top of paper is not detected after
the movable tray shift motor (M1) has been driven in the specified time
during the initial movement of the movable tray.
The turning OFF of the movable tray lower limit sensor (S14) is not
detected when the movable tray is moved from a point where this
sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is turned OFF after
the movable tray shift motor (M1) has been driven in the specified time. 8

Movable tray shift motor (M1) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
abnormality conducted, replace the moto
Movable tray lower limit sensor (S14) Measure the voltage on TP17 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
shielded and within the range of 3.3V

Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity among the connector terminals
is normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the connectors.
(Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN4, CN10)
Stack top detection solenoid (SOL1) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
abnormality conducted, replace the solenoid.
Stack top detection sensor-1 (S1) Measure the voltage on TP11 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).

Stack top detection sensor-2 (S2) Measure the voltage on TP20 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).

connector. (Finisher control PC board (FIN): CN3)

8 - 131
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the solenoid, sensors and
[CB30] Movable tray shift motor (M5) abnormality

MJ-1037
Finisher related service call Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable tray shift
motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally.

Movable tray shift motor The status of the movable tray shift motor clock sensor (S15) is not
Movable tray shift motor clock sensor changed for the specified time when the movable tray shift motor (M5)
is driven.

Movable tray shift motor clock sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN7.3 on the finisher control PC board
Movable tray upper limit sensor Measure the voltage on TP35 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Movable tray middle sensor (S18) Measure the voltage on TP29 on the finisher control PC board
abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V

Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity among the connector terminals is
control PC board (FIN): CN11, CN7, CN9, CN8)

8 - 132
[CB31] Movable tray paper top detection error
MJ-1037
Finisher related service call Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actuator of the
movable tray paper-full detection sensor does not move
smoothly.

Movable tray shift motor The stack top holding/detecting sensor (S11) and the paper holding
Stack top holding/detecting sensor home position sensor (S12) do not detect the position of the top of the
Paper holding home position sensor stack of paper in the specified time when the paper holding lever is
moved to the paper detection position.

Exiting paper holding solenoid (SOL1) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
abnormality conducted, replace the solenoid.
Paper holding home position Measure the voltage on TP13 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
sensor (S12) abnormality Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not

5% when shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range 8
Stack top holding/detecting sensor Measure the voltage on TP71 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).

Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the solenoid, sensors and

8 - 133
[CB40] Front alignment motor abnormality
* You receive a [CB40] error when the [ED13] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1036
Finisher related service call Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is
not rotating or the front alignment plate is not moving normally.

Rear alignment motor (M3) The turning OFF of the rear alignment plate home position
Rear alignment plate home position sensor (S6) is not detected when the rear alignment plate is
sensor (S6) moved from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point
where this sensor is turned OFF after the rear alignment motor
(M3) has been driven at the specified number of pulse.
The turning ON of the rear alignment plate home position
sensor (S6) is not detected when the rear alignment plate is
moved from a point where this sensor is turned OFF to one
point where this sensor is turned ON after the rear alignment
motor (M3) has been driven at the specified number of pulse.

Rear alignment motor (M3) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Rear alignment plate home Measure the voltage on TP16 on the finisher control PC board
position sensor (S6) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
replace the sensor.
[CB40] Rear alignment motor (M7) abnormality

* You receive a [CB40] error when the [ED13] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1037
Finisher related service call Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is
not rotating or the front alignment plate is not moving normally.

Rear alignment motor The turning OFF of the rear alignment plate home position sensor
Rear aligning plate home position (S10) is not detected in the specified time when the rear alignment
sensor plate is moved from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point
where this sensor is turned OFF.
The turning ON of the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S10)
is not detected in the specified time when the rear alignment plate is
moved from a point where this sensor is turned OFF to one point
where this sensor is turned ON.

8 - 134
Rear alignment motor (M7) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Rear alignment plate home Measure the voltage on pin CN9.9 on the finisher control PC board
position sensor (S10) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
abnormality connectors, exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN)
[CB50] Stapler home position error

* You receive a [CB50] error when the [EA50] error occurs three times in succession.
Finisher related service call Stapler home position error: The stapler home position sensor
does not work.
8
[CB50] Staple motor (M10) abnormality

MJ-1036

Stapler motor (M10) The staple unit clinching home position sensor (S16) does not
Staple unit clinching home position detect the opening of the staple unit after the stapler motor
sensor (S16) (M10) has been driven reversely in the specified time from the
closing during the initial movement of the staple unit.
The staple unit clinching home position sensor (S16) does not
detect the opening of the staple unit in the specified time from
the closing during the clinching movement of the staple unit,
and also this sensor does not detect the opening by the reverse
rotation of the motor after the stapler is stopped.
detect the closing of the staple unit after the specified time
during the clinching movement of the staple unit.
detect the opening of the staple unit at the start of the clinching.

Staple motor (M10) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
electricity is not conducted, replace the staple unit.
Staple unit clinching home position Measure the voltage on CN16 on the finisher control PC board
sensor (S16) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
when the sensor is ON and within the range of 3.3V
5% when OFF. If the voltage does not fall within the range

8 - 135
Staple unit improper clinching Measure the voltage on TP25 on the finisher control PC board
prevention sensor (S15) (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
abnormality when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V
5% when shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensors, switch
abnormality and connectors, exchange the finisher control PC board (FIN).
[CB50] Edge staple unit motor (M13) abnormality

MJ-1037

Staple unit sliding motor The turning OFF of the edge staple unit improper clinching
Edge staple unit improper clinching prevention sensor (S25) is not detected in the specified time
prevention sensor when the edge staple unit is moved from a point where this
sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is turned
OFF.
The turning ON of the edge staple unit improper clinching
prevention sensor (S25) is not detected in the specified time
when the edge staple unit is moved from a point where this
sensor is turned OFF to one point where this sensor is turned
ON.
Edge staple unit motor The turning OFF of the edge staple unit clinching home position
Edge staple unit clinching home sensor (S29) is not detected in the specified time when stapling
position sensor is performed.
The turning ON of the edge staple unit clinching home position
sensor (S29) is not detected after the specified time has passed
since the turning OFF of this sensor had been detected when
stapling is performed, and also turning ON of this sensor is not
detected in a reverse rotation after the stapler is stopped.

Edge staple unit motor (M13) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
abnormality conducted, replace the staple unit.
Edge staple unit clinching home Measure the voltage on pin CN10.4 on the finisher control PC board
position sensor (S29) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the
sensor is ON and within the range of 5V

5% when OFF. If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned,
replace the staple unit.
Edge staple unit improper clinching Measure the voltage on pin CN10.11 on the finisher control PC board
prevention sensor (S25) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not


8 - 136
Edge staple unit interference Measure the voltage on pin CN18.8 on the finisher control PC board
switch (SW3) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the
switch is ON and within the range of 24V

10% when OFF. If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned,
replace the switch. (Be sure that all covers and doors are closed
before starting measurement.)
control PC board (FIN): CN10, CN18, CN24)
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensors, switch and
[CB51] Stapler shift home position error
Finisher related service call Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not at the home
position.
8
[CB51] Staple unit sliding motor (M7) abnormality
MJ-1036

Staple unit sliding motor (M7) The turning OFF of the staple unit sliding home position sensor (S3) is
Staple unit sliding home position not detected when the staple unit is moved from a point where this
sensor (S3) sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is turned OFF after
the staple unit sliding motor (M7) has been driven at the specified
number of pulse.
The turning ON of the staple unit sliding home position sensor (S3) is
not detected when the staple unit is moved from a point where this
sensor is turned OFF to one point where this sensor is turned ON after
the staple unit sliding motor (M7) has been driven at the specified
number of pulse.

Staple unit sliding motor (M7) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Staple unit sliding home position Measure the voltage on TP18 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the staple unit, sensors and

8 - 137
[CB51] Staple unit sliding motor (M11) abnormality
MJ-1037

Staple unit slidingEdge staple unit The turning OFF of the edge staple unit sliding home position sensor
sliding home position sensor motor (S14) is not detected in the specified time when the edge staple unit is
moved from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point where
this sensor is turned OFF.
The turning ON of the edge staple unit sliding home position sensor
(S14) is not detected in the specified time when the edge staple unit is
where this sensor is turned ON.

Staple unit sliding motor (M11) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Edge staple unit sliding home Measure the voltage on pin CN7.6 on the finisher control PC board

Saddle stitch staple unit sliding home Measure the voltage on pin CN7.10 on the finisher control PC board

Edge staple unit improper clinching Measure the voltage on pin CN10.11 on the finisher control PC board
prevention sensor (S25) (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
abnormality shielded and within the range of 3.3V

control PC board (FIN): CN7, CN10, CN17)
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the staple unit, sensors and
[CB80] Finisher control PC board (FIN) backup RAM error
Finisher related service call Backup RAM data abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value
on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is
turned ON.

8 - 138
MJ-1036

EEPROM Data readout check is performed after data writing and the
result of the data readout check does not conform to the written
data.
The equipment does not enter the ready status after the
specified time has passed from data writing.

Finisher control PC board (FIN) Replace the finisher control PC board (FIN) as the cause is a
abnormalit fault in the IC of the backup RAM.
MJ-1037

Back-up memory Data readout check is performed after data writing and the
result of the data readout check does not match with the written
data.
The equipment does not enter the ready status after the 8

Finisher control PC board (FIN) Replace the finisher control PC board (FIN) as the cause is a
abnormality fault in the IC of the backup RAM.
[CB80] Hole punch control PC board (HP) backup RAM error
Finisher related service call Backup RAM data abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value
on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is
turned ON.
MJ-6008

Back-up memory Data readout checking is performed after data writing and the
result of the data readout check do not match with the written
data.
The equipment does not enter the ready status after the

Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the behavior in the hole punch RAM check mode is not
abnormality normal, replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).

8 - 139
[CB84] Punch unit main program error

Finisher related service call Hole Punch Unit - Main CPU program error
Check item Measures

Hole punch control PC board (HP) • Is the firmware version of the PNC board (HP) latest?
• Connector check
• Board check

Hole punch control PC board
[CB90] Paper folding blade motor (M12) abnormality

MJ-1037

Paper folding blade motor The turning OFF of the paper folding blade home position
Paper folding blade home position sensor (S19) is not detected in the specified time when the
sensor paper folding blade is pushing while this sensor is ON.
Turning ON of the paper folding blade home position sensor
(S19) is not detected in the specified time when the paper
folding blade is returned to its home position while this sensor is
OFF.
Paper folding blade motorPaper The status of the paper folding blade motor clock sensor (S24)
folding blade motor clock sensor is not changed for the specified time when the paper folding
blade motor (M12) is driven.

Paper folding blade motor (M12) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Paper folding blade motor clock Measure the voltage on TP66 on the finisher control PC board
replace the sensor.
Paper folding blade home position Measure the voltage on TP64 on the finisher control PC board
replace the sensor.

8 - 140
[CBC0] Saddle stitch alignment motor (M8) abnormality
MJ-1037

Saddle stitch alignment motor The turning OFF of the saddle stitch alignment plate home
Saddle stitch alignment plate home position sensor (S20) is not detected in the specified time when
position sensor the saddle stitch alignment plate is moved from a point where
this sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is
turned OFF.
The turning ON of the saddle stitch alignment plate home
position sensor (S20) is not detected in the specified time when
the saddle stitch alignment plate is moved from a point where
this sensor is turned OFF to one point where this sensor is
turned ON.

Saddle stitch alignment motor (M8) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Saddle stitch alignment plate home Measure the voltage on pin CN16.12 on the finisher control PC
lower when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5% when
shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned, 8
replace the sensor.
[CBF0] Stacker motor (M9) abnormality

MJ-1037

Stacker motor The turning OFF of the stacker home position sensor (S21) is
Stacker home position sensor not detected in the specified time when the stacker is moved
from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point where
The turning ON of the stacker home position sensor (S21) is not
detected in the specified time when the stacker is moved from a
point where this sensor is turned OFF to one point where this
sensor is turned ON.

Stacker motor (M9) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Stacker home position sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN16.15 on the finisher control PC board


8 - 141
[CC02] Stack exit roller nip home position detection error

MJ-1036
Replacement part Measure

Stack exit roller shift motor (M6) The stack exit roller home position sensor (S13) does not detect
Stack exit roller home position that the exit roller is not at the upper position after the stack exit
sensor (S13) roller motor (M6) has been driven in the specified time when the
exit roller is moved down.
The stack exit roller home position sensor (S13) does not detect
that the exit roller is at the upper position after the stack exit
roller shift motor (M6) has been driven in the specified time
when the exit roller is moved up.
[CC02] Exit roller nip adjustment motor (M4) abnormality

MJ-1037

Exit roller nip adjustment motor The exit roller nip home position sensor (S8) does not become OFF
Exit roller nip home position sensor from ON in the specified time when the status in which the exit roller
nip is large or small is changed to one in which the exit roller or the
middle transport roller is released.
The exit roller nip home position sensor (S8) does not become ON
from OFF in the specified time when the status in which the exit roller
or the middle transport roller is released is changed to one in which the
exit roller nip is large or small.

Exit roller nip adjustment motor (M4) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Exit roller nip home position sensor Measure the voltage on TP31 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).

8 - 142
[CC21] Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller drive motor (M10) abnormality
MJ-1037

Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller The turning OFF of the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller home
drive motor position sensor (S23) is not detected in the specified time when
Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller is nipped or performing
home position sensor paper transport.
The turning ON of the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller home
position sensor (S23) is not detected in the specified time when
the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller is released.

Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
drive motor (M10) abnormality electricity is not conducted, replace the motor.
Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller Measure the voltage on TP67 on the finisher control PC board
home position sensor (S23) (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower
abnormality when not shielded and within the range of 3.3V5% when
replace the sensor.
terminals is normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the 8
[CC22] Saddle stich stapler home position detection error

MJ-1037

Saddle stitch stapler motor The turning OFF of the saddle stitch staple unit clinching home
Saddle stitch staple unit clinching position sensor (S32) is not detected in the specified time when
home position sensor saddle stitch stapling is performed.
The turning ON of the saddle stitch staple unit clinching home
position sensor (S32) is not detected in the specified time after
the turning OFF of this sensor had been detected when saddle
stitch stapling is performed, and also the turning ON of this
sensor is not detected in a reverse rotation after the saddle
stitch stapler is stopped.

Saddle stitch stapler motor (M14) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
abnormality electricity is not conducted, replace the saddle stitch staple unit.
Saddle stitch staple unit clinching Measure the voltage on pin CN17.5 on the finisher control PC
abnormality lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 5V5%
saddle stitch staple unit.

8 - 143
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the saddle stitch staple
abnormality unit and the connectors, exchange the finisher control PC board
(FIN).
Saddle stitch staple empty sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN17.7 on the finisher control PC
lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 5V5%
saddle stitch staple unit.
Finisher control PC board (FIN) If the error still occurs after replacing the saddle stitch staple
abnormality unit and the connector, exchange the finisher control PC board
(FIN).
[CC51] Punch unit sliding motor (M12) abnormality

* You receive a [CC51] error when the [ED11] error occurs three times in succession or occurs during
the initialization.
MJ-1036

Punch unit sliding motor (M12) The punch sliding unit is not slid after sliding request is sent.
Punch sliding unit home position The punch sliding unit home position sensor (S23) does not detect that
sensor (S23) the unit is at its home position after the specified time when the unit is
returned to the home position, or this sensor does not detect that the
unit is out of its home position after the specified time when the unit is
released.
The punch sliding unit home position sensor (S23) does not detect that
the unit is at its home position after the specified time when the unit is
moved, or this sensor does not detect that the unit is at its home
position when the unit is released.

Punch unit sliding motor (M12) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Punch sliding unit home position Measure the voltage on TP26 on the hole punch control PC board
sensor (S23) abnormality (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
shielded and within the range of 5V

normal. If electricity is not conducted, replace the connector. (Hole
punch control PC board (HP): CN3, CN5, CN6)
Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensor and

8 - 144
[CC51] Punch unit sliding motor (M16) abnormality
* You receive a [CC51] error when the [ED11] error occurs three times in succession or occurs during
the initialization.
MJ-1037

Punch unit sliding motor The turning OFF of the punch sliding unit home position sensor
Punch sliding unit home position (S37) is not detected when the punch unit sliding motor (M16) is
sensor driven for the specified distance while this sensor is ON.
The turning ON of the punch sliding unit home position sensor
(S37) is not detected when the punch unit sliding motor (M16) is
driven for the specified distance in the same direction as the
ON direction of this sensor while returning to its home position

Punch unit sliding motor (M16) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Punch sliding unit home position Measure the voltage on pin CN5.3 on the hole punch control
replace the sensor. 8
Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the error still occurs after replacing the motor, sensor and
[CC53] Punch waste full sensors (S41 and S42) abnormality

MJ-1037

Punch waste full sensor After the sensor output adjustment, the input value is lower than
1.2V against the output value of 2.8V, or the input value is
higher than 1.5V against the output value of 0.1V.

Punch waste full sensors (S41 and Measure the voltage on TP49 on the hole punch control PC
S42) abnormality board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
lower when not shielded and 2.5V or higher when shielded. If
the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned, replace a
couple of PC boards on either the light-receiving side or the
light-emitting side.
connector. (Hole punch control PC board (HP): CN5)
Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensors and the

8 - 145
[CC54] Abnormality of paper detection sensors (S24 and S25)
MJ-1036

Paper detection sensor (S24/S25) The adjustment of the paper detection sensors (S24 and S25) has
adjustment erro been failed.。

Paper detection sensors (S24 and Measure the voltage on pin CN6.8 on the hole punch control PC board
S25) abnormality (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 3.0V or higher when
not shielded and 1.2V or lower when shielded. If the voltage does not
fall within the range mentioned, replace a couple of PC boards on
either the light-receiving side or the light-emitting side.
punch control PC board (HP): CN4, CN6)
Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensors and the connectors,
abnormality exchange the hole punch control PC board (HP).
[CC54] Abnormality of trailing edge detection sensors (S39 and S40) and horizontal registration
detection sensors (S39 and S40)
MJ-1037

Trailing edge detection sensor After the sensor output adjustment, the input value is lower than
Horizontal registration detection 3.2V against the output value of 2.8V, or the input value is
sensor higher than 3.5V against the output value of 0.1V.

Trailing edge detection sensors Measure the voltage on TP48 on the hole punch control PC
(S39 and S40) abnormality board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 2.5V or
higher when not shielded and 1V or lower when shielded. If the
voltage does not fall within the range mentioned, replace a
Horizontal registration detection Measure the voltage on TP47 on the hole punch control PC
sensors (S39 and S40) board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 2.5V or
abnormality (B5-R/ST-R) higher when not shielded and 1V or lower when shielded. If the
abnormality (A4-R/LT-R) higher when not shielded and 1V or lower when shielded. If the
abnormality (B4/LG) higher when not shielded and 1V or lower when shielded. If the

8 - 146
abnormality (A3/LD) higher when not shielded and 1V or lower when shielded. If the
connector. (Hole punch control PC board (HP): CN4)
Hole punch control PC board (HP) If the error still occurs after replacing the sensors and the
[CC60, CC61] Punch motor abnormality

MJ-1036

Punch motor (M11) The paper detection sensors (S24 and S25) do not emit light after
Paper detection sensor (S24/S25) specified time when they are selected
Punch shaft home position sensor
(S26) The level of the light-receiving amount is not lowered after the light- 8
Rear punch shaft home position sensor emitting amount of the paper detection sensors (S24 and S25) is
(S22) adjusted to the lower limit.
Punching is not performed after punching request is sent, or the
punching request is sent during the punching.
The status of the punch shaft home position sensor (S26) or the rear
punch shaft home position sensor (S22) is not changed after punching
request is sent.
A punching locking signal is detected consistently over the specified
time.
The punch shaft home position sensor (S26) or the rear punch
shaft home position sensor (S22) does not detect that the shaft
is not at its home position at the start of punching or punch
waste full detection.

Punch motor (M11) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Rear punch shaft home position sensor Measure the voltage on TP25 on the hole punch control PC board
(S22) abnormality (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
shielded and within the range of 5V5% when shielded. If the
sensor.
Punch shaft home position sensor Measure the voltage on TP24 on the hole punch control PC board
(S26) abnormality (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
sensor.
Punch motor clock sensor (S20) Measure the voltage on TP27 on the hole punch control PC board
abnormality (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
sensor.

8 - 147
punch control PC board (HP): CN2, CN5, CN6)
[CC60] Punch motor (M15) abnormality

MJ-1037

Punch motor The status of the punch motor clock sensor (S36) is not
Punch shaft home position sensor changed for the specified time when the punch motor (M15) is
Punch motor clock sensor driven.
The number of input pulses of the punch motor clock sensor
(S36) does not fall within the range from 70 to 100 in the OFF
period of the punch shaft home position sensor (S35), or is
larger than 30 in the ON period of the punch shaft home
position sensor (S35).

Punch motor (M15) abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If
Punch shaft home position sensor Measure the voltage on pin CN3.3 on the hole punch control
(S36) abnormality PC board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
replace the sensor.
Punch shaft rotational direction Measure the voltage on pin CN3.9 on the hole punch control
replace the sensor.
Punch motor clock sensor (S37) Measure the voltage on pin CN3.6 on the hole punch control
abnormality PC board (HP). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or
replace the sensor.
[CC71] Punch firmware checksum error

MJ-1037

Flash ROM A checksum error occurs on the flash ROM of the Hole Punch
Unit.
The main program of the Hole Punch Unit is damaged.

8 - 148
[CC80] Front alignment motor (M2) abnormality
MJ-1036

Front alignment motor (M2) The turning OFF of the front alignment plate home position sensor (S5)
Front alignment plate home position is not detected when the front alignment plate is moved from a point
sensor (S5) where this sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is turned
OFF after the front alignment motor (M2) has been driven at the
specified number of pulse.
The turning ON of the front alignment plate home position
sensor (S5) is not detected when the front alignment plate is
moved from a point where this sensor is turned OFF to one
point where this sensor is turned ON after the front alignment
motor (M2) has been driven at the specified number of pulse.

Front alignment motor (M2) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Front alignment plate home position Measure the voltage on TP15 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).

5% when shielded. If the voltage does not fall within the range 8
[CC80] Front alignment motor (M6) abnormality

MJ-1037

Front alignment motor The turning OFF of the front alignment plate home position sensor (S9)
Front aligning plate home position is not detected in the specified time when the front alignment plate is
sensor moved from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point where
The turning ON of the front alignment plate home position sensor (S9)
is not detected in the specified time when the front alignment plate is
where this sensor is turned ON

Front alignment motor (M6) Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal. If electricity is not
Front alignment plate home Measure the voltage on pin CN8.3 on the finisher control PC board

8 - 149
[CC92] Movable tray upper limit detection error

MJ-1037

Movable tray shift motor The turning ON of the movable tray upper limit sensor (S16) is
Movable tray upper limit sensor detected.

Movable tray shift motor clock Measure the voltage on pin CN7.3 on the finisher control PC board
sensor (S15) abnormality (FIN). Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not
Movable tray upper limit sensor Measure the voltage on TP35 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
Movable tray middle sensor (S18) Measure the voltage on TP29 on the finisher control PC board (FIN).
[CC93] Knurled roller shift solenoid abnormality

MJ-1036

Knurled roller shift solenoid (SOL3) The knurled roller home position sensor (S10) does not detect that the
2nd transport motor (M4) knurled roller is at the upper position after the 2nd transport motor (M4)
Knurled roller home position sensor has been driven at the specified number of pulses during the initial
(S10) rising movement of the knurled roller.
The knurled roller home position sensor (S10) does not detect that the
knurled roller is not at the upper position after the 2nd transport motor
(M4) has been driven at the specified number of pulses during the
initial lowering movement of the knurled roller.
The knurled roller home position sensor (S10) does not detect that the
knurled roller is at the upper position when the pressurization of stack
exit movement is finished.

8 - 150
[CC94] Fan motor abnormality
MJ-1036

Fan motor (M9) The turning ON of the fan locking signal is detected consistently after
the specified time*.
* A locking signal is not monitored from the start driving the motor until
the specified time has passed.

8 - 151
8.3.23 Image control related service call
(1) Based on the procedure of [CE10], [] and [CE40] described below, check the status and take
appropriate actions. And then perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control
according to the following procedure.
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.
2. Key in [2742], and then press the [START] button. Confirm that the image quality control has
finished normally.
(2) After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.
2. Key in [2528], and then press the [START] button.
3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from “1” - “16” to “0”, and then press the [OK] or
[INTERRUPT] button.
[INTERRUPT] button.
[INTERRUPT] button.
[INTERRUPT] button.
10.Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.

8 - 152
[CA00] Color registration abnormality
Image control related service call Color registration abnormality
Next
Step
Has the developer unit been installed No
securely?
- Installed securely
Press the slanted line portion of the

developer unit until a click sound is
- Not installed securely
heard.
8
1
Has the cleaner unit been installed
securely?
- Installed securely
- Not installed securely

8 - 153
Next
Step
Remove the transfer belt unit.
2  P. 4-90 "4.7.3 Transfer belt unit
(TBU)"
Is an image created on the transfer Yes 7
3
belt? No 4
Check if there is any abnormality on
4 the hand grips and rods of the main
charger cleaner. Correct if there is.
Check if the drum is rotated properly
by turning the coupling of the
5
developer unit. Correct the auger
and the surrounding hardware if not.
LED printer head • Check the connectors and harnesses
between the LGC board (CN325,
CN326, CN327, CN328, CN329,
CN330, CN331, CN332, CN592,
CN593, CN594, CN595, CN596,
6
CN597, CN598, and CN599) and the
LED printer head.
• Check if there is any stain or scratch
on the LED printer head. Clean or
correct if there is.
Check if there is any stain on the
7 image quality sensor (Front) and
image quality sensor (Rear).
Check if the sensor shutter is
8
working properly.
< Invalidating color registration • Turn the power ON while [0] and [8]
control > are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “4546”, then press the [START]
button. (08-4546: Position adjustment
9
control / Mode setting)
• Set the value to “0” (not performed
automatically).
• Turn the power OFF.
< Checking the abnormal status on • Turn the power ON while [0] and [5]
color registration > are pressed simultaneously.
10
button. (05-4720: Displaying the
cause of color registration detection
error)

8 - 154
Next
Step
Check the displayed value. 1: Y on the rear side detection 17
When the error [CA00] occurs, the abnormality (*1)
value between 1 and 255 is 2: Y on the front side detection 17
displayed. (0: Normal completion) abnormality (*1)
(The statuses of total 8 sections (4
3: Y on the front and rear sides detection 17
colors on the front and rear sides)
abnormality
are displayed.)
4: M on the rear side detection 17
abnormality (*1)
8: M on the front side detection 17
abnormality (*1)
12: M on the front and rear sides 17
16: C on the rear side detection 17
abnormality (*1)
32: C on the front side detection 17
abnormality (*1)
48: C on the front and rear sides 17
64: K on the rear side detection 17 8
abnormality (*1)
85: All colors on the rear side detection 12
abnormality
11 128: K on the front side detection 17
abnormality (*1)
170: All colors on the front side detection 12
abnormality
192: K on the front and rear sides 17
255: All colors on the front and rear sides 12
Other than the above: Multiple colors 17
Remarks:
The adjustment value is the sum of
(*1), which, as in the example
below, specifies the cause of the
detection abnormality.
(E.g. 1) 05-4720 --- in case of 72
72 = 64 + 8
 K on the rear side / M on the
front side detection abnormality
(E.g. 2) 05-4720 --- in case of 146
146 = 128 + 18 = 128 + 16 + 2
 K on the front side / C on the
rear side / Y on the front side

8 - 155
Next
Step
< Checking the status of the image Check if the light emitting area of the
position aligning sensor > image position aligning sensor emits
LEDs and if the reflected lights on the
transfer belt surface are detected by the
light receiving area of the image position
aligning sensor.
1. Turn the power ON while [0] and [3]
are pressed simultaneously.
2. Press the [START] button.
3. Press the [FAX] button, then check
how items [A] and [B] are displayed
while [1] is pressed.
4. Press the [CLEAR] button.
5. Key in “125”, then press the [START]
button. (03-125: Sensor shutter is
opened)
button. (03-126: Image position
aligning sensor / LED ON)
7. Press the [START] button.
8. Press the [FAX] button, then check
how items [A] and [B] are displayed
while [1] is pressed.
9. Compare them with the statues of [A]
and [B] displayed in (3).
12
- Both [A] and [B] are changed - The
image position aligning sensors on
both sides are operating normally.
- [A] remains same - The image
position aligning sensor on the
rear side is not operating normally.
- [B] remains same - The image
position aligning sensor on the
front side is not operating normally.
- Both [A] and [B] remain same -
The image position aligning
sensors on both sides are not
operating normally.
10.Press the [CLEAR] button.
button. (03-176: Image position
aligning sensor / LED OFF)
12.Key in “175”, then press the [START]
button. (03-175: Sensor shutter
closed)
13.Turn the power OFF.
14.If the image position aligning sensors
on both sides are operating normally,
proceed to step (23). In other cases,
proceed to step (22).

8 - 156
Next
Step
Image position aligning sensor • Check the connectors and harnesses
between the image position aligning
sensor and the LGC board (CN318).
13
• Check if the light emitting or receiving
area of the image position aligning
sensor stained with toner.
Are the sensor shutters of the image Yes 15
position aligning sensor opening or No 16
closing normally? Are they normal
without any damage?
1. Take off the transfer belt unit so
14 that the sensor unit can be seen.
2. Turn the power ON while [0] and
[3] are pressed simultaneously.
3. The shutter should be opened
when “125” is keyed in. It should
be closed when “175” is keyed in.
Is the light emitting area of the image Yes 17
position aligning sensor emitting No 16
LEDs?
1. Key in “125” to open the sensor 8
15
shutter.
2. The light emitting area of the
sensor should emit LEDs when
"126" is keyed in.
Image position aligning sensor • Connector and harness check 12
• Clean the light emitting and receiving
areas of the image position aligning
sensor.
16 • If the sensor shutter is damaged,
replace it.
• If the sensor shutter solenoid is not
operating normally, replace the
solenoid.
< Checking with test pattern > • Turn the power ON while [0] and [4]
button.
• Press the [CLEAR] button after one
17 sheet of test pattern has been exited.
• Check if the printed image of the test
pattern in each color contains
difference in density on its front,
center and rear sides, or if there is
any image trouble in a whole image.
Is the image of the test pattern Yes 21
printed normally without any No 19
18
difference in density on its front and
rear sides?
Transfer belt and the Check the contacting status of the 20
19 photoconductive drum transfer belt and the photoconductive
drum.

8 - 157
Next
Step
Developer material Check the amount of the developer 21
20 material. (Check if the developer material
is supplied on the developer sleeve.)
Is the image printed normally without Yes 23
yellow, magenta, cyan or black No 22
21
streaks in the secondary scanning
direction?
Check if the main charger wire 23
22 corresponding to the color of the
streaks is stained.
Is the image printed normally without Yes 25
23 white streaks in the secondary No 24
scanning direction?
Check if the LED printer head is 25
24
stained.
Is a certain color in the printed image Yes 27
25
turned to black solid? No 26
• Abnormality in the main high-voltage 27
transformer corresponding to the
color or abnormality in the LED printer
head.
• Switch one of 4 main high-voltage
transformers which possibly contains
abnormality with the one possibly
normal. Then print the same test
pattern.
• If the color which turned into black
solid changes along with the
26 replacement of the main high-voltage
transformer, this main high-voltage
transformer is defined as abnormal.
• If the color which turned into black
solid does not change, check if the
harness between the LGC board and
the main high-voltage transformer is
broken or if the power is sufficiently
supplied to the main charger
(breaking of the high-voltage harness
or connection defect). If no problem is
found, check the LED printer head.
If the density level is low on both Yes 29
front and rear sides, is the image No 28
27
printed normally in cases other than
noted above?

8 - 158
Next
Step
• Check if the photoconductive drum 17
and the transfer belt are rotating. If
not, correct their mechanism.
• Check if there are abnormal stain,
large breaking or scratches on the
transfer belt surface.
• Check if the connector of the transfer
transformer is disconnected.
• Check if the high-voltage harnesses
of the main high-voltage transformer
and the transfer transformer are
disconnected.
• Check if the harness between the
LGC board and the transfer
28 transformer is broken.
• Check if the high-voltage joints of the
transfer belt unit are securely
contacted or if they are not stained.
• Check if the high-voltage harness is
broken.
• Check if the connector of the main 8
high-voltage transformer is
disconnected.
• Check if the harness between the
LGC board and the main high-voltage
transformer is broken.
• Replace the transfer transformer.
• Replace the main high-voltage
transformer.
< Checking with the enforced image Yes 30
position adjustment > No 10
Does the error [CA00] occur during
the position adjustment control?
29 1. Turn the power ON while [0] and
[5] are pressed simultaneously.
2. Key in “4719”, then press the
[START] button. (05-4719:
Enforced position adjustment)
< Validating the color registration Check the operation and correct if
control > necessary. Then be sure to perform the
following:
1. Turn the power ON while [0] and [8]
30
button. (08-4546: Position adjustment
control / Mode setting)
3. Set the value to “4” (default value).
4. Turn the power OFF.
<Checking the image position Clean the image position aligning sensor
31
aligning sensor> (S7, S8).
<Checking the power supply> Check if any of the springs for supplying
power to the transfer belt unit is
32
deformed. Replace the spring if it is
deformed.

8 - 159
[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level)
Image control related service call Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The output value
of this sensor is out of a specified range when sensor light
source is OFF.
Check Item Measure

Image quality sensor Connector check
• Check the harnesses between the LGC board and the
image quality sensor.
• Check the harnesses between the LGC board and the
switching power supply.
• Check if the +12V voltage is normally output by the CN345-
7pin on the LGC board.

Image quality sensor
LGC board
[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality
Image control related service call Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level): The output
value of this sensor is out of a specified range when the image
quality control test pattern is not formed.
Next
Step
• Check the image quality sensor Yes 9
detection value (05-2757). No 2
• Is the value of 05-2757-0 "0",
1
and is the value of 05-2757-1
"255"?
• Is the transfer belt or the Yes 6

transfer belt unit securely No 3
installed?
• Are there any abnormal stains
(cleaning defects), large
2 scratches or breaking on the
transfer belt surface?
• Are the drum and the transfer
belt rotating smoothly?
• Is the transfer belt tight?
Transfer belt unit Check if the transfer belt unit is 4

3
securely installed. Correct it if not.

8 - 160
Next
Step
Transfer belt Check if any toner image remains on 5
the transfer belt surface.
If any, check the installation status of
4
the TBU cleaner unit. If there is any
abnormality, correct it, and clean the
transfer belt.
Drum and transfer belt Check if the drum and the transfer belt 19*
are properly operated.
(ON: 03-101 / OFF: 03-151)
If the transfer belt rotates normally,
check if any abnormal stains (cleaning
defects), large scratches or breaking
are on the surface of transfer belt by
5 making full rotation of transfer belt.
Replace the transfer belt if any. Check
if the transfer belt is loose or heaving,
and correct it if needed.
If they are not rotating normally, check
if their drive gears are damaged or if
they contact the equipment. Correct it
if needed. 8
• Is the sensor shutter of the Yes 9
image quality sensor opening No 7
or closing normally? Or is it
6
normal without any damage?
• Is the sensor surface of the
image quality sensor clean?
Sensor unit Take off the transfer belt unit so that
7
you can see the sensor unit.
Sensor shutter • Check if the sensor shutter is 19*
opening or closing normally.
(Opening: 03-125 / Closing: 03-
175)
If the sensor shutter is not opening
or closing, check if it is damaged or
there is any abnormality in the
sensor shutter solenoid.
* If the shutter is opened (03-125),
close the shutter (03-175).
• Check the connector and the
8
harness between the sensor shutter
solenoid and the LGC board. (LGC
CN337-8pin, 9pin)
• Slide the sensor shutter so that the
sensor surface can be seen.
Clean the sensor surface with a
cotton swab or a soft cloth.
Clean the area around the sensor
(e.g.: sensor shutter) if it is stained,
so that the sensor surface does not
become dirty.
Image quality sensor Check the connectors and harnesses *
9 between the LGC board (CN318) and
the image quality sensor.

8 - 161
Next
Step
• Is +12V power supply voltage Yes 13
normally supplied to the image No 11
quality sensor?
10
• Is +12V voltage normally output
by the CN345-7pin on the LGC
board?
Switching power supply Check if +12V voltage is output by the
11 switching power supply (PS-ACC
CN404-7pin).
LGC board • Check if +12V voltage is output by 19*
the C33 + terminal on the LGC
board.
• Check if the supply harness
12
between the switching power
supply and the LGC board is open
circuited, damaged or
disconnected.
Set the values of "Image quality
13 closed-loop control / Contrast
voltage (08-2486)" to "0" (Invalid).
Perform “Enforced performing of
14 image quality open-loop control
(05-2740)”.
Output the image quality control Yes 17
test pattern (04-270) more than No 16
15
one time and the list print
([9][START]). Is the image normal?
Abnormal image Blank print, Solid print, White banding, 18
Correct the abnormal image. Color banding, White spots, Poor
transfer, Uneven image density, Faded
16 image (low density), Uneven light
distribution, Blotched image.
* Blank print: including when one of
the YMCK colors is not printed.
Replace the image quality sensor
17
or the LGC board.
Set the values of “Image quality
voltage (08-2486)” to “1” (Valid).
Perform "Forced performing of Yes 21
image quality closed-loop control No 20
19 (05-2742)" and make sure it is
completed normally. (Error [CE10],
[CE20] and [] do not appear.)
20 Check and correct it accordingly.
Perform "Automatic gamma
21
adjustment".
Reset all of the values in the codes
“Abnormality detection count (Y/M/
22
C/K) Display/0 clearing (08-2528
to 08-2531)”.
High-voltage transformer Check if the high-voltage transformer
23
is damaged or abnormal.

8 - 162
* Go to step 13 for the second time.
[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality
Image control related service call Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The test pattern
is not formed normally.
Next
Step
Check if there is any abnormality
on the hand grips and rods of the
1
main charger cleaner. Correct if
there is.
Check if the drum is rotated
properly by turning the coupling of
2 the cleaner unit. Correct the auger
and the surrounding hardware if
not.
LED printer head • Check the connectors and
harnesses between the LGC board 8
(CN325, CN326, CN327, CN328,
CN329, CN330, CN331, CN332,
CN592, CN593, CN594, CN595,
3
CN596, CN597, CN598 and
CN599) and theLED printer head.
• Check if there is any stain or
scratch on the LED printer head.
Clean or correct if there is.
Check if there is any stain on the
4
image quality sensor (Rear).
Check if the sensor shutter is
5
working properly.
Transfer belt Check if the transfer belt is installed in 17*
the transfer belt unit properly. Check if
the transfer belt is loose or heaving,
and correct it if needed.
Check if the transfer belt unit is
installed in the equipment properly.
Check if the transfer belt is properly
operated. (ON: 03-101 / OFF: 03-151)
If the transfer belt rotates normally,
check if any abnormal stains (cleaning
6
defects), large scratches or breaking
are on the surface of transfer belt by
making full rotation of transfer belt.
Replace the transfer belt if any.
If the transfer belt is not rotating
normally, check if the drive gears are
damaged or if it contacts the
equipment or if the transfer belt
cleaning unit is normal. Correct it if
needed.

8 - 163
Next
Step
Check if any of the springs for
supplying power to the transfer
7
belt unit is deformed. Replace the
spring if it is deformed.
Use “Image quality control
abnormal detection counter Y to K
8 display/0 clearing (08-2528 to
2531)” to check the abnormal
occurring condition for each color.
Check the first pattern detection If the detected value of K is normal but
value for each color of image that for only Y, those for Y and M, or
quality sensor detection value (05- those for Y, M and C is abnormal,
2758-2 to 5), and identify the color perform the following procedure.
9 of unit which causing test pattern -> Check that the phenomenon can be
abnormality. Identify the color of recovered by replacing the 1st transfer
unit by check the value which contact/release clutch or the 1st
exceeds "600". (Sub-code 2: Y, 3: transfer roller status detection sensor.
M, 4: C, 5: K)
Check if the developer unit Visually check the installation and 17*
identified in step 9 has been assembly status of the developer unit,
10
installed properly. and correct it if there is any
abnormality.
Set the values of "Image quality
voltage (08-2486)" to "0" (Invalid).
Perform "Enforced performing of
12 image quality open-loop control
(05-2740)".
Output several number of sheets Yes 15
of the image quality control test No 14
pattern (04-270) and the list print
13
([9][START]->101), and check the
pattern of the color identified in
step 9. Is the image normal?
Abnormal image Blank print, Solid print, White banding, 16
Correct the abnormal image. Color banding, White spots, Poor
transfer, Uneven image density, Faded
14 image (low density), Uneven light
distribution, Blotched image.
* Blank print: including when one of
the YMCK colors is not printed.
Replace the image quality sensor
15
or LGC board.
Set the values of “Image quality
voltage (08-2486)” to “1” (Valid).
Perform “Forced performing of Yes 19
image quality closed-loop control No 18
17
(05-2742).” Is it completed
normally?
18 Check and correct it accordingly.
Perform "Automatic gamma
19
adjustment".

8 - 164
Next
Step
Clear all “Image quality control
abnormal detection counter Y to K
20
display/0 clearing (08-2528 to
2531)”.
* If you have already performed this checking cycle once, proceed to step (11).

Main charger cleaner
Drum cleaner unit
LED printer head
Image quality sensor (Rear)
Transfer belt
Spring
1st transfer contact/release clutch
1st transfer roller status detection
sensor
Image quality sensor
LGC board
8
[CE41] Image quality TRC control test pattern abnormality

Image control related service call The image quality TRC control test pattern is not printed
normally.
Next
Step Check item Result Measures
step
1 Change the setting of the 2
image quality TRC control to
"Disabled". Set the values of
08-2600 and 08-8103 to "0".
2 Output several number of YES 3

sheets of the image quality NO • Check if process units and developer units
control test pattern (04-270) are properly installed.
and the list print • Check if there is any scattered toner or
([9][START]->101), and developer material around the LED printer
check the pattern of each head, clean it if there is any.
color. Is the image normal? • Correct the problem by referring to
"Troubleshooting for the Image".
 P. 8-254 "8.5 Troubleshooting for the
Image"
3 Change the setting of the 4
image quality TRC control to
"Enabled". Set the values of
08-2600 and 08-8103 to "1".

8 - 165
Next
Step Check item Result Measures
step
4 Perform the automatic
gamma adjustment. If the
adjustment is normally
finished, this is the end of
the procedure. If the error
CE41 still occurs, proceed to
step 5.
5 4.Check if the harness 6
between the connector
CN128 on the SYS board
and the connector CN336 on
the LGC board is
disconnected or open
circuited. Correct if so.
6 6.Check if the conductor 7
patterns on the SYS board
and the LGC board are short
7 7.If no abnormality is found 8
in steps 5 to 6 above,
replace the IMG board.
8 8.Perform automatic gamma
adjustment. If the
adjustment is normally
finished, this is the end of
the procedure. If the error
CE41 still occurs, proceed to
step 9.
9 Reinstall the removed SYS
board and then replace the
LGC board.
Perform automatic gamma
adjustment after the board is
replaced.

LGC board
SYS board
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality
Image control related service call Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of
this sensor is out of a specified range.
Check Item Measure

Temperature/humidity sensor Check the connectors and harnesses between the temperature/
humidity sensor and LGC board (CN319).

8 - 166
Temperature/humidity sensor
LGC board
[CE70] Drum drive switching abnormality
Image control related service call Drum drive switching abnormality: The drum switching
detection sensor (S11) is not turned ON after the drum motor
was rotated for a specified period of time.
Next
Step
Is the drum switching motor (M3) Yes 7
1 operating properly? (Perform the No 2
output check: 03-240)
Drum switching motor (M3) Check the connector of the motor and
2
joint connectors
Drum switching detection sensor Sensor check
3 8
(S11)
4
• Board check
Is the drum TBU drive unit [1] Install the drum TBU drive unit [1]
5 installed properly? properly.
P. 8-168 "Fig.8-3" P. 8-168 "Fig.8-3"
Check that there is no friction or • If there is any foreign matter in the
abnormality by pushing the unit, remove it.
protrusion [2] of the drive switching • If the slide area spring [4] in the unit
cam and the one [3] for the is deformed or is not attached
developer/paper feeding drive properly, correct it.
6
switching cam while the drum TBU • Apply grease (Molykote EM-30L) to
drive unit [1] is removed. the slide area of the switching cam
P. 8-168 "Fig.8-3" [5].
P. 8-168 "Fig.8-4"
P. 8-168 "Fig.8-5"
Is the drum switching detection Yes 10
sensor (S11) working? (Perform No 8
7 the input check: 03-[ALL]OFF/[8]/
[F] (Highlighted in the black
mode))
Drum switching detection sensor • Sensor, connector, joint connector
(S11) check
• Check if there is any foreign matter
8
such as grease in the detection
area of the drum switching
detection sensor.
9
• Board check
Is the drum switching motor Yes 12
assembled in the drum drive unit No 11
10
able to be rotated smoothly by
hand?

8 - 167
Next
Step
Drum switching motor (M3) • While reinstalling the drum
switching motor, push it so that its
gear will slightly move away from
11 the engaging gear.
• Check the bracket in which the
drum switching motor is installed. If
it is deformed, replace it.
Is the drum switching guide able to Yes 14
be moved smoothly by hand after No 13
12
the drum switching motor has
been removed?
Drum switching motor (M3) Check if the slide area (guide, plate) of
the drum switching guide is deformed
13
or any foreign matter is attached to it.
(Replace it if there is.)
14 LGC board Board check
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
[5]
[5]
Fig.8-3 Fig.8-4
[4]
[5]
[5]
Fig.8-5

Drum switching motor (M3)
Drum switching detection sensor
(S11)
LGC board
8 - 168
[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormal
Image control related service call Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of the drum
thermistor is out of a specified range.
Check Item Measure

Drum thermistor Connector and harness check of drum thermistor
LGC board • Check the harnesses between the LGC board and the
drawer connector for developer unit.

Drum thermistor
LGC board

8 - 169
8.3.24 Copy process related service call
[C370] Transfer belt unit abnormality
Copy process related service call Transfer belt abnormality
Check Item Measure

Transfer belt unit Check if the transport belt unit is working normally.
Drum TBU drive unit Connector check (J696, J697)
Drum TBU motor Connector check
Drum cleaner unit Check if the drum is overloaded.
Transfer belt cleaning unit Check that there is no abnormality in the cleaning blade.
Check if the waste toner auger is overloaded.
LGC board Connector check (CN333)
Transfer belt Check if it’s normal
1st transfer roller status detection Sensor check
sensor (S12)
1st transfer contact/release clutch Clutch check
(CLT3)

Drum TBU motor
LGC board
1st transfer roller status detection
sensor (S12)
1st transfer contact/release clutch
(CLT3)

8 - 170
[C380] Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (upper limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (upper limit)
Next
Step
Developer unit • Check if the developer unit is
installed properly.
• Check that the developer unit and
coupling on the equipment side are
properly engaged.
• Check that the mixer of the
developer unit is rotated.
• Check if the developer material is
too light visually.
• Check if the amount of the
1
developer material is too large or
too small.
• Remove any toner or dust on the
ATC sensor connector and the
drawer connector of the process
cover. 8
EPU sensor connector and the
drawer connector on the equipment
side.
Auto toner sensor - Equipment • Check the connectors and
Harness - LGC board harnesses between the auto toner
sensor and LGC board (CN311).
2
• Remove any foreign matter such as
toner in the connector of the auto
toner sensor.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 171
[C381] Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (lower limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (lower limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
1
too small.
cover.
side.
Auto toner sensor • Check the connectors and
Harness harnesses between the auto toner
LGC board sensor and LGC board (CN311).
2 • Check if there is any foreign matter
such as toner in the connector of
the auto toner sensor. Remove if
there is and reconnect it.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 172
[C390] Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (upper limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (upper limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
too light visually.
1
too small.
cover. 8
side.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 173
[C391] Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (lower limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (lower limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
1
too small.
cover.
side.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 174
[C3A0] Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (upper limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (upper limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
too light visually.
1
too small.
cover. 8
side.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 175
[C3A1] Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (lower limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (lower limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
1
too small.
cover.
side.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 176
[C3B0] Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (upper limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (upper limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
too light visually.
1
too small.
cover. 8
side.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 177
[C3B1] Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (lower limit)
Copy process related service call Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (lower limit)
Next
Step
installed properly.
properly engaged.
1
too small.
cover.
side.

Auto toner sensor
Harness
LGC board
Developer material

8 - 178
[C3E0] Developer unit replacement (old-new) detection abnormality
Copy process related service call Developer unit replacement (old-new) detection abnormality
Next
Step
Check if the old/new detection Yes 4
1 pusher of the developer unit is No 2
being ejected.
Check if the harness of the old/ Yes 3
2 new detection switch in the No Replace the harness.
developer unit is open circuited.
Is the old/new detection switch of Yes 4
3
the developer unit normal? No Replace the old/new detection switch.
pusher is moved to the escape No Correct the old/new detection pusher
position while the coupling of the so that it is moved to the escape
developer unit is rotated by hand. position.
(Is the driving in the old/new
detection pusher section
transmitted?) 8
[2] [1]
Fig.8-6
Temporarily take off the developer unit,

and then rotate the developer sleeve
clockwise (in the direction of the black
arrow) while pushing the old/new
detection pusher (shown with the red
arrow). Rotate it until the pusher is fully
stored.
Check that the coupling of the Yes Correct the engagement of the 9
paper feed developer drive unit is couplings in the paper feed developer
5
driven properly. drive unit and the developer unit.
No 6
Check that the paper feeding/ Yes 9
6 developer unit drive motor rotates No 7
properly. (Input check: 03-112)
Check that the connector of the Yes 9
7 paper feeding/developer unit drive No 8
motor is connected properly.
Check if the harness of the paper Yes 9
8 feeding/developer unit drive motor No Replace the paper feeding/developer
is open circuited. unit drive motor.

8 - 179
Next
Step
Check that the coupling of the Yes Correct the engagement of the
drum TBU drive unit is driven couplings in the drum TBU drive unit
9
properly. and the developer unit.
No 10
10 LGC board (CN310) is connected No Reconnect the connector.
properly.
Is the harness of the LGC board Yes 12
11
normal? No Replace the harness.
12 Is the LGC board normal? Replace the LGC board.

Developer unit old/new detection
switches
Paper feeding/developer unit drive
motor
LGC board
Harness

8 - 180
[C3E1] Drum/cleaner/charger unit replacement (old-new) detection abnormality
Copy process related service call Drum/cleaner/charger unit replacement (old-new) detection
abnormality
Next
Step
1 pusher of the drum cleaner unit is No 2
being ejected.
Check if the harness of the drum Yes 3
2 old/new detection switch in the No Replace the harness.
drum cleaner unit is open circuited.
Is the drum old/new detection Yes 4
3 switch of the drum cleaner unit No Replace the drum old/new detection
normal? switch.
Check if the drum old/new Yes 3
detection pusher is moved to the No Correct the drum old/new detection
escape position while the coupling pusher so that it is moved to the
of the drum cleaner unit is rotated escape position.
4
by hand. 8
(Is a driving in the old/new
detection pusher section
transmitted?)
Check that the coupling of the Yes Correct the engagement of the 9
drum TBU drive unit is driven couplings in the drum TBU drive unit
5
properly. and the drum cleaner unit.
No 6
Check that the drum TBU drive Yes 9
6 motor rotates properly. (Input No 7
check: 03-112)
7 drum TBU drive motor is No 8
connected properly.
Check if the harness of the drum Yes 9
8
TBU drive motor is open circuited. No Replace the drum TBU drive motor.
9 LGC board (CN310) is connected No Reconnect the connector.
properly.
Is the harness of the LGC board Yes 12
10
normal? No Replace the harness.

Drum old/new detection switches
Drum TBU motor
LGC board
Harness

8 - 181
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality
Copy Process related service call High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of the main
charger is detected.
Check Item Measure

Main charger Check if the main charger is installed securely.
Spring of high-voltage supply Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is
contact point deformed.
Needle electrode • Check if the needle electrode is broken or the main charger
grid is deformed.
• Check if any foreign matter is on the needle electrode or
main charger grid.

8 - 182
8.3.25 Other service call
[F100_0] HDD format error (Operation failure of key data)
Other service call HDD format error: Operation of HDD key data fails.
Check item Measures

Setting Reboot the equipment.
If it cannot be recovered, reinstall the software in the following
procedure.
1. Install the system firmware.
 P. 11-4 "11.2 Firmware Updating with a USB Device"
[F100_1] HDD format error (HDD encryption key data damaged - one board)
Other service call HDD format error: Encryption key data of either the SYS board
or the SRAM board for the SYS board are damaged.
Check item Measures

Encryption key status Check the displayed message. ([3] + [C] + [POWER]  5. Key 8
Backup Restore)
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
"SRAM Key Status" and "FROM Key Status".
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware, system software and application
is needed. ([4]+[9] Power-ON)
SRAM Key FROM Key

Measure
Status Status
OK AccessFailed Replace the SYS board.
 P. 9-21 "9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing
the SYS board" (all steps)
OK KeyNull Recover the encryption key on the SYS board.
KeyBroken  P. 9-21 "9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing
the SYS board" ([E]Restore encryption key)
AccessFailed OK Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board). (USB backup
data are not used)
 P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" (all steps)
KeyNull OK Recover the encryption key on the SRAM board.
KeyBroken  P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" ([H]Backup encryption
key)

8 - 183
SRAM Key FROM Key
Measure
Status Status
Keymismatch Keymismatch <The error occurs when the SYS board is replaced>
Recover the encryption key on the SYS board.
<The error occurs except when the SYS board is replaced>
Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).

8 - 184
[F100_2] HDD format error (HDD encryption key data damaged - both boards)
Other service call HDD format error: Encryption key data of both the SYS board
and the SRAM board for the SYS board are damaged.
Check item Measures

Encryption key status Check the displayed message. ([3] + [C] + [POWER]  5. Key
Backup Restore)
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
"SRAM Key Status" and "FROM Key Status".
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware / system software and application
SRAM Key FROM Key

Measure
Status Status
* AccessFailed Replace the SYS board.
<With USB backup data: All key data recovery> 8
1. Recover all the data on the SRAM board.
[5] + [9] + [POWER]  2. Restore SRAM Data from USB
(For details, see "12.1.4Cloning procedure [B]Restore
procedure")
2. Recover the encryption key/license on the SYS board.
Follow the procedures below noted in "9.2.4Precautions
and Procedures when replacing the SYS board".
[D] Restore ADI key (only when ADI-HDD is installed)
[E] Restore encryption key
[F] Restore license
AccessFailed * Replace the SYS board.
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" (for the SYS board, all
steps)
KeyNull/ KeyNull/ <No USB backup data>
KeyBroken KeyBroken 1. Reinstall the system software.
<With USB backup data: All key data recovery>
procedure")
[F] Restore license
* AccessFailed, KeyNull or KeyBroken

8 - 185
[F101_0] HDD connection error (HDD connection cannot be detected.)
[F101_1] Root partition mount error (HDD formatting fails.)
[F101_2][F101_3] Partition mount error (The HDD cannot be connected (mounted) caused by
damage to areas other than those described in the F101_1 and F101_4 to F101_9 errors.)
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 0: HDD connection error (HDD connection cannot be
detected.)
Sub-code 1: Root partition mount error (HDD formatting fails.)
Sub-code 2, 3: Partition mount error (The areas other than
those described in the F101_1 and F101_4 to F101_9 errors
are damaged.)
Check item Measures

HDD, SYS board, Setting 1. Turn the power of the equipment OFF and check the
connection of the HDD.
- Connector and harness check
- Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
- Check if HDD for other equipment is not installed.
- Check if SRAM for other equipment is not installed.
2. If the error still occurs after step 1, perform the following.
- Perform [3C] - [5] (Key Backup Restore) and check
that each Key Status is "OK".
- If not, recover the key (copy "SRAM Key Status" to
"FROM Key Status" or vice versa).
3. If the error still persists after step 2, perform the
following.
- Perform [3C] - [3] (Format HDD), and then install
"System Software (HD data)" with [49] - [4].
Notes:
The following items will be deleted by performing
[3C] - [3] (Format HDD).
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Spool Data (Print, Email reception)
• Template
If F101_1 occurs with ADI-HDD or the error persists
after performing step 3, perform step 3 after
performing [4]+[C]+[POWER]1. Revert factory
initial status HDD.
4. If the error persists even after step 3, replace the HDD.
5. If the error persists even after step 4, replace the SATA
harness.
6. If the error persists even after step 5, replace the SYS
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 186
[F101_4] Partition mount error (The HDD cannot be connected (mounted) caused by damage to
the "/work" partition.)
Sub-code 4: Partition mount error (The "/work" partition is
damaged.)
Check item Measures

3. If the error persists after step 2, perform
[5]+[C]+[POWER]2. Recovery F/S3. /work, and 8
then restart the equipment.
[5]+[C]+[POWER]3. Initialize HDD2. /work, and
following.
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
If the error persists after performing step 5, perform
step 5 after performing [4]+[C]+[POWER]1. Revert
factory initial status HDD.
harness.
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 187
the "/registration" partition.)
Sub-code 5: Partition mount error (The "/registration" partition is
damaged.)
Check item Measures

[5]+[C]+[POWER]2. Recovery F/S4. /registration,
and then restart the equipment.
[5]+[C]+[POWER]3. Initialize HDD3. /registration,
following.
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
harness.
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 188
the "/backup" partition.)
Sub-code 6: Partition mount error (The "/backup" partition is
damaged.)
Check item Measures

[5]+[C]+[POWER]2. Recovery F/S5. /backup, and 8
[5]+[C]+[POWER]3. Initialize HDD4. /backup, and
following.
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
harness.
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 189
the "/imagedata" partition.)
Sub-code 7: Partition mount error (The "/imagedata" partition is
damaged.)
Check item Measures

[5]+[C]+[POWER]2. Recovery F/S6. /imagedata,
[5]+[C]+[POWER]3. Initialize HDD5. /imagedata,
following.
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
harness.
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 190
the "/storage" partition.)
Sub-code 8: Partition mount error (The "/storage" partition is
damaged.)
Check item Measures

[5]+[C]+[POWER]2. Recovery F/S7. /storage, and 8
[5]+[C]+[POWER]3. Initialize HDD6. /storage, and
following.
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
harness.
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 191
the "/encryption" partition.)
Sub-code 9: Partition mount error (The "/encryption" partition is
damaged.)
Check item Measures

[5]+[C]+[POWER]2. Recovery F/S8. /encryption,
[5]+[C]+[POWER]3. Initialize HDD7. /encryption,
following.
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
harness.
board.

HDD
SATA harness
SYS board

8 - 192
[F102] HDD start error
[F103] HDD transfer time-out
[F104] HDD data error
[F105] HDD other error
Other service call HDD start error: HDD cannot become “Ready” state.
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in
the specified period of time.
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD.
HDD other error
Check item Measures

HDD • Connector and harness check
• Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
• Perform the bad sector check (08-9072). If the check
result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If the check
result is failed, replace the HDD.

HDD
SYS board 8
[F106_0] ADI-HDD error: Illegal disk replacement detected (ADI-HDD Exchange to SATA-HDD)

ADI-HDD error: The ADI-HDD has been replaced illegally to
Other service call
SATA-HDD (normal type).
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the HDD has been replaced with a SATA-HDD
(normal type).
1. Start the equipment in the 4C mode: [4] + [C] +
[POWER]
2. Check the type of the HDD shown on the top left of the
control panel display "Current HDD type".
2a. In case of "SATA-HDD" (normal type), replace it with
the original ADI-HDD or a new ADI-HDD.
Notes:
To replace with the original ADI-HDD, start the
equipment in the normal mode and then reinstall
system software only if any abnormality occurs.
2b. In case of "ADI-HDD"
Check each item in the Measures field for the HDD
below.
If the error still occurs, reinstall the system software.

8 - 193
Check item Measures
• Harness check
Follow the procedure below if no abnormality is found in the
check items above.
[POWER] -> 1. Revert factory initial status HDD
2. Reinstall the system software.
If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
If the equipment operation disabled after above step,
replace the HDD.
[F106_1] ADI-HDD error: HDD type detection error

Other service call ADI-HDD error: HDD type detection fails.
Check item Measures

Setting If the error is not recovered after rebooting the equipment
or no abnormality is found on any check items for the HDD,
reinstall the system software.
• Harness check
• Start the equipment in the 5C mode: [5] + [C] +
[POWER]
Check the file system and recover it if necessary.
If the recovery fails, replace the HDD.
If the equipment does not start in the 5C mode, also
replace the HDD.
• Check that either the ADI-HDD or SATA-HDD (normal
type) is mounted.
[POWER]
2. Check the type of the HDD shown on the top left of the
control panel display "Current HDD type".
Normal status: ADI-HDD or SATA-HDD
Abnormal status: Unknown HDD
If "Unknown HDD" is displayed, reinstall the system
software.
If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
replace the HDD.
[F106_2] ADI-HDD error: ADI encryption key download operation error

ADI-HDD error: Downloading of or consistency check for ADI-
Other service call
HDD encryption key fails.

8 - 194
Check item Measures
Setting Checking of ADI-HDD encryption key status
[POWER]
2. The authentication menu is displayed. Press [OK]. (Not
required in the default setting)
3. Select "5. Key Backup Restore" and then press the
[START] button.
4. Check the status of the ADI-HDD encryption key on the
Key Backup Restore Mode menu.
5. After the operation is completed, shut down the
equipment by pressing the [POWER] button.
• In case both the SRAM ADIKey and FROM ADIKey
status are OK
Reinstall the system firmware.
• In case either the SRAM ADIKey or FROM ADIKey
status is other than OK
Restore the ADI-HDD encryption key.
• In case both of the SRAM ADIKey or FROM ADIKey
status are other than OK
Reinstall the system software.
HDD If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD. 8
replace the HDD.
[F106_3] ADI-HDD error: ADI authentication Admin Password generation error

ADI-HDD error: The generation of ADI authentication Admin
Other service call
Password fails.
Check item Measures

Setting Perform [3]+[C]+[POWER]-> [3.Format HDD], and then
install the system software by performing
[4]+[9]+[POWER]-> [4.System Software(HD data)].
Notes:
[3]+[C]+[POWER]-> [3.Format HDD].
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
HDD If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
replace the HDD.
[F106_4] ADI-HDD error: Authentication random number generation error

ADI-HDD error: The generation of a random number for
Other service call
authentication data fails.

8 - 195
Check item Measures
Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
replace the HDD.
[F106_5] ADI-HDD error: Authentication data transmission error

Other service call ADI-HDD error: The transmission of authentication data fails.
Check item Measures

Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
• In case this error occurred after returning SRAM data for
SRAM cloning:
Copy the ADI-HDD encryption key from FROM to
SRAM.
[POWER]
2. The authentication menu is displayed. Press [OK]. (Not
required in the default setting)
3. Select "5. Key Backup Restore" and then press the
[START] button.
4. Select "6. ADIKey FROM to SRAM" and then press the
[START] button.
5. After the restoring of the encryption key has completed,
"Operation Complete" is displayed.
6. After the operation has completed, shut down the
equipment by pressing the [POWER] button.
replace the HDD.

8 - 196
[F106_6]/[F106_7]/[F106_8]/[F106_10] /[F106_UNDEF] ADI-HDD error: Error caused by reason
other than F106_0 to 5 errors

ADI-HDD error: Error caused by reason other than F106_0 to 5
Other service call
errors
Check item Measures

Notes:
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Template
replace the HDD.
8

8 - 197
[F109_0] Key consistency error (Consistency check operation error)
Other service call Key consistency error - Key consistency check on each key
data fails.
Check item Measures

If it cannot be recovered, reinstall the software in the
following procedure.
2. If the error cannot be solved after installing the system
firmware, reinstall the system software and application
program.
 P. 11-11 "11.2.4 Update procedure"
SRAM board (for SYS board) If the error is not cleared after the software reinstallation,
replace the SRAM board.
 P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when
replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS board)"
SYS board If the error is not cleared after this (see above), replace the
SYS board.
 P. 9-21 "9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when
replacing the SYS board"

SRAM board
SYS board
[F109_1] Key consistency error (SRAM encryption AES key data damage)
Other service call Key consistency error - AES key data used for SRAM
encryption are damaged.
Check item Measures

program.

8 - 198
[F109_2] Key consistency error (Signature Check public key damage)
Other service call Key consistency error - Public key data used for Integrity Check
are damaged.
Check item Measures

program.
[F109_3] Key consistency error (HDD encryption parameter damage)
Other service call Key consistency error - Parameter used for HDD partition
encryption are damaged.
8
Check item Measures
Encryption key status confirmation Check the message displayed by [3] + [C] + [POWER]  5.
Key Backup Restore.
Take measures given in the following table according to the messages displayed in the SRAM Key
Status and FROM Key Status fields.
Remarks:
SRAM Key FROM Key

Measure
Status Status
procedure")
[F] Restore license
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" (for the SYS board, all
steps)

8 - 199
SRAM Key FROM Key
Measure
Status Status
OK KeyNull/ Recover the encryption key on the SYS board.
AccessFailed OK Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).
KeyNull/ OK Recover the encryption key on the SRAM board.
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" (for the SYS board, [H]
Backup encryption key)
KeyBroken KeyBroken 1. Reinstall the system software.
procedure")
[F] Restore license
* AccessFailed, KeyNull or KeyBroken
[F109_4] Key consistency error (license data damage)
Other service call Key consistency error - The license data are damaged.
Check item Measures

Encryption key status confirmation Check the message displayed by [3] + [C] + [POWER]  5. Key
Backup Restore.
Take measures given in the following table according to the messages displayed in the SRAM Licence
Status and FROM Licence Status fields.
Remarks:

8 - 200
SRAM Licence FROM Licence
Measure
Status Status
procedure")
[F] Restore license
KeyMismatch KeyMismatch <The error occurs when the SYS board is replaced>
Recover the license on the SYS board. (Transfer the license
from SYS-SRAM to SYS-FROM.) 8
the SYS board"([F]Restore license)
Recover the license on the SRAM board. (Transfer the license
from SYS-FROM to SYS-SRAM.)
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)"([I]Backup license)
* AccessFailed or KeyMismatch
[F109_5] Key consistency error (encryption key for ADI-HDD is damaged)
Other service call Key consistency error - Encryption key for ADI-HDD is
damaged.
Check item Measures

Backup Restore.
Remarks:

8 - 201
SRAM Key FROM Key
Measure
Status Status
procedure")
[F] Restore license
AccessFailed * Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).
OK KeyNull/ Recover the ADI key on the SYS board.
the SYS board" ([D]Restore ADI key)
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" ([G]Backup ADI key)
KeyBroken KeyBroken 1. Create the partition in the HDD/SSD, and reinstall the
system software.
 P. 9-15 "9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when
replacing the HDD/SSD"(Perform step 3 or later in “[F]
Replace / Format HDD/SSD”)
procedure")
[F] Restore license
Recover the encryption key on the SYS board. (Transfer the
license from SYS-SRAM to SYS-FROM.)
the SYS board"([D]Restore ADI key)
Recover the encryption key on the SRAM board. (Transfer the
license from SYS-FROM to SYS-SRAM.)
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)"([G]Backup ADI key)

8 - 202
[F109_6] Key consistency error (administrator password error for ADI-HDD authentication)
Other service call Key consistency error - Administrator password error for ADI-
HDD authentication.
Check item Measures

Backup Restore.
Remarks:
SRAM Key FROM Key

Measure
Status Status
the SYS board" (all steps) 8
procedure")
[F] Restore license
AccessFailed * Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).
OK KeyNull/ Recover the ADI key on the SYS board.
the SYS board" ([D]Restore ADI key)
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)" ([G]Backup ADI key)

8 - 203
SRAM Key FROM Key
Measure
Status Status
KeyBroken KeyBroken 1. Create the partition in the HDD/SSD, and reinstall the
system software.
replacing the HDD/SSD"(Perform step 3 or later in “[F]
Replace / Format HDD/SSD”)
procedure")
[F] Restore license
Recover the encryption key on the SYS board. (Transfer the
license from SYS-SRAM to SYS-FROM.)
the SYS board"([D]Restore ADI key)
Recover the encryption key on the SRAM board. (Transfer the
license from SYS-FROM to SYS-SRAM.)
the SRAM board (for the SYS board)"([G]Backup ADI key)
[F110] Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU

[F111] Scanner response abnormality

Communication related service call Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-
CPU Scanner response abnormality.
Check item Measures

Reproducibility • Turn the power OFF and then back ON using the main
power switch.
SYS board • Check if the conductor pattern on the SYS board is short
• Check if the connector (CN123) on the SYS board is
abnormally.
• Check if the harness (CN123) on the SYS board is
abnormally.
Parts to be replaced Remarks

SYS board

8 - 204
[F120] Database abnormality

Other service call Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally.
Check item Measures

Setting 1. Check that no jobs remain and rebuild the databases. ([5]
+ [C] + [POWER] -> 4. Initialize database -> 1. LDAP DB
and 2. Log DB (Job,Msg).
2. If the error is not recovered, reinstall the system software.
([4] + [9] + [POWER] -> 4. System Software(HD data))
Notes:
• If you rebuild the databases with a job remaining,
delete it after finishing.
• When "Rebuilding all databases" is performed, all
data including log/user/role/group/department
information and address book data are deleted. If
you back up the data in advance, they will be
recovered by restoring them after rebuilding the
database.
8
[F121] Database abnormality (user information management database)

Other service call Login after the startup fails in any starting mode because user
management database is corrupted.
Check item Measures

Setting 1. Delete the log in the following procedure:[5] + [C] +
[POWER]  4. Initialize database  1. LDAP database
(to delete user database) (Note that all user, role, group
and accounting data will be deleted.)
([4] + [9] + [POWER] -> 4. System Software(HD data))
Notes:
database.
[F122] Database abnormality (message/job log management database)

Other service call Login after the startup fails in any starting mode because log
management database is corrupted.

8 - 205
Check item Measures
Setting 1. Delete the log in the following procedure: [5] + [C] +
[POWER]  4. Initialize database  2. Log database
(jobs and messages) (Note that all job and message logs
will be deleted.)
([4] + [9] + [POWER]  4. System Software(HD data))
Notes:
database.
[F124] Language DB damage error

Other service call Login after the startup fails in any starting mode because
language management database is corrupted.
Check item Measures

Setting Delete the journal file: [5] + [C] + [START]  4. Initialize DB
 3. Language DB
If the recovery is still not completed, reinstall the system
software and application program.

8 - 206
[F130] Invalid MAC address
Other service call Invalid MAC address
Check item Measures

Setting This error occurs when the top 3 bytes of the MAC address
is not "00" "80" "91".
SYS board Replace the SYS board.
[F131] Error due to damage to filtering setting file
Other service call The filtering function is not working properly due to the damage
to the file for the filtering setting.
Check item Measures

Setting 1. Check the bad sector of the HDD (08-9072). If the result
is "NG", replace the HDD.
Notes:
It may take more than 30 minutes to finish the 8
checking.
2. Perform [3] + [C] + [POWER]  [3], and then reinstall
the HDD software.
Notes:
User data will be deleted when [3] + [C] + [POWER]
 [3] is performed.
Parts to be replaced Remarks

HDD
[F140] ASIC format error
Other service call ASIC formatting fails or memory acquiring fails when software
is formatted
Check item Measures

• Board check
Main memory • Check the installation
• Main memory check

Main memory
SYS board

8 - 207
[F200] Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) disabled
Other service call Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) disabled
Check item Measures

Setting Perform firmware installation (all firmware: OS, HDD, SYS,
PFC Firmware, Engine Main Firmware, and Scanner
Firmware) with the USB device.
* When the function of the Data Overwrite option (GP-
1070) is deleted from the equipment, the service call
“F200” occurs.
Perform 08-3840 to install the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-
1070).
* If F200 occurs while High (“3”) is set for the security
level (08-8911), it cannot be released by installing the
firmware using the USB device. Install the Data
Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) by 08-3840.
[F400] SYS board cooling fan abnormality
Circuit related service call SYS board cooling fan abnormality
Check item Measures

SYS board cooling fan Check if the fan is rotating properly. If not, check if any foreign
object is adhered.
SYS board Check the connector (CN103) and relay connector.

SYS board
SYS board cooling fan
[F500] HD partition damage

Other service call The file system is abnormal.
Check item Measures

Setting • Diagnose the file system with [5] + [C] + [POWER]  1.
• Check F/S, and then recover the problem partition with [5]
+ [C] + [POWER]  2. Recovery F/S.
• If it is not recovered, reinstall the software after the HDD
format.

8 - 208
[F510] Application start error

Other service call The application fails to start.
Check item Measures

Setting 1. Reboot.
2. If it has still not recovered, reinstall the system software.
3. If it still persists after step 2, perform [3] + [C] + [POWER]
 3, and then reinstall the system software.
Notes:
User data will be deleted when [3] + [C] + [POWER] 
3 is performed.
[F520] Operating system start error

Other service call The operating system fails to start.
Check item Measures

Setting 1. Reboot. 8
2. If it has still not recovered, reinstall the system software.
3. If it still persists after step 2, perform [3] + [C] + [POWER]
 3, and then reinstall the system software.
Notes:
User data will be deleted when [3] + [C] + [POWER] 
3 is performed.
[F521] Integrity check error

Other service call The program data fails to be authenticated.
Check item Measures

Setting Restart the equipment.
If the error is not recovered after restarting the equipment,
reinstall software following the procedure below.
1. Reinstall the system software and application program.
replacing the HDD/SSD"
[F550] Encryption partition error

Other service call The encryption partition fails to be read and written.
Check item Measures

Setting • Recover the encryption key with [3] + [C] + [POWER]  5.

8 - 209
[F600] F/W update error

Other service call The firmware fails to be updated.
Check item Measures

Setting 1. Perform [3] + [C] + [POWER]  [1]  [START] for "Clear
Error Flag in Software Installation".
2. Reinstall the firmware in error displayed on the F600 error
screen.
[F700] Overwrite error

Other service call Overwriting fails.
Check item Measures

Setting • If a service call occurs again after the reboot, replace the HDD.
[F800] Date error

Other service call The year 2038 problem
Check item Measures

Setting Reset the date, and request the administrator to set the date
and time.
1. Turn the power on while pressing the [6] and [CLEAR]
button.
2. Select [2] key, and then press the [START] button.
3. Press the [START] button on the confirmation screen
displayed. (The date is set to January 1st, 2011.)
4. Request the administrator to set the date and time.

8 - 210
[F900] Model information error

Other service call Machine information alignment error. The machine
information is damaged.
Check item Measures

Setting Recover the machine information by means of the following
procedure.
<Machine information recovery>
1. Turn the power ON while pressing [6] and the [CLEAR]
button simultaneously.
2. Key in [3] to select "3. SRAM Re-Initialize Support", and
then press the [START] button.
3. After the operation is completed, shut down the equipment
by pressing the [ON/OFF] button.
* If it is not recovered, perform the following procedure.
5. Enter the password on the Authentication screen. If no
password is set for Service, press the [OK] button without
entering anything. If the High Security Mode has been set,
enter "#1048#". 8
6. Key in [5] to select "5. Key Backup Restore", and then
press the [START] button.
7. Key in [2] to select "2. Key FROM to SRAM", and then
[F902_0] Mistaken HDD installation error

Other service call HDD is installed to the equipment which does not support
HDD by mistake.
Check item Measures

SSD Install SSD to the equipment.

8 - 211
[F902_1] System firmware / System software model information error

Other service call Invalid system firmware/software is installed on 20/25 ppm
model.
Check item Measures

LGC board Check if the model of the equipment matches the color of the
label on the LGC board.
 P. 9-4 "9.1.6 LGC board"
Setting
Notes:
When the SSD is replaced with the HDD in the 20/25
ppm model, perform the following procedures after the
HDD is installed.
1. Confirm the model of the equipment.
2. For the 20/25 ppm model, install the SSD or HDD. For, the
LL20/LL25ppm model, install the SSD.
3. Install the system firmware corresponding to the model.
([8]+[9] mode)
 P. 11-27 "11.3.2 System firmware"
4. Install the system software corresponding to the model.
([4]+[9] mode  [4])

LGC board
[F902_2] A model-unmatched SYS board is installed.

Other service call The SYS board for e-STUDIO2050C/2550C/2051C/2551C is
installed in e-STUDIO2055C/2555C/3555C/4555C/5055C. Or
the opposite combination.
Check item Measures

SYS board Check if the model of the equipment matches the part number
of the SYS board.

SYS board

8 - 212
[F902_3] A model-unmatched SYS board is installed.

Other service call • The SYS board for 20 ppm / 25 ppm is installed in the
LL20 ppm / LL25 ppm equipment. Or the opposite
combination.
• The OS data for 20 ppm / 25 ppm are installed in the LL20
ppm / LL25 ppm equipment. Or the opposite combination.
• Invalid system firmware/software is installed on LL20/LL25
ppm model.
Check item Measures

SYS board Check if the model of the equipment matches the part number
of the SYS board.
Settings Clear the error by following the procedure below and then
install the appropriate firmware.
2. Key in [4] to select "4. L-LL", and then press the [START]
button.
8
4. Turn the power ON while pressing [4] and [9] button
simultaneously.
5. Key in [1] to select "1. SYSTEM FIRMWARE (OS Data)",
and then press the [START] button.
6. Key in [4] to select "4. SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HD Data)",
LGC board Check if the model of the equipment matches the color of the
label on the LGC board.
 P. 9-4 "9.1.6 LGC board"
Setting
Notes:
When the SSD is replaced with the HDD in the 20/25
ppm model, perform the following procedures after the
HDD is installed.
1. Confirm the model of the equipment.
2. For the 20/25 ppm model, install the SSD or HDD. For, the
LL20/LL25ppm model, install the SSD.
3. Install the system firmware corresponding to the model.
([8]+[9] mode)
 P. 11-27 "11.3.2 System firmware"
4. Install the system software corresponding to the model.
([4]+[9] mode  [4])

SYS board
LGC board

8 - 213
8.3.26 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
Notes:
• When formatting the HDD ([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON -> [3] -> [1]), all data in the shared folder,
Electronic Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the
initialization. Note that some of data cannot be backed up
 P. 9-15 "9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD/SSD"
[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error

[1C10] System access abnormality
[1C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting
([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON -> [3] -> [1]).
[1C11] Insufficient memory

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C12] Message reception error

[1C13] Message transmission error
[1C14] Invalid parameter

When a template is used, form the template again.
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity

Reset and extend the “Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size” or reduce the number of pages and
perform the job again.
[1C30] Directory creation failure

[1C31] File creation failure
[1C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality

Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing

Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD/PRIVATE/PROOF/INVALID, and perform it
again.
[1C61] Address Book reading failure

Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset

Reset the Terminal IP address.
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset

Reset the Terminal mail address.

8 - 214
[1C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
[1C66] Server time-out error

Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error

Check the SMTP Authentication method.
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Set the correct SMTP Authentication method or delete the illegal character and reset the
appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job again.
[1C6C] Destination mail address error

Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C6D] System error

8
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
[1C70] SMTP client OFF

Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[1C71] SMTP authentication error

Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform
authentication again.
[1C72] POP Before SMTP error

Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform
[1CC1] Power failure

Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
[ 2 ] RFC related error

[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)

[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.

8 - 215
Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.
[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)

Confirm the size on the mail server.
Transmit again in text mode or with lower resolution or divide the document and transmit again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.
[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error

[2B11] JOB status abnormality
[2B20] File library function error
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in BOX partition
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing or the shared folder and perform the job in error again (in
case of [2B30]).
Ask the administrator if e-Filing has been disabled. (In case of [2CC1])
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting ([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON
-> [3] -> [1]).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted

Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists.
Change the folder name to be created since the same folder name cannot be created as the file
name in the specified Electronic Filing.
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
Perform the job in error again.
[2B50] Image library error

[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD/PRIVATE/PROOF/INVALID, and retry the job
in error.
[2B51] List library error

Check if the Function list can be printed.
If it can be printed, retry the job in error.
If it cannot, replace the main memory.
If it still cannot be printed, initialize the HDD ([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON -> [3] -> [1])
[2BA0] Invalid Box password

Check if the password is correct.
Reset the password.
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the
administrator's password.
[2BA1]Invalid paper size/color mode/resolution.

The specified paper size, color more or resolution cannot be used. Check the setting.
[2BB1] Power failure

[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing

8 - 216
[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error
[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages

Reduce the number of the pages of the job in error, and retry the job.
[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents

Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders

Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
[ 4 ] Remote scanning related error

[2A20] System management module resource acquiring failure
Retry the job in error.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, then retry the job in error.
[2A31] Disabled WS Scan

Check if the WS Scan function is disabled.
Or, check if the forcible encryption setting of the secure PDF is enabled.
[2A40] System error

Turn the power OFF and then back ON, then retry the job in error.
8
[2A51] Power failure

Check if the power cable is properly connected.
Check if the power supply voltage is inconstant.
[2A60] WS Scan user authentication failure

• When “1” (TTEC’s WIA driver) is set for 08-9749 and also Windows Fax&Scan is used Check if the
user name that you used to log in Windows is a name registered as a user.
• When MFP panel or EWB Scan is used Check if the login user name is a name registered as a user.
[2A70] Remote Scan privilege check error

Check if correct privilege is given to the user.
[2A71] WS Scan privilege check error

[2A72] e-Filing data access privilege check error (Scan Utility)


8 - 217
[ 5 ] E-mail related error
[2C10] System access abnormality
[2C32] File deletion failure
([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON -> [3] -> [1]).
[2C11] Insufficient memory

[2C12] Message reception error

[2C13] Message transmission error
[2C14] Invalid parameter

[2C15] Exceeding file capacity

Reset and extend the “Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size” or reduce the number of pages and
[2C20] System management module access abnormality

[2C21] Job control module access abnormality
[2C22] Job control module access abnormality
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting ([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON
-> [3] -> [1]).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2C30] Directory creation failure

[2C31] File creation failure
[2C33] File access failure
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality

[2C62] Memory acquiring failure
[2C43] Encryption error

[2C44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.
[2C45] Meta data creation error (Scan to Email)

Check the template settings. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, turn the power
OFF and then back ON, and then perform the job in error again.
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing

again.
Check that there is enough space in the server or local disk.

8 - 218
[2C61] Address Book reading failure
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset

Reset the Terminal IP address.
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset

Reset the Terminal mail address.
[2C65] SMTP address unset

Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
[2C66] Server time-out error

[2C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)

8
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error

Check the SMTP Authentication method.
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Set the correct SMTP Authentication method or delete the illegal character and reset the
appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job again.
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)

Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C70] SMTP client OFF

Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[2C71] SMTP authentication error

Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform
[2C72] POP Before SMTP error

Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform
[2CC1] Power failure

[ 6 ] File sharing related error

[2D10] System access abnormality
[2D32] File deletion failure
[2DA6] File deletion failure

8 - 219
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion
failure (in case of [2DA6])
([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON -> [3] -> [1]).
[2D11] Insufficient memory

[2D12] Message reception error

[2D13] Message transmission error
[2D14] Invalid parameter

[2D15] Exceeding the maximum size for file sharing

Divide the file in error into several files and retry. Or retry the job in a single-page format.
[2D30] Directory creation failure

[2D31] File creation failure
[2D33] File access failure
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality

[2D43] Encryption error

[2D44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.
[2D45] Meta data creation error (Scan to File)

[2D62] File server connection error

Check the IP address or path of the server.
Check if the server is operating properly.
[2D63] Invalid network path

Check the network path.
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D64] Login failure

Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed

Delete some documents in the folder.

8 - 220
[2D66] Storage capacity full failure during processing
again.
Check that there is enough space in the server or local disk.
[2D67] FTP service not available

Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.
[2D68] File sharing service not available

Check if the setting of SMB is valid.
[2D69] NetWare service not available

Check if the Netware setting is enabled.
[2DC1] Power failure

[2E10] USB storage system access abnormality

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, first,
check if there are no jobs existing and then perform HDD formatting ([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON ->
[3] -> [1]).
8
[2E11] Insufficient memory capacity for USB storage
If there is a job in progress, perform the job in error again after the job in progress is finished. If the
error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and then perform the job in error again.
[2E12] Message reception error in USB storage

[2E13] Message transmission error in USB storage
[2E14] Invalid parameter for USB storage

If a template is being used, recreate the template. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and
then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2E15] Exceeding maximum file capacity

Delete some files in the folder. Perform the job in error again.
[2E30] Directory creation failure in USB storage

Check if access privilege to the storage directory is writable. Check if the server or local disk has
sufficient space in its disk capacity.
[2E31] File creation failure in USB storage

[2E32] File deletion failure in USB storage

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, first,
check if there are no jobs existing and then perform HDD formatting ([5] + [C] + [POWER] ON ->
[3] -> [1]).
[2E33] File access failure in USB storage


8 - 221
[2E40] Image conversion abnormality in USB storage
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Replace the main memory
and then perform the job in error again.
[2E43] Encryption failure in USB storage

[2E44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error in USB storage

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again. To create an image file not encrypted,
consult your administrator.
[2E45] Meta data creation error in USB storage (Scan to File)

[2E65] File creation error due to insufficient USB folder capacity

Delete unnecessary files in the folder.
[2E66] HDD full failure in USB storage

again.
Check that there is enough space in the USB memory.
[2EC1] Power failure in USB storage

Check if the power cable is connected properly and inserted securely. Check if the power voltage is
unstable.

8 - 222
[ 7 ] E-mail reception related error
[3A10] E-mail MIME error
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.
[3A20] E-mail analysis error

[3B10] E-mail format error
[3B40] E-mail decode error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the
mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error

The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.
[3A40] Partial mail related error

The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.
[3A50] Insufficient HDD capacity error

These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the
jobs, etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.
8
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption

This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail
reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A80] Partial mail reception setting OFF

Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3B20] Content-Type error

The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
[3C10] [3C13] TIFF analysis error

These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the
mail, or when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
[3C20] TIFF compression error

The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.
[3C30] TIFF resolution error

The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x
200, 200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
[3C40] TIFF paper size error

The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT,
LG, LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.

8 - 223
[3C50] Offramp destination error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
[3C60] Offramp security error

These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.
[3C70] Power failure error

Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.
[3C90] OffRamp Fax transmission disable error

OffRamp Fax transmission disable error has been detected in the received mail.
Confirm if the Fax Send Function of MFP setting is disable or not.
[3D10] Destination address error

Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error

Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
[3D30] FAX board error

This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
[3E10] POP3 server connection error

Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or
check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error

Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.
[3E30] POP3 login error

Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
[3E40] POP3 Login Type error

Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.
[3F10] [3F20] File I/O error

These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.

8 - 224
8.3.27 Printer function error
[4011] Print job cancellation
This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.
[4021] Print job power failure

[4031] HDD full error

Delete unnecessary private print jobs and invalid department print jobs.
[4041] User authentication error

Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
[4042] Department authentication error

Check department information registered in this equipment.
[4045] Problem in LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings

Confirm the administrator for the LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings.
[4111] Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by department and user
management has reached 0.)
The number of the assigned pages set by the department and the number of those assigned by user 8
management have both reached 0. Assign the number of the pages again or perform initialization.
[4112] Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by user management has
reached 0.)
The number of the assigned pages set by the user management has reached 0. Assign the number of
the pages again or perform initialization.
[4113] Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by department management has
reached 0.)
The number of the assigned pages set by the department management has reached 0. Assign the
number of the pages again or perform initialization.
[4121] Job canceling due to external counter error

1. Drop a coin in. Perform the print job in error again.
2. Insert a key card and then perform the print job in error again, or consult your administrator.
3. Insert a key copy counter and then perform the print job in error again.
4. Reset the scheduled print job and then perform the print job in error again.
[4211] Printing data storing limitation error

Select “Normal Print”, and then perform the printing again.
[4212] e-Filing storing limitation error

Select “Normal Print”, and then perform the printing again.
[4213] File storing limitation error

The file storing function is set to "disabled". Check the settings of the equipment.
[4214] Fax/Internet Fax transmission limitation error

Check the settings of this equipment.
[4221] Private-print-only error

Select “Private print”, and then perform the printing again.
[4231] Hardcopy security printing error

Hardcopy security printing cannot be performed because the function is restricted in the self-
diagnosis mode.
8 - 225
[4311] Printing not permitted
Confirm the administrator for the JOB authorization.
[4312] Not authorized to store a file

The user has not been authorized to perform this operation. Ask your administrator.
[4313] No privilege for e-Filing storage

[4314] No privilege for Fax / Internet Fax transmission
[4321] No privilege for print settings
Check the privilege given, or request the administrator to add the necessary privilege.
[4411] Image data creation failure

Check if the file to be printed is broken. Perform printing again or use another printer driver.
• Network print: Perform the print job in error again, or use another printer driver (e.g.; PS3,
Universal).
• Direct print: Check if the file is corrupted (e.g. checking if the file is displayed on your PC
monitor), or check if the file format is supported by this equipment.
[4412] Double-sign encoding error

Printing using this function cannot be performed due to a decoding process error which occurs
because the PDF file is encrypted incorrectly or encrypted in a language not supported.
[4611] Font download failure (reached the registration limit)

[4612] Font download failure (HDD full)
Delete one or more font already registered.
[4613] Font download failure (others)

Reattempt the downloading. Recreate font data and reattempt the downloading.
[4621] Font deletion failure

Check if the font to be deleted is registered (or pre-registered) in this equipment.
[4F10] System abnormality

(1) Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and
(2) Collect the debug log with USB device.
 P. 8-2 "8.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device"
(3) Initialize HDD/SSD.
Refer to step 3 and later in “[F]Replace / Format HDD/SSD” in “9.2.3Precautions and procedures
when replacing the HDD/SSD”.

8 - 226
8.3.28 TopAccess related error/Communication error with external
application
[5010] Internal setting error

Communication error with external There is a print job, a proof print job, a private print job, a print
application job without a set department code, a scan job or a fax job
remaining in this equipment.
Check item Measures

Setting Delete the remaining jobs.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Until the initial
registration is begun, do not press any button on the control
panel or start any print or fax job.
[5012] Authentication error

Communication error with external A temporary password downloaded from e-Bridge and
application entered in this equipment is not valid, or the permanent
password set in the e-Bridge is not valid. 8
Check item Measures

Setting Confirm the user name and temporary password.
[5013] e-Bridge communication error

Communication error with external Communication is attempted while the e-Bridge is enabled for
application some reason such as version upgrade.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the MFP is connected to the eBR2 server.
[5014] No SSL certificate

Communication error with external There is no SSL certificate or the certificate is not in a correct
application file format.
Check item Measures

Setting Install the correct SSL certificate.

8 - 227
[5015] Invalid SSL certificate

Communication error with external SSL certificate is not valid.
application
Check item Measures

[5016] Expired SSL certificate

Communication error with external SSL certificate is expired.
application
Check item Measures

Setting Set the correct time.
[5017] Other SSL certificate related error

Communication error with external SSL certificate is invalid.
application
Check item Measures

[5018] Invalid DNS error

Communication error with external DNS address is invalid.
application
Check item Measures

Setting Set the correct DNS address.
If any setting is needed in DNS, consult your administrators.
[5019] Connection error

Communication error with external Settings for initial URL and proxy are incorrect.
application
Check item Measures

Setting Perform the correct settings for initial URL and proxy.

8 - 228
[501A] Proxy error

Communication error with external IP address or port for proxy setting is invalid.
application
Check item Measures

Setting Set the correct IP address or port for the proxy setting.
If any setting is needed in proxy, consult your administrators.
[501B] No URL (host/port) or invalid path

Communication error with external Initial URL is invalid.
application
Check item Measures

Setting Set the correct initial URL.
[5030] HTTP communication error 8

Communication error with external An error in the HTTP communication
application
Check item Measures

Setting Check the URL for communication.
Check that the valid IP address is assigned to connect to the
server.
[50FF] eBR2 internal error

MFP internal error A fatal error occurred in the MFP
Check item Measures

Setting Restart the MFP, and then try again.
[5110] Toner cartridge detection error

TopAccess related error
Check item Measures

Setting • Check if the toner cartridge is installed properly.
• Check if the toner cartridge detection sensor operates
properly.

8 - 229
[5212] Time for cleaning of the slit glass and main charger

Check item Measures

Setting • Clean the LED printer head and main charger.
• If the message is not cleared after the cleaning, check if
there is any detection error, breakage or poor connection
of the needle electrode cleaner detection sensor.
[5410] MFP registration error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

MFP registration error An invalid registration by accessing a cloud server using a
valid serial No. of the equipment has been performed. Or
database in the cloud server has been damaged.
Check item Measures

Setting of a cloud server Retry the registration. Contact the administrator of the cloud
server.
[5411] MFP registration lock error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

MFP registration error Data to be sent to a cloud server from the equipment has
been damaged or incorrect authentication data have been
sent. Or TOSHIBA equipment which has not been supported
by the cloud server has been tried to be registered.
Check item Measures

None Contact the administrator of the cloud server.
[5412] Server busy error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

Server busy error The server cannot handle periodic communication from the
equipment due to overloading. This phenomenon occurs
when a busy signal is sent from the server at the start of the
periodic communication of the equipment.
Check item Measures

None Not required
[5413] Server error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

Server error A fatal error has occurred on the cloud server.

8 - 230
Check item Measures
Setting of a cloud server Contact the administrator of the cloud server.
[5414] Invalid device file error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

Invalid device file A device file to be sent to a cloud server from the equipment
has been damaged.
Check item Measures

Communication environment connection of network devices. If there is no problem with the
network environment, reinstall the system software.
[5415] Communication error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

Communication error Communication with a cloud server has failed.
Check item Measures 8

Setting Check the connection and the settings of network devices
and the cloud server.
[5416] Setting files / system software update error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system
error

Update failure of system software / The system software and the setting files of the equipment
setting files of the equipment cannot be updated because there is an ongoing job.
Check item Measures

Communication environment Retry the update of the setting files and the system software.
If the same error occurs more than one time, contact the
administrator of the cloud server.
[5417] System software error / TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error

Invalid system software / setting files The system software and the setting files of the equipment
of the equipment that have been downloaded from a cloud server have been
damaged.
Check item Measures

Communication environment Retry the downloading of the setting files and the system
software.
Check if the network cable is disconnected. Check the
connection of network devices. If there is no problem with the
network environment, contact the administrator of the cloud
server.

8 - 231
[5BD0] Power failure during restoration

Check item Measures

Setting • Check if the power cable is connected properly and is
inserted securely.
• Check if the power voltage is unstable.
• Reattempt the restoration of the database (Address Book,
templates, F-code (Mailbox) or user information).
[5C10] FAX Unit attachment error

Check item Measures

Setting • Check if the FAX Unit is attached.
• Check if there is any damage or abnormality on the FAX
board.
• Check if the connector on the FAX board is connected
properly.
[5C11] Network FAX transmission error

Check item Measures

Setting The address specified for the network FAX is not
registered on the Address Book. Register it.

8 - 232
8.3.29 MFP access error
[6007] Unsuccessful User Login to MFP

MFP access error User authentication cannot be done because connection to
the authentication server has failed.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the operating status of the server and connection
from an MFP have been confirmed.
[6008] Failed to connect on External Role Base Access Control (LDAP) Server

MFP access error User authentication cannot be done because connection to
an external RBAC server has failed.
Check item Measures

from the MFP have been confirmed.
8
[6013] Connection failure to the authentication server

MFP access error Failed to connect to the authentication server
Check item Measures

Setting Check that the server setting is proper by accessing
[TopAccess] -> [Administration] -> [Maintenance] -> [Directory
Service].
When "Auto" is selected as the authentication method, this
error may output to the log depending on the environment.
[6014] The authentication server that cannot be accessed is detected

MFP access error The authentication server that cannot be accessed is
detected
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the authentication server is down since the access to
the authentication server is not available. The unavailable
authentication server is accessed again if the time set in 08-
8788 passes or the power of the equipment is turned OFF
and back ON.
[6032] Card related error: Expired card

MFP access error The card cannot be used because it has expired.

8 - 233
Check item Measures
Setting Use a card with a valid expiration.
[6033] Card related error: Invalid flag data (no room-entry data)

MFP access error The card cannot be used because no room-entry data are
recorded in it.
Check item Measures

Setting Use a correct card that has been used for entering the room.
[6034] Card related error: Invalid flag data (invalid card data)

MFP access error The card cannot be used because the data required for the
use of the card are not correctly set.
Check item Measures

Setting Use a valid card.
[6041] Card authentication: Card related error

MFP access error Card data cannot be obtained correctly.
Check item Measures

Setting Reattempt scanning. If the error still occurs after reattempting
scanning for several times, card data may be corrupted or the
card reader may be out of order.
[6042] Card authentication: Card setting error

MFP access error The self-diagnostic code required for card authentication is
not set in this equipment correctly.
Check item Measures

Setting Set the correct self-diagnostic code.
[6052] User authentication for print job failed because connection to an external RBAC server
has failed.

MFP access error User authentication for print job cannot be done because
connection to an external RBAC server has failed.

8 - 234
Check item Measures
from the MFP have been confirmed.
[6121] Automatic Secure Erase failure

MFP access error The automatic secure erase fails.
Check item Measures

Setting Data overwriting failed for some reason. If the error still
occurs after rebooting the equipment, start up using the
following procedure:[3] + [C] + [POWER]  3. HDD
formatting  Reinstallation of software or HDD replacement
[6131] MFP fail to verify clock with Time Server

MFP access error The MFP is not synchronized with the SNTP server.
8
Check item Measures
Setting • Check that the SNTP server is operating correctly.
• Check that the path to the SNTP server is operating
correctly.
• Check that the settings are correct in TopAccess ->
[Administrator] -> [Setup] -> [General] -> [SNTP Service].

8 - 235
8.3.30 Maintenance error
[7101] System firmware installation failure
[7103] Engine firmware installation failure
[7105] Scanner firmware installation failure
[7111] Patch installation failure
[7113] Plug-in installation failure
[7115] HDD data installation failure
[7117] DF firmware installation failure

Maintenance error System firmware installation failed. ([7101])
Engine firmware installation failed. ([7103])
Scanner firmware installation failed. ([7105])
MEP firmware installation failed. ([7107])
Patch installation failed. ([7111])
Plug-in installation failed. ([7113])
HDD data installation failed. ([7115])
DF firmware installation failed. ([7117])
Check item Measures

Setting Software package file may have a problem or may be
corrupted. Check the software package file and then
reattempt the installation.
[7109] Printer driver update failure

Maintenance error Printer driver upload failed.
Check item Measures

Setting Printer driver file may have a problem or may be corrupted.
Check the package file and then reattempt the upload.
[710B] Point and Print data installation failure

Maintenance error Point and Print data upload failed.
Check item Measures

Setting Point and Print data may have a problem or may be
corrupted. Check the package file and then reattempt the
upload.

8 - 236
[710F] Language Pack installation failure

Maintenance error Language Pack installation failed.
Check item Measures

Setting Language Pack file may have a problem or may be corrupted.
Check the package file and then reattempt the installation.
[711D] License key returning failure

Maintenance error The one-time dongle license fails to be returned to USB
device.
Check item Measures

Setting Return the license to the USB device used for installing the
license.
Check that the USB device is correctly installed.
Notes:
The GP-1080 IPSec Enabler cannot return to the USB 8
device due to license problem.
The GP-1070 Overwrite Enabler cannot return to the
USB device in the high security (08-8911: 3).
[711F] License key installation failure

Maintenance error The one-time dongle license fails to be installed.
Check item Measures

Setting Check that the USB device is correctly installed.
[71A4] Cryptographic key consistency confirmation failure

Maintenance error Cryptographic key consistency confirmation failed.
Check item Measures

Setting Start up the equipment in the following procedure:[3] + [C] +
[POWER]  5. Key Backup RestoreThen overwrite the
corrupted license key with a normal one.

8 - 237
[71AA] Unidentified error during certificate acquisition from SCEP server

Maintenance error Unidentified error occurred during certificate acquisition from
SCEP server.
Check item Measures

Setting Check SCEP server and the SCEP setting (automatic) on the
TopAccess screen as follows: TopAccess Administration 
Security  Certificate Management
[71AB] Timeout error during certificate acquisition from SCEP server

Maintenance error Timeout error occurred during certificate acquisition from
SCEP server.
Check item Measures

Setting Check SCEP server and the SCEP setting (automatic) on the
TopAccess screen in the following procedure: TopAccess
Administration  Security  Certificate Management
[71AC] File save error during certificate acquisition from SCEP server

Maintenance error File save error occurred during certificate acquisition from
SCEP server.
Check item Measures

Setting File saving failed for some reason. If the error still occurs after
rebooting the equipment, start up using the following
procedure:[3] + [C] + [POWER]  3. HDD formatting 
Reinstallation of software or HDD replacement
[71B0] Software package file decryption failure

Maintenance error Software package file decryption failed.
Check item Measures

Setting Software package file may have a problem or may be
corrupted. Check the software package file and then
reattempt the installation.

8 - 238
[71B5] Finisher firmware installation failure

Maintenance error Finisher firmware installation failure
Check item Measures

Setting Finisher firmware installation failed. Reinstall the firmware.
[71B7] Saddle firmware installation failure

Maintenance error Saddle firmware installation failure
Check item Measures

Setting Saddle firmware installation failed. Reinstall the firmware.
[71B9] Punch firmware installation failure

Maintenance error Punch firmware installation failure
8
Check item Measures
Setting Punch firmware installation failed. Reinstall the firmware.

8 - 239
8.3.31 Network error
[8000] Static IPv4 address conflict

Network error IPv4 address overlaps.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine.
[8011] Linklocal Address Conflict

Network error Linklocal Address Conflict
Check item Measures

[8012] Manual Address Conflict

Network error Manual IPv6 Address Conflict
Check item Measures

[8013] Stateless Address Conflict

Network error Stateless Address Conflict
Check item Measures

[8014] Stateful Address Conflict

Network error Stateful Address Conflict
Check item Measures

[8022] Authentication Failure

Network error Failed in 802.1X authentication.
Check item Measures

Setting Check the user credential.

8 - 240
[8023] Can not contact Authentication Server/Switch

Network error Failed in connection to authentication server and switch.
Check item Measures

Setting Check connectivity to switch or server.
[8024] Certificate verification Failure

Network error Failed in verification of certificate.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if a valid certificate is installed.
[8031] IKEv1 certification failed

Network error Ipsec error for ikev1 certification failed
8
Check item Measures
Setting Check
1. CA and user certificate in both MFP and remote peer -
certificate timestamp and IPsec Certificate template
should be valid.
2. CRL DP server name is mapped in MFP’s host table or
DNS entry.
3. Certificate against CRL.
[8032] IKEv1 wrong proposal choosen

Network error Ipsec error for wrong proposal choosen
Check item Measures

Setting Check the IKEv1 IPsec proposal parameters (like encryption/
authentication algorithms, DH group, authentication methods)
in MFP and peer machine.
[8033] IKEv1 shared key authentication failed

Network error Ipsec error if auth for shared key failed
Check item Measures

Setting Mismatch in IKEv1 Pre Shared Key. Check the PSK in MFP
and remote machine.

8 - 241
[8034] IKEv1 invalid certificate

Network error Ipsec error if invalid certificate uploaded
Check item Measures

Setting Check the CA and User certificate in MFP and peer machine.
[8035] IKEv1 certificate not supported

Network error Ipsec error if certificate not supported
Check item Measures

Setting Check the User certificate type.
[8036] IKEv1 invalid certificate authentication

Network error Ipsec error if invalid certificate authentication
Check item Measures

Setting Check the CA certificate in MFP and Peer machine.
[8037] IKEv1 certificate unavialable

Network error Ipsec error if certificate are not avialable
Check item Measures

Setting Certificate has been deleted from Certificate store.
Re-upload the corresponding certificates.
[8038] IKEv1 no SA established

Network error Ipsec error for SA is not present
Check item Measures

Setting Check the IKEv1/IPsec proposal parameters (like encryption/
Check
certificate timestamp and IPsec Certificatetem.

8 - 242
[8039] IKEv1 invalid signature

Network error Ipsec error for invalid signaturer for certificate
Check item Measures

Setting Mismatch in Signature payload (MAC or IV).
Check the CA and user certificate in MFP and peer machine.
[803A] IKEv2 wrong proposal choosen

Network error Ipsec error is proposal choosen is wrong
Check item Measures

Setting Check the IKEv2/IPsec proposal parameters (encryption/
[803B] IKEv2 Certificate failed

8
Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 certification failed
Check item Measures

Setting Check
certificate timestamp and IPsec Certificate template
should be valid.
2. CRL DP server name is mapped in MFP’s host table or
DNS entry.
3. Certificate against CRL.
[803C] IKEv2 secret key authentication failed

Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 if secret key auth failed
Check item Measures

Setting Mismatch in IKEv2 Pre Shared Key. Check the PSK in MFP
and peer machine.
[803D] IKEv2 falling back to IKEv1

Network error Ipsec error if peer dosent support IKEv2 and falling back to
IKEv1
Check item Measures

Setting Remote machine is not supporting IKEv2. Going back to use
IKEv1.

8 - 243
[803E] IKEv2 ISAKMP SA unavialable

Network error Ipsec error if ISAKMP SA is not created of destroyed due to
some uncertain condition
Check item Measures

Setting Restart IPsec service on Peer and retry.
[803F] IKEv2 cryptographic operation failed

Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 if crypto operation failed
Check item Measures

Setting If Certificates are being used, re-upload the corresponding
certificates using Security Services. Restart IPsec Service on
MFP.
[8040] IKEv2 invalid key information

Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 if key info is invalid
Check item Measures

Setting Check IKE settings in MFP and peer.
[8041] IKEv2 CA not trusted

Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 if CA is not trusted
Check item Measures

Setting Check the CA certificate in MFP and peer machine.
Check the CA certificate timestamp.
[8042] IKEv2 Authentication method mismatch

Network error Ipsec error if auth method is not matching
Check item Measures

Setting Mismatch in IKE authentication type.
Check the Authentication type in MFP and peer.

8 - 244
[8043] IPsec IKE version mismatch

Network error Ipsec error if ike version is not matching
Check item Measures

Setting Mismatch in IKE version.
Check the IKE version in MFP and peer.
[8044] IPsec encaptulation mismatch

Network error Ipsec error for encaptulation is not matching
Check item Measures

Setting Check the IPsec mode (Transport/Tunnel) in MFP and peer.
[8045] IPsec Peer IP mismatch

Network error Ipsec error for peer ip mismatch 8
Check item Measures

Setting Remote Traffic selector mismatch.
Check the destination address/port in IPsec filter.
[8046] IPsec local IP mismatch

Network error Ipsec error for local ip mismatch
Check item Measures

Setting Local traffic selector mismatch.
Check the source address/port in IPsec filter.
[8047] IPsec local ID mismatch

Network error Ipsec error for local id mismatch
Check item Measures

Setting Check the user certificate in MFP
[8048] IPsec Remote ID mismatch

Network error Ipsec error for remote id mismatch
Check item Measures

Setting Check the user certificate in peer machine.

8 - 245
[8049] IPsec Remote IP mismatch

Network error Ipsec error for remote ip mismatch
Check item Measures

Setting Remote traffic selector mismatch.
Check the source address/port in IPsec filter.
[804A] IPsec IKE timeout

Network error Ipsec error for ike timeout
Check item Measures

Setting Check the network connectivity between MFP and peer
machine.
Select the Flush Connections Option and retry.
[804B] IPSec invalid manual key

Network error Ipsec error id manual key is not valid
Check item Measures

Setting Check the Inbound and Outbound (ESP Encryption/
Authentication and AH Authentication) keys in MFP and
Remote PC.
[8061] Secure update to primary IPv4 server failed

[8062] Secure update to secondary IPv4 server failed
[8063] Secure update to primary IPv6 server failed
[8064] Secure update to secondary IPv6 server failed
[8065] IPv6 primary DDNS update error
[8066] IPv6 secondary DDNS update error
[8067] IPv4 primary DDNS update error
[8068] IPv4 secondary DDNS update error

Network error Secure update to primary IPv4 server failed. ([8061])
Secure update to secondary IPv4 server failed. ([8062])
Secure update to primary IPv6 server failed. ([8063])
Secure update to secondary IPv6 server failed. ([8064])
IPv6 primary DDNS update error. ([8065])
IPv6 secondary DDNS update error. ([8066])
IPv4 primary DDNS update error. ([8067])
IPv4 secondary DDNS update error. ([8068])
Check item Measures

Setting Check if there is any problem with DNS or DDNS settings.

8 - 246
[8069] Invalid TSIG/SIG(0) Key file

Network error This message is displayed when the key file for SIG(0) or
TSIG is invalid.
Check item Measures

Setting Verify the TSIG/SIG(0) key files used.
[8101] Wireless association with Access point failure

Network error Wireless association with Access point failure
Check item Measures

Setting Verify the credentials used for association with Access point.
[8102] MFP not able to contact the Access point with the specified SSID

Network error MFP not able to contact the Access point with the specified 8
SSID
Check item Measures

Setting Verify the access point name setting and mechanism used for
association same as Access Point setting.
[8103] Wireless Certificate verification failure

Network error Wireless Certificate verification failure
Check item Measures

Setting Verify the certificate settings used for association.
[8121] Domain - General Failure during Authentication

Network error An unknown domain authentication error occurs when
connecting to the domain controller.
Check item Measures

Setting Check the network settings of the equipment, and retry
connecting to the domain controller.

8 - 247
[8122] Domain - Invalid Username or Password

Network error The user name or password of the domain authentication is
not valid and the user cannot log on.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the user name or password is correctly entered.
Enter them by specifying the upper and lower case letters
correctly.
[8123] Domain - Server not present in Network

Network error The server cannot be detected at domain authentication.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the server fails. Check the network settings of the
equipment. If name resolution is used, check the settings of
the DNS and DDNS.
[8124] Domain - User account is disabled on Server

Network error The user account is invalid at domain authentication and it
cannot be used to log on.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the setting of the user account in "Active Directory
User and Computer" is disabled.
[8125] Domain - User account has expired and cannot be used for logon

Network error The user account has expired at domain authentication and it
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the setting of the user account in "Active Directory
User and Computer" has expired.
[8126] Domain - User account is locked and cannot be used for logon

Network error The user account is locked at domain authentication and it
Check item Measures

Setting Check the setting of the account lock-out on the server.

8 - 248
[8127] Domain - Invalid logon hours for the User

Network error The user log-on time is invalid at domain authentication and
the user cannot log-on.
Check item Measures

Setting Check the log-on time setting of the user account in "Active
Directory User and Computer".
[8128] Active Directory Domain - Clock Skew error due to difference in Time between Server and
MFP

Network error The difference between the time set in the equipment and
that set in the server is more than five minutes at domain
authentication of the Active Directory and the user cannot log
on.
Check item Measures

Setting Match the time of the equipment and domain controller, or if
an SNTP server is in the network, recommend the use of
8
SNTP.
[8129] Active Directory Domain - Kerberos Ticket has expired and cannot be used for Authentication

Network error A Kerberos ticket has expired at the domain authentication of
the Active Directory and the user cannot log on.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the Kerberos ticket on the Kerberos server has
expired.
[812A] Active Directory Domain - Verification of the Ticket has failed

Network error A Kerberos ticket authentication error of the Active Directory
domain authentication occurs and the user cannot log on.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the user name or password is correctly entered. If
this problem still persists, contact your Window server
administrator.
[812B] Active Directory Domain-The Domain specified could not be found

Network error The Realm name for the domain authentication of the Active
Directory is invalid and the user cannot log on.
Check item Measures

Setting Check if the Realm name of the Active Directory server of the
equipment is wrong. If this problem still persists, contact your
Window server administrator.
8 - 249
8.4 Other errors
8.4.1 Equipment operation disabled after the installation of option(s)

Check if the optional board is installed properly.
8.4.2 Wireless LAN connection disabled

The connection state and settings of the Wireless LAN can be checked with [USER FUNCTIONS]
[ADMIN] [WIRELESS LAN] [SETTING CHECK].
Confirm the settings with the administrator.
• “NIC INITIALIZING” does not disappear at the time of the power being turned ON and it disappears
after 6 minutes with the NIC initializing time-out. In this case, the connection to the Wireless LAN did
not succeed even though “NIC INITIALIZING” disappears.
• The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made if the Access Point to be connected is not
found or security settings are not correct.
8.4.3 "Invalid Department Code" is displayed

Log in to TopAccess as an administrator, select [Authentication] on the [User Management] tab, and
then check whether Department Setting is enabled or disabled.
Department Setting is enabled:

• Log in to TopAccess as an administrator, select [Authentication] on the [User Management] tab, and
then check User Management Setting.
• Confirm the settings of 08-3805 in the setting mode.
Department Setting is disabled:

• Log in to TopAccess as an administrator, select [Authentication] on the [User Management] tab, and
then check User Management Setting.
8.4.4 Paper folded on the leading edge

If the leading edge of B4, B5 or B5-R paper is folded when it exits, check the following items.
• Check if the rear and side guides of the drawer or the side guide of the bypass tray correspond to
the paper size.
8.4.5 Toner cartridge unrecognized

If the toner cartridge is not recognized, check the following.
• Check that there is no access abnormality to the toner cartridge IC chip.

 P. 8-123 " [C911] Toner cartridge IC chip access board abnormality"
8.4.6 Ethernet disabled in half-duplex communication

The Ethernet of this equipment does not support half-duplex communication.
When the port setting of the switch is fixed at half-duplex communication, use any of 10/100/1000
Mbps, full-duplex fixed communication mode or auto-negotiation function.
In addition, select the setting of the equipment corresponding to that of the switch.
([ADMIN] > [NETWORK] > [ETHERNET])
Check the set communication speed as follows if required:
[ADMIN] > [NETWORK] > [ETHERNET]

8 - 250
8.4.7 The equipment does not start after the power has been turned
ON.
LVPS
[3]
F2
F205
F204
F201
F202
F203
[1] [2]
N
G CN511
L F1
FG
[5]
8
[4]
Fig.8-7
Check item Measures

Power voltage Check if the power voltage is proper for this equipment.
Is the voltage for this equipment +/-10% of the rated voltage?
Power cable Check if the harnesses are properly connected or if they are open
circuited.
Switching power supply Check if there is any abnormality on the inlet [1] and the harness
(LVPS) [3] (for the inlet) [2].
Check if there is any abnormality on the main power switch [4] and
the harness (for the main power switch) [5].
Check if the fuses (F1 and F2) on the input side have not melted.
Check if the following voltage is output normally:
5VS: Pins CN511-5 and -6
12VA: Pins CN511-9, -10 and -11
LGC board Reconnect the connectors.
Replace the harnesses.
Replace the LGC board.
SYS board Reconnect the connectors.
Replace the harnesses.
Replace the SYS board.

Fuse
Harness (for the inlet)
Harness (for the main power
switch)
Main power switch

8 - 251
(LVPS)
LGC board
SYS board
8.4.8 “Authentication Failed” is displayed

• Reset the service password
Reset the service password by accessing [USER FUNCTIONS] -> [ADMIN] -> [GENERAL] ->
[PASSWORD SETUP] -> [RESET SERVICE PASSWORD].
• Initialize the SRAM

board)", and perform “[D] Initialize SRAM system storage area” and following steps.
• Replace the SRAM board

board)", and replace the SRAM board.
8.4.9 Hard disk full error “H04” is displayed

Preform the following, referring to  P. 9-15 "9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the
HDD/SSD".
• Back up the user data
(1) [A] Back up data in HDD
(2) [B] Print out “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE“
(3) [C] Print out “FUNCTION“ list
• Initialize the HDD

(4) [E] Replace / Format HDD
Step 2 for replacing the HDD is unnecessary.
• Restore the user data

(5) [F] Reset user’s setting items and restore data/information.
(6) [G] Reset “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE“
(7) [H] Reset “FUNCTION“ list
• Adjust image puality

(8) [I] Adjust image quality
8.4.10 Error code “M00” is displayed while updating firmware
Check item Measures

• Harness check
• Short circuited or open circuited check
• Harness check (HRNS-LGC-DRM-210, HRNS-LGC-
ADUCFD-210, HRNS-LGC-DEV-210)
CFD board • Harness check (HRNS-CFD-TRU-210)
LVPS board • Connector check (CN512)

8 - 252
Check item Measures
LED printer head • Connector check (CN325, CN326, CN327, CN328,　
CN329, CN330, CN331, CN332)
• Harness check

SYS board
LGC board
LED printer head
Harness HRNS-LGC-DRM-210
HRNS-CFD-TRU-210
HRNS-LGC-ADUCFD-210
HRNS-LGC-DEV-210

8 - 253
8.5 Troubleshooting for the Image
8.5.1 Color deviation

1) Color deviation
<Symptoms>
Original mode Location Phenomena

All modes Color blurred in outline of white Color
text or illustration on a colored deviation
background
Fig.8-8
Text Mode Outline in black text on a colored White
Text/Photo background void
Mode
Fig.8-9
Photo Mode Color blurred in outline of line or Color
Map Mode text deviation
Fig.8-10
Ste
Cause/Section Check Item Measure Remark
p
1 Perform the Forced performing Has it ended normally?
of color registration control
adjustment (05-4719). When CA00 occurs:
 Proceed to [CA00]
troubleshooting.
2 Test printing (A3/LD) Output the built-in grid pattern For the
following
checks
Drum rotation 3 Check the drum motor operation Replace the drum TBU motor.
abnormality in the test mode (03) to see if
there is any rotation abnormality
of the drum.
4 Check the drum TBU motor Reconnect the connectors.
operation in the test mode (03) Replace the harnesses.
to see if there is any rotation Replace the LGC board.
abnormality of the drum.
Inadequate 5 Check the value set for drum Reset drum TBU motor speed
drum TBU TBU motor rotation speed. (Is to 128.
motor rotation the value significantly different
speed from the default value?)
Drum coupling 6 Loose coupling, damage, Check if they are installed
and coupling deformation properly or replace the
on the couplings.
equipment
side

8 - 254
Ste
Cause/Section Check Item Measure Remark
p
Transfer belt 7 Deformation or damage of the Clean or replace the transfer
transfer belt or stains on the belt.
transfer belt.
8 Are the gears on the transfer belt Tighten the screws if they
side loosen, damaged or loosen, or replace the gears.
deformed?
9 Stain or damage of the drive Clean or replace the drive
roller roller.
10 Does the rib of the transfer belt Adjust the position of the
overlap the collar on both edge transfer belt.
of the drive roller?
11 Is the belt edge damaged or Clean or replace the transfer
stained? belt.
12 Peeling of the cleaning blade Replace the cleaning blade.
(Large driving load)
13 Is the transfer belt unit installed Check and correct the
normally? installing.
(Is the unit properly grounded?)
High-voltage 14 Check the connection of the Correct or replace the terminal
transformer high-voltage supply terminal of if it is loosened or damaged. 8
the 1st or 2nd transfer rollers.

8 - 255
8.5.2 Uneven pitch and jitter image
<Symptoms>
Original mode Location Phenomena

All modes Occurs cyclically at right Uneven
angles to paper feeding pitch Feeding
direction direction
Fig.8-11
Cause/Section Step Check Item Measure Remark

1 Test printing (A3/LD) Output the built-in For the following
halftone and grid checks
patterns.
Drum 2 Are there uneven pitches of Replace the drum.
approx. 94 mm?
3 Is there any damage on the Clean or replace the
drum surface? drum.
Drum drive 4 Is there any dent, damage or Replace the gears of the
deformation on the gears of drum drive unit.
the drum drive unit?
Drum rotation 5 Check the drum TBU motor Reconnect the
abnormality operation in the test mode (03) connectors.
to see if there is any rotation Replace the harnesses.
abnormality of the drum. Replace the LGC board.
Replace the drum TBU
motor.
Developer 6 Are there uneven pitches of Replace the developer
sleeve approx. 28 mm? sleeve.
Inadequate 7 Check the value set for drum Reset drum TBU motor
drum TBU TBU motor rotation speed. (Is speed to 128.
motor rotation the value significantly different
speed from the default value?)
Drum coupling 8 Loose coupling, damage, Replace the couplings.
deformation
Transfer belt 9 Deformation or damage of the Replace the transfer Check the
transfer belt belt. halftone pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 56 mm)
10 Stain or damage of the drive Clean or replace the Check the
roller drive roller. halftone pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 56 mm)
11 Large driving load due to the Replace the cleaning
peeling of the cleaning blade blade.
Transfer belt 12 Are there uneven pitches of Replace the TBU gears.
drive 0.5 mm or 0.71 mm?

8 - 256
Feeding drive 13 Are there uneven pitches of Replace the gears of the
approx 2.0 mm or 0.79 mm, feed/transport gear unit
1.25 mm? and the first drawer
14 Is there any dent, damage or transport clutches.
deformation on the gear of the
feed/transport gear unit and
the first drawer transport
clutch (CLT1 or CLT2)?
Fusing drive 15 Are there uneven pitches of Perform “Fine
approx. 94 mm? adjustment of fuser
roller rotational speed”
(05-4529).
16 Is the fuser unit properly Check if the fuser unit is
installed in the equipment? installed correctly.
17 Is there any dent, damage or Replace the drive gear
deformation on the drive gears of the pressure roller.
of the pressure roller?
EPU drive 18 Are there uneven pitches of Replace the developer
approx. 0.78 mm? drive unit, developer
19 Is there any dent, damage or sleeve and drive gears
deformation on the developer of the mixer. 8
drive unit, developer sleeve
and drive gears of the mixer?
2nd transfer 20 Are there uneven pitches of Replace the 2nd transfer This problem
roller approx. 75 mm? roller. may occur on
Is there any deformation to the thick paper or
2nd transfer roller? the image on
Since the 2nd transfer roller is the back side of
always in contact with the the paper in
transfer belt, the roller may duplex printing.
creep if the power has not
been turned on and the
equipment left unused for a
long time (1 month or more),
causing an uneven pitch.

8 - 257
8.5.3 Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance
Check gray balance. Check image density.
Check color reproduction. Check color reproduction.

Fig.8-12
Cause/Section Step Check item Measures Remarks

Density / Color 1 Check the image density / color Perform the enforced
reproduction / reproduction / gray balance. performing of image quality
Gray balance closed-loop control (05-2742)
and then automatic gamma
adjustment.
Printer density 2 Check the density of printer Output the test patterns and See step
output image. check them. 5 if defect
Using 04-36 for each color occurs.
Scanner 3 Check if the original glass, Clean it.
mirrors or lens is dirty.
Parameter 4 Check the image processing Adjust the color balance
adjustment parameters. (color).
value Adjust the image density.

8 - 258
Printer output 5 Is there any faded image (low Perform the troubleshooting
image density)? procedures against the faded
abnormal image.
Is there any fog in the Perform the troubleshooting
background? procedures against the
background fogging.
Is there any blotch image? Perform the troubleshooting
procedures against the blotch
image.
Is there any poor transfer? Perform the troubleshooting
procedures against the poor
transfer.
Is there any poor cleaning of Correct the transfer belt area.
the transfer belt? (Check inside
the equipment.)
* If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter
adjustment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop
control” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.

8 - 259
8.5.4 Background fogging 1
Fig.8-13
Remark
Cause/Section Step Check item Measures
s
Adjustment 1 Perform the shading Perform 05-3218.
correction. If an error occurs, retry it. If the
error still persists, clean the
original glass.
Density 2 Check the gradation Perform the forced performing of
reproduction reproduction. image quality closed-loop control
(05-2742) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Printer section 3 Check the printer output Output the test patterns and See
image. check them. step 6 if
Using 04-36 for each color defects
occur.
Scanner 4 Check if the original glass, Clean it.
mirrors or lens is dirty.
Parameter 5 Check the image processing Check the value of offsetting
adjustment parameters. adjustment for background
value adjustment.
6 Adjust the image processing While checking the above
parameters. encircled image, adjust the
reproduction level by the
offsetting adjustment for
background adjustment.
Cover 7 Is the cover installed properly? Correct it.
(Is the drum exposed to the
external light?)

8 - 260
Remark
s
Auto-toner 8 Is the auto-toner sensor Check the operation of auto-
normal? toner sensor and readjust.
9 Is the toner supply operating Check the motor and circuits.
constantly?
Main charger 10 Is the main charger output Check the circuits.
output normal?
Developer 11 Is the developer bias proper? Check the circuits.
bias
Developer unit 12 Is the contact between the Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap
drum and developer material and pole position.
proper?
Developer 13 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer
material/ material, toner and drum? material, toner and drum.
Toner/Drum 14 Have the developer material Replace the developer material
and drum reached their PM and drum.
life?
15 Is the storage environment of Use the toner cartridge stored in
the toner cartridge 35oC or the environment within
less without dew? specification.
Drum cleaning 16 Is the drum cleaned properly? Check the drum cleaning blade 8
blade pressure.
Transfer belt 17 Is the transfer belt cleaning Take off the transfer belt and
cleaning blade blade in proper contact with check if the transfer belt cleaning
the transfer belt? blade pressure spring and
pressure hook are installed
properly.
Toner dusting 18 Is the toner accumulated on Remove the toner and clean the
the seals of the developer seals.
unit?

8 - 261
8.5.5 Background fogging 2 (1200 dpi printing)
<Symptoms>
The stripe pattern is printed on the whole area of paper at 1200 dpi printing, it looks like background
fogging.
Fig.8-14
Remark
s
Connectors 1 Check if there is foreign matter Remove the foreign matter or
which connect or dust on the terminals of clean the connectors if there is
the LGC board connectors (CN128 and dust.
and SYS CN350).
board 2 Check if the connectors Insert the connectors properly.
(CN128 and CN350) are
inserted at an angle.
LGC board 3 Check if the board is short Replace the LGC board or SYS
and SYS circuited or open circuited. board.
board

8 - 262
8.5.6 Moire /lack of sharpness
B
A
Fig.8-15
Moire

Density 1 Check the gradation Perform the forced performing
reproduction reproduction. of image quality closed-loop
control (05-2742) and then
Parameter 2 Check the image Check the sharpness
adjustment processing adjustment value.
value parameters.
3 Adjust the image While checking the above
processing encircled images A and B,
parameters. decrease moire by sharpness
adjustment.
Printer section 4 Check the printer Output the test patterns and When defects
output image. check them. occur, perform the
Using 04-36 for each color corresponding
troubleshooting
procedures.
Lack of sharpness

Density 1 Check the gradation Perform the forced performing
reproduction reproduction. of image quality closed-loop

8 - 263
Parameter 2 Check the image Check the sharpness
adjustment processing adjustment value.
value parameters.
3 Adjust the image While checking the above
processing encircled image A, increase
parameters. sharpness by sharpness
adjustment.

8 - 264
8.5.7 Toner offset
Black solid
Feeding direction
Approx.
94 mm
Shadow image
Fig.8-16
8
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 94 mm behind the high density image.)

Fuser unit 1 Is the pressure between the Check the pressure removal
fuser roller and pressure parts and pressure
roller proper? mechanism.
2 Is there scratch on the fuser Replace the fuser roller or the
roller or pressure roller pressure roller.
surface?
3 Has the fuser roller or Replace the fuser roller or the
pressure roller reached its pressure roller.
PM life?
4 Is the fuser roller Check and correct the control
temperature proper? circuit.
5 • Is the gap of the non- • Adjust the gap and then
contact thermistor perform non-contact
proper? thermistor correction.
• Is there any deformation • Replace the thermistor and
to the front thermistor? then perform non-contact
• Is the front thermistor thermistor correction.
contacted with the fuser • Replace the thermistor and
roller? then perform non-contact
thermistor correction.
6 Has non-contact thermistor Perform non-contact
correction been performed thermistor correction.
after the fuser unit or any
part is replaced?
7 Is the thermistor dirty? Clean or replace the
thermistor and then perform
non-contact thermistor
correction.

8 - 265
Paper 8 Is the paper type Use the proper type of paper
corresponding to its mode? or select the proper mode.
9 Using recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Developer 10 Is the specified developer Use the specified developer
material used? and toner.
Scanner 11 Are the mirrors, original Clean them.
glass or lens dirty?
Image quality 12 Is the control activated? Check the image quality
control control related codes.
Density 13 Is the density too high? Perform the forced performing
of image quality closed-loop
Printer density 11 Check the density of printer Output the test patterns and When
output image. check them. defects
using 04-36 for each color occur,
perform the
correspondi
ng
troubleshoot
ing
procedures.

8 - 266
8.5.8 Blurred image
Feeding direction
Fig.8-17 8

Scanner 1 Is the scanner bedewed? Clean it.
Drum 2 Is the drum bedewed or dirty? Wipe the drum with dry cloth.
* Be sure never use alcohol or
other organic solvents because
they have bad effect on the drum.
Ozone 3 Is the ozone exhaust fan operating Check the connection of the
exhaust properly? connector.
4 Is the ozone filter stained or Replace it.
damaged?
LED printer 5 Is there foreign matter or dust on the Clean the LED printer head.
head LED printer head?
Main charger 6 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger grid.
Main charger 7 Is there foreign matter on the Remove foreign matter.
charger grid? Clean or replace the charger grid.

8 - 267
8.5.9 Poor fusing
Feeding direction
Fig.8-18

Electric 1 Is the connector in proper contact Correct it.
power/control with the equipment?
abnormal 2 Is the heater lamp control circuit Replace the switching power supply.
(switching power supply) working
properly?
3 Are the connectors on the LGC Reconnect them.
board and joint connectors
connected properly?
5 Is the harness connected with the Replace the harness.
LGC board short circuited or open
circuited?
6 • Is the gap of the non-contact • Adjust the gap and then perform
thermistor proper? non-contact thermistor correction.
• Is there any deformation to the • Replace the thermistor and then
front thermistor? perform non-contact thermistor
correction.
• Is the front thermistor contacted • Replace the thermistor and then
with the fuser roller? perform non-contact thermistor
correction.
7 Has non-contact thermistor Perform non-contact thermistor
correction been performed after the correction.
fuser unit or any part is replaced?
Pressure 8 Are the pressure springs working Check/adjust the pressure springs.
between fuser properly?
roller and
pressure roller
improper

8 - 268
Fuser roller 9 Is the temperature of fuser roller too Check/correct the setting value of
temperature low? fuser roller temperature.
Perform non-contact thermistor
correction.
Check/correct the related circuit.
Developer 10 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material
material and material and toner? and toner.
toner
Paper 11 Is the paper damp? Change the paper.
12 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or
mode? select the proper mode.
13 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.

8 - 269
8.5.10 Blank print
Feeding direction
Fig.8-19

High-voltage 1 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output and correct the
transformer output defective? circuit, or replace the transformer.
(1st/2nd 2 Are the connector of the high-voltage Reconnect the harness securely.
transfer roller harness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
and developer Is the harness open circuited?
bias)
Developer unit 3 Is the developer unit installed Check/correct the developer sleeve
securely? coupling engaging.
4 Do the developer sleeve and mixer Check/correct the developer drive
rotate? system.
5 Is the developer unit filled up with the Check that the charger grid is not
developer material? dirty. (The developer material may
be reduced due to the carrier offset.)
6 Is the developer material properly Remove foreign matter from the
transported? developer material, if any.
7 Is there any magnetic brush phase Check the developer pole position.
error?
8 Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect? Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve
jig.
Drum 9 Is the drum rotating? Check/correct the drum coupling
engaging.
Check the drum drive system.
10 Is the drum grounded? Check the contact of the grounding
plate.

8 - 270
Transfer unit 11 Is the transfer belt in proper contact Check if the contact releasing lever
with the drum? is at releasing position. Check the
installation of the transfer belt.
12 Is the transport of the transfer belt Check the installation of the transfer
normal? belt or transport mechanism.
Harnesses for 13 Are the connectors securely Reconnect the connectors securely.
CCD, SYS connected? Is any harness between Replace the harness.
and LGC the boards open circuited?
boards

8 - 271
8.5.11 Solid print
Feeding direction
Fig.8-20
When there is a void on the solid image

Exposure 1 Does the exposure lamp light? If the lamp does not work, replace it.
lamp
Harnesses for 2 Are the connectors securely Reconnect the connectors securely.
CCD, SYS connected? Is any harness between Replace the harness.
and LGC the boards open circuited?
boards Is the connector between the SYS
and LGC boards not disconnected?
Scanner 3 Is there foreign matter in the optical Remove it.
path?
Bedewing of 4 Is the scanner bedewed? Clean the mirrors and lens.
scanner Keep the power cord plugged so that
the damp heater can work.
When there is no void on the solid image

Main charger 1 Is the main charger securely Reinstall it securely.
installed?
2 Does the needle electrode not come Reinstall it securely.
off?
High-voltage 3 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output and correct the
transformer output defective? circuit, or replace the high-voltage
(main charger transformer.
needle 4 Are the connector of the high-voltage Reconnect the harness securely.
electrode/grid harness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
bias) Is the harness open circuited?

8 - 272
Bedewing of 5 Is the drum bedewed? Clean the drum.
drum Keep the power cord plugged so that
the damp heater can work.

8 - 273
8.5.12 White banding (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-21

grid charger grid?
Developer unit 3 Is there foreign matter inside the Remove foreign matter.
doctor blade?
4 Is there foreign matter on the drum Remove foreign matter.
seal?
5 Do any paper fibers or dirt adhere to Remove the paper fibers or dirt.
the developer unit and contact with
the drum?
Drum 6 Is there scratch or foreign matter on Replace the drum.
the drum surface?
Transfer unit 7 Is there scratch or foreign matter on Replace the transfer belt.
the transfer belt surface?
8 Are the harness or foreign matters in Correct or remove them.
contact with the transfer belt
surface?
9 Is there any scratch or hole on the Replace the 1st/2nd transfer roller.
1st/2nd transfer roller?
Transfer unit 10 Is there any foreign matter on the Remove foreign matter or clean the
2nd transfer facing roller? roller.
Transport path 11 Does the toner image touch foreign Remove foreign matter.
matter after transfer, before entering
the fuser unit?
Discharge 12 Has any LED of discharge LED gone Replace the discharge LED.
LED out?

8 - 274
Scanner 13 Is there foreign matter or dust in the Clean the lens and mirrors.
optical path?

8 - 275
8.5.13 White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-22

Main charger 1 Is the terminal contact poor? Clean or adjust the terminals.
Drum 2 Is there any abnormalities on the Replace the drum.
drum surface?
plate.
Discharge 4 Is the discharge LED lighting Replace the discharge LED or clean
LED properly? terminals.
Developer unit 5 Is the developer sleeve rotating Check the developer drive system,
correctly? or clean the sleeve surface.
Is there any abnormalities on the
sleeve surface?
6 Is the connection of developer bias Correct it.
supply terminal normal?
Drive systems 7 Is the drum, scanner or transfer belt Check each drive system.
jittery?
High-voltage 8 Is the high-voltage transformer Check/correct any electric leakage
transformer output defective? and related circuits.
(main charger If the high-voltage transformer does
needle not work, replace it.
electrode/grid,
1st/2nd
transfer roller
and developer
bias)

8 - 276
8.5.14 Skew (slantwise copying)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-23 8

Drawer/LCF 1 Is the drawer or LCF properly Reinstall the drawer or LCF properly.
installed?
2 Is too much paper loaded in the Reload paper within the acceptable
drawer or LCF? range of paper weight.
<Acceptable paper weight>
1st drawer:
Plain paper - 28 mm
Thick paper - 14 mm
2nd, 3rd and 4th drawers: 60.5 mm
LCF: 137.8 mm x 2 places
3 Is the paper corner folded? Change the paper direction and
reinsert it.
4 Are the drawer or LCF side guides Adjust the side guides.
properly set?
Paper feed 5 Is the surface of paper feed roller Clean the roller surface with alcohol,
roller dirty? or replace the roller.
Rollers 6 Is each roller improperly fixed to the Check E-rings, pins and clips.
shaft?
2nd transfer 7 Install the roller by reversing its back Output and check the printed image.
roller and front sides.
Aligning 8 Is the aligning amount proper? Increase the aligning amount.
amount
Registration 9 Is the registration roller spring Mount the spring correctly. Clean the
roller removed? roller if it is dirty.
Registration 10 Is the registration guide improperly Correct it.
guide installed?
2nd transfer 11 Is the 2nd transfer front guide Correct it.
front guide installed properly?

8 - 277
RADF 12 Is the RADF installed and adjusted Reinstall and readjust it.
properly?
Transfer unit 13 Is the transfer belt unit installed Correct it.
properly?

8 - 278
8.5.15 Color banding (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-24 8

Scanner 1 Is there foreign matter in the optical Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.
path?
2 Is there dust or stain on the shading Clean it.
correction plate or ADF original
glass?
charger grid?
4 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger grid.
5 Is there foreign matter on the main Remove foreign matter.
charger?
6 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle
deformed? electrode.
7 Is there foreign matter inside the Remove foreign matter.
charger case?
8 Is the inner surface of charger case Clean inside.
dirty?
Drum cleaner 9 Is there any foreign matter on the Clean or replace the drum cleaning
drum cleaning blade edge? blade.
10 Is toner recovery defective? Clean the toner recovery auger
section.

8 - 279
Transfer unit 11 Are the harness or foreign matters in Correct or remove them.
contact with the transfer belt
surface?
12 Is there paper dust on the edge of Clean or replace the transfer belt
transfer belt cleaning blade? cleaning blade.
13 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in Take off the transfer belt and check if
proper contact with the transfer belt? the transfer belt cleaning blade
pressure spring and the pressure
hook are installed properly.
Fuser unit 14 a. Is there dirt or scratches on the a. Clean or replace them.
fuser roller and pressure roller b. Clean the thermistor.
surface?
b. Is the thermistor dirty?
Drum 15 Are there scratches on the drum Replace the drum.
surface?

8 - 280
8.5.16 Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-25 8

Main charger 1 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle
Fuser unit 2 Is the fuser roller or pressure roller Clean them.
dirty?
High-voltage 3 Is the high-voltage transformer Check the circuit and replace the
transformer output defective? high-voltage transformer if not
(main charger working.
needle 4 Is each joint of high-voltage output Reconnect each joint.
electrode/grid loosened? (Check if any electric
and transfer leakage is causing noise.)
roller bias)
Drum 5 Is there deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum, especially if the
surface? scratch has reached the aluminum
base.
6 Are there fine scratches on the drum Check and correct the contact of
surface (drum pitting)? cleaning blade and recovery blade.
plate.
2nd transfer 8 Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating Clean the roller area or replace the
roller normally? roller.
Scanner 9 Is there foreign matter on the Remove foreign matter.
carriage rail?

8 - 281
8.5.17 White spots
Feeding direction
Fig.8-26

Developer 1 Is the toner density of developer Check and correct the auto-toner
unit/Toner material proper? sensor and toner supply operation.
cartridge Check if the amount of toner is
sufficient in the toner cartridge.
2 Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper? Adjust the gap.
Developer 3 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer
material/ material, toner and drum? material, toner and drum.
Toner/Drum 4 Have the developer material and Replace the developer material and
drum reached their PM life? drum.
5 Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in the
toner cartridge 35oC or less without environment within specification.
dew?
6 Is there any dent on the surface of Replace the drum.
the drum?
7 Is there any film forming on the Clean or replace the drum.
drum?
8 Is the drum bedewed? Wipe the drum surface with a piece
of dry cloth.
Transfer unit 9 Is there foreign matter on the Remove foreign matter.
transfer belt surface?
10 Is there foreign matter on the Clean the transfer belt unit.
transfer belt 2nd transfer facing
roller?
Main charger 11 Is there foreign matter on the Remove it.
charger?
12 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle

8 - 282
High-voltage 13 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output.
transformer output defective?
(main charger
needle
electrode/grid,
developer 1st/
2nd transfer
roller bias)
Paper 14 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or
mode? select the proper mode.

8 - 283
8.5.18 Poor transfer
Feeding direction
Fig.8-27

Transfer unit 1 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer Clean it.
rollers dirty?
2 Is the transfer belt in proper contact Correct it.
with the drum?
3 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper Correct it.
contact with the transfer belt?
4 Is there any deformation or Replace the belt.
abnormalities on the transfer belt?
5 Is the 2nd transfer facing roller dirty?
Clean the roller and replace the
cleaning pad.
Paper 6 Is the high-voltage fed to the 2nd If any contact failure occurs in the
transfer roller correctly? feeding area (e.g. the conductive
bushing and spring come off),
correct it.
7 Is paper in the drawer or LCF Reinsert paper with reverse side up
curled? or change paper.
8 Is paper in the drawer or LCF damp? Change paper.
* Avoid storing paper in damp
place.
Registration 9 Is the registration roller Clean the roller, remount the spring,
roller malfunctioning? or replace defective motor-related
parts.
Aligning 10 Is the aligning amount proper? Decrease the aligning amount
amount

8 - 284
High-voltage 11 Is the high-voltage transformer Check the circuit and adjust the
transformer output defective? transformer output.
(1st/2nd 12 Are the high-voltage harness and Correct them if loosened.
transfer roller terminals in proper contact?
bias)

8 - 285
8.5.19 Uneven image density 1 (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-28

Main charger 1 Is the main charger dirty? Clean it or replace the needle
electrode.
Transfer unit 2 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer Clean the belt.
rollers dirty?
3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact Correct it.
with the drum?
4 Is 2nd transfer roller in proper Open and close the jam access
contact with the transfer belt? (Is the cover.
roller tilted?) Check if there is any abnormality in
the movement of the 2nd transfer
roller pressure mechanism.
5 Is there any abnormalities or Replace the transfer belt.
deformation on the transfer belt?
LED printer 6 Is there foreign matter or dust on the Clean the LED printer head
Discharge 7 Is the discharge LED dirty? Clean it.
LED 8 Has any LED of discharge LED gone Replace it.
out?
Developer unit 9 Is the magnetic brush in proper Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
contact with the drum?
10 Is the developer unit pressure spring Check the pressure spring.
applying properly?
11 Is the transport of developer material Remove foreign matter if any.
poor?
Scanner 12 a. Is the platen cover or RADF a. Close the platen cover or RADF.
section open? b. Clean them.
b. Is the original glass, mirrors, or
lens dirty?

8 - 286
Dram cleaner 13 Is there any abnormalities or Replace the gap spacer.
unit deformation on the gap spacer?

8 - 287
8.5.20 Uneven image density 1 (at right angles to feeding direction)
Fig.8-29

Developer unit 1 Is the magnetic brush in proper Adjust the doctor sleeve gap.
contact with the drum?

8 - 288
8.5.21 Uneven image density 2
Feeding direction
Fig.8-30 8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-31

8 - 289
Developer unit 1 Is the layer of the developer material • Remove the foreign matter in the
on the developer sleeve where the developer unit.See "2. Removal of
density is uneven thin or lacking? foreign matter in the developer
unit" in  P. 7-21 "7.6.5
Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C)".
• Clean the developer unit.See "1.
Cleaning" in  P. 7-21 "7.6.5
Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C)".
2 Does uneven image density occur See work flow diagram in  P. 7-12
again? "7.5 Work flow of parts replacement".

8 - 290
8.5.22 Faded image (low density)
Feeding direction
Fig.8-32 8

Toner empty 1 Is the “ADD TONER” symbol Replace the toner cartridge.
Auto-toner blinking?
circuit 2 Is there enough toner in the Check the auto-toner circuit function.
cartridge?
3 Is the toner density of developer
material too low?
Toner motor 4 Is the toner motor malfunctioning? Check the motor drive circuit.
Toner 5 Are there any abnormalities in the Replace the toner cartridge.
cartridge toner cartridge?
Developer 6 Has the developer material reached Replace developer material.
material its PM life?
Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper Check the developer unit installation.
contact with the drum? Check the doctor-sleeve gap and
pole position.
Main charger 8 Is the main charger dirty? Clean it or replace the needle
electrode.
Drum 9 Is there film forming on the drum Clean or replace the drum.
surface?
10 Has the drum reached its PM life? Replace the drum.
Transfer unit 11 Has the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd Replace the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd
transfer roller reached its PM life? transfer roller.
High-voltage 12 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the high-voltage transformer
transformer output settings improper? output.
(developer 13 Are the connector of the high-voltage Reconnect the harness securely.
bias) harness securely connected? Is the Replace the high-voltage harness.
harness open circuited?

8 - 291
8.5.23 Image dislocation in feeding direction
Feeding direction
Fig.8-33

Adjustment 1 Is same dislocation on every copy? Adjust the scanner/printer using the
error of Adjustment Mode.
scanner or
printer section
Registration 2 Is the registration roller dirty, or is the Clean the roller with alcohol.
roller spring removed? Reinstall the spring.
3 Is the registration motor Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if
malfunctioning? they are not engaged properly.
4 Is the registration clutch operating Replace the registration clutch.
normally? (Is the timing of operation
delaying?)
Paper feed 5 Is the paper feed clutch Check the circuit or the clutch and
clutch malfunctioning? replace them if necessary.
Aligning 6 Is the aligning amount proper? Decrease the aligning amount.
amount
Paper pushing 7 Is the paper pushing amount proper? Decrease the paper pushing
amount amount.
Each roller 8 Are the roller and shaft not fixed Check the E-ring, pin and clip.
securely?
9 Is the roller surface dirty? Clean the roller surface with alcohol
or replace it.
Registration 10 Is the registration guide improperly Reinstall the guide.
guide installed?

8 - 292
8.5.24 Image jittering
Feeding direction
Fig.8-34 8

- 1 Is the toner image on the drum If proper, perform step 1 to 3;
proper? otherwise perform step 4 and after.
Registration 2 Is the registration roller rotating Check the registration roller section
roller normally? and its springs.
Transfer unit 3 Is the transfer belt or 2nd transfer Check the drive system and replace
roller operating normally? the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller
if necessary.
Fuser unit 4 Are the fuser roller and pressure Check the drive system.
roller rotation proper? Replace the fuser roller and
Is the fuser belt transportation pressure roller if necessary.
proper?
Drum 5 Is there large scratch on the drum? Replace the drum.
Scanner 6 Is the slide sheet defective? Replace it.
7 Are there any abnormalities on the Replace the feet.
carriage feet?
8 Is the tension of timing belt Correct the tension.
inappropriate?
9 Is the carriage drive system Check the carriage drive system.
malfunctioning?
10 Are any mirrors loosely installed? Install them properly.
Drum drive 11 Is the drum drive system Check the drum drive system.
system malfunctioning? Clean or replace the belts, pulleys,
bushings if they have dirt or
scratches.

8 - 293
8.5.25 Poor cleaning
Notes:
Poor cleaning may occur in feeding direction.
Feeding direction
Fig.8-35

Developer 1 Is the specified developer material Use the specified developer material
material used? and toner.
Drum cleaner 2 Is there dust on the drum cleaning Clean or replace it.
blade edge?
3 Is the drum cleaning blade peeled? Replace the blade.
Transfer belt 4 Is there paper dust on the edge of Clean or replace it.
cleaner transfer belt cleaning blade?
5 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Replace the blade.
peeled?
Toner 7 Is the toner recovery defective? Clean the toner recovery auger.
recovery Check the cleaning blade pressure.
auger

8 - 294
Fuser unit 8 Is there any bubble-like defect on the Replace the fuser roller. Check and
fuser roller (approx. 94 mm pitch on modify the heater lamp control
the image)? circuit.
correction.
9 Have the fuser roller and pressure Replace them.
roller reached their PM life? Perform non-contact thermistor
correction.
10 Is the pressure between the fuser Check and adjust the pressure
roller and pressure roller proper? mechanism.
11 Is the temperature of fuser roller Check/correct the setting value of
proper? fuser roller temperature.
Clean or replace the thermistors.
correction.
Check and correct the circuit.

8 - 295
8.5.26 Uneven light distribution
Feeding direction
Fig.8-36

Original glass 1 Is the original glass dirty? Clean the glass.
Main charger 2 Are the needle electrode, grid and Clean or replace them.
case dirty?
Discharge 3 Is the discharge LED dirty? Clean it.
LED
Scanner 4 Are the reflector, exposure lamp, Clean them.
exposure mirrors, lens, etc. dirty?
lamp 5 Is the exposure lamp tilted? Adjust the installed position of the
lamp.
6 Is the lamp discolored or degraded? Replace it.

8 - 296
8.5.27 Blotched image
Feeding direction
Fig.8-37 8

Paper 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its Check the paper type and mode.
mode?
2 Is paper too dry? Change paper.
Transfer unit 3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact Contact and release the transfer belt
with the drum? unit several times with the TBU lifting
lever.
Check that the 1st transfer roller is
rotated smoothly upward and
downward.
4 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper Open and close the jam access
contact with the transfer belt? cover.
Check if there is any abnormality in
5 Are there any abnormalities on the Clean or replace the transfer belt.
transfer belt?
High-voltage 6 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output. Replace the
transformer output abnormal? transformer, if necessary.
(1st/2nd
transfer roller
bias)

8 - 297
8.5.28 Stain on the paper back side
Feeding direction
Printing side of 1st page

The edge of image
cut off.
Feeding direction
Back side of 2nd page

Fig.8-38

8 - 298
Image 1 Is the margin adjustment of image Adjust the margin.
adjustment/ correct?
setting 2 Is the margin adjustment of image Adjust the margin.
correct when the paper size is not
selected in bypass feeding?
3 Is the margin adjustment of image at Adjust the margin. (05-4064)
duplexing correct?
4 Is the image location in primary/ Adjust the location.
secondary scanning direction
correct?
5 Is the reproduction ratio of image in Adjust the reproduction ratio.
primary/secondary scanning
direction correct?
6 Is the tab setting correct? Correct the setting.
Paper feeding 7 Does the size of paper in the drawer Use the appropriate paper size or
/Transport or LCF correspond to the setting? correct the size setting.
area 8 Is the width between the slides in the Correct the position of the slides.
drawer correct (too wide)?
9 Is the width between the slides of the Correct the width.
bypass tray correct (too wide)? 8
10 Is the paper aligning amount Adjust the aligning amount.
sufficient?
11 Are the feed roller and transport Clean or replace the rollers.
roller dirty or worn out?
12 Does the paper mode correspond to Use the appropriate paper type or
the paper type? paper mode.
13 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Transfer unit 14 Is there any stain caused by a poor Clean the transfer belt.
cleaning, etc. on the transfer belt?
16 Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating Clean the area around the roller.
properly? Otherwise replace the roller.
17 Is there any foreign matter or stain Clean or replace the roller.
on the 2nd transfer roller?
18 Has the 2nd transfer roller reached Replace the 2nd transfer roller.
to its PM life?
Fuser unit 19 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller Clean the fuser belt and pressure
dirty? roller.
20 Is the separation finger dirty? Clean the separation finger.
21 Is the rib of transport guide dirty? Clean the rib.

8 - 299
8.5.29 White void in the halftone
Feeding direction
Fig.8-39

8 - 300
Fuser unit 1 Installed position of the fuser unit Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the fuser
unit guide rail (front) [1]. Remove 1
screw [3]. Change its position to the
adjustment hole [4] and move the
fuser unit guide rail (front) [2] up or
down. (Fig.8-40)
2 The installation position of the fuser Following are the adjustment
unit paper entrance guide procedure of the fuser unit paper
entrance guide.(Fig.8-36)
(1) Take off the fuser unit and
remove its front and rear side
covers from it.
(2) Remove the 2 screws of the
paper entrance guide [1], and
then secure them to the holes
next to the original ones.
(3) Vertically move the paper
entrance guide to the upper
direction of the figure so that it
is separated by approx. 0.5
mm from the fuser roller. 8
(4) In the condition of step (3),
check whether white void
occurs or not.
(5) If white void still persists,
move the paper entrance
guide by 0.1 to 0.2 mm to
upward or downward.
Notes:
1. Be careful not to move the
paper entrance guide too
much, for this could cause
paper wrinkling.
2. If paper wrinkling does
occur, return the position of
the paper entrance guide
to the condition of step (3).
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
Fig.8-40

8 - 301
Fig.8-41

8 - 302
8.5.30 Paper wrinkle
There are 2 locations where the paper wrinkle occurs: before the fusing stage and in the fuser unit
See below to determine the case.
Smooth out the wrinkled paper. When there is no image in the wrinkled area
See (1) “Paper wrinkle before fusing”.
Smooth out the wrinkled paper. When there is a copied image in the wrinkled area
See (2) “Paper wrinkle in the fuser unit”.
(1) Paper wrinkle before fusing
Is paper properly set?

| NO  Set paper properly.

YES
Is there any abnormality such as scratch or wear on the transport roller?
| YES Replace the transport roller.
 
NO
Is flexible paper such as recycled paper used?
| YES Switch to the recycled paper mode.
|  (Select “RECYCLED PAPER” in MEDIA TYPE.)
 If the paper wrinkle still appears, proceed to NO.
8
NO
1. Increase the adjustment value for the paper alignment.
( P. 6-8 "6.1.6 Paper alignment at the registration roller")
2. Increase the transport motor speed. (Adjust it at the code 05-4532.)
(2) Paper wrinkle in the fuser unit
Is the paper properly set?

| NO  Set the paper properly.

YES
Has the paper absorbed moisture?
| YES  Use paper that has not absorbed moisture.

NO
Is flexible paper such as recycled paper used?
| YES  Switch to the recycled paper mode.
| (Select “RECYCLED PAPER” in MEDIA TYPE.)
 If the paper wrinkle still appears, proceed to NO.
NO
1. Adjust the installed position of the fuser unit up or down
and check if the paper wrinkle disappears. ( P. 8-300 "8.5.29 White void in the halftone")
2. Adjust the inlet guide[1] of the fuser unit and check if the paper wrinkle disappears. (Fig.8-
42)

8 - 303
Fig.8-42

8 - 304
8.5.31 Staining at the leading/trailing edge
Staining may occur at the leading/trailing edge of the paper.
If a large amount of printing is carried out, staining may be seen as streaks as shown below.
Example: Leading edge of paper
Feeding direction Streaks
Fig.8-43
Cause/Section Step Check item Measures 8

2nd transfer 1 Is there any toner adhering to the Clean the ribs of the transfer guide.
unit ribs of the transfer guide?
Fig.8-44
Notes:
Clean them with a soft pad, cloth or electric vacuum cleaner.

8 - 305
8.5.32 Faint image
Feeding direction
Density is extremely low or there is a white void.
Fig.8-45
* Checking is easier with a halftone (Y) test chart.

Transfer belt 1 Are the drum and the transfer belt Contact and release the transfer belt
unit (TBU) contacted? unit several times with the TBU lifting
lever.
Check that the 1st transfer roller is
rotated smoothly upward and
downward.
Process unit 3 Is the contact between the drum and Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap and
(EPU) developer material proper? pole position.
5 Is the problem resolved if you Replace the LED printer head.
replace the LED printer head?
Transfer unit 6 Is 2nd transfer roller in proper Open and close the jam access
(TRU) contact with the transfer belt? (Is the cover.
roller tilted?) Check if there is any abnormality in

8 - 306
8.5.33 Toner scattering
Feeding direction
8
Fig.8-46

2nd transfer 1 <Thick paper> Select [BACK] for the
output Is toner scattered on the paper type setting and
image on the back side of the then copy the back side
paper in duplex printing when of the paper.
it is fed from the bypass tray?
2 <Plain paper> Perform automatic This problem
Is toner scattered on the duplex copying with the may occur when
image on the back side of the Automatic Duplexing the paper is dry
paper in duplex printing when Unit (ADU). under a low
it is fed from the bypass tray? If the ADU is not humidity
available, select environment.If
[RECYCLED PAPER] plain paper is
for the paper type used, [BACK]
setting and then copy and bypass
the back side of the feeding cannot
paper. be selected
together. In this
If the problem is not
case, use the
resolved, adjust the
ADU or select
transfer output for
[RECYCLED
recycled paper and then
PAPER].
copy the back side of
the paper by selecting
[RECYCLED PAPER].
Remarks:
• To select a paper type, refer to the Copying Guide.
• To set 2nd transfer output, refer to the Imaging Manual [1.3].

8 - 307
• The larger the setting value is, the higher the transfer voltage becomes and the less toner
scattering occurs.
Recommen
Acceptable
Paper type [05] code Sub code ded setting Default
values
value
Full color Front side Recycled 05-2934 7 6~8 0~10 5
paper
Full color Front side Recycled 05-2934 7 6~8 0~10 5
paper

8 - 308
8.5.34 Feathered image
Feeding direction 8
Fig.8-47
Cause/Section Step Check Item Measure

Developer unit 1 Pole position adjustment plate Adjust the pole position adjustment
plate. (Fig.8-48)
1. Record or mark the scale position
[2] indicated by the pole position
adjustment plate [1].
2. Remove 1 screw [3] and take off the
pole position adjustment plate [1].
3. Cut out the pin [4] fixing the pole
position adjustment plate.
4. Turn the pole position adjustment
plate [1] counterclockwise (in the
direction of the black arrow) by 3
scales.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Fig.8-48

8 - 309
Notes:
• Check the image after the pole position is adjusted.

8 - 310
8.5.35 Image Skewing on Paper Trailing Edge
When a grid pattern is output, follow the procedure below if the image on the paper trailing edge is
skewed by 1.0 mm or more.
[A] The rear side in the secondary scanning direction is longer than the front side. (Front < Rear)
Front side
(A)
Rear side
Feeding direction
Fig.8-49

Fuser unit 1 Fuser unit guide rail Adjust the fuser unit guide rail(Fig.8-50
)
1. Take off the fuser unit.
2. Loosen the 2 fixing screws [2] of the
front guide rail [1] in the fuser unit.
3. Remove 1 screw [3] and attach it to
the screw hole for adjustment [4].
4. Move the guide rail upward by 1
mm.
* Moving it by 1 mm changes the
screw in the trailing edge by 0.65
mm.
* There is a 1-mm scale [5].
5. Tighten the 2 fixing screws [2] of the
6. Install the fuser unit.
* Check that the image on the
paper trailing edge is skewed by 1
mm or less after the adjustment.

8 - 311
[2]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
Fig.8-50
[B] The front side in the secondary scanning direction is longer than the rear side. (Front > Rear)
Front side
(B)
Rear side
Feeding direction
Fig.8-51

8 - 312
Fuser unit 1 Fuser unit guide rail Adjust the fuser unit guide rail(Fig.8-52
)
1. Take off the fuser unit.
2. Loosen the 2 fixing screws [2] of the
3. Remove 1 screw [3] and attach it to
the screw hole for adjustment [4].
4. Move the guide rail downward by 1
mm.
* Moving it by 1 mm changes the
screw in the trailing edge by 0.65
mm.
* There is a 1-mm scale [5].
5. Tighten the 2 fixing screws [2] of the
6. Install the fuser unit.
* Check that the image on the
paper trailing edge is skewed by 1
mm or less after the adjustment.
8
[2]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
Fig.8-52

8 - 313
8 - 314
9. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD
9.1 Removal and Installation of PC Boards/HDD

Notes:
When the PC board/HDD is replaced, refer to the respective Notes and Cautions of
“Replacement of PC boards and HDD” in  P. 9-11 "9.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings
for Replacing PC Boards and HDD/SSD".
9.1.1 SYS Board cover

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Take off the right rear cover.
(3) Remove 2 screw[1] and loosen 4 screws[2].
Fig. 9-1
9
(4) Slide the SYS board cover[1] to take it off.
Fig. 9-2

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD
9-1
9.1.2 SYS board
(1) Take off the SYS board cover.

 P. 9-1 "9.1.1 SYS Board cover"
(2) Unplug all connectors and the USB terminal.
Notes:
When connecting the connector to the SYS
board, pay attention to the orientation of the
connector.
(3) Remove the SYS board cooling fan.
 P. 4-81 "4.6.31 SYS board cooling fan
(F1)"
Fig. 9-3
(4) Unplug 2 connectors of SSD, then remove 9
screws, and then take off the SYS board.
Notes:
When removing the SYS board, hold the
LAN connector and the lower right connector
on the board.
Do not hold the heat sink, memory or SRAM
board, as doing so causes load on the SYS
board.
Fig. 9-4
9.1.3 Solid State Drive (SSD)

(2) Remove the harness[1] connected to the
SSD.
Fig. 9-5

9-2
(3) Take off the SSD board[1].
Fig. 9-6
9.1.4 Hard disk (HDD)

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
Fig. 9-7
(4) Disconnect the connector[1] and take off the
HDD unit[2].
Fig. 9-8

9-3
(5) Remove 4 screws and take off the hard disk
[1] and ground wire[2].
Fig. 9-9
9.1.5 PFC cover
(1) Remove 1 screw and take off theTake off the

PFC cover [1].
Fig. 9-10
9.1.6 LGC board

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect all connectors.
Fig. 9-11

9-4
(3) Remove 8 screws and slide the LGC
board[1] to take it off.
Fig. 9-12
Notes:
Check if the model of the equipment
matches the color of the label on the LGC
board.
<Color of label>
• 20 ppm: White
• 25 ppm: Yellow Label
• LL20 ppm: Pink
• LL25 ppm: Blue
Fig. 9-13 9
9.1.7 Switching regulator
(1) Take off the left cover.

 P. 4-1 "4.1.2 Left cover"
(2) Remove 2 screws and slide the switching
regulator slightly toward you.
Fig. 9-14

9-5
(3) Disconnect 10 connectors, and slide the
switching regulator [1] to the front side and
take it off.
Fig. 9-15
(4) Remove 15 screws and take off the switching
regulator board [1].
Fig. 9-16
9.1.8 High-voltage transformer (HVT)

 P. 4-5 "4.1.12 Rear top cover"
Fig. 9-17

9-6
(4) Release 4 locking supports[1] and take off
the high-voltage transformer.
Notes:
When installing, match the frame with the
concave portion of the high-voltage
transformer, and then push it until the
supports [1] are locked.
Fig. 9-18
Notes:
When installing the high-voltage transformer,
make sure the feed springs contact the
plastic (locator) pins as shown in the figure.
9.1.9 CFD board

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Take off the right rear cover.
(3) Disconnect 4 connectors from the CFD
board.
Fig. 9-19

9-7
(4) Disconnect 2 connectors[1], remove 3
screws and take off the CFD board.
Fig. 9-20
9.1.10 SRAM board <for SYS board>

(2) Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM
board for the SYS board[1] with the case.
Fig. 9-21
(3) Release 2 latches[1] and take off the SRAM
board for SYS board[2] from the case.
Fig. 9-22

9-8
9.1.11 EEPROM <for LGC board>

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"
(2) Remove the EEPROM[1] from the LGC
board.
Notes:
Be careful not to damage the EEPROM
when replacing the EEPROM.
Fig. 9-23
9.1.12 CTIF board
(1) Take off the left cover.

 P. 4-1 "4.1.2 Left cover"
(2) Take off the receiving tray.
 P. 4-2 "4.1.3 Receiving tray"
(3) Take off the toner cartridges. 9
(4) Release latch and take off five toner
cartridge rails[1].
Fig. 9-24
Fig. 9-25

9-9
(5) Remove 2 screws, release two latshes and
take off the toner motor assembly[1]..
Fig. 9-26
Fig. 9-27
(6) Disconnect 5 connectors, release four
latshes and take off the CTIF board.
Fig. 9-28

9 - 10
9.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing PC
Boards and HDD/SSD
9.2.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards
• The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the SYS board and Lens unit. So, if their
replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time. Do not replace the SYS board
and the SRAM board (for the SYS board) together.
• If both the LGC board and SYS board require replacement, replace them in the following procedure.
1. First, replace one of the board to be replaced.
2. Turn the power ON and confirm that “READY” is displayed.
4. Replace another board that requires replacement.
• When replacing the LGC board, remove the EEPROM on the old board, and then attach it to the
new board.
• When the HDD/SSD requires replacement, see “ P. 9-15 "9.2.3 Precautions and procedures
when replacing the HDD/SSD"“.
• When the SYS board requires replacement, see  P. 9-21 "9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures
when replacing the SYS board" .
9
• When the Lens unit requires replacement, see “ P. 9-38 "9.2.7 Procedures and settings when
replacing the Lens unit"“.
• When SRAM board requires replacement, see “ P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when
replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS board)".

9 - 11
9.2.2 HDD/SSD fault diagnosis
This code displays the HDD/SSD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD/SSD, on the control
panel. HDD/SSD failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1. Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-9065. You can also refer to the same
information by pressing the [ON/OFF] button while pressing [5] and [C] simultaneously and then
selecting "5. SMART Info".
HDD manufacturer Model name HDD serial number
Fig. 9-29
- Items supported differ depending on the HDD/SSD manufacturer.

- “---” is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.
2. Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD/SSD
has a physical failure when HDD/SSD failure is suspected (service call F100 - F109 or F120 - F124
occurred).
Result
Description Diagnosis
ID VALUE
05 0 Low possibility of physical failure HDD/SSD
c5 0 replacement is
not required.
05 From 1 to 999 Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD HDD/SSD
c5 0 is recovered. replacement is
not required.
05 Any value High possibility of defective sector existence. HDD/SSD
c5 1 or more (There will be a possibility of physical failure replacement is
depending on the use of HDD.) recommended.
05 Either one is at least High possibility of physical failure HDD/SSD
c5 1000. replacement is
recommended.

9 - 12
Result
Description Diagnosis
ID VALUE
05 All values are High possibility of physical failure (A HDD/SSD HDD/SSD
c5 displayed as “-------”. connector, harness or SYS board may be one of replacement is
the causes.) recommended.
3. ID=05 and c5
ID Name Description Remarks

05 Re-allocated Sector The number of sectors reassigned This value tends
Count to increase at
HDD/SSD
failure.
c5 Current Pending The number of candidate sectors to be This value tends
Sector Count reassigned to increase at
HDD/SSD
failure.
4. Description of each ID
ID Name Meaning
01 Read Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
02 Throughput Performance This attribute is a measure of the throughput
performance.
03 Spin Up Time This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is 9
able to spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin
ups from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
reallocated sectors.
07 Seek Error Rate This is a measure of the seek error rate.
08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek
performance during normal online operations.
09 Power-On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or
minutes depending on disk manufacturer) the drive
has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin
retries.
0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the
drive has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
emergency unloads.
c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
load/unloads.
c2 Temperature This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the
HDD/SSD.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the
ECC On the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the
reallocation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
candidate sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable This attribute is a measure of the total number of
Sector Count uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.
9 - 13
ID Name Meaning
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
(Rate) errors found in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
Notes:
"Over-range" is displayed if the number of digits acquired from the HDD/SSD exceeds the
maximum digits which can be displayed on the control panel; however, this does not indicate an
error.

9 - 14
9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD/SSD
Notes:
• Replacing ADI-HDD with SATA-HDD/SSD is not possible. When replacing ADI-HDD, replace it
with another ADI-HDD.
• When the HDD/SSD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD/SSD before
replacing and to recover them after replacing.
• To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users’ data/information in
the HDD/SSD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.
• Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
• Do not replace the HDD/SSD and the SRAM board (for the SYS board) together.
• When the HDD is replaced, do not perform SRAM data formatting (Clear SRAM) before the
normal start-up.
• When the HDD is replaced, do not restore the back-up file before the normal start-up.
A procedure for replacing the HDD/SSD is shown below.
Start
[A] Back up data in HDD/SSD
[B] Print out "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"
9
[C] Print out "FUNCTION" list
[D] Return License
[E] Erase HDD/SSD
[F] Replace/Format HDD/SSD
[G] Reset user's setting item and restore data/information
[H] Reset "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"
[I] Reset "FUNCTION" list
[J] Batch setting for disconnecting HDD
[K] Adjust image quality
Setting completed
Fig. 9-30

9 - 15
[A] Back up in HDD/SSD
Ask the user (machine administrator) to back up the data in the HDD/SSD. Refer to the table below for
the type of data, availability and method of backup.
Type of data in HDD Availability Backup method

Archive them in the “e-Filing” of
TopAccess. As for the backup in Box
HDD: Available data, all data (selectable by the box)
Image data in the e-Filing
SSD: Not available can be backed up / restored in one
go by using “e-Filing Backup/Restore
Utility”.
F-code information, Template
Back them up in the “Administrator”
registration information, Address Available
menu of TopAccess.
book data
Export them in “Administrator” menu
Department management data Available
of TopAccess.
Export them in the “Administrator”
Log data (Print, Scan, FAX
Available menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot
(Transmission/Reception)
be performed.)
Copy them to the client computer via
Data in the shared folder (Scanned the network. (The data which have
HDD: Available
data, Saved data of copy / FAX been copied to
SSD: Not avalable
transmission) the client computer cannot be copied
to the shared folder.)
Print waiting data (Copying data and
Finish printing them after supplying
FAX reception data that are waiting
Not available paper or releasing the jam, etc. (The
to be printed due to
data cannot be left.)
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)
Print job (Private print data, Schedule If any jobs are left, print them. (The
Not available
print data) data cannot be backed up.)
FAX saved data (Confidential / Print them. (The data cannot be
Not available
Bulletin board data) backed up.)
Registration data for FAX
Print them. (The data cannot be
transmission (Delayed transmission / Not available
backed up.)
Recovery transmission)
[B] Print out “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”

(1) Enter the Service Mode. “5.2Service UI”
(2) Select "FAX LIST PRINT MODE" and then press [NEXT].
(3) Select "Function list for Maintenance" and then press [PRINT].

9 - 16
[C] Print out “FUNCTION” list
(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Notes:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password.
(3) Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
(4) Press the [FUNCTION] button. The “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” is printed out.
[D] Return License

Notes:
When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) and security mode is setting to High
Security. Set the security mode levlel to "1" (Low level)., then restart the equipment .
When replacing the SATA-HDD to SSD, follow the steps below. To confirm the type of device, start up
the equipment in the 4C mode.
(1) Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(2) Enter the password, and then press the [OK] button.
(If the password is not set for Service, press the [ENTER] button without entering anything.)
(3) Key in [3840], and then press the [START] button.

9
(4) Select the license to be returned, and then press the [REMOVE] button.
(5) Install the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, in the equipment,
and then press the [OK] button.
(6) The Remove screen is displayed, then press the [YES] button. If this screen is not displayed,
check whether the one-time dongle is installed in the equipment properly.
(7) After 10 to 40 seconds passes, the screen for notifying the success of performance is displayed.
Then press the [OK] button. If this screen is not displayed or the screen for notifying the failure of
performance is displayed, quit this operation by pressing the [NO]/[CLOSE] button. Then, check
whether the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, is installed in
the equipment.
(8) Check that the returned license is not displayed on the screen.
Remarks:
If there are any other licenses to be returned, repeat from step (4).
If there is no more licenses to be returned, press the [CLOSE] button, and then turn the power
OFF.
[E] Erase HDD/SSD

In case of the ADI-HDD:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [4] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously.
(2) Key in [1] to select "1: Revert factory install status HDD." and then press the [START] button.

9 - 17
Incase of SATA-HDD/SSD:
(2) Key in [6] to select "6: Erase HDD Security." and then press the [START] button.
(3) Select "1. LOW", "2. MEDIUM", "3. HIGH" and "4. SIMPLE”.
[F] Replace / Format HDD/SSD

(1) Confirm that the power is turned OFF.
(2) Replace the HDD/SSD.

(Refer to  P. 9-3 "9.1.4 Hard disk (HDD)".)
(3) Create the partitions on the HDD.

1.Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button simultaneously.
2.When “Firmware Assist Mode” appears on the LCD, key in [3] to select “3: Format HDD” and
3.When “Operation Complete” is displayed on the LCD, creating of the partitions is completed.
(5) Format the service tech password.

1. Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously.
2. When "Firmware Assist Mode" appears on the LCD, key in [8] to select "8. Clear Service Tech
Password" and then press the [START] button.
3. When "Reset Complete" is displayed on the LCD, formatting of the service tech password is
completed.
(7) Update the system software using the USB media.

See “11.2Firmware Updating with a USB Device” for details.
(9) When the Fax Unit (GD-1320) is installed, perform “Fax Set Up” (1*-100) and “Clearing the
image data” (1*-102). Then turn the power OFF.
(10) Start up with the Setting mode (08).
(11) Perform the panel calibration (08-9050).

1.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the upper left of the LCD.
2.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the upper right of the LCD.
3.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the lower left of the LCD.
4.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the lower right of the LCD.
(12) Check the system software version (08-8952).

Confirm the version displayed on the LCD, and then press the [OK] button.
(13) Initialization of NIC information (08-9083).

9 - 18
[G] Reset user’s setting items and restore data/information
Ask the user (machine administrator) to reset the user’s setting items and to restore data or information.
Refer to the following for the reset and restore:
Items to reset/restore Method

Printer driver Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
F-code information, Template Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess
registering information, Address
book data
Department management data Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Image data in the Electronic Filing Upload them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
• When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with “Self-signed
certificate” of TopAccess.
- Country Name
- State or Province Name
- Locality Name
- Organization Name
- Organizational Unit Name
- Common Name
- Email Address
• When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security
with a certificate is used) Also, upload the following certificate file with “Install Certificate for
Wireless LAN” of TopAccess.
- CA certificate 9
- User certificate
[H] Reset “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”

(1) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. For how to print it
out, refer to [B]Print out “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”.
(2) While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Fax Function Mode)
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
[I] Reset “FUNCTION” list

Reset the fax function by referring to the “function list” that was printed out in [C]Print out “FUNCTION”
list.
Notes:
Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/
her password.
(3) Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
(4) Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.
[J] Batch setting for disconnecting HDD

When SATA-HDD is changed to SSD, follow the steps below.

9 - 19
(2) Perform the batch setting for disconnecting HDD (08-8760)
[K] Adjust image quality

(1) Start up with the Adjustment mode (05).
(3) Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PPC> (05-7869).

 P. 6-27 "6.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"
(4) Perform "Automatic gamma adjustment" <PRT> (05-8008, 05-8009).


9 - 20
9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board
A procedure for SYS board replacement is shown below.
Start
[A] Return License
[B] Replace the SYS board
[C] Restore ADI key
[D] Restore encryption key
[E] Restore license
[F] Update firmware version
[G] Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner

9
[H] Reinstall license
[I] Check firmware versions
Setting completed
Fig. 9-31
[A] Return License

Notes:
• If the Setting Mode (08) is not started up, "[A]Return License" can be omitted. In that case,
reinstall the license with "[ 1 ]Re-registration when the board is replaced" if it is cleared since
"[E] Reinstallation of License" cannot be performed.
• When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) and security mode is setting High
Security, set the security mode levlel to "1" (Low level). Then restart the equipment.
(3) Key in [3840], and then press the [ENTER] button.

9 - 21
the equipment.
Remarks:
OFF.
[B] Replace the SYS board

Notes:
Before replacing the SYS board, perform the following procedure.
 P. 9-11 "9.2.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards"
(2) Replace the SYS board.
(3) Install main memory (DIMM) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(4) Install SRAM board to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(5) Install HDD/SSD to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
[C] Update firmware version

(1) Update the version of system firmware using the download jig.
 P. 11-24 "11.3 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F"
(2) Update the version of scanner firmware with the USB media.
[D] Restore ADI key

If the ADI-HDD is installed, follow the steps below. To confirm the type of device, start up the equipment
in the 4C mode.
(2) Enter the password, and then press the [OK] button. (If the password is not set for Service, press
the [OK] button without entering anything.)
(3) Key in [5] to select "5. Key Backup Restore", and then press the [START] button.
(4) Key in [5] to select "5.ADI Key SRAM to FROM", and then press the [START] button.
(5) Wait until the restoring of the encryption key is completed. "Operation Complete" is displayed.

9 - 22
(4) Key in [1] to select "1. Key SRAM to FROM", and then press the [START] button.
(5) Wait until the restoring of the encryption key is completed. "Operation Complete" is displayed.
(6) Restart the equipment after the restoring is completed. If you want to perform the restoring of the
license, do not restart the equipment but perform from (4) in "[H] Restore license".
[F] Restore license

(4) Key in [3] to select "3. License SRAM to FROM", and then press the [START] button.
(5) Wait until the restoring of the license is completed. "Operation Complete" is displayed. 9
(6) After the restoring is completed, check that "OK" is indicated in "SRAM License STATUS" and
"FROM License Status". Then, restart the equipment.
(7) If "4. License FROM to SRAM" is performed by mistake, carry out the following procedure.
 P. 9-39 "[ 1 ] Re-registration when the board is replaced"
[G] Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner

(3) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner (05-3203)
[H] Reinstall license

If the license was returned in "[A]Return License", reinstall it with the following procedure.
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously.
(4) Press the [INSTALL] button.
(5) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for returning the selected
license before replacing the equipment). Then press the [OK] button.

9 - 23
(6) Select the license to be installed, and then press the [INSTALL] button.
(7) The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed. Then press the [YES]
button.
(8) After 10 to 40 seconds have passed, the screen for notifying the success of the performance is
displayed. Then press the [OK] button. If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is
displayed, quit this operation by pressing the [NO] button. Then check that the one-time dongle is
installed properly in the equipment.
(9) Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list.
Remarks:
If there are any other licenses to be installed, repeat from step (4). If there are no other licenses
to be installed, press the [CLOSE] button, and then turn the power OFF.
[I] Check firmware versions

• System firmware version (08-9930)
• Scanner firmware version (08-9902)
Notes:
If the security mode is changed from High Security to Low Security in the step "[A] Return
License", set the value of 08-8911 to "3" (High Security).

9 - 24
9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for
the SYS board)
Notes:
• Do not replace the HDD and the SRAM board (for the SYS board) together.
• Be careful not to damage the board when replacing the SRAM board.
• When the SRAM board is replaced, do not perform HDD partition creation (Format HDD)
before the normal start-up.
A procedure for replacing the SRAM board is shown below.
When disposing of the SRAM board, perform the items in  P. 9-41 "9.3.4 Precautions when disposing
of the SRAM board (for SYS board)".
Start
Backup SRAM No
possible?
Yes
With backup No
data SRAM?
Yes
[A] Backup SRAM The license can No
be returned?
Yes
9
[B] Return License
[C] Replace SRAM board [C] Replace SRAM board [C] Replace SRAM board
[D] Clear SRAM system [D] Clear SRAM system [D] Clear SRAM system
strage area strage area strage area
[E] Restore SRAM [F] Clear SRAM update Error flags [F] Clear SRAM update Error flags
[G] Backup ADI key [G] Backup ADI key
[H] Backup encryption key [H] Backup encryption key
[I] Backup license [I] Backup license
[J] Initialize SRAM board [J] Initialize SRAM board
[K] Reinstall license
[L] Enable HDD encryption
[M] Adjust image quality
[N] Initialize settings when Fax

Unit (GD-1320) is installed
[O] Set date and time
Setting completed
Fig. 9-32
9 - 25
Notes:
"[G] Backup ADI key" is required only for the equipment in which the ADI-HDD has been
installed. Other procedures are the same as those for installing the SATA-HDD.
[A] Backup SRAM

Notes:
If "[A] Backup SRAM" fails, proceed to “[B]Return License”.
If "[A] Backup SRAM" succeeds, proceed to “[C]Replace SRAM board”.
(2) When "SRAM Clear Mode" appears on the LCD, key in [0] to select "0. Set Serial Number" and
(3) Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, and then press
the [OK] button.
(4) "Serial Number Setting completed" is displayed.
(6) Install the USB media in the equipment, and then turn the power ON while pressing [5] and [9]
buttons simultaneously.
(7) Key in [1] to select "1. Backup SRAM Data to USB", and then press the [START] button.
(8) Enter a password (max. 15 characters) to be set for the backup data.
(9) Restart the equipment after the backup is completed.
[B] Return License

Notes:
When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) and security mode is setting High
Security, set the security mode levlel to "1" (Low level). Then restart the equipment.
(3) Key in [3840], and then press the [ENTER] button.
the equipment.

9 - 26
Remarks:
OFF.
[C] Replace SRAM board

(2) Take off the Fax Unit (GD-1320) if it is installed.
(3) Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).

 P. 9-8 "9.1.10 SRAM board <for SYS board>"
[D] Clear SRAM system storage area

(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [6] and [CLEAR] simultaneously.
(2) When "SRAM Clear Mode" appears on the LCD, key in [1] to select "1. Clear SRAM" and then
(3) When "SRAM Format Completed" is displayed on the LCD, initializing is completed.
(4) Turn the power OFF. 9
[E] Restore SRAM

If there is SRAM backup data, perform the following steps.
the [OK] button.
(6) Install the USB media in the equipment, and then turn the power ON while pressing [5] and [9]
simultaneously.
(7) Key in [2] to select "2. Restore SRAM Data from USB" and then press the [START] button.
(8) Enter the password set for the backup data.
(9) Enter the serial number of the backup file.
(10) Turn the power OFF after the restoring of SRAM is completed.
Remarks:
When the restoration is completed successfully, do not perform "[F] Clear SRAM update error
flags" or later procedures.
End this procedure here and finish replacing the SRAM board (for SYS board).
(11) Reinstall the GD-1320 Fax Unit if used.

9 - 27
[F] Clear SRAM update Error flags
the [ENTER] button without entering anything.)
(3) After “Firmware Assist Mode” is displayed on the LCD, check that “1: Clear Error Flag in Software
Installation.” is marked and press the [START] button.
If not, key in [1] and then press the [START] button.
(4) When “Operation Complete” is displayed on the LCD, clearing the flag is completed.
[G] Backup ADI key

If the ADI-HDD is installed, follow the steps below. To confirm the type of device, start up the equipment
in the 4C mode.
(4) Key in [6] to select "6. ADIKey FROM to SRAM", and then press the [START] button.
(5) Wait until the backup of the ADI key is completed. "Operation Complete" is displayed.

If you want to perform the backup of the license, do not restart the equipment but perform from
(4) in "[H] Backup encryption key".
[H] Backup encryption key

(4) Key in [2] to select "2. Key FROM to SRAM", and then press the [START] button.
(5) Wait until the backup of the encryption key is completed. "Operation Complete" is displayed.
(6) Restart the equipment after the backup is completed. If you want to perform the backup of the
license, do not restart the equipment but perform from (4) in "[I] Backup license".
[I] Backup license

Notes:
If "3. License SRAM to FROM" is performed by mistake, carry out the following procedure.
 P. 9-39 "[ 1 ] Re-registration when the board is replaced"

9 - 28
(4) Key in [4] to select "4. License FROM to SRAM", and then press the [START] button.
(5) Wait until the backup of the license is completed. "Operation Complete" is displayed.
[J] Initialize SRAM board

(2) Initialize the SRAM error.

1.When “SRAM REQUIRES INITIALIZATION” is displayed on the LCD, check the destination
If the destination is not correct, key in the correct one and then press the [START] button.
2.After the confirmation message is displayed, press the [INTERRUPT] button.
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-9050).

1.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the upper left of the LCD.
2.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the upper right of the LCD.
3.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the lower left of the LCD. 9
4.Touch the center of “+” mark displayed on the lower right of the LCD.
(4) Perform the initialization at the software version upgrade (08-9030).
(5) Initialize the NIC information (08-9083).
(6) Enter the serial number (08-9601).

Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, and then press
the [OK] button.
(7) Turn the power off.
[K] Reinstall license

If the license was returned in "[B]Return License", reinstall it with the following procedure.
button.

9 - 29
Remarks:
• If there are any other licenses to be installed, repeat from step (4).
• If there are no other licenses to be installed, press the [CLOSE] button, and then turn the
power OFF.
[L] Enable HDD/SSD encryption

If the HDD/SSD encryption function is used, follow the procedure below.
(3) Enable the encryption function.
• For high security mode

Set the value of 08-8911 to "3".
Notes:
If the SSD is installed, this setting cannot be used.
• For enabling HDD/SSD encryption only

Set the value of 08-8911 to "1", and then set the value of 08-9379 to "1" (Security priority) or
"2" (Performance priority).
[M] Adjust image quality

(3) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner” (05-3203).

(5) Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PRT> (05-8008/8009).

[N] Initialize settings when FAX Unit (GD-1320) is installed

(1) Reinstall the FAX Unit (GD-1320).

9 - 30
(4) Set the destination of FAX (08-9001).
(6) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
(7) Perform the FAX Set Up (1*-100).
(8) Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
(9) Set the dial type according to these buttons: [USER FUNCTIONS] -> [ADMIN] -> [FAX] ->
[INITIAL SETUP]
[O] Set date and time

Set the date and time according to these buttons.
[USER FUNCTIONS]  [ADMIN]  [GENERAL]  [CLOCK]  [DATE/TIME]

9 - 31
9.2.6 Procedures and settings when replacing EEPROM (for LGC
board)
Notes:
Be careful not to damage the EEPROM when replacing the EEPROM.
A procedure for replacing the SRAM board is shown below.
Start
[A] Replace EEPROM
[B] Initialize LGC board
[C] Adjust image quality
[D] Set line adjustment mode
Setting completed
Fig. 9-33
[A] Replace SRAM board

(2) Replace the EEPROM (for the LGC board).

 P. 9-9 "9.1.11 EEPROM <for LGC board>"

9 - 32
[B] Initialize LGC board
(1) Open the front cover, and check the destination printed on the white tape stuck on the
equipment.
(4) Perform "Destination display at SRAM initialization" (08-9060).
(5) Check whether the displayed destination (see the below figure) of the SRAM board (for the SYS
board) is the same as the one in step (1).
Fig. 9-34
Remarks:
If the destinations are different, initialize the SRAM board (for the SYS board) with reference to
the following procedure.
 P. 9-25 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS
board)"
(6) Perform "Printer all clear" (08-9090).

9 - 33
(7) Press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization of the SRAM board (for the LGC
board).
Fig. 9-35
(8) Perform "Destination display at SRAM initialization" (08-9060), and check whether the same
destinations are displayed for the SYS board and the LGC board.
Fig. 9-36

9 - 34
Remarks:
If an error occurs during the initialization of the LGC board and the initialization fails, error
messages are displayed on the touch panel. The error messages and the corresponding
troubleshooting methods are shown below.
Error message Troubleshooting

UNDEFINED MODEL Since the LGC board probably has a problem, replace it with
a new one by following the procedure below.
 P. 9-4 "9.1.6 LGC board"
UNDEFINED VERSION Recheck the destination of the SRAM board (for the SYS
board). Since the SRAM board (for the SYS board) probably
has a problem, replace it with a new one by following the
procedure below.
 P. 9-8 "9.1.10 SRAM board <for SYS board>"
VERIFY ERROR Check whether the EEPROM (for the LGC board) is
connected properly.

9 - 35
[C] Adjust image quality
(1) Write down the adjustment values of the following (05) code attached to the rear side of the front
cover.
L (0) H (0)
05/2627
05/2628
05/2629
05/2630
(4) Enter all the adjustment values written down in step (1).
(5) Reset the auto toner sensor.

2. Replace the developer materials for four colors (YMCK).
3. Perform automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor. Start up with the Adjustment mode (05),
enter [2400] and press the [START] button.
Notes:
• You can reset the auto-toner sensor by directly entering the adjustment values for (05) 2405-
0 to 3 with the Adjustment mode data list, which has been printed during normal operation of
equipment such as when it is setup, when preventive maintenance (PM) is performed or
when developer material is replaced, etc.
• If you perform automatic adjustment (05-2400) of the auto-toner sensor without replacing the
developer materials for four colors (YMCK), image quality is not guaranteed.
(6) Perform the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-2742)”.
(7) Perform the enforced position adjustment (05-4719).
(8) Perform printer related adjustment and scanner related adjustment.

 P. 6-12 "6.1.7 Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section"
 P. 6-18 "6.1.8 Image dimensional adjustment at the scanning section"

(10) Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PRT> (05-8008/8009).

Notes:
Usually, it is only necessary to perform automatic gamma adjustment for [Plain paper]; however if
other paper is used, perform automatic gamma adjustment per paper type.
[D] Set line adjustment mode


9 - 36
(4) Set “Line adjustment mode” to “0: For factory shipment” (08-9010).
Notes:
Be sure to change the setting of “Line adjustment mode” (08-9010) to “0: For factory shipment”.
Since “1: For line” is set for “Line adjustment mode” in [B] Initialize LGC board in EEPROM (for
LGC board) supplied as a service part, number of prints is not counted unless it is changed.

9 - 37
9.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing the Lens unit
When replacing the lens unit, follow the procedure below.
(2) Replace the lens unit.

 P. 4-12 "4.3.4 Lens unit/CCD driving PC board"
(3) Start up with the Adjustment Mode (05).
(5) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board -> Lens unit (05-3209)”.
(6) Perform “Shading correction plate Automatic dust detection adjustment (05-3218)”.
9.2.8 Firmware confirmation after the PC board/HDD replacement

After replacing the PC board/HDD, check the firmware version in the setting mode (08) and confirm if
the firmware combination is correct.
Firmware Code Remarks

Updating System software 08-8952 HD data external version
(HDD program data) 08-9900 System software version
Updating System firmware 08-9930 System firmware version
(OS data)
Updating Engine firmware 08-9901 Engine firmware version
Updating Scanner firmware 08-9902 Scanner firmware version
Updating RADF firmware 08-9903 RADF firmware version
Updating Finisher firmware 08-9904 Finisher firmware version
08-9944 Punch firmware version
Updating FAX firmware 08-9905 FAX firmware version

9 - 38
9.2.9 License re-registration using the one-time dongle
[ 1 ] Re-registration when the board is replaced

The license registered using the one-time dongle can be re-registered only in the same equipment.
When the SYS board or SRAM board (for SYS board) is replaced, follow the procedures for re-
registration given below.
(5) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for registering the selected
license), and then press the [OK] button.
button.
displayed. Then press the [OK] button. If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is 9
displayed, quit this operation by pressing the [CLOSE] button. Then check that the one-time
dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, is installed in the equipment.
Remarks:
If there are any other licenses to be returned, repeat from step (4). If there are no other licenses
to be returned, press the [CLOSE] button, and then turn the power OFF.
Notes:
This procedure is available only with the one-time dongle used for the previous registration, since
the model information registered in it is utilized. Use the same one-time dongle and the
equipment when registering the license.
[ 2 ] Re-registration when the equipment is replaced due to malfunction

When the equipment has to be replaced due to a malfunction, return the license registered in the
equipment to the one-time dongle and register it to the new equipment following the procedure below.
Notes:
The license of the IPSec Enabler (GP-1080) cannot be reinstalled. The one-time dongle to be
used is the one for the previous registration of the license. The license is deleted from the
equipment and is stored in the one-time dongle.
Do not perform the deletion of PDFA Converter since it is deleted without any return to the one-
time dongle.

9 - 39
(5) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for uploading the selected
license), and then press the [OK] button.
(6) The Remove screen is displayed. Then press the [YES] button.
If this screen is not displayed, check that the one-time dongle is installed in the equipment
properly.
displayed. Then press the [OK] button.
If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed, quit this operation by pressing
the [CLOSE] button. Then check that the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the
selected license, is installed in the equipment.
Remarks:
If there are no other licenses to be returned, press the [CLOSE] button, and then turn the power
OFF.
(9) Replace the equipment.
button.
Remarks:
If there are any other licenses to be installed, repeat from step (13). If there are no other licenses
to be installed, press the [CLOSE] button, and then turn the power OFF.

9 - 40
9.3 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/
SSD/Board
9.3.1 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070

When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070), perform the following setting:
3C->6. Erase HDD Securely : HDD securely erasing
This setting is the overwriting method complying with DoD 5220.22-M.

1. LOW: This is the normal overwriting method. (This setting is used normally.)
2. MEDIUM: This overwriting method is more secure than LOW. The erasing time is between LOW
and HIGH.
3. HIGH:This is the most secure overwriting method. It takes the longest time to erase data
4. SIMPLE : This is the simple overwriting method. It takes the shortest time to erase data.
9.3.2 Precautions when disposing of HDD/SSD
[ 1 ] When disposing of ADI-HDD

When disposing of ADI-HDD, perform the following setting:
9
4C->1. Revert factory initial status HDD
[ 2 ] When disposing of SATA-HDD/SSD

When disposing of SATA-HDD/SSD, perform the following setting:
3C->6. Erase HDD Securely (HDD securely erasing)
This setting is the overwriting method complying with DoD 5220.22-M.

1. LOW: This is the normal overwriting method. (This setting is used normally.)
2. MEDIUM: This overwriting method is more secure than LOW. The erasing time is between LOW
and HIGH.
3. HIGH:This is the most secure overwriting method. It takes the longest time to erase data
4. SIMPLE : This is the simple overwriting method. It takes the shortest time to erase data.
9.3.3 Precautions when disposing of the SYS board

When disposing of the SYS board, data clearing is not required since important data, such as user
information, etc. are stored in the SRAM board.
9.3.4 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM board (for SYS board)
When disposing of the SRAM board (for SYS board), perform 3C ->7:Erase SRAM Securely (SRAM
securely erasing) for security reasons.
Notes:
If this is performed, the equipment cannot be started up.

9 - 41
9 - 42
10. REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service.
1. Auto Supply Order
Automatically orders the toner and used waste toner box by FAX or E-mail.
2. Service Notification
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
10.1 Auto Supply Order
10.1.1 Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used waste toner box.
(1) Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
• FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
• E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)
(2) Order Intervals

The Auto Supply Order is sent as indicated in the following steps.
• Toner cartridge
1. Toner empty occurs.
2. The toner cartridge is replaced.
3. The toner empty counter is incremented when the total number of prints or the pixel
counter value exceeds the threshold set in the following self-diagnostic code. 10
Items 08 code Contents
Toner empty determination 6506 Selects the counter to determine toner
counter empty.
0: Output pages
1:Pixel counter
Threshold setting for toner empty 6507 Sets the number of output pages to
determination (output pages) determine toner empty. This setting is valid
when "0" is set at 08-6506.
Threshold setting for toner empty 6508 Sets the number of the pixel counter value
determination (pixel counter) to determine toner empty. This setting is
valid when "1" is set at 08-6506.
e.g.) When "0" is set for 08-6506 and "50" is set for 08-6507
The toner empty counter is incremented when 50 sheets are printed after the toner
cartridge has been replaced.
4. When the accumulated number of toner empty times reaches the set condition, an order is
placed automatically.
• Waste toner box

When the number of the waste toner full detection times reaches the set condition, an order is
placed automatically.
The order condition for the toner cartridge and the waste toner box can be set individually.
(3) If Order Failure Occurs

If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 1
10.1.2 Setting Item
To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required.
Notes:
When selecting E-mail to place an order, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
(1) Self-diagnosis (08) Setting

As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel.
To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-9783) is required.
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)*
2: Invalid (Default)
When changing the setting value from “2” (default) to “0”, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is
displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.)
(2) Touch Panel Setting

Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
• Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)

ORDER
FAX NUMBER FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-MAIL E-mail address of supplier (*3)
CUSTOMER Customer information
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER Supplier information
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECNICIAN Service technician information
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.
*2 Even when “FAX” is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when “MAIL” is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
• Detailed setting for the order

[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]
***** TONER ORDER Order information (TONER /USED TONER

CONTAINER)
PART NUMBER Part number to be ordered
CONDITIOIN The number of conditions (*)
QUANTITY The quantity to be ordered
REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 2
AUTO ORDER ON/OFF setting of order for each part
* The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
• FAX number of this equipment (common information)
[ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME ID name of this equipment

FAX NUMBER FAX number of this equipment
• E-mail information of this equipment (common information)

[ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS E-mail address of this equipment (*)

FROM NAME E-mail username of this equipment
* When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is
not sent.
(3) Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order.

1. Enter the Service UI Mode.  P. 5-5 "5.2 Service UI"
2. Select "FAX LIST PRINT MODE" and then press [NEXT].
3. Select "SUPPLY ORDER LIST" and then press [PRINT].
10

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 3
10.1.3 Setting procedure
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-9783, and then change the setting value to “0”.
(2) Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
(4) Press the [ADMIN] button.

When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is
displayed.
Fig.10-1
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [OK] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 4
Fig.10-2
(6) Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.
(7) The SERVICE screen is displayed.
10
Fig.10-3
(8) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 5
Fig.10-4
(9) Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
Fig.10-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/ Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
[OFF] (HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 6
[FAX NUMBER] Input the FAX number of supplier.
(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do
not input the number.)
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of supplier.
(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do
not input the address.)
(12) Press the scroll button.

(Press the [OK] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7)
SERVICE screen.)
(13) The SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
10
Fig.10-6
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of SUPPLIER to set the required item.
[NAME] Input the name of supplier.

[ADDRESS] Input the address of supplier.
(15) Press the [OK] button.
(16) The SERVICE screen is displayed.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 7
Fig.10-7
(17) Press the [SERVICE INFORMATION] button.
(18) The CUSTOMER/SERVICE TECHNICIAN screen is displayed.
Fig.10-8
(19) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SERVICE TECHNICIAN to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME] Input the name of customer.

[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of customer.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 8
[ADDRESS] Input the address of customer.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER] Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.

[NAME] Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of SERVICE
TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
(20) Press the [OK] button to register and complete the order information setting.
(21) The SERVICE screen is returned.
10
Fig.10-9
(22) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 9
Fig.10-10
(23) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.
(24) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig.10-11
(25) Select the part to be ordered. (Press the [YELLOW(Y)] button.)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 10
Fig.10-12
(26) Input the order information of TONER.
[PART NUMBER] Toner number

[CONDITION] The order is placed when the accumulated number of toner empty times
reaches the value set in here. 10
[QUANTITY] Quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF] Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed

automatically or not.
(27) Press the [OK] button to register the setting of toner order.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 11
(28) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig.10-13
(29) Press the [MAGENTA(M)] / [CYAN(C)] / [BLACK(K)] / [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and
then input the order information in the same way.
Fig.10-14
(30) Press the [OK] button to register the order information.
Notes:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 12
The transmitting way of order 9750 0: Ordered by FAX
[FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF] 1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
SUPPLIER 9751 Maximum 32 digits
[FAX NUMBER]
SUPPLIER 9752 Maximum 192 letters
[E-MAIL]
CUSTOMER 9756 Maximum 50 letters
[NAME]
CUSTOMER 9757 Maximum 32 digits
[TEL NUMBER]
[E-MAIL]
[ADDRESS]
[NAME]
[ADDRESS]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 9760 Maximum 5 digits
[NUMBER]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 9761 Maximum 50 letters
[NAME]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 9762 Maximum 32 digits 10
[TEL NUMBER]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 9763 Maximum 192 letters
[E-MAIL]
Remarks 9766 Maximum 128 letters
[DESCRIPTION]
RESULT PRINTING 9782 0: OFF
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON 1: Always
ERROR] 2: ON Error
YELLOW(Y) TONER 9773 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
YELLOW(Y) TONER 9775 1-99
[CONDITION]
YELLOW(Y) TONER 9774 1-99
[QUANTITY]
MAGENTA(M) TONER 9770 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
MAGENTA(M) TONER 9772 1-99
[CONDITION]
MAGENTA(M) TONER 9771 1-99
[QUANTITY]
CYAN(C) TONER 9767 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
CYAN(C) TONER 9769 1-99
[CONDITION]
CYAN(C) TONER 9768 1-99
[QUANTITY]

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 13
BLACK(K) TONER 9776 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
BLACK(K) TONER 9778 1-99
[CONDITION]
BLACK(K) TONER 9777 1-99
[QUANTITY]
USED TONER CONTAINER 9779 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
USED TONER CONTAINER 9781 1-99
[CONDITION]
USED TONER CONTAINER 9780 1-99
[QUANTITY]
(31) The SERVICE screen is returned.
(32) Press the [ON] or [OFF] button in “Service Notification (Device Info).
When the [OFF]
button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification (Device Info) become ineffective.
Fig.10-15
(33) When Service Notification (Device Info) is set to ON, the screen to set the notification date is
displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 14
Fig.10-16
Set the date and time of the Total Counter.

The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week
also can be selected.
• Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.)
• Notify Date 1 10
• Notify Date 2
• Day of the week ([SUN] to [SAT] buttons)

Pressing the buttons ([Sunday] to [Saturday]) of the desired day makes transmission on every
specified day. More than one day can be selected.
* This does not affect the settings of “Notify Date 1” and “Notify Date 2”.
• Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ([DATE] button)

Pressing the [DATE] button sets up to 2 dates on which you wand to send data.
* This is not affected by the specified day of the week.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 15
Fig.10-17
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in “Notify Date 1” or “Notify Date 2” and press the [OK]
button.
• Time setting ([CHANGE] button)

Pressing the [CHANGE] button sets the time at which you wand to send data.
This is the time when data are sent with “Day of the week”, “Notify Date 1” and “Notify Date 2”.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 16
Fig.10-18
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in “Time”. 10

Key in the time in the hour column of “Time”, press the scroll button, key in the time in the minute
column of “Time”.
After all the settings are completed, press the [OK] button.
(34) Press the [CLOSE] button. The setting completes.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 17
10.1.4 Order Sheet Format
The sample of order sheet is as follows.
(1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME :99-99-'99 99:99

CUSTOMER NUMBER :XXX
CUSTOMER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER QUANTITY

TONER CARTRIDGE
CYAN : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
MAGENTA : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
YELLOW : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 (*1)
BLACK : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
USED TONER CONTAINER : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................

.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

SERIAL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE FAX NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL BLACK TWIN COLOR FULL COLOR

PRINT COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
TONER INFORMATION
YELLOW REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 0000059
MAGENTA REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 0000060
CYAN REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 0000061
BLACK REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 0000062
Fig.10-19
DESCRIPTION AREA: Remarks

DEVICE DESCRIPTION: Model name
SERIAL NUMBER: Serial number
DEVICE FAX NUMBER: Fax number
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS: E-mail address

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 18
(2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order
sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
Date&Time: '12-04-14 00:17

Customer Number: a1 MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
SerialNumber: 1234567890
Device FAX Number: 456
Device Email: [email protected]
OrderInformation:
CYAN PartNumber: CYAN-01 Quantity: 15
MAGENTA PartNumber: MAGENTA-02 Quantity: 16 (*1)
BLACK PartNumber: BLACK-04 Quantity: 18
CounterInformation:
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 150
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 7
Fig.10-20
Date&Time: Order date and time

Customer Number: Customer number
MachineName: Model name (MFP model name)
SerialNumber: Serial number
Device FAX Number: Fax number
Device Email: E-mail address 10
OrderInformation: Order information
CYAN PartNumber: Cyan toner cartridge part number
MAGENTA PartNumber: Magenta toner cartridge part number
BLACK PartNumber: Black toner cartridge part number
Quantity: Order quantity
CounterInformation: Counter information
PrintCounter (Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black:
Print count (Small size) for Full color, Twin color and Black
PrintCounter (Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black:
Print count (Large size) for Full color, Twin color and Black
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: Scan count
Scan count for Full color, Twin color and Black

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 19
(3) Result list
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
DATE & TIME :99-99-'99 99:99
CUSTOMER NUMBER :XXX
CUSTOMER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER QUANTITY

TONER CARTRIDGE
CYAN : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
MAGENTA : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
YELLOW : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 (*1)
BLACK : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
USED TONER CONTAINER : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................

.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

SERIAL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE FAX NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL BLACK TWIN COLOR FULL COLOR

PRINT COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
TONER INFORMATION
YELLOW REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059

MAGENTA REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059
CYAN REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059
BLACK REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059
Fig.10-21
ORDER SUCCESSFUL/FAILURE: Automatic supply ordering: transmission success

or failure
DATE & TIME: Order date and time
CUSTOMER NUMBER: Customer number
CUSTOMER NAME: Customer name
CUSTOMER ADDRESS: Customer address
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER: Customer telephone number
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS: Customer E-mail address
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER: Service technician telephone number
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL: Service technician E-mail address
SUPPLIER NAME: Supplier name
SUPPLIER ADDRESS: Supplier address
PART NUMBER: Order part number
REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 20
QUANTITY: Order quantity
TONER CARTRIDGE: Toner cartridge
CYAN: Cyan
MAGENTA: Magenta
YELLOW: Yellow
BLACK: Black
USED TONER CONTAINER: Used toner container (waste toner box)
DESCRIPTION AREA: Remarks
DEVICE DESCRIPTION: Model name (MFP model name)
SERIAL NUMBER: Serial number
DEVICE FAX NUMBER: Fax number
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS: E-mail address
PRINT COUNTER: Print count
SCAN COUNTER: Scan count
TOTAL: Total
BLACK: Black
TWIN COLOR: Twin color
FULL COLOPY: Full color
YELLOW REMAINING QUANTITY (%) Toner remaining quantity (Yellow)
MAGENTA REMAINING QUANTITY (%) Toner remaining quantity (Magenta)
CYAN REMAINING QUANTITY (%) Toner remaining quantity (Cyan)
BKACKREMAINING QUANTITY (%) Toner remaining quantity (Black)
10

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 21
10.2 Service Notification
10.2.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
• Total counter notification

When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and
time every month).
• Service call notification (E-mail only)

When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call
error.
• PM counter notification
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
• Toner near empty notification

When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information and toner cartridge information if
toner near empty occurs.
10.2.2 Setting
Notes:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-9604 Setting of notification display

0: Invalid (Default)
1: Valid

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 22
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [OK] button.
Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig.10-22
(2) Press the [SERVICE] button.

10
Fig.10-23

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 23
(3) Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig.10-24
(4) Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in “SERVICE NOTIFICATION”.

When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffective.
Fig.10-25
(5) Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.

When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the E-
mail addresses and press the [OK] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 24
Fig.10-26
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [OK] button.
10
Fig.10-27

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 25
(6) Press the [ON] button to notify or the [OFF] button not to notify each item for E-mail and FAX.
When Total Count Transmit is set to ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure.
Fig.10-28
Set the date and time of the Total Counter.

The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week
also can be selected.
• Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.)
• Notify Date 1
• Notify Date 2
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND
NOW] button.
• Day of the week ([SUN] to [SAT] buttons)
Pressing the buttons ([Sunday] to [Saturday]) of the desired day makes transmission on every
specified day. More than one day can be selected.
* This does not affect the settings of “Notify Date 1” and “Notify Date 2”.
• Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ([DATE] button)

Pressing the [DATE] button sets up to 2 dates on which you wand to send data.
* This is not affected by the specified day of the week.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 26
Fig.10-29
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in “Notify Date 1” or “Notify Date 2” and press the [OK]
button.
• Time setting ([CHANGE] button)

Pressing the [CHANGE] button sets the time at which you wand to send data.
This is the time when data are sent with “Day of the week”, “Notify Date 1” and “Notify Date 2”. 10

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 27
Fig.10-30
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in “Time”.

Key in the time in the hour column of “Time”, press the scroll button, key in the time in the minute
column of “Time”.
After all the settings are completed, press the [OK] button. The display returns to the screen in
step (5).
(7) Press the [OK] button. The setting completes.
Notes:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).

Service Notification setting 9793 0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail 2:FAX
E-mail address 1 9794 Maximum 192 letters
FAX number 9784 Maximum 32 digits
Total Counter Transmit setting 9795 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
Total counter transmission date 9796 0 to 31
setting
Total counter transmission date 9880 0 to 31
setting(2)
Day of total counter data 9881 1 byte
transmission 00000000(0)-01111111(127)
From the 2nd bit - Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
Total counter transmission interval 9606 00:00-23:59
setting
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Service Call Transmit setting 9605 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
PM Counter Transmit setting 9797 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 28
10.2.3 Items to be notified
The items to be notified are shown below.
1. Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as “Periodical Maintenance Notification”.)
1 Date : 04/26/2012 12:34

2 Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
3 SerialNumber : 1234567890
4 Total Counter : 00004787
5 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : [email protected]
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
6 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
7 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
ChargeCounterFormat:
8 LargeSizeChargeCount 1
9 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
PMCounterFormat:
10 LargeSizePMCount 1
11 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 0
Charge Counter:
Large Small
<Print Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
12 Copy 00000000 00000000
13 Print 00000000 00000000
Twin Color ------------------------------------
14 Copy 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
15 Copy 00000000 00000000 10
16 Print 00000000 00000000
17 List 00000000 00000000
18 FAX 00000000 00000000
<Scan Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
19 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
20 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
Twin Color ------------------------------------
21 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
22 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
23 FAX Scan 00000000 00000000
24 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
<FAX Counter>
25 Transmit 00000000 00000000
26 Receive 00000000 00000000
Fig.10-31

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 29
Periodical Maintenance Counter:
Pages Drive Counts

------------------------------------------------------------------
K-EPU
27 Setting 00000000 00000000
28 Current 00000000 00000000
Y-EPU
29 Setting 00000000 00000000
30 Current 00000000 00000000
M-EPU
31 Setting 00000000 00000000
32 Current 00000000 00000000
C-EPU
33 Setting 00000000 00000000
34 Current 00000000 00000000
------------------------------------------------------------------
K-Dev
35 Setting 00000000 00000000
36 Current 00000000 00000000
Y-Dev
37 Setting 00000000 00000000
38 Current 00000000 00000000
M-Dev
39 Setting 00000000 00000000
40 Current 00000000 00000000
C-Dev
41 Setting 00000000 00000000
42 Current 00000000 00000000
------------------------------------------------------------------
Others
43 Setting 00000000 00000000
44 Current 00000000 00000000
45 Printer Error History:

Date Time ErrorCode Counter
------------------------------------------------------------------
04/13/2008 16:44 F110 00000000
04/12/2008 22:28 F110 00000000
04/12/2008 22:23 F110 00000000 (*1)
03/15/2008 22:23 F110 00000000
02/25/2008 11:12 F110 00000000
Toner Information
Toner Remaining Quantity (%)
------------------------------------------------------------------
46 Yellow 00000000
47 Magenta 00000000
48 Cyam 00000000
49 Black 00000000
Fig.10-32
1 Date
2 Machine model name
3 Serial number
4 Total counter value
5 Supplier information
6 Customer information
7 Service technician information
8 Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9 Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10 Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11 Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
13 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 30
14 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
15 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
16 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
17 Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
18 Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
20 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)
21 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
22 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
23 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
24 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
25 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
26 Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
27 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
28 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
29 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (Y)]
30 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (Y)] 10
31 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (M)]
32 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (M)]
33 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (C)]
34 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (C)]
35 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
36 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
37 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (Y)]
38 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (Y)]
39 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (M)]
40 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (M)]
41 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (C)]
42 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (C)]
43 PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Other parts]
44 PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Other parts]
45 History error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 31
46 Toner remaining quantity (Yellow)
47 Toner remaining quantity (Magenta)
48 Toner remaining quantity (Cyan)
49 Toner remaining quantity (Black)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 32
2. Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX
*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to “PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
NOTIFICATION”.
Sheet 1
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
1 DATE : 12/04/14 13:47

2 MACHINE MODEL : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
3 SERIAL NUMBER : 1234567890
4 TOTAL COUNTER : 00004787
CUSTOMER NAME : CUSTOMER_NAME

CUSTOMER ADDRESS : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
5
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER : 1234567890
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS : [email protected]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER : svc12
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
6
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER : 0987654321
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL : [email protected]
SUPPLIER NAME : SUPPLIER_NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
7
SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER : 5544332211
SUPPLIER E-MAIL : [email protected]
Fig.10-33
10

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 33
Sheet 2
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT PM COUNTER FORMAT
8 LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT :1 LARGE SIZE PM COUNT :1

9 LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION :1 LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION :0
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
PRINT COUNTER SCAN COUNTER

FULL COLOR LARGE SMALL FULL COLOR LARGE SMALL
12 COPY 00000000 00000000 20 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
13 PRINT 00000000 00000000 21 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
TWIN COLOR LARGE SMALL TWIN COLOR LARGE SMALL
14 COPY 00000000 00000000 22 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
15 PRINT 00000000 00000000
BLACK LARGE SMALL BLACK LARGE SMALL
16 COPY 00000000 00000000 23 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
17 PRINT 00000000 00000000 24 FAX SCAN 00000000 00000000
18 LIST 00000000 00000000 25 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
19 FAX 00000000 00000000
FAX COUNTER
LARGE SMALL
26 TRANSMIT 00000000 00000000
27 RECEIVE 00000000 00000000
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER
28 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 46
29 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 47
30 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (Y-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 48
31 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (Y-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 49
32 SETTING VALUE (Y-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (Y-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 50
33 CURRENT VALUE (Y-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (Y-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 51
34 SETTING VALUE (Y-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (M-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 52
35 CURRENT VALUE (Y-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (M-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 53
36 SETTING VALUE (M-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (M-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 54
37 CURRENT VALUE (M-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (M-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 55
38 SETTING VALUE (M-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (C-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 56
39 CURRENT VALUE (M-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (C-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 57
40 SETTING VALUE (C-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (C-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 58
41 CURRENT VALUE (C-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (C-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 59
42 SETTING VALUE (C-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 60
43 CURRENT VALUE (C-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 61
44 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 62
45 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 63
Fig.10-34

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 34
Sheet 3
64 PRINTER ERROR HISTORY
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 (*2)
08/03/15 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/02/25 11:12 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
TONER INFORMATION
65 YELLOW REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059

66 MAGENTA REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059
67 CYAN REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059
68 BLACK REMAINING QUANTITY (%) : 00000059
Fig.10-35
1 Date
3 Serial number 10
4 Total counter value
8 Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9 Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10 Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11 Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
13 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)
14 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
15 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (TWIN COLOR)
16 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
17 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
18 Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
19 Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 35
20 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
21 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)
22 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
23 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
24 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
25 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
26 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
27 Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
28 PM count setting value [EPU (K)]
29 PM count present value [EPU (K)]
30 PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
31 PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
32 PM count setting value [EPU (Y)]
33 PM count present value [EPU (Y)]
34 PM driving count setting value [EPU (Y)]
35 PM driving count present value [EPU (Y)]
36 PM count setting value [EPU (M)]
37 PM count present value [EPU (M)]
38 PM driving count setting value [EPU (M)]
39 PM driving count present value [EPU (M)]
40 PM count setting value [EPU (C)]
41 PM count present value [EPU (C)]
42 PM driving count setting value [EPU (C)]
43 PM driving count present value [EPU (C)]
44 PM count setting value [Developer material (K)]
45 PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
46 PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
47 PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
48 PM count setting value [Developer material (Y)]
49 PM driving count present value [Developer material (Y)]
50 PM driving count setting value [Developer material (Y)]
51 PM driving count present value [Developer material (Y)]
52 PM count setting value [Developer material (M)]

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 36
53 PM driving count present value [Developer material (M)]
54 PM driving count setting value [Developer material (M)]
55 PM driving count present value [Developer material (M)]
56 PM count setting value [Developer material (C)]
57 PM driving count present value [Developer material (C)]
58 PM driving count setting value [Developer material (C)]
59 PM driving count present value [Developer material (C)]
60 PM count setting value (Other parts)
61 PM driving count present value (Other parts)
62 PM driving count setting value (Other parts)
63 PM driving count present value (Other parts)
64 History of error
68 Toner remaining quantity (Black) 10

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 37
3. Toner near-empty notification by e-mail
Subject: Toner Near-Empty Notification
1 Date : 04/26/2012 12:34

2 Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
3 SerialNumber : 1234567890
4 Total Counter : 00004787
5 Supplier:
Fax Number : 1122334455
6 Customer:
Tel Number : 1234567890
Number : svc12
Tel Number : 0987654321
ChargeCounterFormat:
8 LargeSizeChargeCount 1
9 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
PMCounterFormat:
10 LargeSizePMCount 1
11 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 0
Charge Counter:
Large Small
<Print Counter>
Black ------------------------------------------
12 Copy 00000000 00000000
13 Print 00000000 00000000
14 List 00000000 00000000
15 FAX 00000000 00000000
<Scan Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
16 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
17 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
18 FAX Scan 00000000 00000000
19 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
<FAX Counter>
20 Transmit 00000000 00000000
21 Receive 00000000 00000000
Fig.10-36

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 38
Periodical Maintenance Counter:
Pages Drive Counts

------------------------------------------------------------------
K-EPU
22 Setting 00000000 00000000
23 Current 00000000 00000000
------------------------------------------------------------------
K-EPU
24 Setting 00000000 00000000
25 Current 00000000 00000000
------------------------------------------------------------------
Others
26 Setting 00000000 00000000
27 Current 00000000 00000000

------------------------------------------------------------------
04/13/2008 16:44 F110 00000000
04/12/2008 22:28 F110 00000000
04/12/2008 22:23 F110 00000000 (*1)
03/15/2008 22:23 F110 00000000
02/25/2008 11:12 F110 00000000
Toner Information:
Toner
-------------------------------------------------------------------
29 Yellow 00000000
30 Magenta 00000000
31 Cyan 00000000
32 Black 00000000
10
Fig.10-37
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Supplier information
6. Customer information
7. Service technician information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 39
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
24. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
25. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
26. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Other parts]
27. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Other parts]
28. History error
29. Toner remaining quantity (Yellow)
30. Toner remaining quantity (Magenta)
31. Toner remaining quantity (Cyan)
32. Toner remaining quantity (Black)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 40
4. Toner near-empty notification by FAX
Sheet 1
TONER NEAR-EMPTY NOTIFICATION (*1)
1 DATE : 12/04/14 13:47

2 MACHINE MODEL : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
3 SERIAL NUMBER : 1234567890
4 TOTAL COUNTER : 00004787
CUSTOMER NAME : CUSTOMER_NAME

CUSTOMER ADDRESS : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
5
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER : 1234567890
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS : [email protected]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER : svc12
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
6
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER : 0987654321
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL : [email protected]
SUPPLIER NAME : SUPPLIER_NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
7
SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER : 5544332211
SUPPLIER E-MAIL : [email protected]
Fig.10-38
10

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 41
Sheet 2
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT PM COUNTER FORMAT
8 LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT :1 LARGE SIZE PM COUNT :1

9 LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION :1 LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION :0
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
PRINT COUNTER SCAN COUNTER

BLACK LARGE SMALL FULL COLOR LARGE SMALL
12 COPY 00000000 00000000 16 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
13 PRINT 00000000 00000000 BLACK LARGE SMALL
14 LIST 00000000 00000000 17 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
15 FAX 00000000 00000000 18 FAX SCAN 00000000 00000000
19 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
FAX COUNTER
LARGE SMALL
20 TRANSMIT 00000000 00000000
21 RECEIVE 00000000 00000000
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER
22 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 28
23 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 29
24 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 30
25 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 31
26 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 32
27 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 33
34 PRINTER ERROR HISTORY
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
(*2)
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/03/15 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/02/25 11:12 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
Fig.10-39

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 42
Sheet 3
35 Toner Cartridge Information:
36 Toner Near-Empty Counter

37 Setting 00000000
38 Current 00000000
39 Color code 1
40 Toner Near-Empty Sensed 1

41 Point Of Destination 0
Used History
Developer Counter 00000056
Developer Driving Time 00000057
Drum Driving Time 00000058
Toner Information
42 Yellow Remaining Quantity (%) : 00000059

43 Magenta Remaining Quantity (%) : 00000060
44 Cyan Remaining Quantity (%) : 00000061
45 Black Remaining Quantity (%) : 00000062
Fig.10-40
1. Date
2. Machine model name 10
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Customer information
6. Service technician information
7. Supplier information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value [EPU (K)]
24. PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
25. PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
26. PM count setting value [Developer material (K)]
REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 43
27. PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
28. PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
29. PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
30. PM count setting value (Other parts)
31. PM driving count present value (Other parts)
32. PM driving count setting value (Other parts)
33. PM driving count present value (Other parts)
34. History of error
35. Toner cartridge information
36. Toner near-empty counter
37. Setting value of toner cartridge rotation time counter
38. Current value of toner cartridge rotation time counter
39. Color of toner cartridge
1: Black
2: Yellow
3: Magenta
4: Cyan
40. Value of "toner near empty threshold setting (08-5155)"
41. Destination setting of toner cartridge
42. Toner remaining quantity (Yellow)
43. Toner remaining quantity (Magenta)
44. Toner remaining quantity (Cyan)
45. Toner remaining quantity (Black)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 44
5. Service Call Transmit
Subject: Service Call Notification
1 Date: 04/14/2012 13:47

Machine Name: e-STUDIOxxxx SerialNumber:1234567890
2 3
4 Function: Printer
5 Severity: Error
6 ErrorCode: XXXX
7 Message:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
8 Supplier:
Tel Number : 1122334455
9 Customer:
Tel Number : 1234567890
Number : svc12
Tel Number : 0987654321
10

-------------------------------------------------------------------
04/13/2012 16:44 F110
04/12/2012 22:28 F110
(*1)
04/12/2012 22:23 F110
03/15/2012 22:23 F110
02/25/2012 11:12 F110
Toner Information
Toner Remaining Quantity(%)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 Yellow 00000000
13 Magenta 00000000
14 Cyan 00000000
15 Black 00000000
Fig.10-41

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 45
1 Date (When an error occurs)
3 Serial number
4 Function: Fixed at “Printer”
5 Severity: Fixed at “Error”
6 Error code
7 Error message: The content of error is displayed.
11 History of error
12
15 Toner remaining quantity (Black)

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 46
11. FIRMWARE UPDATING
11.1 Overview
When you want to update the firmware to the latest one or the equipment becomes inoperable due to
some defect in the firmware, updating can be performed as follows.
Equipment
Firmware Updating method

System firmware USB device
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F)
Engine firmware
Scanner firmware USB device
System software
Options
Model name Firmware Updating method

PFC firmware (PFC board) PFC firmware
USB device
(GH-1080)
Reversing Automatic Document RADF firmware
Feeder (RADF) USB device
(MR-3024)
Finisher Finisher firmware USB device
(MJ-1036)
Finisher Finisher firmware USB device
(MJ-1037)
Hole Punch Unit Hole punch unit firmware USB device
(MJ-6008)
FAX Unit FAX firmware Download jig
(GD-1320) (K-PWA-DLM-320F)

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 1
A. System firmware/
Engine firmware/
Scanner firmware /
System software/
RADF firmware /
PFC firmware /
Punch firmware / USB media
Finisher firmware
Fig.11-1
System firmware / Engine firmware / Scanner firmware / P. 11-11

A System software / RADF firmware / PFC firmware / Punch firmware /
Finisher firmware 11
B. System firmware
PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F
Fig.11-2
B System firmware P. 11-27

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 2
C. FAX firmware (GD-1320)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Fig.11-3
C FAX firmware (GD-1320) P. 11-30
Notes:
• Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC board,
scanning section control PC board, and FAX board. The latest version of the firmware at the time
of delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and finisher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, check the other firmware
version used and then update with a corresponding suitable version.
• The system firmware is not installed on the SSD provided as a service part. When the hard disk
is replaced with a new one, check the other firmware version used and then write a
corresponding suitable version.
• "Can't fetch Ver." is displayed in the Installed Version field when the version of the installed
firmware cannot be acquired properly. If a normal power on is not performed after the firmware is
updated and the [ON/OFF] button is pressed while simultaneously holding down the [4] and [9]
buttons, "Can't fetch Ver." may be displayed on the control panel for some firmwares. A normal
power on must be performed.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 3
11.2 Firmware Updating with a USB Device
To update the firmware, store the update programs and the firmware data files in a USB device.
The update program is "signature.XX.sig", and it needs to be stored in a USB device. It is necessary for
updating the firmware except that of the system firmware.
For the data file for each firmware, refer to the table of section 11.2.2Firmware type and data file name
for updating.
Notes:
Be sure to use the latest program when updating is performed.
11.2.1 Updating methods

There are three types of updating methods by means of a USB device. The table below explains the
differences.
Method File Explanation

Standard update Standard package Updating the file of a base version.
Differential items Differential items Updating the version by means of the package of only the
update package files which have been changed from the base. This
method is applied to the system firmware only. Since only
the files which have been changed are packaged, the
data size is smaller than that for the standard package.
Patch update Patch Updating can be done in a shorter time than the standard
one. This method is applied to the system firmware and
the system software only.
11.2.2 Firmware type and data file name for updating
[A] Standard update

Equipment
11
Firmware Stored Data file name Display
System firmware System control PC <20ppm/25ppm: When only SYSTEM FIRMWARE
(OS data) board SSD is mounted.> (OS Data)
(SYS board) T210SF0Wxxxx.tar
<20ppm/25ppm: When HDD is
mounted.>
T210SF0Wxxxx.tar
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T230SF0Wxxxx.tar
* The version name comes
at "xxxx".
Engine firmware Logic PC board T210MWW.xxx ENGINE FIRMWARE
(LGC board) The version name comes at
"xxx".
Scanner firmware System control PC T210SLGWW.xxx SCANNER FIRMWARE
board * The version name comes
(SYS board) at "xxx".

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 4
System software SSD / HDD <20ppm/25ppm: When only SYSTEM SOFTWARE
(HDD program SSD is mounted.> (HD Data)
data) T210HD0Wxxxx.tar
mounted.>
T569HD0Wxxxx.tar
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm)>
T230HD0Wxxxx.tar
* The version name comes
at "xxxx".
Option

RADF firmware DLG board H546DFWW.0xxx RADF FIRMWARE
(MR-3024) * The version name comes
at "xxxx".
PFC firmware PFC board T210FWW.xxx PFC FIRMWARE
(GH-1080) * The version name comes
at "xxx".
Punch firmware Punch control PC PUN6008T.xxx PUNCH FIRMWARE
(MJ-6008) board (HP) * The version name comes
at "xxx".
Finisher firmware Finisher control PC FIN1036T.xxx FINISHER FIRMWARE
(MJ-1036) board * The version name comes
at "xxx".
Finisher firmware Finisher control PC FIN1037T.xxx FINISHER FIRMWARE
(MJ-1037) board * The version name comes
at "xxx".

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 5
[B] Differential items update
Equipment

System firmware System control <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD SYSTEM
PC board is mounted.> FIRMWARE(OS Data)
(SYS board) T210SFdWxxxx.tar
mounted.>
T210SFdWxxxx.tar
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T230SFdWxxxx.tar
* The version name comes at
"xxxx".
System software SSD / HDD <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD SYSTEM SOFTWARE
is mounted.> (HD Data)
T210HDdWxxxx.tar
mounted.>
T569HDdWxxxx.tar
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm)>
T230HDdWxxxx.tar
"xxxx".
[C] Patch update

Equipment

System firmware System control <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD SYSTEM 11
PC board is mounted.> FIRMWARE(OS Data)
(SYS board) T210SFPWxxxx.tar
mounted.>
T569SFPWxxxx.tar
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T230SFPWxxxx.tar
"xxxx".
System software SSD / HDD <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD SYSTEM SOFTWARE
is mounted.> (HD Data)
T210HDPWxxxx.tar
mounted.>
T569HDPWxxxx.tar
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm)>
T230HDPWxxxx.tar
"xxxx".

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 6
11.2.3 Folder configuration of a USB device
[A] Standard update

The data files for updating are stored in the model specific folder. The configuration below is an
example.
The number of files differs depending on the installed option.
20ppm/25ppm, SSD only
Model specific folder name 2050C_5050C
USB media
2050C_5050C
T210SF0Wxxxx.tar
T210MWW.xxx
T210SLGWW.xxx
T210HD0Wxxxx.tar
H546DFWW.0xxx
T210FWW.xxx
PUN6008T.xxx
FIN1036T.xxx (When MJ-1036 is connected.)
signarture.L.sig
Fig.11-4
20ppm/25ppm, When HDD is mounted
USB media
2050C_5050C
T210SF0Wxxxx.tar
T210MWW.xxx
T210SLGWW.xxx
T569HD0Wxxxx.tar
H546DFWW.0xxx
T210FWW.xxx
PUN6008T.xxx
FIN1036.xxx (When MJ-1036 is connected.)
signarture.LH.sig
Fig.11-5

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 7
LL20ppm/LL25ppm
USB media
2050C_5050C
T230SF0Wxxxx.tar
T210MWW.xxx
T210SLGWW.xxx
T230HD0Wxxxx.tar
H546DFWW.0xxx
T210FWW.xxx
signarture.LL.sig
Fig.11-6
[B] Differential items update

USB media
2050C_5050C
11
T210SFdWxxxx.tar
T210HDdWxxxx.tar
signarture.diff_L.sig
Fig.11-7
20ppm/25ppm, HDD is mounted
USB media
2050C_5050C
T210SFdWxxxx.tar
T569HDdWxxxx.tar
signarture.diff_LH.sig
Fig.11-8

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 8
LL20ppm/LL25ppm
USB media
2050C_5050C
T230SFdWxxxx.tar
T230HDdWxxxx.tar
signarture.diff_LL.sig
Fig.11-9
[C] Patch update

USB media
2050C_5050C
T210SFPWxxxx.tar
T210HDPWxxxx.tar
signarture.L.sig
Fig.11-10
20ppm/25ppm, HDD is mounted
USB media
2050C_5050C
T210SFPWxxxx.tar
T569HDPWxxxx.tar
signarture.LH.sig
Fig.11-11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 9
LL20ppm/LL25ppm
USB media
2050C_5050C
T230SFPWxxxx.tar
T230HDPWxxxx.tar
signarture.LL.sig
Fig.11-12
Notes:
• Since the date and time set in the equipment are recorded in the firmware update log, make sure
that they are correct before updating the firmware.
• Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for identifying the data file when the
ones used for updating multiple models are stored in a USB device.
• Updating of the base version data must be completed in advance when an update of differential
items is performed.
• If the differential items update has failed, update the base version data and then perform the
differential items update again.
• Be sure to perform a standard update if such is required after the board or HDD has been
formatted. The update will fail if the differential items update is performed instead.
• The files for the standard package and the differential items package can be used to update
while they are stored into the same USB device. Moreover, it is also possible to store multiple
11
files for differential items package into the same USB device.
Important:
• Only the USB devices which meet the following conditions should be used for updating. Note that
updating with any devices other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port)
and its capacity is 4GB or more.
- Operation of the USB device used for updating has been confirmed at the input check of
this equipment (Test mode 03). ( P. 5-8 "5.3 Input check (Test mode 03)")
- The USB devices which comply with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB
Implementers Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Almost all general USB devices comply with the above specifications and can be used
for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color Systems
and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of
these devices are developed based on use in a PC environment (Windows or
Macintosh). Therefore, check thoroughly that the device is operational in the equipment
for which the updating will be performed when purchasing it.
• The USB devices complying with USB2.0 can be used for updating.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk), since it is never guaranteed.
• It is possible to store the model specific update program and the data file for updating directly in
the root directory when you store the updating data file for one specific model in the USB device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the root
directory already exists, this will have priority.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 10
11.2.4 Update procedure
Important:
• The file system of USB device should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32 format. USB devices
formatted in an NTFS or another format will not be able to be operated. The file system of a USB
device can be confirmed by opening its property using Windows Explorer or such.
• Never shut down the equipment during an update. Otherwise, firmware data and the following
option data (if installed) could be damaged and may not be able to be operated properly.
- Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070)
- Meta Scan Enabler (GS-1010)
- External Interface Enabler (GS-1020)
- IPSec Enabler (GP-1080)
- Hardcopy Security kit (GP-1190A)
[A] Updating firmware

(1) Connect the USB device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is
stored.
Store the data file for updating in the model specific folder.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button to shut down the equipment.
(3) Connect the USB device [1] to the USB port [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig.11-13

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 11
(4) Press the [ON/OFF] button while holding down the [4] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
Data in the USB device are checked and its status is displayed on the screen.
(5) Enter the password, and then press [OK].

(If the Enter Password field is blank, it is unnecessary to enter anything.)
Enter Password
! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) = ~ | ` { }
* < > ? _ . ^ @ + [ ] ; : / 1
Q W E R T Y U I O P 2 3
A S D F G H J K L 4 5 6
Z X C V B N M , . 7 8 9
Caps Space Backspace
Ok Reset
Fig.11-14
The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx. 3 minutes. 11
On this screen, the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to
be updated are displayed.
Fig.11-15

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 12
Notes:
• The display of items on this screen varies depending on the updating method.
Moreover, the display of items on this screen also varies depending on the type of data written in a
USB device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written in a USB device in the
following conditions.
Standard update
Item Condition
1. SYSTEM FIRMWARE (OS Data) <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD is mounted.>
T210SF0Wxxxx.tar is written.
<20ppm/25ppm: When HDD is mounted.>
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
* The version name comes at "xxxx".
2. ENGINE FIRMWARE T210MWW.xxx is written.
* The version name comes at "xxx".
3. SCANNER FIRMWARE T210SLGWW.xxx is written.
4. SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HD Data) <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD is mounted.>
T210HD0Wxxxx.tar is written.
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
5. RADF FIRMWARE H546DFWW.0xxx is written.
(When MR-3024 is connected)
6. PFC FIRMWARE T210FWW.xxx is written.
(When GH-1080 is connected)
7. PUNCH FIRMWARE PUN6008T.xxx is written.
(When MJ-6008 is connected.)
8. SADDLE FIRMWARE This item is unused.
9. FINISHER FIRMWARE FIN1036T.xxx is written. (When MJ-1036 is connected.)
FIN1037T.xxx is written. (When MJ-1037 is connected.)

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 13
Differential items update
Item Condition
1. SYSTEM FIRMWARE(OS Data) <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD is mounted.>
T210SFdWxxxx.tar is written.
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T210HDdWxxxx.tar is written.
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
Patch update
Item Condition
1. SYSTEM FIRMWARE(OS Data) <20ppm/25ppm: When only SSD is mounted.>
T210SFPWxxxx.tar is written.
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T210HDPWxxxx.tar is written. 11
T569HDPWxxxx.tar is written.
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T230HDPWxxxx.tar is written.
• If the USB device is not recognized properly, “USB device Not detected” is displayed. In this case,
disconnect the USB device and connect it again within 3 minutes, or shut down the equipment and
connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (4).
• If any of the error messages below is displayed, confirm if the data file in the USB device is correct.
Then repeat the procedure from (4).
Error
Error message Cause
number
01 Error Loadmodule Module loading failed.
02 Machine Model Get Error Module information downloading
failed.
03 Copy Data with valid signature in USB Data file check failed.
Storage
04 Other models ROMDATA TXXXXXXXX Master data of other model are
* The version name comes at stored.
“xxxx.xxx.x”.
05 Copy Signature File in USB Storage Data files are not stored in a USB
device.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 14
Error
Error message Cause
number
06 Patch and Normal package in one folder When both the system and patch
of USB Storage update packages are in the USB
device together.
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.

“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item.
Notes:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the updating method.
Item Remarks
1. SYSTEM FIRMWARE(OS Data) Updating System firmware
2. ENGINE FIRMWARE Updating Engine firmware
3. SCANNER FIRMWARE Updating Scanner firmware
4. SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HD Data) Updating System software
5. RADF FIRMWARE Updating RADF firmware
6. PFC FIRMWARE Updating PFC firmware
7. PUNCH FIRMWARE Updating Punch firmware
8. SADDLE FIRMWARE Updating Saddle firmware (Not used)
9. FINISHER FIRMWARE Updating Finisher firmware
(7) Press the [START] button.

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Notes:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the updating method.
Status display during the update Status display when the update is completed
SYSTEM FIRMWARE(OS Data) update in SYSTEM FIRMWARE(OS Data) Completed
progress
ENGINE FIRMWARE update in progress ENGINE FIRMWARE Completed
SCANNER FIRMWARE update in progress SCANNER FIRMWARE Completed
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HD Data) update in SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HD Data) Completed
progress
RADF FIRMWARE update in progress RADF FIRMWARE Completed
PFC FIRMWARE update in progress PFC FIRMWARE Completed
PUNCH FIRMWARE update in progress PUNCH FIRMWARE Completed
FINISHER FIRMWARE update in progress FINISHER FIRMWARE Completed

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 15
(8) When a standard update is completed properly, "Update successfully completed Restart the
MFP" is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
Notes:
When a patch update is completed, "Patch Update Successfully Restart the MFP" is displayed at
the bottom of the LCD screen.
Fig.11-16
11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 16
Notes:
• “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the update is not
completed properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Even
though an update fails, do not turn the power OFF until other updates are finished. If "Update
Failed" appears at the bottom of the screen, turn OFF the power and then check the following
items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
- Does the USB device meet the conditions to be used for updating?
- Is the data file written properly in the USB device?
- Is the USB device installed properly?
- Do the USB device and equipment operate properly?
• The integrity check system is automatically operated before firmware updating when the SSD
or HDD (GE-1220) is installed. During this operation, "Verifying Signature..." and "Progress:
**%" are displayed on the LCD screen. When the check is completed properly, no message
for notifying the success will appear and the firmware updating will start. If it fails, "Invalid
Signature" and "Copy Data with >valid signature in USB" will be shown. In that case, firmware
updating cannot be performed, so turn the power OFF and disconnect the USB device. Check
that there is no abnormality in the firmware data, and reperform the update.
• When a system firmware (OS Data) update error or system software (HD Data) update error
occurs, "Update Failed" or "Failed" appears on the screen and the error number appears next
to the message.
For details of each error, refer to the following tables.
System firmware update error

Error number Description
O01 FROM writing failed
O02 FROM verification error
O03 File operation error
O04 SRAM flag set error
O05 Electronic key data backup error
O06 Device error
System software update error

Error number Description
H01 File creation error
File decompression error (Out of free disk space on the HDD/SSD at file
H02
extraction)
H03 Partition mount error
H04 Hard disk full error
H00 Other errors

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 17
• When updating of engine firmware, scanner firmware, RADF firmware, punch firmware,
finisher firmware, PFC firmware or saddle stitcher firmware fails, "Update Failed" or "Failed"
appears on the screen, and the error number and error message appear next to the message.
For details of each error, refer to the following tables.
Engine firmware update error

Error number Error message Description
Time out Communication timeout
M01
(When the download is requested) (When a download is requested)
M02
(When the download is written) (When a download is written)
M03
(When the download is finished) (When a download is finished)
Reception failed Downloading request failed.
M04
Deletion error Deletion error
M05
Writing error Writing error
M06
Checksum error Checksum error
M07
Reception status code abnormality Reception status code abnormality
M08
M09
M10
M00 Other error Other error
Scanner firmware update error 11

S01
S02
S03
S05
S06
S08
S09
S10
S00 Other error Other error

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 18
RADF firmware update error
R01
R02
R03
R05
R06
R08
R09
R10
R21 RADF Uninstallation RADF not installed
RADF Firmware model mismatch RADF ROM for different model
R23
data connected
R00 Other error Other error
PFC firmware update error

F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F00 Other error Other error
Punch firmware update error

U01

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 19
Punch firmware update error
U02
U03
U04
U05
U06
(When the download is written) (Whena download is written)
U07
U08
U09
U10
(When the download is finished) (When adownload is finished)
U00 Other error Other error
Finisher firmware update error

F01
F02
F03
11
F04
F05
(When the download is written) (When adownload is written)
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F00 Other error Other error
(9) Press the [ON/OFF] button to shut down the equipment, and then remove the USB device.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.

• Press the [ON/OFF] button while holding down the [0] and [8] buttons simultaneously.
• Key in “9030”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press [INITIALIZE].
Notes:
This step is unnecessary for a patch update.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 20
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data were overwritten properly.
 P. 11-32 "11.5 Confirmation of the updated data"
[C] Adjustment
Perform the adjustment of the equipment.
• Performing Image Quality Control (05-2742):

• Adjustment of Color Registration Control (05-4719):
 P. 6-5 "6.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control"
• Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-7869) (using [4][FAX] test pattern):
• Automatic gamma adjustment < PRT > (05-8008) (using [70][FAX] test pattern):
• Automatic gamma adjustment <PRT> (05-8009) (using [230][FAX] test pattern):
[D] Display during the update

Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
[System firmware] [Engine firmware] [Scanner firmware] [System software] [RADF firmware] [Punch firmware] [PFC firmware]
1. SYSTEM 2. ENGINE 3.SCANNER 4. SYSTEM 5. RADF 7. PUNCH 6. PFC

FIRMWARE FIRMWARE FIRMWARE SOFTWARE FIRMWARE FIRMWARE FIRMWARE
(OS Data) (HD Data)
[Saddle firmware]
8. SADDLE
FIRMWARE
[Finisher firmware]
9. FINISHER
FIRMWARE
Update Completed

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 21
During the update, "Update in progress" is displayed on the right of each item. After it is completed,
"Completed" is displayed there. Example screens of the system firmware update are as follows, and
these are the same for other firmware.
As for a patch update, "Patch Update Successful Restart the MFP" is displayed instead of "Complete"
when the update is completed.
11
Fig.11-17

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 22
[E] Examples
Examples of update are as below. In this section, the procedure is explained by focusing on a
differential items update.
No.5
No.3
Patch L2.12
Differential Base version Differential Base version Differential

Differential
items L1.1 L2.0 items L2.1 L3.0 items L3.1
items L2.2
No.1 No.4
No.2
No. Operation Update procedure When update has failed

1 Updating from L2.0 to L2.1 Perform a differential items Perform a standard update
update from L2.0 to L2.1. to L2.0 which is the base
version of L2.1 before
carrying out a differential
items update to it.
2 Updating from L2.0 to L2.2 Perform a differential items Perform a standard update
update from L2.0 to L2.2. to L2.0 which is the base
(Updating to L2.1 is version of L2.2 before
unnecessary.) carrying out a differential
items update to it.
3 Updating from L2.1 to Perform a patch update Perform a patch update
L2.12 from L2.1 to L2.12. from L2.1 to L2.12.
4 Updating from L2.2 to L3.0 Perform a standard update Perform a standard update
from L2.2 to L3.0. to L3.0.
5 Updating from L2.1 to L3.1 Perform a standard update Perform a standard update
from L2.1 to L3.0 which is to L2.0 which is the base
the base version of L3.1 version of L2.1. Perform a
before carrying out a standard update to L3.0
differential items update to and then carry out a
it. differential items update to
L3.1.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 23
11.3 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
Update the ROM data written on system control PC board according to the need such as the case of
replacing the system control PC board.
Equipment
Firmware Stored
System firmware System control PC board
(SYS board)
PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F (48MB)
[1] [2]
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig.11-18
[1] Connector (for SYS board connection)

[2] Connector (for ROM writer adapter connection)
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data. 11
Remarks: Useable jigs
Download jigs for this equipment are as follows:
No Type of jig ROM capacity Remarks

1 PWA-DWNLD-JIG1F 16MB
2 PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F 48MB
3 PWA-DWNLD-JIG1 16MB Requires a relay board
4 PWA-DWNLD-JIG2 48MB Requires a relay board
*Jigs No. 3 and 4 above can be used if a relay board is installed together even though the shape
of their connectors differ.
* Relay board: PWA-DWNLD-RELAY-50F

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 24
11.3.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F) is that in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure
to write data, refer to the downloading procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or other
sources.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
Fig.11-19
[1] PC
[2] Download jig (PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F)
[3] ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350)
[4] ROM writer
Notes:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer ROM writer adapter

Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP/ PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)
1881UXP
(or equivalent)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/ PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931-LV640 (model 1931)
1931/1940
(or equivalent)
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881] [PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931-LV640]
Fig.11-20 Fig.11-21

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 25
[A] Precautions when writing the System firmware data
• Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
When an error appears while the data are being written to the download jig, set the writing voltage
(VID) to 12 V and then write them.
• When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if it
is not set.
• Load the data file into the buffer by means of the following settings.
Auto Format Detected Binary

From File Normal
To Buffer Normal
From File Address 0
To Buffer Address 0
Buffer Size 800100
Clear Buffer Before Loading the file Clear buffer with blank state
[A-1] System firmware
System firmware
Rotary Switch File Name Flash ROM
1 weiss_jig_1.bin ROM1
2 weiss_jig_2.bin ROM2
3 N/A ROM3
4 N/A ROM4
5 N/A ROM5
6 N/A ROM6
Notes:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 26
11.3.2 System firmware
The system firmware can be updated individually by using PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F.
Important:
• Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
• Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be able
to be operated properly.
[A] Update procedure

(1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F).

 P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear cover"

(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN104) on the SYS board.
(6) Turn the power ON by pressing the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [8]
and [9] keys.
(7) Press the [Firmware Update] button, then press the [1] key to select "1.SYSTEM
FIRMWARE(OS Data)".
(8) Confirm the item to be updated.

“=>” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “=>” by pressing the number of
the item.
(9) Press the [START] button. Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD
screen.
(10) “Update successfully completed.” is displayed on the LCD screen after the updating is completed
properly. Turn the power OFF by pressing the [ON/OFF] button.
Notes:
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not
completed properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. In this case,
shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart
updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(11) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch, remove the download jig, and then install the
SYS board cover and rear cover.
(12) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while holding down the [3] and [C] keys
simultaneously.
(13) Press the [5] key to select " 5. Key Backup Restore", then press the [START] button.
(14) Restore the key and license data by following the steps below.
• Restore the key data by pressing the [1] key to select "1. Key SRAM to FROM", then press
the [START] button.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 27
• If the state of "FROM Licence Status" is "KeyMismatch", restore the license data by pressing
the [3] key to select "3. License SRAM to FROM ", then press the [START] button.
• If ADI-HDD is installed, restore the encryption key data by pressing the [5] key to select "5.
ADIKey SRAM to FROM", then press the [START] button.
(16) Initialize the updated data by following the steps below.

• Turn the power ON by pressing the [ON/OFF] button while holding down the [0] and [8] keys
simultaneously.
• Key in “9030”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [INITIALIZE] button.

After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 28
11.4 Firmware Updating with K-PWA-DLM-320F
The firmware of the option (FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320F. Update
the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
Options
Model name Firmware Stored

FAX Unit FAX firmware FAX board
(GD-1320)
K-PWA-DLM-320F
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
Fig.11-22
[1] Connector
[2] Mark for ROM installation direction
[3] LED
[4] ROM
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
Remarks: Useable jigs
Download jigs for this equipment are as follows:
No Type of jig Remarks

1 K-PWA-DLM-320F
2 K-PWA-DLM-320 Requires a relay board
*Jig No. 2 above can be used if a relay board is installed together even though the shape of its
connector differs.
* Relay board: PWA-DWNLD-RELAY-34F

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 29
11.4.1 FAX unit firmware (GD-1320)
Important:
• Before updating the FAX firmware, make sure to print out the current Function list for
maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Address book list and Group number information. In
case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some reason,
re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
• Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the “MEMORY RX” LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
- Print the “Mailbox/Relay box report” and then confirm that there are no F code data.
[A] Update Procedure

(1) Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320F).
Make sure the direction is correct.
(3) Remove the cover plate [1].
11
[1]
Fig.11-23
(4) Connect the download jig [1] with the jig connector [2] on the FAX board.
[1] [2]
Fig.11-24

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 30
(5) Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(6) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 30 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then install the cover plate.
(8) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-9000: Destination setting of the equipment
08-9001: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (8), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-9000: Destination setting of the equipment
08-9001: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 31
11.5 Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
Firmware Code Remarks

Updating System firmware 08-9930 System firmware version
Updating Engine firmware 08-9901 Engine firmware version
Updating Scanner firmware 08-9902 Scanner firmware version
Updating System software 08-8952 HD data external version
08-9900 System software version
Updating PFC firmware 08-9940 PFC firmware version
Updating RADF firmware 08-9903 RADF firmware version
Updating Finisher firmware 08-9904 Finisher firmware version
08-9944 Punch firmware version
Updating FAX firmware 08-9905 FAX firmware version
11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 32
11.6 When Firmware Updating Fails
When the equipment was shut down during firmware updating or it could not be started after updating
for some reason, perform firmware updating again following the procedure below.
11.6.1 Procedure
(1) Update “System firmware“ of the system control PC board (SYS board) using the download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F).
Updating with the USB device becomes possible only after the “System firmware” has been
updated.
See the updating procedure below for details.
 P. 11-24 "11.3 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-JIG2F"
(2) Update “System firmware”, “Engine firmware”, “Scanner firmware”, “System software”, RADF
firmware”, “Punch firmware”, and “Finisher firmware” using the USB device.
See the updating procedure below for details.
Important:
If the equipment cannot be started even when the above update has been performed, check that
there is no damage to the “SYS board”, or “LGC board”. Replace them if necessary.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 33
11.6.2 Flow chart for correcting USB update failure
[A] When the update of the System firmware failed
USB update failed
Update USB.
NO
Failed twice or more? " 11.1 Firmware Updating with
USB media
YES
Update download jig.

" 11.3.2 System firmware "
NO
Update succeeded?
YES
Check system firmware version.

(08-9930) NO
Failed twice or more?
" 11.5 Confirmation of
the updated data " 11
YES
Replace SYS board.

NO
Is system firmware version
correct?
YES Update USB.

" 11.1 Firmware Updating with
USB media
Update completed

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 34
[B] When the update of system software failed
USB update failed
Update USB.
NO
USB media
YES
Check HDD harness connection.
Update USB.
NO
Update succeeded?
YES
Replace HDD.
Update USB.
Check system software version.
(08-9900)
" 11.5 Confirmation of

the updated data "
YES
Update succeeded?
NO
NO Is system software
version correct ?
Replace SYS board.
YES
Update USB.
" 11.1 Firmware Updating with
Update completed USB media

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 35
[C] When the update of Engine firmware / Scanner firmware / PFC firmware / RADF firmware
failed
USB update failed
USB update
NO
USB device
YES
Check harness connection.

SYS board <--> Target board
USB update
NO
Update succeeded?
YES
Replace target board.
11
Check ROM version

USB update
" 11.5 Confirmation of " 11.1 Firmware Updating with
the updated data " USB device
NO Is ROM version
correct ?
YES
Update completed

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 36
FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 37
11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 38
12. BACKUP FUNCTION
12.1 Data Cloning

Data cloning is a function that backs up user data, setting data and SRAM data into a USB media and
also restores these data into the equipment.
This function backs up or restores the data of the same equipment (same serial number), and is
performed in the following cases.
- When the SYS board and the SRAM board are mistakenly replaced at the same time
- When the SRAM board is replaced
Notes:
The SYS board and SRAM board should never be replaced together.
12.1.2 Precautions
• In 20ppm/25ppm, pay attention to the following items since data files for cloning differ depending on
whether an HDD is installed or not.
- A data file, backed up with equipment in which an HDD has been installed, cannot be restored in
one in which there is no HDD.
- A data file, backed up with equipment in which an HDD has not been installed, cannot be restored
in one which has an HDD.
• When the ADI-HDD (option) is initialized or replaced, back up the SRAM data afterwards.
• It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform restore. Registered / set data are
lost.
• The USB media for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation
with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB media with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port) and its
capacity is 1GB or more.
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers
Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass storage class)
12
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-only)
The USB media should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32. (Correct operation cannot be
guaranteed if it is formatted in NTFS/exFAT.)
- Most of the common USB medias are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore
applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be
used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and thus operations exclusively
with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore, the user must thoroughly check
in advance whether there will be any problem in operating with this equipment when adopting
one of these devices.
• The USB medias compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data cloning.
• Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable memory
card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use them for this
operation.
• Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do not use
the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
• Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different,
update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
• Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
• Delete the backed up data in the USB media after the data cloning.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 1
12.1.3 Backup files
The following files are saved in the root directory of the USB media by backing up.
Filename Remark
E.g.: When backup was performed at 13:59 on
October 1st, 2010.
<20ppm/25ppm : When only SSD is mounted.>
T210_CUK911379_2010-10-01_13-59
Modelname_MFPSerialNo_yyyy-MM-dd_hh-mm
<20ppm/25ppm : When HDD is mounted.>
T569_CUK911379_2010-10-01_13-59
<LL20ppm/LL25ppm>
T230_CUK911379_2010-10-01_13-59
12.1.4 Cloning procedure
[A] Backup procedure

(2) Connect the USB media [1] to the USB port [2] on the right upper cover.
[2]
[1]
Fig.12-1
Notes:
Backing up cannot be performed with multiple USB media [1] connected at the same time.
the [OK] button.
(8) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
(10) Select "1. Backup SRAM Data to USB", and then press the [START] button.
BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 2
(11) Enter a password (max. 15 characters) set for the backup data.
(12) "Backup Successfully done Restore the MFP" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup
has been properly completed.
12

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 3
[B] Restore procedure
(2) Connect the USB media [1] to the USB port [2] on the right upper cover.
[2]
[1]
Fig.12-2
Notes:
Backing up cannot be performed with multiple USB media [1] connected at the same time.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
(4) If "3" is set for 08-8911, enter the password.
(5) Select "2. Restore SRAM Data from USB", and then press the [START] button.
(6) Enter the password (max. 15 characters) which has been set in (6) of "[A] Backup procedure".
(7) Enter the serial number for the backup file.
(8) "Restore successfully done Restart the MFP" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restoring
has been properly completed.

Notes:
• When the back-up file is restored, do not perform HDD partition creation (Format HDD) before
• To perform cloning with the SRAM data backed up before the ADI-HDD is initialized or
replaced, follow the procedure below after the restoration is finished.
1. Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously.
2. Enter the password, and then press the [OK] button.
(If no password is set for Service, press the [OK] button without entering anything.)
3. Key in [5] to select "5. Key Backup Restore", and then press the [START] button.
4. Key in [6] to select "6. ADIKey FROM to SRAM", and then press the [START] button.
5. Wait until the restoring of the encryption key is completed. "Operation Complete" is
displayed.
6. Then turn the power OFF.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 4
[C] Confirmation of the error
"Backup Failed" or “Restore Failed” is displayed on the lower left part of the LCD screen when the data
have not been properly backed up or restored.
Moreover, details of an error are displayed under the above message.
(The following is an example screen when "USB device not detected" is displayed.)
SRAM Data Cloning Mode Firmware Version : x. x. x. x

Update Mode : 59 Mode
2: Restore SRAM Data from USB
Backup Failed
USB device not detected
Fig.12-3
In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following items. After confirming and solving the
problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
• Does the USB media meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
• Is the updated program file written on the USB media properly?
• Is the USB media installed properly?
• Is the USB media or the equipment damaged?
Backup
12
Display content Error content
USB device not detected The USB media has not been installed.
SRAM Device Not Connected The SRAM board (for the SYS board) has not been
installed.
Backup not created Creation of the Backup file of data of the SRAM board
(for the SYS board) has been failed.
Encryption Failed An encryption of the backup file has been failed.
password Not Appended to Backup Addition of the encryption password has been failed.
MFP Serial Number Not Set Acquisition of the MFP Serial No. has been failed.
Restore
USB device not detected The USB media has not been installed.
SRAM Device Not Connected The SRAM board (for the SYS board) has not been
installed.
Invalid Backup File The SYS board has not been recognized.
No Backup File Exists Backup file has not existed in the USB media.
Invalid password An incorrect password has been entered.
Decryption Failed Decoding of the backup file has been failed.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 5
Restore
Invalid MFP Serial Number: xxxxxxxxx An incorrect MFP Serial No. has been entered.
MFP Serial Number Not Set Acquisition of the MFP Serial No. has been failed.
Backup File Corrupted A backup file has been damaged.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 6
12.2 AES Data Encryption Function Setting

Data encryption is a function that encrypts data in the HDD or SSD to enhance the security.
Note that this function may affect the equipment performance.
12.2.2 Precautions
When the data encryption function is set enabled, data currently stored in the HDD or SSD will not be
retrieved. Therefore when data encryption function needs to be enabled after the installation of the
equipment, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD or SSD before setting this function and then
recover them after the setting.
• To ensure security, ask the user (machine administrator) to back up or restore the user’s data
and information in the HDD or SSD. A service technician can back up or restore them only
when the user (machine administrator) permits it.
• Some data in the HDD or SSD cannot be backed up and can be left only on printouts.
When the data encryption function is enabled, the following items are restricted.
• 08-9112 (Auto Shut Off Mode timer setting (Sleep Mode)) is automatically set to “20: Not
used”.
• 08-9113 (Screen setting for automatic energy saver/automatic power OFF) is automatically
set to “0: OFF”.
• When the [ENERGY SAVER] button is pressed on the control panel, the equipment does not
enter the sleep mode.
• Since the energy saver mode cannot be set using the control panel, set it in TopAccess.
However, the setting of “Sleep/Auto Shut Off” cannot be changed in TopAccess and “Disable”
is displayed.
12

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 7
12.2.3 Setting procedure
A procedure for setting the data encryption function is shown below.
Start
[A] Back up data in HDD or SSD
[B] Print out "FUNCTION FOR MAINTENANCE"
[C] Print out "FUNCTION" list
[D] Erase HDD or SSD
[E] Reset user's setting item and restore data/information
[F] Reset "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"
[G] Reset "FUNCTION" list
[H] Check actuation of data encryption function setting
Setting completed
Fig.12-4

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 8
[A] Back up in HDD or SSD
Ask the user (machine administrator) to back up the data in the HDD or SSD. Refer to the table below
for the type of data, availability and method of backup.
Type of data in HDD or SSD Availability Backup method

Archive them in the “e-Filing” of
TopAccess. As for the backup
SSD: Not available in Box data, all data (selectable
Image data in the e-Filing
HDD: Available by the box) can be backed up /
restored in one go by using “e-
Filing Backup/Restore Utility”.
F-code information, Template Export them up in the
registration information, Address Available “Administrator” menu of
book data TopAccess.
Export them in “Administrator”
Department management data Available
menu of TopAccess.
Log data (Print, Scan, FAX Export them in the “Log” menu
(Transmission/Reception) / Available of TopAccess. (Import cannot
Message Log be performed.)
Copy them to the client
Data in the shared folder computer via the network. (The
SSD: Not available
(Scanned data, Saved data of data which have been copied to
HDD: Available
copy / FAX transmission) the client computer cannot be
copied to the shared folder.)
Export role information on the
TopAccess menus.
Role information Available
[User Management] tab >
[Export]
Print waiting data (Copying data Finish printing them after the
and FAX reception data that are paper supply and the jam
Not available
waiting to be printed due to the release, etc. (The data cannot
paper run-out and jam, etc.) be kept.)
Print job (Private print data,

If any jobs are left, print them. 12
Not available (The data cannot be backed
Schedule print data)
up.)
FAX saved data (Confidential / Print them. (The data cannot be
Not available
Bulletin board data) backed up.)
Registration data for FAX
transmission (Delayed Print them. (The data cannot be
Not available
transmission / Recovery backed up.)
transmission)
[B] Print out “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”

(1) Enter the Service UI Mode.  P. 5-5 "5.2 Service UI"
(2) Select "FAX LIST PRINT MODE" and then press [NEXT].
(3) Select "Function list for Maintenance" and then press [PRINT].

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 9
[C] Print out “FUNCTION” list
(3) Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
(4) Press the [FUNCTION] button. The “FUNCTION” list is printed out.
Notes:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password.
[D] Enable data encryption function

Perform the setting of the data encryption function in the code 08-9379. The setting values are shown
below.
0: Encryption disabled
1: Encryption enabled (Security priority)
2: Encryption enabled (Performance priority)
Security priority: All user data are encrypted.
Performance priority: Encryption data are generated only in a copying or a printing process temporarily.
All user data except files which are deleted in a corresponding process are encrypted.
[E] Reset user’s setting items and restore data/information

Ask the user (machine administrator) to reset the user’s setting items and to restore data or information.
Refer to the following for the reset and restore:
Items to reset/restore Method

Printer driver Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
F-code information, Template Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
registering information, Address
book data
Department management data Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Image data in the e-Filing Restore them in the “e-Filing” of the TopAccess.
Role information Import role information on the TopAccess menus.
[User Management] tab > [User Confirm/Create/Modify] >
[Role Information]
Notes:
• When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with “Create self-
certificate” of TopAccess.
- Country Name
- State or Province Name
- Locality Name
- Organization Name
- Organizational Unit Name
- Common Name
- Email Address
• When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security
with a certificate is used) Also, upload the following certificate file with ”Install Certificate for
Wireless LAN” of TopAccess.
- CA certificate
- User certificate

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 10
[F] Reset “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”
(1) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting.
(2) While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting
Turn the power OFF.
[G] Reset “FUNCTION” list

Reset the fax function by referring to the “function list” that was printed out in  P. 12-10 "[C] Print out
“FUNCTION” list".
(3) Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
(4) Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.

Notes:
Explain to the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter
his/her password.
[H] Check actuation of data encryption function setting

Check if the data encryption function is in operation.
Press the [COUNTER] button on the control panel. If a key-shaped icon is displayed at the top right of
the screen, the data encryption function is in operation.
12
Fig.12-5

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 11
12.2.4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function
The basic procedure is the same as the one for enabling this function. To disable it, set “0 (Invalid)” in
the code 08-9379 at step  P. 12-10 "[D] Enable data encryption function".
12.2.5 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is

enabled
Set the data encryption function disabled following the procedure shown in  P. 12-12 "12.2.4
Procedure for disabling data encryption function". Then perform the code 3C->6 : Erase HDD Securely
(HDD securely erasing) to completely erase the data in the HDD.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 12
12.3 High Security Mode

The High Security Mode is a security mode complying with the IEEE2600.1 Security Standards
Requirement. To have the equipment enter this mode, follow the procedure and the precautions below.
12.3.2 Prior confirmation

• Confirm that the administrator for the equipment is authorized and ask him/her to observe the
installation.
• To have the equipment enter the High Security Mode, make sure that the HDD (opiton) is mounted.
• To have the equipment enter the High Security Mode, the Data Overwrite Enabler GP-1070
(optional) is required. Confirm that this option is installed in advance. Follow the Unpacking
Instructions to install it.
• To avoid physical security problems, such as hardware removal or inappropriate disassembly at the
installation site, take all necessary measures, such as checking who enters and leaves the site.
• Confirm that no received fax data or print jobs in progress exist. If there are any, be sure to print
them all out before entering the High Security Mode.
• The HDD is initialized in the High Security Mode. Be sure first to back up user data such as
documents, Address Book, templates or fax settings using the export function or the backup/restore
utility of the TopAccess. Refer to items noted in  P. 12-7 "12.2 AES Data Encryption Function
Setting".
• Make a note of the settings on the Administration tab page of the TopAccess in advance.
• Compatibility of cloning data is lost between the High Security Mode and the normal mode;
therefore, cloning data cannot be imported.
Compatibility 12
Downloaded from Downloaded to
of cloning data
Normal mode Normal mode Yes
Normal mode High Security Mode No
High Security Mode Normal mode No
High Security Mode High Security Mode Yes
12.3.3 Procedure for entering the High Security Mode

(1) Set the value of the code 08-8911 (Security mode level setting) to “3” (High). Then restart the
equipment.
(2) A key-shaped icon appears at the bottom of the touch panel, indicating that it is now in the High
Security Mode.
(3) Press [COUNTER] button on the control panel. If a key-shaped icon, indicating that the HDD
data are being encrypted, a paper-shaped icon indicating that the Data Overwrite Enabler is
operating normally and the version name of the installed system ROM (SYS V4.0) are displayed
on the top right of the counter menu, this means the mode is operating normally.
(4) Reset the user data backed up in advance.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 13
12.3.4 Precautions
• In the High Security Mode, an integrity check system is operated at every restart. If F521 (integrity
check error) is displayed, take the necessary measures following the troubleshooting procedure.
• When a self-diagnostic mode is started in the High Security Mode, an authentication screen
appears. Enter the default user name and password as follows:
Default user name: service
Default password: #1048#
• If a password change screen appears, reset the password according to the rules below.
- It must not include the user name.
- It must be a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers.
- It must be 6 characters or more. (Maximum 64 characters)
- The same character must not be repeated 4 times within the new password.
- The old and the new passwords must not be the same.
• In the High Security Mode, restrictions are set to the following self-diagnostic codes:
Code Contents
08-8910 The setting value is changed to “2”. “0” is not settable.
08-8911 The setting value is changed to “3”.
08-8924 The setting value is changed to “1”. Values other than “1” are not settable.
08-9110 “0” is not settable.
If “0” is set for the value, the setting will not comply with IEEE2600.1 Security Standards
08-9193
Requirement.
08-9379 The setting value is changed to “1”.
The setting value is changed to “1”. If “0” is set for the value, the setting will not comply
08-9819
with IEEE2600.1 Security Standards Requirement.
• In the above case, the password is not reset. The password setting can be changed with the code
08-8919.
• The HDD is initialized (and the saved user data are deleted) when the equipment returns to the
normal mode from the High Security Mode. Be sure to back up user data before having it do so.
• After the equipment enters the High Security Mode, ask the administrator for the equipment to select
[FULL] and perform the Integrity check manually.

BACKUP FUNCTION
12 - 14
13. EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13.1 Outline
This specification describes the interface between external counters, such as Coin Controller and Key
Counter.
13.2 Signal
Notes:
• Use 24V supplied from the main equipment as power for the output signals (KCTRON) from the
transistor.
• Do not connect inductive loads to CTRON, such as a mechanical counter or a relay coil.
13.2.1 Pin Layout

1. Connector on the LGC board: CN358 (JST-made B20B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V)) (Card Controller /
Coin Controller)
Pin Signal GQ-

I/O Function Voltage level Remarks
No. name 1260
1 GND SG Signal Ground 0V -
2 In CTRCNT Copy permission L=0V, H=DC3.3V -
Signal 1
3 Power +24V 24V line DC24V+10%, -5% -
4 Out KCTRON Mechanical Open Collector L: ON -
Counter On Signal
5 Power +24V 24V line DC24V+10%, -5% -
6 Out CTRON Total Counter On Open Collector L: ON In use
Signal
7 In CTRCNT Copy permission L=0V, H=DC3.3V L: Allowed In use
Signal 1
8 Out MCRUN Ready to Copy Open Collector L: Operating In use
Signal
9 Out EXTCTR Exit Sensor On Open Collector L: Operating In use
13
Signal
10 GND PG Power ground 0V In use
11 Out BKCTR Black mode Open Collector L: Operating -
Counter Signal
12 Out MNCTR Mono color mode Open Collector L: Operating -
Counter Signal
13 Out FLCTR Full color mode Open Collector L: Operating -
Counter On Signal
14 GND SG Signal Ground 0V -
15 Out SIZE3 Paper size Signal Open Collector L: Operating -
3
2
1
0
19 Power +5V 5V line DC5.1V At the sleep mode: In use
(Sleep) OFF
EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13 - 1
Pin Signal GQ-
No. name 1260
20 - N.C. - - -
2. Connector on the SYS board: CN127 (JST-made B7B-PH-SM4) (Coin Controller)
Pin Signal GQ-

No. name 1260
1 Out LARGE / Paper size Signal Open Collector L: Large size In use
SMALL
2 Out FULL Full color mode Open Collector L: Full color In use
COLOR Signal
3 Out TWN/ Twin color / Mono Open Collector L: Twin colors In use
MON color
COLOR Mode Signal
4 Out B/W Black mode Open Collector L: Black In use
Signal
5 Power N.C. 5V line DC5.0V At the sleep mode:ON -
(5VA)
6 GND GND Signal Ground - In use
7 - N.C. - - -

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13 - 2
13.2.2 Details of the signals
1. CTRON signal (output signals)
These signals are synchronized with electronic counter of the equipment and they become “Low”
when one sheet of paper is counted up. They are the signals for coin controller, and output from the
LGC board.
<CTRON KCTRON>
Single count OFF
ON
Fixed time
Fig.13-1
2. CTRCNT signal (input signals)

The CTRCNT signal enables to accept copies when the coin controller is connected, and copies can
be accepted with “Low”. In case of “High”, “Set Key Counter” appears and copies cannot be made.
3. MCRUN signal (output signal)

The MCRUN signal is changed to “Low” during copying. It becomes “Low” at 30 ms or more before
the CTRON signal is turned ON, and “High” at 50 ms or more after the EXTCTR signal goes OFF.
However, if copying is interrupted due to forced toner supply or similar, this signal is “High” until
copying is made possible again. This is the signal for the coin controller.
<MCRUN>
OFF
ON
Fixed time
<CTRON>
OFF
ON Fixed time
<EXTCTR>
OFF
ON
Fig.13-2 13
4. EXTCTR signal (output signal)

The EXTCTR signal is synchronized with “Exit sensor ON” and becomes “Low” (ON) for 200 ms.
The coin controller counts the number of times with this signal.
This is the signal only for the coin controller.
<PIS-EXIT: Paper exit sensor>

With paper
Without paper
(Paper length / Feeding speed)
<EXTCTR>
OFF
ON
Fixed time
Fig.13-3

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13 - 3
5. BKCTR signal, MNCTR signal, FLCTR signal (output signals)
These signals become “Low” (ON) synchronizing with the CTRON signal according to the copying
mode used. The pulse width corresponds to the fixed time. Though the CTRON signal is set to
“Double count”, they are not outputted synchronizing with the second count signal.
6. SIZE3, SIZE2, SIZE1 and SIZE0 signals (output signals)

These 4 signals are outputted in the combination of 4 sizes for the paper to be copied.
They are the signals for the coin controller, and are outputted from the LGC board.
7. LARGE/SMALL signal (output signal)

When large size paper (A3 / A3 wide / LD) is selected or paper size is not specified with the manual
feeding, it outputs “Low” in real time. In other cases, it outputs “High”. The setting change for large
size paper is performed with F/W.
8. FULL COLOR signal (output signal)

If the full color mode is selected, it outputs “Low” in real time. In other cases, it outputs “High”. By
default, it outputs “Low” since it is set as full color mode.
9. TWN / MON COLOR signal (output signal)

If the twin color or mono color mode is selected, it outputs “Low” in real time. In other cases, it
outputs “High”. This is the signal only for the coin controller.
10.B/W signal (output signal)

If the black mode is selected, it outputs “Low” in real time. In other cases, it outputs “High”. This is
the signal only for the coin controller.
11. KCTRON signal (output signal)

These signals are synchronized with the electronic counter of the equipment and they become
"Low" when the counter is turned ON. They are the signals for driving a mechanical counter, and
output from the LGC board.
They can drive inductive loads, such as a solenoid, using 24V supplied from the equipment. The
interval between when they are turned ON and when this happens next must be at least 100 ms.
"Single count" or "Double count" can be switched according to the paper size by setting "1" or "2" for
08-6010.

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13 - 4
13.3 Notices
13.3.1 Setting code

Each signal will be enabled by configuring the setting code “08-9016” (Counter installed externally).
08-9016
0: No external counter (Default)
1: Coin controller
2: Card controller (For Japan only)
3: Mechanical counter
5: Coin controller supporting ACS
13.3.2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the Card
Controller
1. Setting value
- 08-9016 (Counter installed externally): Set to “2” (Card controller).
- 08-9017 (Setting for counter installed externally): It should be charged precisely according to the
usage.
Example: To charge only when copies are made, set to “1”.
- 08-6011 (Definition setting of large sized paper): Set to "0" if only A3 and LD are regarded as
large size. Set to "1" if B4, LG, FOLIO and COMP are done so as well.
13.3.3 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin
controller
1. Setting value
- 08-9016 (Counter installed externally): Set to “1” (Coin controller). The coin controller supporting
ACS (Auto Color Selection) can be connected by setting to "5" (Coin controller supporting ACS/
mixed-size). However, operation is not guaranteed unless the specification for the ACS timing is
met.
usage.
Example: To charge only when copies are made, set to “1”.
large size. Set to "1" if B4, LG, FOLIO and COMP are done so as well. 13
13.3.4 Installation of External Counter

It is not allowed to install more than one external counter (Card Controller and Coin Controller) at the
same time.
13.3.5 Setting value

The Key Counter used for current models is not supported in this equipment, but the circuit for driving
the counter has been mounted. The mechanical counter can be used by setting as below, however the
harness for connecting it has not been provided as an option.
1. Setting value
- 08-9016 (Counter installed externally): Set to "3" (Mechanical counter).
usage.
Example: To charge only when copies are made, set to "1".
large size. Set to "1" if B4, LG, FOLIO and COMP are done so as well.

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13 - 5
13.3.6 Restrictions when using the external counter
The Job Skip function will be disabled when an external counter is installed (when a value other than
"0" is set for 08-9016).
Therefore, if printing is attempted while a counter or a coin controller is used, all jobs stored in the HDD
may be printed.

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
13 - 6
[4]
[3]
J628
1 1
[1]
[2]
Neutral
[5]
A
GND
B 2 2
Live
C
[6]
1 2 3 4
FG 3 3
Black
White
Black
Black
White
White
14.1 AC Wire Harness
CN501 1 1 CN502 1 2 3 4 CN503 J009

J905 AC(N: SCN) White
White 1 1
1 1 AC(L: SCN) Black
Black
[7]
2 2 2 2
F1

CN505 J906
White
2 2 2
[8]
14 - 1
Black
1 1 1
Fig.14-1
J904
White AC(N: DRM-R) White
1 1
14. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION
Black AC(L: DRM-R) Black

2 2
[10]
[16]
[17]
[9]
J901
White
1 1
Black
2 2
[12]
[11]
[13]
J903 J947
White AC(N: CST) White
1 1 1 1
PS-ACC Black AC(L: CST) Black
2 2 2 2
[14]
CN504 1 2 1 CN506
J948
1 1
2 2
[15]
Black AC-L(LAMP)
White AC-N(S-LAMP)
White AC-N(C-LAMP)
e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION
14
[1] Inlet (AC IN) [10] Drum damp heater (Right)
[2] Main power switch [11] Thermostat (Left)
[3] Center thermostat [12] Drum damp heater (Left)
[4] Side thermostat [13] Drawer damp heater
[5] Center heater lamp [14] Drawer damp heater (PFU)
[6] Side heater lamp [15] Drawer damp heater (PFP/LCF)
[7] Scanner damp heater [16] Relay 1
[8] Drum damp heater [17] Relay 2
[9] Thermostat (Right)

WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION
14 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PWA-F-SYS (SYS) PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
HRNS-SCN-ADF-210L
CN102 CN102 CN128 HRNS-LGC-ATEPU-210 HRNS-ATTNR-210
CN115 J008 CN123 CN336
DFAK
A 1 1 HRNS-TRU-210 HRNS-CFD-TRU-210 CN313
A
VREFDQ 1 103 /CK0 +3.3V 1 DFSCST SYSRST0 1 1 SYSRST0 CN339 J601
VSS 2 104 /CK1 TXD 2 10 2 SG 2 2 SG 1 1 +3.3V 1 YATCNT 6 J701
DFRXD J746 CN405 1
VSS 3 105 VDD RXD 3 Serial Port (Debug) 2 3 YDATA0 3 3 YDATA0 J645 2 2 CS 2 YATSVR-1J 5 4 ATTNR-SNR-Y
SG SG SG 2
11 4 CLNG-SNR 3 1 3 1 3 +24V 3
DQ4 4 106 VDD SG 4 DFTXD YDATA2 4 4 YDATA2 TBUJAM-1 TBUJAM-1 3 3 D0 4 3 (S4)
3 5 (S18) 2 2 2 2 4 YATSN-1T 2
DQ0 5 107 A10, AP SG SG 5 5 SG +5V +5V 4 4 WPN 3 4
12 6 1 3 1 3 5 PG 1
DQ5 6 108 BA1 DFRAK YDATA4 6 6 YDATA4 5 5 DI 2 5
DQ1 7 109 BA2 CN109 4 7 YDATA6 7 7 YDATA6 6 6 CLK 6 SG 1 6
DFRRQ
VSS 8 110 /RAS VBUS 1 13 8 SG 8 8 SG 7 7 HOLDN J602
DFRQ MATCNT
VSS 9 111 VDD D- 2 USB connector 5 9 MDATA0 9 9 MDATA0 HRNS-CFD-SNR-210 8 8 LED 7 6 1 J701
DFCNT MATSVR-1J
/DQS0 10 112 VDD D+ 3 14 10 MDATA2 10 10 MDATA2 9 9 ROMCNT 8 5 2 4 ATTNR-SNR-M
(Device) SG J790 CN404 +24V
DM0 11 113 /WE SG 4 6 11 SG 11 11 SG 10 10 SG 9 4 3 3 (S3)
SG MATSN-1T
Download jig (MAIN)

+5V 2
DQS0 12 114 /S0 7 12 MDATA4 12 12 MDATA4 TRANS-SNR 3 11 11 NC 10 3 4
+24VGND FDS1-0 1 PG
VSS 13 115 /CAS CN106 16 13 MDATA6 13 13 MDATA6 (S20) 2 2 11 2 5 1
+24VGND +3.3V HRNS-LGC-DEV-210 SG
VSS 14 116 ODT0 NC 1 8 14 SG 14 14 SG 1 3 12 1 6
D- 2 USB connector +24V J791
DQ2 15 117 VDD 17 15 FSYNCY0 15 15 FSYNCY0 CN303 J707
+24V SG FDMBRK-0 CN311
DQ6 16 118 VDD D+ 3 (FAX) 9 16 SG 16 16 SG RGST-SNR 3 4 1 10 FEED/DEV-MOT J604
NC RGSTSNS-1 +24V CN340 1 KATCNT 6
DQ3 17 119 A13 SG 4 15 WCLK1 17 17 WCLK1 (S19) 2 5 1 J701
14.2.1 DC Wire Harness
+3.3V 2 9 (M2)
DQ7 18 120 ODT1 18 FG SG 18 18 SG 1 6 +24V J-TAG 1 1 +3.3V 2 KATSVR-1J 5 2 4 ATTNR-SNR-K
3 8
CN114 PG 2 2 TRST 3 +24V 4 3 3 (S1)
VSS 19 121 /S1 SCNENB 19 19 NC 4 7
VBUS 1 PG 3 3 TD0 4 KATSN-1T 3 4 2
VSS 20 122 NC FSYNCC0 20 20 FSYNCC0 5 6
D- 2 USB connector FDMGA-0 M 4 4 SG 5 PG 2 5 1
DQ8 21 123 VDD SG 21 21 SG 6 5
D+ 3 (Inner) FDMPLL-0 5 5 TDI 6 SG 1 6
DQ12 22 124 VDD CDATA0 22 22 CDATA0 7 4
SG 4 HRNS-SFB-210 FDMDIR-0C 6 6 TMS J603
DQ9 23 125 TEST HRNS-SCN-MOT-210 CDATA2 23 23 CDATA2 8 3 CATCNT
FDMCK-0 7 7 SG 7 6 1 J701
DQ13 24 126 VREFCA CN110 SG 24 24 SG 9 2 CATSVR-1J
J007 CN125 J734 CN403 FDMON-0 8 8 TCK 8 5 2 4 ATTNR-SNR-C
VSS 25 127 VSS VBUS 1 +A CDATA4 25 25 CDATA4 +24V 10 1 +24V
SCAN-MOT 1 1 SFB-FEED-CLT 3 1 NC 9 9 SRST 9 4 3 3 (S2)
VSS 26 128 VSS D- 2 USB connector (M1) NC CDATA6 26 26 CDATA6 SFBCLT-0C 11 CATSN-1T
2 (CLT4) 1 2 NC 10 10 SG 10 3 4 2
/DQS1 27 129 DQ32 D+ 3 -A SG 27 27 SG 12 PG
(Side) 3 2 J732 11 2 5 1
DM1 28 130 DQ36 SG 4 -B KDATA0 28 28 KDATA0 SG SG
M 6 3 SFB-SNR 3 3 CN305 12 1 6
DQS1 29 131 DQ33 NC KDATA2 29 29 KDATA2 SFBPE J661 NC
5 (S16) 2 4 SG 13
/RESET 30 132 DQ37 +B SG 30 30 SG +3.3V 1 3 DRM-SW-SNR
4 4 1 5 DEVPOS-0
VSS 31 133 VSS KDATA4 31 31 KDATA4 2 2 (S11) CN310 J611
+3.3V
VSS 32 134 VSS HRNS-SCN-SNSR-210 (A4 series) KDATA6 32 32 KDATA6 HRNS-SFB-SIZE-210 3 1 1 SG 2 Y-DRUM-SW
DQ10 33 135 /DQS4 HRNS-SCN-SNSR-A-210 SG 33 33 SG J783 YDRMNEW
+24V 2 1 (SW9)
DQ14 34 136 DM4 CBSY0 34 34 CBSY0 4 2 1
B CN410 J735 RGSTCLT-0
RGST-CLT J613
B
DQ11 35 137 DQS4 J005 CN121 SACK0 35 35 SACK0 SG 5 1 2 (CLT1) SG
+5V 1 5 5 6 HRNS-LGC-YLEDP-210 3 2 M-DRUM-SW
DQ15 36 138 VSS APS1-SNR 1 1 SBSY0 36 36 SBSY0 PWA-F-SFB SFBSIZE0 MDRMNEW
APSR 2 4 4 7 J748 4 1 (SW10)
(S24) 2 2 SFBSIZE1 +24V LP-LED-Y
VSS 37 139 VSS SG CACK0 37 37 CACK0 (SFB) 3 3 3 8 6 3 1 FEED-CLT CN328 J615
3 3 SFBSIZE2 NC NC SG
VSS 38 140 DQ38 SG 38 38 SG 4 2 2 9 2 2 (CLT2) (LED1) CN596 1 5 2 C-DRUM-SW
J006 SFBSIZE3 FDCLT1-0C VDD (5V) CDRMNEW
DQ16 39 141 DQ34 A4 +5V PWREN 39 39 PWREN 5 1 1 10 7 1 3 7 2 6 1 (SW11)
APS2-SNR 1 4 VDD (5V)
DQ20 40 142 DQ39 series APSC NC 40 40 NC J705 6 3 J617
(S25) 2 5 DVCNMTB-0C VDD (5V) SG
DQ17 41 143 DQ35 SG SYSLIFE 41 41 SYSLIFE 8 2 1 DRM-SW-MOT 5 4 7 2 K-DRUM-SW
only 3 6 DVCNMTA-0C Logic-G KDRMNEW
PWA-F- CFD (CFD)

DQ21 42 144 VSS SG 42 42 SG 9 1 2 (M3) M 4 5 8 1 (SW12)
VSS 43 145 VSS J002 YDATA1 43 43 YDATA1 LED-G
SG 3 6 J618
HOME-SNR 3 7 YDATA3 LED-G SG
VSS 44 146 DQ44 44 44 YDATA3 2 7 9 2 K-DEV-SW
(S23) HOME LED-G KDEVNEW
/DQS2 45 147 DQ40 2 8 SG 45 45 SG HRNS-CFD-PCST-210 1 8 10 1 (SW16)
+3.3V
DM2 46 148 DQ45 1 9 YDATA5 46 46 YDATA5 HRNS-BRIDGE-MAIN-210 Option J616
DQS2 47 149 DQ41 J004 YDATA7 47 47 YDATA7 J854 CN402 HRNS-LGC-JSP-210 HRNS-LGC-HEADY-210 11 SG 2 C-DEV-SW
PLTN2-SNR SG CDEVNEW
VSS 48 150 VSS 3 10 SG 48 48 SG CST-SIZE2-SW 5 CST1SZL3-0 1
Q1 J802 12 1 (SW15)
(S22) PLTNON CN303 J691 CN327
VSS 49 151 VSS 2 11 MDATA1 49 49 MDATA1 (SW7) 4 CST1SZL2-0 2 1 EXT-SNR CN592 J614
+3.3V SG BRDEXIT-1 BRDEXIT-1 HSRDY
DQ22 50 152 /DQS5 1 12 MDATA3 50 50 MDATA3 3 3 1 +5V 15 1 2 20 1 13 SG 2 M-DEV-SW
CST1SZL1-0 +5V HSCKY
DQ18 51 153 DM5 J003 SG 51 51 SG 2 4 2 14 2 3 19 2 14 MDEVNEW 1 (SW14)
PLTN1-SNR SG CST1SZL0-0 HSTBY
DQ23 52 154 DQS5 3 13 MDATA5 52 52 MDATA5 1 5 J803 18 3 J612
(S21) PLTNSL HDDTY00 SG
DQ19 53 155 VSS 2 14 MDATA7 53 53 MDATA7 J853 1 FULL-SNR 17 4 15 2 Y-DEV-SW
+3.3V CST1SZW3-0 INOPTFUL-1 INOPTFUL-1 HDDTY01 YDEVNEW
VSS 54 156 VSS 1 15 SG 54 54 SG CST-SIZE1-SW 5 6 HRNS-LGC-ADUCFD-210 3 13 3 2 16 5 16 1 (SW13)
NC CST1SZW2-0 SG SG HDDTY02
DDR3 SO-DIMM
VSS 55 157 DQ42 16 FSYNCM0 55 55 FSYNCM0 (SW6) 4 7 4 12 4 3 15 6
SG INOPTSEL-1 INOPTSEL-1 HDDTY03
DQ28 56 158 DQ46 CN105 SG 56 56 SG 3 8 CN400 CN334 5 11 5 14 7 HRNS-LGC-DLED-210
HRNS-SCN-SYS-210 CST1SZW1-0 +24V INOPTSEL-2 INOPTSEL-2 HDDTY04
DQ24 57 159 DQ43 1 +5VS LSYNC0 57 57 LSYNC0 2 9 1 12 6 10 6 J805 13 8
CN118 1 CST1SZW0-0 INOPTSEL-3 NC HDDTY05
DQ29 58 160 DQ47 SG 58 58 SG 1 10 SFBCLT-0C 7 9 7 1 OPEN-SW 12 9 CN317
2 SG 2 CN001 CN122 2 11 INOPTCOV-1 J606
1 1 WAKE # SG 8 8 8 INOPTCOV-1 HDDTY06 +24V
DQ25 59 161 VSS 3 +12VA 3 10V LSTB0J 59 59 LSTB0J 3 10 2 11 10 1 2 1 LP-ERS-Y
2 2 +3.3V 1 1 SG HDDTY07 DLEY-0C
VSS 60 162 VSS 4 +12VA 4 SG FSYNCK0 60 60 FSYNCK0 4 9 3 10 11 2 1 2 (ERS-Y)
3 3 COEX1 2 2 HRNS-PFP-FED-210 +3.3V HSYNCY
VSS 61 163 DQ48 5 SG 5 5V SG 61 61 SG 5 8 J801 9 12 J607
4 4 SG 3 3 +5VL HOLDY +24V
/DQS3 62 164 DQ52 6 SG 6 5V CDATA1 62 62 CDATA1 J746 J771 CN401 6 7 1 FEED-SNR 8 13 3 2 1 LP-ERS-M
5 5 COEX2 4 4 TBUJAM-1 INOPTFED-1 INOPTFED-1 VSS DLEM-0C
DM3 63 165 DQ49 7 +5VA SG CDATA3 63 63 CDATA3 SG SG 7 6 9 7 9 2 7 14 4 1 2 (ERS-M)
6 6 +1.5V 7 5 5 CST1-EMP-SNR 3 3 3 1 HDCLKYN
DQS3 64 166 DQ53 SG CK1- SG 64 64 SG CST1PE CST1PE FDS1-0 3 6 15 J609
8 8 6 6 (S5) 2 2 2 2 8 5
7 7 CLKREQ # +3.3VA CDATA5 +3.3V +3.3V RGSTSNS-1 INOPTSNS NC HDCLKYP +24V
VSS 65 167 VSS 9 9 CK1+ 65 65 CDATA5 1 1 1 3 9 4 10 6 10 J804 5 16 5 2 1 LP-ERS-K
8 8 UIM PWR SG 7 7 HISSOSFTA INOPTSOL-0A INOPTSOL-0A VSS DLEK-0C
VSS 66 168 VSS 10 10 SG CDATA7 66 66 CDATA7 J776 10 3 11 5 11 1 4 17 6 1 2 (ERS-K)
9 9 SG 8 8 HSSIODIA GATE-SOL VSS
FAX Power
DQ26 67 169 /DQS6 /FX-INT CK2+ SG 67 67 SG SG +24V +24V 3 18 J608
11 11 9 9 CST1-SW 2 4 11 2 12 4 12 2
10 10 UIM DATA SG KDATA1 HSSIOCK PG NC VSS +24
DQ30 68 170 DM6 68 68 KDATA1 2 19
C 11 11 REFCLK- 12 12 10
CK2-
10 (SW8) 1 5 12 1 13 3 13
VDD3
7 2 1 LP-ERS-C
C
DQ27 69 171 DQS6 FX-WKUP KDATA3 69 69 KDATA3 NC NC 1 20 DLEC-0C
13 13 SG 14 2 14 8 1 2 (ERS-C)
12 12 UIM CLK SG 11 11 NC NC
DQ31 70 172 VSS 14 14 CK2B- SG 70 70 SG 1 15 J605
13 13 REFCLK+ /FX-RST 12 12 CST1SW-0 DRMTHS-1
VSS 71 173 VSS 15 15 CK2B+ KDATA5 71 71 KDATA5 20ppm/25ppm 9 4 1 THMS-DRM
14 14 UIM RESET SG 13 13 HRNS-ADU-MOT-210 HRNS-ADU-210 SG
VSS 72 174 DQ54 16 16 SG KDATA7 72 72 KDATA7 Q2 10 3 2 (THM4)
15 15 SG 14 14 HRNS-LGC-MLEDP-210 NC
CKE0 73 175 DQ50 RS+ SG 73 73 SG CN420 J640 HRNS-LGC-FSRMOT-210
16 16 UIM VPP 15 15 J723 CN422 CN335 NC 2
CKE1 74 176 DQ55 RS- CMD0 74 74 CMD0 ADUMA CNTOUT-0 CNTOUT-0 LP-LED-M CN326 1
17 17 RESERVED 16 16 ADU-MOT 1 1 1 15 1 15 CN597
VDD 75 177 DQ51 SG SERR0 75 75 SERR0 ADUMAB +3.3V +3.3V CN306 J621 VDD (5V)
18 18 SG 17 17 (M12) 5 2 2 14 2 14 FSMBRK-0C (LED2) 7 1
VDD 76 178 VSS CP- STS0 76 76 STS0 ADUMBB SG SG 1 12 VDD (5V)
19 19 RESERVED 18 18 6 3 3 13 3 13 +24V FUS-MOT 6 2 HRNS-LGC-PSNR-210 HRNS-PSNR-210
NC 77 179 VSS CP+ CERR0 77 77 CERR0 ADUMB +24V +24V 2 11 VDD (5V)
20 20 W-DIS # 19 19 M 2 4 4 12 4 12 +24V (M4) 5 3
A15 78 180 DQ60 SG SG 78 78 SG NC +24V +24V 3 10 Logic-G
21 21 SG 20 20 3 5 11 5 11 PG 4 4 CN318 J781
BA2 79 181 DQ56 CN108 MCLK+ MMPI0 79 79 DET1 NC PG PG 4 9 LED-G
22 22 PERST # 21 21 4 6 10 6 10 PG 3 5 1 NC(TNLVOP) 15 1 NC J671
A14 80 182 DQ61 MCLK- LGCEN1 80 80 LGCEN1 PG PG 5 8 LED-G +5V
23 23 PERn0 TXP 1 22 22 7 9 7 9 FSRGA 2 6 2 14 2 4 IMG-POS-SNR-F
VDD 81 183 DQ57 SG ADUI1B-1 ADUI1B-1 6 7 LED-G Vout(TNLVOS)
24 24 +3.3V TXN 2 23 23 HRNS-ADU-SNR-210 8 8 8 8 FSRPLL-0 1 7 3 13 3 3 (S7)
VDD 82 184 VSS SH ADUPHB-1 ADUPHB-1 7 6 M TNLVREF
25 25 PERp0 RXP 3 24 24 9 7 9 7 FSMDIR-0C 4 12 4 2
A12, /BC 83 185 VSS CCDSEL ADUPHA-1 ADUPHA-1 8 5 SG
26 26 SG TXCT 4 25 25 J722 CN421 10 6 10 6 FSMCK-0 5 11 5 1
A11 84 186 /DQS7 RC- SG ADUI1A-1 ADUI1A-1 9 4 NC(RGFVOP) NC
27 27 SG RXCT 5 26 26 ADU-U-SNR 3 1 11 5 11 5 FSMON-0C HRNS-LGC-HEADM-210 6 10 6 J673
A9 85 187 DM7 LAN Connector RC+ ADUJAM1-0 ADUVREF-1 ADUVREF-1 10 3 +5V
CCD
28 28 +1.5V RXN 6 27 27 (S14) 2 2 12 4 12 4 SG 7 9 7 4 IMG-POS-SNR-R
A7 86 188 DQS7 (10BASE-T/ SG +3.3V ADUS1-1 ADUS1-1 11 2 CN327 Vout(RGFVOS)
29 29 SG FG 7 28 28 1 3 13 3 13 3 +5V CN592 8 8 8 3 (S8)
VDD 87 189 VSS RD- ADUS2-1 ADUS2-1 12 1 HSRDM RGFVREF
30 30 SMB-CLK FG 8 100BASE-TX) J721 14 2 14 2 20 1 7 9 2
VDD 88 190 VSS 29 29 SG CNTIN-0 CNTIN-0 HSCKM 9 SG
31 31 PETn0 LEDG-A 9 RD+ ADU-L-SNR 3 4 15 1 15 1 19 2 10 6 10 1
A8 89 191 DQ58 30 30 ADUJAM2-0 HSTBM
PWA-F-ADU (ADU)
32 32 SMB-DATA LEDG-C 10 SG (S15) 2 5 HRNS-LGC-EXT-210 LL20/25ppm only 18 3 J672
A6 90 192 DQ62 31 31 +3.3V FG2 FG1 HDDTM00 TDSSOL-0C
33 33 PETp0 LEDY-C 11 RE- 1 6 17 4 11 5 11 2 2 SNS-SHUT-SOL
A5 91 193 DQ59 32 32 HDDTM01 +24V
34 34 SG LEDY-A 12 RE+ CN308 CN423 16 5 12 4 12 1 1 (SOL1)
A4 92 194 DQ63 33 33 HRNS-LVPS-SYS-210 HDDTM02
35 35 SG SG 13 CNTOUT-0 1 PWA-EXT 15 6 J785
VDD 93 195 VSS 34 34 HDDTM03 SG
36 36 USB D- RCLK- 12 +3.3V 2 14 7 13 3 13 3 RGST-PASS
Mini PCI Express slot - Wireless LAN Card

VDD 94 196 VSS 35 35 CN101 CN511 HDDTM04 RGST2SNS-0
37 37 SG RCLK+ HRNS-LVPS-LGC-210 11 SG 3 13 8 14 +3.3V 2 14 2 (S6)
A3 95 197 SA0 36 36 1 SYS-EN 1 HDDTM05
38 38 USB D+ SG 10 +24V 4 12 9 15 1 15 1
A2 96 198 /EVENT 37 37 2 PWR-EN 2 CN512 HDDTM06
RA- CN323 9 +24V 5 11 10
39 39 +3.3V A1 97 199 VDDSPD 38 38 PWR-DN HDDTM07
RA+ 3 PWE-DN 3 1 1 8 PG 6 10 11
40 40 SG A0 98 200 SDA 39 39 RLY-ON HSYNCM
SG 4 SG 4 2 2 7 PG 7 9 12 HRNS-LGC-FANUTNR-210 HRNS-UTNR-210
41 41 +3.3V CN103 40 40 S LAMP-ON HOLDM
VDD 99 201 SA1 RB- 5 +5VS 5 3 3 6 EXTI1B-1 8 8 13
42 42 LED-WWAN # VCC C LAMP-ON CN319
VDD 100 202 SCL 1 41 41 VSS J687
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
ROCK SYS-FAN-MOT RB+ 6 +5VS 6 4 4 5 EXTPHB-1 9 7 14 J685

43 43 SG 2 42 42 NC HDCLKMN SG SG
CK0 101 203 VTT SG (F1) 7 SG 7 5 4 EXTPHA-1 10 6 15 1 5 1 3 USD-TNR-LCK-SNR
44 44 LED-WLAN #
M SG +12VAF PDLLOCK-0 PDLLOCK-0
3 43 43 HDCLKMP
D CK1 102 204 VTT
SD0 8 SG 8 6 5 3
EXTI1A-1
11 5 16 2
+3.3V
4 2
+3.3V
2 (S9)
D
45 45 RESERVED 44 44 9 +12VA 9 +12VAF EXTVREF-1 VSS 3 3 3 1
SD1 7 6 2 12 4 17
46 46 LED-WPAN # 45 45 10 +12VA 10 NC CNTIN-0 VSS J686 J623
SCLK 8 1 13 3 18 +24V +24V
47 47 RESERVED 46 46 11 +12VA 11 SG VSS 4 2 4 2 1 1
CS 9 7 4 3 2 1 2 19 PDLM-0C PDLM-0C USD-TNR-MOT
48 48 +1.5V 47 47 12 SG 12 SG CN422 VDD3 5 1 5 1 2 2 (M7) M
OE 10 8 1 20
49 49 RESERVED 48 48 13 SG 13 PG J782
CLPIN 11 9 TEMP
50 50 SG 49 49 14 SG 14 PG 6 4 TEMP/HUMI-SNR
OHDEN 12 10 SG
51 51 RESERVED 50 50 CN127 PG HRNS-EXT-MOT-210 7 3 (S10)
CN513 13 11 HMS
52 52 +3.3V AFERST NC HRNS-LGC-CLEDP-210
51 51 1 +24VD 1 14 8 2
NC +5V
2 PG 2 15 CN337 J639 LP-LED-C CN332 9 1
NC EXITMA NC J683
16 12 1 1 EXIT-MOT (LED3) CN598 1 FRNTCO-1
HRNS-SCN-LED-210L NC EXITMAB VDD (5V)
17 2 5 (M5) 7 2 10 2 FRONT-COV-SW
+24VD1 EXITMBB VDD (5V) SG
18 13 3 6 6 11 1 (SW1)
CN10 CN126 +24VD2 3
EXITMB 2 M VDD (5V)
LED8 19 14 4 5 4
CN107 CN104 1 10 +24VD3 Logic-G CN316 J682
PS-ACC (PS)
NC 3
LED7 20 15 4 5 +24V
1 CNT DATA0 1 1 2 9 NC LED-G 1 1 1 OZN-FAN-MOT
LED6 4 3 6 OZNFAN-0C
2 A17 DATA2 2 2 3 8 LED-G 2 2 2 (F2) M
LED5 2 7
3 SDA/SI DATA4 3 3 4 7 HRNS-PFC-LVPS-210 HRNS-PFC-LVPS2-210 HRNS-LGC-PFC-210 LED-G J680
LED4 1 8 +24V
4 NC/SCS DATA6 4 4 5 6 3 1 1 PS-FAN-MOT
LED3 HRNS-LGC-MOT-210 LVPSFAN-0C
LED
5 SCL DATA8 5 5 6 5 HRNS-LVPS-INLCSW-210 CN514 J755 J755 CN911 CN910 4 2 2 (F3) M
LED2 CN312 HRNS-LGC-HEADC-210
6 INT/SO DATA10 6 6 7 4 PWREN PWREN LCG Ver
LED1 1 1 1 1 16
7 /CS DATA12 7 7 8 3 J591 CN510 +12VA +12VA PFCRXD-0 HRNS-LGC-DRM-210
LEDPWR +12VA 2 2 2 2 15 1 CN594 CN331
8 A13 DATA14 8 8 9 2 S-COV-INTLCK-SW 1 1 SG SG PFCTXD-0 HSRDC
LEDPWR NC 3 3 3 3 14 2 CN333 J706 20 1 HRNS-LGC-HVT-210
9 A12 A19 9 9 10 1 (SW3) 2 2 PG PG PFCRTS DRMBRK-0 HSCKC
4 4 4 4 13 3 19 2 OUT3-Y
10 A14 A17 10 10 J590 +24VD4 +24VD4 PFCCTS 1 10 DRM/TBU-MOT HSTBC 1 1 Developer roller-Y
COVER OPEN 5 5 5 5 12 4 +24V 18 3 CN321 CN530
11 A11 A15 11 11 F-COV-INTLCK-SW 1 3 +24VD5 +24VD5 PFCCNT-0 2 9 (M6) HDDTC00 HVTREMOTE OUT2-Y
6 6 6 6 11 5 +24V 17 4 1 12 1 1 Grid-Y
12 A15 A13 12 12 (SW2) 2 PG PG PFCSTART-0 3 8 HDDTC01 HVTTR2_MON
7 7 7 7 10 6 PG 16 5 2 11
13 A10 A11 13 13 PFCRST 4 7 HDDTC02 TR2IV OUT1-Y
LL20ppm/LL25ppm 20ppm/25ppm 9 7 PG 15 6 3 10 1 1 Main charger-Y
14 A16 A9 14 14 PFCCTL-0 5 6 HDDTC03 HVTTR2CVPWM
HRNS-LVPS-INLCSW2-210 8 8 DRMGA-0 M 14 7 4 9
15 A9 A7 15 15 CN916 +3.3VLSW 6 5 HDDTC04 HVTTR2CCPWM
CN6 CN6 7 9 DRMPLL-0 13 8 5 8
A5 16 16 SG SG Serial Port (Debug) 1 +3.3V PFCWDT-0 7 4 HVTTR2 OUT3-M
16 /WR 1 1 6 10 DRMDIR-0C HDDTC05 1 1 Developer roller-M
2 TXD 8 3 12 9 6 7
17 /BLE A3 17 17 SG SG +3.3VL DRMCK-0 HDDTC06 HVTTR1PWM-C OUT2-M
2 2 3 RXD 5 11 9 2 11 10 7 6 1 1 Grid-M
18 D7 A1 18 18 NC VDD SG DRMON-0 HDDTC07 HVTTR1PWM-M
3 3 4 SG 4 12 10 1 10 11 8 5
19 D8 /RD 19 19 VCC VDD RXD NC HSYNCC HVTTR1PWM-Y OUT1-M
4 4 3 13 11 9 12 9 4 1 1 Main charger-M
E 20 D6 /CS0-A 20 20 VCC U/D TXD NC HOLDC HVTTR1PWM-K E
5 5 CN5 2 14 12 8 13 10 3
21 D9 /CS0-B 21 21 VCC L/R Option HRNS-PFC-FIN-210 F-CNT VSS PG
6 6 1 1 15 J697 7 14 11 2 OUT3-C
22 D5 +3.3VA 22 22 VCC SG +24V HDCLKCN +24V 1 1 Developer roller-C
7 7 2 Finisher 13 2 1 1ST-TRNS-CLT 6 15 12 1
23 D10 +3.3VA 23 23 NC R0 CN912 TR1CLT-0C HDCLKCP OUT2-C
8 8 3 J754 14 1 2 (CLT3) 5 16 1 1 Grid-C
24 D4 SG 24 24 DE R1 RXD VSS
9 9 LCD 1 1 CN915 4 17 OUT1-C
25 D11 SG 25 25 HSYNC R2 SG HRNS-TR1POS-210 VSS CN322 CN531
10 10 back light 2 2 3 18 HVTREMOTE 1 1 Main charger-C
26 D3 DATA1 26 26 VSYNC R3 TXD +3.3V 1 1 VSS
11 11 3 3 J696 J698 2 19 1 16
27 D12 DATA3 27 27 CLK SG SG DLRXD 2 2 VDD3 HVTDPWM-C
12 12 4 4 SG SG 2 15
DLTXD 3 3 15 3 1 3 1 20 HVTDPWM-M OUT3-K
28 D2 DATA5 28 28 SG R4 TR1POS1-0 TR1POS1-0 1ST-TRNS-SW-SNR 3 14 1 1 Developer roller-K
13 13 5 DLRST 4 4 16 2 2 2 HVTDPWM-Y
29 D13 DATA7 29 29 B7 R5 F-CNT +3.3V +3.3V (S12) 4 13 OUT2-K
SRAM BOARD I/F

14 14 6 5 17 1 3 1
(PFC)
30 D1 DATA9 30 30 B6 SG CNT-GND DLROMCNT 5 5 HVTDPWM-K 1 1 Grid-K
15 15 7 6 5 12
PS-HVT (HVT)
HVTSTS
Download jig (Ext ROM)

31 D14 DATA11 31 31 B5 R6 +5V BOOT 6 6 HRNS-LGC-KLEDP-210 OUT1-K
6 11
Download jig
16 16 CN5 CN119 8 7 1 1 Main charger-K
32 D0 DATA13 32 32 B4 R7 SG SG 7 7 HVTMPWM-C
17 17 31 SG 1 9 8 7 10
33 D15 DATA15 33 33 B3 SG NC LP-LED-K CN599 CN330 HVTMPWM-M
18 18 30 +12VA 2 10 VDD (5V) 8 9
34 /BHE A18 34 34 B2 G0 +24VD4 (LED4) 7 2 HVTMPWM-Y OUT4-Y
19 19 29 +12VA 3 11 9 HRNS-LGC-FUSER-210 THMS-HTR-210 VDD (5V) 9 8 1 1 1st transfer roller-Y
35 /RD A16 35 35 B1 G1 PG 6 3 HVTMPWM-K OUT4-M
20 20 28 +12VA 4
12 10 VDD (5V) 10 7
36 A1 A14 36 36 B0 G2 CN301 J627 5 4 HVTM-C3 1 1 1st transfer roller-M
21 21 27 +5VS 5
FSRCNT-1 Logic-G 11 6
37 A8 A12 37 37 G7 G3 FG 1 FSRCNT-1 13 1 4 5 HVTM-K OUT4-C
22 22 26 SG 6
BCTHS-1+ LED-G 12 5 1 1 1st transfer roller-C
38 A2 A110 38 38 G6 SG 2 BCTHS-1+ 12 2 2 THMS-FR-C 3 6 PG
23 23 25 CP-CNT1 7
BCTHS-1- LED-G 13 4
39 A7 A8 39 39 G5 G4 3 BCTHS-1- 11 3 1 (THM1) 2 7 PG OUT4-K
24 24 24 CP-CNT0 8
LED-G 14 3 1 1 1st transfer roller-K
40 A3 A6 40 40 G4 G5 1 8 +24V
25 25 23 /CPPSW 9 BSTHS-1+ BSTHS-1+ 15 2 OUT5
41 A6 A4 41 41 G3 SG SG 4 10 4 2 THMS-FR-S +24V 1 1 2nd transfer facing roller
26 26 22 10 BSTHS-1- BSTHS-1- 16 1
42 A4 A2 42 42 G2 G6 CP-RTS 5 9 5 1 (THM2)
27 27 21 11
TCP
TCP
43 A5 A0 43 43 G1 G7 SG HRNS-LGC-HEADK-210
(TCP)
(TCP)
28 28 20 12 BETHS-1+ BETHS-1+ THMS-FR-E
44 +3.3V A20 44 44 G0 SG CP-CTS 6 8 6 2
29 29 19 13 BETHS-1- BETHS-1- (THM3) CN595 CN329
45 SG /CS0 45 45 R7 B0 SG 7 7 7 1
30 30 18 14 HSRDK
46 +3.3V +3.3VA 46 46 R6 B1 CP-RXD J826 20 1
31 31 17 15 SG SG HSCKK
47 SG /RMSL 47 47 R5 B2 SG PWA-H-PFC 8 6 8 3 19 2
32 32 16 16 EXTS-1 EXTS-1 EXIT-SNR HSTBK 1 CTRG
48 A18 /WR 48 48 R4 B3 CP-TXD 9 5 9 2 18 3
33 33 15 17 +3.3V +3.3V (S13) HDDTK00 2
49 RESET SG 49 49 R3 SG RESET 10 4 10 1 17 4
34 34 14 18 FSRNEW-0 NC HDDTK01 3
50 A19 SG 50 50 R2 B4 SG 11 3 11 16 5
PFUCNT
3.3VL
3.3VL
3.3VL
FDS2
FDCLT2-0
SG
CST2SIZEL2-0
CST2SIZEL3-0
SG
CST2SIZEW2-0
CST2SIZEW3-0
CST2TRUMT
SG
CST2PE
SG
SG
PFUJAMCO
SG
PFUCNT
MDLCLT-0
+24V4
MDHCLT-0
+24V
CST2SIZEL0-0
CST2SIZEL1-0
CST2SIZEW0-0
CST2SIZEW1-0
+24V4
35 35 13 19 SG NC HDDTK02 HRNS-LGC-TNRIC-210 4
R1 B5 TXCLPK 12 2 12 15 6 CN441
36 36 12 20 FSRCNT-1 FSRCNT-1 HDDTK03
8
6
4
2
1
3
5
7
9
8 CST2TUMFB-0
4
6
2
9
7
5
3
1
39
37
35
18
40
34
36
38
24
26
28
10 CST2TUMFA-0
22 SG
20 CST2SW
12
14
16
33
31
29
27
30
32
25 3.3VL
23 CST2NEMP
21 SG
19
17
15
13
11
14 7
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
R0 SG TXCLKN 13 1 13 1 1 TNR-MOT-Y
37 37 11 21 HDDTK04 CN324 CN440
U/D B6 SG 13 8 2 2 (M8)
CN914
38 38 10 22 CN913 HDDTK05 1
+3.3VLTNR
12
M
F L/R B7 TXD2P 12 9 SCL1-0
F
39 39 9 23 HDDTK06 2 11
SG SG TXD2N 11 10 SOA1-0
40 40 8 24 J623 HDDTK07 3 10 1 CTRG
DCLK SG TRUCO-1 10 11 SG
41 7 25 2 SIDE-COV-SW HSYNCK 4 9 2
SG TXD1P 14 SG 9 12 TNRMPK-0
42 6 26 15 1 (SW5) HOLDK 5 8 3
DE TXD1N 8 13 TNRMK-0
43 5 27 VSS 6 7 4
HRNS-PFU-570
TEST SG 7 14 TNRMPC-0
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
HDCLKKN CN442
J934
J936
J938
44 4 28
J937
J935
6 15 7 6
SG TXD0P
(DSP)
TNRMC-0
J931
1 1
J932
45 3 29 HDCLKKP TNR-MOT-M
J933
5 16 8 5
SG TXD0N TNRMPM-0
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
46 2 30 VSS 9 4 2 2 (M9) M
LED-PWM SG 4 17 TNRMM-0
PWA-F-DSP
VSS
NC
+24V
+24V
PFPPLL-0
SCSWB-0
SCSWC-0
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
PFPSIDECOV-1
PFPFEED1-1
PFPFEED2-1
SG
PFPRST
LCFCNT-0(LCF)
SIODI-1
SIOLD-1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
CIOCK-1
CLKB-1A
CLKC-1A(LCF)
DRV0
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
DRV4
DRV5
DRV6
DRV7
+5V
SG
PFPCLK
PG
PG
PG
47 1 31 10 3
HRNS-PFC-PFP-570
LED-EN 3 18 TNRMPY-0
48 VSS 11 2 1 CTRG
LED-POWER 2 19 TNRMY-0
49 VDD3 12 1 2
LED-POWER 1 20
50 3
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
PFU 4
CN443
J949
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
1 1 TNR-MOT-C
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
3
1
3
1
CN1 CN2
PWA-F-CITF (CITF)
J944
J945
+5V 2 2 (M10) M
29 1
RET0
HRNS-PFU-CLT-570
28 2
HRNS-PFU-EMP-552
HRNS-PFU-COV-570
J940
J937
J941
J942
J943
RET1 1 CTRG
27 3
RET2 2
26 4
RET3 3
25 5
RET4 4
24 6
SCAN7 CN444
23 7
SCAN6 1 1 TNR-MOT-K
22 8
SCAN5 2 2 (M11) M
21 9
SCAN4
HRNS-PFP-552
20 10
NC
+24V
+24V
PFPPLL-0
SCSWB-0
SCSWC-0
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
PFPSIDECOV-1
PFPFEED1-1
PFPFEED2-1
SG
PFPRST
NC
SIODI-1
SIOLD-1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
CIOCK-1
CLKB-1A
NC
DRV0
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
DRV4
DRV5
DRV6
DRV7
+5V
SG
PFPCLK
PG
PG
PG
SCAN3
18 11
SCAN2
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
17 12
CN241
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
SCAN1
16 13
SCAN0
15 14
BZ-ON
14 15 PFP/LCF
ENERGY-SAVER
(KEY)
13 16
FUNCTION-CLEAR
12 17
MEMORY-RX
11 18 Option
PWA-F-KEY
PRINT-DATA
10 19
G ERROR
G
9 20
START
8 21
POWER-LED
7 22
POWER-SW
6 23
SG Option
5 24 CN120
SG L/S
4 25 1
SG FULL-C
3 26
SG 2
2 27 Coin controller/ MONO-C
SG 3
1 28 B/W
Copy key card 4
VDD
SG 5
NC 6
7
CN112
SG
1 1
A+ (TXp)
2 2
A- (TXn)
3 3
SG
4 4
B- (RXn)
5 5
B+ (RXp)
6 6
SG
7 7
NC
1
NC
2
NC
3
4 CN113
+5V
5 4
6
7
SG
HDD or SSD (HDD)

8 3
9
10
H SG H
11 2
12
NC
13
NC +12V
14 1
NC
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14.2.2 Electric Parts Layout
[A] Scanner unit, control panel [B] Toner cartridge, waste toner box [C] Developer unit [D] Data writing
M1
S23 CCD
S21 M6
S22 KEY
CLT3
EXP
CTIF M3 SW12 LED4
S25 CTRG S12
LED3
TCP M11 SW10 SW11
S24 S11 LED2
CTRG SW16
DSP SW9
M10 SW15 LED1
SW14 S10
CTRG SW13 S1
M8 M9
S3 S2 ERS-K
CTRG
S4 ERS-C
THM4
S9 ERS-M
M7
ERS-Y
[E] Fuser unit [F] Image quality control [G] Paper feeding unit [H] Automatic duplexing unit, bypass feed unit
M5
M4 M12
CLT2 ADU S14
THM2 CLT1
S8 S18 S15
S13 SOL1 M2
S6 S19 S17
LAMP1, CLT4
THM1 LAMP2 SW8
THMO1
S20
SW6
THMO2
S7 SW7 S5
THM3
S16
[I] PC board, power supply [J] Cover switch, damp heater
SW5
DH1
SSD
LGC SW3
SYS
EEPROM
PS SW2
F3
HVT SW1
THMO4
SW4 INLET
DH3
SRAM F1
Main Memory DH2

F2
THMO3
CFD
Motors and fans Sensors and Switches Wire harness PC boards Thermistors and thermostats
Symbol Name Figure
Wire harness Wire harness location Wire harness Wire harness
Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure
location location location location
Y-DEV-SW
SW13 [C] 8-C
SCAN-MOT ATTNR-SNR-K Y developer unit old/new detection switch PWA-F-CCD THMS-FR-C
M1 [A] 2-B / 3-B S1 [C] 8-B CCD [A] THM1 [E] 6-F
Scan motor Auto-toner sensor-K CCD driving PC board (CCD board) Fuser roller center thermistor
M-DEV-SW
SW14 [C] 8-C
FEED/DEV-MOT 6-A ATTNR-SNR-C M developer unit old/new detection switch PWA-F-DSP THMS-FR-S
M2 [G] S2 [C] 8-B DSP [A] 2-F THM2 [E] 6-F
Paper feeding/developer unit drive motor 6-B Auto-toner sensor-C Display PC board (DSP board) Fuser roller side thermistor
C-DEV-SW
SW15 [C] 8-B
DRM-SW-MOT ATTNR-SNR-M C developer unit old/new detection switch PWA-F-KEY THMS-FR-E
M3 [C] 6-B S3 [C] 8-A KEY [A] 2-F THM3 [E] 6-F
Mono/color switching motor Auto-toner sensor-M Key PC board (KEY board) Fuser roller edge thermistor
K-DEV-SW
SW16 [C] 8-B
FUS-MOT 6-C ATTNR-SNR-Y K developer unit old/new detection switch PWA-F-CTIF THMS-DRM
M4 [E] S4 [C] 8-A CTIF [B] 8-F THM4 [C] 8-C
Fuser motor 6-D Auto-toner sensor-Y Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF board) Drum thermistor
EXIT-MOT CST1-EMP-SNR Electromagnetic spring clutches PWA-F-CTRG 8-F THERMO-FR-C
M5 [E] 6-D S5 [G] 5-C CTRG [B] THMO1 [E] AC WIre harness
Exit motor 1st drawer empty sensor Wire harness Toner cartridge PC board (CTRG board) 8-G Fuser roller center thermostat
Symbol Name Figure
location
DRM/TBU-MOT RGST-PASS-SNR PWA-F-ADU THERMO-FR-S
M6 [C] 6-E S6 [F] 8-D ADU [H] 5-C THMO2 [E] AC WIre harness
Drum/TBU motor Registration pass sensor RGST-CLT ADU control PC board (ADU board) Fuser roller rear thermostat
CLT1 [G] 6-B
Registration clutch
USD-TNR-MOT IMG-POS-SNR-F 8-C PWA-F-SFB THERMO-SCN-DH
M7 [B] 8-D S7 [F] SFB 4-B THMO3 AC WIre harness
Waste toner paddle motor Image quality sensor (Front) 8-D FEED-CLT Paper width detection PC board (SFB board) Scanner damp heater thermostat
CLT2 [G] 6-B
Feed clutch
TNR-MOT-Y IMG-POS-SNR-R PWA-F-CFD THERMO-DRM-DH-L
M8 [B] 8-F CFD [I] 5-A THMO4 AC WIre harness
Toner motor-Y S8 Image quality sensor (Rear) / Image position [F] 8-D 1ST-TRNS-CLT Feed control PC board (CFD board) Drum damp heater thermostat (Left)
CLT3 [C] 6-E
aligning sensor 1st transfer contact/release clutch
TNR-MOT-M PWA-F-SYS THERMO-DRM-DH-R
M9 [B] 8-F SYS [I] 2-A THMO5 AC WIre harness
Toner motor-M USD-TNR-LCK-SNR SFB-FEED-CLT System control PC board (SYS board) Drum damp heater thermostat (Right)
S9 [B] 8-D CLT4 [H] 5-B
Waste toner paddle rotation detection sensor Bypass feed clutch
TNR-MOT-C PWA-F-LGC
M10 [B] 8-F LGC [I] 6-D Others
Toner motor-C TEMP/HUMI-SNR Logic PC board (LGC board)
S10 [D] 8-D Solenoids
TNR-MOT-K Temperature/humidity sensor PWA-F-SRAM Wire harness
M11 [B] 8-G SRAM [I] 1-E Symbol Name Figure
Wire harness location
Toner motor-K DRM-SW-SNR Symbol Name Figure SRAM board
S11 [C] 6-B location
ADU-MOT Drum switching detection sensor TCP
M12 [H] 5-C TCP [A] 2-E
ADU motor 1ST-TRNS-SW-SNR SNR-SHUT-SOL Lamps and heaters Touch panel
S12 [C] 6-E SOL1 [F] 8-D
1st transfer roller status detection sensor Sensor shutter solenoid
SYS-FAN-MOT Wire harness EEPROM
F1 [I] 2-D Symbol Name Figure
SYS/HDD cooling fan EXIT-SNR location EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only [I]
S13 [E] 6-F Memory
OZN-FAN-MOT Exit sensor LP-EXPO
F2 [I] 8-D EXP [A]
Ozone exhaust fan ADU-U-SNR Exposure lamp SSD
S14 [H] 5-D SSD [I] 2-D/3-D
ADU entrance sensor LP-LED-Y 7-B Solid State Drive
PS-FAN-MOT-1 LED1 [D]
F3 [I] 8-E LED print head-Y 7-C Main
Ozone suctioning fan ADU-L-SNR Main memoryl [I]
S15 [H] 5-D memory
ADU exit sensor LP-LED-M 7-C
LED2 [D]
SFB-FEED-SNR LED print head-M 7-D PS-ACC
S16 [H] 5-B PS [I] 4-D
Bypass feed sensor LP-LED-M 7-D Switching regulator
LED3 [D]
PWA-F-SFB LED print head-M 7-E PS-HVT
S17 [H] 4-B / 5-B HVT [I] 8-E
Paper width detection PC board (SFB board) LP-LED-K 7-E High-voltage transformer
LED4 [D]
CLNG-SNR LED print head-K 7-F
S18 [G] 5-A
Paper clinging detection sensor LP-ERS-Y
ERS-Y [D] 8-C
RGST-SNR 5-A Discharge LED-Y
S19 [G]
Registration sensor 5-B LP-ERS-M
ERS-M [D] 8-C
TRANS-SNR Discharge LED-M
S20 [G] 5-A
Feed sensor LP-ERS-C
ERS-C [D] 8-C
PLTN1-SNR Discharge LED-C
S21 [A] 2-C / 3-C
Platen sensor-1 LP-ERS-K
ERS-K [D] 8-C
PLTN2-SNR Discharge LED-K
S22 [A] 2-B / 3-B
Platen sensor-2 LP-HTR-C
LAMP1 [E] AC Wire Harness
HOME-SNR Center heater lamp
S23 [A] 2-B / 3-B
Carriage home position sensor LP-HTR-S
LAMP2 [E] AC Wire Harness
APS1 Side heater lamp
S24 [A] 2-B / 3-B
Automatic original detection sensor-1 SCN-DH-L
DH1 [J] AC Wire Harness
APS2 Scanner damp heater
S25 [A] 2-B / 3-B
Automatic original detection sensor-2 DRM-DH-L
FRT-COV-SW Drum damp heater (Left)
SW1 [J] 8-D
Front cover switch DRM-DH-R
F-COV-INTLCK-SW Drum damp heater (Right)
SW2 [J] 4-E
Front cover interlock switch
S-COV-INTLCK-SW
SW3 [J] 4-E
Side cover interlock switch
MAIN-SW
SW4 [I] AC Wire Harness
Main power switch
SIDE-COV-SW
SW5 [J] 6-F
Side cover switch
CST-SIZE1-SW
SW6 [G] 5-C
CST-SIZE2-SW 5-B
SW7 [G]
1st drawer size detection switch-2 5-C
CST1-SW
SW8 [G] 5-C
1st drawer detection switch
Y-DRUM-SW
SW9 [C] 8-B
Y drum old/new detection switch
M-DRUM-SW
SW10 [C] 8-B
M drum old/new detection switch
C-DRUM-SW
SW11 [C] 8-B
C drum old/new detection switch
K-DRUM-SW
SW12 [C] 8-B
K drum old/new detection switch
Input check (Test mode 03)
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed on the following pages.
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF/[SCAN] button: OFF

("100%" is displayed.)
Contents
Digital Highlighted display Normal display
Button Items to check
key
e.g. e.g.
Drawer 1 paper width detection sensor

A OFF ON
3
B OFF ON
2
C OFF ON
1
D OFF ON
0
[1]
Drawer 1 paper length detection sensor
E OFF ON
3
F OFF ON
2
G OFF ON
1
H OFF ON
0
Bypass feed paper size detection
A OFF ON
sensor 3
B OFF ON
sensor 2
C OFF ON
[2] sensor 1
D OFF ON
sensor 0
E Bypass feed paper existence sensor No paper Paper present
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
Option connection detection signal B
A H L
(Refer to table2)
Option connection detection signal A
B H L
(Refer to table2)
C PFC connection detection Not connected Connected
[3]
D Finisher connection detection Not connected Connected
E Fuser unit connection detection Connected Not connected
F ADU unit connection detection Not connected Connected
G - - -
H - - -
A New/Old drum detection (K) Old New
B New/Old drum detection (C) Old New
C New/Old drum detection (M) Old New
D New/Old drum detection (Y) Old New
[4]
E New/Old developer unit detection (K) Old New
F New/Old developer unit detection (C) Old New
G New/Old developer unit detection (M) Old New
H New/Old developer unit detection (Y) Old New
Stop/Non-regular
A Drum transfer motor Normal rotation
rotation
Stop/Non-regular
B Fuser transfer motor Normal rotation
rotation
Stop/Non-regular
C Development transport motor Normal rotation
[5] rotation
D Waste toner box full detection sensor Shielded Transmissive
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B Fusing abnormality Normal Abnormal
C - - -
D - - -
[6]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A Side cover switch Open Closed
JSP cover open detection (JSP is
connected)/
B Open Closed
Bridge unit cover open detection
(Bridge unit is connected)
C Front cover opening/closing switch Open Closed
Open/Blowout of
[7] D Cover open detection switch Normal
24V fuse
Power off/Not
E SYS power supply Power on
connected
F - - -
Power off/Not
G PFC status detection connected/Firmware Normal
abnormality
H - - -
A Developer unit connection detection (K) Not connected Connected
B Developer unit connection detection (C) Not connected Connected

Developer unit connection detection
C Not connected Connected
(M)
[8]
D Developer unit connection detection (Y) Not connected Connected
Occurrence of
E High-voltage leak detection Normal
charging leak
F 1st transfer contact/non-contact sensor Black drive Color drive
G BK/C drive connection position sensor Color drive Black drive
H - - -
A Registration sensor Paper present No paper
B Feed sensor1 Paper present No paper
C Exit sensor No paper Paper present
D - - -
[9]
E Paper clinging detection sensor No paper Paper present
F Registration transit sensor Paper present No paper
G ADU entrance sensor Paper present No paper
H ADU exit sensor Paper present No paper
JSP transport sensor (When JSP is
connected)/Bridge unit transport
A Paper present No paper
sensor1 (When bridge unit is
connected)
B Bridge unit transport sensor (Exit) Paper present No paper
JSP lower ejection tray full sensor
(When JSP is connected)/RLY ejection
C Full Not full
[0] full sensor (When bridge unit is
connected)
D JSP upper ejection tray full sensor Full Not full
E - - -
Drawer 1 opening/closing detection
F Open Closed
switch
G Drawer 1 paper empty sensor No paper Paper present
H - - -
[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF/[SCAN] button OFF
("F%" is displayed.)
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A Position adjustment sensor (Rear) Toner present Toner not present

B Position adjustment sensor (Front) Toner present Toner not present
C - - -
D - - -
[1]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A New/Old detection of fuser unit Old New
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[2]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B PFU connection detection Not connected Connected
C LCF connection detection Not connected Connected
D PFP connection detection Not connected Connected
[3]
E - - -
F - - -
G Cover open detection (PFC side) Closed Open
H - - -
Paper feeding jam releasing cover
A Open Closed
opening/closing switch
B - - -
C - - -
D Feed sensor2 No paper No paper
[4]
Tray at upper limit Other than upper
E Drawer 2 tray-up sensor
position limit position
F Drawer 2 opening/closing detection Open Closed
G Drawer 2 paper empty No paper Paper present
H Drawer 2 paper nearly empty Shielded Transmissive
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[5] E - - -
F RADF connection Connected Not connected
G Platen sensor Platen cove opened Platen cover closed
Other than home
H Carriage home position sensor Home position
position
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D APS sensor (APS1)(*1) No original Original present
[6]
E APS sensor (APS2)(*1) No original Original present
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A RADF tray sensor Original present No original
B RADF empty sensor Original present No original
C RADF jam access cover sensor Cover opened Cover closed
D RADF open/close sensor RADF opened RADF closed
[7]
E RADF exit sensor Original present No original
F RADF intermediate sensor Original present No original
G RADF read sensor Original present No original
H RADF registration sensor Original present No original
RADF original tray width sensor
A (TWID0S) OFF(H) ON(L)
(Refer to table3)
RADF original tray width sensor
B (TWID1S) OFF(H) ON(L)
(Refer to table3)
[8] RADF original tray width sensor
C (TWID2S) OFF(H) ON(L)
(Refer to table3)
D - - -
E RADF original length sensor Original present No original
F RADF original width sensor 1 Original present No original
G RADF original width sensor 2 Original present No original
H - - -
A OFF ON
3
B OFF ON
2
C OFF ON
1
D OFF ON
0
[9] Drawer 2 paper length detection sensor
E OFF ON
3
F OFF ON
2
G OFF ON
1
H OFF ON
0
Paper feeding jam releasing cover
A Open Closed
opening/closing switch
B - - -
C PFP transport sensor (Upper) No paper Paper present
D PFP transport sensor (Lower) No paper Paper present
[0]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
Accelerating/Deceler
H PFP motor Normal rotation
ating/Stopped
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON/[SCAN] button OFF
("C%" is displayed.)
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays

[1] - - Temperature [°C]
temperature inside of the equipment)
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays
[2] - - Humidity [%RH]
humidity inside of the equipment)
[3] - Drum thermistor temperature - Temperature [°C]
[4] - - - -
A PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
B PFP upper drawer detection sensor Open Closed
C PFP upper drawer paper empty sensor No paper Paper present
PFP upper drawer paper nearly empty
D Shielded Transmissive
[5] sensor
E PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F PFP lower drawer detection sensor Open Closed
G PFP lower drawer paper empty sensor No paper Paper present
PFP lower drawer paper nearly empty
H Shielded Transmissive
sensor
PFP upper drawer paper width
A OFF ON
detection sensor 3
B OFF ON
detection sensor 2
C OFF ON
detection sensor 1
D OFF ON
[6] detection sensor 0
PFP upper drawer paper length
E OFF ON
detection sensor 3
F OFF ON
detection sensor 2
G OFF ON
detection sensor 1
H OFF ON
detection sensor 0
PFP lower drawer paper width
A OFF ON
detection sensor 3
B OFF ON
detection sensor 2
C OFF ON
detection sensor 1
D OFF ON
[7] detection sensor 0
PFP lower drawer paper length
E OFF ON
detection sensor 3
F OFF ON
detection sensor 2
G OFF ON
detection sensor 1
H OFF ON
detection sensor 0
A LCF tray-up sensor
LCF tray detection sensor (feeding
B Open Closed
side)
C LCF empty sensor (feeding side) Paper present No paper
D LCF nearly empty sensor (feeding side) Nearly empty Normal
[8] Tray at bottom Other than bottom
E LCF tray bottom sensor
position position
F - - -
Position after tray Other than position
G LCF end fence stop position sensor
transport after tray transport
Other than home
H LCF end fence home position sensor Home position
position
LCF jam releasing cover
A Closed Open
opening/closing detection
B LCF tray detection (standby side) Open Closed
C Empty sensor at LCF standby side No paper Paper present
D - - -
[9]
E LCF standby side paper misload Properly loaded Paper misload
F LCF transport sensor No paper Paper present
G - - -
Accelerating/Deceler
H LCF motor Normal rotation
ating/Stopped
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D Security enabler Connectable Not connectable
[0] Judgement for acceptable USB storage
E Acceptable Not acceptable
device (*2)
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
*1
- 20/25ppm only.
*2
- Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used
with this code.
- Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code
cannot be used.
- It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB
storage device.
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width)
Bypass paper width sensor
Paper width size
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 1 A3/LD
1 0 1 1 A4-R/LT-R
1 1 0 1 A5-R/ST-R
1 1 1 0 Card size
0 0 1 1 B4-R/LG
1 0 0 1 B5-R
Table 2. Option connection detection signal

A B
Bridge unit is connected L L
JSP is connected L H
No option is connected H H
SIO read-in NG H L
Table 3. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width)
Original tray width sensor Paper width size Paper width size
TWID2S TWID1S TWID0S (LT series) (A4 series)
H H L - B5-R
H L H ST-R A5-R
H L L LD / LT A3 / A4
8.5x8.5 / LT-R /
L H L A4-R / FOLIO
KLG / 13"LG
L L L COMPUTER B4 / B5
H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short
Output check (test mode 03)
Code Function Procedure
Drum motor ON
101 1
* Operational without process unit Y/M/C/K
102 Waste toner agitating motor ON 1
108 Registration clutch ON 1
109 PFP motor ON 1
110 ADU motor ON 1
Developer unit motor K ON
112 1
* Operational without process unit Y/M/C/K
113 Fuser motor ON 1
Developer unit motor ON + Drum motor ON (Normal speed)
114 1
* Remove the transfer belt before execution.
115 ADU motor ON (transport speed) 1
116 Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON (transport speed) 1
118 LED head ON 1
120 Exit motor (normal rotation) ON 1
121 Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON 1
122 LCF motor ON 1
125 Sensor shutter ON (open) 1
126 Image position aligning sensor (front/rear) LED ON 1
151 Code No.101 function OFF 1
152 Code No.102 function OFF
201 1st drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
202 2nd drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
204 Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF 3
206 LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF 3
207 LCF end fence reciprocating movement 2
209 LCF feed clutch ON/OFF 3
218 Key copy counter count up 2
225 PFP transport clutch ON/OFF 3
226 PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
228 PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
230 Middle roller (lower) transport speed drive clutch ON/OFF 3
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
232 3
JSP gate solenoid ON/OFF
233 Middle roller (lower) process speed drive clutch ON/OFF 3
Discharge LED (K) ON/OFF
235 * Do not let it radiate to the photoconductive drum for a long 3
time.
Discharge LED (Y/M/C) ON/OFF
236 * Do not let it radiate to the photoconductive drum for a long 3
time.
Drum switching motor
240 2
(switches position in the black/color mode)
Transfer belt contact/release clutch (switchover of
contact/release)
241 and drum development drive switching motor (switchover of 2
position for black/color)
* Operational with drum TBU motor ON
243 2nd drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
Developer bias (K) [DC] ON/OFF
248 3
* Operational without process unit K
Main charger (K) ON/OFF
252 3
* Operational without process unit K
Main charger (Y/M/C) ON/OFF
253 3
* Operational without process unit Y/M/C
Developer bias (Y) [DC] ON/OFF
254 3
* Operational without process unit Y
Developer bias (M) [DC] ON/OFF
255 3
* Operational without process unit M
Developer bias (C) [DC] ON/OFF
256 3
* Operational without process unit C
261 Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position) 2
264 Scanner fan motor high speed rotation/stop 3
265 Scanner fan motor low speed rotation/stop 3
267 Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF 3
271 LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN 2
278 PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
280 PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
281 RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) 3
282 RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) 3
283 RADF read motor ON/OFF 3
284 RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) 3
285 RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) 3
294 Reverse/exit solenoid ON/OFF 3
295 Power OFF mode 4
297 RADF fan motor ON/OFF 3
301 Modem test 2100Hz 2
302 Modem test 14.4KBPS(V17) 2
305 Modem test 300BPS 2
311 Modem test 33.6KBPS(V.34) 2
315 Dial test 10PPS 5
316 Dial test 20PPS 5
317 Dial test PB 5
320 Modem test 2.4KBPS(V.27ter) 2
321 FAX image memory test 2
322 CML relay ON 2
Toner motor (K) ON/OFF
410 3
* Operational without toner cartridge K
Toner motor (C) ON/OFF
411 3
* Operational without toner cartridge C
Toner motor (M) ON/OFF
412 3
* Operational without toner cartridge M
Toner motor (Y) ON/OFF
413 3
* Operational without toner cartridge Y
443 Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF 3
444 Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF 3
Finisher packing position shift
461 * Available when MJ-1036/1037 is connected only 2
* Not supported with LL20/25 ppm model
Test print mode (test mode 04)
Code Types of test pattern Remarks Remarks Output from
33 Overall halftone for printer (Image) 5 SYS
Printer secondary scanning direction 32
36 2 SYS
gradation steps (Image)
Pattern width: 1 dot,
204 Grid pattern 2 LGC
Pitch: 10 mm
Pattern width: 2 dot,
205 Grid pattern 2 LGC
Pitch: 10 mm
245 Halftone (3 pixels) 2 LGC
For checking the image
270 Image quality control test pattern 2 LGC
quality control
286 LED dot missing check pattern 1 LGC
e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
Sub- Default Acceptable Proc
05/08 Mode Element Sub Element Item Subitem Code Details RAM Contents ServiceUI
Code value value edure
05 Adjustment Process Developer Auto adj. for dev. 2400 Adjustment for All (Y,M,C,K) 0~255 M The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after 5 Yes
mode material supply this adjustment is started. The value is
and ATS automatically set during this adjustment (approx. 2
minutes).
(As the value increases, the sensor output
increases correspondingly.)
05 Adjustment Process Developer Auto adj. for dev. 2401 Adjustment for Y 0~255 M The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after 5 Yes
minutes).
05 Adjustment Process Developer Auto adj. for dev. 2402 Adjustment for M 0~255 M The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after 5 Yes
minutes).
05 Adjustment Process Developer Auto adj. for dev. 2403 Adjustment for C 0~255 M The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after 5 Yes
minutes).
05 Adjustment Process Developer Auto adj. for dev. 2404 Adjustment for K 0~255 M The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after 5 Yes
minutes).
05 Adjustment Process Developer Adjustment of 2405 0 Adjustment of (YMCK) Y 120 0~255 M 4 Yes
mode auto-toner initial
adjustment
reference setting
value (YMCK)
05 Adjustment Process Developer Adjustment of 2405 1 Adjustment of (YMCK) M 120 0~255 M 4 Yes
adjustment
reference setting
value (YMCK)
05 Adjustment Process Developer Adjustment of 2405 2 Adjustment of (YMCK) C 120 0~255 M 4 Yes
adjustment
reference setting
value (YMCK)
05 Adjustment Process Developer Adjustment of 2405 3 Adjustment of (YMCK) K 120 0~255 M 4 Yes
adjustment
reference setting
value (YMCK)
05 Adjustment Mode 1 Ver09

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Developer Auto adj. for dev. 2406 Automatic adjustment (Y, 0~255 M The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after 5 Yes
mode material supply M, C) this adjustment is started. The value is
minutes).
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias Y 2627 0 Lower limit 200 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
mode DC(-) calibration
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias Y 2627 1 Upper limit 900 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias M 2628 0 Lower limit 200 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias M 2628 1 Upper limit 900 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias C 2629 0 Lower limit 200 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias C 2629 1 Upper limit 900 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias K 2630 0 Lower limit 200 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Developer Developer bias K 2630 1 Upper limit 900 0~1000 M (Unit: V) 4 Yes
voltage
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Target value of 2662 0 Y 295 100~450 M Sets the target value of 1st pattern (high density) 4
mode control 1st pattern (high control for image control.
density control)
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Target value of 2662 1 M 307 100~450 M Sets the target value of 1st pattern (high density) 4
density control)
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Target value of 2662 2 C 315 100~450 M Sets the target value of 1st pattern (high density) 4
density control)
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Target value of 2662 3 K 314 100~450 M Sets the target value of 1st pattern (high density) 4
density control)
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2670 0 Y 5 0~16 M Sets the maximum correction number of time of 4
mode control closed-loop the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control full
control contrast mode.
voltage
correction/Full
mode maximum
number of time
corrected

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2670 1 M 5 0~16 M Sets the maximum correction number of time of 4
voltage
correction/Full
mode maximum
number of time
corrected
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2670 2 C 5 0~16 M Sets the maximum correction number of time of 4
voltage
correction/Full
mode maximum
number of time
corrected
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2670 3 K 5 0~16 M Sets the maximum correction number of time of 4
voltage
correction/Full
mode maximum
number of time
corrected
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2729 When the light source is 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 2
mode control display of image OFF when the sensor light source is OFF.
quality sensor
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2730 Transfer belt surface 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 2
mode control display of image (when there is no test pattern) on the transfer belt.
quality sensor
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2731 0 1st pattern (Y) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
mode control display of image when the 1st pattern (high-density test pattern) is
quality sensor output. The larger the value, the smaller the toner
amount adhered becomes.
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2731 1 1st pattern (M) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2731 2 1st pattern (C) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2731 3 1st pattern (K) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2732 0 2nd pattern (Y) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
mode control display of image when the 2nd pattern (low-density test pattern) is
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2732 1 2nd pattern (M) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2732 2 2nd pattern (C) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Output value 2732 3 2nd pattern (K) 0 0~1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor 10 Yes
05 Adjustment Process Image quality 2734 Light amount adjustment 0 0~255 M The LED light amount adjustment value of this 2
mode control result of image quality sensor is the reference value to set the reflected
sensor light from the belt surface.
05 Adjustment Process Image quality 2737 Relative humidity display 0 0~100 M Displays the relative humidity at the latest 2
mode control during latest closed-loop performing of the closed-loop control.(Unit: %)
control
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2738 Enforced performing in the M Performs the image quality closed-loop control in 6 Yes
mode control closed-loop short color mode the short color mode.
control
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2739 Enforced performing in the M Performs the image quality closed-loop control in 6 Yes
mode control closed-loop short black mode the short black mode.
control
05 Adjustment Process Image quality 2740 Enforced performing of - Performs the image quality open-loop control. 6 Yes
mode control image quality open-loop
control
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2742 Enforced performing of M Performs the image quality control. 6 Yes
mode control closed-loop image quality control
control
05 Adjustment Process Image quality 2745 Enforced performing of TRC M Performs the image quality TRC control. 6 Yes
mode control control
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality 2756 At the occurrence of CE10 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. 1
mode control sensor detection
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2757 0 Detection value on the belt 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
mode control sensor detection of CE20
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2757 1 Light intensity adjustment 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
mode control sensor detection of CE20 bit value
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 0 Detection value on the belt 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
mode control sensor detection of CE40
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 1 Light intensity adjustment 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
mode control sensor detection of CE40 bit value
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 2 First pattern Y detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
mode control sensor detection of CE40 value
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 3 First pattern M detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 4 First pattern C detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 5 First pattern K detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 6 Second pattern Y detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 7 Second pattern M detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 8 Second pattern C detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value
05 Adjustment Process Image quality Image quality At the occurrence 2758 9 Second pattern K detection 0 0~999 M Only "0" can be entered. (Unit: bit) 4
value
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2761 Temperature/humidity 23 0~100 M Displays the temperature value set at the image 2
mode sensor temperature display quality open-loop control transfer correction.
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2762 Temperature/humidity 50 0~100 M Displays the humidity value set at the image quality 2
mode sensor humidity display open-loop control transfer correction.
05 Adjustment Process Charger 2763 Drum thermistor 23 0~100 M (Unit: ºC) 2
mode temperature display 1
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 0 Y normal speed 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
mode output offset Offsetting level
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 1 M normal speed 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 2 C normal speed 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 3 K normal speed 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 5 BK Normal speed 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 6 Y decelerating 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 7 M decelerating 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 8 C decelerating 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 9 K decelerating 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 1st transfer 2905 11 BK decelerating 5 0~10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output. 4
0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6:
1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2934 0 Plain paper 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
mode color mode (Top in the color mode (Front side).
side) Offsetting level
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2934 1 Thick paper 1 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2934 4 Overhead transparencies 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2934 5 Special paper 1 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2934 7 Recycled paper 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2934 10 Envelope 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode color mode in the color mode (Back side).
(Back side) Offsetting level
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
mode black mode (Top in the black mode (Front side).
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Bias offset in the 2936 4 Overhead transparencies 5 0~10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias 4
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
mode black mode in the black mode (Back side).
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7:
1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2938 0 Plain paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
mode leading edge side in the color mode).
bias correction Offsetting level
factor (Front side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2938 1 Thick paper 1 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2938 4 Overhead transparencies 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2938 5 Special paper 1 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2938 7 Recycled paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2938 10 Envelope 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2939 0 Plain paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2939 1 Thick paper 1 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2939 5 Special paper 1 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2939 7 Recycled paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2939 10 Envelope 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the color mode) 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2940 0 Plain paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
mode leading edge side in the black mode).
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2940 4 Overhead transparencies 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2940 7 Recycled paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2940 10 Envelope 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Front 4
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2941 0 Plain paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2941 7 Recycled paper 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer 2nd transfer 2941 10 Envelope 0 0~16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias (Back 4
factor (Back side 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6:
in the black 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50 11: 0.45
mode) 12: 0.40 13: 0.35 14: 0.30 15: 0.25 16: 0.20
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Number of time 2961 0 Normal speed / High speed 0 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 4
mode of cleaning at times 5: 10 times 6: 12 times 7: 15 times
printing end
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Number of time 2961 1 Decelerating 0 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 4
printing end
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Number of time 2962 0 Normal speed / High speed 5 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 4
jam recovery /
bypass non-
standard printing
/ tab paper
printing.
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Number of time 2962 1 Decelerating 5 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 4
jam recovery /
bypass non-
standard printing
/ tab paper
printing.
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Setting value of 2963 Normal speed 0 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 1
mode number of times times 5: 10 times 6: 12 times 7: 15 times
cleaning is
performed after
the completion of
image quality
control
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Setting value of 2964 0 Normal speed 4 -50~25 M (Unit: μA) 4
mode 2nd transfer
restraining
current 2
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Setting value of 2964 1 Decelerating 4 -50~25 M (Unit: μA) 4
mode 2nd transfer
restraining
current 2

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Setting value of 2966 0 Normal speed / High speed 2 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 4
cleaning is
performed after
the completion of
forced toner
supply or standby
after fusing
05 Adjustment Process Transfer Setting value of 2966 1 Decelerating 2 0~7 M 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 5 times 4: 7 4
cleaning is
performed after
the completion of
forced toner
supply or standby
after fusing
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner 3009 Log table switching for 2 0~4 SYS 0: Same log table as the one used at copying with 1
mode RADF copying (color) original glass
1: Background reproduction - Light 2
2: Background reproduction - Light 1
3: Background reproduction - Dark 1
4: Background reproduction - Dark 2
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Image location 3030 Primary scanning direction 113 0~255 SYS When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
mode adjustment by approx. 0.0423 mm toward the front side of the
paper.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Image location 3031 Secondary scanning 130 67~189 SYS When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
mode adjustment direction by approx. 0.08192 mm toward the trailing edge of
the paper.
*If the value of 05-3031 is changed, the values of
05-3046 and 05-3047 are also changed. However,
the value of 05-3031 is not changed even if the
values of 05-3046 and 05-3047 are changed.
When the value of 05-3031 is changed, confirm the
values of 05-3046 and 05-3047. When adjusting
05-3031, 05-3046, and 05-3047, adjust 05-3031
first, then adjust 05-3046 and 05-3047.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Reproduction 3032 Adj. secondary 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by "1", the reproduction 1 Yes
mode ratio adjustment scan.direction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical
to paper feeding direction) increases by approx.
0.017%.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner 3033 Distortion mode - Moves carriages to the adjustment position. 6 Yes
mode
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Shading position 3034 Original glass 117 71~186 SYS 0.08192mm/step 1
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Shading position 3035 RADF 133 71~186 SYS 0.08333 mm/step 1
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF Adjustment of 3040 Single sided original 12 0~30 SYS When the value increases by "1", the aligning 1
mode RADF paper amount increases by approx. 0.4 mm.
alignment
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF Adjustment of 3041 Double sided original 12 0~30 SYS When the value increases by "1", the aligning 1
mode RADF paper amount increases by approx. 0.5 mm.
alignment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF 3042 Fine adjustment of transport 50 0~100 SYS When the value increases by "1", the reproduction 1 Yes
mode speed ratio of the secondary scanning direction on
original (fed from the RADF) increases by approx.
0.1%.
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF 3043 Sideways deviation 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by "1", the image of 1 Yes
mode adjustment original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear
side of paper by approx. 0.0423 mm.
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF Leading edge 3044 Front side 50 0~100 SYS When the value increases by "1", the copied image 1 Yes
mode position of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the
adjustment trailing edge of paper by approx. 0.2 mm.
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF Leading edge 3045 Back side 50 0~100 SYS When the value increases by "1", the copied image 1 Yes
mode position of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the
adjustment trailing edge of paper by approx. 0.2 mm.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner 3046 Carriage position 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by "1", the carriage 1
mode adjustment during scanning position shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the exit
from RADF (black) side when using the RADF.
*When adjusting 05-3031, 05-3046, and 05-3047,
adjust 05-3031 first, then adjust 05-3046 and 05-
3047.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner 3047 Carriage position 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by "1", the carriage 1
mode adjustment during scanning position shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the exit
from RADF (color) side when using the RADF.
*When adjusting 05-3031, 05-3046, and 05-3047,
adjust 05-3031 first, then adjust 05-3046 and 05-
3047.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Data transfer of 3203 CCD board -> SYS board SYS Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner 6
mode characteristic (shading correction factor / RGB color correction /
value reproduction ratio color deviation correction /
shading position correction factor / reproduction
ratio correction value in primary scanning direction)
from the EEPROM of the CCD board to the SRAM
of the SYS board.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Data transfer of 3209 SYS board -> CCD board SYS Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner 6
mode characteristic (shading correction factor / RGB color correction /
value reproduction ratio color deviation correction /
shading position correction factor / reproduction
ratio correction value in primary scanning direction)
from the SRAM of the SYS board to the EEPROM
of the CCD board.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner 3218 Automatic dust detection - Performs adjustment for shading correction plate 6
mode adjustment for shading by automatically detecting dust. If dust is detected,
correction plate shading correction is performed by avoiding the
dust.
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Size detection of 3233 Position adjustment in the Refer to 0~255 SYS Adjusts the detection range for size of original. 1
mode original primary scanning direction content <Default value>
NAD/TWD/CND: 128
Others: 58
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Size detection of 3234 Waiting position adjustment 200 0~255 SYS Adjusts the position where the carriage stops at the 1
mode original of carriage size detection of the original.
Default value: 100 (10 mm from leading edge of
original)
Maximum value: 255 (25.5 mm from leading edge
of original)
Minimum value: 0 (0 mm from leading edge of
original)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Size detection of 3236 Adjustment of lamp lighting 128 0~255 SYS Adjusts the lighting time of the lamp at the size 1
mode original time detection of the original.
Maximum value: 255 (Minimum time + 2040ms)
Minimum value: 0 (Minimum time)
05 Adjustment Scanner Scanner Size detection of 3237 Starting time adjustment of 64 0~255 SYS Adjusts the starting time of lamp lighting when the 1
mode original lamp lighting detection accuracy of dark originals is poor.
Maximum value: 255 (Minimum time + 2040 ms)
Minimum value: 0 (Minimum time)
05 Adjustment Scanner RADF 3350 Trailing edge adjustment of 50 0~100 SYS When the value increases by "1", the trailing edge 1
mode scanning of scanned original becomes longer by 0.3 mm at
RADF copying.
When the value decreases by "1", the trailing edge
of scanned original becomes shorter by 0.3 mm at
RADF copying.
* This code is effective when the value of 08-3075
is "1" (Allowed).
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of primary 4006 ALL Refer to 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the writing start 1 Yes
mode scan. writing start content position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423
mm.
<Default value>
NAD: 116
JPD: 126
Others: 128
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4016 0 Transport speed: Normal 133 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of ADU motor speed
rotational speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4016 4 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of ADU motor Decelerating
rotational speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4016 8 Transport speed1 128 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of ADU motor
rotational speed
mode of ADU motor
rotational speed
mode of ADU motor
rotational speed
mode of ADU motor
rotational speed
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of drawer 4018 0 1st drawer 128 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
mode sideways toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
deviation
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of drawer 4018 1 2nd drawer 128 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
deviation
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of drawer 4018 2 PFP upper drawer 128 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
deviation
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of drawer 4018 3 PFP lower drawer 128 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
deviation

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of drawer 4018 4 LCF 128 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
deviation
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of drawer 4018 5 Bypass feeding Refer to 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
mode sideways content toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
deviation <Default value>
JPD/NAD: 163
Others: 165
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of primary Duplex feeding 4019 0 Long size Refer to 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4 Yes
mode scan. writing start content toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
<Default value>
JPD: 118
NAD: 123
Others: 116
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of primary Duplex feeding 4019 1 Short size Refer to 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4 Yes
mode scan. writing start content toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
<Default value>
JPD: 118
NAD: 123
Others: 116
05 Adjustment Printer Image Adj. of primary Duplex feeding 4019 2 Middle size 128 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4 Yes
mode scan. writing start toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Margin PPC 4050 Top margin adjustment 0 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the blank area 1 Yes
mode adjustment becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Margin PPC 4052 Right margin adjustment Refer to 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the blank area 1 Yes
mode adjustment content becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
<Default value>
NAD: 10
Others: 0
05 Adjustment Printer Image Margin PPC 4053 Bottom margin adjustment 0 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the blank area 1 Yes
mode adjustment becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Margin PRT 4054 Top margin adjustment 24 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the blank area 1
mode adjustment (blank area at the leading becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
edge of the paper)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Margin PRT 4056 Right margin adjustment 0 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the blank area 1
mode adjustment (blank area at the right of becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Margin PRT 4057 Bottom margin adjustment 0 0~255 M When the value increases by "1", the blank area 1
mode adjustment (blank area at the trailing becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
edge of the paper)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4058 1st drawer 50 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
mode position toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.1
adjustment mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4059 2nd drawer 50 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
adjustment mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4060 PFP upper drawer 50 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
adjustment mm.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4061 Bypass feeding Refer to 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
mode position content toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.1
adjustment mm.
<Default value>
NAD: 54
Others: 55
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4062 Duplex feeding Refer to 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
adjustment mm.
<Default value>
JPD: 52
NAD: 56
Others: 55
05 Adjustment Printer Image Bottom margin Reverse side at 4064 0 Plain paper (Black) 24 0~255 M When the value increases, the blank area 4
mode adjustment(blank duplexing becomes wider.
area at the
trailing edge of
the paper)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Right margin Reverse side at 4064 1 Plain paper (Black) 18 0~255 M When the value increases, the blank area 4
area at the right
of the paper
along the paper
feeding direction)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Bottom margin Reverse side at 4064 2 Plain paper (Color) 24 0~255 M When the value increases, the blank area 4
area at the
trailing edge of
the paper)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Right margin Reverse side at 4064 3 Plain paper (Color) 18 0~255 M When the value increases, the blank area 4
area at the right
of the paper
along the paper
feeding direction)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Bottom margin Reverse side at 4064 4 Thick paper1 18 0~255 M When the value increases, the blank area 4
area at the
trailing edge of
the paper)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Right margin Reverse side at 4064 5 Thick paper1 12 0~255 M When the value increases, the blank area 4
area at the right
of the paper
along the paper
feeding direction)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge 4065 Reference for adjustment Refer to 0~200 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated) <Default value>
NAD: 97
Others: 106

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4100 0 Plain paper; Long size 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
mode system/Paper amount amount increases as follows: 0.5 mm
transport adjustment <Paper length>
Long size: 330 mm or longer
Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm
Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm
Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4100 1 Plain paper; Middle size 37 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4100 2 Plain paper; Short size1 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4100 3 Plain paper; :Short size2 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4100 4 Plain paper; :Short size3 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4101 0 Plain paper; Long size 32 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4101 1 Plain paper; Middle size 32 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4101 2 Plain paper; Short size1 19 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4101 3 Plain paper; :Short size2 19 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4101 4 Plain paper; :Short size3 19 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4103 0 Plain paper; Long size 37 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4103 1 Plain paper; Middle size 37 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4103 2 Plain paper; Short size1 37 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4103 3 Plain paper; :Short size2 37 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4103 4 Plain paper; :Short size3 37 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4104 0 Thick paper1 ;Long size 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
mode system/Paper amount amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm.
Long size: 330 mm or longer　
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4104 1 Thick paper1 ;Middle size 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4104 2 Thick paper1 ;Short size1 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4107 0 OHP film ;Long size 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4107 1 OHP film ;Middle size 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4107 2 OHP film ;Short size1 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4108 0 Plain paper; Long size 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4108 1 Plain paper; Middle size 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4108 2 Plain paper; Short size1 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4108 3 Plain paper; :Short size2 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4108 4 Plain paper; :Short size3 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4109 0 Plain paper; Long size 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4109 1 Plain paper; Middle size 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4109 2 Plain paper; Short size1 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4109 3 Plain paper; :Short size2 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4109 4 Plain paper; :Short size3 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning ADU 4110 0 Plain paper; Long size 36 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning ADU 4110 1 Plain paper; Middle size 36 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning ADU 4110 2 Plain paper; Short size1 36 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning ADU 4110 3 Plain paper; :Short size2 36 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning ADU 4110 4 Plain paper; :Short size3 36 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning LCF 4111 Plain paper 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Adjustment of 4112 0 Plain paper/Recycled paper 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the paper 4
mode system/Paper paper pushing pushing amount at bypass feeding increases by
transport amount at approx. 0.9 mm.
bypass feeding
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Adjustment of 4112 1 Thick paper/Special 20 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the paper 4
mode system/Paper paper pushing paper/Transparencies pushing amount at bypass feeding increases by
transport amount at approx. 0.6 mm.
bypass feeding
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Adjustment of 4113 0 Plain paper/Recycled paper 10 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the paper 4
mode system/Paper paper pushing pushing amount at feeding from 1st drawer
transport amount/1st increases by approx. 0.9 mm.
drawer
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Adjustment of 4113 1 Thick paper/Special paper 20 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the paper 4
mode system/Paper paper pushing pushing amount at feeding from 1st drawer
transport amount/1st increases by approx. 0.6 mm.
drawer
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4115 0 Thick paper1 ;Long size 39 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4115 1 Thick paper1 ;Middle size 39 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 1st drawer 4115 2 Thick paper1 ;Short size1 39 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4116 0 Thick paper1 ;Long size 32 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4116 1 Thick paper1 ;Middle size 32 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 2nd drawer 4116 2 Thick paper1 ;Short size1 19 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4117 0 Thick paper1 ;Long size 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4117 1 Thick paper1 ;Middle size 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP upper drawer 4117 2 Thick paper1 ;Short size1 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4118 0 Thick paper1 ;Long size 34 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4118 1 Thick paper1 ;Middle size 30 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning PFP lower drawer 4118 2 Thick paper1 ;Short size1 24 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning ADU 4120 0 Thick paper/Special paper; 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
mode system/Paper amount Long size amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm.
mode system/Paper amount Middle size amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm.
mode system/Paper amount Short size1 amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4128 0 Special paper1 ;Long size 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4128 1 Special paper1 ;Middle size 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4128 2 Special paper1 ;Short size1 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4129 0 Special paper2 ;Long size 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning Bypass feeding 4129 1 Special paper2 ;Middle size 27 0~63 M When the value increases by "1", the aligning 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4402 Common items Refer to 0~200 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
mode position contents toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.1
adjustment mm.
<Default value>
JPD: 130
NAD: 123
Others: 132
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adj. of 4526 0 Transport speed: Normal Refer to 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode drum/transfer speed content becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
belt motor speed <Default value>
JPD: 134
NAD: 128
Others: 133
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adj. of 4526 4 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode drum/transfer Decelerating becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
belt motor speed
mode of fuser roller speed
rotational speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4529 3 Transport speed: Normal 128 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of fuser roller speed
rotational speed

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode of fuser roller Decelerating
rotational speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4529 7 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of fuser roller Decelerating
rotational speed
mode of feed/transport speed
motor rotational
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4532 3 Transport speed: Normal 128 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of feed/transport speed
motor rotational
speed
mode of feed/transport Decelerating
motor rotational
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4532 7 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M 0.1%/step 4
mode of feed/transport Decelerating
motor rotational
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4535 0 Transport speed: Normal 105 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor speed becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4535 3 Transport speed: Normal 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor speed becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4535 4 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor Decelerating becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4535 7 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor Decelerating becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4535 8 Transport speed1 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed
speed
speed
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4535 12 Transport speed: Normal 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor speed (Transport in ADU) becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4535 15 Transport speed: Normal 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor speed (Transport in ADU) becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment 4535 16 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor Decelerating (Transport in becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed ADU)
05 Adjustment Printer Drive Fine adjustment PRT (Long size) 4535 19 Transport speed: 128 0~255 M When the value increases, the motor speed 4
mode of exit motor Decelerating (Transport in becomes faster. (0.1%/step)
speed ADU)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4560 PFP lower drawer 50 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
adjustment mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Normal speed 4561 T-LCF 50 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 1 Yes
adjustment mm.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Auxiliary 1st drawer 4562 0 Thick paper 1 56 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
mode adjustment value toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.1
of leading edge mm.
position
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Image Auxiliary 2nd drawer 4563 0 Thick paper 1 56 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
of leading edge mm.
position
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Image Auxiliary PFP upper drawer 4564 0 Thick paper 1 56 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
of leading edge mm.
position
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Image Auxiliary PFP lower drawer 4565 0 Thick paper 1 56 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
of leading edge mm.
position
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Bypass feeding 4567 0 Thick paper 1 59 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated)
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated)
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Bypass feeding 4567 3 OHP film 56 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Bypass feeding 4567 4 Special paper 1 64 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Image Leading edge Bypass feeding 4567 5 Special paper 2 64 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
adjustment mm.
(Decelerated)
05 Adjustment Printer Image Auxiliary ADU 4568 0 Thick paper 1 56 0~100 M When the value increases by "1", the image shifts 4
of leading edge mm.
position
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Paper aligning 4579 Using icons M Press the button on the LCD. 4 Yes
mode system/Paper amount
transport adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Image quality 4719 Forced color registration M Forcibly performs the color registration control 6 Yes
mode control control adjustment in order to eliminate the color deviation
of Y, M, C and K colors.
05 Adjustment Printer Image quality 4720 Displaying parameters for 0~255 M Checks the cause of a "CA00" error when it occurs. 2 Yes
mode control color regist.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PPC (black) 4731 0 Top margin 29 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
mode correction code
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PPC (color) 4731 1 Top margin 48 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PRT (black) 4731 2 Top margin 29 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PRT (color) 4731 3 Top margin 29 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PPC (black) 4731 4 Bottom margin 24 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PPC (color) 4731 5 Bottom margin 24 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PRT (black) 4731 6 Bottom margin 0 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Image Image void PRT (color) 4731 7 Bottom margin 0 0~48 M (0.4mm/10step) 4
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Drawer size 4800 0 1st drawer Refer to 0~2 SYS 0: Manual 4
mode system/Paper setting method contents 1: Automatic (mm)
transport 2: Automatic (inch)
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 1
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Drawer size 4800 1 2nd drawer Refer to 0~2 SYS 0: Manual 4
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 1
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Drawer size 4800 2 3rd drawer Refer to 0~2 SYS 0: Manual 4
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 1

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Feeding Drawer size 4800 3 4th drawer Refer to 0~2 SYS 0: Manual 4
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 1
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Plain paper 4808 0 Drawer 0 -20~20 M 0.5 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Plain paper 4808 1 Bypass feeding 0 -20~20 M 0.5 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Plain paper 4808 2 ADU 0 -20~20 M 0.5 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper1 4809 0 Drawer 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper1 4809 1 Bypass feeding 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper1 4809 2 ADU 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper 2 4810 0 Drawer 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper 2 4810 1 Bypass feeding 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper 2 4810 2 ADU 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper 3 4811 0 Drawer 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper 3 4811 1 Bypass feeding 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning Batch conversion Thick paper 3 4811 2 ADU 0 -20~20 M 0.6 mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Saddle stitch Adjustment of 4820 0 LD/A3 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode stapling position * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Saddle stitch Adjustment of 4820 1 LG/B4/8K/A4-R/LT-R/16K-R 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode stapling position * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Saddle stitch Adjustment of 4821 0 LD/A3 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode paper folding * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
position
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Saddle stitch Adjustment of 4821 1 LG/B4/8K/A4-R/LT-R/16K-R 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode paper folding * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
position
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Alignment 4822 0 Front 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode position * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Alignment 4822 1 Rear 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Stapling position 4823 0 Rear – One place 0 -25~25 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode adjustment * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Stapling position 4823 1 Rear – One place (R-series 0 -17~25 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode adjustment size) * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Stapling position 4823 2 Front – One place 0 -25~25 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Stapling position 4823 3 Front – One place (R-series 0 -25~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
mode adjustment size) * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Stapling position 4823 4 Center – 2 places 0 -17~17 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Stapling position 4823 5 Center – 2 places (Pitch) 0 -15~12 M 0.2mm/step 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher 4824 Adjustment of hole punch 0 -15~15 M 0.2mm/step 1 Yes
mode center position * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher 4825 Adjustment of hole punch 0 -20~12 M 0.2mm/step 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher Saddle stitch 4826 Adjustment of alignment 0 -15~15 M 0.2mm/step 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Printer Finisher 4827 Adjustment of ejection 0 -15~15 M 0.2mm/step 1 Yes
mode position of gripper * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Printer Image Amount of void 4831 Non-standard paper by 100 0~200 M Adjusts the amount of void at the trailing edge of 1 Yes
mode at the trailing bypass feeding non-standard paper by bypass feeding. When the
edge value is too small, stain may appear on the back
side of paper. 0.1mm/step.
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning ADU Small-sized paper 4832 0 Plain paper/Recycled paper 0 0~50 M 0.6mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer Aligning ADU Small-sized paper 4832 1 Thick paper/Special paper 0 0~50 M 0.6mm/step 4
mode adjustment
05 Adjustment Printer 4833 Recovery from toner M Perform this code to recover from toner 6
mode empty/waste toner full empty/waste toner full.
05 Adjustment Process Fuser 5990 Enforced performing of M Sets the amount of correction for the difference of 6
mode noncontact thermistor detected temperature caused by the gap between
correction the noncontact thermistor and heat roller. Perform
this code when the fuser unit or fuser unit related
parts are replaced. However, performing this code
is not necessary if the new or old detection control
is enabled.
05 Adjustment Image Reproduction Primary scanning 7000 PPC 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction 1
mode Processing ratio direction ratio in the primary scanning direction increases by
adjustment approx. 0.1%.
05 Adjustment Image Reproduction Primary scanning 7001 PRT/FAX 128 128~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction 1
mode Processing ratio direction ratio in the primary scanning direction increases by
adjustment approx. 0.1%.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC/SCN(black) 7025 ADF 128 0~255 SYS The larger the adjustment value, the darker the 1 Yes
mode Processing offset background becomes. The smaller the adjustment
adjustment value, the lighter the background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC/SCN(color) 7026 ADF 128 0~255 SYS The larger the adjustment value, the darker the 1 Yes
mode Processing offset background becomes. The smaller the adjustment
adjustment value, the lighter the background becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(black) 7056 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment becomes.
The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(black) 7057 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(black) 7058 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(black) 7061 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PPC(black) 7097 Text/Photo 2 0~4 SYS 0: Faint text is suppressed most. 1 Yes
mode Processing text adjustment 4: Smudged text is suppressed most.
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PPC(black) 7098 Text 2 0~4 SYS 0: Faint text is suppressed most. 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(black) 7100 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment becomes. The smaller the value, the lighter the
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(black) 7101 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(black) 7102 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(black) 7105 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(black) 7106 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Manual 7114 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment adjustment/Center center value becomes.
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Manual 7115 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Manual 7116 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Automatic density 7123 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Automatic density 7124 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Automatic density 7125 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Manual 7134 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Automatic density 7137 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Manual 7138 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(black) Automatic density 7141 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise PPC(black) 7150 User custom 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
mode Processing reduction streaks (set with 08-7617) becomes larger. When
When the value is too small, text might be blurry.
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise PPC(black) 7151 Text/Photo 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise PPC(black) 7152 Text 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Text/Photo 7190 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
mode Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Text/Photo 7190 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Text/Photo 7190 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Text 7191 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Text 7191 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Text 7191 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Photo 7192 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Photo 7192 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Photo 7192 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image LED emission PPC(black) 7212 0 Emission level 0/4 0 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lower the emission level 4 Yes
mode Processing level becomes and the smaller the dots are reproduced.
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Range PPC(black) Black/Manual 7237 User custom 1 0~1 SYS 0: Background peak - Fixed 1
mode Processing correction density adjustment 1: Background peak - Varied
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(black) 7249 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PPC(black) 7252 User custom 2 0~4 SYS 0: Faint text is suppressed most. 1
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) User custom 7276 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) User custom 7276 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) User custom 7276 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Range PPC(black) Black/Manual 7286 Text/Photo 1 0~1 SYS 0: Background peak - Fixed 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Range PPC(black) Black/Manual 7287 Text 1 0~1 SYS 0: Background peak - Fixed 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT(black/1200 7302 PS 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 1 Yes
mode Processing value in toner dpi) becomes.
saving mode * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT(black/600dpi 7307 0 PS 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 4 Yes
mode Processing value in toner ) becomes.
saving mode
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT(black/600dpi 7307 1 PCL 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 4 Yes
saving mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT(black/600dpi 7307 2 XPS 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 4 Yes
saving mode
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Smooth/1200d 7309 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing balance pi area becomes higher.
adjustment * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Smooth/1200d 7309 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Smooth/1200d 7309 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Detail/1200dpi 7310 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing balance area becomes higher.
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Detail/1200dpi 7310 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Detail/1200dpi 7310 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Smooth/600dpi 7315 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Smooth/600dpi 7315 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Smooth/600dpi 7315 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Detail/600dpi 7316 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Detail/600dpi 7316 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PS/Detail/600dpi 7316 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PCL/Smooth/600d 7317 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PCL/Smooth/600d 7317 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PCL/Smooth/600d 7317 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PCL/Detail/600dpi 7318 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PCL/Detail/600dpi 7318 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) PCL/Detail/600dpi 7318 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) XPS/Smooth/600d 7319 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) XPS/Smooth/600d 7319 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) XPS/Smooth/600d 7319 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) XPS/Detail/600dpi 7320 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) XPS/Detail/600dpi 7320 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PRT(black) XPS/Detail/600dpi 7320 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Fine line PRT(black) 7322 0 PS 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 4 Yes
mode Processing enhancement * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
switchover
05 Adjustment Image Fine line PRT(black) 7322 1 PCL 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 4 Yes
mode Processing enhancement
switchover
05 Adjustment Image Fine line PRT(black) 7322 2 XPS 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 4 Yes
switchover
05 Adjustment Image LED emission PRT(black) 7330 0 Emission level 0/4 0 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lower the emission level 4 Yes
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PRT(black) 7340 PS 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the small text and 1 Yes
mode Processing text adjustment fine lines become and the more faint text is
suppressed.
* This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PRT(black) 7341 PCL 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the small text and 1 Yes
suppressed.
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PRT(black) 7342 XPS 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the small text and 1 Yes
suppressed.
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/text 7360 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing balance dpi/Auto area becomes higher.
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/text 7360 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/text 7360 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/graphics 7361 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/graphics 7361 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/graphics 7361 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/image 7362 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/image 7362 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PS/image 7362 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/text 7363 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/text 7363 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/text 7363 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/graphics 7364 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/graphics 7364 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/graphics 7364 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/image 7365 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/image 7365 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 PCL/image 7365 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/text 7366 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/text 7366 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/text 7366 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/graphics 7367 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/graphics 7367 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/graphics 7367 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/image 7368 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/image 7368 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Gamma Monochrome/600 XPS/image 7368 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(black) 7400 User custom 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(black) 7401 Text/Photo 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(black) 7402 Text 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(black) 7403 Photo 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(black) 7404 Gray scale 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(black) 7430 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(black) 7431 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(black) 7432 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(black) 7433 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(black) 7436 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(black) 7437 Text 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(black) 7438 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(black) 7439 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(black) 7441 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Manual 7444 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Manual 7445 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Manual 7446 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Manual 7447 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Automatic density 7456 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Automatic density 7457 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Automatic density 7458 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Automatic density 7459 Gray scale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(black) 7470 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Manual 7475 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1
value
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(black) Automatic density 7478 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) User custom 7480 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) User custom 7480 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) User custom 7480 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Text/Photo 7485 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Text/Photo 7485 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Text/Photo 7485 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Photo 7487 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Photo 7487 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Photo 7487 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Gray scale 7488 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Gray scale 7488 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma SCN(black) Gray scale 7488 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Image NW scanning 7489 Amount of surrounding void 0 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the blank area around 1 Yes
mode Processing the scanned image becomes wider. (e.g.: In
network scanning with 600 dpi, if the setting value
is "1", the blank area increases by 1 dot.)
05 Adjustment Image Density FAX(black) Manual 7533 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1
value
05 Adjustment Image Density FAX(black) Manual 7534 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the image at the 1
value
05 Adjustment Image Density FAX(black) Manual 7535 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1
value
05 Adjustment Image Density FAX(black) Automatic density 7542 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1
05 Adjustment Image Density FAX(black) Automatic density 7543 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1
05 Adjustment Image LED emission FAX(black) 7594 0 Emission level 0/4 0 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lower the emission level 4 Yes
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Blank page 7618 PPC/SCN 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the more the original tends to 1 Yes
mode Processing judgment be judged as a blank page.
threshold
adjustment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image ACS judgment 7630 PPC/SCN 70 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the more the original tends to 1 Yes
mode Processing threshold be judged as black even in the auto color mode.
The smaller value, the more it tends to be judged
as color.
05 Adjustment Image Black area adj. PPC(color) Selected 2colors 7641 0 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the area 4 Yes
mode Processing in twin color recognized as black in the original becomes.
copy mode The smaller the value, the larger the area
recognized as colors other than black becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Black area adj. PPC(color) Selected 2colors 7641 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the area 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Black area adj. PPC(color) Selected 2colors 7641 2 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the area 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Black area adj. PPC(color) Black and red 7642 0 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the area 4 Yes
mode Processing in twin color recognized as red in the original becomes.
recognized as colors other than red becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Black area adj. PPC(color) Black and red 7642 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the area 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Black area adj. PPC(color) Black and red 7642 2 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the area 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Magenta 7644 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment color color during mono color copying / twin color
copying. The larger the value, the darker the
density. The smaller the value, the lighter the
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Magenta 7644 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Magenta 7644 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Magenta 7644 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Yellow 7645 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Yellow 7645 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Yellow 7645 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Yellow 7645 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Yellow green 7646 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment color during mono color copying. The larger the
value, the darker the density. The smaller the
value, the lighter the density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Yellow green 7646 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Yellow green 7646 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Yellow green 7646 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Cyan 7647 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Cyan 7647 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Cyan 7647 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Cyan 7647 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Pink 7648 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Pink 7648 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Pink 7648 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Pink 7648 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Red 7649 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Red 7649 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Red 7649 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Red 7649 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Orange 7650 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Orange 7650 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Orange 7650 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Orange 7650 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Green 7651 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Green 7651 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Green 7651 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Green 7651 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Blue 7652 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Blue 7652 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Blue 7652 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color / twin Blue 7652 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
density.
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Purple 7653 0 Y 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Purple 7653 1 M 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Purple 7653 2 C 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Copy color Mono color Purple 7653 3 K 128 0~255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7656 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7657 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7658 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7659 Photo (developing paper) 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7660 Map 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7661 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) 7662 Red seal color 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1
background becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7665 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4
mode Processing adjustment of becomes. The smaller the value, the darker the
hue magenta becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7665 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
mode Processing adjustment of becomes. The smaller the value, the darker the red
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7665 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
mode Processing adjustment of The smaller the value, the darker the yellow
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7665 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
mode Processing adjustment of The smaller the value, the darker the green
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7665 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7665 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
mode Processing adjustment of The smaller the value, the darker the blue
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7666 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7666 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
hue becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7666 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7666 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7666 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7666 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7667 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7667 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7667 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7667 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7667 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7667 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7668 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) becomes. The smaller the value, the darker the
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7668 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) becomes. The smaller the value, the darker the red
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7668 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) The smaller the value, the darker the yellow
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7668 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) The smaller the value, the darker the green
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7668 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) becomes. The smaller the value, the darker the
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7668 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) The smaller the value, the darker the blue
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7669 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7669 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7669 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7669 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7669 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7669 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7670 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7670 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7670 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7670 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7670 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7670 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7671 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the yellow 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7671 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the green 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7671 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the cyan becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7671 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the blue becomes. 4
hue becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7671 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the magenta 4
hue cyan becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7671 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the red becomes. 4
hue becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7675 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
mode Processing adjustment of and input the smaller value to decrease the
saturation saturation.
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7675 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7675 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7675 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7675 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text/Photo 7675 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7676 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7676 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7676 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7676 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7676 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Text 7676 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7677 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7677 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7677 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7677 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7677 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Printed image 7677 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7678 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
mode Processing adjustment of paper) and input the smaller value to decrease the
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7678 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7678 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7678 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7678 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Photo (developing 7678 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7679 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7679 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7679 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7679 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7679 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Map 7679 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7680 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7680 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7680 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7680 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7680 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) User custom 7680 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7681 0 Red 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7681 1 Yellow 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7681 2 Green 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7681 3 Cyan 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7681 4 Blue 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine PPC(color) Red seal color 7681 5 Magenta 128 0~255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation, 4
05 Adjustment Image Color PPC(color) 7690 User custom 0 0~4 SYS 0: Text/Photo, printed photo, text, map 1
mode Processing reproduction 1: Photo (developing paper)
selection 2: Reproduction of red seal color
3, 4: Text/Photo, printed photo, text, map
05 Adjustment Image Color PPC(color) 7691 Reproduction of red seal 2 0~4 SYS 0: Text/Photo, printed photo, text, map 1
mode Processing reproduction color 1: Photo (developing paper)
selection 2: Reproduction of red seal color
3, 4: Text/Photo, printed photo, text, map
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise PPC(color) User custom 7693 Enable/Disable setting 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode Processing reduction This code is enabled only when the value of 08-
7614 is "1"(Text/Photo).
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise PPC(color) Text/Photo 7694 Enable/Disable setting 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode Processing reduction
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) Mono color 7707 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) Mono color 7708 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) Mono color 7709 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) Twin color 7710 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) Twin color 7711 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background PPC(color) Twin color 7712 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7713 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment adjustment/Center becomes.
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7714 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7715 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7716 Photo (developing paper) 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7717 Map 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7718 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Manual 7719 Red seal color 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1
value
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7720 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7721 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7722 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7723 Photo (developing paper) 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7724 Map 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7725 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density PPC(color) Automatic density 7726 Red seal color 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1
05 Adjustment Image Density Mono color Manual 7727 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density Mono color Manual 7728 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density Mono color Manual 7729 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density Mono color Automatic density 7730 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density Mono color Automatic density 7731 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Density Mono color Automatic density 7732 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density Twin color Manual 7733 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density Twin color Manual 7734 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density Twin color Manual 7735 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density Twin color Automatic density 7736 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density Twin color Automatic density 7737 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density Twin color Automatic density 7738 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7794 Red seal color 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7795 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7796 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7797 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7798 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7799 Photo (developing paper) 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Full color 7800 Map 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Mono color 7801 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Mono color 7802 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Mono color 7803 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Twin color 7804 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Twin color 7805 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PPC(color) Twin color 7806 Printed image 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Black header PPC(color) 7811 Text/Photo 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the header 1 Yes
mode Processing density level becomes.
adjustment The smaller the value, the lighter the header
becomes
05 Adjustment Image Black header PPC(color) 7812 Text 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the header 1 Yes
becomes
05 Adjustment Image Black header PPC(color) 7816 User custom 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the header 1 Yes
becomes
05 Adjustment Image Black header PPC(color) 7817 Red seal color 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the header 1
becomes
05 Adjustment Image Text/Photo PPC(color) 7840 Text/Photo 0 0~9 SYS 1 to 4: Photo-oriented 1 Yes
mode Processing reproduction 0, 5: Default
level 6 to 9: Text-oriented
adjustment * Text is blurred if the value is to small. Noise
increases in the photo area if the value is to large.
05 Adjustment Image Text/Photo PPC(color) 7841 User custom 0 0~9 SYS 1 to 4: Photo-oriented 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Text/Photo PPC(color) 7842 Red seal color 0 0~9 SYS 1 to 4: Photo-oriented 1
05 Adjustment Image Marker color 7850 0 PPC(color) "Y" 3 0~6 SYS The color of the one-touch adjustment “Marker” 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment can be adjusted.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Marker color 7850 1 PPC(color) "M" 3 0~6 SYS The color of the one-touch adjustment “Marker” 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Marker color 7850 2 PPC(color) "C" 3 0~6 SYS The color of the one-touch adjustment “Marker” 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Marker color 7850 3 PPC(color) "R" 3 0~6 SYS The color of the one-touch adjustment “Marker” 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Marker color 7850 4 PPC(color) "G" 3 0~6 SYS The color of the one-touch adjustment “Marker” 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Marker color 7850 5 PPC(color) "B" 3 0~6 SYS The color of the one-touch adjustment “Marker” 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7869 All media types SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
mode Processing gamma reproduction, the gradation reproduction of 4 colors
adjustment can be corrected with the automatic gamma
adjustment.
The result of the correction above will be applied to
all media types.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7871 0 Plain paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
The result of the correction above will be applied
for each media type.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7871 2 Recycled paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7871 3 Thick paper1 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7871 4 Thick paper2 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7871 7 Special paper1 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
all media types.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PPC(color) Color/Black 7871 8 Special paper2 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Maximum text PPC(color) 7889 Y 5 0~10 SYS The larger the value, the darker the text becomes. 1
mode Processing density
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum text PPC(color) 7890 M 5 0~10 SYS The larger the value, the darker the text becomes. 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum text PPC(color) 7891 C 5 0~10 SYS The larger the value, the darker the text becomes. 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum text PPC(color) 7892 K 5 0~10 SYS The larger the value, the darker the text becomes. 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7901 Envelope 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
mode Processing toner density the high-density section of the image.
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7902 Plain paper 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7904 Recycled paper 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7905 Thick paper1 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7906 Thick paper2 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7909 Special paper1 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7910 Special paper2 255 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7911 OHP film 240 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the less toner is adhered to 1
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 0 Plain paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
mode Processing toner density amount of toner to be adhered becomes. The
threshold smaller the value, the smaller the maximum
setting amount of toner to be adhered becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 2 Recycled paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 3 Thick paper 1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 4 Thick paper 2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 7 Special paper 1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 8 Special paper 2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 11 Envelope 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PPC(color) 7913 12 OHP film 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Gray scale 7956 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Gray scale 7956 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Gamma PPC(black) Gray scale 7956 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Yes
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Text/Photo 7960 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment darker as the value increases.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Text/Photo 7960 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Text/Photo 7960 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Text 7961 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Text 7961 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Text 7961 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Printed image 7962 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Printed image 7962 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Printed image 7962 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Photo (developing 7963 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment paper) darker as the value increases.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Photo (developing 7963 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Photo (developing 7963 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Map 7964 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Map 7964 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Map 7964 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Text/Photo 7965 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Text/Photo 7965 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Text/Photo 7965 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Text 7966 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Text 7966 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Text 7966 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Printed image 7967 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Printed image 7967 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Printed image 7967 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Photo (developing 7968 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Photo (developing 7968 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Photo (developing 7968 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Map 7969 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Map 7969 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Map 7969 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Text/Photo 7970 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Text/Photo 7970 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Text/Photo 7970 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Text 7971 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Text 7971 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Text 7971 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Printed image 7972 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Printed image 7972 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Printed image 7972 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Photo (developing 7973 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Photo (developing 7973 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Photo (developing 7973 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Map 7974 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Map 7974 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Map 7974 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Text/Photo 7975 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Text/Photo 7975 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Text/Photo 7975 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Text 7976 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Text 7976 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Text 7976 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Printed image 7977 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Printed image 7977 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Printed image 7977 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Photo (developing 7978 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Photo (developing 7978 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Photo (developing 7978 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Map 7979 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Map 7979 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Map 7979 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" User custom 7980 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" User custom 7980 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" User custom 7980 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" User custom 7981 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" User custom 7981 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" User custom 7981 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" User custom 7982 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" User custom 7982 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" User custom 7982 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" User custom 7983 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" User custom 7983 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" User custom 7983 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Red seal color 7984 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Red seal color 7984 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "Y" Red seal color 7984 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Red seal color 7985 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Red seal color 7985 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "M" Red seal color 7985 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Red seal color 7986 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Red seal color 7986 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "C" Red seal color 7986 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Red seal color 7987 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Red seal color 7987 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PPC(color) "K" Red seal color 7987 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The target color, mode and density area become 4
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 600dpi 8004 0 Plain paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 600dpi 8004 2 Recycled paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 600dpi 8004 3 Thick paper1 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 600dpi 8004 7 Special paper1 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 1200dpi 8005 0 Plain paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 1200dpi 8005 2 Recycled paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
adjustment.
adjustment.
adjustment.
adjustment.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 600dpi 8008 All media types SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
all media types.
05 Adjustment Image Automatic PRT(color) 1200dpi 8009 All media types SYS When color deviation is found in gradation 7 Yes
adjustment.
all media types.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Smooth/Color/600 8010 0 PS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment dpi becomes.
The smaller the value, the lighter the background
becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Smooth/Color/600 8010 1 PCL 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Smooth/Color/600 8010 2 XPS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Smooth/Twin 8011 0 PS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment color/600dpi becomes.
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Smooth/Twin 8011 1 PCL 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Smooth/Twin 8011 2 XPS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) Smooth/Monocolor 8012 0 PS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment /600dpi becomes.
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) Smooth/Monocolor 8012 1 PCL 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) Smooth/Monocolor 8012 2 XPS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Detail/Color/600dp 8013 0 PS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment i becomes.
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Detail/Color/600dp 8013 1 PCL 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Detail/Color/600dp 8013 2 XPS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Detail/Twin 8014 0 PS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Detail/Twin 8014 1 PCL 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) Detail/Twin 8014 2 XPS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) Detail/Monocolor/6 8015 0 PS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment 00dpi becomes.
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) Detail/Monocolor/6 8015 1 PCL 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) Detail/Monocolor/6 8015 2 XPS 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) 8016 Smooth/Color/1200 dpi 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(color) 8017 Detail/Color/1200 dpi 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) 8018 Smooth/Black/1200 dpi 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Background PRT(black) 8019 Detail/Black/1200 dpi 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the background 1 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color 8023 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment printing/PRT(colo color becomes.
r) "K"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color 8023 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "K"

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color 8023 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "K"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color Y 8024 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color Y 8024 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color Y 8024 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color M 8025 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color M 8025 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color M 8025 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color C 8026 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color C 8026 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance 2 color C 8026 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
r) "C"
r) "M"
r) "M"
r) "M"
r) "M"
r) "M"
r) "M"
r) "M"

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
r) "M"
r) "M"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Y"
r) "Red"
r) "Red"
r) "Red"
r) "Red"
r) "Red"
r) "Red"

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
r) "Red"
r) "Red"
r) "Red"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Green"
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"
r) "Blue"
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" XPS/Smooth/600d 8042 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment pi color becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" XPS/Smooth/600d 8042 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" XPS/Smooth/600d 8042 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" XPS/Smooth/600d 8043 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" XPS/Smooth/600d 8043 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" XPS/Smooth/600d 8043 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" XPS/Smooth/600d 8044 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" XPS/Smooth/600d 8044 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" XPS/Smooth/600d 8044 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" XPS/Smooth/600d 8045 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" XPS/Smooth/600d 8045 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" XPS/Smooth/600d 8045 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8046 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment color becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8046 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8046 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8047 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8047 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8047 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8048 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8048 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8048 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8049 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8049 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" XPS/Detail/600dpi 8049 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8050 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8050 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8050 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8051 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8051 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8051 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8052 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8052 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8052 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8053 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8053 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PS/Smooth/600dpi 8053 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PS/Detail/600dpi 8054 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PS/Detail/600dpi 8054 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PS/Detail/600dpi 8054 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PS/Detail/600dpi 8055 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PS/Detail/600dpi 8055 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PS/Detail/600dpi 8055 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PS/Detail/600dpi 8056 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PS/Detail/600dpi 8056 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PS/Detail/600dpi 8056 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PS/Detail/600dpi 8057 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PS/Detail/600dpi 8057 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PS/Detail/600dpi 8057 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PCL/Smooth/600d 8058 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PCL/Smooth/600d 8058 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PCL/Smooth/600d 8058 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PCL/Smooth/600d 8059 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PCL/Smooth/600d 8059 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PCL/Smooth/600d 8059 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PCL/Smooth/600d 8060 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PCL/Smooth/600d 8060 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PCL/Smooth/600d 8060 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PCL/Smooth/600d 8061 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PCL/Smooth/600d 8061 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PCL/Smooth/600d 8061 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8062 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8062 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "Y" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8062 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8063 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8063 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "M" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8063 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8064 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8064 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "C" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8064 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8065 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8065 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) "K" PCL/Detail/600dpi 8065 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker only the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance NW PRT (color) 8066 Switchover of adjustment 1 0~1 SYS Switches the image processing method for the 1
mode Processing adjustment mode density of solid images at color balance adjustment
for network printing.
0: Adjusts color balance with the solid image
density fixed
1: Adjusts color balance with the solid image
density varied
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 0 Plain paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
mode Processing toner density dpi) amount of toner to be adhered becomes.
threshold adj. The smaller the value, the smaller the maximum
amount of toner to be adhered becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 2 Recycled paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 3 Thick paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 4 Thick paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 7 Special paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 8 Special paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 11 Envelope 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Detail 8070 12 OHP film 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 0 Plain paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 2 Recycled paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 3 Thick paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 4 Thick paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 7 Special paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 8 Special paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 11 Envelope 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 Smooth 8071 12 OHP film 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 0 Plain paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
mode Processing toner density pi) amount of toner to be adhered becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 2 Recycled paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 3 Thick paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 4 Thick paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 7 Special paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 8 Special paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 11 Envelope 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Detail 8089 12 Overhead transparencies 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 0 Plain paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 2 Recycled paper 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 3 Thick paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 4 Thick paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 7 Special paper1 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 8 Special paper2 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 11 Envelope 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d Smooth 8090 12 Overhead transparencies 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the larger the maximum 4
05 Adjustment Image Fine line PRT(color) 8102 0 PS 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 4 Yes
switchover

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Fine line PRT(color) 8102 1 PCL 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 4 Yes
mode Processing enhancement
switchover
05 Adjustment Image Fine line PRT(color) 8102 2 XPS 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 4 Yes
switchover
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(color) e- 8108 0 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment BRIDGE/PS/Twin becomes.
color The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(color) e- 8108 1 Graphics 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(color) e- 8108 2 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(color) e-BRIDGE/PS 8109 0 Red seal color/Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(color) e-BRIDGE/PS 8109 1 Red seal color/Graphics 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(color) e-BRIDGE/PS 8109 2 Red seal color/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4
becomes.
mode Processing adjustment BRIDGE/PS/Gene becomes.
ral The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes.
becomes.
becomes.
mode Processing adjustment BRIDGE/PS/Photo becomes.
graph The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes.
becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
becomes.
mode Processing adjustment BRIDGE/PS/Prese becomes.
ntation The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes.
becomes.
becomes.
mode Processing adjustment BRIDGE/PS/Line becomes.
art The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes.
becomes.
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(black) e-BRIDGE/PS 8118 0 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment becomes. The smaller the value, the softer the
image becomes.
If the value of 05-7322 is "0", the adjustment is
applied to text, and if the value is "1", the
adjustment is applied to text and others.
0: No adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(black) e-BRIDGE/PS 8118 1 Graphics 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment becomes. The smaller the value, the softer the
image becomes.
If the value of 05-7322 is "0", the adjustment is
applied to graphics, and if the value is "1", the
adjustment is applied to thin text.
0: No adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness PRT(black) e-BRIDGE/PS 8118 2 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 4 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PRT(color) 8130 PS 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the small text and 1 Yes
suppressed.
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PRT(color) 8131 PCL 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the small text and 1 Yes
suppressed.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Smudged/faint PRT(color) 8132 XPS 0 0~8 SYS The larger the value, the darker the small text and 1 Yes
suppressed.
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/600 8145 OHP film 200 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
mode Processing toner density dpi) becomes.
adjustment The smaller the value, the lighter the image
becomes.
* Image offset may occur if the value is too large.
05 Adjustment Image Maximum PRT(color/1200d 8149 OHP film 200 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1
mode Processing toner density pi) becomes.
adjustment The smaller the value, the lighter the image
becomes.
* Image offset may occur if the value is too large.
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT color/Two- 600dpi 8160 0 PS 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 4 Yes
mode Processing value in toner color becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT color/Two- 600dpi 8160 1 PCL 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 4 Yes
saving mode
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT color/Two- 600dpi 8160 2 XPS 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Upper limit PRT(color) 1200dpi 8161 PS 176 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the printed image 1 Yes
mode Processing value in toner becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Text 8210 0 General 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
mode Processing Black/Gray to be replaced with black becomes.
threshold The smaller the value, the narrower the range
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Text 8210 1 Photo 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Text 8210 2 Presentation 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Text 8210 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Graphic 8211 0 General 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Graphic 8211 1 Photo 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Graphic 8211 2 Presentation 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Graphic 8211 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Image 8212 0 General 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Image 8212 1 Photo 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Image 8212 2 Presentation 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PCL/Image 8212 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) Twin color 8213 Text 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 1 Yes
mode Processing Black/Gray print/General to be replaced with black becomes.
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) Twin color 8214 Graphics 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 1 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) Twin color 8215 Image 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 1 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Black selection PRT(color) Twin color print 8218 Photo 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the image on an original is printed in 1 Yes
mode Processing the color or the black mode.
0: OFF (printed in color)
1: ON (printed in black)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Stroke PS/PDF 600dpi 8239 0 Default setting 1 0~3 SYS This code is used to change the width of fine lines 4
mode Processing adjustment automatic stroke in PS and PDF printing. Automatic stroke
adjustment adjustment is the function that prevents the width
from changing according to the position.
This code sets whether automatic stroke
adjustment is enabled or disabled if it is not
included in the print data. If this setting is disabled,
there will be an increase in cases in which the
width of fine lines becomes thicker by 1 dot when
they are printed.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Forcibly disabled (Ignores command in printing
data)
3: Forcibly enabled (Ignores command in printing
data)
05 Adjustment Image Stroke PS/PDF 600dpi 8239 1 Minimum stroke width when 1 1~2 SYS This code is used to change the width of fine lines 4
mode Processing adjustment automatic stroke disabled in PS and PDF printing. Automatic stroke
This code sets the minimum width of fine lines
when the automatic stroke adjustment is disabled.
For example, if automatic stroke adjustment is
disabled and the width of fine lines is set to "0" in
the PS command, the width of the lines becomes 1
dot if the value of this code is set to "1"; equally, if it
is set to “2”, the width of the lines becomes 2 dots.
1: 1 dot
2: 2 dots
05 Adjustment Image Stroke PS/PDF 1200dpi 8239 2 Default setting 1 0~3 SYS This code is used to change the width of fine lines 4
mode Processing adjustment automatic stroke in PS and PDF printing. Automatic stroke
This code sets whether automatic stroke
adjustment is enabled or disabled if it is not
included in the print data. If this setting is disabled,
there will be an increase in cases in which the
width of fine lines becomes thicker by 1 dot when
they are printed.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Forcibly disabled (Ignores command in printing
data)
3: Forcibly enabled (Ignores command in printing
data)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Stroke PS/PDF 1200dpi 8239 3 Minimum stroke width when 1 1~2 SYS This code is used to change the width of fine lines 4
mode Processing adjustment automatic stroke disabled in PS and PDF printing. Automatic stroke
This code sets the minimum width of fine lines
when the automatic stroke adjustment is disabled.
For example, if automatic stroke adjustment is
disabled and the width of fine lines is set to "0" in
the PS command, the width of the lines becomes 1
dot if the value of this code is set to "1"; equally, if it
is set to “2”, the width of the lines becomes 2 dots.
1: 1 dot
2: 2 dots
05 Adjustment Image Line width PRT(color) 8240 600dpi 2 1~9 SYS The larger the value, the darker the fine lines 1 Yes
mode Processing minimum value become.
adjustment
05 Adjustment Image Line width PRT(color) 8241 1200dpi 2 1~9 SYS The larger the value, the darker the fine lines 1
mode Processing minimum value become.
05 Adjustment Image Line density PRT(color) 1200dpi 8242 0 Gray (K) 3 0~5 SYS The larger the value, the darker the fine line 4
05 Adjustment Image Line density PRT(color) 1200dpi 8242 1 Color (CMYK) 1 0~5 SYS The larger the value, the darker the fine line 4
05 Adjustment Image Line density PRT(color) 1200dpi 8243 0 Gray (K) lower limit value 1 0~255 SYS Specifies the effective density range of 05-8242 4
mode Processing adjustment from 0 to 255.
05 Adjustment Image Line density PRT(color) 1200dpi 8243 1 Gray (K) upper limit value 200 0~255 SYS Specifies the effective density range of 05-8242 4
mode Processing adjustment from 0 to 255.
05 Adjustment Image Line density PRT(color) 1200dpi 8243 2 Color (CMYK) lower limit 1 0~255 SYS Specifies the effective density range of 05-8242 4
mode Processing adjustment value from 0 to 255.
05 Adjustment Image Line density PRT(color) 1200dpi 8243 3 Color (CMYK) upper limit 255 0~255 SYS Specifies the effective density range of 05-8242 4
mode Processing adjustment value from 0 to 255.
05 Adjustment Image Auto Trapping PRT(color) PS/Text, 8244 0 Trapping width (dot) 3 1~3 SYS Sets the value of width for Auto Trapping. When 4
mode Processing setting PS/Graphic the value increases, the bigger gap is suppressed,
but the overlap part becomes more visible.
1: 1 dot
2: 2 dot
3: 3 dot
05 Adjustment Image Auto Trapping PRT(color) PS/Text, 8244 1 Trapping density (%) 0 0~3 SYS Sets the value of density for Auto Trapping. When 4
mode Processing setting PS/Graphic the value increases, the bigger gap is suppressed,
but the overlap part becomes more visible.
0: 100%
1: 75%
2: 50%
3: 25%

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Text 8249 0 General 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Text 8249 1 Photo 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Text 8249 2 Presentation 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Text 8249 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Text 8249 4 Advanced 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Graphic 8250 0 General 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Graphic 8250 1 Photo 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Graphic 8250 2 Presentation 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Graphic 8250 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Graphic 8250 4 Advanced 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Image 8251 0 General 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Image 8251 1 Photo 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Image 8251 2 Presentation 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Image 8251 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) XPS/Image 8251 4 Advanced 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Text 8252 0 General 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Text 8252 1 Photo 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Text 8252 2 Presentation 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Text 8252 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Text 8252 4 Advanced 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Graphic 8253 0 General 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Graphic 8253 1 Photo 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Graphic 8253 2 Presentation 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Graphic 8253 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Graphic 8253 4 Advanced 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Image 8254 0 General 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Image 8254 1 Photo 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Image 8254 2 Presentation 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Image 8254 3 Line art 8 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Pure PRT(color) PS/Image 8254 4 Advanced 1 1~255 SYS The larger the value, the wider the range of colors 4 Yes
adjustment becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) PS/Smooth/1200d 8268 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment pi/Y area becomes higher.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) PS/Smooth/1200d 8268 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) PS/Smooth/1200d 8268 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment pi/M area becomes higher.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode Processing adjustment pi/C area becomes higher.
mode Processing adjustment pi/K area becomes higher.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) PS/Detail/1200dpi/ 8272 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment Y area becomes higher.
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) PS/Detail/1200dpi/ 8272 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Color balance PRT(color) PS/Detail/1200dpi/ 8272 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the density in the target 4 Yes
mode Processing adjustment M area becomes higher.
mode Processing adjustment C area becomes higher.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode Processing adjustment K area becomes higher.
05 Adjustment Image JPEG NW SCN(color) 8304 0 High quality 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the quality gets better, 4
mode Processing compression and the file size gets larger.
level
05 Adjustment Image JPEG NW SCN(color) 8304 1 Standard 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the quality gets better, 4
level
05 Adjustment Image JPEG NW SCN(color) 8304 2 Low quality 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the quality gets better, 4
level
05 Adjustment Image Color NW SCN(color) 8305 Text/Photo 1 0~2 SYS 0: Text, Photo 1
mode Processing conversion 1: Text/Photo
table selection 2: For reproduction of pure color
05 Adjustment Image Color NW SCN(color) 8308 User custom 0 0~2 SYS 0: Text, Photo 1
mode Processing conversion 1: Text/Photo
table selection 2: For reproduction of pure color
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(color) 8309 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(color) 8310 Text 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(color) 8311 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The smaller the value, the lighter the background 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Fine SCN(color) 8314 Text/Photo 1 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment of the image becomes.
black density
05 Adjustment Image Fine SCN(color) 8315 Text 0 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1 Yes
black density
05 Adjustment Image Fine SCN(color) 8316 Photo 0 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1 Yes
black density
05 Adjustment Image RGB SCN(color) 8319 Text/photo 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1 Yes
mode Processing conversion 0: sRGB
method 1: AppleRGB
selection 2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB
05 Adjustment Image RGB SCN(color) 8320 Text 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1 Yes
method 1: AppleRGB
3: AdobeRGB

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image RGB SCN(color) 8321 Photo 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1 Yes
method 1: AppleRGB
3: AdobeRGB
05 Adjustment Image Saturation SCN(color) 8324 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1 Yes
The smaller the value, the duller the image
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Saturation SCN(color) 8325 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Saturation SCN(color) 8326 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1 Yes
becomes.
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(color) Full color 8335 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(color) Full color 8336 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(color) Manual 8339 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(color) Manual 8340 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(color) Manual 8341 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1 Yes
value
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(color) Full color 8354 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Yes
05 Adjustment Image Background SCN(color) 8370 User custom 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases, the background 1 Yes
mode Processing adjustment becomes darker.
05 Adjustment Image Fine SCN(color) 8371 User custom 0 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1
black density
05 Adjustment Image RGB SCN(color) 8372 User custom 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1
method 1: AppleRGB
3: AdobeRGB
05 Adjustment Image Saturation SCN(color) 8373 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1
becomes.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
05 Adjustment Image Sharpness SCN(color) Full color 8375 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1
05 Adjustment Image Density SCN(color) Manual 8380 User custom 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image 1
value
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(color) 8412 User custom 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(color) 8413 Text/Photo 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(color) 8414 Text 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment Image ADF noise SCN(color) 8415 Photo 100 0~200 SYS When the value decreases, the effect of reducing 1
05 Adjustment System Maintenance 9043 Equipment number (serial SYS If this code is performed, 08-9601 is performed. 7 1
mode number) display digits out of 9 digits can be entered except for
upper 2 digits (fixed digits).
05 Adjustment System Image 9104 Compression quality of 5 0~10 SYS 0-10 1
mode SLIM PDF background 0: High compression, low image quality
processing 10: Low compression, high image quality
05 Adjustment System Image 9107 Resolution of SLIM PDF 1 0~3 SYS 0: 75dpi 1
mode background processing 1: 100dpi
2: 150dpi
3: 200dpi
05 Adjustment System Image 9149 Acquisition of image - Insert the USB media before performing this code. 6
mode location adjustment log
05 Adjustment FAX FAX 9850 Volume adjustment for 4 0~7 SYS When the value is entered for this code the ring 12
mode telephone/fax ringtone tone comes from the speaker at the set volume.
The set value is stored when the [INTERRUPT]
button is pressed.
05 Adjustment System Maintenance 9960 Display of equipment Refer to 0~2 SYS Displays the equipment information in SRAM. 2
mode information (SRAM) contents 0: Not set
1: Destinations other than NAD
2: NAD
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 1

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser 2002 Fuser unit error status 0 0~71 M 0: No error 1: C411 error 2: C412 error 3: - 4: 1
mode counter C412 error 5: C445 error 6: C446 error 7: C447
error 8: - 9: C449 error 10: - 11: - 12: - 13: -
14: - 15: - 16: - 17: - 18: - 19: C449 error 20: -
21: - 22: C449 error 23: C449 error 24: C447
error 25: C449 error 26: - 27: C449 error 28: -
29: C449 error 30: - 31: - 32: - 33: - 34: - 35: -
36: - 37: - 38: C450 error 39: - 40: - 41: C451
error 42: - 43: - 44: - 45: - 46: - 47: - 48: C450
error 49: - 50: C452 error 51: - 52: - 53: - 54: -
55: - 56: - 57: - 58: - 59: - 60: - 61: - 62: - 63: -
64: - 65: - 66: - 67: - 68: - 69: - 70: - 71: -
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / Plain 2010 0 At normal temperatures Refer to 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 4
mode paper (black) contents 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / Plain 2010 1 At normal temperatures Refer to 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 4
mode paper (color) contents 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / Plain 2010 2 At low temperatures (black) 12 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 4
mode paper 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / Plain 2010 3 At low temperatures (color) 12 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 4
mode paper 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing Center / Special 2017 0 Special paper 1 (except for 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode temperature paper long-sized paper) 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing Center / Special 2017 1 Special paper 2 (except for 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing Side / Special 2018 0 Special paper 1 (except for 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing Side / Special 2018 1 Special paper 2 (except for 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Special paper 2020 0 Special paper 1 / Normal 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
mode for first printing 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10:
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Mode 1 Ver09

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Special paper 2020 1 Special paper 2 / Normal 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing 2042 Center 0 0~25 M 0: OFF 1: 40ºC 2: 45ºC 3: 50ºC 4: 55ºC 5: 60ºC 1
mode temperature in 6: 65ºC 7: 70ºC 8: 75ºC 9: 80ºC 10: 85ºC 11:
the low power 90ºC 12: 95ºC 13: 100ºC 14: 105ºC 15: 110ºC
mode 16: 115ºC 17: 120ºC 18: 125ºC 19: 130ºC 20:
135ºC 21: 140ºC 22: 145ºC 23: 150ºC 24:
155ºC 25: 160ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / Thick 2049 0 Normal length paper 13 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 4
mode paper 1 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / Thick 2050 0 Normal length paper 14 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 4
mode paper 2 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Center / OHP film 2051 Normal length paper 14 0~16 M 0: 90 ºC 1: 95 ºC 2: 100 ºC 3: 105 ºC 4: 110 ºC 1
mode 5: 115 ºC 6: 120 ºC 7: 125 ºC 8: 130 ºC 9: 135
ºC 10: 140 ºC 11: 145 ºC 12: 150 ºC 13: 155 ºC
14: 160 ºC 15: 165 ºC 16: 170 ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time 2052 OHP film 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 1
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Plain paper / At 2053 0 black 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
mode for first printing low temperatures 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10:
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Plain paper / At 2053 1 color 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Thick paper1 2054 0 Normal length paper 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Thick paper 2 2055 0 Normal length paper 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Center and side 2079 0 Black 4 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 4
mode setting to start thermistor 5: 145ºC 6: 150ºC 7: 155ºC 8: 160ºC 9: 165ºC
process for 10: 170ºC 11: 175ºC 12: Disable
abnormality /
Thick paper 1
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Center and side 2079 1 Color 5 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 4
abnormality /
Thick paper 1

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
abnormality /
Plain paper/
Normal
temperature
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Center and side 2080 1 Color Refer to 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 4
mode setting to start thermistor contents 5: 145ºC 6: 150ºC 7: 155ºC 8: 160ºC 9: 165ºC
abnormality / <Default value>
Plain paper/ JPD: 3
Normal Others: 4
temperature
abnormality /
Thick paper 2
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Center and side 2081 1 Color 5 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 4
abnormality /
Thick paper 2
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 0 Plain paper (black) 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
mode of pre-running min. 4: 2 min. 5: 3 min. 6: 5 min. 7: 7 min. 8: 10
time for first min. 9: 15 min. 10: 30 min. 11: 60 min.
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 1 Plain paper (color) 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 4 Recycled paper (black) 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 5 Recycled paper (color) 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 8 Thick paper 1 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 9 Thick paper 2 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 12 OHP film 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 13 Special paper 1 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 14 Special paper 2 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Low temperature 2085 15 Envelope 8 0~11 M 0: Invalid (always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Plain paper / At 2087 0 black 3 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 4
mode setting to start low temperatures 5: 145ºC 6: 150ºC 7: 155ºC 8: 160ºC 9: 165ºC
error handling 10: 170ºC 11: 175ºC 12: Disable
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Plain paper / At 2087 1 color 4 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 4
mode setting to start low temperatures 5: 145ºC 6: 150ºC 7: 155ºC 8: 160ºC 9: 165ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature 2088 OHP film 6 0~12 M 0: 120ºC 1: 125ºC 2: 130ºC 3: 135ºC 4: 140ºC 1
mode setting to start 5: 145ºC 6: 150ºC 7: 155ºC 8: 160ºC 9: 165ºC
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Side / Plain paper 2140 0 Normal temperature/Black Refer to 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode contents 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Side / Plain paper 2140 1 Normal temperature/Color Refer to 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode contents 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Side / Plain paper 2140 2 Low temperature/Black 12 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Side / Plain paper 2140 3 Low temperature/Color 12 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser 2141 Side / Thick paper 1 13 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 1
mode 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser 2142 Side / Thick paper 2 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 1
mode 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser 2143 Fusing temperature during 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 1
mode printing (Side / Overhead 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
transparencies) 140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Retention period 2179 0 Plain paper/Recycled 0 0~10 M 0: Disabled 1: 10 sec. 2: 20 sec. 3: 30 sec. 4: 40 4
mode of temperature of paper/Thin paper sec. 5: 50 sec. 6: 60 sec. 7: 90 sec. 8: 120 sec.
print operation at 9: 150 sec. 10: 180 sec.
print end
08 Setting Process Fuser Retention period 2179 1 Thick paper 1, 0 0~10 M 0: Disabled 1: 10 sec. 2: 20 sec. 3: 30 sec. 4: 40 4
mode of temperature of 2/OHP/Special paper 1, sec. 5: 50 sec. 6: 60 sec. 7: 90 sec. 8: 120 sec.
print operation at 2/Envelope 9: 150 sec. 10: 180 sec.
print end
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing 2194 Center 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 1
mode temperature for 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
envelop 140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing 2195 Side 14 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 1
mode temperature for 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
envelop 140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain 2205 0 Black/Heat roller (Center) 12 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control paper/Normal 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain 2205 1 Black/Heat roller (Side) 12 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control paper/Normal 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain 2205 2 Color/Heat roller (Center) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control paper/Normal contents 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 12
Others: 13
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain 2205 3 Color/Heat roller (Side) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 12
Others: 13
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain paper / At 2206 0 Black/Heat roller (Center) 12 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control low temperatures 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain paper / At 2206 1 Black/Heat roller (Side) 12 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain paper / At 2206 2 Color/Heat roller (Center) 13 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Plain paper / At 2206 3 Color/Heat roller (Side) 13 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Thick paper1 2208 0 Heat roller (Center) 13 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Thick paper1 2208 1 Heat roller (Side) 13 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Thick paper 2 2209 0 Heat roller (Center) 14 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Thick paper 2 2209 1 Heat roller (Side) 14 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature 2233 Envelope (Center/side 6 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 1
mode setting to start thermistor) 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
error handling 170℃ 11: 175℃ 12: Disabled
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Special paper 2246 0 Special paper 1 6 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 4
mode setting to start (Center/side 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
error handling thermistor) 170℃ 11: 175℃ 12: Disabled
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Special paper 2246 1 Special paper 2 6 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 4
mode setting to start (Center/side 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
error handling thermistor) 170℃ 11: 175℃ 12: Disabled
08 Setting Process Fuser 2248 Threshold value for 2 0~10 M 0: Disabled 1: 30 sec. 2: 60 sec. 3: 90 sec. 4: 1
mode application time of pre- 120 sec. 5: 150 sec. 6: 180 sec. 7: 210 sec. 8:
running when finished 240 sec. 9: 270 sec. 10: 300 sec.
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing 2250 Side 0 0~25 M 0: OFF 1: 40℃ 2: 45℃ 3: 50℃ 4: 55℃ 5: 60℃ 1
mode temperature in 6: 65℃ 7: 70℃ 8: 75℃ 9: 80℃ 10: 85℃ 11:
the low power 90℃ 12: 95℃ 13: 100℃ 14: 105℃ 15: 110℃
mode 16: 115℃ 17: 120℃ 18: 125℃ 19: 130℃ 20:
135℃ 21: 140℃ 22: 145℃ 23: 150℃ 24: 155℃
25: 160℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time 2282 Envelope 0 0~15 M 0: Disabled 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 1
mode for first printing 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
08 Setting Process Transfer Setting of 2nd 2307 For each destination/paper Refer to 0~5 M 0: 80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/EUR 1
mode transfer bias table thickness contents 1: 75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC
2: 64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/JPN
3: -
4: -
5: -
<Default value>
MJD: 0
NAD: 1
Others: 2

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Charger 2365 Main charger wire cleaning - 5 0~9 M Sets the display interval for cleaning if "Color 1 Yes
mode cycle setting banding (in feeding direction)" occurs.
0: Invalid 1: 3000 pages 2: 5000 pages 3: 7500
pages 4: 10000 pages 5: 15000 pages 6: 20000
pages 7: 25000 pages 8: 30000 pages 9: 35000
pages
08 Setting Process Cleaner 2370 Exhaust fan high-speed 6 0~10 M Sets the longer time if blurred image, white 1 Yes
mode rotation period in ready banding (at right angles to feeding direction), or
status color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
occurs.
0: No control 1: 10 sec. 2: 20 sec. 3: 30 sec. 4:
40 sec. 5: 50 sec. 6: 1 min. 7: 2 min. 8: 3 min. 9:
7 min. 10: 15 min.
08 Setting Process General 2373 Enable/Disable setting of 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1
mode new or old detection of 1: Enabled
developer and cleaner
08 Setting Process Cleaner Control of 2380 Control setting of 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1
mode photoconductive photoconductive drum idling 1: Enabled
drum idling in in standby mode
standby mode
08 Setting Process Cleaner Control of 2381 Rotation starting time 0 0~6 M Refer to "3.11.4 Drum driving sleep mode". 1
mode photoconductive 0: 10 sec. 1: 20 sec. 2: 30 sec. 3: 1 min. 4: 2
drum idling in min. and 50 sec. 5: 6 min. and 50 sec. 6: 9 min.
standby mode and 50 sec.
08 Setting Process Cleaner Control of 2382 Time interval 4 0~7 M Refer to "3.11.4 Drum driving sleep mode". 1
mode photoconductive 0: 10 sec. 1: 20 sec. 2: 30 sec. 3: 1 min. 4: 2
drum idling in min. 5: 3 min. 6: 5 min. 7: 7 min.
standby mode
08 Setting Process Cleaner Control of 2383 Maximum number 5 0~6 M Refer to "3.11.4 Drum driving sleep mode". 1
mode photoconductive 0: Once 1: Twice 2: 3 times 3: 4 times 4: 5
drum idling in times 5: 7 times 6: 10 times
standby mode
08 Setting Process Developer 2385 Setting of the number of 7 1~255 M Setting value x 10 (sheets) 1
mode sheets to shift to sleep
mode for the drum drive
08 Setting Process Fuser 2386 Condition of shift to pre- 4 0~7 M 0: None (Temperature condition is disabled) 1
mode sleep mode (temperature) 1: 10 degrees C or less 2: 12 degrees C or less 3:
14 degrees C or less 4: 16 degrees C or less 5:
18 degrees C or less 6: 20 degrees C or less 7:
22 degrees C or less
08 Setting Process Developer Main 2387 Synchronization setting of 0 0~1 M Synchronizes the display timing of the cleaning of 1
mode charger/LED notice for cleaning the main charger and LED head. If the
head synchronization setting is enabled, the main
charger and LED head may become dirty because
of the insufficient cleaning.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Image quality 2486 Contrast voltage 1 0~1 M Sets whether or not correcting the contrast voltage 1
mode control closed-loop control in image quality control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Image quality 2492 At the first power-ON in the 1 0~2 M Sets the behavior of closed-loop control at power- 1
mode control closed-loop morning ON when the fuser roller temperature becomes
control automatic below the specified level.
start-up 0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Performed in the short mode)
2: Enabled (Performed in the full mode)
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality 2493 Vc default value open 1 0~1 M 0: Calculated with environmental parameter 1
mode control method selection 1: Result of last close + environmental variation
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality 2495 Enable/Disable setting of 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode control image quality close IQC
Short mode
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Image quality 2496 Period of time unattended 1 0~2 M Sets the behavior of closed-loop control at the 1
mode control closed-loop operation start when the equipment has not been
control automatic used for a specified period of time in the energy
start-up saving mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Performed in the short mode)
2: Enabled (Performed in the full mode)
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality 2497 Accumulated copied/printed 100 0~500 M Unit (Sheets) 1
mode control number of sheets setting 2
for start-up of short mode
IQC
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Image quality 2498 Accumulated print volume 1 0~1 M Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control 1
mode control closed-loop automatically when the specified number of sheets
control automatic has been printed out from the previous control.
start-up 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Image quality 2500 When recovered from 1 0~1 M Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control 1
mode control closed-loop "Toner empty" automatically when recovered from "Toner empty".
control automatic 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
start-up
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Auto start 2505 Relative humidity difference 2 0~6 M Color mode only. 1
mode control 0: 0% 1: 5% 2: 10% 3: 15% 4: 20% 5: 25% 6:
30%
08 Setting Process Developer 2506 Enable/disable setting of 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode toner density correction When setting the value of 08-2708 (Toner density
control ratio manual offset control) to other than "0"
(Disabled), set the value of this code to "0"
(Disabled).
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Auto start 2507 Period of time unattended 15 0~15 M Sets the unattended period of time to perform 1 Yes
mode control closed-loop control automatically at the start of
operation when the equipment has not been used
for a specified period of time in the energy saving
mode.
0: 3 1: 5 2: 7 3: 10 4: 15 5: 20 6: 30 7: 45 8:
60 9: 90 10: 120
11: 150 12: 180 13: 240 14: 300 15: 360
(Unit: minute)
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality Image quality 2509 Setting of accumulated print 1000 100~9999 M Sets the number of accumulated print volume to 1
mode control closed-loop volume perform closed-loop control when "1" (valid) is set
control automatic in 08-2498.
start-up Image problems may occur if the value extremely
smaller than the default value is set to the
equipment whose print ratio of monochrome is
relatively high.
(unit: pages)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Normal speed 2513 0 Y 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
mode control offset correction +40 8: +60 9: +80 10: +100
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Normal speed 2513 1 M 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Normal speed 2513 2 C 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Normal speed 2513 3 K 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Decelerating 2514 0 Y 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Decelerating 2514 1 M 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Decelerating 2514 2 C 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Contrast voltage Decelerating 2514 3 K 5 0~10 M 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: 0 6: +20 7: 4
setting (Unit: V)
08 Setting Process Image quality Abnormality Display/0 clearing 2528 Y 0 0~16 M Counts the abnormality detection of image quality 1 Yes
mode control detection control.
Accumulating total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40]
08 Setting Process Image quality Abnormality Display/0 clearing 2529 M 0 0~16 M Counts the abnormality detection of image quality 1 Yes
08 Setting Process Image quality Abnormality Display/0 clearing 2530 C 0 0~16 M Counts the abnormality detection of image quality 1 Yes
08 Setting Process Image quality Abnormality Display/0 clearing 2531 K 0 0~16 M Counts the abnormality detection of image quality 1 Yes
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Normal speed 2548 0 Y 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
mode control white 8: 10 9: 15 10: 20 11: 25 12: 30
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Normal speed 2548 1 M 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Normal speed 2548 2 C 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Normal speed 2548 3 K 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Decelerating 2549 0 Y 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Decelerating 2549 1 M 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Decelerating 2549 2 C 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Image quality Potential on Decelerating 2549 3 K 6 0~12 M 0: -30 1: -25 2: -20 3: -15 4: -10 5: -5 6: 0 7: 5 4
background/Corre
ction setting
08 Setting Process Transfer 2556 1st transfer environmental 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode control switchover
08 Setting Process Image quality Image quality 2600 Enable/disable setting of 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode control pattern formation of image
quality TRC control
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 0 Normal speed Y 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
mode LED sub-line isolated points and thickness of fine lines in the
emission time image. The larger the value, the sharper the
isolated points become and the sharper and
thicker the fine lines become. Be sure to perform
image quality control after changing the value.
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 1 Normal speed M 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 2 Normal speed C 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 3 Normal speed K 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 4 Decelerating Y 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 5 Decelerating M 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 6 Decelerating C 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Multiple values 2620 7 Decelerating K 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 0 Normal speed Y 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 1 Normal speed M 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 2 Normal speed C 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 3 Normal speed K 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 4 Decelerating Y 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 5 Decelerating M 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 6 Decelerating C 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for Binary 2621 7 Decelerating K 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 0 Normal speed Y 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 1 Normal speed M 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 2 Normal speed C 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 3 Normal speed K 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 4 Decelerating Y 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 5 Decelerating M 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 6 Decelerating C 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process LED Factor setting for 1200dpi 2622 7 Decelerating K 15 8~36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the 4
08 Setting Process Image quality Refreshing 2677 Enable/Disable setting 0 0~1 M Sets whether the control to stabilize image quality 1
mode control behavior after after the equipment is left unattended for a long
being left time is enabled or not. When this setting is
unattended enabled, the amount of toner consumption and
waste toner may increase.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting Process Image quality Refreshing 2678 0 Display of number of times 0 0~9999 M Only 0 clear is available. 4
mode control behavior after of execution (Level 1) Unit: number of times
being left
unattended
being left
unattended
being left
unattended
08 Setting Process Image quality Refreshing 2679 0 Display of number of times 1 1~20 M Unit: number of times 4
mode control behavior after of repeated execution
being left (Level 1)
unattended
unattended
unattended
08 Setting Process Developer Toner density Y 2707 0 Y 0 0~8 M 0: Disabled 1: +4bit 2: +7bit 3: +10bit 4: +14bit 4
mode ratio manual 5: -4bit 6: -7bit 7: -10bit 8: -14bit
offset control When setting the value of this code to other than
"0", set the value of 08-2506 (Enable/disable
setting of toner density correction control) to "0"
(Disabled).
08 Setting Process Developer Toner density M 2707 1 M 0 0~8 M 0: Disabled 1: +4bit 2: +7bit 3: +10bit 4: +14bit 4
(Disabled).
08 Setting Process Developer Toner density C 2707 2 C 0 0~8 M 0: Disabled 1: +4bit 2: +7bit 3: +10bit 4: +14bit 4
(Disabled).

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Developer Toner density K 2707 3 K 0 0~8 M 0: Disabled 1: +4bit 2: +7bit 3: +10bit 4: +14bit 4
(Disabled).
08 Setting Scanner 3015 Pre-scan setting switchover 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not performing pre-scanning 1 Yes
mode 1: Performing pre-scanning
08 Setting Scanner RADF 3021 Set for switchback-mixed 0 0~1 SYS This setting is whether the original length is 1 Yes
mode size copy detected or not by transporting without scanning in
reverse when A4-R/FOLIO paper or LT-R/LG
paper is detected in a mixed size copying.
0: Disabled -
AMS:
A series - Judges as A4-R without transporting in
reverse with no scanning.
LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by its
length without transporting in reverse with no
scanning.
APS:
A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO
without transporting in reverse with no scanning.
LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG without
transporting in reverse with no scanning.
1: Enable 1
AMS:
A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO by
Transporting without scanning in reverse to detect
its length.
LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by
transporting without scanning in reverse to detect
its length.
APS:
The same as that of APS in 0: Disabled.
08 Setting Scanner 3025 Correction of carriage 2 0~2 SYS 0: No correction 1
mode position 1: Performs correction before scanning
2: Performs correction after scanning
08 Setting Scanner 3065 Initialization of model - Normally this code is not used. When an error 3
mode information in lens unit occurs by installing the lens unit used for other
models, perform this code to initialize the model
information.
08 Setting Scanner RADF 3075 Allowing of trailing edge 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not allowed 1
mode adjustment of scanning 1: Allowed
08 Setting Scanner RADF 3076 Original trailing edge 0 0~1 SYS Set the original trailing edge pushing 1
mode pushing 0: Disabled　1: Enabled
* This code is valid for HDD model only.
* This function is available only for A4 or LT paper.
* Selecting "Disable" will lower the performance
when using A4 or LT paper.
08 Setting Scanner 3080 Detection method of original 1 1, 3 SYS 1: Two-step detection (lights twice) 1
mode size 3: Single-step detection (lights once)
When "3" is set, the detection accuracy of dark
originals may decrease.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 3500 Device setting 0 0~4294967 SYS To enable the e-Bridge ID Gate, a card reading 5 Yes
mode 295 device should be set in the order of "ABYYZZZZ".
(Enter the corresponding values to "A", "B", "YY"
and "ZZZZ".)
- AB: Special setting
- A: Debugging NIC
0: Not used 1: Used
- B: Interface
0: USB connection 1: Serial connection (KP-
2003 only)
- YY: Authentication
00: No authentication using card
03: Mifare (KP-2005 only)
04: HID (KP-2004 only)
09: Magnetic card I/F
- ZZZZ: Sub-code (Specifies the usage type of card
ID)
0000: No authentication using card
0001: IDm (Felica/NFC-Felica) and (or) UID
(Mifare/NFC-Mifare)
0002: Data (Felica/NFC-Felica/Mifare/NFC-Mifare)
0003: SSFC mode
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 3501 Card reader format 0 0~4294967 SYS To access the data in the noncontact IC card, the 5 Yes
mode information -1 295 Key Information "LLLL" and the Sector Number
"MMMM" should be set. The "LLLL" should be set
first, and then "MMMM".
<KP-2005>
LLLL: Key information
MMMM: Sector number (hexadecimal number)
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 3502 Card reader format 0 0~4294967 SYS The data of the block number in the noncontact IC 5 Yes
mode information -2 295 is set.
<KP-2005>
RRBSEbse (hexadecimal number)
RR: 00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block number
S: 1st area beginning byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte offset
b: 2nd area block number
s: 2nd area beginning byte offset
e: 2nd area ending byte offset
* If the 2nd block/area is not used, set the SSTU to
"FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the bse to"FFF"
(hexadecimal number).
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 3503 Card reader format 0 Refer to SYS Security key "KKKKKKKKKKKK" (12 digits) 5 Yes
mode information -3 contents <hexadecimal number> in the [Key Information] of
the [Sector Number] set in the code 08-3501
should be entered.
<Acceptable value>
0-0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 3504 Card authentication LDAP 0 0~100 SYS LDAP server number for the card authentication 1 Yes
mode server when a noncontact IC card is used should be set.
08 Setting System General Available profile 3600 0 WL_IS34_00.icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for 14
mode display the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub-
code.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.
code.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
code.
08 Setting System General 3601 Recovery of the profile at 0 0~53 SYS Recovers the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG 1
mode the shipment Device Pure Gray TRC in the same sub-code.
0: WL_IS34_00 1: WL_IS34_01 2:
WL_IS34_02 ..... 51: WL_IS34_51 52:
WL_IS34_52 53: WL_IS34_53
08 Setting System General 3602 Copying the profile at the 0 0~53 SYS Copies the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG 1
mode shipment to USB memory Device Pure Gray TRC in the same sub-code to
the USB memory.
0: WL_IS34_00 1: WL_IS34_01 2:
WL_IS34_02 ..... 51: WL_IS34_51 52:
WL_IS34_52 53: WL_IS34_53
08 Setting System General 3603 Updating the profile at the 0 0~53 SYS Uploads the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG 1
mode shipment from UBS memory Device PureGray TRC in the same sub-code from
the USB memory.
0: WL_IS34_00 1: WL_IS34_01 2:
WL_IS34_02 ..... 51: WL_IS34_51 52:
WL_IS34_52 53: WL_IS34_53
08 Setting System General Displaying the 3604 0 WL_IS34_00.000 SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG 14
mode attribute of the Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub-
profile at the code.
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
08 Setting System General Displaying the 3604 25 (20/25ppm) SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG 14
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
shipment
shipment
shipment * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System General 3605 Making the profile available 0 0~53 SYS Selecting a profile Overwrites the adjusted RGB 1
mode Ink Sym profile on the current area
(PG CIE Based PureGray TRC in the same sub-
code is overwritten to the current area.)
0: WL_IS34_00 1: WL_IS34_01 2:
WL_IS34_02 ..... 51: WL_IS34_51 52:
WL_IS34_52 53: WL_IS34_53
08 Setting System General 3606 Copying the adjusted profile 0 0~53 SYS Copies the adjusted RGB Ink Sim profile and PG 1
mode to USB memory CIE Based Pure Gray TRC in the same sub-code
to USB memory.
0: WL_IS34_00 1: WL_IS34_01 2:
WL_IS34_02 ..... 51: WL_IS34_51 52:
WL_IS34_52 53: WL_IS34_53
08 Setting System General 3607 Uploading the adjusted 0 0~53 SYS Uploads the adjusted RGBInkSim profile and PG 1
mode profile from USB memory CIE Based PureGray TRC in the same sub-code
from the USB memory.
0: WL_IS34_00 1: WL_IS34_01 2:
WL_IS34_02 ..... 51: WL_IS34_51 52:
WL_IS34_52 53: WL_IS34_53
08 Setting System General Displaying the 3608 0 WL_IS34_00.001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE 14
mode attribute of the Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub-
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment
shipment

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System General 3612 Date of unpacking 13 digits SYS Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/second 11 Yes
mode Example:03 07 01 3 13 27 48
"Day" - "0" is for "Sunday".
Proceeds Monday through Saturday from "1" to "6".
08 Setting System General 3615 List print USB storage 0 0~1 SYS 0: Enable (USB storage available) 1
mode setting 1: Disable (USB storage not available)
08 Setting System General 3619 Clearing of service history SYS Initializes the service history list file. 3
mode list file
08 Setting System General Real time log 3623 Job filtering setting 0 0~65535 SYS Changes the target type of jobs for notification in 1
mode notification real time log notification function.
function
08 Setting System General Real time log 3624 Log item filtering setting 2147483921 0~4294967 SYS Changes the target type of logs for notification in 5
mode notification 295 real time log notification function.
function
08 Setting System General Real time log 3626 Department information 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the department information (number, 1
mode notification transmission setting name, code) is transmitted or not in the real time
function log notification function.
0: Department number, department name,
department code
1: Department number, department name
08 Setting System General 3628 Enable/Disable setting of 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode standard data overwrite 1: Enabled
function * This code is valid for NAD only.
08 Setting System General 3629 Enabling/Disabling standard 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode EWB function 1: Enabled
* This code is valid for MJD and AUD only.
08 Setting System Network 3631 Remote Access (SNMP) 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode 1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface 3635 Trial copy function 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled1: Enabled 1
mode
08 Setting System Network InternetFax 3637 Addition of transmission 0 0~1 SYS 0:Disabled 1 Yes
mode header 1:Enabled
08 Setting System Network InternetFax 3638 Addition of receiving record 0 0~1 SYS 0:Disabled 1 Yes
mode 1:Enabled
08 Setting System Network InternetFax 3639 Adding method of 1 1~2 SYS 1: Overwriting inside the image (5 mm from the top) 1 Yes
mode transmission header 2: Adding outside the image (5 mm from the top)
08 Setting System Network MDS Authentication 3640 Authentication of MDS 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled (Normal mode) 1
mode system 1: Enabled (MDS authentication mode)
* If the EWB license has not been installed at
startup, this code becomes "0".

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network MDS Authentication 3641 Display in TopAccess 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the information of MDS 1
mode Authentication will be displayed or not in
TopAccess and control panel.
0: Non display
1: Display
* When "1" is set in 3640, the setting value of this
code becomes "1" accordingly. The setting value
cannot be changed to "0".
* If the EWB license has not been installed at
startup, this code becomes "0".
08 Setting System Network 3642 0 User authentication setting 0 0~3 SYS 0: Authentication with user name and domain name 4
mode for NW print/NW 1: No authentication control in the equipment
fax/Internet fax function 2: Authentication with user name
3: Authentication with domain participation
information
08 Setting System Network 3642 2 Disabling job 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 4
mode authentication/permission 1: ON
check/Quota check for
DPWS Scan
08 Setting System User interface 3643 Filtering condition for job list 1 0~1 SYS 0: Filtered with user name 1
mode on the panel 1: Filtered with domain name and user name
* This code is valid only when the value of 08-3642-
0 is "1".
08 Setting System General 3644 Login restriction for 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode reissued card
08 Setting System User interface User 3646 Copy 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode authentication
08 Setting System User interface User 3647 FAX 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode authentication
08 Setting System User interface User 3648 Printer/e-Filing 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode authentication
08 Setting System User interface User 3649 Scanning 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode authentication
08 Setting System User interface User 3650 List print 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode authentication
08 Setting System User interface 3651 Authentication method for 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Only password 1
mode administrator 1: User name and password
08 Setting System User interface 3652 Switchover of card reader 0 0~1 SYS Switches the display on the control panel 1
mode display on the control panel (authentication screen) depending on the
connected card reader.
0: Non-contact type
1: Card insertion type

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User interface 3653 Timing of the determined for 0 0~1 SYS Selects the timing to be determined whether the 1
mode the print job connectable print job connectable.
0: Consumables life priority
It is judged whether the following print job exeists
by the time the last page of the predecessor job is
printed.
After the last page is discharged, the machine is
stopped when the following print job doesn''t exist.
1: Print Performance priority
It is judged whether the following print job exeists
by the time the last page of the predecessor job is
discharged.
08 Setting System Paper feeding 3657 List/report printing from the 0 0~1 SYS Sets to feed the paper from a drawer whose 1
mode drawer specified for "FAX" attribute is specified to "FAX" when a list or report
is printed.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Network InternetFax 3658 To/Bcc Destination 0 0~1 SYS Switches the destination of an internet fax to be 1
mode sent to To or Bcc.
0: To
1: Bcc
08 Setting System FAX 3659 Image position and size １ 0~2 SYS This setting is applied only when a received fax job 1
mode setting at the time of is forwarded with a pdf format file.
forwarding received fax jobs 0: Sets to select the paper size from the drawers in
which paper is loaded by corresponding to an
image size. The image position is the upper part of
the paper.
1: Sets to select the paper size from the drawers in
which paper is loaded by corresponding to an
image size. The image position is the center part of
the paper.
2: Sets to select a standard size paper
corresponding to an image size. The image
position is the upper part of the paper.
- If "FAX" has been set as the attribute of a drawer,
its paper size will be applied when "0" or "1" is
selected.
08 Setting System FAX 3661 Fax operation setting during １ 0~2 SYS 0: Transmission is not operable during off-hook 1
mode off-hook transmission 1: Direct transmission is operable during off-hook
2: Transmission is operable during off-hook
08 Setting System Scanning 3662 Waiting period for continue 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode after the RADF scanning * When "Enabled" is set, the screen to notify
continuity appears for 1 second after RADF
scanning has been completed.
08 Setting System 3666 Process of user 0 0~1 SSDK 0: Normal process 1
mode authentification(ShimpleBind 1: Special process
)
08 Setting System 3667 Addition of the QR code to Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 Yes
mode the total counter list contents 1: Enabled
<Default value>
JPD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System Department 3669 Department management 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode management setting(UserFunction) 1: Enabled

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User 3670 User management 0 0~1 SSDK 0: Disabled 1
mode authentication setting(UserFunction) 1: Enabled
08 Setting System 3672 Setting for each debug log 0 0~1 SYS 0: 5M 1
mode file size 1: 10MB
08 Setting System Self-diagnostic 3673 In one-go setting from a - When processing is carried out, a setting file is 3 Yes
mode codes in one- USB storage device read from a USB storage device and the setting
go setting values of the self-diagnostic codes listed in the
setting file are written sequentially.
08 Setting System Network 3674 Specifying whether to 0 0~1 SYS 0:Not displayed 1
mode display the network timeout 1:Displayed
error page on the EWB or
not
08 Setting System Security 3676 Change of Remote-access- #1048#toshi SSDK Maximum 65 letters 11
mode service user password ba Sets a password for a built-in user "Remote-
access-service".
08 Setting System User interface Display/non- 3677 0 EWB access authorization 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Not displayed 4
mode display of the setting 1: Displayed
setting section * This code is valid for HDD model only.
08 Setting System User interface Display/non- 3677 1 USB direct printing 1 0~1 SSDK 0: Not displayed 4
mode display of the authorization setting 1: Displayed
setting section * This code is valid for HDD model only.
08 Setting System Network 3702 Logon User Name of MFP''s - Maximum 128 letters 12
mode Windows Domain serial "MFP''s serial number" is set as default. Perform
Authentication number 08-9083 to set the default value.
08 Setting System Network 3703 Logon User Name NIC Maximum 128 letters 12
mode Password of Windows
Domain Authentication
08 Setting System Network 3704 PDC2 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3705 BDC2 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3706 PDC3 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3707 BDC3 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3708 PDC of Windows Domain NIC Maximum 128 letters 12
mode Authentication
08 Setting System Network 3709 BDC of device NIC Maximum 128 letters 12
mode authentication
08 Setting System Network 3718 Domain name of device NIC Maximum 128 letters 12
mode authentication
08 Setting System Network 3719 Windows domain No. 2 of UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
mode user authentication
08 Setting System Network 3720 Windows domain No. 3 of UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
mode user authentication

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network 3721 AppleTalk device name MFP''s - Maximum 32 letters 12
mode serial "MFP''s serial number" is set as default. Perform
number 08-9083 to set the default value.
08 Setting System Network 3722 PDC/BDC timeout value of 60 1~180 NIC Applied to the device authentication 12
mode Windows Domain
Authentication (Unit:
Seconds)
08 Setting System Network 3723 User authentication 30 1~180 NIC Applied to the user authentication 12
mode PDC/BDC time-out period
(Unit: Seconds)
08 Setting System Network Windows domain 3724 Windows Domain/User 1 1~4 NIC Sets the Windows domain authentication method 12
mode authentication Authentication for device authentication, Scan to SMB, and user
method authentication. When the setting of the domain
authentication method is unknown, it''s strongly
recommended to set the value of this code to "1"
(Auto).
1: Auto 2: Kerberos 3: NTLMv2 4: NTLMv1
* Note that the internal processing is different

between user authentication and Windows logon
authentication/Scan to SMB as follows.
- User authentication
"1" (Auto): Auto (Kerberos -> NTLMv2)
"4" (NTLMv1): NTLMv2
- Windows logon authentication/Scan to SMB
"1" (Auto): Auto (Kerberos -> NTLMv1)
"4" (NTLMv1): NTLMv1
* This code is valid for SSD model only.
08 Setting System Network Windows domain User 3724 0 Setting for User 1 1~4 NIC Sets the Windows domain authentication method 4
mode authentication authentication authentication for device authentication, user authentication.
method When the setting of the domain authentication
method is unknown, it''s strongly recommended to
set the value of this code to "1" (Auto).
1: Auto 2: Kerberos 3: NTLMv2 4: NTLMv2
08 Setting System Network Windows domain Scan to 3724 1 Setting for Scan to 5 1~5 NIC Sets the authentication method of the SMB client 4
mode authentication SMB/Windows SMB/Windows Logon (Scan to SMB/Windows logon).
method Logon 1: Kerberos/NTLMv1 2: Kerberos
3: NTLMv2 4: NTLMv1 5: Kerberos/NTLMv2
* If an SMB server to which Scan to SMB is
connected does not support the NTLMv2
authentication, change this code to "1"
(Kerberos/NTLMv1).
* If "1" (Kerberos/NTLMv1) is set, connection to
Mac OS X 10.10 or later becomes disabled.
08 Setting System Network 3725 IPP max connection 16 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3726 IPP active connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3727 LPD max connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3728 LPD active connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network 3729 ATalk PS max Connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3730 ATalk PS active Connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3731 Raw TCP max Connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3732 Raw TCP active connection 10 1~16 NIC 12
mode
08 Setting System Network 3736 DNS client TimeOut 5 1~180 NIC Use when a timeout occurred at DNS client 12
mode connection
08 Setting System Network 3739 FTP Client TimeOut (SCAN) 30 1~180 NIC Use when a timeout occurred at FTP client 12
mode connection
08 Setting System Network 3743 LDAP client TimeOut 5 1~180 NIC Use when a timeout occurred at LDAP client 12
mode connection
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3754 Switching printer setting 1 1~2 NIC DPWS printer function is switched. 12
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3755 Switching scanner setting 1 1~2 NIC DPWS scanner function is switched. 12
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3757 Discovery Port Number 3702 1~65535 NIC Port number used for DPWS Discovery 12
mode
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3758 Metadata Exchange Port 50081 1~65535 NIC Port number used for DPWS Metadata Exchange 12
mode Number
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3759 Print Port Number 50082 1~65535 NIC Port number used for DPWS Print 12
mode
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3760 Scan Port Number 50083 1~65535 NIC Port number used for DPWS Scan 12
mode
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3765 Print Max numbers of 10 1~20 NIC Maximum numbers received from more than one 12
mode connection connection request in the DPWS print
08 Setting System Network DPWS 3766 Print Max numbers of 10 1~20 NIC Maximum numbers of data received from more 12
mode reception than one clients in the DPWS print
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3767 Switching IPv6 setting 2 1~2 NIC IPv6 function is switched. 12
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3768 Switching address 2 1~3 NIC IP (IPv6) address acquisition setting is switched. 12
mode acquisition 1: Manual
2: Stateless
3: Stateful
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3770 IPv6 Address - Displays IPv6 address. Maximum 40 characters 12
mode (byte).
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3771 Prefix display setting - Sets the length of the displayed prefix. Maximum 3 12
mode characters (byte).
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3772 Default Gateway setting - Sets the default gateway for IPv6 address. 12
mode Maximum 40 characters (byte).
08 Setting System Network 3774 DHCPv6 Option setting 2 1~2 NIC DHCPv6 Option is switched when the Manual is 12
mode set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network 3777 Stateless Address setting 2 1~2 NIC IP Address is acquired by both Stateless and State 12
mode full Address.
1: Enabled2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network 3778 Acquiring DHCPv6 Option 2 1~2 NIC When Stateless Address is selected, an option is 12
mode acquired from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network 3779 Stateful Address setting 1 1~2 NIC IP Address is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 12
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network 3780 Stateful Option setting 1 1~2 NIC An option is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 12
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3781 Primary DNS Server - Registration of Primary DNS Server Address. 12
mode Address Registration Maximum 40 characters (byte).
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3782 Secondary DNS Server - Registration of Secondary DNS Server Address. 12
mode Address Registration Maximum 40 characters (byte).
08 Setting System Network 3793 LLTD function setting 1 1~2 NIC Sets the LLTD function. 12
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System General 3797 PJL USTATUS setting 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether to remain or initialize the PJL 1
mode USTATUS setting for each job.
0: Remaining
1: Initialized
* This setting is available only when SNMP
communication is performed.
08 Setting System General USB media 3802 Paper size Refer to 0~13 SYS 0: ledger 1: legal 2: letter 3: computer 4: 1
mode direct printing contents statement 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 9: B4 10: B5 11:
Folio 12: Legal13" 13: LetterSquare
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 6
08 Setting System General USB media 3803 Enable/disable setting 1 0~1 SYS Sets the USB media direct printing function. 1
mode direct printing 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Scanning 3805 Department Management 3 0~3 SYS Sets the department management with remote 1
mode setting by Remote Scan scanning as follows:
0: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI OFF
1: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI OFF
2: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI ON
3: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI ON
w/o GUI:
Remote scanning is operated on SSOP application
of eCOPY Inc.
w/ GUI:
Remote scanning is operated on TTEC-specific
GUI.
This setting is only for department management

with remote scanning. When GUI is set ON, a
department code dialog is displayed at the start-up
of remote scanning. This code is valid only when
the code 08-9120 is set "1 (Valid)".

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network Direct SMTP 3810 Communication setting 0 0~1 SYS When an Internet Fax is sent, Direct SMTP 1 Yes
mode communication is set.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When "0: Disabled" is set, an Internet Fax is sent
using an SMTP server. When "1: Enabled" is set,
direct SMTP communication is enabled and an
Internet Fax is sent to MFPs
If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in
08-3812 as well.
08 Setting System Network Direct SMTP 3811 Image encrypting at the 0 0~1 SYS When Direct SMTP communication is performed, 1 Yes
mode Direct SMTP an attached image is encrypted.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Network InternetFax 3812 Dummy full mode at 0 0~1 SYS When an Internet Fax is sent, the resolution ratio 1 Yes
mode transmission and the paper size of an attached image are set to
the full mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in
08-3812 as well.
08 Setting System Scanning XPS file 3815 Thumbnail addition 1 0~1 SYS Thumbnail is added to the XPS file produced by 1
mode the Scan function.
0: Not added
1: Only the top page added
08 Setting System Scanning XPS file 3816 Paper size setting 1 0~1 SYS The paper size of the XPS file produced by the 1
mode Scan function is set.
0: Scanned image size
1: Standard size
08 Setting System Scanning PDF file 3817 Version setting 4 0~1,4 SYS The version of PDF file produced by the Scan 1
mode function is set.
0: PDF V1.3 1: PDF V1.4 4: PDF V1.7
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3820 Function setting 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 Yes
mode CloudConnect
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3822 Function setting of Proxy 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 Yes
mode CloudConnect Server
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3823 IP Address setting of Proxy Refer to Refer to SYS <Default value> 11 Yes
mode CloudConnect Server contents contents 0.0.0.0
<Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3824 Port number setting of 80 1~65535 SYS 1 Yes
mode CloudConnect Proxy Server
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3825 Account ID setting of Proxy Refer to SYS Maximum 30 characters. 11 Yes
mode CloudConnect Server contents
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3826 Account password setting of Refer to SYS Maximum 30 characters. 11 Yes
mode CloudConnect Proxy Server contents
08 Setting System General 3833 Home directory function 0 0~1 SYS Function to store a file in the user''s home directory 1
mode 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System General 3837 Display switching for the 0 0~1 SYS The display method of the machine name shown in 1
mode machine name shown in the the event related notification is switched.
notification 0: IP address
1: NetBIOS name

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System General License control 3840 Registration/ deletion - Registers electronic keys for setting related 3 Yes
mode optional items (e.g. when the equipment is
delivered). Returns the license file having the
same ID as that in the one-time dongle. Displays
all the electronic keys stored in a USB media
connected to the equipment in a list. Displays
electronic keys registered in the equipment.
08 Setting System Option FAX 3847 FAX mis-transmission 0 0~1 SYS FAX mis-transmission prevention function is 1 Yes
mode prevention switched.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
08 Setting System Option FAX 3848 Restriction on Address 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the address in the address book is 1 Yes
mode Book destination selectable or not for the FAX mis-transmission
prevention function.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
08 Setting System Option FAX 3849 Restriction on destination 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the direct entry of the FAX number is 1 Yes
mode direct entry available or not for the FAX mis-transmission
prevention function.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
08 Setting System General 3851 Template display 0 0~1 SYS 0: ID number order1: Alphabetical order 1
mode
08 Setting System General Summer time 3852 Summer time Automatic Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode change function contents 1: Enabled
<Default value>
MJD, NAD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System General Summer time 3853 Time to shift 2 0~7 SYS 0: +2:00 1: +1:30 2: +1:00 3: +0:30 4: -0:30 5: -1:00 1
mode 6: -1:30 7: -2:00
08 Setting System General Summer time Start 3854 Month Refer to 1~12 SYS 1: Jan 2: Feb 3: Mar 4: Apr 5: May 1
mode contents 6: Jun 7: Jul 8: Aug 9: Sep 10: Oct
11: Nov 12: Dec
<Default value>
MJD, NAD: 3
Others: 1
08 Setting System General Summer time Start 3855 Week Refer to 1~5 SYS 1: 1st 2: 2nd 3: 3rd 4: 4th 5: Last 1
mode contents
<Default value>
MJD: 5
NAD: 2
Others: 1
08 Setting System General Summer time Start 3856 Day of the week 0 0~6 SYS 0: Sun 1: Mon 2: Tue 3: Wed 4: Thu 5: Fri 6: Sat 1
mode
08 Setting System General Summer time Start 3857 Hours Refer to 0~23 SYS 0 to 23 1
mode contents
<Default value>
MJD, NAD: 2
Others: 0
08 Setting System General Summer time Start 3858 Minutes 0 0~59 SYS 0 to 59 1
mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System General Summer time End 3859 Month Refer to 1~12 SYS 1: Jan 2: Feb 3: Mar 4: Apr 5: May 6: Jun 1
mode contents 7: Jul 8: Aug 9: Sep 10: Oct 11: Nov 12: Dec
<Default value>
MJD: 10
NAD: 11
Others: 1
08 Setting System General Summer time End 3860 Week Refer to 1~5 SYS 1: 1st 2: 2nd 3: 3rd 4: 4th 5: Last 1
mode contents
<Default value>
MJD: 5
Others: 1
08 Setting System General Summer time End 3861 Day of the week 0 0~6 SYS 0: Sun1: Mon2: Tue3: Wed4: Thu5: Fri6: Sat 1
mode
08 Setting System General Summer time End 3862 Hours Refer to 0~23 SYS 0 to 23 1
mode contents
<Default value>
MJD: 3
NAD: 2
Others: 0
08 Setting System General Summer time End 3863 Minutes 0 0~59 SYS 0 to 59 1
mode
08 Setting System Network 3864 Disclosure of telnet function 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not disclosed 1: Disclosed 1
mode When this value is set to "0", the value of code 08-
3865 is set to "2".
08 Setting System Network 3865 Availability of telnet server 2 1~2 NIC 1: Enable2: Disable 12
mode
08 Setting System FAX 3875 Address confirmation for Refer to 0~1 SYS Enable this setting to display the address 1
mode multiple destinations contents confirmation screen before sending fax to prevent
wrong transmission when multiple destination
addresses are specified.
<Default value>
JPD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4010 Default setting of paper 0 0~5 SYS 0: A4/LT 1
mode source 1: LCF
2: 1st drawer
3: 2nd drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Automatic Auto 4011 PPC 1 1~2 SYS Sets whether the drawer is changed automatically 1 Yes
mode change of paper if the paper runs out in the selected drawer and the
source paper of the same size is in other drawer.
1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper
direction and size: ex. A4 to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper
size. Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4
to A4-R, LT-R to LT. "1" is applied when the
staple/hole punch is specified.)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Laser 4012 Pre-running of print device 0 0~2 SYS Sets whether or not switching the status of print 1
mode device from the standby to the ready to print when
the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover
is opened.
0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set
manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using RADF only)
08 Setting Printer Laser 4015 Time to shift to energy 3 0~6 SYS Switches the status of print device from the ready 1
mode saving of print device for print to the standby when a certain period of
time has passed from the pre-running. This code
sets the period to switch the status to the standby.
0: 15 sec. 1: 20 sec. 2: 25 sec. 3: 30 sec. 4: 35
sec. 5: 40 sec. 6: 45 sec.
This setting is effective when the value of 08-4012
is set to "0" or "2."
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Automatic When a drawer is 4016 0 PPC 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the automatic change of paper 4 Yes
mode change of paper specified source is performed or not if the drawer is specified
source as the paper source and the paper in the specified
drawer runs out when coping.
0: Does not change the paper source automatically
1: Changes the paper source automatically
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Automatic When a drawer is 4016 1 Printing/BOX printing 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the automatic change of paper 4 Yes
mode change of paper specified source is performed or not if the drawer is specified
source as the paper source and the paper in the specified
drawer runs out when printing/BOX printing.
0: Does not change the paper source automatically
1: Changes the paper source automatically
08 Setting Printer 4017 Polygonal motor stop 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode function when the 1: Enabled
[FUNCTION CLEAR] button
is pressed
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry 1st drawer 4020 0 Plain paper/recycled 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting paper/Thin paper the 1st drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry 1st drawer 4020 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting the 1st drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry 2nd drawer 4021 0 Plain paper/recycled 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting paper/Thin paper the 2nd drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry 2nd drawer 4021 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting the 2nd drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry PFP upper drawer 4022 0 Plain paper/recycled 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting paper/Thin paper the PFP upper drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry PFP upper drawer 4022 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting the PFP upper drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry PFP lower drawer 4023 0 Plain paper/recycled 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting paper/Thin paper the PFP lower drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry PFP lower drawer 4023 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting the PFP lower drawer.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry Bypass feeding 4024 0 Plain paper/recycled 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting paper/Thin paper the bypass tray.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry Bypass feeding 4024 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Yes
mode number setting the bypass tray.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry LCF 4025 Plain paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 1 Yes
mode number setting the LCF.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4100 1st drawer Refer to 0~255 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. 9
mode contents This code is reset every time a paper size is
detected automatically.
4: A4
64: LT
<Default value>
NAD: 64
Others: 4
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4101 2nd drawer Refer to 0~255 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. 9
19: A3
81: LD
<Default value>
NAD: 81
Others: 19
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4102 PFP upper drawer Refer to 0~255 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. 9
20: A4-R
80: LT-R
<Default value>
NAD: 80
Others: 20
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4103 PFP lower drawer Refer to 0~255 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. 9
4: A4
52: B4
82: LG
<Default value>
NAD: 82
JPD: 52
Others: 4
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4104 LCF Refer to 0~255 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. 9
4: A4
64: LT
<Default value>
NAD: 64
Others: 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4105 PFP/LCF installation 0 0~4 M 0: Auto 1
mode 1: PFP upper-drawer type installed
2: PFP upper-drawer and lower-drawer type
installed
3: LCF installed
4: Neither PFP nor LCF installed
In the following case, set the value to "0"
(Automatic) or change the value to the
corresponding one.
- When any of the above option is replaced
- When any of the above option is installed while
"4" (Not installed) has been set
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4106 A3-R 420/297 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
mode 0~297
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4109 B4-R 364/257 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4110 B5-R 257/182 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4111 LT-R 279/216 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4112 LD-R 432/279 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4113 LG-R 356/216 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4114 ST-R 216/140 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4115 COMPUTER-R 356/257 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4116 FOLIO-R 330/210 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4117 13"LG-R 330/216 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4118 8.5"X8.5"-R 216/216 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4119 Non-standard 432/279 148~432/10 SYS Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 5~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4120 8K-R 390/270 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4121 16K-R 270/195 182~432/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4122 A3-wide-R 457/305 182~457/14 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 0~305
mode 5~297

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4131 Feeding retry setting 0 0~1 M 0: ON 1 Yes
mode 1: OFF
* When the value of 08-9016 is set to "5", the value
of this code is automatically set to "1".
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting PPC 4140 Bypass feed 255 0~431 SYS Press the button on the LCD to select the size. 9
mode
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4143 Envelop: Monarch-R 191/98 148~432/98 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode ~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4144 Envelop: 120x235-R 235/120 148~432/10 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 5~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4145 Envelop: 105x235-R 235/105 148~432/10 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 5~297
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4205 LD-wide 457/305 148~457/10 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 5~305
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4206 Post card 148/100 148~432/10 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction. 10
mode 0~297 * Post card is supported only for JPN model.
08 Setting Printer Fuser Fusing error Temperature of 4530 0 Data before correction 0 0~255 M 4
mode temperature the fuser roller
center thermistor
08 Setting Printer Fuser Fusing error Temperature of 4530 1 Data after correction 0 0~255 M 4
center thermistor
08 Setting Printer Fuser Fusing error Temperature of 4531 0 Data before correction 0 0~255 M 4
rear thermistor
08 Setting Printer Fuser Fusing error Temperature of 4531 1 Data after correction 0 0~255 M 4
rear thermistor
08 Setting Printer Fuser Fusing error 4532 Temperature of the fuser 0 0~255 M 1
mode temperature roller front thermopiles
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4542 Switching for incorrect size 0 0~1 M 0: Enabled 1 Yes
mode jam detection 1: Disabled

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Transfer Color registration 4546 Execution mode setting 4 0~6 M 0: Not performed automatically 1 Yes
mode control 1: (a)
2: (b)
3: (a)＋(b)＋(1)
4: (a)＋(b)＋(2)
5: (a)＋(b)＋(3)
6: (a)＋(b)＋(4)
<Description>
(a) Performs the adjustment automatically after unit
replacement, at pre-warming, and at recovery from
the sleep mode.
(b) Performs the adjustment automatically every
time after a specified period of time has passed.
(1) Never performs the adjustment at warming up
and after the first print job has completed.
(2) Performs the adjustment automatically after the
first print job has completed.
(3) If the adjustment was performed last time the
specified period of time has passed, (4) is applied.
If not, (2) is applied.
(4) Performs the adjustment automatically at
warming up.
08 Setting Printer Finisher 4547 Manual stapling time-out 15 3~30 M 3-30sec. 1
mode period (In increments of 1sec.)
08 Setting Printer Finisher 4548 Finisher model switching 1 0~1 M 0: - 1
mode setting value 1: MJ-1036/1037
08 Setting Printer Transfer Color registration Start-up time set 4550 0 1st startup 3 3~255 M 1st color registration control start-up time [Unit: 4 Yes
mode control for color minute] automatically set when the color
registration registration control has not　been performed
automatically at power ON, recovery from the
ready status or recovery from the sleep mode.
08 Setting Printer Transfer Color registration Start-up time set 4550 1 2nd or subsequent startups 30 3~255 M Start-up time [Unit: minute] for 2nd or subsequent 4 Yes
mode control for color color registration control start-ups automatically set
registration when the color registration control has been
automatically performed after a specified period of
time.
08 Setting Printer Developer Waste toner During printing 4551 0 Mixing start 2 0~6 M 0: 100 counts 4
mode mixing paddle 1: 200 counts
setting 2: 300 counts
3: 600 counts
4: 1200 counts
5: 2400 counts
6: 3600 counts
08 Setting Printer Developer Waste toner During printing 4551 1 Rotation period 3 0~6 M 0: Agitated for 3 sec. 4
mode mixing paddle 1: Agitated for 4 sec.
setting 2: Agitated for 5 sec.
3: Agitated for 6 sec.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Pausing of 4553 1 2nd drawer 1 0~7 M 0: Disabled 4
mode pushing paper 1: Enabled (recycled paper only)
2: Enabled (plain paper only)
3: Enabled (plain paper and recycled paper)
4: Enabled (thin paper only)
5: Enabled (recycled paper and thin paper)
6: Enabled (plain paper and thin paper)
7: Enabled (plain paper, recycled paper, and thin
paper)
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Pausing of 4553 2 PFP upper drawer 1 0~7 M 0: Disabled 4
paper)
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Pausing of 4553 3 PFP lower drawer 1 0~7 M 0: Disabled 4
paper)
08 Setting Printer Developer Waste toner During warming-up 4554 0 At normal status 1 0~5 M 0: Agitated for 2 sec. 4
mode mixing paddle 1: Agitated for 3 sec.
setting 2: Agitated for 5 sec.
08 Setting Printer Developer Waste toner During warming-up 4554 1 During warming-up after 2 0~5 M 0: Agitated for 3 sec. 4
mode mixing paddle used toner full status 1: Agitated for 5 sec.
setting detection 2: Agitated for 8 sec.
08 Setting Printer Transfer Color registration 4562 Time of pausing continuous 5 1~60 M Sets the time from reaching the start-up for color 1 Yes
mode control printing registration control to pausing the printing. (Unit:
minute)
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4567 SRA3 450/320 148~460/10 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 5~320
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4568 460 mm x 320 mm 460/320 148~460/10 M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10
mode 5~320
08 Setting Printer General 4586 Checking of EEPROM data Refer to 210~231 M <Default value> 2
mode on LGC board No. 1 contents 210: e-STUDIO2050C
(Models) 211: e-STUDIO2550C
230: e-STUDIO2051C
231: e-STUDIO2551C
08 Setting Printer Transfer Color registration 4605 Accumulated counter value 0 8 digits M Counts the number of color registration control for 1 Yes
mode control each starting mode. Color registration operations
other than those performed at the specified timing
are counted as 2.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer General Destination 4608 Destination categorized Refer to 0~9 M For EEPROM on LGC board 2
mode code contents 0: NAD 1: MJD 2: JPD 3: ASD 5: TWD 6: CND
8: AUD 9: ARD
<Default value>
MJD: 1 NAD: 0 JPD: 2 ASD: 3 AUD: 8 TWD: 5
CND: 6 ARD: 9
08 Setting Printer Counter 4615 0 Counter for job number of 0 8 digits M Once 4
mode sheets
08 Setting Printer Counter 4615 1 Counter for job number of 0 8 digits M Twice 4
mode sheets
08 Setting Printer Counter 4615 2 Counter for job number of 0 8 digits M 3 times 4
mode sheets
08 Setting Printer Counter 4615 3 Counter for job number of 0 8 digits M Up to 5 times 4
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
mode sheets
08 Setting Printer Counter 4615 12 Counter for job number of 0 8 digits M 2001 times or more 4
mode sheets

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Counter History storing 4616 0 Latest 0 0~255 M 0:No error 1: C411 error 14
mode area of fusing 2: C412 error 3: C443 error
error counter 4: Not used 5: C445, C465 error
6: C446, C466 error 7: C447 error
8: C468 error 9: C449 error
10 to 17: Not used 18: C468 error
29: C449 error 30: Not used
31: C4D0 error 32: C448 error
43 to 47: Not used
52 to 255: Not used
08 Setting Printer Counter History storing 4616 1 Once earlier 0 0~255 M 0:No error 1: C411 error 14
6: C446, C466 error 7: C447 error
43 to 47: Not used
52 to 255: Not used

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Counter History storing 4616 2 Twice earlier 0 0~255 M 0:No error 1: C411 error 14
6: C446, C466 error 7: C447 error
43 to 47: Not used
52 to 255: Not used
08 Setting Printer Counter History storing 4616 3 3 times earlier 0 0~255 M 0:No error 1: C411 error 14
6: C446, C466 error 7: C447 error
43 to 47: Not used
52 to 255: Not used

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
6: C446, C466 error 7: C447 error
43 to 47: Not used
52 to 255: Not used
6: C446, C466 error 7: C447 error
43 to 47: Not used
52 to 255: Not used
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4621 Bypass paper size detection 0 0~1 M Detects whether the size of paper fed by bypass 1
mode setting feeding is the same as the paper size set on the
control panel. If the sizes are not the same, the
warning message is displayed (Paper jam does not
occur).
When the bypass paper size detection is broken,
the equipment can be used without the size
detection by disabling this setting. After repair,
enable this setting.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4622 Bypass paper size detection 0 0~65535 M This is a counter for bypass paper size detection 1
mode counter setting. If the printing is executed with the paper
size that differs from the paper size set on the
control panel, the counter is counted up.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer All clear Destination 4659 Storing area for SYS Refer to 0~255 M Stores SYS-SRAM destination data when code 08- 2
mode destination information contents 9090 is performed.
0: MJD 1: NAD 2: JPD 3: AUD 4: CND 5: KRD
6: TWD 7: SAD 8: ASU 9: ASD 10: ARD 11: BMJ
<Default value>
JPD: 2 NAD: 1 MJD: 0 ASD: 9 AUD: 3 TWD: 6
CND: 4 ARD: 10
08 Setting Printer Maintenance 4661 Serial number display for M 1st digit: Country of production (fixed) 1
mode engine 2nd digit: Model (fixed)
3rd digit: Dominical year (changes)
4th digit: Month (changes)
5th to 9th digit: Serial number (changes)
11th to 13th digit: ****
14th to 17th digit: Model information (changes)
("UNDEFINED" is displayed before input)
08 Setting Printer Counter Tray-up 4665 Error count process for tray- 1 0~1 M Switches the error count process for the tray-up 1
mode abnormality up abnormality abnormality.
0: An occurrence is counted as a 1-time error when
a tray-up abnormality is generated at least 1 time.
1: An occurrence is counted as a 1-time error when
a tray-up abnormality is generated at least 2 times
in a row.
08 Setting Printer Counter Tray-up 1st drawer 4669 0 1 time 0 0~255 M Displays the number of the tray-up abnormality 4
mode abnormality occurrences which are generated only 1 time.
An error is counted when "1" is set for 08-4665.
08 Setting Printer Counter Tray-up 1st drawer 4669 1 2 times in a row 0 0~255 M Displays the number of the tray-up abnormality 4
mode abnormality occurrences which are generated 2 times in a row.
An error is counted when "1" is set for 08-4665,
and is listed in the error history.
08 Setting Printer Counter Tray-up 1st drawer 4669 2 At least 3 times in a row 0 0~255 M Displays the number of the tray-up abnormality 4
mode abnormality occurrences which are generated at least 3 times
in a row. The 3 times error is counted as 1, the 4
times one is 2, the 5 times one is 3 and the later
ones are counted consequently.
08 Setting Printer Counter Tray-up 1st drawer 4669 3 Total number of occurrences 0 0~255 M Displays the total number of tray-up abnormality 4
mode abnormality occurrences.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4675 Paper ejection setting for 2 0~2 M 0: Disabled 1
mode size error of bypass feeding 1: Position change of jammed paper
2: Ejects paper
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding 4676 Counter of paper ejection 0 0~65535 M Number of paper ejection 1
mode for size error of bypass
feeding
08 Setting Printer General 4686 Printer ROM version display M Displays the last 2 or 3 digits of the printer ROM 2
mode at printer all clear version (08-9901) when printer all clear (08-9090)
is performed. The version number is described by
alphanumeric characters.
08 Setting Printer IC chip Board 4689 0 Y 0 0~255 M 0: Normal 4
mode information of 1: Access abnormality 1
toner cartridge 2: Access abnormality 2
3: Access abnormality 3
5: Occurrence of C911
08 Setting Printer IC chip Board 4689 1 M 0 0~255 M 0: Normal 4
08 Setting Printer IC chip Board 4689 2 C 0 0~255 M 0: Normal 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer IC chip Board 4689 3 K 0 0~255 M 0: Normal 4
08 Setting Printer Finisher Batch writing of 4695 MJ-1036/1037 M When replacing the finisher control PC board, 3 Yes
mode adjustment value writes all the adjustment value (05-4820 to 4827)
of the finisher saved on the equipment to the
finisher control PC board.
08 Setting Printer Finisher Batch read-in of 4696 MJ-1036/1037 M Copies and saves all the adjustment values of the 3 Yes
mode adjustment value finisher to the equipment for the replacement of the
finisher control PC board due to damage.
08 Setting Printer Maintenance Display of details 4706 0 Y 0 0~15 M Displays the details of CE80. Enter "0" to clear the 4
mode of CE80 error.
0=Normal, 1=Error
bit0: Not connected
bit1: Mix
bit2: Checksum mismatch
bit3: Gradation module error
08 Setting Printer Maintenance Display of details 4706 1 M 0 0~15 M Displays the details of CE80. Enter "0" to clear the 4
mode of CE80 error.
0=Normal, 1=Error
bit0: Not connected
bit1: Mix
08 Setting Printer Maintenance Display of details 4706 2 C 0 0~15 M Displays the details of CE80. Enter "0" to clear the 4
mode of CE80 error.
0=Normal, 1=Error
bit0: Not connected
bit1: Mix
08 Setting Printer Maintenance Display of details 4706 3 K 0 0~15 M Displays the details of CE80. Enter "0" to clear the 4
mode of CE80 error.
0=Normal, 1=Error
bit0: Not connected
bit1: Mix
08 Setting Printer General 4708 Switchover setting of Refer to 0~1 M When feeding 305 x 457 mm sized paper by 1
mode transport control for custom contents bypass feeding, set the value of this code to "1" for
size (297x431.8mm) JAM detection. When the value is set to "1", the
print speed decreases.
0: Disabled (Setting for 297 × 431.8 mm)
1: Enabled (Setting for 305 × 457 mm)
<Default value>
CND: 1
Others: 0

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Performance 4713 0 Plain paper/Recycled paper 0 0~1 M Use this code when retry by bypass feeding occurs 4
mode improvement at frequently and the performance decreases. Note
retry by bypass that the performance decreases if this setting is
feeding enabled when retry does not occur.
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Performance 4713 1 Thick paper 1 0 0~1 M Use this code when retry by bypass feeding occurs 4
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Performance 4713 2 Thick paper 2 0 0~1 M Use this code when retry by bypass feeding occurs 4
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Performance 4713 3 Special 0 0~1 M Use this code when retry by bypass feeding occurs 4
mode improvement at paper/Transparencies frequently and the performance decreases. Note
08 Setting Printer Paper feeding Performance 4713 4 Envelope 0 0~1 M Use this code when retry by bypass feeding occurs 4
08 Setting Printer LED 4719 Enable/Disable setting of 1 0~2 M Set the value to "2" if the image of K color is 1
mode LED head distortion uneven. Set the value to "0" if the image of YMC is
correction uneven.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Corrects YMCK respectively)
2: Enabled (Corrects YMC respectively)
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number Y 4720 0 Serial number 000000~99 M Serial number (6 digits) 14
mode display of LED 9999
head
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number Y 4720 1 Production date 00000~912 M Production date (YMMDD) 14
mode display of LED 31 Y: Last one digit of year
head
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number M 4720 2 Serial number 000000~99 M Serial number (6 digits) 14
head
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number M 4720 3 Production date 00000~912 M Production date (YMMDD) 14
head
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number C 4720 4 Serial number 000000~99 M Serial number (6 digits) 14
head
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number C 4720 5 Production date 00000~912 M Production date (YMMDD) 14
head
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number K 4720 6 Serial number 000000~99 M Serial number (6 digits) 14
head

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Printer LED Serial number K 4720 7 Production date 00000~912 M Production date (YMMDD) 14
head
08 Setting Printer LED 4722 Switchover of I/F 0 0~1 M 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 1
mode initialization abnormality
check between LED and
LGC (CE81)
08 Setting Printer LED 4723 Occurrence flag of I/F 0 0~15 M 0 bit: Y 1
mode initialization abnormality 1st bit: M
between LED and LGC 2nd bit: C
(CE81) 3rd bit: K
0: Normal 1: Abnormality
08 Setting Printer Image quality 4744 Self check interval Setting 0 0~2 M 0: STANDARD 1
mode control 1: LONGER
2: LONGEST
* Select "0" to give higher priority to the image
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty 5155 Toner near empty threshold 1 0~5 M 0: The period from the appearance of the toner 1 Yes
mode setting near-empty sign to the actual complete
consumption of the toner is set to long.
1: Normal (Default)
2: The period from the appearance of the toner
near-empty sign to the actual complete
consumption of the toner is set to short.
4: Toner near-empty status threshold value: (%)*
5: Toner near-empty status threshold value:
(Number of sheets)*
* The toner near-empty status is displayed if the
remaining amount of toner is equal to or less than
the amount set in 08-5810/5811 (percentage or
number of sheets).
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Fine adjustment 5156 0 Y 100 50~150 M Adjusts the threshold value for displaying 4
mode of threshold for remaining amount of toner and toner near empty.
displaying Display threshold value = default threshold value x
remaining toner setting value/100 (unit: %)
and toner near
empty
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Fine adjustment 5156 1 M 100 50~150 M Adjusts the threshold value for displaying 4
and toner near
empty
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Fine adjustment 5156 2 C 100 50~150 M Adjusts the threshold value for displaying 4
and toner near
empty
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Fine adjustment 5156 3 K 100 50~150 M Adjusts the threshold value for displaying 4
and toner near
empty

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running 5204 0 Warm-up 0 0~60 M Setting value x 1 sec. 4
mode starting time at 0: Disabled
warm-up
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running 5204 1 Recovery from the sleep 0 0~60 M Setting value x 1 sec. 4
mode starting time at mode 0: Disabled
warm-up
08 Setting Process Fuser Sleep Temperature 5244 Paper 0 0~2 M 0: Disabled 1
mode correction for 1: 60 to 80g paper
allowing ready at 2: 81 to 1050g paper
recovery from
sleep mode
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature 5284 0 Black 0 0~8 M 0: Disabled 4
mode drop control 1: Enabled; Thick paper 2/Thick paper 3 (HR and
during printing 2 PR of normal/low temperature)
2: Enabled; Thick paper 2/Thick paper 3 (HR of
normal/low temperature)
3: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR of normal/low
temperature)
4: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR of normal
temperature)
normal temperature)
6: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR and PR of
7: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR and PR of normal
temperature)
8: Enabled; Thick paper 2/Thick paper 3 (HR and
PR of normal temperature)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature 5284 1 Color 0 0~8 M 0: Disabled 4
mode drop control 1: Enabled; Thick paper 2/Thick paper 3 (HR and
during printing 2 PR of normal/low temperature)
3: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR of normal/low
temperature)
4: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR of normal
temperature)
normal temperature)
6: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR and PR of
7: Enabled; Thick paper 2 (HR and PR of normal
temperature)
8: Enabled; Thick paper 2/Thick paper 3 (HR and
PR of normal temperature)
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Recycled 5293 0 At normal 10 0~22 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode paper/Center temperatures/Black 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
mode paper/Center temperatures/Color 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Recycled 5293 2 At low temperatures/Black 11 0~22 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode paper/Center 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Recycled 5293 3 At low temperatures/Color 11 0~22 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode paper/Center 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
mode paper/Side temperatures/Black 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
mode paper/Side temperatures/Color 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Recycled 5294 2 At low temperatures/Black 11 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode paper/Side 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser Recycled 5294 3 At low temperatures/Color 11 0~16 M 0: 90℃ 1: 95℃ 2: 100℃ 3: 105℃ 4: 110℃ 5: 4
mode paper/Side 115℃ 6: 120℃ 7: 125℃ 8: 130℃ 9: 135℃ 10:
140℃ 11: 145℃ 12: 150℃ 13: 155℃ 14: 160℃
15: 165℃ 16: 170℃
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Recycled paper/At 5299 0 Black 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Recycled paper/At 5299 1 Color 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled 5300 0 Black/Heat roller (Center) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 10
Others: 11
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled 5300 1 Black/Heat roller (Side) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 10
Others: 11
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled 5300 2 Color/Heat roller (Center) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 10
Others: 11

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled 5300 3 Color/Heat roller (Side) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 10
Others: 11
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled paper/At 5301 0 Black/Heat roller (Center) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
mode of control low temperatures contents 105℃ 6: 110℃ 7: 115℃ 8: 120℃ 9: 125℃ 10:
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled paper/At 5301 1 Black/Heat roller (Side) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled paper/At 5301 2 Color/Heat roller (Center) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Lower limit value Recycled paper/At 5301 3 Color/Heat roller (Side) Refer to 0~18 M 0: 80℃ 1: 85℃ 2: 90℃ 3: 95℃ 4: 100℃ 5: 4
temperature 130℃ 11: 135℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 145℃ 14: 150℃
15: 155℃ 16: 160℃ 17: 165℃ 18: 170℃
<Default value>
JPD: 11
Others: 12
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Plain 5308 0 Plain paper/Black 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
mode for first printing paper/Normal 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10:
temperature 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14:
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Plain 5308 1 Plain paper/Color 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Recycled 5309 0 Black 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Pre-running time Recycled 5309 1 Color 0 0~16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 4
20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Plain 5310 0 Black 8 0~11 M 0: Disabled (Always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
mode of pre-running paper/Normal min. 4: 2 min. 5: 3 min. 6: 5 min. 7: 7 min. 8: 10
time for first temperature min. 9: 15 min. 10: 30 min. 11: 60 min.
printing

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Plain 5310 1 Color 8 0~11 M 0: Disabled (Always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Recycled 5310 2 Black 8 0~11 M 0: Disabled (Always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser Applicable period Recycled 5310 3 Color 8 0~11 M 0: Disabled (Always ON) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 4
printing
08 Setting Process Fuser 5316 Decreasing cpm for small- 0 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode size paper
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Recycled paper 5409 0 At normal temperatures Refer to 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 4
mode setting to start (Black) contents 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
<Default value>
JPD: 2
Others: 3
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Recycled paper 5409 1 At normal temperatures Refer to 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 4
mode setting to start (Color) contents 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
<Default value>
JPD: 2
Others: 3
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Recycled paper 5410 0 At low temperatures (Black) 3 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 4
mode setting to start 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature Recycled paper 5410 1 At low temperatures (Color) 3 0~12 M 0: 120℃ 1: 125℃ 2: 130℃ 3: 135℃ 4: 140℃ 5: 4
mode setting to start 145℃ 6: 150℃ 7: 155℃ 8: 160℃ 9: 165℃ 10:
08 Setting Process Fuser 5412 Threshold value for 5 0~15 M 0: None 1: 30℃ 2: 40℃ 3: 50℃ 4: 60℃ 5: 70℃ 1
mode disabling elevation 6: 80℃ 7: 90℃ 8: 100℃ 9: 110℃ 10: 120℃ 11:
correction due to low 130℃ 12: 140℃ 13: 150℃ 14: 160℃ 15: 170℃
temperature
08 Setting Process Fuser Wait setting Number in small- 5455 0 Print number setting 4 0~14 M Sets the number in the continuous printing with 4
mode before wide-size size paper small-size paper when the Wait control is carried
paper feeding continuous printing out for wide-size paper feeding during a
(combination job) combination job.
0:10Sheets　1:20Sheets　2:30Sheets　3:50Sheet
s
4:75Sheets　5:100Sheets　6:150Sheets　7:250S
heets
8:300Sheets　9:400Sheets　10:500Sheets
11:1Sheets　12:2Sheets 13:3Sheets　14:5Sheets
08 Setting Process Fuser Wait setting 5456 0 Period setting 9 0~15 M Sets the Wait period before wide-size paper is fed 4
mode before wide-size during a combination job.
paper feeding 0:1sec　1:2sec　2:3sec　3:4sec　4:5sec
(combination job) 5:6sec　6:7sec　7:8sec　8:9sec　9:10sec
10:12sec　11:14sec　12:16sec
13:18sec　14:20sec　15:22sec

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Fuser Wait setting 5457 0 Normal temperature 0 0~1 M Sets whether the Wait control for wide-size paper 4
mode before wide-size feeding is enabled or disabled during a
paper feeding combination job in normal temperatures.
(combination job) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting Process Fuser Wait setting 5457 1 Low temperature 0 0~1 M Sets whether the Wait control for wide-size paper 4
mode before wide-size feeding is enabled or disabled during a
paper feeding combination job in low temperatures.
(combination job) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting Process Fuser Noncontact 5461 0 Center thermistor 18 5~50 M The correction amount of the detection 4
mode thermistor temperature of the noncontact thermistor. (degrees
correction amount C)
08 Setting Process Fuser Noncontact 5461 1 Side thermistor 18 5~50 M The correction amount of the detection 4
mode thermistor temperature of the noncontact thermistor. (degrees
correction amount C)
08 Setting Process Fuser 5462 Temperature at correction 20 0~100 M The temperature of the temperature and humidity 2
mode sensor when executing in the correction mode.
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter M 5550 Setting value Refer to 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1
mode contents timing.
0: Not displayed
<Default>
20ppm: 56000
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter M 5551 Setting value 225000 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1
mode timing.
0: Not displayed
[Unit: count]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter C 5552 Setting value Refer to 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1
0: Not displayed
<Default>
20ppm: 56000
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter C 5553 Setting value 225000 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1
mode timing.
0: Not displayed
[Unit: count]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5554 Setting value (K) Refer to 8 digits M <Default> 1
mode contents 20ppm: 56000
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5555 Setting value (K) 145000 8 digits M Time accumulating counter 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5556 Setting value (Y) Refer to 8 digits M <Default> 1
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5557 Setting value (Y) 145000 8 digits M Time accumulating counter 1
mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5558 Setting value (M) Refer to 8 digits M <Default> 1
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5559 Setting value (M) 145000 8 digits M Time accumulating counter 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5560 Setting value (C) Refer to 8 digits M <Default> 1
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5561 Setting value (C) 145000 8 digits M Time accumulating counter 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Parts 5562 Setting value Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 1
25ppm: 140000
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Parts 5563 Setting value 450000 8 digits M Time accumulating counter 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter M 5564 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
same as 08-6254-0
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter M 5565 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
Same as 08-6254-3
[Unit]
1 count = 2 seconds (Normal), 1 count = 3
seconds (Decelerating mode)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter C 5566 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
same as 08-6256-0
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter C 5567 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
Same as 08-6256-3
[Unit]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5568 Current value (K) 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5569 Current value (K) 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
[Unit]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5570 Current value (Y) 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5571 Current value (Y) 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
[Unit]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5572 Current value (M) 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5573 Current value (M) 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
[Unit]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Developer material 5574 Current value (C) 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Developer material 5575 Current value (C) 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
[Unit]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Parts 5576 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Parts 5577 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1
mode 0: clear
[Unit]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5578 Y 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
mode output pages/ message is displayed on the LCD screen.)
driving counts 0: PM counter (The number of output pages is set
at 08-6190.)
1: PM time counter (The timing is set at 08-6191.)
2: Whichever comes faster
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5579 M 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5580 C 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5581 Developer material (K) 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5582 Developer material (Y) 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5583 Developer material (M) 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5584 Developer material (C) 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 5585 Parts 0 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5810 0 K 3 1~99 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
mode status threshold to "4". Use this code to specify the threshold value
value setting (%) (unit: %) for displaying the toner near-empty status.
The accuracy of value is influenced by usage
environment or originals.
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5810 1 Y 3 1~99 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5810 2 M 3 1~99 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5810 3 C 3 1~99 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5811 0 K 1000 1~9999 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
value setting (unit: number of sheets) for displaying the toner
(number of sheets) near-empty status. The accuracy of value is
influenced by usage environment or originals.
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5811 1 Y 1000 1~9999 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5811 2 M 1000 1~9999 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
08 Setting Process Developer Toner near empty Toner near-empty 5811 3 C 1000 1~9999 M This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set 4
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper size 6010 Large-sized paper Refer to 0~2 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
mode contents 1: Counted as 2
2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double
counter)
<Default value>
JPD: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper size 6011 Definition setting of large 0 0~1 M 0: A3/LD 1 Yes
mode sized paper 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper size 6012 Large-sized paper 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
mode 1: Counted as 2
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper size 6013 Definition setting of large 1 0~1 M 0: A3/LD 1 Yes
mode sized paper 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6014 Thick paper 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6015 OHP 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6016 Envelope 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6017 Tab paper 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
08 Setting Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6018 Count setting of special 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Yes
mode paper 1: Counted as 2
08 Setting Counter Copy Print Full color 6060 0 Large 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Full 14
mode Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its
size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output pages of large-sized paper
defined at 08-6011
Small:
Number of output pages other than set as large-
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Copy Print Full color 6060 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Full 14
mode Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its
size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Copy Print Twin 6062 0 Large 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Twin 14
mode Color/Monocolor Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its
size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Copy Print Twin 6062 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Twin 14
mode Color/Monocolor Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its
size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Printer Black 6064 0 Large 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Black 14
mode Mode in the Printer Function according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Printer Black 6064 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Black 14
mode Mode in the Printer Function according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter FAX Print Black 6066 0 Large 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages in the FAX 14
mode Function according to its size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter FAX Print Black 6066 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages in the FAX 14
mode Function according to its size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter NW Scanning Full color 6068 0 Large 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages at the Full 14
mode Color Mode in the Scanning Function according to
its size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter NW Scanning Full color 6068 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages at the Full 14
mode Color Mode in the Scanning Function according to
its size (large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Copy SCN Black 6070 0 Large 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages at the Black 14
mode Mode in the Copier Function according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Copy SCN Black 6070 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages at the Black 14
mode Mode in the Copier Function according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
defined at 08-6011
Small:
sized paper
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer 6080 Enabling/Disabling custom 0 0~1 SYS When this setting is enabled, the custom counter 1 Yes
mode counter of total counter is enabled. Related code: 08-6088,
6089.
When this setting is enabled, 08-6010 does not
affect the total counter. Since the count is
calculated based on the existing Large/Small
counter, the count before changing this setting is
also included in the count.
Print Counter(Large/Small) is included in printing
count and NW scaning count.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Scannin 6081 0 Black 0 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of scanning from 4 Yes
mode counter/Job g department/user Job Quota and addition of Scan
Quota Counter to Custom Counter.
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Scannin 6081 1 Full Color 0 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of scanning from 4 Yes
mode counter/Job g department/user Job Quota and addition of Scan
Quota Counter to Custom Counter.
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper type 6083 1 Thick1/2 (Back) Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Yes
mode contents per page. Scan counter and fax counter are not
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double
<Default value>
JPD/CND: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper type 6083 2 Special1/2 (Back) Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Yes
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double
<Default value>
JPD/CND: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper type 6083 3 Transparency Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Yes
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double
<Default value>
JPD/CND: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper type 6083 4 Envelope (Back) Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Yes
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double
<Default value>
JPD/CND: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting Counter Double count For fee charging Paper type 6083 5 Tab paper Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Yes
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double
<Default value>
JPD/CND: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator 6084 Enabling/Disabling custom 0 0~1 SYS When this setting is enabled, the custom counter 1 Yes
mode counter/Job counter/Job Quota and Job Quota of department/user are enabled.
Quota Related code: 08-6081, 6085.
When this setting is enabled, 08-6010 does not
affect the counter/Quota of department/user.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Print 6085 0 Black/Small 100 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from 4 Yes
mode counter/Job department/user Job Quota and addition of printing
Quota to Custom Counter.
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Print 6085 1 Black/Large 100 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Print 6085 2 Full color/Small 100 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Print 6085 3 Full color/Large 100 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Print 6085 4 Twin Color/Monocolor/Small 100 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom For administrator Weighting/Print 6085 5 Twin Color/Monocolor/Large 100 0~9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Counter Color/Black 6087 Twin/Mono color count 0 0~1 SYS When the pages are counted for twin/mono color 1 Yes
mode Settings quota selection counter, this code sets whether the pages are
subtracted from Color Quota or Black Quota.
Not all the pages of twin/mono color are
subtracted. The pages assigned to twin/mono color
counter are subtracted. The setting of this code is
enabled only in the Color/Black Quota mode and
not enabled in the Job Quota mode.
If the value of this code is set to "0" (Color Quota),
an error occurs if a user without color permission
performs twin color printing. Note that the same
error occurs in the Job Quota mode.
0: Color Quota 1: Black Quota
Related code:
08-6084, 08-9128, 08-9892
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Scannin 6088 0 Black/Gray 0 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of Scan Counter to Custom 4 Yes
mode g Counter (Total Counter). Since the count is
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Scannin 6088 1 Full Color 0 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of Scan Counter to Custom 4 Yes
mode g Counter (Total Counter). Since the count is
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Print 6089 0 Black/Small 100 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter (Total 4 Yes
mode Counter). Since the count is calculated based on
the existing Large/Small counter, the count before
changing this setting is also included in the count.
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Print 6089 1 Black/Large 100 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter (Total 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Print 6089 2 Full color/Small 100 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter (Total 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Print 6089 3 Full color/Large 100 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter (Total 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Print 6089 4 Twin Color/Monocolor/Small 100 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter (Total 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting/Print 6089 5 Twin Color/Monocolor/Large 100 0~9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter (Total 4 Yes
0 (weight: 0.00) – 9999 (weight: 99.99)
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6110 1st drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from 1st drawer. 2 Yes
mode Paper feed
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6111 2nd drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from 2nd drawer. 2 Yes
mode Paper feed
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6112 Bypass feed 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass feed. 2 Yes
mode Paper feed
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6113 LCF 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF. 2 Yes
mode Paper feed
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6114 PFP upper drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper 2 Yes
mode Paper feed drawer.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6115 PFP lower drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower 2 Yes
mode Paper feed drawer.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6116 ADU 0 8 digits M Counts the number of output pages of duplex 2 Yes
mode Paper feed printing.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6117 RADF 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of originals fed from RADF. 2 Yes
mode Paper feed
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter K 6190 Setting value Refer to 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1 Yes
0: Not displayed
<Default>
20ppm: 56000
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter K 6191 Setting value 225000 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1
mode timing.
0: Not displayed
[Unit: count]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Y 6192 Setting value Refer to 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1 Yes
0: Not displayed
<Default>
20ppm: 56000
25ppm: 70000
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Y 6193 Setting value 225000 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM 1
mode timing.
0: Not displayed
[Unit: count]
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter K 6194 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1 Yes
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
same as 08-6250-0
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter K 6195 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1 Yes
mode 0: clear
(Unit: 1 count = 2 seconds)
*Decelerating/Accelerating mode; 1 count = 4
seconds
Same as 08-6250-3
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Y 6196 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1 Yes
mode 0: clear
(Unit: page)
same as 08-6252-0
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM drive counter Y 6197 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time. 1 Yes
mode 0: clear
(Unit: 1 count = 2 seconds)
*Decelerating/Accelerating mode; 1 count = 4
seconds
Same as 08-6252-3
08 Setting Counter Maintenance PM counter Switching of 6198 K 1 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The 1
at 08-6190.)
08 Setting Counter Process 6211 Accumulated counter of 0 4 digits M Cleared to "0" by the image quality closed-loop 2
mode output pages since the control. Counts up with the number of printing job
performing of image quality received after this control.
control
08 Setting Counter Process Number of output 6225 Thick paper 1 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1
mode pages the thick paper 1 mode.
08 Setting Counter Process Number of output 6226 Thick paper 2 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1
mode pages the thick paper 2 mode.
08 Setting Counter Process Number of output 6228 OHP film 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1
mode pages the OHP film mode.
08 Setting Counter Charger 6229 Main charger needle 0 8 digits M Does not count up when cleaning is not effective. 1
mode electrode cleaning counter
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry 6230 1st drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Yes
mode counter from the 1st drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry 6231 2nd drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Yes
mode counter from the 2nd drawer.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry 6232 PFP upper drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of times of feeding retries from 1 Yes
mode counter the PFP upper drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry 6233 PFP lower drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of times of feeding retries from 1 Yes
mode counter the PFP upper drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry 6234 Bypass feed 0 8 digits M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Yes
mode counter from the bypass tray.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry 6235 LCF 0 8 digits M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Yes
mode counter from the LCF.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry Upper limit value 6236 1st drawer 20 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1
mode counter 6235) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry
will not be performed subsequently. In case "0" is
set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry
continues regardless of the counter setting value.
* Feeding retry counter upper limit value
In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the
transfer belt prior to a paper feeding. When the
feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is
delayed, the toner image on the transfer belt is
cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper
cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process.
After that, the toner image formation is retried while
the paper is waited. In this case, the toner for this
image formation is consumed wastefully since the
toner image on the transfer belt is already cleaned
off, even though the printing is normally completed.
Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be
consumed consequently when the upper limit value
of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as “0”
(no limit). The toner is also consumed wastefully
when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the
roller at earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have
occurred frequently.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry Upper limit value 6237 2nd drawer 20 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry Upper limit value 6238 PFP upper drawer 20 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry Upper limit value 6239 PFP lower drawer 20 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry Upper limit value 6240 Bypass feed 0 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding Feeding retry Upper limit value 6241 LCF 20 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding 6243 Special paper 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1
mode the special paper mode.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding 6244 Tab paper 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1
mode the tab paper mode.
08 Setting Counter Paper feeding 6247 Envelope 0 8 digits M (Unit: Sheets) 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Toner Backup counter 6249 0 Y 0 8 digits M The rotation time of toner refill motor is stored 14
mode for rotation time when the toner cartridge becomes empty.
of toner refill
motor

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Toner Backup counter 6249 1 M 0 8 digits M The rotation time of toner refill motor is stored 14
of toner refill
motor
08 Setting Counter Toner Backup counter 6249 2 C 0 8 digits M The rotation time of toner refill motor is stored 14
of toner refill
motor
08 Setting Counter Toner Backup counter 6249 3 K 0 8 digits M The rotation time of toner refill motor is stored 14
of toner refill
motor
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode drum(K) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
replacement 25ppm: 70000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K) counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6250 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode drum(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive 6251 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode drum(K) replacement
mode drum(Y) pages
mode drum(Y) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode drum(Y) the last replacement
mode drum(Y)
mode drum(Y) counts to be replaced
mode drum(Y) replacement
mode drum(Y) control

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode drum(Y) control
mode drum(Y)
mode drum(Y) replacement
mode drum(M) pages
mode drum(M) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode drum(M) the last replacement
mode drum(M)
mode drum(M) counts to be replaced
mode drum(M) replacement
mode drum(M) control
mode drum(M) control
mode drum(M)
mode drum(M) replacement
mode drum(C) pages
mode drum(C) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode drum(C) the last replacement
mode drum(C)
mode drum(C) counts to be replaced
mode drum(C) replacement
mode drum(C) control
mode drum(C) control
mode drum(C)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode drum(C) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode blade(K) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K) counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6258 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6259 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode blade(K) replacement
mode blade(Y) pages
mode blade(Y) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode blade(Y) the last replacement
mode blade(Y)
mode blade(Y) counts to be replaced
mode blade(Y) replacement
mode blade(Y) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning 6260 7 Present rotation counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode blade(Y) control
mode blade(Y)
mode blade(Y) replacement
mode blade(M) pages

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode blade(M) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode blade(M) the last replacement
mode blade(M)
mode blade(M) counts to be replaced
mode blade(M) replacement
mode blade(M) control
mode blade(M) control
mode blade(M)
mode blade(M) replacement
mode blade(C) pages
mode blade(C) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode blade(C) the last replacement
mode blade(C)
mode blade(C) counts to be replaced
mode blade(C) replacement
mode blade(C) control
mode blade(C) control
mode blade(C)
mode blade(C) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode the last replacement

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6274 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(K) 6275 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 7 Present rotation counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6276 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(Y) 6277 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 7 Present rotation counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6278 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(M) 6279 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 7 Present rotation counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6280 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid(C) 6281 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode needle)(K) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K) counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K) control

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6282 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6283 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode needle)(K) replacement
mode needle)(Y) pages
mode needle)(Y) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode needle)(Y) the last replacement
mode needle)(Y)
mode needle)(Y) counts to be replaced
mode needle)(Y) replacement
mode needle)(Y) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger (Wire/ 6284 7 Present rotation counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode needle)(Y) control
mode needle)(Y)
mode needle)(Y) replacement
mode needle)(M) pages
mode needle)(M) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode needle)(M) the last replacement
mode needle)(M)
mode needle)(M) counts to be replaced
mode needle)(M) replacement
mode needle)(M) control
mode needle)(M) control
mode needle)(M)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode needle)(M) replacement
mode needle)(C) pages
mode needle)(C) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode needle)(C) the last replacement
mode needle)(C)
mode needle)(C) counts to be replaced
mode needle)(C) replacement
mode needle)(C) control
mode needle)(C) control
mode needle)(C)
mode needle)(C) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode pad(K) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K) counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6290 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6291 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode pad(K) replacement
mode pad(Y) pages

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode pad(Y) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode pad(Y) the last replacement
mode pad(Y)
mode pad(Y) counts to be replaced
mode pad(Y) replacement
mode pad(Y) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger cleaning 6292 7 Present rotation counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode pad(Y) control
mode pad(Y)
mode pad(Y) replacement
mode pad(M) pages
mode pad(M) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode pad(M) the last replacement
mode pad(M)
mode pad(M) counts to be replaced
mode pad(M) replacement
mode pad(M) control
mode pad(M) control
mode pad(M)
mode pad(M) replacement
mode pad(C) pages
mode pad(C) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode pad(C) the last replacement

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode pad(C)
mode pad(C) counts to be replaced
mode pad(C) replacement
mode pad(C) control
mode pad(C) control
mode pad(C)
mode pad(C) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6299 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode material(K) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 4 Recommended driving 145000 8 digits M 4
mode material(K) counts to be replaced

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6300 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode material(K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer 6301 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode material(K) replacement
mode material(Y) pages
mode material(Y) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode material(Y) the last replacement
mode material(Y)
mode material(Y) counts to be replaced
mode material(Y) replacement
mode material(Y) control
mode material(Y) control
mode material(Y)
mode material(Y) replacement
mode material(M) pages
mode material(M) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode material(M) the last replacement
mode material(M)
mode material(M) counts to be replaced
mode material(M) replacement
mode material(M) control

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode material(M) control
mode material(M)
mode material(M) replacement
mode material(C) pages
mode material(C) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode material(C) the last replacement
mode material(C)
mode material(C) counts to be replaced
mode material(C) replacement
mode material(C) control
mode material(C) control
mode material(C)
mode material(C) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode roller output pages for contents 20ppm: 168000
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
mode roller counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6314 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer K 6315 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6316 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y 6317 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6318 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer M 6319 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller pages

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6320 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode roller
08 Setting Counter PM counter 1st transfer C 6321 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6329 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode cleaning blade output pages for contents 20ppm: 168000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade the last replacement

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 4 Recommended driving 675000 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6332 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode cleaning blade
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6333 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode cleaning blade replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 4 Recommended driving 450000 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6341 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 4 Recommended driving Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode counts to be replaced contents 20ppm: 675000
25ppm: 815000

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6346 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Heat roller 6347 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 4 Recommended driving Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode counts to be replaced contents 20ppm: 675000
25ppm: 815000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6351 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode separation finger output pages for contents 20ppm: 168000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 4 Recommended driving Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode separation finger counts to be replaced contents 20ppm: 675000
25ppm: 815000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger control

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6368 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6369 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode separation finger output pages for contents 20ppm: 168000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode separation finger the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 4 Recommended driving Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode separation finger counts to be replaced contents 20ppm: 675000
25ppm: 815000
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6370 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6371 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6382 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6382 1 Recommended number of 120000 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF) output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6382 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6382 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6383 Date of previous 0 8 digits SYS 2
mode (RADF) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6384 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6384 1 Recommended number of 120000 8 digits SYS 4
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6384 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits SYS 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6384 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6385 Date of previous 0 8 digits SYS 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 1 Recommended number of 120000 8 digits SYS 4
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits SYS 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits SYS 4
mode (RADF)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6387 Date of previous 0 8 digits SYS 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (1st 6390 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (1st 6390 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
mode drawer) output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (1st 6390 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (1st 6390 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (1st 6391 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode drawer) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6392 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6392 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer) output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6392 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6392 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller 6393 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode (2nd drawer) replacement
mode (LCF) pages
mode (LCF) output pages for
replacement
mode (LCF) the last replacement
mode (LCF)
mode (LCF) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (1st 6398 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer) pages

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (1st 6398 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (1st 6398 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (1st 6398 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (1st 6399 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (2nd 6400 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (2nd 6400 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (2nd 6400 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (2nd 6400 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (2nd 6401 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (LCF) 6402 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (LCF) 6402 1 Recommended number of 160000 8 digits M 4
mode output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (LCF) 6402 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (LCF) 6402 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (LCF) 6403 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6406 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode (1st drawer) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6406 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
mode (1st drawer) output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6406 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode (1st drawer) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6406 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode (1st drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6407 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode (1st drawer) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6408 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6408 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer) output pages for
replacement

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6408 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6408 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode (2nd drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6409 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode (2nd drawer) replacement
mode (LCF) pages
mode (LCF) output pages for
replacement
mode (LCF) the last replacement
mode (LCF)
mode (LCF) replacement
mode (Upper drawer of pages
PFP)
mode (Upper drawer of output pages for
PFP) replacement
mode (Upper drawer of the last replacement
PFP)
mode (Upper drawer of
PFP)
mode (Upper drawer of replacement
PFP)
mode (Lower drawer of pages
PFP)
mode (Lower drawer of output pages for
PFP) replacement
mode (Lower drawer of the last replacement
PFP)
mode (Lower drawer of
PFP)
mode (Lower drawer of replacement
PFP)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6416 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode (Bypass unit) pages

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6416 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
mode (Bypass unit) output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6416 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode (Bypass unit) the last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6416 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode (Bypass unit)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation pad 6417 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode (Bypass unit) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6420 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
PFP)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6420 1 Recommended number of 80000 8 digits M 4
PFP) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6420 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
PFP)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6420 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
PFP)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller 6421 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
PFP)
PFP)
PFP) replacement
PFP)
PFP)
PFP)
mode (Bypass unit) pages
mode (Bypass unit) output pages for
replacement
mode (Bypass unit) the last replacement
mode (Bypass unit)
mode (Bypass unit) replacement

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
PFP)
PFP) replacement
PFP)
PFP)
PFP)
PFP)
PFP) replacement
PFP)
PFP)
PFP)
mode (Bypass feed) pages
mode (Bypass feed) output pages for
replacement
mode (Bypass feed) the last replacement
mode (Bypass feed)
mode (Bypass feed) replacement
08 Setting Pixel counter Setting 6500 Standard paper size Refer to 0~1 SYS Selects the standard paper size to convert it into 1
mode contents the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1: LT
<Default value>
NAD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting Pixel counter Clearing 6501 All clearing SYS Clears all information related to the pixel counter. 3
mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Clearing 6502 Service technician SYS Clears all information related to the service 3
mode reference counter technician reference pixel counter.
08 Setting Pixel counter Clearing 6503 Toner cartridge reference SYS Clears all information related to the toner cartridge 3
mode counter reference pixel counter.
08 Setting Pixel counter Setting 6504 Pixel counter display 1 0~1 SYS Selects whether or not to display the pixel counter 1
mode on the LCD screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
08 Setting Pixel counter Setting 6505 Displayed reference 0 0~1 SYS Selects the reference when displaying the pixel 1
mode counter on the LCD screen.
0: Service technician reference1: Toner cartridge
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Setting 6506 Toner empty determination 0 0~1 SYS Selects the counter to determine toner empty. 1
mode counter 0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
08 Setting Pixel counter Setting Threshold setting 6507 Output pages 500 0~999 SYS Sets the number of output pages to determine 1
mode for toner empty toner empty. This setting is valid when "0" is set at
determination 08-6506.
08 Setting Pixel counter Setting Threshold setting 6508 Pixel counter 21500 0~60000 SYS Sets the number of output pages to determine 1
mode for toner empty toner empty. This setting is valid when "1" is set at
determination 08-6506.
08 Setting Pixel counter Clearing Flag 6509 Service technician reference 0 0~1 SYS Becomes "1" when 08-6502 is performed. 2
mode
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Cleared date 6510 Service technician reference SYS Displays the date on which 08-6502 was performed. 2
mode
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Cleared date Toner cartridge 6511 Y SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Cleared date Toner cartridge 6512 M SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Cleared date Toner cartridge 6513 C SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Cleared date Toner cartridge 6514 K SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Count started Toner cartridge 6519 Y SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode date reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Count started Toner cartridge 6520 M SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode date reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Count started Toner cartridge 6521 C SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode date reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Display Count started Toner cartridge 6522 K SYS Displays the date on which 08-6503 was performed. 2
mode date reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Service PPC 6557 Full color 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages technician the standard paper size in the copy function, full
reference color mode and service technician reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Service PPC 6558 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages technician the standard paper size in the copy function, black
reference mode and service technician reference.
[Unit. page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Service PRT 6559 Full color 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages technician the standard paper size in the printer function, full
reference color mode and service technician reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Service PRT 6560 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages technician the standard paper size in the printer function,
reference black mode and service technician reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Service FAX 6561 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages technician the standard paper size in the FAX function, black
reference mode and service technician reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PPC 6562 Full color (K) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages reference the standard paper size in the copy function, full
color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PPC 6563 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages reference the standard paper size in the copy function, black
mode and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PRT 6564 Full color (K) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages reference the standard paper size in the printer function, full
color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PRT 6565 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages reference the standard paper size in the printer function,
black mode and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge FAX 6566 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
mode output pages reference the standard paper size in the FAX function, black
mode and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PPC 6567 Full color (Y) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PRT 6568 Full color (Y) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PPC 6569 Full color (M) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PRT 6570 Full color (M) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PPC 6571 Full color (C) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Number of Toner cartridge PRT 6572 Full color (C) 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to 2
color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Toner cartridge 6573 Y 0 3 digits SYS Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge Y 2
mode replacement replacement.
counter
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Toner cartridge 6574 M 0 3 digits SYS Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge M 2
counter
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Toner cartridge 6575 C 0 3 digits SYS Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge C 2
counter
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Toner cartridge 6576 K 0 3 digits SYS Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge K 2
counter
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6587 Full color (Y+M+C+K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Service function, full color mode, all toner and service
technician technician reference.
reference [Unit: 0.01%]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6588 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Service function, full color mode, toner Y and service
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6589 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Service function, full color mode, toner M and service
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6590 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Service function, full color mode, toner C and service
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6591 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Service function, full color mode, toner K and service
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6592 Full color (Y+M+C+K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6593 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6594 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6595 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6596 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6597 Full color (Y+M+C+K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6598 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6599 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6600 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6601 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6602 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Service function, black mode and service technician
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6603 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel FAX 6604 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the FAX 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT/FAX 6605 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the 2
mode count/Service copy/printer/FAX function, black mode and service
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6606 Full color (Y+M+C+K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Service full color mode, all toner and service technician
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6607 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Service full color mode, toner Y and service technician
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6608 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Service full color mode, toner M and service technician

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6609 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Service full color mode, toner C and service technician
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6610 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Service full color mode, toner K and service technician
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6611 Full color (Y+M+C+K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6612 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6613 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6614 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6615 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6616 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Service black mode and service technician reference.
technician [Unit: 0.01%]
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6617 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel FAX 6618 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function, 2
mode count/Service black mode and service technician reference.
technician [Unit: 0.01%]
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6619 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Toner function, full color mode, toner Y and toner
cartridge cartridge reference.
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6620 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Toner function, full color mode, toner M and toner
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6621 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Toner function, full color mode, toner C and toner

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6622 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Toner function, full color mode, toner K and toner
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6623 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Toner function, black mode and toner cartridge reference.
cartridge [Unit: 0.01%]
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC 6624 Full color (K)+black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy 2
mode count/Toner function, full color/black mode, toner K and toner
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6625 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6626 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6627 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6628 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6629 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PRT 6630 Full color (K)+black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer 2
mode count/Toner function, full color/black mode, toner K and toner
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6631 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6632 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT 6633 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy/printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel PPC/PRT/FAX 6634 Full color (K)+black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the 2
mode count/Toner copy/printer/FAX function, black mode, toner K and
cartridge toner cartridge reference.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Average pixel FAX 6635 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the FAX 2
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6636 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Toner full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge
cartridge reference.
reference [Unit:0.01%]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6637 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Toner full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6638 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Toner full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6639 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Toner full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6640 Full color (Y) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6641 Full color (M) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6642 Full color (C) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6643 Full color (K) 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel FAX 6644 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function, 2
mode count/Toner black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit:
cartridge 0.01%]
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Pixel count PPC 6713 0 0-5% 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. 14
mode distribution/full The number of output pages in each range is
color (Y) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy
function, full color mode and toner Y are displayed.
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Pixel count PPC 6713 1 5.1-10% 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. 14
[Unit: page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
color (M) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy
function, full color mode and toner M are displayed.
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
color (C) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy
function, full color mode and toner C are displayed.
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
color (K) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy
function, full color mode and toner K are displayed.
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Pixel count PRT 6717 0 0-5% 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. 14
color (Y) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the
printer function, full color mode and toner Y are
displayed. [Unit: page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Pixel count PRT 6717 1 5.1-10% 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. 14

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
color (M) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the
printer function, full color mode and toner M are

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
color (C) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the
printer function, full color mode and toner C are

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
color (K) displayed. In this code, the distributions in the
printer function, full color mode and toner K are

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode distribution/black The number of output pages in each range is
displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy
function and black mode are displayed.
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
displayed. In this code, the distributions in the
printer function and black mode are displayed.
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Pixel count FAX 6723 0 0-5% 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. 14
displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX
[Unit: page]

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Pixel count FAX 6723 1 5.1-10% 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. 14
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
[Unit: page]
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PPC 6724 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, 2
mode count/Toner black mode and toner cartridge reference.
reference
08 Setting Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel PRT 6725 Black 0 0~10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer 2
reference

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter 6817 Calibration counter 0 8 digits SYS Displays the number of times a calibration chart is 1
mode printed. When "0" is set for this code, and also
when in the line adjustment mode or when the fee
charging counter is reset, this counter is reset. The
counter value goes up every time a calibration
chart is printed, regardless of the setting value of
the code 08-9894 (Calibration chart charging
method).
08 Setting Counter Total counter 6900 Thick paper decelerating 0 8 digits M Displays the current value of the total counter. 1
mode mode Counts up when the registration sensor is ON.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Photoconductive 6905 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages: Displays the 4
mode mode drum (K) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
printed in the decelerating mode (mode for thick
paper, special paper, and etc.) at present. Only "0"
is acceptable. When "0" is entered, the counter is
reset.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Photoconductive 6905 1 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement: 4
mode mode drum (K) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
decelerating mode (mode for thick paper, special
paper, and etc.) at the last replacement. "0" is
displayed if no replacement was performed.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Photoconductive 6905 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts: Displays the accumulated 4
mode mode drum (K) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
thick paper, special paper, and etc.) at present.
Only "0" is acceptable. When "0" is entered, the
counter is reset. (1 count = 3 seconds)
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Photoconductive 6905 3 Drive counts at the last 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement: Displays the 4
mode mode drum (K) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
for thick paper, special paper, and etc.) at the last
replacement. "0" is displayed if no replacement
was performed. (1 count = 3 seconds)
mode mode drum (Y) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode drum (Y) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode drum (Y) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode drum (Y) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode mode drum (M) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode drum (M) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode drum (M) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode drum (M) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
mode mode drum (C) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode drum (C) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode drum (C) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode drum (C) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Developer 6925 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages: Displays the 4
mode mode material (K) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Developer 6925 1 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement: 4
mode mode material (K) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Developer 6925 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts: Displays the accumulated 4
mode mode material (K) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Developer 6925 3 Drive counts at the last 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement: Displays the 4
mode mode material (K) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
mode mode material (Y) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode material (Y) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode material (Y) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode material (Y) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
mode mode material (M) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode material (M) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode material (M) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode material (M) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode mode material (C) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode material (C) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode material (C) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode material (C) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 1st transfer power 6929 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages: Displays the 4
mode mode supply roller (K) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 1st transfer power 6929 1 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement: 4
mode mode supply roller (K) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 1st transfer power 6929 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts: Displays the accumulated 4
mode mode supply roller (K) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 1st transfer power 6929 3 Drive counts at the last 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement: Displays the 4
mode mode supply roller (K) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
mode mode supply roller (Y) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode supply roller (Y) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode mode supply roller (Y) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode supply roller (Y) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
mode mode supply roller (M) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode supply roller (M) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode supply roller (M) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode supply roller (M) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
mode mode supply roller (C) pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
mode mode supply roller (C) the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
mode mode supply roller (C) driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
mode mode supply roller (C) replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Transfer belt 6933 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages: Displays the 4
mode mode pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Transfer belt 6933 1 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement: 4
mode mode the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Transfer belt 6933 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts: Displays the accumulated 4
mode mode driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating Transfer belt 6933 3 Drive counts at the last 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement: Displays the 4
mode mode replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 2nd transfer roller 6935 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages: Displays the 4
mode mode pages accumulated number of sheets that have been
reset.
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 2nd transfer roller 6935 1 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement: 4
mode mode the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 2nd transfer roller 6935 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts: Displays the accumulated 4
mode mode driving time in the decelerating mode (mode for
08 Setting Counter Total counter Decelerating 2nd transfer roller 6935 3 Drive counts at the last 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement: Displays the 4
mode mode replacement total driving time in the decelerating mode (mode
08 Setting Counter Counter 6984 Waste toner box nearly-full 0 8 digits M Total count of the values of Y, M, C, and BK of 08- 1
mode detection counter 6246 (Counter for period of toner cartridge rotation
time)
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 0 Present number of output 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K) pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 1 Recommended number of Refer to 8 digits M <Default value> 4
mode (K) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 2 Number of output pages at 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K) the last replacement

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 4 Recommended driving 225000 8 digits M 4
mode (K) counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 5 Driving counts at the last 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 6 Present output pages for 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 7 Present driving counts for 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K) control
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6985 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4
mode (K)
08 Setting Counter PM counter LED gap spacer 6986 Date of previous 0 8 digits M 2
mode (K) replacement
mode (Y) pages
mode (Y) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode (Y) the last replacement
mode (Y)
mode (Y) counts to be replaced
mode (Y) replacement
mode (Y) control
mode (Y) control
mode (Y)
mode (Y) replacement
mode (M) pages
mode (M) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode (M) the last replacement
mode (M)
mode (M) counts to be replaced

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
mode (M) replacement
mode (M) control
mode (M) control
mode (M)
mode (M) replacement
mode (C) pages
mode (C) output pages for contents 20ppm: 56000
mode (C) the last replacement
mode (C)
mode (C) counts to be replaced
mode (C) replacement
mode (C) control
mode (C) control
mode (C)
mode (C) replacement
08 Setting Counter Cleaning Main charger 6993 Cleaning counter 0 8 digits M (Unit: times) 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Cleaning LED head 6994 Cleaning counter 0 8 digits M (Unit: times) 1
mode
08 Setting Counter Cleaning LED head 6995 Number of times of 0 8 digits M (Unit: times) 1
mode cleaning/0 clear
08 Setting Counter Image quality Execution Full mode 6997 0 Execution number counter 0 8 digits M Clearing the number to 0 is only available. 4
mode control number counter execution number of image quality control Unit: Number
08 Setting Counter Image quality Execution Short paper and 6997 1 Execution number counter 0 8 digits M Clearing the number to 0 is only available. 4
mode control number counter full color mode of image quality control Unit: Number
execution number
08 Setting Counter Image quality Execution Short paper and 6997 2 Execution number counter 0 8 digits M Clearing the number to 0 is only available. 4
mode control number counter monochrome of image quality control Unit: Number
mode execution
number

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Image Image All clearing Adjustment values 7000 PPC related codes SYS Clears the values of the following codes: 3
mode Processing of all 05/08 image 05-7025 to 7296
process codes 05-7618 to 7987
08-7021 to 7052
08-7601 to 7618
08-8103, 8104
08 Setting Image Image All clearing Gamma 7001 PPC related codes SYS Clears PPC related areas of the HDD. 3
mode Processing correction table
08 Setting Image User interface User mode PPC 7034 Black 0 0~2 SYS 0: Unused 1 Yes
mode Processing setting 1: Text/Photo base
2: Text base
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated Color PPC 7052 0 Plain paper 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
mode Processing correction data date and time 359 correction data.
YYMMDDHHMM
YY: year, MM: month, DD: day, HH: hour, MM:
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated Color PPC 7052 2 Recycled paper 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated Color PPC 7052 3 Thick paper1 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated Color PPC 7052 4 Thick paper2 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated Color PPC 7052 7 Special paper1 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated Color PPC 7052 8 Special paper2 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Image All clearing Adjustment values 7300 NW PRT related codes SYS Clears the values of the following codes: 3
mode Processing of all 05/08 image 05-7302 to 7385
08-8005, 08-8103
08 Setting Image Image All clearing Gamma 7301 NW PRT related codes SYS Clears print related area in HDD. 3
mode Processing correction table
08 Setting Image Screen Printer 7310 600x600 dpi/Black 0 0~1 SYS 0: High screen ruling value 1
mode Processing switchover 1: Low screen ruling value

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW printer/600dpi 7352 0 Plain paper 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW printer/600dpi 7352 2 Recycled paper 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW printer/600dpi 7352 3 Thick paper1 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW printer/600dpi 7352 4 Thick paper2 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW printer/600dpi 7352 7 Special paper1 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW printer/600dpi 7352 8 Special paper2 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW 7354 0 Plain paper 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
mode Processing correction data date and time printer/1200dpi 359 correction data.
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW 7354 2 Recycled paper 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW 7354 3 Thick paper1 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW 7354 4 Thick paper2 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW 7354 7 Special paper1 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Automatic tone Last updated NW 7354 8 Special paper2 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 14 Yes
YYMMDDHHMM
minute
08 Setting Image Image All clearing Adjustment values 7400 NW SCN related codes SYS Clears the values of the following codes: 3
mode Processing of all 05/08 image 05-7400 to 05-7499
process codes 05-8300 to 05-8415
08-7401
08-8300 to 08-8304
08 Setting Image User interface User mode NW SCN 7401 Black 0 0~3 SYS 0: Unused 1 Yes
mode Processing setting 1: Black TEXT/PHOTO base
2: Black TEXT base
3: Black PHOTO base
08 Setting Image Image All clearing Adjustment values 7500 FAX related codes SYS Clears the adjustment values of the following 3
mode Processing of all 05 image codes:
08 Setting Image User interface PPC(color) 7610 Display setting of red seal Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Display setting OFF 1
mode Processing color mode contents 1: Display setting ON
<Default value>
CND: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting Image Image 7612 Image repeat gap 5 0~10 SYS Unit: mm 1
mode Processing
08 Setting Image User interface User mode PPC 7614 Color 0 0~5 SYS 0: Unused 1 Yes
mode Processing setting 1: TEXT/PHOTO base
2: TEXT base
3: Printed image base
4: Photo base
5: Map base
08 Setting Image Image PPC 7617 ADF noise reduction 3 0~3 SYS Sets the adjustment level for reducing color 1
mode Processing streaks when the RADF is used.
3: Disabled (default)
2: Noise reduction level - Low
1: Noise reduction level - Middle (recommended)
0: Noise reduction level - High
* This code is valid in the Text/Photo mode for
color copying. This code is valid in the Text/Photo
mode and Text mode for monochrome copying.
08 Setting Image User interface Color NW printer Display setting of 8005 Display of check box Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Display setting OFF 1
mode Processing red seal color contents 1: Display setting ON
mode <Default value>
CND: 1
Others: 0

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting Image Image quality TRC correction 8103 Switchover of 1 0~1 SYS Switches the enable/disable setting of tone 1
mode Processing control enable/disable setting of correction with image quality TRC control. Do not
tone correction change the value as it may decrease the tone
correction.
0: Disable
1: Enable
08 Setting Image Screen Printer 8110 600x600 dpi/Color 0 0~1 SYS 0: High screen ruling value 1
mode Processing switchover 1: Low screen ruling value
08 Setting Image Image SCN 8300 ADF noise reduction 3 0~3 SYS Sets the adjustment level for reducing color 1
mode Processing streaks when the RADF is used.
3: Disabled (default)
2: Noise reduction level - Low
1: Noise reduction level - Middle (recommended)
0: Noise reduction level - High
08 Setting Image User interface User mode NW SCN 8303 Color 0 0~4 SYS 0: Unused 1 Yes
mode Processing setting 1: Text/Photo base
2: Text base
3: Photo base
4: e-document base
* e-document: This is the mode that corresponds
to the law in Japan. This mode is used to clarify
area where changes were made with such as a
correction fluid.
08 Setting System General 8504 Feeding method of odd 0 0~1 SYS 0: One side 1
mode page number in duplex 1: Both sides
printing (Raw print) * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
08 Setting System General 8506 Forcible mode change in 0 0~2 SYS 0: SLEEP MODE 1
mode cartridge empty status 1: AUTO POWER SAVE
2: READY
08 Setting System General 8508 Controlling method for print 2 0~2 SYS 0: No control 1
mode image position adjustment 1: Cuts the image
in secondary scanning 2: Shifts the image
direction
08 Setting System General 8509 Controlling amount for print 12 0~36 SYS 0-36 1
mode image position adjustment
in secondary scanning
direction
08 Setting System General 8510 Menu display for controlling 0 0~1 SYS 0: Menu not displayed1: Menu displayed 1
mode print image position
adjustment in secondary
scanning direction
08 Setting System General 8511 Wide A4 Mode (for PCL) 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disable 1: Enable 1
mode * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
08 Setting System General 8512 Number of jobs in batch 10 2~10 SYS 2-10: From 2 to jobs can be specified 1
mode processing
08 Setting System General Overprint 8513 0 For PDF printing 2 0~2 SYS Enables or disables the overprinting function 4
mode function setting setting when printing PDF files.
0: OFF
1: ON
2: ON (only for PDF/X files)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System General Overprint 8513 1 For PostScript printing 0 0~1 SYS Enables or disables the overprinting function 4
mode function setting setting for PostScript printing.
0: OFF
1: ON
08 Setting System General 8514 Threshold value setting for 20 5~30 SYS This code is used for changing the range in which 1 Yes
mode RIP standard paper non-standard paper sizes are judged as standard
judgment ones. If the page size data are within the standard
paper size ± the setting value, the page size is
judged as a standard paper size in PS/PDF
printing. If the page size data are out of the range,
the page size is judged as a non-standard paper
size. The unit for the setting value is PS points. 1
PS point is approx. 0.35 mm.
08 Setting System General Outside erase 8515 PPC 0 -3~3 SYS The larger the value, area to be erased increases. 1
mode judgment The smaller the value, area to be erased
threshold decreases.
(Default)
08 Setting System General Outside erase 8516 NW SCN 0 -3~3 SYS The larger the value, area to be erased increases. 1
mode judgment The smaller the value, area to be erased
threshold decreases.
(Default)
08 Setting System General 8517 Remote Scan User 1 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1
mode authentication automatic (A user always enters manually (current method))1:
login ON
(Previous authentication information will be used)
08 Setting System General 8518 Overwriting mode for 0 0~3 SYS 0: Always OFF 1
mode scanned files 1: Meta Scan function ON / Normal scan function
OFF
2: Meta Scan function OFF / Normal scan function
ON
3: Always ON
08 Setting System General 8519 Scan PDF file Paper size 1 0~1 SYS 0: Equivalent to scan image size 1
mode 1: Fitted into any standard size
08 Setting System General 8520 Underscore conversion of 1 0~1 SYS Sets the prohibited characters in filename to covert 1
mode prohibited character in to underscore.
filename 0: \ / > < , " | ? * : ; = [ ] +
1: \ / > < " | ? * :
* 0: Existing model standard 1: Windows standard
Since setting the value to "1" allows some
prohibited characters, filename might not be
processed in external application or server.
08 Setting System General 8521 Switchover of output format Refer to 0~1 SYS Switches the output format of date in attachment of 1
mode of Service Notification contents Service Notification.
attachment 0: YYYY.MM.DD
1: YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS
<Default value>
NAD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting 8523 Toner near-empty status Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: ON 1 Yes
mode Message contents 1: OFF
<Default value>
JPD/NAD/MJD/AUD/ARD: 1
ASD/TWD/CND: 0

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting 8524 No paper message 0 0~1 SYS 0: ON 1: OFF 1
mode
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting 8525 No paper message (T-LCF 0 0~1 SYS 0: ON 1: OFF 1
mode left tray)
08 Setting System User interface 8526 Scan Preview Default setting 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1
mode
08 Setting System General 8527 Scan Preview Default 0 0~1 SYS 0: Page Fit 1: Width Fit 1
mode display type
08 Setting System General Transfer belt Short size 8529 0 Number of pages released 4 0~9 SYS Sets a threshold (the number of pages) for 4
mode release threshold (Copier) switching from ACS to the black mode. When the
in ACS specified number of pages has been printed in the
black mode only, the transfer belt is released and
ACS shifts to the black mode.
[Unit. page]
mode release threshold (Printer) switching from ACS to the black mode. When the
[Unit. page]
mode release threshold (Box print) switching from ACS to the black mode. When the
[Unit. page]
08 Setting System General 8532 Control panel Brightness 4 1~7 SYS 1-7: Brightness level 1
mode level adjustment
08 Setting System General 8533 1st transfer roller 0 0~2 SYS When jittering occurs during the printing of thick 1
mode contact/release setting paper in the black mode with the 2nd transfer roller
when printing thick paper released from the transfer belt, this setting makes
the roller contact.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled only for thick paper and special paper
2: Enabled for all media types
08 Setting System General 8534 1st transfer roller 0 0~2 SYS When jittering occurs during the printing of thick 1
mode contact/release setting paper in the black mode with the 2nd transfer roller
when printing thick paper released from the transfer belt, this setting makes
(for copy) the roller contact.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled only for thick paper and special paper
2: Enabled for all media types
08 Setting System General 8537 Sorting method for 0 0~1 SYS Changes the sorting order for print jobs on the 1
mode displaying private/hold print private/hold print list.
jobs 0: Descending order
1: Ascending order
08 Setting System User interface 8538 Toner near empty 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode notification setting 1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface SCN 8540 Date/time format in the 1 0~1 SYS 0: YYYY/MM/DDhh:mm:ss.mmm 1
mode Meta Scan XML file 1: YYYY-MMDDThh:mm:ss.mmmTZD
08 Setting System User interface 8543 Switching to the low power 1 0~1 SYS 0: Not switched 1 Yes
mode consumption mode in the 1: Switched under certain conditions
Sleep mode

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User interface 8544 Tolerance for switching to 5 5~600 SYS Sets the range of tolerance in which the equipment 1 Yes
mode Super Sleep mode returns to the Super Sleep mode after the system
is started during that mode.
Unit: Second
08 Setting System User interface 8546 Input setting of minus value 0 0~1 SYS 0: Inputting a minus value is disabled. 1 Yes
mode for image shift when copying 1: Inputting a minus value is enabled.
08 Setting System User interface Paper feeding 8548 Operation of drawer size 0 0~1 SYS 0: Operation of cassette size change is disabled. 1
mode change when printing is 1: Operation of cassette size change is enabled.
interrupted by size mismatch
08 Setting System User interface Counter 8549 Hardware key control when 0 0~1 SYS 0: No control 1
mode external counter is installed 1: Mode switch key is disabled.
08 Setting System Network 8585 Edit setting of e-mail subject 1 0~1 SYS 0: Not allowed 1
mode 1: Allowed
08 Setting System Network 8586 Addition of date and time to 1 0~1 SYS 0: Not added 1
mode email subject 1: Added
08 Setting System Network 8587 Character string of email 0 0~1 SYS Switches the default character string of subject. 1
mode subject 0: Character string at the shipment
1: Character string specified by users
08 Setting System User control LDAP Attribute value 8592 Sender address mail SYS Sets the default attribute value of sender address. 11
mode authentication setting Maximum 34 characters (ASCII).
08 Setting System User control LDAP Attribute value 8593 Sender name uid SYS Sets the default attribute value of sender name. 11
mode authentication setting Maximum 34 characters (ASCII).
08 Setting System User interface 8597 Automatic update of 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode private/hold print job list 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Maintenance 8598 Template icon layout on the 0 0~1 SYS 0: Pattern 1 1
mode control panel (1) (2) (3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8)
(9) (10) (11) (12)
(13) (14) (15) (16)
1: Pattern 2
(1) (2) (9) (10)
(3) (4) (11) (12)
(5) (6) (13) (14)
(7) (8) (15) (16)
08 Setting System General Outside erase 8600 Change of default value 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 Yes
mode 1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface 8603 Special usage of external 0 0~2 SYS 0: None 1
mode options I/F 1: Usage 1
2: Usage 2
08 Setting System Network Prioritized 8608 Windows 0 0~100 SYS Sets the prioritized authentication server to be 1 Yes
mode authentication searched (0 to 100). The servers displayed on the
server screen accessed by TopAccess -> Administration -
> Maintenance -> Directory Service are numbered
beginning at the top (0 to 100).
08 Setting System Network Prioritized 8609 LDAP 0 0~100 SYS Sets the prioritized authentication server to be 1 Yes

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network Prioritized 8610 Card 0 0~100 SYS Sets the prioritized authentication server to be 1 Yes
08 Setting System User interface 8622 Date and time addition 1 0~1 SYS 0: Not added 1
mode setting to file name of scan 1: Added
to file/e-mail
08 Setting System General 8623 0 RIP function setting 1 0~1 SYS Enables/Disables the function related to Excel 4
mode boarder rendering of PCL6. The function is to
prevent missing lines when scaling down and
inconsistent line width when scaling up.
0: Disabled (No correction. Compliant with PCL6
language)
1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface 8624 Switchover of filename 3 0~3 SYS Switches the display method of filename. 1 Yes
mode display method 0: Displays the filename from the beginning
1: Displays the trailing characters
2: Displays the beginning and trailing characters
3: Displays the filename without abbreviation
08 Setting System User interface 8628 Job operation on the COPY 0 0~1 SYS This setting enables user to move from the COPY 1
mode screen when the coin screen to JOB STATUS screen, and then operate
controller is connected jobs during printing when the coin controller is
connected. This code is valid when the value of 08-
9016 is "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System FAX 8631 Filename creation at fax 0 0~1 SYS 0: Use address name (family-name/first-name) as 1
mode reception and forwarding filename if multiple names are found by address
book search of TSI (sender information).
1: Use address name (family-name/first-name) as
filename only when single name is found by
address book search of TSI (sender information).
08 Setting System User interface 8640 Job build operation when 0 0~1 SYS This setting enables user to use the job build 1
mode the coin controller is function when the coin controller is connected. This
connected code is valid when the value of 08-9016 is "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System General 8641 Notification setting for job 1 0~1 SYS Sets the notification setting for job cancel. This 1
mode cancel setting is effective for the following error codes:
1CC0, 2BB0, 2CC0, 2DC0, 2EC0
0: Disabled (Not notified)
1: Enabled (Notified)
08 Setting System User interface Card reader LDAP 8642 LDAP attribute name eBMUserCa SYS Maximum 32 characters (ASCII). 11
mode authentication settings 2 rd

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Sound 8657 Placing original 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode
08 Setting System Sound 8658 Pressing [INTERRUPT] 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode button
08 Setting System Sound 8659 Switchover of function 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode
08 Setting System Sound 8660 Completion of job (except 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode for FAX)
08 Setting System Sound 8661 End of warming- 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode up/prewarming/sleep
08 Setting System Sound 8662 Job interrupt (out of paper) 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode
08 Setting System Sound 8663 Fax transmission error 0 0~1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Yes
mode
08 Setting System Sound Hours for mute 8664 0 Enable/Disable setting of 0 0~1 SYS 0: Mute is disabled 1: Mute is enabled 4 Yes
mode mute
08 Setting System Sound Hours for mute 8664 1 Starting time 0 0~2359 SYS (HHMM) 4 Yes
mode
08 Setting System Sound Hours for mute 8664 2 Ending time 0 0~2359 SYS (HHMM) 4 Yes
mode
08 Setting System General 8670 e-Filing print setting when 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not allowed 1
mode key counter/totalizer is 1: Allowed
installed
08 Setting System Network Number of retry 8671 0 FTP 0 0~10 SYS The transmission may succeed when the number 4
mode for file transfer of retry increases. However, it takes longer time to
complete the job.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network Number of retry 8671 1 SMB 0 0~10 SYS The transmission may succeed when the number 4
complete the job.
08 Setting System Network Number of retry 8671 2 NetWare 0 0~10 SYS The transmission may succeed when the number 4
complete the job.
08 Setting System Network Retry interval for 8672 0 FTP 0 0~999 SYS The transmission may succeed when the retry 4
mode file transfer interval becomes longer. However, it takes longer
time to complete the job. (Unit: sec.)
08 Setting System Network Retry interval for 8672 1 SMB 0 0~999 SYS The transmission may succeed when the retry 4
08 Setting System Network Retry interval for 8672 2 NetWare 0 0~999 SYS The transmission may succeed when the retry 4
08 Setting System General 8673 Disclosure of image log 0 0~1 SSDK 0: Not opened to public 1
mode function 1: Opened to public
08 Setting System General 8674 Prohibition of transition to 0 0~1 SYS 0: Allowed 1
mode sleep mode during network 1: Prohibited
initialization
08 Setting System FAX 8700 Secret reception setting 0 0~2 SYS When the value of 08-8924 is "0", the value of this 1
mode code can be set to "1" or "2".
0: Always Off
1: Always On
2. Scheduled reception
08 Setting System User interface 8704 Email/FAX address 0 0~1 SYS 0: No restriction 1
mode restriction 1: Search for external LDAP only
Use this code to restrict address of emal/fax to
specified LDAP server. If the value of this code is
set to "1", the addresses of emal/fax are restricted
to the LDAP server specified with TopAccess, and
the direct input of addresses and selecting
addresses from the local address book are not
available. If the value of this code is set to "1", this
setting is given priority over the setting value of 08-
9299, 08-3848, 08-3849.
08 Setting System User interface 8709 Display setting of Service Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets whether the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] 1 Yes
mode Notification contents button is displayed on the screen accessed by
[USER FUNCTIONS] -> [ADMIN] -> [SERVICE].
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
<Default value>
JPD/NAD/MJD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System Scanning 8710 Designation of language 0 0~2 SYS 0: Automatic selection 1
mode code for ScanToFTP 1: UTF8
2: Shift-JIS

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System General Hardcopy 8711 Enable/Disable setting of 1 0~1 SYS Set this code to "1: Disabled" to disable the 1
mode security printing watermark information watermark information tracking application at
tracking application hardcopy security printing. When this code is set to
"1: Disabled", a license error occurs even if the
license for hardcopy security printing is enabled. If
this error occurs, hardcopy security printing is
available, but copy prohibition function and tracking
application are not available.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface 8712 Display setting of the 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the drawer button in USER 1 Yes
mode drawer setting button FUNCTIONS is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System User interface 8713 Setting of web upload/web 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the web upload and web printing 1
mode printing function is enabled or disabled.
- Web upload is a function which uploads the
image data created on the equipment to the web
page displayed on EWB.
- Web printing is a function which prints the web
page displayed on EWB or the PDF file included in
the web page displayed on EWB.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface Service 8715 Password for zip file with #1048109 SYS Password for zip file with password of service 11
mode notification password notification information.
information Minimum number of digits: 0, maximum number of
digits: 20
Available character: alphanumeric characters and
symbols
08 Setting System General 8717 Shutdown when Super 0 0~1 SYS Sets the operation when the power button is 1 Yes
mode Sleep is enabled pressed for a few seconds if Super Sleep is
enabled.
0: Hibernation 1: Super Sleep
08 Setting System User interface 8718 Selection for caching the 0 0~17 SYS Use this code to shorten the time to switch the 1
mode screen of control panel at function on the control panel for the first time
start-up immediately after start-up. However, the start-up
time becomes longer (about 1 to 3 seconds per
screen). When selecting multiple screens, enter
the total value.
0: Disabled
1: Copy
16: Fax
08 Setting System Network 8719 MTU setting of network 1500 576~1500 NIC Normally there''s no need to change the MTU 12
mode communication value. However, set the proper MTU value when
MFP is connected to the Internet using broadband
router and so on.
08 Setting System User interface 8720 Department code display 0 0~1 SYS 0: Displays department code with asterisk when 1 Yes
mode with asterisk inputting it.
1: Displays department code as it is when inputting
it.

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System FAX 8721 Automatic FAX sending at 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the job is sent or canceled when 1 Yes
mode AutoClear when scanning AutoClear is executed on the interruption screen to
original put on the glass confirm the next original displayed after scanning
the original put on the glass. Use this code to
cancel job when the equipment is left unattended
while the interruption screen is displayed.
0: Sends job
1: Cancels job
08 Setting System User interface 8722 Display method of "Cannot 0 0~1 SYS Sets the display method of error if the Home 1 Yes
mode find the Home Directory" on Directory for user cannot be obtained from the
the control panel server when setting the Home Directory for
scanning. Use this code to disable the pop-up
display when the Home Directory cannot be
obtained depending on the user.
0: Displays the pop-up dialogue when user logs in
1: Displays the message in the guidance area
when the Scan to File screen is displayed
08 Setting System User interface 8723 Pop-up On/Off at logout 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the pop-up dialog of confirmation for 1 Yes
mode logging out is displayed when user or department
logs out by pressing [FUNCTION CLEAR] button
twice or pressing [ACCESS] button.
0: Logs out without displaying pop-up dialog
1: Displays pop-up dialog when logging out
08 Setting System User interface 8724 Display setting of Edit From 1 0~1 SYS 0: Not displayed (From Address cannot be edited) 1 Yes
mode Address button for Scan to 1: Displayed (From Address can be edited)
email
08 Setting System User interface 8725 Display setting of [USER 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the [CHANGE LANGUAGE] button 1 Yes
mode FUNCTIONS]-> CHANGE accessed from [USER FUNCTIONS] button is
LANGUAGE button displayed or not. Use this code to prohibit users
from changing the language displayed on the
control panel. Administrators can change the
language.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System General 8726 Job deletion on the Job 0 0~1 SYS Use this code to enable the job deletion on the 1 Yes
mode Status screen [Job Status] screen. When "3: High level" is set for
code 08-8911, be sure to disable this setting.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 8727 Display of dedicated screen 0 0~1 SYS Switches whether the message to hold a card over 1
mode for card authentication the card reader is displayed on the login screen
when the card authentication is enabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 0 Display/Non-display setting 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 4
mode of user name in TopAccess * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 1 Enable/Disable setting of 0 0~1 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name forced printing 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 2 Prioritizing printer driver 1 0~1 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name setting 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 3 Application to network fax 0 0~1 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name job 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 4 Enable/Disable setting of 0 0~1 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name prefix/suffix 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 6 White background setting 1 0~1 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 7 Print position 0 0~3 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name 0: Bottom left 1: Top left 2: Bottom right 3: Top
right
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 8 Fine adjustment of print 3 0~100 SYS Adjusts the print position in X direction. The print 4
mode of user name position (X) position shifts toward inside of original when the
value increases. Unit: pt. 1pt = 0.35mm.
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 9 Fine adjustment of print 3 0~100 SYS Adjusts the print position in Y direction. The print 4
mode of user name position (Y) position shifts toward inside of original when the
value increases. Unit: pt. 1pt = 0.35mm.
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 10 Font setting 0 0~9 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name 0: Helvetica 1: AlbertusMT 2: Chicago 3:
Eurostile 4: Geneva 5: GillSans 6: LetterGothic
7: Monaco 8: Taffy 9: TimesNewRomanPSMT
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 11 Font size setting 8 6~16 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name 6-16pt.
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 12 Font color setting 0 0~7 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 4
mode of user name 0: Black 1: Gray 2: Red 3: Green 4: Blue 5:
Light red 6: Light green 7: Light blue
08 Setting System Forced printing 8728 13 Density setting of light font 40 10~90 SYS Sets the density when the font color is set to gray, 4
mode of user name color light red, light green, or light blue.
08 Setting System Forced printing 8729 Prefix setting Printed by SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 11
mode of user name Maximum 64 characters.
08 Setting System Forced printing 8730 Suffix setting SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess. 11
mode of user name Maximum 64 characters.
08 Setting System User interface 8732 Default screen for Menu 0 0~1 SYS 0: My Menu (Default) 1
mode 1: Public Menu
08 Setting System Scanning 8735 Sending setting of 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1
mode ScanToURL * This code is valid only when HDD is installed.
08 Setting System Scanning 8736 Maximum size for 5 0~100 SYS Sets the maximum size of attachment that can be 1
mode ScanToURL attachment sent with ScanToURL.
0: Always sends URL
1-100: Maximum size (MB)
08 Setting System General 8737 Restart behavior when out 0 0~1 SYS 0: Automatically restarted 1
mode of paper is solved (bypass 1: Restarted by pressing the [START] button
feeding)

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting 8738 E-mail address direct input 1 0~1 SYS Switches the display setting of the [INPUT @] 1 Yes
mode button button.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting 8744 Switchover of pop-up 1 0~1 SYS Switches the pop-up display during scanning 1
mode display during scanning 0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System User interface 8745 Enable/Disable setting of 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether part of the cookie, password, and 1
mode EWB history form data of user who logs in to EWB is saved or
not.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Network 8746 Port number setting of 162 1~65535 NIC Sets the port number of destination 10 for sending 12
mode destination 10 for sending SNMP trap. If the port is used when using the real
trap time log notification function, change the port
number.
08 Setting System User interface 8747 Switchover of screen 0 0~1 SYS Switches screen transition at job end of self- 1
mode transition at self-copying copying.
0: Traditional
1: New
08 Setting System User interface 8748 Input of department code at 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not required 1
mode user authentication 1: Required
08 Setting System Network 8749 User authentication by 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode logon information to domain 1: Enabled
(external authentication) * When this code is enabled, 08-8774 is
automatically disabled.
08 Setting System General 8750 Time to wait for print image 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the drum idling is executed or not 1
mode when the waiting for print image occurred. If there
is the stain on the back side of the paper, set the
value of this code to "1". When the value is set to
"1", the number of times the equipment stops
printing may increase.
0: Waiting is enabled (8 sec.)
1: Waiting is disabled (0 sec.)
08 Setting System Maintenance 8752 Switchover of display of 0 0~1 SYS Specifies the contents of the message displayed 1 Yes
mode notice on the control panel on the control panel when the time to replace the
when the time to replace the unit has come.
unit has come 0: Contact the service engineer for replacement
1: Replacement by user
08 Setting System General 8754 Output of error sheet at 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode reception of PDL data not 1: Enabled
supported * This code is not supported by 20/25ppm model.
08 Setting System Maintenance Notification of 8755 Enable/Disable setting 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 Yes
mode remaining 1: Enabled
amount of toner
08 Setting System Maintenance Notification of 8756 0 Remaining amount at first 25 0~100 SYS 0 to 100% 4 Yes
mode remaining notification
amount of toner
08 Setting System Maintenance Notification of 8756 1 Notification interval 10 1~25 SYS 1 to 25% 4 Yes
mode remaining
amount of toner

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting LED head/Main 8757 Cleaning button 2 0~2 SYS 0: Not displayed 1 Yes
mode charger 1: Displayed (USER FUNCTIONS -> USER)
2: Displayed (USER FUNCTIONS -> ADMIN)
08 Setting System User interface Card reader 8758 Overwriting of login at 0 0~1 SYS Switches the enable/disable setting for the function 1 Yes
mode authentication to overwrite the login information at the card
authentication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Option 8759 Batch setting for HDD SYS Executes the batch setting for the optional HDD 3
mode installation when installing it.
08 Setting System Option 8760 Batch setting for SYS When disconnecting HDD, revert the settings to 3
mode disconnecting HDD the default settings.
08 Setting System General 8761 Retention of print (spooling) 0 0~1 SYS Use this code to retain and obtain the print data 1 Yes
mode data (spooling data) if problem occurs. After obtaining
the data, be sure to disable the setting.
0: Disabled (print data is deleted)
1: Enabled (print data is retained)
08 Setting System Maintenance Display of 8762 0 K 0 0~100 SYS 0 to 100% 14
mode remaining
amount of toner
(for
RDMS/MMDT)
08 Setting System Maintenance Display of 8762 1 C 0 0~100 SYS 0 to 100% 14
mode remaining
amount of toner
(for
RDMS/MMDT)
08 Setting System Maintenance Display of 8762 2 M 0 0~100 SYS 0 to 100% 14
mode remaining
amount of toner
(for
RDMS/MMDT)
08 Setting System Maintenance Display of 8762 3 Y 0 0~100 SYS 0 to 100% 14
mode remaining
amount of toner
(for
RDMS/MMDT)
08 Setting System User interface 8763 Notification setting for thick 1 0~1 SYS If thick paper is set to the 1st drawer, this code sets 1 Yes
mode paper whether the notification to set the thick paper to the
drawer is displayed or not when the drawer is
opened.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System Network 8771 Account setting for access 0 0~1 SYS 0: Setting of Remote1 is used 1
mode to Home Directory 1: Setting of Remote1 and Remote2 is used

e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
08 Setting System Network 8774 Password authentication of 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the user authentication for network 1
mode print job printing/FAX/InternetFAX using the user
information and password input on the printer
driver is enabled or disabled. When this setting is
enabled, the setting of 08-8749 is automatically
disabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Network PIN code 8775 PIN code authentication 0 0~2 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode setting at user authentication 1: PIN code
2: Card+PIN code
08 Setting System Network PIN code 8776 Logging setting of PIN code 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1
mode 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Network PIN code 8777 Attribute value setting of eBMUserPI SYS Attribute name of PIN code 11
mode LDAP PIN authentication N Maximum 32 characters (ASCII).
server 1
server 2
server 3
08 Setting System Network PIN code 8780 Prioritized authentication 1 1~3 SYS Sets the prioritized authentication server to be 1
mode server searched.
08 Setting System User interface Screen setting 8781 Default setting of print 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled (The setting of 08-9236 is used) 1
mode screen when USB is 1: USB print screen
inserted
08 Setting System General Interval setting Transition to 8782 For fax 15 15~600 SYS Sets the interval to shift to Super Sleep again after 1 Yes
mode Super Sleep

Toshiba 2050C 2550C 2551C Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Toshiba 2050C 2550C 2551C Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Toshiba 2050C 2550C 2551C Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4. Important Service Parts for Safety

[1] Identification label

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

1.1 Main Feature of this equipment 1

• Adopting of LED for a new exposure lamp to scan originals

• Adopting of new exposure LED printer head

• An IC chip is mounted to the toner cartridge

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

Model name Alias

Type Desktop type

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

[1] Copy specifications

Storage capacity Memory is full

[ 2 ] First copy time

20ppm Black Approx. 8.2 sec.

[3] Copy speed (Copies/min.)

[ 3-1 ] Plain paper

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

* “-” means “Not acceptable”.

[ 3-2 ] Thick 1/Thick 2

* “-” means “Not acceptable”.

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

* “-” means “Not acceptable”.

[4] System copy speed

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Supported Page Description 20ppm/25ppm: PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS

Scanning speed Color / Black / 25 sheets/min. (600 x 600 dpi)

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

[1] Internet FAX transmission

Resolution TX Resolution Standard (8 x 3.85),

[2] Internet FAX receiving

Format of receive attachment TIFF-FX (Profile S, F, J)

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Category Item Unit SSD HDD *1

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

Compatibility Super G3, G3 (ITU-T.30)

e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C © 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Unpacking/Setup instruction 1 set

Operator’s manual 1 set 2

Warranty sheet 1 pc. (for NAD/NAH)

Rubber plug (large) 2 pcs.

Developer material (Y, M, C, K) Developer material is pre-filled in

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

Antenna e-BRIDGE ID Gate

Damp Heater Kit IP Sec Enabler

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2012-2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2050C/2051C/2550C/2551C

Arm Document Feeder (RADF) Original Cover

Harness kit for

2nd Line for FAX Unit